Ibeatb's  flfcobern  language  Series 


A  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 


FOR 


Scboola  ant>  Colleges 


BASED    ON    THE 


PUBLIC  SCHOOL  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 

OF 
A.    L.   MEISSNER,   M.A.,    PH.D.,   D.LiT. 

PROFESSOR  OF  MODERN  LANGUAGES  IN  QUEEN'S  COLLEGE,  BELFAST 
BY 

EDWARD   S.    JOYNES,   M.A. 

PROFESSOR  OF  MODERN  LANGUAGES  IN  SOUTH  CAROLINA  COLLEGE 


BOSTON,  U.  S.  A. 

D.   C.   HEATH  &  CO.,  PUBLISHERS 
1908 


' 


COPYRIGHT,  1887,  1898  AND  1904, 
BY  D.  C.   HEATH  &  COMPANY. 


-- 


PREFACE. 


THIS  book  is  based,  by  arrangement  with  the  author  and  the 
original  publishers,  upon  the  "Public  School  Grammar,"  by 
Dr.  A.  L.  MEISSNER,  of  Queen's  College,  Belfast  (1885),  which 
has  attained  great  popularity  in  the  United  Kingdom. 

In  the  present  book  the  material  thus  furnished  has  been 
freely  used  and,  where  occasion  seemed  to  require,  freely 
modified.  The  changed  title  will,  to  a  great  extent,  explain 
the  scope  of  such  modifications.  The  term  "  Public  School 
Grammar"  would  seem  to  restrict  the  original  design  to 
purely  elementary  work.  In  this  book  the  attempt  has  been 
made  to  carry  forward  the  same  method  so  as  to  include  also 
college  and  university  study  —  in  a  word,  to  meet  the  wants 
of  students  of  every  grade  —  up  to  the  point  where  the  demand 
arises  for  the  higher  study  of  historical  and  scientific  gram- 
mar. This  higher  study,  let  it  be  said  at  once,  is  not  in- 
cluded in  the  scope  of  the  present  work. 

In  carrying  out  this  design  there  has  been  on  the  one  hand 
much  condensation,  and  on  the  other  much  expansion,  of  the 
original  material.  The  changes  in  Parts  I.  and  II.  have  been 
both  in  detail  and  in  arrangement ;  yet  the  subject-matter  re- 
mains essentially  the  same.  The  Syntax  (Part  III.)  has  been 
almost  wholly  rewritten,  upon  a  scale  more  comprehensive 
than  that  of  the  original  work,  to  meet  the  more  enlarged 
scope  of  the  present  book.  Just  what  should  be  here  in- 
cluded, and  what  omitted,  is  a  point  on  which  perhaps  no  two 
would  agree.  The  writer,  guided  by  his  own  experience,  has 
sought  to  include  all  that  might  be  important  for  the  student, 

iii 

313171 


IV  PREFACE. 

and  nothing  more.  A  comprehensive  chapter  on  the  Order 
of  Words,  a  brief  summary  of  the  Relation  of  German  to 
English,  an  alphabetical  list  of  Strong  and  Irregular  Verbs, 
and  Vocabularies,  an  Appendix,  and  Indexes  have  also  been 
added.  It  is  hoped  that  the  occasional  Suggestions  to 
Teachers  will  be  pardoned,  even  when  not  needed  or  fol- 
lowed ;  and,  more  especially,  that  the  large  use  made  of 
parallels  and  contrasts  from  English  grammar  will  be  accept- 
able to  those  who,  like  the  editor,  have  found  that,  with  most 
students,  one  of  the  chief  obstacles  to  progress  in  German  is 
the  want  of  a  sound  knowledge  of  English. 

In  the  preparation '  of  this  edition  the  editor  has  availed 
himself  of  the  usual  well-known  German  sources.  Outside  of 
these  he  acknowledges  with  pleasure  that  obligation  to  Whit- 
ney's and  Brandt's  German  Grammars  which  no  American 
scholar  could  deny.  Many  helpful  examples  have  been  taken 
from  Tiarks'  German  Grammar. 

The  personal  obligations  of  the  editor  are  larger  than  he 
could  briefly  express.  Many  scholars  have  kindly  aided  with 
valuable  suggestions.  Where  so  many  deserve  mention  it  is 
difficult  to  discriminate ;  but  special  acknowledgment  is  due 
to  Prof.  Van  der  Smissen,  of  Toronto  ;  Prof.  Sheldon,  of 
Harvard ;  Prof.  Primer,  of  the  College  of  Charleston ;  Prof. 
Super,  of  Dickinson  College ;  and  particularly  to  Prof.  Fay, 
of  Tufts  College,  and  Prof.  Harrison,  of  Washington  and  Lee 
University,  who  have  read  the  entire  proofs  with  painstaking 
and  helpful  care.  Dr.  Meissner's  own  cordial  sympathy  has 
also  been  felt  at  all  times  as  a  grateful  encouragement. 

For  himself,  the  editor  may  say,  in  conclusion,  that  the 
labor  of  this  edition  has  been  hardly  less — in  some  directions, 
indeed,  greater  —  than  would  have  been  required  for  an 
original  work ;  and  it  has  been  performed  in  the  midst  of 
constantly  engrossing  occupation.  '  For  this  he  asks  no  in- 
dulgence, but  only  that  the  book  be  judged  with  reference  to 


PREFACE.  V 

its  avowed  purpose :  not  as  a  scientific  or  exhaustive  exposi- 
tion of  the  German  language,  but  as  a  working  grammar, 
based  on  the  experience  of  the  class-room,  and  aiming  to 
present,  in  simple  form  and  within  moderate  limits,  what  is 
necessary  for  the  use  of  pupils  and  teachers  in  the  ordinary 
school  and  college  study  of  German.  If  it  fulfill  this  modest 
design,  there  will  be  ample  room  for  its  usefulness. 
SOUTH  CAROLINA  COLLEGE,  August  15,  1887. 


NOTE.  —  The  method  of  using  the  book  will  vary,  of  course,  with  the 
plan  of  instruction  and  the  views  of  individual  teachers.  For  ordinary 
purposes,  however,  the  editor  would  suggest  that  Part  I.  should  be  first 
gone  through,  with  the  exercises  from  German  to  English  only,  and  that 
all  translation  from  English  to  German  be  deferred  until  the  review  is  be- 
gun, and  the  student  is  prepared  to  read  an  independent  text;  and, 
generally,  that  this  independent  reading  should  be  begun  as  early  as 
possible,  according  to  the  grade  of  different  classes  of  pupils.  This  first 
study  and  the  review,  with  the  reverse  exercises,  of  Part  I.,  will  constitute 
a  fair  first  year's  course  in  German,  sufficiently  complete  in  itself,  for 
younger  pupils. 


IN  preparing  successive  revisions  I  have  carefully  taken  into  ac- 
count all  the  suggestions  kindly  contributed  by  others,  as  well  as  those 
found  in  my  own  teaching.  At  various  points  important  corrections 
and  additions  have  been  made,  and  no  pains  have  been  spared  to 
make  the  book  permanently  worthy  of  the  favor  with  which  it  has 
been  received.  I  beg  leave  also  to  add  : 

1.  While  the  book  is  not  intended  expressly  for  the  oral  or  "  natural " 
method,  yet  its  Exercises  may  be  equally  so  used,  and  like  exercises  may 
be  indefinitely  extended  from  the  same  materials. 

2.  On  the  other  hand  it  is  not  implied  that  all  the  Exercises  shall  be 
used  with  all  pupils.    Range  was  left,  purposely,  for  subdivision,  selection, 
and  review,  according  to  the  wants  of  classes.     I  should  not  need  to  add 
that  the  Exercises  are  intended  not  for  literature,  but  purely  for  the 
application  of  the  grammatical  forms. 

3.  Likewise  the  Paradigms  are,  for  convenience,  given  entire,  without 


VI  SUPPLEMENTARY    PREFACE. 

implying,  however,  that  they  must  needs  be  so  learned  at  once  —  or,  indeed, 
at  all.    Of  this  —  as  of  all  the  details  of  method  —  each  teacher  will  judge. 

4.  I  beg  leave  to  repeat  and  emphasize  the  suggestions  made  in  the 
Note  to  the  first  preface,  both  as  to  the  Exercises  and  as  to  the  early  use 
of  an  independent  text.     By  a  judicious  selection  of  leading  topics  the 
way  may  be  prepared  for  such  reading  in  from  twelve  to  twenty  lessons, 
according  to  the  grade  of  the  pupils. 

5.  I  desire  especially  to  ask  the  attention  of  teachers  to  the  reasons 
given,  in  the  introduction  to  the  Vocabulary,  for  not  giving  the  inflections 
(in  a  grammatical  vocabulary)  where  these  are  perfectly  regular. 

I  would  again  repeat  my  thanks  to  the  many  friends  —  teachers 
and  others  —  who  by  their  intelligent  criticism  have  helped  me  to  the 
correction  and  improvement  of  this  book; — especially  to  Mr.  Orlando 
F.  Lewis  of  Tufts  College,  for  his  excellent  (two)  series  of  "Alternative 
English-German  Exercises,"  with  which  the  Grammar  may  be  used 
to  better  advantage  by  successive  classes.  —  Also  to  Dr.  C.  F.  Kayser 
of  New  York,  for  the  skillful  "  Supplementary  Exercises  "  now  bound 
with  the  book  ;  and  to  Professor  Otto  Heller,  Professor  Hugo  Schil- 
ling, Dr.  H.  P.  Jones  and  Dr.  G.  B.  Viles,  for  important  additions  and 
corrections. 

In  revising  the  present  reprint  (1904)  of  the  entire  text 
from  new  plates,  advantage  has  been  taken  of  the  opportunity 
to  introduce  (besides  the  latest  orthography)  such  occasional 
improvements  as  seemed  to  be  practicable,  without  impairing 
the  essential  integrity  of  the  book  or  causing  confusion  in  its 
use  along  with  earlier  editions.  The  present  is,  therefore,  a 
distinctly  new  and,  it  is  hoped,  improved  edition. 

E.  S.  J. 

SOUTH  CAROLINA  COLLEGE,  April,  1904. 


CONTENTS. 


PART  I.    ORTHOGRAPHY  AND  ACCIDENCE. 

PAGE 

ALPHABET „ .  i 

PRONUNCIATION. 3 

ACCENTUATION 12 

USE  OF  CAPITALS 15 

LESSON 

I.     The  Definite  Article.     First  Class  of  Strong  Declension        .  19 

II.     The  Indefinite  Article.     Second  Class  of  Strong  Declension  24 
'  III.     Declension  of  biefer,  etc.     Third  Class  of  Strong  Declension. 

Present  Ind.  of  fetn 28 

IV.     The  Weak  Declension.     Past  Ind.  of  fein       ....  32 
V.     Peculiarities  in  Declension.     Perfect  and  Pluperfect  of  fein  .  36 
VI.     Declension  of  Proper  Names.     Future  of  fein         .    '    .         .40 
VII.     Declension  of  Foreign  and  Compound  Nouns.     Future  Per- 
fect of  fein 42 

Synopsis  of  Declension  of  Nouns  ......  46 

Gender  of  Nouns 47 

VIII.     Strong  Declension  of  Adjectives.     Present  of  f)df>en       .         .  48 

IX.     Weak  Declension  of  Adjectives.     Past  of  f)d&en     ...  51 
X.     Mixed  Declension  of  Adjectives.     Perfect  and  Pluperfect  of 

Ijdfcen 55 

XI.     Comparison  of  Adjectives.     Future  of  Ijdben          ...  60 
XII.     The  Predicate  Superlative.    Future  Perfect  of  fjafcen.    Prepo- 
sitions governing  the  Dative 64 

XIII.  The  Auxiliary  Verbs 67 

XIV.  The  Auxiliary  I)dben.    First  Rules  of  Position.    Prepositions 

governing  the  Accusative;  and  Dative  or  Accusative         .  71 

XV.     The  Auxiliary  fein.     Personal  Pronouns.     Address        .         .  78 
XVI.     The  Auxiliary    Verb  toerben.      Contraction  of  Article   with 

Prepositions.     Possessives    .......  85 


Vlll 


CONTENTS. 


LESSON 

XVII. 

XVIII. 
XIX. 

XX. 

XXI. 
XXII. 

XXIII. 

XXIV. 

XXV. 

XXVI. 

XXVII. 

XXVIII. 

XXIX. 

XXX. 

XXXI. 

XXXII. 

XXXIII. 

XXXIV. 

XXXV. 

XXXVI. 


Rules  of  Position.     De- 


Interrogatives     . 
First  Class  of  Strong 


91 
99 

104 


Weak  Conjugation  of  Verbs. 

monstratives 

Weak  Conjugation,  continued. 
Strong  Conjugation  of  Verbs. 
Verbs,  First  Subdivision     . 
First  Class  of  Strong  Verbs,  Second  Subdivision.  Rela- 
tive Pronouns      .         .         .         .  .         .         .no 

First  Class  of  Strong  Verbs,  Third  Subdivision    .         .     115 
First  Class  of  Strong  Verbs,  Fourth  Subdivision.     In- 
definites      .         .         .         .        ^         .         .         .         .119 

Second  Class  of  Strong  Verbs.  First  Subdivision.  Sec- 
ond Subdivision 122 

Third  Class  of  Strong  Verbs.     First  Subdivision.    Sec- 
ond Subdivision.     Reflexive  Verbs    .         .         .         .126 
Mixed  Conjugation  and  Irregular  Verbs.     Synopsis  of 

Strong  Verbs 131 

Auxiliary  Verbs  of  Mood       .         .         .         .  .136 

The  Passive  Voice.  Use  of  the  Passive  .  .  .  141 
Inseparable  Verbs.  Spurious  Prepositions  .  .  .146 

Separable  Verbs .150 

Variable  Verb-Prefixes.  Compound  Prefixes  .  .153 
Impersonal  Verbs.  Use  of  f)dben  and  feilt  .  .  .156 
Cardinal  Numerals.  Expressions  of  Time  .  .  .160 
Ordinal  Numerals.  Dates,  Measures,  etc.  .  .  .164 

Adverbs. 167 

Conjunctions.    Interjections 171 

*Drder  of  Words:  Summary  and  Synopsis     .         .         .177 


PART  II.    DERIVATION  AND  COMPOSITION. 

XXXVII.  Derivation  of  Verbs 186 

XXXVIII.  Composition  of  Verbs .190 

XXXIX.  Composition  of  Verbs  (continued)          .         .         .         .  195 

XL.  Derivation  of  Nouns 198 

XLI.  Derivation  of  Nouns  (continued) 202 

XLII.  Composition  of  Nouns 206 

XLIII.  Derivation  of  Adjectives  and  Adverbs  .         .         .         .  210 

XLIV.  Composition  of  Adjectives  and  Adverbs        .         .         .  216 

XLV.  Relation  of  German  and  English :  Summary         .         .  220 


CONTENTS. 


IX 


PART  III.    SYNTAX. 

LESSON  PAGK 

XLVI.     The  Articles 229 

XLVII.     Additional  Remarks  on  Nouns       .         .         .         .         .233 
XLVIII.     The  Cases:  Nominative.     Genitive       .         .         .         .238 

XLIX.     The  Genitive  (continued) 241 

L.     The  Dative 244 

LI.     The  Dative  (continued) :  248 

LII.     The  Accusative 251 

Prepositions  with  Cases.     Summary.         .         .         .  254 

LIII.     Adjectives 255 

LIV.     Personal  and  Possessive  Pronouns         ....  260 

LV.     Demonstrative  and  Interrogative  Pronouns  .         .         .  263 

LVI.     Relative  and  Indefinite  Pronouns 267 

LVII.     Subject  and  Predicate.     Tenses  of  the  Indicative          .  271 

LVIII.     The  Subjunctive.     The  Conditional       ....  275 

Modal  Idioms.     Summary 280 

LIX.     The  Infinitive 283 

LX.     Infinitive  Equivalents.     The  Participles        .         .         .  287 

LXI.     Adverbs.     Adverb  Idioms.     Adverb  Clauses         .         .  293 

Repetition :  Summary 299 

Idiom:  Summary 300 

CONTINUOUS  PASSAGES,  ENGLISH-GERMAN        .        .        .        .        .  302 

ALPHABETICAL  LIST  OF  STRONG  AN.D  IRREGULAR  VERBS.        .        .  307 

ORTHOGRAPHY  :  THE  NEW  RULES 323 

VOCABULARIES 325 

APPENDIX:  NOUNS;  PREPOSITIONS 367 

INDEX 379 

GERMAN  SCRIPT 385 

ADDITIONAL  EXERCISES 397 


§  1] 


PART    I. 

ORTHOGRAPHY  AND  ACCIDENCE. 


ALPHABET. 

i.  The  German  alphabet  consists,  like  the  English,  of 
twenty-six  letters. 

(a)  The  type  in  which  German  books  are  usually  printed  is 
a  variety  of  the  Roman  alphabet,  and  is  that  form  of  it  which 
was  used  by  the  earlier  printers  throughout  Europe.  The 
Roman  character  called  in  Germany  the  "  Latin,"  is  used  in 
scientific  works,  and  is  gradually,  though  slowly,  superseding 
the  old  "black-letter."* 

GERMAN    LETTERS.        ROMAN    LETTERS.          GERMAN    NAMES. 


91,  a 

A,  a 

ah. 

33,  fc 

B,   b 

bay. 

<£,  c 

C,   c 

tsay. 

$,  b 

D,  d 

day. 

(£,  c 

E,  e 

ay. 

^   •? 
of  T 

F,  f 

eff. 

®f  9 

.G,;g 

gay. 

Jp,  Ij 

H,  h 

hah. 

3,  i 

I,    i 

ee. 

3,  i 

J>    J 

yot. 

*  In  like  manner  the  Latin  script  (our  ordinary  English  handwriting)  is 
coming  into  more  general  use,  and  is  universally  understood  in  Germany. 
It  may  be  left  to  the  discretion  of  the  teacher,  to  allow  this  to  be  used  in 
German  exercises  or  to  require  the  German  script  —  at  any  rate  until  the 
student  has  acquired  some  familiarity  with  the  printed  language.  A  copy  of 
the  German  script,  with  reading  exercises,  is  given  at  the  end  of  the  book. 


ALPHABET.  [§  2 


t,    f  K,  k 

2,     {  L,  1  ell. 

9Jt,  m  M,  m 

91,  n  N,  n 

D,  o  O,o 

*r     J>  P,     p 

Q,  q  Q,  q 

9J,    r  R,   r 

®f    ff  g  S,    s 

£,    t  T,  t 

It,    uf  U,  u 

®f   to  V,  v 

2Bf  tof  W,  w 

Sf    J  X,  x  ix. 

g)f    1)  Y,   y  ipsilon. 

Bf    5  Z'   z  /^- 

The  "round"  §  is  used  only  at  the  end  of  a  word  or  syl- 
lable. 

2.   (a)  The  following  modified  vowels  are  used  : 

$,  a  Df  o  lir  ii 

(b)  and  the  diphthongs  : 

5Ur  at      (£if  ei      (£11,  eu      5(u,  ait      5(u,  du 
(^)    and    the    consonantal   compounds  —  digraphs   or   tri- 
graphs  :  d),  d  (for  If),  ng,  pff  ^r  qur  fdj,  ^  (fs  for  fg)f  if),  g 
(ti  for  88). 

Several  letters,  very  much  alike,  must  be  carefully  noted  : 

$r$;  <£,@;  S,  «T?riR;  f,f;  n,u;  r,  j. 

NOTE.  —  For  an  exercise,  see  p.  6.     Nouns  begin  with  capitals. 
*  Pronounce  as  ^r  in  error. 


§  6]  PRONUNCIATION.  3 

PRONUNCIATION. 

Examples  should  be  dictated  in  advance.  Accent  first  syllable,  unless 
otherwise  marked. 

Vowels. 

3.  The  vowels  are  either  short  or  long. 

(a)  A  vowel  followed  by  a  double  consonant  is  short. 
As  :  fjafte,  ftellen,  f oHcn. 

(U]  A  vowel  is  usually  short  before  two  consonants ; 
but  a  long  root-sound  is  retained  before  affixes.  As  :  balb, 
$t(b,  bimt  (short) ;  but :  (oMe,  S£ag^,  Sabbat  (long). 

(<:)  A  double  vowel  is  long,  with  the  same  sound  as 
the  simple  long  vowel ;  as,  .Jpaar,  2ket,  SBoot. 

(d)  A  vowel  followed  by  f)  in  the  same  syllable  is  long ; 
as,  ^Ifin,  fet)r,  iljm,  ©ofyt. 

(e)  A  vowel  is  long  when  ending  a  syllable  ;  as,  Xa-ge3, 
be-ten,  lo-ben ;  and  usually  before  one  consonant ;  as,  gab, 
ben,  £ob,  2pt 

NOTE.  —  Except  in  unaccented  affixes  (§  53),  and  in  a  few  common 
monosyllables ;  as,  ba£,  be3,  e3,  etc. 

4.  51,  Q,  sounds  like  a  in  father.    Long  :  gab,  nafym,  91  at; 
short :  gaK,  farm,  rannte. 

5.  @,  e,  long,  sounds  like  English  ey  in  /^j;  as,  gef)tr 
SD^e^I,  fel)t,  «^eerr  and  in  the  first  syllable  of  beten,  geben,  jeber. 
Short,  like  short  e  in  set;  as,  bemt,  fyeK,  f(^neEr  and  in  the  first 
syllable  of  ftellen,  felten,  rennen. 

In  unaccented  final  syllables  it  has  the  obscure  sound 
as  in  over  —  nearly  the  sound  of  u  in  but;  as  in  the  last 
syllable  of  lobte,  lobtert,  SDfatro'fe,  SUfatro'fen  —  where  the 
sound  of  e  in  set  is  especially  to  be  avoided. 

6.  Sr  if   long,  has  the  sound  of  i  in  machine,  or  ee  in 
seen;  as,  mtrf  btrr  tfym,  3ge(.     Short  t  sounds  like  i  in  pin; 


4  MODIFIED    VOWELS.  [§  ^ 

as,  btft,  ift,  ft(5en.  The  long  sound  of  i  is,  however,  generally 
represented  by  the  combination  ie;  as,  bte,  Stebe,  3teb.  3 
is  never  doubled. 

7.  £),  o,  long,  sounds  like  o  in  hold;    as,  9#oo3,  U)ol)(, 
lofen.     Short,  nearly  like  o  in   off;   as,   ®ott,  fott,  glo^en. 
Never  the  sound  of  o  in  ^<?/,  do,  done,  etc. 

8.  It,  it,  long,   has  the   sound   of   oo  in   &?0/:   gut,  llf)r. 
Short,  has  the  sound  of  oo  in  good:  ^>unb,  fummen.     Never 
the  sound  of  ?/  in  but,  muse,  etc.     U  is  never  doubled. 

9.  9),  t),  is  found  only  in  a  few  foreign  words  and  has 
the   same   sound  as  i.     But  some  prefer  the  sound  of   it 
(§  13.)    As:  Xrjrcmn',  Ityrifrf). 

Modified  Vowels. 

10.  The  vowels  a,  0,  it,  and  the  diphthong  ait,  are  modi- 
fied, that  is,  they  are  changed  into  ti,  i),  it,  tilt,  respectively. 
This  change  was  produced  originally  by  an  i  sound  in  the 
following    syllable,   which   now  often  appears  as    e.     For 
instance:  §anb,  §anbe;  ©otyn,   ©flfjne;  gefunb',  gefimb'er; 
£)cw3,  |)du)er. 

(a)  This  vowel  modification,  known  as  Umlaut,  is  a  most 
important  process  in  German  inflection  and  derivation,  as 
will  appear  hereafter. 

(£)  It  was  customary  to  express  the  modification  of  the  vowel 
by  a  small  e,  printed  in  the  case  of  capitals  after,  and  in  the 
case  of  small  letters  above,  the  original  vowel.  The  small  e  was 
gradually  reduced  to  a  couple  of  strokes  or  dots  over  the  letters. 
According  to  the  modern  spelling,  only  this  latter  mode  is  to 
be  used. 

NOTE,  —  In  English  transliteration  the  modification  is  represented  by 
e;  as,  Maetzner,  Goethe,  Kuehner,  Mueller. 

11.  5le,  5t,  ct,  long,  is  between  a  in  hale  and  a  in  hare: 


§   l6]  DIPHTHONGS. 


f  prtigen,  ntafjen.     Short  a,  nearly  like  the  English  e  in 
set:  fyat-te,  23ac!er,  banner. 

12.  Ce,  D,  #,  sounds  like  the  French  en  in  />?/,  peu; 
but  the  sound  cannot  be  exactly  represented  in  English. 
Place  the  tongue  as  if  to  sound  a  in  fate;  round  the  lips 
as   if  to  sound  o  in  so.     Long  in  :  ©ofyne,  (Strome,  fd)on. 
Short  in  :  fonnert,  offnen,  fcrter. 

NOTE.  —  The  English  sounds  in  burn,  burnt,  are  perhaps  the  nearest 
equivalents  for  long  and  short  b  ;  but  the  German  sound  is  more  rounded. 

13.  lie,  U,  ii,  sounds  like  the  French  u  in  du,  plus.     This 
sound  also  cannot  be  represented  in  English.     Place  the 
tongue  as  if  to  sound  ee  in  see;  round  the  lips  as  if  to 
sound  u  in  rule.     Long  in  :  §ute,  @rf)ii(er,  libel     Short  in  : 
§fitte,  fflllen,  Surfte. 

14.  9leu,  Sttt,  fill,  sounds  like  the  English  oi  in  oil,  and  is 
always  long  :  trcmmen,  ^rftuter,  SBaiime. 

15.  The  modified  vowels  are  never  doubled  ;  hence  nouns 
which  have  a  double  vowel  are  spelled  with  only  one  vowel, 
when  modified  ;  as,  @aa(,  (Sale  ;  §aar, 


NOTE.  —  It  is  important  to  remember  that  only  a,  o,  u,  au,  are  'capable 
of  this  modification  (Umlaut).  These  are  known  as  back  (or  low)  vowels; 
all  others,  as  front  (or  high)  vowels. 

Diphthong's. 

16.  The  diphthong  ail  has  been  included  above. 

The  digraph  ie  is  not  properly  a  diphthong,  and  only  repre- 
sents the  long  sound  of  t  (§  6).  When  occurring  in  unac- 
cented final  syllables,  in  a  few  foreign  words,  i  before  e  sounds 
like  7;  as  ©panien,  Sinte  (as  e  in  linear)  --  usually  Latin 
words.  So,  gairti'tte,  Sftate'rie,  Qix'lte,  (Latin); 
$oeficf,  9Jkrief,  (not  Latin). 


CONSONANTS.  [§  IJ 

17.  5lt,  at,  is  pronounced  like  ai  in  aisle:  9#ai,  ©aite,  «f)airt. 

18.  (£i,  et,  is  pronounced  like  ai :  $Iei,  !ein,  ^eiterfett. 
The  old  forms  at),  et),  are  now  rarely  used. 

19.  2Itt,  ail,  is  pronounced  like  the  English  ou  in  found: 
,  laufen,  l)erau<§. 

20.  (Suf  eit,  is  pronounced  like  ail ;  that  is,  like  English  oi 
in  oil:  Xraiime,  (Saule,  fauft ;  (Me,  fjeiilen,  treii. 

All  diphthongs  are  long. 

EXERCISE  IN  VOWEL  PRONUNCIATION. 

(Consonants  as  in  English.} 

1.  Monosyllables:  9fol,  2lrt,  Sift,  ffiaft,  fetl,  nuttf  S«cftf  8attf 
SIu6,  SHatt,  Oft,  Suft,  O^r,  Utjr,  i^m,  big,  biinn,  CI,  tief,  bid, 
nett,  na§,  9^a()I,  biimm,  ratm,  Craun,  frei,  ^?Ieef  8ter,  ®la§,  treii, 
au§,  mu§,  lief,  trin!f  Xrunl,  £oo§,  Io§,  baar,  ®ern,  toll,  laum, 
§ain,  @t§,  §cu,  §ut,  mir,  9to<f,  mel;r,  ber,  bie,  bent,  ben,  bemt. 

2.  With  accent  on  first  syllable:  Gttbe,  aber,  alter,  rufen,  baben. 
Saber,  Opfer,  Ofen,  Ofen,  untev,  iiber,  §titte,  Gutter,  flitter, 
gaEe,  bauen,  S3aume,  (Sfet,  effen,  Stebe,  Ueben,  (Ster,  iibel,  Better, 
§ollef  §iille,  i0?t)rte,  -ftebet,  obe,  auger,  gute§,  bittct,  fja'tte,  TOne, 
t^nen,  giitte,  Better,  §aibe,  §bren,  §ofe,  freuen,  geben,  metite,  i^r, 
euer. 

3.  Short  vowels  in  monosyllables :  an,  ba§,  be§,  e§,  bin,  ^at, 
bi§,  in,  ^tn,  man,  mit,  urn. 

NOTE.  —  These  exercises  should  be  continued  at  will  by  the  teacher, 
until  the  sounds  of  the  vowels  and  diphthongs  are  perfectly  familiar. 

Consonants. 

Only  those  sounds  will  be  given  which  depart  from  the 
usual  English  pronunciation. 

21.  The  sonant  b,  b,  at  the  end  of  a  word  or  syllable,  or 
preceding  a  consonant,  terminate  in  the  surd  sounds  of  /,  t, 


§  26]  CONSONANTS.  7 

respectively ;  as,  ab,  ®rab,  gelb,  abgebert,  gefyabt ;  mttb,  2Ibenb, 
^inblem  (as  if  abp,  milbt,  etc.). 

22.  (£,  c,  which  now  occurs  only  in  a  few  foreign  words, 
is  pronounced  like  ts  (German  j),  before  the  vowels  e,  t,  t), 
or  a,  o ;  as,  (Eafar,  cebern,  (£t)pru3.     Elsewhere  like  k:  as, 
(Sato,  (Sober.,  (£icmbitt3. 

NOTE.  —  Most  words  formerly  written  with  c  are  now  written  with  f  or  5. 

23.  ($,  9,  initial,  and  when  doubled,  is  pronounced  like  g 
in  go,  get ;  as,  geben,  ge^gen,  3tfQ99e-     But  at  tne  enc*  °f  a 
word  or  syllable,  or  before  another  consonant,  some  authori- 
ties give  a  guttural  or  palatal  spirant  (like  rf),  §  33)  ;  others 
allow  this  sound  only  in  final  -ig,  retaining  elsewhere  the 
initial  g  sound  ;  others  give  the  final  g  a  sound  like  gl  (§  21 ). 
There  is  great  diversity  of  usage. 

(a)  When  an  inflection  is  added  to  a  final  g,  some  authori- 
ties retain  the  aspirate  sound  ;  but  others  give  the  initial  g 
sound.     Let  the  examples  be  carefully  practiced  with  the 
teacher ;  as,  £ag,  23afgr   Sftagb,   bog,   $rug,   Shieg, 

Xage,  balgen,  boge,  ^riige,  ®rtege,  $ontge. 

(b)  Both  g  and  !  are  sounded  before  rt ;  as,  ($nabe, 

24.  §,  f),  is  strongly  aspirated  at  the  beginning  of  a  word 
or  a  syllable ;  as,  §ammer,  §0(5,  metfterfyaft,  gcmtfjeit,  gefjor- 
fam.     Following  a  vowel  in  a  stem-syllable,  it  marks  a  long 
vowel,  but  is  not  heard  :  §o^e,  fefyen,  9?ct!)e,  toafjr,  fal). 

25.  X  j,  sounds  like  j  (consonant)  in^«/'as,  ja,  jebet. 

26.  9?f  r,  is  sounded  distinctly,  by  some  with  a  lingual, 
by  others  with  a  palatal  roll,  or  trill ;  as,  Dfab,  Gutter,  £tort, 
(Mitrt 

NOTE. —  Be  careful  not  to  slur  the  vowel  sounds  before  r,  as  in  Eng- 
lish her,  bird, fur,  etc.     As:  fjer,  £>irt,  gurt  —  each  vowel  clearly  sounded. 


8  CONSONANTAL    DIGRAPHS    AND    TRIGRAPHS.       [§  27 

27.  @,  f,  $,  has   the   surd   or  hissing   sound   only   when 
final,  doubled,  or   preceding    a    consonant  ;    as,  £)cm$>,  bte3, 
effett,  9faft.     Elsewhere  it  is  sonant,  like  a  soft  #  (see  §  21) 
or  s  in  desire;  as,  (Sotme,  $afe,  SBefen,  (Slafer,  bte)es>. 

28.  @,  f,  initial,  before  $  or  t,  is  by  the  best  authorities 
pronounced  with  a  sound  nearly  like  sh  (German  fd))  ;  as, 
ftmngen,  @{w(e  ;  fteljert,  (Stall. 

29.  23,  to,  occurs  in  German  words  mostly  at  the  begin- 
ning and  is  there  pronounced  like  the  English/:  SRater, 
tooll,  toter.     In  foreign  words,  or  following  a  vowel,  it  is 
pronounced  like  the    English   v:  $enus>,  Sftobem'ber,  bttoi- 
bie're,  ©fiatoe;  but  final,  always  like/:  kato,  relattto'. 

30.  SS,  tt),  is   pronounced  like  the   English   v;   except 
after  consonants,  especially  fd)  and  5,  when  it  has  a  sound 
intermediate  between  English  v  and  w:  tcoden,  SSerf,  tt)a^  ; 
5rt)i)d)enf  groet,  ©cfytoamm,  @c^tt)efter. 

31.  3^,  j,  has  the  sound  of  ks,  even  in  the  beginning 
of  a  word  :  ®mr.,  5ljt,  §eje,  Xerje^,  3Eenopl)on. 

32.  Sr  5'  always  has  the  sound  of  ts:  511,  $ief)ene 
f)et§en,  ,po(§  —  never  like  English  z. 


Consonantal  Digraphs  and  Trigraphs. 

33.  (Sf),  C^,  is  a  spirant,  which  has  two  different  sounds. 
It  has  a  harsher,  more  guttural  sound,  when  preceded  by 
the  vowels  a,  o,  it,  or  the  diphthong  cut  ;  but  a  softer,  more 
palatal  sound,  when  preceded  by  any  other  vowel  or 
diphthong,  or  by  the  liquids  I,  m,  n,  r.  Examples  of  the 
rough  guttural  c!)  :  SBad),  Sod),  S5it(i),  aud),  £ocf)ter.  Exam- 
ples of  the  soft  palatal  d)  :  id),  reid),  ried)en,  ftedjen,  £id)t, 
mondjer,  SMd),  gurdjt. 


§  4°]      CONSONANTAL    DIGRAPHS    AND    TRIGRAPHS.  9 

(a)  The  aspirate  sounds  of  g  are  similar.     (See  §  23). 

NOTE.  —  These  guttural,  or  palatal,  sounds  of  d)  and  Q  are  highly  char- 
acteristic of  German,  as  their  absence  is  characteristic  of  English.  They 
must  be  carefully  practiced.  Especially,  care  must  be  taken  to  avoid,  on  the 
one  hand,  the  sibilant  sound  of  sh  (jet)),  and,  on  the  other,  the  closed  sound 
of  f.  Thus :  Sad),  not  93afd)  nor  SacE ;  id),  not  ifd)  nor  irf ;  ®trd)e  not  Sirfdje. 

34.  d)3  is  pronounced  like  ks,  when  it  forms  part  of  the 
root  of  the  word,  as,  £)atf)3,  £udj3,  gurf)3,  3)ad)fe3,  gud)fe3, 
£iid)[e.     But  when  the  <§  is  inflectional,  or  belongs  to  the 
second  part  of  a  compound  or  derivative,  or  to  another 
word,  d)  has  its  proper  aspirate  pronunciation  (§  35).    As  : 
ba£  £)ad),  gen.  be3  3)ad)e3,  contracted  £)ad)3 ;  but :  burd)= 
fudjen ;  9tocfcfid)t ;  td)'3  for  id)  e3. 

35.  d  is  simply  a  double  k,  marking  a  preceding  short 
vowel :  guritd,  biidert,  briiden,  fteden. 

36.  ng  sounds  as  in  sing,  singer  —  not  as   in  finger: 
jung,  ftngert,  ^(tinge.     Similarly,  rtf;  as,  fan!,  ftnfen.     But 
when  in  distinct  word-elements,  the  letters  are  pronounced 
separately ;  as,  amgretfert,  an-flagen. 

NOTE.  —  But  ng  sounds  as  in  finger  in  some  proper  names;  as  ^ngo. 

37.  '$Pf,  pfr  is  a  quick  combination  of  the  sounds/  and/". 
As,  ^ferb,  «pfcfferf  ^fliig. 

38.  ^,  ^f  has  the  sound  of/:  ^ilofop^ic',  ^tlipp';  but 
is  now  used  only  in  foreign  words. 

39.  Oil,  qit,  is  pronounced  like  fit),  with  the  intermediate 
sound  of  ID,  as  §  30 :  Ouelle,  Quaf,  £Umrtierf. 

40.  @d),  fc^,  is  pronounced  like  the  English  sh:  @d)ifter, 
(Sd)iit5e,  fdjrauben,  gi|d^r  raufd^en. 

NOTE.  —  But,  like  d)3,  ng  above,  the  sounds  will  be  distinct  when  be- 
longing to  different  elements ;  as,  £>tiu£=d)en,  M3=d)en. 

41.  (3,  pronounced  ss,  is  written  always  instead  of  f3  at 
the  end  of  a  word.     When  not  final,  f}  stands  after  a  long 


10  DOUBLED    VOWELS    AND    CONSONANTS.  [§41 

vowel  or  diphthong;  the  double  ff  after  a  short  vowel 
(§  3  #);  but  £  always  before  a  consonant.  This  rule  is  im- 
portant in  inflected  and  derivative  forms.  As  :  giiJ3,  plural 
31%  pi.  Piffe;  Ijaffen,  f)a&te,  Jjftjjlidj,  etc. 


NOTE.  —  In  Roman  (English)  letters  ff  is  represented  by  ss  ;  fj  by  sz  ; 
but  also  by  ss  or  fs  —  with  some  diversity  of  usage. 

42.  Xfy  tf),  sounded  always  like  simple  t,  is  now  used 
only  in  foreign  words   and  proper  names;  as,   Slatfye'ber, 


NOTE.  —  Till  recently  tf)  was  used  before  a  long  vowel;  as,  £fjot,  tf)un; 
and  formerly  much  more  largely  ;  as,  Xfjier,  Xfjurm,  Sftittf),  ratfjen,  etc. 

43.  £,  pronounced  to,  stands  for  %%  after  a  short  vowel  ; 
as,  §ige  (fjetgen),  $pla£,  ploptf).  A  few  foreign  words  have 
55;  as, 


REMARK.  —  These  compounds,  except  as  expressly  mentioned,  count  as 
single  letters.     Hence  before  d),  fdj,  ng,  pf),  a  vowel  may  be  long  or  short. 


Doubled  Vowels  and  Consonants. 

§  At  this  point,  or  even  earlier  ',  the  study  of  the  grammar  proper  should  be 

begun  (§  71). 

44.  Doubled  vowels  are  pronounced  as  long  vowels  ;  as, 
SBoot,  (Saat,  S3eet.     See  also  §  15. 

45.  Doubled    consonants    are   pronounced    like    simple 
consonants.     They  serve  mostly  the  purpose  of  indicating 
the  short  quantity  of  the  preceding  vowel  ;  as,  bitten,  rennen, 
toemt  (compare  toen). 

46.  But  vowels  or  consonants,  apparently  doubled,  which 
belong  to  distinct  parts  of  compound,  derivative,  or  inflected 
words,    must    be   kept    distinct    in    pronunciation.      As  : 
be-erbigen,  ©enugtu-ung,  Slme^e  ;  2Ib=biIb,  cm^nefymen, 


*  For  other  recent  changes  in  orthography  see  p.  321. 


§47]  FOREIGN    WORDS.  II 

(a)  Occasionally  by  composition  or  inflection  triple  letters 
may  occur.  As:  SSetMud),  <2ttff*Ieben,  @cf)toimm==metfter,  Sir* 
mee-en. 

REMARK.  —  In  general,  letters  belonging  to  different  word- 
elements  are  kept  distinct  in  pronunciation,  and  do  not  affect 
quantity;  as  (compounds):  SQet^fyauZ,  SBet^pult,  Sobspreifung, 
23lut§=tropfen,  drops  of  blood,  (•§  3). 

Foreign  Words. 

47.  Foreign  words,  even  if  words  in  daily  use,  have  pre- 
served more  or  less  of  their  foreign  pronunciation.  As  : 

(a)  ®  has  frequently  preserved  its  French  sound,  as  in : 
($enier,  locue'ren,  Soge,  and  some  others  (like  z  in  azure). 

(b)  3  likewise  has  preserved  its  French  sound  in :  3°urnal'f 
2alottjtef,  and  a  few  others  (like  z  in  azure). 

(t)  (£1),  in  words  derived  from  Greek,  is  generally  pronounced 
like  ®,  as  in  :  (£f)ara!'ter,  (£l)orf  (Shrift,  Sfjroni!.  Sometimes  it  has 
the  aspirate  sound,  as  in:  (£l)trurgf,  (£f)emier ;  and  in  words  from 
the  French,  the  sound  of  sh  :  (£f)ef,  (£f)iffre,  (£f)ara'be,  (£()auffeer, 
djcmgie'ren. 

(d)  t  before  unaccented  i  preceding  an  accented  vowel  in 
words  derived  from  Latin,  is  pronounced  like  §  (ts)  ;  Station' , 
patient' ,    $enettafner.     The    corresponding   words    give   the 
sound  sh  in  English. 

(e)  Other  foreign  sounds  will  be  learned  by  experience.     In 
general,  both  in  pronunciation  and  in  accent,  foreign  words  are 
much  less  fully  naturalized  in  German  than  in  English. 

EXERCISE  IN  CONSONANT  PRONUNCIATION. 

i.  Monosyllables;  the  initial  Consonants.  ®eift,  ®netft,  ®naft, 
3inn,  Qafjl,  ©eil,  Sof)tt,  roenn,  too,  Doff,  £f)eef  £fjron,  borf  toa§, 
ja,  S^r,  pftff,  fdfyneff,  (Sierf  ging,  je^n,  ©prung,  ©tall,  foil,  rauf), 
ro^,  quer,  Oual,  ©tro^,  (Spur  ;  from  Greek:  (£l;or,  Shrift;  from 
French : 


12  ACCENTUATION.  [§  48 

2.  The  final  Consonants,     ab,  Q3ab,  £ag,  log,  Sod),  au*,  t*, 
®rieg,  £ei*,  §ols>  0*8,  taugt,  £a(g,  @*ilb,  ®atb,  $ferb,  ®rab, 

,  rot,  <3teg,  ft*,  fta.*,  ©pecf,  @a£,  ©d)er$,  milb,  glei*,  2Bad)§, 
,  bo*,  bt*,  faugt,  '(jo*,  ®(a§,  gib. 

3.  Promiscuous  German  words  :  accent  first  syllable,     geben, 
£od)ter,  Softer,  $ater,  $ater,  Setter,  SSetter,  effen,  23efen,  tro^enf 
fpringeir,  ftefjen,  tragen,  fragte,  ^i*tung,  gegen,  ©nabe,  ^nabe, 
jeber,  ginger,  alfo,  £rane,  5l*tung,  Sii*fe,  jiingev,  ^iire,  £aten, 
^eifeen,  ^ei^en,  jogen,  fpre*en,  lefen,  gte^en,  fdjerjen. 

4.  Foreign;  accent  as  marked,  ^ttro'ne,  ©a'ge,  Nettie',  9Za= 
tionff  national',  S^emie',  3ottrnalr,  Jjatoufie',  patient',  C£^rofnif, 
S^araf'ter,  Offtcier',  (J^ara'be,  Concert', 


Accentuation. 

48.  In  words  of  more  than  one  syllable  a  greater  stress 
is  laid  on  one  syllable  than  on  another,  and,  in  compound 
words,  one  word  is  pronounced  with  greater  force  than 
another.     This  greater  stress  of  voice  is  called  accent. 

49.  A  syllable  may  have   the  full  (principal  or  tonic) 
accent,  or  a  subordinate  or  secondary  accent,  or  be  unac- 
cented.    We  give  only  the  most  important  rules  : 

50.  In  German  words  of  more  than  one  syllable  (not  com 
pounds),  the  full  accent  is  laid  on  that  syllable  which  con- 
tains the  root,  prefixes  and  suffixes  being  unaccented,  or 
having  only  a  secondary  accent.     As,  Iteb'lid),  gdtebt'. 

51.  Excepted  are  (a)  :  the  negative  prefix  un  ;  as,  un'treit, 
Un'finn  (with  a  few  exceptions).*     Also  the  prefixes  ant,  er£, 
ur  ;  as,  5lntrtt)ort,  (£r§'engel,  Ur'Icmb. 

(b)  The  noun  suffix  -ei  ;  as,  ©cfymetdjelet',  3au^erei',  in  con- 
sequence of  its  foreign  origin  (§  56). 

*On  un  the  chief  accent  is  quite  constant  in  nouns;  in  adjectives  also 
usually,  especially  when  the  simple  form  is  in  use  ;  except  some  verb-deriv- 
atives in  =bar,  =Iicf),  =fam,  and  a  few  others.  In  some  cases  usage  varies. 


§  56]  ACCENTUATION    OF    FOREIGN    WORDS.  13 

52.  The  use  of  the  secondary  accent,  or  accents,  must  be 
learned  by  practice.    Unaccented  are,  in  general,  all  endings  of 
inflection,  and  prefixes  and  suffixes  whose  vowel  is  short  e ;  as, 
®efal)'rert,  gefal)rfltd)N ;  gefaljr' liefer,  ®ofnigve,  etc. 

53.  In  compound  words,  each  component  word  receives 
its  proper  accentuation ;  but  the  principal  accent  is  laid  on 
the  determining  component ;  that  is,   generally,  in  com- 
pound nouns,  adjectives  and  verbs,  on  the  first  component ; 
in  other  parts  of  speech,  on  the  second.     As :  SBerf'geug, 
©djul'fycms),  Iteb'retd),  el)rflo3,  bant'fagen,  tetl'nefymen,  le'bens>= 
luftig,  ^a'fdjen- titter;  berg-art',  ba-mtt',  ft^on',  gn^fol'ge  (ad- 
verbs] ;  berfel'be  (pronozm]  etc. 

54.  The  separable  prefixes,  in  compound  verbs  and  their 
corresponding  nouns,   etc.,  form  proper  compounds,   and 
always  take  the  principal  accent ;  the  inseparable  prefixes 
leave  the  accent  on  the  root :  au3'gel)en,  an'fcmgen,  9ln'fall, 
an'fallig;  befte'rjen,  entlaf'fen,  bermif'fen,  ®ebraud)',  getoift'. 

NOTE.  —  The  inseparable  prefixes,  §  277,  might  be  conveniently  learned 
at  once. 

55.  In  general,  accentuation  in  German  is  much  more  logical 
and  simple  than  in  English.     The  few  exceptions  are  easily 
learned   by  experience.     Examples   are:    all^etn',    allmticfy'ttg 
(compounds  of  all-),  leben'btg  (fromle'benb),  ttmljrfjaf'tig  (from 
tDa§rrf)aft),  and  a  few  others.     In  a  few  words  a  difference  of 
meaning  is  distinguished  by  change  of  accent ;  as,  bd'bet  and 
babei';  ba'rum  and  bariim'  —  as  will  be  learned  hereafter. 

Accentuation  of  Foreign  Words. 

56.  Foreign  words  usually  take  the  accent  on  the  last 
syllable,  unless  they  have  become  quite  germanized  :  Re- 
ligion',  2lbt)ofat'r  2Jtoftf'r  $?atl)ematt!'f  @rubentrf  Stbltotrje!', 
Station' r  SMobte',  ^orag',  Vergil' r  ©mil'. 


14  ACCENTUATION    OF    FOREIGN    WORDS.  [§  57 


57.  But  on  other  syllables  in  many  words;  as  : 
@ramma'tt!,  2Rerfja'nif,  So'gif,  (£'tf)tf,  ^rofef'for,  So 

rafter,   garni'  lie  (§    16),   Drt'cm,   £>ari'u3,   3u'uu3,   Su'lte, 
(£i'cero,  and  others.     (§  59,  note). 

58.  Some  foreign  words  shift  their  accent  when  deriva- 
tive or  inflectional  suffixes  are  added.     As  :  national'  ,  meto'- 
bifd),  ^rofeffo'ren,  £)o!to'ren,  (Efjarafte're. 

59.  Verbs  ending  in  -teren,  from  French,  or  formed  by 
French  analogy,  and  their  derivatives,  keep  the  accent  on 
-te  throughout  ;  as,  jtiibie'ren,  ftubiert', 


NOTE.  —  The  general  principle  is,  that  foreign  words  retain  the  same 
accent  as  in  their  original  language.  As  most  of  them  are  from  French 
with  final  accent,  or  from  Latin  or  Greek  with  an  inflectional  syllable 
dropped,  the  accent  is,  generally,  on  the  last  syllable.  The  same  principle 
will  also  generally  explain  the  exceptions  to  this  rule,  as  well  as  the  change 
of  accent  when  suffixes  are  added  (as  above).  But  there  are  many  irreg- 
ularities. 

60.  In  some  cases  foreign  words  are  completely  naturalized 
and  then  take  German  accent,  as  genfter  (La.tm,/enestra).  But, 
in  general,  foreign  words  retain  their  distinctive  accent,  and 
are  thus  not  so  fully  naturalized  in  German  as  in  English.  On 
-the  other  hand,  they  are  far  less  numerous,  and  are,  for  the 
most  part,  easily  recognized.  As  a  general  rule,  it  may  be  added 
that  they  are  usually  words  which,  being  derived  from  a  com- 
mon source,  have  the  same  or  nearly  the  same  form  in  German 
and  in  English. 

General  Remark.  —  The  foregoing  rules  on  Pronunciation  and  Accentu- 
ation aim  to  give  only  the  simplest  and  most  general  directions.  No  writ- 
ten rules  can  here  take  the  place  of  skillful  oral  instruction  and  careful 
practice.  Let  it  be  remarked,  by  way  of  caution  to  both  student  and 
teacher,  that  a  good  pronunciation,  if  not  acquired  at  first,  is  far  less  likely 
to  be  even-acquired  afterwards.  This  subject  should  continue  to  receive 
the  most  careful  attention,  with  every  lesson.  Of  course  it  is  not  implied 
that  such  rules  should  be  studied  entire,  before  the  grammar  proper  is  begun. 


§  62]  USE     OF    CAPITAL    LETTERS.  1$ 

EXERCISE  IN  ACCENTUATION. 

1.  German  words  with  prefix  ;  accent  root.     !$3eruf,  (Smpfang, 
@rfa&,  SSertuft,  entgtng,  miBlang,  erfufyr,  tiertor,  getang,  ®ebraud), 
®deit,  aerrijs,  $erlag,  geliebt,  beftettt,  berftanb. 

2.  German  words  with  suffix  or  suffixes;  accent  root.  $ld)tling, 
efjrlidj,  leben,  lebenb,  £itgenb,  ariig,  furd)tfam,  friebltd),  SBoIjnimg, 
SSo^nungen,  Ubung,  Ubmtgen,  reinltc^,  9ieinUd)lett,  ftnfter, 

®5uige,    <So^ne§,   ©o^ne,   9^ebel§,  gute§, 
,  liirjeftc,  gretljeit,  greunbfcfyaft,  freunbfd)aftli(^. 

3.  German  words  with  prefix,  and  suffix  or  suffixes ;  accent 
root,  beritfen,  empfcmgen,  erfet}en,  t)ertorenf  entge^en,  3er^e9un9' 
gerlegungen,  ^erriffen,  geliebte,  (Srfa§rungf  @rfa|rungen,  getegen, 
©elegen^eit,  ©elegenf)ettenr  tierfte^en,  SSerftdnbniS,  SerftSnbniffe, 
t)erf(^lt>enbenf  t)erfd|tt)enberi{(^r  (SrfparntS,  ©rfparniffe,  gebrauctjen. 

4.  Compounds  (nouns,  verbs,  adjectives).  33et=ftanb,  bet=fte^en, 

,  Oft-minb,  9ftunb?artf  ^u-funft,  OT-ma^t, 
itttet,  grogsmiittertid),  aufsfte^en,  auf- 
geftanben,  5IpfeI-baum,  Slpfe^baume,  Iieben^=tt)iirbtg,  Steben^s 
rt)iirbig!eit.  (Adverbs)  ba-bet,  ^er-t)or,  I)ier=mit,t)or-uber,5U'tt)iber. 

5.  Foreign;  accent  as  marked.     @olbatrf   ©tubent',  ftubie'ren, 
ftubicrtr,  regiert',  Regiment',  ^)3oetf ,  Sec'tor,  Secto'ren,  §arntoniefr 
^ami'lie,  2)ariru§,  9Karrtu§f  9^arte'f  (Smi'Ite,  Nation',  national', 
9ktionalttat'. 

Use  of  Capital  Letters. 

NOTE. —  The  following  sections  to  §   71   are  added  for  reference  and 
might  better  be  omitted  at  first. 

61.  With  a  capital  initial  are  written  the  first  word  of  a 
sentence,  or  of  a  direct  quotation,  and  usually  also  the  first 
word  of  each  line  in  poetry.     Also : 

62.  All  nouns,  and  words  used  as  nouns;  as,  ber  ®ute  (ad- 
jective), the  good  (man);  etn  SReifenber  (participle),  a  traveler; 
ba§  (Streben  (infinitive),  the  effort,  etc. 


1 6  USE    OF    CAPITAL    LETTERS.  [§  63 

63.  The  pronouns  of  the  second  person  in  epistolary  corre- 
spondence ;  and,  always,  the  pronouns  of  the  third  person  plural 
when  used  for  the  second  person  (except  the  reflexive  fid).) 

NOTE.  —  Also,  usually,  other  forms  when  used  figuratively;  as  plural 
for  singular,  or  one  person  for  another  (§  189). 

64.  (0)   Adjectives  and  ordinal  numerals  in   titles:   $rte= 
brief)   ber    ®ro)3e,   Frederick   the    Great;   ^einrtcl)   ber   SSierte, 
Henry  the  Fourth  ;  ba§  ft'oniglidje  SKufeum,  the  Royal  Museum  ; 
(Seine  Sftajeftat,  His  Majesty. 

(b)  Adjectives  derived  from  names  of  persons  and  places, 
having  a  restricted,  personal  or  local  meaning :  bie  ©rtmmfc^en 
Sfta'rcfyen,  the  Grimm  stories;  ber  Joiner  3)om,  the  Cologne  cathedral; 
but:   bie  lutfjerticfye  ®trcl)e,  the  Lutheran  church,  in  a  general 
sense. 

(c)  Adjectives  derived  from  names  of  countries  are  to  be 
spelled  with  a  small  initial  except  when  used  as  nouns  ;  as, 
beutfcrj,  German  ;  but  ber  S)eutfcrje,  the  German. 

65.  All  other  words  are  spelled  with  a  small  initial.    Nouns, 
when  used  adverbially,  for  instance :  morgett§,  in  the  morn- 
ing; abenb§,  in  the  evening;  but  be§  !£ftorgen§,  be§  5lbenb§. 

Also  indefinite  pronouns ;  as,  ettDd§,  something;  nicfjtS,  noth- 
ing, etc.  But  ettDd§  ®tite§,  something  good  (the  adj.  as  noun). 

66.  Modified   capitals  are   to  be  marked  by  two  dots  or 
strokes ;  fi,  0,  U  ;  as,  Gimlet,  not  Stemtcr,  as  formerly. 

Emphasis. 

67.  The  emphatic  force  of  our  italic  letters  is  expressed  by 
printing  the  letters  apart  or  spaced  (tjefperrt)  ;  as,  e  i  n  28ort, 
one  word;  but  digraphs  are  never  separated;  as,  nid)t,  not. 

NOTE.  —  The  marks  of  punctuation  are,  in  general,  the  same  as  in  Eng- 
lish. But  the  punctuation  is  usually  stronger,  especially  in  the  more  fre- 
quent use  of  the  comma,  to  mark  subordinate  clauses,  etc. ;  and,  generally, 
more  than  in  English,  to  indicate  the  grammatical  construction.  All  sub- 
ordinate, including  infinitive,  clauses  are  regularly  separated  by  a  comma ; 
but  not  the  members  of  a  contracted  sentence ;  that  is,  two  or  more  verbs 
with  same  subject,  when  connected  by  itnb,  and. 


§  69]  HYPHEN.  17 

Division  of  Syllables. 

68.  Syllables  are,  in  general,  divided  according  to  pronuncia- 
tion. The  following  points  may  be  noted  : 

(a)  A  single  consonant  between  vowels  goes  with  the  latter  ; 
as,  tre^tcn,  Ie=fen,  ©e-gen. 

NOTE.  —  Even  words  like  fe^en  (§  24)  will  be  thus  divided,  though  f) 
properly  belongs  with  the  foregoing  vowel. 

(b}  Two  consonants,  or  double  consonants,  between  vowels 
will  be  divided;  as,  greutt-be,  §er^ren,  fyar-ter,  fteHen,  2Baf=fcr, 
feg-nen.  But  not  a  mute  and  a  liquid  ;  as,  5l=prttf. 

(c)  The  signs,  d),  fd),  p(),  tf),  §  are  treated  as  single  conso- 
nants: la^cfjen,  $Ufd)e,  Or^tf)o^gra=p()te',  M^jsen. 

NOTE.  —  In  other  compound  consonants,  there  is  diversity  of  usage 
as,  SC=pfeI  or  3tp=fet  ;  $no=fpe  or  £no£=pe;  ^a=ften  or  &'a3=ten  ;  Hra^en  or  $rat= 
3eit,  etc. 

(^/)   But  compounds,  and  derivatives  with  consonant  suffixes, 
will  be  divided  according  to  their  constituent  parts.     As  :  5 
apfel,  bar=au£,  2)onner»-tag,  bott-enben, 


NOTE.  —  The  chief  application  of  these  rules  is  in  the  division  of  words 
between  two  lines.     In  doubtful  cases,  such  division  is  best  avoided. 


The  Hyphen  (Sittbeftrufj). 

69.  The  division  of  the  syllables  of  a  word  between  two  lines 
is  marked,  as  in  English,  by  the  hyphen.  The  hyphen  is  also 
used  to  mark  special  compounds,  usually  proper  names,  titles, 
a-nd  phrase-compounds  ;  also  compounds  of  unusual  length,  and 
sometimes  for  the  sake  of  distinction  ;  but  not  in  ordinary 
compounds.  As  :  3ttttg*<StiHmg, 
ltd)  ;  bag  (gtettsbtd^ein  ; 
9?iiclen  (dist.  from  erbriicfen),  etc.  For  a  special  use  of  the 
hyphen,  see  §  392. 


l8  APOSTROPHE.  [§  70 

The  Apostrophe. 

70.  The  apostrophe  is  used  to  mark  the  omission  of  a 
letter  ;  as,  id)  Ueb;  if)tt,  ift'3  (for  id)  liebe  ttjn,  ift  e§)  —  especially 
often  in  poetry,  as  ®rertabier?,  Ijeil'ge  for  ®renabiere,  fjeiltge), 
etc.  The  apostrophe  is  not  to  be  used  with  genitives  in  —  §>  ; 
as,  ®arl3,  5lleyanber§  ;  but  will  take  the  place  of  -§>  where  this 
cannot  be  added;  as,  £)emo§tf)ene§'  3^eben.  It  is  written  also 
in  the  more  unusual  contractions  of  the  article,  as,  brad)'§  (bag) 
^oSletn  :  um'§  (be§)  £nmmet3  ttnften,  etc.  ;  but  not  in  the  regular 
contraction  with  prepositions,  an§,  etc.  See  §  191. 

REVIEW  EXERCISE. 

Slrmut  ift  feine  <Sd)anbe. 
Poverty  is  no  shame. 

®ebiilbf  iiberlDtn'bet  alte§. 
Patience  overcomes  all. 


tm 
Morning-hour  has  gold  in  the  mouth. 

9J2ii'fjiggangN  ift  alter  Softer  5lnffang 
Idleness  is  of  all  vices  beginning. 

33eim  ©tfgenftnnv  ift  lein  (^etDtnnf. 
In  [the]  obstinacy  is  no  profit. 

SStttft  bii  immer  tretter  fdjmeifcn? 
Wilt  thou  ever  further  roam  ? 

<£ierj,  ba£  (^ute  Hegt  fo  naf)  ; 
See,  the  good  lies  so  near  ; 

Scrne  mir  ba§  (Sliic!  ergret'fen, 

Learn  only  [the]  happiness  (to)  seize, 

£)etm  bag  ®liic!  ift  immer  ba. 

For  [the]  happiness  is  always  there. 


§  72]  THE    DEFINITE    ARTICLE.  19 

LESSON  L 
Declension. 

71.  (a)  There  are  in  German  two  numbers  —  the  Singu- 
lar and  the  Plural. 

(J?)  Four  cases  :  —  the  Nominative,  the  case  of  the  sub- 
ject ;  the  Genitive,  representing,  besides  the  English  pos- 
sessive, most  of  the  relations  expressed  by  the  preposition 
of;  the  Dative,  the  case  of  the  indirect  object,  often  ex- 
pressed by  to  or  for;  and  the  Accusative,  the  case  of  the 
direct  object. 

(c)  Three  genders,  —  the  Masculine,  the  Feminine,  and 
the  Neuter.  But  the  gender  of  nouns  does  not  in  all  cases 
depend  upon  their  meaning. 

The  Definite  Article. 

72.  (a)  The  definite  article  is  declined  as  follows  : 


Singular. 

Plural 

masc. 

fern. 

neut. 

masc.  fern.  neut. 

Nom. 

ber 

bie 

ba§,  the 

bie,  the 

Gen. 

be3 

ber 

be§,  of  the 

ber,  of  the 

Dat. 

bem 

ber 

bem,  to  the 

ben,  to  the 

Ace. 

ben 

bie 

bag,  the 

bie,  the 

(b)   The  following  remarks  are  important: 

1.  IN  GENDER:  The  definite  article  has  in  the  nominative  singular  a 
distinct  form  for  each  gender.     Hence  these  forms  are  conveniently  used 
to  mark  the  gender  of  nouns;  as,  bet  £tfd)  (masc.),  the  table ;  bie  Xinte 
(fern.),  the  ink;  bd§  93uc&  (neut.),  the  book. 

In  the  genitive  and  dative  singular  the  masculine  and  the  neuter  have 
the  same  form;  and  all  the  genders  have  the  same  form  in  the  plural. 

2.  IN  CASE:  The  masculine  singular  alone  has  a  distinct  form  for  each 


2O  LESSON    I.  [§  73 

case.  Elsewhere  the  accusative  has  the  same  form  as  the  nominative; 
and  in  the  feminine  singular  the  genitive  and  the  dative  have  the  same  form. 
3.  The  definite  article  is  frequently  used — especially  with  generic  and 
abstract  nouns  —  when  not  employed  in  English.  As,  ber  Sftenfd),  man; 
Me  Xugettb,  virtue  (Lesson  XL VI). 

NOTE. —  Some  of  the  forms  of  the  definite  article  suffer  abbreviation 
in  colloquial  or  poetic  language  —  especially  '§  for  ba§  —  less  frequently 
'n  for  ben.  For  the  contraction  of  the  article  with  prepositions,  see  §  191 

Declension  of  Nouns. 

73.  (a)  There  are  two  declensions  of  nouns  in  German, 
the  strong  and  the  weak.  Nouns  which  form  their  plural 
in  en  or  n  are  of  the  weak  declension ;  all  others  are  of  the 
strong  (except  a  few  mixed  nouns.  Less.  V.). 

NOTE.  —  The  strong  is  the  older  and  more  complete  declension ;  the 
•weak  a  later  form.  The  two  are  usually  defined  by  the  genitive  singular; 
but  the  definition  by  the  plural  is  more  convenient  for  feminine  nouns. 

(ft)  Feminine  nouns  remain  unchanged  in  the  singular. 

(c)  In  all  other  nouns,  the  strong  declension  forms  the 
genitive  singular  in  c3  or  3 ;  the  weak,  in  en  or  it.     The 
other  cases  of  the  singular  are  known  from  the  genitive  — • 
the  neuter  accusative  being  always  like  the  nominative. 

(d)  The  dative  plural  of  all  nouns  ends  in  n.     Other 
cases  of  the  plural  are  like  the  nominative. 

(e)  Hence,  generally,  to  decline  a  German  noun,  we  must 
know  the  genitive  singular  and  the  nominative  plural. 

NOTE. —  As  will  appear  hereafter,  the  following  points  are  important: 

1.  The  gender  —  this  is  of  capital  importance. 

2.  The  ending  —  which  sometimes  determines  the  declension. 

3.  The  number  of  syllables  —  whether  monosyllable  or  not. 

4.  The  accent — as  marking  foreign  words. 

5.  The  root  vowel  —  whether  modified  (if  n,  o,  it,  cm). 


§  76]  STRONG    DECLENSION CLASS    I.  21 

The  Strong-  Declension. 

74.  Nouns  declined  by  the  strong  declension  are  sub- 
divided into  three  classes : 

(a)  The  first  class  contains  nouns  which  take  no  addi- 
tional termination  in  the  nominative  plural.     (Sometimes 
called  the  contracted  form.) 

(b)  The  second  class  contains  nouns  which  take  in  the 
nominative   plural  the  termination  e.     (Sometimes  called 
the  primary  form.) 

(c)  The  third  class  contains  nouns  which  take  in  the 
nominative  plural  the  termination  er.     (Sometimes  called 
the  enlarged  form.) 

NOTE.  —  The  chief  difficulty  of  declension  is  in  forming  the  plural.  As 
will  be  seen,  except  in  the  mixed  nouns  (Less.  V.),  the  whole  declension 
may  generally  be  known  from  the  nominative  plural. 

First  Class  of  the  Strong  Declension.     Plural  — ,  -"•* 

75.  (a)  To  this  class  belong  all  masculine  and  neuter 
nouns  with  the  unaccented  endings  el,  em,  en,  er,  rfjen,  lein,  fel ; 
all  neuters  with  prefix  ©e  and  ending  e  ]  one  masculine  in 
-e,ber  $cife,  the  cheese;  and,  in  the  plural,  two  feminines,  §  77. 

(b)  Here  belong  also,  by  the  ending  en,  infinitives  used 
as  nouns  and  contracted  infinitives  in  -n  (as  hereafter). 
These  are  neuter  and  have  no  plural. 

NOTE.  —  This  class  includes  no  nouns  with  accented  endings;  and  no 
monosyllables,  except  the  contracted  infinitives  <5ein,  £un. 

76.  In  the  singular  the  genitive  adds  3  ;  other  cases,  like 
the  nominative.     The  nominative  plural  adds  no  ending ; 
but  some  masculines  in  ef,   en,   er,    and    the   neuter   ba3 
Softer,   the  cloister,   modify  the  root  vowel.     The  dative 
plural  adds  n,  except  to  nouns  ending  in  n. 

*The  symbol  -  indicates  modification  of  the  root-vowel, 
t  See  Appendix,  p.  367. 


22  LESSON    I.  [§  77 

77.  The  two  feminines,  bte  Gutter,  the  mother,  and  bte 
£orf)ter,  the  daughter,  form  their  plurals  after  this  declen- 
sion :  Gutter,  £i)d)ter  ;  but,   like  other  feminines,    remain 
unchanged  in  the  singular. 

78.  Nouns  ending  in  cf)en  or  lein  are  diminutive  deriva- 
tives,  and  are  always  neuter  ;  as,   ba3   9Mbcf)ert,   the  girl 
(from  bie  Sftagb,  the  maid)  ;  ba3  grauletn,  the  young  lady, 
Miss  (from  bte  3fraitr  tne  woman)  —  with  modified  vowel. 


EXAMPLES. 

Singular. 

N.  ber  ©paten,  the  spade.  ber  25ater,  the  father. 

G.  be§  ©patent,  of  the  spade.         be§  $ater§,  of  the  father.* 
D.  bent  ©paten,  to  the  spade.  bent  SSater,  /0  the  father* 

A.  ben  ©paten,  /^  j^tzafe.  ben  SSater,  the  father. 

Plural. 

N.  bie  ©paten,  M*  spades.  bte  better  ,  the  fathers. 

G.  ber  ©paten,  ^/"  M*  spades.          ber  QSa'ter,  <?/"  the  fathers. 
D.  ben  ©paten,  /<?  ///*  spades.          ben  SSatern,  /<?  the  fathers. 
A.  bte  ©paten,  M^  spades.  bie  Skater,  the  fathers. 

Singular. 

N.  bag  ®ema'lbe,  the  painting.        bte  Gutter,  //^^  mother. 
G.  be§  ®ema'lbe§,  of  the  painting,  ber  Gutter,  of  the  mother. 
D.  bent  ©ema'Ibe,  ^  the  painting,    ber  Gutter,  /^  M^  mother. 
A.  ba3  ^ema'tbe,  the  painting.         bte  Gutter,  M^  mother. 

Plural. 

N.  bte  ®ema'Ibe,  the  paintings.        bte  flitter,  //^  mothers. 
G.  ber  ®emtilbe,  of  the  paintings,  ber  Gutter,  of  the  mothers. 
D.  ben  (^emdlben,  /^  the  paintings,  ben  SLRiittern,  /^  //z^  mothers. 
A.  bte  ®emalbe,  the  paintings.        bte  9ftittter,  /^  mothers. 

*  With  names  of  living  things,  the  genitive  is  often  translated  by  the 
English  possessive,  ^^  father's,  etc.  And  the  preposition  is  not  always 
required  in  translating  the  dative. 


§78]  STRONG    DECLENSION.  -  CLASS    I.  23 

Decline,  without  vowel  change  in  the  plural:*  bcr  9lmer  if  enter, 
the  American  ;  ber  (Snglanber,  the  Englishman  ;  ber  2(bler,  the 
eagle  ;  ber  ^aler,  the  painter  ;  ber  Sefjrer,  the  teacher  ;  ber  <Sd)iU 
ler,  the  scholar,  pupil  ;  ber  §imme(,  the  sky,  heaven  ;  ba§  ^Bdum^ 
d)en,  the  little  tree  •  ber  2tfuget,  the  wing  ;  ba§  Senfter,  the  window. 

Decline,  modifying  the  vowel:  ber  9lc!er,  the  field  '  ;  ber  ®ar- 
ten,  the  garden;  ber  5lpfel,  //**  apple  ;  ber  SBogel,  /#*  £m/,-  ber 
SKantet,  M<?  *-/00£/  ber  SBruber,  the  brother;  bag  Softer,  M<s 
cloister  ;  bie  £ocf)ter,  //^  daughter. 

EXERCISE  I. 

i.  £)er  ©paten  be§  SBruberg.  2.  £)a§  ®emalbe  be§  $ater§. 
3.  SDtc  Sefjrer  ber  ^Imerifaner.  4.  5)te  $pfel  be§  @arten§.  5. 
®em  $ater  be§  (£nglcinber§.  6.  S)en  SBriibern  be§  (Sc^iiter§. 
7.  SDie  genfter  be§  ^lofterg.  8.  2)er  gliicjel  be§  S5ogel§.  9.  2)ie 
Splitter  ber  3J?cib(^en.  10.  2)ie  Mantel  ber  Xbi^ter.  n.  Sie 
Spfel  be§  Q3dtim(i)en§.  12.  3n  ben  {dative)  (Garten  ber  5lmert= 
faner.  13.  3n  bent  Softer  —  in  ben  ®lbftern.  14.  X)te  Se^rer 


i.  The  pupils  of  the  teacher.  2.  The  paintings  of  the  Amer- 
ican. 3.  The  apples  of  the  garden.  4.  To  the  gardens  of  the 
Englishmen.  5.  To  the  birds  of  (the)f  heaven.  6.  To  the 
teacher  of  the  scholars.  7.  The  wings  of  the  birds  —  of  the 
eagles.  8.  The  windows  of  the  cloister  —  of  the  cloisters.  9. 
The  mother  of  the  girl  —  of  the  girls.  10.  To  the  teacher's 
daughters.  1  1.  Of  the  girl's  cloak  —  of  the  cloaks  of  the  girls. 
12.  The  apples  of  the  little  trees  in  (with  dative}  the  gardens. 

A  new  series  of  Exercises,  of  a  somewhat  more  advanced  character,  will  be 
found  at  the  end  of  the  book.  See  Note  to  Preface,  p.  V. 

NOTE.  —  The  genitive,  especially  of  names  of  persons  or  living  things 
(possessive  genitive),  \vill  often  precede  the  governing  noun,  and  then  ex- 
cludes the  article;  as,  be§  2ftabcfjen§  2ft  utter,  for  bie  9ft  utter  be£  2ftabdjcit§,  etc. 

*  This  distinction  applies,  of  course,  only  to  Q,  0,  U,  ait. 
t  In  the  Exercises,  (-)  indicates  that  the  equivalent  should  be  supplied; 
[-],  that  it  should  be  omitted. 


24  LESSON    II.  [§  79 

LESSON  II. 

79.  Declension  of  the  Indefinite  Article. 

Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

N.  ein  etne         em,  an,  a. 

G.  etne3  etner  etne£,  of  an,  of  a. 
D.  ctnettt  einet  etneitt,  to  an,  to  a. 
A.  eincn  etne  em,  an,  a. 

The  indefinite  article,  being  originally  the  numeral  etn, 
one,  can  have  no  plural. 

80.  The  declension  of  the  indefinite  article  differs  from  that 
of  the  definite  article  chiefly  in  having  only  two  forms,  instead 
of  three,  in  the  nominative  singular  —  the  masculine  and  neu- 
ter having  no  ending.     Thus  the  indefinite  article  does  not 
here,  like  the  definite,  distinguish  the  gender  of  masculine  or 
neuter  nouns. 

NOTE. —  Like  the  definite  article,  the  indefinite  also,  but  more  rarely, 
suffers  abbreviation  in  colloquial  or  poetic  language ;  as,  'ne  for  eine,  rnen 
for  etnen,  etc. 

Second  Class  of  the  Strong  Declension.     Plural  -e,  *e. 

81.  This  class  includes  all  genders  : 

(a)  Masculine :  most  monosyllables,  and  most  other 
nouns  not  in  Class  I  nor  ending  in  e. 

(b)  Neuter  :  some  monosyllables,  and  most  dther  nouns 
not  in  Class  I  nor  ending  in  turn. 

(c)  Feminine:  (In  the  plural)   some    monosyllables, 
and  a  few  nouns  ending  in  nt<§,  fa(. 

82.  (a)  This  is  the  largest  and  most  heterogeneous  of 

all  the  declensions.  It  is,  however,  prevailingly 
masculine,  and  includes  most  monosyllables. 
(b)  The  neuter  and  feminine  monosyllables  here  be- 
longing are  important  groups  of  mostly  common 
words.  The  neuters  include  all  ending  in  -r.  See 
Appendix,  p.  368. 


§85]  STRONG    DECLENSION.  CLASS    II.  25 

83.  The  form  of  the  declension  is  as  follows  : 

(a)  The  genitive  singular  adds  e3,  the  dative  e,  the  accu- 
sative being  like  the  nominative.     The  nominative  plural 
adds  e.     Nouns  ending  in  ni3  double  the  8  (ff)  before  all 
endings  (§41). 

(b)  Monosyllables,  if  masculine,  will  in  the  plural  modify 
the  root-vowel  generally;  if  feminine,  always;  if  neuter, 
never*  In  words  of  more  than  one  syllable  the  root-vowel 
is  generally  left  unmodified. 

84.  As  will  appear  hereafter,  compound  nouns  whose 
last  component  is  a  monosyllable,  count  as  monosyllables 
in    declension ;    as,  ber  5fyfe(6aum,  the   appletree;    plural, 
5fyfel&dume ;  bie  4>auptftabt,  the  capital  city;  plural,  |)aupt= 
ftabte  —  like  ber  SBaum,  bie  ©tabt. 

85.  The  e  of  the  genitive  (e£)  and  of  the  dative  singular 
may  be  omitted  when  euphony  permits,  especially  in  words 
of  more  than  one  syllable.     The  omission  is  more  usual  in 
conversation  and  in  familiar  writing  than  in  formal  style. 

NOTE.  —  It  is  the  regular  omission  of  this  e,  as  well  as  of  the  ending  of 
the  plural  (after  unaccented  liquid  or  voivel  terminations),  that  distinguishes 
the  first  class  (or  contracted  form)  of  nouns.  At  first  the  omission  was 
purely  euphonic.  Like  examples  will  be  found  §  94 ;  in  adjectives,  §§  139, 
150;  in  verbs,  §214,  etc. 

EXAMPLES. 

Singular. 

N.  ber  @ol)n,  the  son.  bag  3al)r,  the  year. 

G.  be§  ©ofjneS,  of  the  son.  be§  3a^)re^r  of  the  year. 
D.  bent  @pfjne,  to  the  son.  bent  Sa§r^>  to  the  year. 
A.  ben  ©otyn,  the  son.  ba§  Satyr,  the  year. 

*  Except  ba§  glofj,  //.  glb&e.     See  also  §  105. 


26 


LESSON    II. 


Plural. 

N.  bie  <2>bf}tte,  the  sons.  bie  5a()re'  the  years. 

G.  ber  <Sot)ne,  of  the  sons,  ber  3af)re,  of  the  years. 

D.  ben  (Sofjnen,  to  the  sons,  ben  3af)ren,  to  the  years. 

A.  bie  (S5f)ne,  /#*  ^^>f.  bie  Satjre,  the  years. 


&er  SWo'nat,  fAe  month. 

N.  ber  SRonat, 

G.  be§  ^onat§, 

D.  bent  SKonat, 

A.  ben  9Konat. 

N.  bie  donate, 
G.  ber  donate, 
D.  ben  SKonaten, 
A.  bie  donate. 

Feminines : 

&ie  .i->oub,  the  hand. 


obstacle, 


Singular. 


Plural. 


be§  §inberniffe§f 
bent  §inberniffe, 


bie  §inberniffe, 
ber  §inberntffe, 
ben  §inberniffen, 
bie  §inbernt|fe. 


Jiul),  the  cow. 


Sing. 

Plur. 

Sing. 

Plur. 

N.  bie  §anb, 

bie  §anbe, 

bie  ®ufj, 

bie  ^ii^i 

G.  ber  §anb, 

ber  §dnbe, 

ber  fad), 

ber  $iif) 

D.  ber  §anb, 

ben  §tinben, 

ber  ^'u^f 

ben  ^ii§ 

A.  bie  §anb, 

bie  §anbc. 

bie  ®u(), 

bie  ^iify 

vVith  the  indefinite  article  : 

Masc.  Fern. 
©in  S«cunb,  a  /r/en<f.         (Sine  @and,  a  goose. 

N.  ein  S^cnnb,  eine 

G.  eine§  grennbe§,  einer 

D.  einem  ^reimbe,  einer 

A.  einen  $reunb.  eine 


Neut. 


en 


einem  Sfteere, 
ein 


§85]  STRONG    DECLENSION.  -  CLASS    II. 

Decline  with  modification  of  vowel  in  the  plural  :  ber  <Stuf)I, 
M*  chair  ;  bet  Sliifj,  ^  river;  ber  gu§,  the  foot  ;  ber  3a^nf  ^ 
/•00M;  ber  ®aft,  ^  #«<?J/;  ber  ®opf,  the  head;  ber  SRqcl,  /#* 
coat;  ber  ©tocf,  ^  j&V£/  ber  Xanj,  M*  dance  ;  ber  23autn,  M* 
/m>.  (See  §41).  ^2.  fcZ 

Also  the  following  feminines  :  bte  ^3an!f  ///<?  befoch;  bie 
9[Ragb,  //^  maid-servant  ;  bie  9^acf)t,  M^  night  ;  bie  ©tabt,  /fo 
town;  bie  8uft,  /^  fl^V*/  bie  9Kau§,  /^^  mouse;  bie  3**ud)t,  //^^ 
fruit;  bte  9?ftJ3,  M^  ««//  bte  SBraut,  the  bride. 

Without  vowel  modification,  the  masculines  :  ber  2lrm,  the 
arm;  ber  §imb,  the  dog;  ber  (Sdjutj,  the  shoe  ;  ber  £ag,  the  day  ; 
ber  Sungltng,  /^  youth;  ber  Offt5terf,  M*  ^?^r.  The  femi- 
nines :  bte  S3e{orgnt§,  the  care  ;  bte  Xriibfal,  the  trouble. 

And  the  neuters:  ba§   §aar,  /^^  hair;  ba£   §eft,  M 
book;  ba§  ^ferb,  /^  horse  ;  ba§  ^5aarf  the  pair  ;  ba§  ^Pfunbf 
pound;  ba§  @(^tfff  M^  J^/  ba§  3^0rf  the  gate  ;   ba§  3eu9' 


EXERCISE  II. 

i.  2)te  ©b^ne  be§  9Sater§.  2.  ©in  93ruber  ber  9Kagb.  3.  £)te 
4.  £)ie  Suft  be§  ®ebtrge§.  5.  $)te  ^u^ 
6.  3)te  ^iifee  ber  ®anfe.  7.  S)te  9ibcfe  ber 
©afte.  8.  ^ie  Xore  ber  (Stabt  —  ber  ©tfibte.  9.  ®ie  ©c^u^e 
be§  ©afte§.  10.  5)ic  (Stbcfe  be§  ^iinglingS.  n.  2tuf  (dat.)  ber 
S3an!  in  bent  (Garten.  12.  3luf  ben  S5cin!en  in  ben  (Garten.  13. 
S)ic  @djiffe  ber  (Snglfinber.  14.  Sluf  ben  (Stiffen  ber  3lmeri!aner. 
15.  £)ie  SJlagbe  ber  33raut.  16.  £)te  93eforgniffc  ber  flitter. 
17.  £)ie  $fer^e  ^er  >0fft5ierc.  18.  2)ie  donate  be§  3a^)re^- 

i.  The  trees  of  the  garden.  2.  To  the  brothers  of  the  maid- 
servant. 3.  The  air  of  the  town.  4.  The  guest  of  a  friend.  5. 
The  gardens  of  a  convent.  6.  The  days  of  the  month.  7.  The 
teeth  of  a  mouse.  8.  To  the  friends  of  the  brother.  9.  The 
dances  of  the  guests.  10.  The  benches  of  the  garden,  n. 


28  LESSON    III.  [§  86 

The  chair  of  the  maid-servant.  12.  The  chairs  and  (unb)  the 
benches  of  the  scholars.  13.  A  night,  a  month,  a  year.  14. 
The  officer's  shoes.  15.  The  fruits  of  the  trees.  16.  The 
bride's  brothers.  17.  The  mothers  of  the  brides.  18.  The 
days  and  the  nights.  19.  The  fruits  and  the  nuts.  20.  The 
troubles  of  the  youths.  21.  On  (auf,  dat.)  the  officer's  ship. 
22.  On  the  officers'  horses.  23.  The  air  in  the  towns.  2$. 
The  teeth  of  the  mice. 


LESSON  III. 

86.  The   adjective   pronouns :   biefer,  btefe,    biefe3,    this; 
jener,  jene,  jenes>,  that  (yon};  toelcfyer,  toelcfje,  toeld)e3,  which, 
what;  jeber,  jebe,  jebe3,  each,  every*  are  declined  as  follows  : 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

masc.  fern.  neut.  m.  f.  n. 

Nom.  biefer,  btefe,  biefeS.  biefe. 

Gen.  biefe3,  btefer,  btefeS.  biefer. 

Dat.  biefem,  btefer,  btefem.  btefen. 

Ace.  btefen,  btefe,  biefeS.  btefe. 

87.  This  declension  is  like  that  of  the  definite  article  in 
giving  three  endings  —  one  for  each  gender  —  in  the  nomina- 
tive singular.     But  it  has  the  ending  — e  instead  of  —  te,  and  e§ 
instead  of  -a§.    In  these  endings  the  definite  article  is  irregular. 

88.  Like  the  indefinite  article  (§  79)  in  the  singular  and 
like  btefer  in  the  plural,  are  declined  the  possessives : 

mem,  metne,  ntettt,  my. 
betn,  betne,  bein,  thy,  (your). 
fetn,  feme,  fern,  his,  its. 
ifjr,  ifjre,  if)r,  her. 

*  ^cber,  however,  has  no  plural. 


§89]  STRONG    DECLENSION.  CLASS    III.  29 

itnfer,  unf(e)re,  unfer,  our. 

euer,  eu(e)re,  euer,  your. 

ifjr,  if)re,  tf)r,  their,  and  the  negative : 

fein,  leine,  tent,  not  a,  no. 

Third  Class  of  the  Strong  Declension;  Plural  *ets 

89.  To  this  class  belong  a  large  number  of  monosyllabic 
neuters,  with  a  few  masculines  ;  nouns  ending  in  turn ;  and 
a  few  other  neuters  of  more  than  one  syllable.  No  femi- 
nines.  They  form  the  genitive  and  dative  singular,  like 
Class  II.;  and  the  nominative  plural  in  er,  with  vowel 
modification. 

NOTE.  —  Neuter  monosyllables  are  thus  divided  between  II  (§  82,  b), 
and  III,  and  should  therefore  have  special  attention. 

(a)  Observe  that  the  nouns  in  turn  modify,  not  the  radical 
vowel,  but  the  vowel  of  the  suffix. 

(b]  The   e   of   the  genitive    anc|    dative   singular   may  be 
omitted  under  the  same  conditions  as  in  the  preceding  de- 
clension.   (§  85). 

EXAMPLES. 
3>a$  $>au3,  the  house.  $a$  gurfi'entum,  the  principality. 

Singular. 

N.     ba§  §au§,  ba§  giirftentmn, 

G.     be§  §aufe§,  be§  §urftentum§, 

D.     bem  §cmfe,  bem  giirftentum, 

A.     ba§  §au§.  ba3  giirftentum. 

Plural. 

N.     bie  £>atifer,  bte  giirftentiimer, 

G.     ber  §tiufer,  ber  ^iirfteittiimer, 

D.     ben  ,£mu[ern,  ben  8iirftentiimernf 

A.     bie  ^ciufer.  bte  giirftent inner. 

In  the  same  manner:  ber  ©etft,  the  spirit;  ber  ®ott,  the  god ; 
ber  Seib,  the  body ;  ber  9Jiannf  the  man;  ber  Drt,  the  place ;  ber 


30  LESSON    III.  [§  89 


,  the  edge,  margin;  ber  28atb,  the  forest  ;  ber  SSurm,  the 
worm;  ber  $ormunb,  the  guardian  ;  ber  Srrtum,  the  error  ;  ber 
D^eidjtutn,  the  riches. 

NOTE.  —  This  important  list  of  the  masculines  of  this  class  should  be 
remembered.  A  few  others  are  sometimes  so  declined.  (See  Appendix.) 

The  following  examples  of  monosyllabic  neuters  :  bag  3lmt, 
the  office;  bag  23ab,  the  bath;  bag  «BIatt,  Me  leaf;  bag  93ud),  /^ 
&?#/£/  bag  2)ad),  /£*  m?/";  bag  35orf,  />&<?  village  ;  bag  getb,  /£* 
field;  bag  ®etb,  M<?  *»<?«<?y/  bag  ®fag,  the  glass  ;  bag  ®inb,  />&<? 
child;  bag  Sanb,  //$<?  land  ;  bag  Steb,  M£  song  ;  bag  (Scfytofj,  /^<? 
/^  <r^//^/  bag  Sat,  the  valley  ;  bag  SBotf,  the  people. 

And  the  following  neuters  of  more  than  one  syllable  :  bag 
®emad)',  /#*  apartment;  bag  ®emiitf,  the  feeling;  bag  ©eftd^t',  /£* 
/a^/  bag  ®efc^teci)tff  M<?  sex;  bag  (^efpenff,  M<?  spectre;  bag 
®ettwnbf,  the  garment  ;  bag  Regiment',  the  regiment;  bag 
or  §ofpttatr,  //^  hospital  —  all  withyf^^/  accent. 

NOTE.  —  This  list  should  also  be  remembered. 

90.  The  Verb  fein,  to  be. 

PRESENT  INDICATIVE. 
Singular.  Plural. 

tcl)  bin,  I  am.  totr  ftrtb,  we  are. 

bit  btft,  thou  art  (you  are).  \fyc  feib,  you  are. 
er  ift,  he  is.  fie  finb,  they  are. 

fie  ift,  she  is.  (gie  finb,  you  are* 

eg  ift,  *'/  is.  bin  id)?  ^/^  /?  etc. 

VOCABULARY. 

gilt,  good.  grog,  tall,  large, 

fd)ted)t,  ^a//.  flein,  small,  little. 


*The  pronouns  of  the  third  plural  —  then  written  with  capitals  —  are 
regularly  used  in  ordinary  address,  to  one  or  more  persons.  The  corres- 
ponding possessive  is  then  3Ijr,  Sljre,  Sftr  (§  88).  See  also  §§  186-8. 


§9J]  STRONG    DECLENSION. CLASS    III.  3! 

fait,  cold.  Jung,  young. 

njarm,  warm.  alt,  old. 

f)odj,  high.  neu,  new. 

gritn,  green.  ffeifstg,  industrious. 

gi.  Adjectives  standing  alone  as  predicate  are  not  inflected. 

EXERCISE  III. 

i.  3dj  bin  ein  ®inb.  2.  28tr  ftnb  $inber.  3.  2)ie  23iid)er 
bet  <Sd)it(er  finb  ftetn.  4.  £)ie  flatter  be§  $Baume§  finb  grim. 
5.  35iefer  9ftann  ift  ber  $ater  jene§  ®inbe§.  6.  SMe  SBriiber 
meineg  23atcr§  finb  feine  grennbe..  7.  @inb  bie  £orfer  gro§? 
8.  3ft  biefer  SRann  ber  ^Bruber  betne§  SSater§  ?  9.  3ft  fie  bie 
£od)ter  biefe§  9Jianne§  ?  10.  ©inb  bie  ©c^iiler  ftei^tg?  n.  2)ie 
,§aufer  be§  2)orfe§  finb  att.  12.  ®ie  93dume  be§  2Satbe§  finb 
fyod).  13.  (Seib  il)r  bie  ®inber  biefe§  90^anne§?  14.  2) 
unfereg  33ruber§  finb  jung.  15.  2SeId)e§  gau§  ift  b 
unfere§  grennbeg?  16.  ®ie  S3iid)er  biefe§  <Sc^iiier§  finb  neu. 
17.  £)ie  5)orfer  unb  bie  (3d)Ioffer  biefeg  Sanbe§  finb  Kein.  18. 
Sene^  §au§  ift  att ;  biefe  §aufer  finb  neu.  19.  S)iefe  banner 
finb  unfere  greunbe.  20.  2)ie  SSogetfinbin  ben  SSdlbern.  21. 
$)ie  (Stafer  finb  anf  bent  S^anbe  be§  Sif$e§.  22.  (Sinb  jene 
SDZabcfyen  bie  Xodjter  nnferer  (Safte  ?  23.  3n  tt>etd^em  2:ale  finb 
bie  gelber  jene§  SWanne§  ?  24.  3)ie  SSormiinber  biefer  ®tnber 
finb  in  biefem  SDorfe. 

i.  Are  you  a  child?  2.  Are  you  children?  3.  We  are  the 
children  of  j0#rfriends.  4.  The  daughters  of  this  man  are  tall. 
5.  The  houses  of  the  village  are  small.  6.  The  trees  of  the 
forest  are  green.  7.  The  scholars  of  this  teacher  are  indus- 
trious. 8.  The  sons  of  our  friend  are  young.  9.  This  song 
Isold.  10.  These  books  are  new.  n.  Are  these  children  the 
sons  of  my  friend  ?  12.  The  roofs  of  the  houses  are  high.  13. 
She  is  the  daughter  of  my  brother.  14.  The  fields  are  green. 
15-  The  air  is  cold.  16.  The  bath  is  warm.  17.  The  sons  of 


3 2  LESSON    IV.  [§  92 

my  guest  are  Englishmen.  18.  In  which  lands  are  those  vil- 
lages ?  19.  The  fields  of  these  valleys  are  green.  20.  These 
baths  are  cold.  21.  The  birds  of  the  forest  are  industrious. 
22.  The  apartments  of  the  king's  castle  are  large.  23.  The 
officers  of  these  regiments  are  old.  24.  The  songs  of  the  people 
—  of  the  peoples.  (See  notes  on  the  Exercises •,  preface  p.  F.) 



LESSON  IV. 
The  Weak  Declension. 

92.  The  weak   declension    comprises  all  nouns  of  the 
feminine  gender  (except  Gutter,  Xod^ter,  and  those  of  the 
second  class  of  the  strong  declension)  ;  most  masculines 
ending  in  e  ]  a  few  masculine  monosyllables  which  formerly 
ended  in  e ;  and  many  foreign  masculines  accented  on  the 
last  syllable.     No  neuters. 

(a)  This  declension   includes,   therefore,   all  feminines   of 
more  than  one  syllable,  except  those  in  -ni§  and  — fat  (II),  and 
the  two  words  Gutter  and  £oti)ter  (I). 

(b)  Feminine  monosyllables  are  nearly  equally  divided  be- 
tween this  declension  and  the  second  class  of  the  strong  de- 
clension.    The  weak  declension  includes  all  foreign  or  deriva- 
tive feminines,  and  those  that  once  ended  in  -e. 

(c)  Foreign  masculines  are  also  divided  between  the  same 
two  declensions.    Those  in  -alr,  -anf,  -aftf,  -ter' ,  belong  to  the 
strong;  most  others,  including  all  that  once  ended  in  -e,  be- 
long to  the  weak  declension. 

(d)  Hence,  words  in  either  of  the  foregoing  groups  must 
be  carefully  observed. 

93.  Nouns  of  this  declension  form  their  plural  in  —en 
or  -rt.     The  feminines  remain  unchanged  in  the  singular, 


§  96]  WEAK    DECLENSION.  33 

but  the  masculines  take  the  termination  —en  or  — n  also  in 
the  singular,  for  all  cases  except  the  nominative. 

94.  Nouns  ending  in  e,  el,  er,  and  at,  unaccented,  take 
the  termination  n ;  all  others  take  en.     Thus :  bie  23lume, 
bte  SBIttmen ;  bie  •  Dfabel,  bie  Dfobeln;  bte  geber,  bie  gebern; 
ber  llngar,  bie  llngarn.     But :  bte  Xiigenb,  bie  Xugenben ;  bie 
(Station',  bie  ©tation'en;  ber  ©tubent',  bie  ©tubent'en;  ber  §11= 
far',  bie  ^ufar'en  (§85). 

95.  Feminine  derivatives  in  -in  double  the  n  in   the 
plural ;  as  bte  gfttfttn,  the  princess:  pi.  bte  giirfttmten  (§  3,  a). 

For  a  special  form  in  feminine  singular,  see  §  106. 

96.  No  noun  of  the  weak  declension  modifies  the  root- 
vowel  in  the  plural. 

EXAMPLES. 
$ie  SBIutne,  the  flower.         .  $>er  Jiim&c,  the  boy. 

Singular. 

N.     bie  23lume,  ber  ®nal)e, 

G.     ber  23lume,  be§  ®nabenf 

D.     ber  33tume,  bent  ®na&en, 

A.     bie  S3Iume.  ben  Shtaben. 

Plural. 

N.     bie  SBIumen,  bie 

G.     ber  SBlumen,'  ber 

D.     ben  23tumen,  ben 

A.     bie  33Iumen.  bte  ^naben. 

2)te  geber,  the  pen ;  gen.  ber  Seber;  pi.  bte  Scbern,  etc. 

Monosyllables:  bte  $rt,  the  kind ;  gen.  ber  5lrt;  pi.  bie  5lrtenf 
etc.  —  S)er  §elb,  the  hero ;  gen.  be3  §elben;  pi.  bie  §etben,  etc. 

Foreign:  ber  ^oetf,  the  poet;  gen.  be§  ^oet'en;  pi.  bte  $)3oetfen, 
etc. 


34  LESSON    IV.  [§  96 

Decline  like  bie  SJlume :  bie  ©tube,  the  room;  bie  ^reube,  M<? 
joy;  bie  @d)ule,  the  school,  etc. 

Like  bie^eber:  bie  Sftabet,  the  needle;  bie  99?auer,  the  wall; 
bie  <3d)itffel,  the  dish,  etc. 

Like  bie  5lrt:  bie  Uf)r,  the  watch;  bte  $rau,%//^  woman,  wife; 
bte  £at,  M^  </m//  bie  £itr,  /#*  door;  bte  3a^»  ^  number,  etc. 

Like  ber  ®nabe :  ber  ^rettfse,  the  Prussian ;  bcr  Slffe,  M* 
monkey ;  ber  -fteffe,  //^  nephew,  etc. 

Like  ber  $oet:  ber  2lbt)otatf,  M*  lawyer;  bcr  ©tubent',  /^ 
student;  ber  ^Uofop!)',  the  philosopher,  etc. 

Like  ber  §e(b :  ber  Q3tir,  M^  ^ar/  ber  ^rtft,  the  Christian ; 
ber  Siirft,  the  prince;  ber  (Sraf,  M^  count;  bcr  §irt,  M^1  herdsman; 
ber  -SRenfdj,  {the)  man;  ber  5D^o§rf  the  Moor;  ber  D^arr,  the  fool; 
ber  Od)§r  />&*  ^^?/  bcr  ^rinj,  the  prince ;  ber  2^or,  the  fool. 

NOTE.  —  This  list — which  comprises  the  most  important  masculine 
monosyllables  of  this  declension — should  be  remembered.  Apparently 
they  would  belong  to  the  second  class  of  the  strong  declension  ;  but  -e  has 
been  dropped  from  the  nominative  singular.  (See  Appendix.) 

97.  The  noun,  ber  §err,  the  Lord,  gentleman   (also,  Mr.  or 
Sir)  adds  in  the  singular  only  n ;   in  the  plural  en ;  as,   be3 
§errn ;  pi.  bte  §erren,  etc. 

98.  PAST  INDICATIVE  OF  fetn,  to  be. 

Singular.  Plural. 

id)  ttmr,  I  was.  ttrir  trjaren,  we  were. 

bit  ttwrft,  thou  wast  {you  were).\§\  ttmr(e)t,  you  were. 

er  tnar,  he  was.  fie  ttmren,  they  were. 

Sing,  or  Plur.,  Sie  IDaren,  you  were. 

VOCABULARY. 

tmb,  and.  lt)of  where. 

ober,  or.  Uiar  \$,  was  I? 

after,  but.  ftmrft  bit,  wast  thou? 

feljr,  very. 


§  98]  WEAK    DECLENSION.  35 

EXERCISE  IV. 

i.  £)ie  23(umen  be§  ®arten§  finb  bie  greube  meiner  Gutter. 
2.  Sene  §erren  finb  giirften  unb  ®rafen.  3.  £ie  Sftauern  ber 
©tabt'finb  fjod)  unb  alt.  4.  £)te  @tuben  finb  rlctn.  5.  3)a§  Sanb 
imfereS  §errn,  be§  giirften,  ift  ein  gurftentum.  6.  Xte  ^reugen 
unb  bie  Ungarn  toaren  fleigig.  7.  S)ie  Ccfyfen  toaren  grog,  aber 
bie  ®iif)e  ttmren  fefjr  fletn.  8.  Xiefer  ^nabe  ift  ber  @o§n  be§ 
(^rafen.  9.  S)ie  llt^r  biefe§  §errn  tnar  neii.  10.  ^)tefe  H^ren 
finb  fefjr  alt  aber  gut.  n.  3ft  er  ein  ^reufee  obcr  ein  Hngar? 
12.  ®ie  3laten  be§  §elben.  13.  5)te  2:iiren  be§  §aufe§.  14. 
®ie  D^effen  be3  (^rafen.  15.  ®ie  §efte  be§  ©tubenten.  16. 
®iefe  §erren  finb  ^reuften.  17.  2)ie  ^naben  finb  in  ber  (Sdjule 
-in  ben  @d)ulen.  18.  2)ie  3o^t  ber  ©tubenten  ift  grog.  19. 
SDie  3:aten  ber  (S^riften.  20.  S)ie  ©tuben  be§  §aufe§.  21.'  £ie 
S3Iumen  ber  (Sdrten.  22.  ®ie  (Stiller  be§  §errn.  23.  2)ie 
9?abeln  ber  9Kab(^en.  24.  2)ie  <Sd)uffeln  finb  auf  bent  £ifcl)e. 

i.  The  Prussians  and  the  Hungarians  are  Christians.  2. 
These  boys  were  pupils  of  my  father.  3.  The  schools  of  this 
town  are  good.  4.  It  was  the  deed  of  a  fool.  5.  The  daugh- 
ters of  the  count  were  old,  but  the  sons  of  the  prince  were 
young.  6.  The  hands  of  the  ladies.  7.  The  doors  of  my 
house.  8.  Where  are  my  needles  ?  9.  Where  were  the  ladies 
and  the  gentlemen?  10.  The  boys  were  industrious,  n. 
These  dishes  are  new.  12.  The  deeds  of  the  heroes.  13.  The 
watches  of  thftse  gentlemen.  14.  The  number  of  the  boys  and 
of  the  girls.  15.  The  lands  of  the  count.  16.  The  monkeys 
and  the  bears.  17.  These  princes  are  Christians.  18.  The 
teeth  and  the  feet  of  the  oxen.  19.  A  daughter  of  a  lawyer. 
20.  The  wife  of  an  officer.  21.  That  gentleman  is  a  Prussian. 
22.  I  was  in  the  room.  23.  We  were  in  the  rooms.  24.  Was 
he  the  son  of  a  poet? 

NOTE.  —  For  more  advanced  exercises  see  end  of  the  book. 


36  LESSON    V.  [§  99 

LESSON  V. 
Peculiarities  in  Declension. 

99.  The  following  masculines  ending   in  e  form '  their 
genitive  in  -n<§,  and  their  other  cases  in  -rt  according  to  the 
weak  declension  : 

ber  griebe,  peace.  ber  §aufe,  heap. 

ber  gunfe,  spark.  ber  9?ame,  name. 

ber  ®ebanre,  thought.  ber  Same,  seed. 

ber  (Slaube, /<«/>&.  ber  SSttte,  «////.* 

—  with  a  few  others,  more  or  less  variable. 

100.  2)er  @d)abe,  harm,  gen.  ©cf)abert§,  usually  modifies  the 
vowel  in  the  plural,  bie  Sd)aben  ;   but  sing,  also  ber  <3d)dben. 

101.  2)er  <2>d)mer§,  the  pain,  is  occasionally  declined  in  the 
same  way:  gen.  be§  (Sdjmer^enS,  dat.  bent  (Sctjmerjen,  etc. ;  but 
usually  be§  (Scfymer^eS,  etc.;  pi.  bie  <Sd£)mer5en.     And  ber  gel* 
fen,   /^  ra:/£,  has  also  the   shorter  form,   ber  gel§,   gen.   be§ 
gelfeng  or  gclfen ;  pi.  bie  gelfen. 

102.  One  neuter,  bd§  §er§,  M^  heart,  forms  its  genitive  in 
-en§,  be§  §er§en§,  dat. 'bent  $erjen,  ace.  ba§  §er§;  plur.  bie 
§er§en.     (§73*  0- 

103.  Some  of  these  nouns  have  also  the  nominative  in  -en, 
and  are  then  regularly  of  the  first  class  of  the  strong  declen- 
sion; as,  ber  grteben,  be§  griebeng,  etc. 

104.  A  few  masculines  and  neuters  follow  the  strong 
declension  in  the   singular,   and  the  weak  in  the  plural. 
Such  are  : 

Norn.  Gen.  Plur. 

ber  SQamr,  farmer,  peasant.      be§  23cwer§,  oie  demerit, 

ber  SRaft,  mast  (of  a  ship).      be§  9Kafte§,  bie  Sftaften. 

*This  declension  is  based  on  a  (strong)  nominative  -e(n).     See  §  76. 


§   106]  MIXED    DECLENSION.  37 

Norn.  Gen.  Plur. 

ber  SRugfet,  muscle.  beg  9ftugfelg,  bte 

ber  Sftadjbar,  neighbor.  beg  ^acfybarg,  bte 

ber  Spantof'fel,  slipper.  beg  $antoffe(g,  bte  ^antoffel(n). 

ber  @ee,  /0/fo.  beg  ©eeg,  bte  (See(e)n. 

ber  ©taat,  j/fc/fc.     .  beg  <3taateg,  bte  (Staaten. 

ber  (Stacfyel,  j//^.  beg  (Stacfyetg,  bte  <3tad)etn. 

ber  ©ttefel,  £0<tf.  beg  (Sttefetg,  bte  ©tiefel(n). 

ber  (Strati,  r^_y.  be§  @tra^(e§,  bte  (Straiten. 

ber  better,  cousin.  be§  S5etter§,  bte  SBettern. 


bte 

ba§  23ett,  ^^/.  be§  33etteg,  bte  SBetten. 

bag  (Snbe,  ^«//.  beg  (Snbeg,  bte  (Snben. 

bag  §emb,  shirt.  beg  Spembeg,  Me  §emben. 

bag  Of)r,  ^r.  beg  O^reg,  bte  Oljren. 

and    the   foreign  masculine  titles  in  -or  (§117);  with  a  few 
foreign  neuters;  as,  bag  3nfe!tf,  the  insect.     See  Appendix. 

These  constitute  what  is  called  the  mixed  declension,  in 
which  are  sometimes  included  also  the  nouns,  §§  99-102, 
and  the  neuters,  §  1  18  and  §119. 

105.  Some  of  these  words  have  double  forms:  beg  SBauern, 
beg  9^ad)barnf  etc.;  also  pi.  bte  ^antoffel,  and  (better)  bte  ©ttefcl. 
And  there  are  a  few  other  nouns  in  which  usage  is  divided,  in 
the  singular  or  plural,  or  both,  between  the  weak  and  the  strong 
declensions,  or  even  between  different  classes  of  the  strong 
declension;  as,  ber'SBater,  the  Bavarian;  gen.  SBaierg  or  SBatern  ; 
pi.  SBater  or  23atern;  ber  :Dorn;  the  thorn;  pi.  Corner,  2)orne,  or 
S5ornen  ;  ber  ©porn,  the  spur;  pi.  (gporrte  or  (Spornen,  or  even 
•Sporen;  bag  33oot,  pi.  bie  S5oote  or  33ote;  bag  9io§r,  pi.  bte 
9^of)re  or  9^b§ref  etc.  Such  details  must  be  found  in  the  dic- 
tionaries. (See  Appendix). 

1  06.  The  n  of  an  earlier  weak  inflection  is  retained  regu- 
larly as  dative  singular  in  the  phrase  auf  (Srben,  on  earth;  and 
sometimes  elsewhere  —  especially  in  poetry. 


38  LESSON    V.  [§   107 

NOTE  i.  —  In  poetry  the  form  is  sometimes  found  with  the  article;  as, 
ttt  ber  Srben,  etc.  ;  and,  rarely  also  in  the  genitive  ;  as,  Me  ®iiter  biefer  (£r= 
ben,  the  goods  of  this  earth. 

2.  Note  also  such  phrases  as  :  bor  5reuben,  for  joy  ;  $U  Gljren,  in  honor 
(of}  ;  3U  ©unften,  in  favor  (of  ');  bon  ©eiten,  on  the  part  (of},  etc.  —  some 
of  which,  however,  were  originally  plurals. 

107.  A  few  words  give  two  plurals  in  different  senses, 
having  both  senses  in  the  singular.  Such  are  :  ba§  SBanb  ; 
pi.  Member,  ribbons;  23anbe~  bonds.  £)te  £kmf;  pi.  SBanfe, 
benches;  SBcmlen,  banks.  £)a3  SBort;  pi.  SSorter,  words 
(singly);  SSorte,  words  (connected).  (§§  424-426). 

NOTE.  —  Colloquially  —  in  imitation  of  French  or  English  —  are  found 
plurals  in  3  ;  as,  ®erl§,  <Sa6el3,  2Kabrf)en3,  etc. 


THE  PERFECT  AND  PLUPERFECT  OF  feitt* 
1  08.  The  perfect  and  pluperfect  of   the  verb  fetrt  are 
formed  by  adding  the  perfect  participle  getoefert,  been,  to 
the  present  and  past  tenses  of  the  same  verb. 

(a)  Observe  that  fetn  is  here  its  own  auxiliary,  where  in 
English  we  use  have. 

PERFECT. 
Singular.  Plural. 

id)  bin  gett>efen,  /  have  been.  ftrir  fittb  getnefen,  we  have  been. 
bit  bift  getoefen,  thou  hast  been,  i^r  feib  geroefen,  you  have  been. 
er  ift  getoefen,  he  has  been.  fie  ftrtb  getuefen,  they  have  been. 

Sing,  or  Plur.,  (£te  ftnb  getoefen,  you  have  been. 

PLUPERFECT. 

id)  tear  geinefen,  I  had  been.        tt)tr  tnaren  getuefen,  we  had  been. 

bii  toarft  getDejen,  thouhadstbeen.  tljr  tt)ar(e)tgett)efen,>'^^  had  been. 

er  ttwr  getDefen,  he  had  been.       fie  tuaren  gett)efen,  they  had  been. 

Sing,  or  Plur.,  (Ste  tDaren  getoefen,  you  had  been. 

(b)  Observe  that  when   the  verb  is  used  in  a  compound 
form,  the  participle  stands  at  the  end  of  the  sentence.     Thus*. 
25  u  bift  gut  getnefen.     3)er  ®nabe  tt>ar  fletftig  getuefen. 


§   108]  PECULIARITIES     IN    DECLENSION.  39 

VOCABULARY. 

retd),  rich.  ftar!f  strong.       in,  in      (  govern  the  dative 

arm,  poor.  fcfyttmd),  weak,     auf,  on  \  when  expressing  re^ 

nii^Hd),  useful,  fdjarf,  sharp.      trite,  as,  like;  nicrjt,  not. 

EXERCISE  V. 

i.  £)er  SSater  btefeS  SBauerS  roar  bcr  9?ad)bar  meine§  SSetterS 
getoefen.  2.  $)ie  3aljre  be3  $riebcn§  finb  bcm  <3taate  fetjr  nii£lid) 
geinefen.  3.  ®te  ©tiefel(n),  bie  $antoffet(n),  bie  §emben  unb  bie 
SRocre  finb  neii  getoefen.  4.  3)ie  S)ornen  finb  fcfyarf  tt)ie  9^abeln. 
5.  S)er  ©o^n  meine§  9Zad^bar§  ttwr  reid)  gemejen.  6.  3^  biefer 
©tube  n)aren  bie  ^Setten  ber  ©chiller.  7.  2)er  S3ruber  unfere§ 
SSetterS  tt)ar  rei(^  gett)efcn.  8.  ©cine  5lugen  unb  feme  Ofjren  finb 
gro§,  aber  feine  giige  finb  !(ein.  9.  2)er  grieben  bc§  §errn.  10. 
SReine  5lugen  finb  f^toad).  n.  2)ie  ©dEjmer^en  be§  ^er^enS.  12. 
2)er  Sriebe  ber  ©taaten.  13.  2)ie  Member  ber  9Kcib(^en»  14.  ®iefe 
23auern  finb  9^a(^barn  getuefen.  15.  3)iefe  SSorter  finb  bie  Seamen 
jener  banner.  16.  5)ie  SSorte  [be§]  ®(auben§.  17.  2)te  ^amen 
jener  Snfeften.  18.  5)ie  33an!en  finb  in  ben  ©tabten.  19.  3)ie 
53anbe  [be§]  grieben§.  20.  3^«e  §erren  finb  SSettern. 

i.  The  masts  of  this  ship  are  very  strong.  2.  Your  neigh- 
bors have  been  in  this  room.  3.  The  thoughts  of  the  Chris- 
tians. 4.  The  names  of  the  peasants.  5.  The  brothers  of  my 
cousin  had  been  poor.  6.  My  mother's  slippers  are  old.  7. 
The  hearts  of  (the)  men.  8.  His  ears  are  large,  but  his  eyes 
are  very  small.  9.  My  father's  boots  and  my  cousin's  slippers 
and  the  shirts  of  the  boys  are  not  very  new.  10.  The  beds 
of  the  scholars  had  been  in  this  room.  n.  The  thoughts 
of  my  cousin  are  the  thoughts  of  a  Christian.  12.  The  eyes 
and  the  ears  of  a  mouse  are  small.  13.  The  faith  of  the  heart 
is  strong.  14.  These  farmers  are  my  neighbors.  15.  The 
masts  of  the  ships  are  high.  16.  The  peasants  of  these 
states  have  been  very  rich.  17.  The  ribbons  of  my  slippers 


40  LESSON    VI.  [§   109 

are  green.  18.  The  boots  are  on  the  benches.  19.  The  faces 
of  the  neighbors.  20.  The  thoughts  and  the  words  of  (the) 
peace  (see  §  72,  b,  3). 


LESSON  VL 
Declension  of  Proper  Names. 

109.  Names  of  persons,  places,  and  the  neuter  names  of 
countries,  when  inflected,  usually  take  -3  in  the  genitive. 
griebrtrf),  Frederick,  grtebrid)3  ;  (S(ifabetf),  ©KfabetfyS  ; 


NOTE.  —  An  earlier  dative,  or  accusative,  in  -n  or  -en  sometimes  occurv. 
colloquially  ;  as,  $eter-n,  Quft-cn.  (For  plurals,  see  §  427.) 

no.  (#)  Names  of  females  ending  in  e  may  have  in  the 
genitive  -en§,  and  in  the  dative  and  accusative  -en  :  ©opfji'e, 
(£opf)i'en§,  <Sopf)t'en;  5lmaflte,  $lma'lien§,  Shna'Uen;  but  usually, 
only  -§  in  genitive,  and  no  ending  in  dative  and  accusative. 

(b)  Masculine  names  ending  in  a  sibilant  (§,  fj,  f<^f  j,  5,  $) 
may  take  -en§,  -en,  -en:  9J?ay,  3Kajen§,  9Kayen  ;  but  if  sur- 
names, or  foreign,  they  take  the  apostrophe  only  (§  70);  as, 

SSerre. 

(c)  Place  names  ending  in  a  sibilant  are  not  declined  ;  as, 

ftatn§,  etc. 

in.  In  speaking  of  sovereigns  and  dignitaries,  the  pre- 
position toon  is  used  in  such  phrases  as:  ber  $uifer  fcon 
SRiijstanb,  /^*  Emperor  of  Russia;  bte  ^ontgin  Don  (Sngtanb, 
the  Queen  of  England;  ber  2Mirgermetfter  oon  3J?agbeburgf 
/^^  mayor  of  Magdeburg.  This  form  may,  generally,  be 
used  instead  of  the  genitive  of  countries  or  places. 

112.  And,  generally,  the  inflection  'of  a  personal  name 
may  be  avoided  by  the  use  of  the  article  ;  as,  gen.  be3  $ar(, 
ber  <2oj)()te,  be3  (5cf)illerf  etc.;  or  of  an  apposition  with  the 
article  ;  as,  be3  $ontg3  ^einritf)  (§§  427-8). 


§  114]  DECLENSION    OF    PROPER    NAMES.  4! 


113.  The  Latin  nouns  (Et)rtftu3  and  £$efu3  usually  retain 
their  Latin  declension  ;  thus  : 

N.     (£f}rifttt3;      G.     Sljrtftt;      D.     <£I)rifto;     A.     <£I)riftum. 
N.     3efu§;          G.     gefu;         D.     3cfu;         A.     Sefum. 

THE  FUTURE  OF  THE  VERB  fein,  to  be. 

114.  The  future  of  the  verb  fein  is  formed  by  combin- 
ing with  the  infinitive  fetn  the  present  tense  of  the  auxil- 
iary verb  toerben,  to  become. 

Singular.  Plural. 

icf)  toerbe  fetn,  /  shall  be.  fair  toerbett  fein,  we  shall  be. 

bu  ftrirft  fein,  thou  wilt  be.          U)r  toerbet  feitt,  you  will  be. 

er  ttrirb  feitt,  he  will  be.  fie  toerbeti  fein,  they  will  be. 

Sing,  or  Plur.,  @te  fterben  feitt,  you  will  be. 

(a)  And  interrogatively  :  toerbe  id)  fetn  ?  shall  I  be  ?  ttrirb 
er  fetn,  will  he  be  ?  etc.  Note  that  the  infinitive  goes  to 
the  end  of  the  sentence  ;  as,  id)  toerbe  ftet^ig  fein,  ftrirb  er 
flet^tg  fein  ?  etc. 

VOCABULARY. 

In'er,  here.  audj,  also. 

Ijeute,  to-day.  batb,  soon. 

morgett,'  to-morrow.  bte  @d)tt)efter,  the  sister. 

geftertt,  yesterday.  mtt,  -with  (governs  the  dative). 

EXERCISE  VI. 

i.  (£f)arlotte(tt)§  Gutter  ift  §eute  ^ter  getcefett,  ttttb  ber  SSater 
SKarte(n)§  toirb  tttorgett  aud)  ^ter  feitt.  2.  2)er  ®otitg  toon  (Spattten 
uttb  bie  ®ottigm  bott  ^ortugal  toerben  morgett  in  9ftabrtb  feitt.  3. 
S)tc  gftiffe  9^u^tattb§  ftnb  gro§.  4.  8ft  er  ^t  <SopI;te(tt)§  (Sd^toefter 
itt  5ltttatie(tt)§  (^artett  getnefett?  5.  @r  niirb  tttit  9^arte(tt)  itt  ber 
<5tube  fein.  6.  Sic  $etterix  §riebrt(^§  merbett  att(^  balb  f)ier  fein. 


42  LESSON    VII.  [§ 


7.  ®ie  §aujer  bon  ^art§  fittb  groft.  8.  S)er  SSater  unb  bie 
Gutter  [ber]  Sftarie  ftnb  geftern  f)ier  getoefen.  9.  SSerbett  tfjre 
23riiber  nub  ujre  (Scfytceftern  balb  f)ier  jetn?  10.  3)er  ®aifer  unb 
bie  ®ai[eritt  bon  Seutfdjtanb  ftnb  in  Berlin,  n.  S)a3  Seben 
Sefu.  12.  S)te  SSorte  3efu  ^tifii.  (Adverbs  of  time  precede 
adverbs  of  place?) 

i.  I  am  Mary's  brother  and  thou  art  Charlotte's  sister.  2. 
The  sister  of  the  Emperor  of  Russia  will  be  here  tomorrow. 
3.  He  is  with  Mary  in  Frederick's  garden.  4.  The  mayor  of 
Strasburg  has  been  here  today.  5.  The  deeds  of  Frederick 
have  been  useful.  6.  Will  the  father  of  Charles  be  here  to* 
morrow  ?  7.  He  will  be  here  to-morrow,  and  the  mother  of 
Sophia  will  also  soon  be  here.  8.  Has  the  mother  of  the 
Queen  of  Spain  been  here  ?  9.  She  will  soon  be  here.  10. 
The  rivers  and  the  lakes  of  Russia  are  large,  n.  The  son  of 
Elizabeth  is  a  friend  of  our  neighbor.  1  2.  Mary's  slippers  and 
Charles'  boots  are  new. 


LESSON  VIL 
Declension  of  Foreign  Nouns. 

115.  Nouns   of  foreign   origin    generally   retain    their 
foreign  accent  (see  §   59,  note),   but  most  of  them   are 
declined  like  German  nouns.     Others  retain  some  pecu- 
liarities. 

116.  Like  German  nouns  are  declined  such  words  as: 
ber^tfc^of,  the  bishop,  bte  Sifdjflfe;  ber  $aplcmf ,  the  chaplain, 
bie  ®aplane;  ber  Snfttnft',  bie  Snftinftc;  ba3  Monument' ,  bie 
2ftortirmente ;  ba3  §o^ttalf,  bie  £o3pitofer;  ba3  9fegtntentrr  bte 
^Regtmenter,  etc.;  and  the  foreign  masculines  and  feminines 
of  the  weak  declension  ;  as,  ber  2lbt)ofdt',  the  advocate  ;  bte 

,  the  republic,  etc. 


§  121]  DECLENSION    OF    COMPOUND    NOUNS.  43 

117.  Foreign  titles  of  male  persons  ending  in  unaccented 
or  take  3  in  the  genitive  singular  and  en  in  the  plural :  bet 
£)o!ftor,  be3  £)oltor3,  bte  £)oltorren,  etc.;  according  to  the 
mixed  declension.     (See  §    104;  for  the  accent,  see  §§ 
57,  58.) 

1 1 8.  Foreign  neuters  in  um  and  turn  add  §  in  the  gen. 
sing.,  and  change  um  to  en  in  the  plural ;  as  ba<3  ©tit'btitm; 
gen.  be3  @tubtum3 ;  pi.  bte  @tubiettf  etc.    Some  have  dropped 
iimt  in  the  singular,  but  retain  ten  in  the  plural ;  as,  bag 
5lbDerbf,  (or  Wbtierbtum) ;  pi.  bte  2Ibt)erbten,  etc.* 

119.  Foreign  neuters  in  alf  and  U'  take  §>  in  the  genitive 
singular  and  ten  in  the  plural :  ba£  Material',  be£  9ftaterM3, 
bie  aftateriatten ;  ba3  gofftl',  be£  goffifc,  bte  gofftlten.* 

120.  Words  transferred  from  French,  English,  and  other 
modern  languages  usually  take  §>  in  the  genitive  singular 
and  in  the  plural :  £orb3,  @entef3,  @o(o<3,  3)on3,  $)3aftf)a'3 ; 
but  if  ending  in  -§>  are  not  declined ;  as,  ber  $ommt<3f,  the 
clerk  (%  silent). 

(a)  A  few  other  foreign  nouns,  mostly  of  technical  use,  re- 
tain foreign  plurals:  as,  (£afu§,  3ftobi,  gacta,  S^erubint,  etc. 
And  a  few  others  form  plurals  in  —en :  as,  ba3  SDrama,  bie 
S)ramen.  But  there  is  much  irregularity.  Sometimes  all  in- 
flection is  omitted.  Details  must  be  learned  by  experience. 
(See  also  Less.  XLVII.) 

Declension  of  Compound  Nouns. 

z  21.  Compound  nouns  are  formed  much  more  freely  in 
German  than  in  English  (as  will  be  explained  hereafter). 
Such  nouns  are  inflected  according  to  the  gender  and 
declension  of  the  last  component,  the  rest  remaining  un- 
changed. (See  §84.  For  accent,  see  §53.) 

*  These  groups  from  Latin  neuters,  pi.  a,  ia,  are  now  nearly  like  the 
mixed  declension.  A  few  other  such  nouns  belong  here ;  also  the  German 
bo§  ^Hetnob,  pi.  bie  $letnobien  (or  SHeinobe). 


44  LESSON    VII.  [§   122 

122.  There  are  a  few  exceptions  :  bie  9frttft)0rt,  the  answer, 
pi.  2lttttoorten  (comp.  of  ba3  SSort)  ;  ber  2lbftf)eu  (comp.  of  bie 
),  and  a  few  others.     (See  §  388.) 


THE  FUTURE  PERFECT  OF  feitu 

123.  The  future  perfect  of  fein  is  formed  by  joining  the 
perfect  participle  getoefen  and  the  infinitive  fein  to  the  present 
of  the  auxiliary  verb  toerben. 

Singular. 


id)  toerbe  getoefen  fern,  I  shall  have  been 
bit  tturft  getoefen  fein,  thou  wilt  have  been 
er  ftrirb  gefaefen  fein,  he  will  have  been 


or,  I  have 
probably 
been,  etc. 


Plural. 

ttrir  toerben  gettefen  fein,  we  shall  have  been  ^ 
ifyr  roerbet  gett)efen  fetn,  you  will  have  been     I   °r>  ™e 
fie  tnerben  gelDefen  fein,  they  will  have  been     \  ^r°  a  y 
@te  merben  getuefen  fein,  you  will  have  been  J 
(a)  And  interrogatively:  tt)erbe  idf)  getpefen  fein?  etc.     Ob- 
serve that  the  participle  and  infinitive  stand  together  at  the  end 
—  the  participle  before  the  infinitive,  reversing  the  English  order. 
NOTE.  —  As  will  be  seen  §  172,  these  form  the  infinitive  perfect. 

VOCABULARY. 

ber  5lugapfel,  the  pupil  (of  the  ber  §ait§f)err,  the  landlord. 

eye),  the  pet.  ba£  §erreiu)cm§,  the  House  of 
ber  5lc!er3mann,  the  husband-  Lords.         [house. 

man.  ba§     SanbfjauS,    the     country- 

ber  S3aumgarten,  the  orchard.  ber   ^anjte^rer,    the    dancing- 
ber  SBIumengarten,  the  flower-  master. 

garden.  bie  ^tnberftube,  the  nursery. 

ber  gelbfjerr,  the  general '(§  97).  bie®an&enfrf)ute,  theboys' -school. 


§   123]  FOREIGN    AND    COMPOUND    NOUNS.  45 

bie  (Stabtmauer,  the  city-wall,    bag  (£t>angerlium,  the  gospel. 
bag  SBorterbud),  the  dictionary,  bag  Saborato'rium,  the  laboratory. 
ber  5lbt,  the  abbot.  bag  SOhife'um,  M*  museum. 

ber  $apft,  the  pope.  ber  ©tubent',  />&<?  student. 

ber  ®onig,  /^^  £/»£•.  bie  Untberfttat',  /V^  university, 

$ren£en,  Prussia.  511,  to,  (dat.). 

EXERCISE  VII. 

i.  2>iefe  <Stabt  ift  reid)  an  (in,  dat.)  Sftonumenten.  2.  $)er 
Kaplan  beg  $8ifcf)ofg  ift  ein  $)o!tor  [ber]  geologic.  3.  £>ie  ®ap= 
lane  ber  $apfte  ftnb  SBifdjbfe.  4.  $)ie  Sorbg  finb  in  bent  §erren= 
^aufe.  5.  3n  bent  SJhifeum  joarcn  goffiticn.  6.  S)ag  SBorterbuci) 
biefeg  ^rofefforg  lotrb  gut  fetn.  7.  S)ie  @o§ne  beg  2)o!torg  h)er= 
ben  ntit  bent  Xanjtefjrer  in  ber  ^inberftube  gewefen  fein.  8.  Un^ 
fere  ^Regimenter  toerben  ntit  bent  getb^errn  an  (at,  dat.)  ber 
(Stabtmauer  fein.  9.  $)ag  93ud^  in  ber  §anb  unfereg  ^aftorg  ift 
ein  SBorterbnd)  511  ben  (St>angelien.  10.  Qn  bent  Sanbl;aufe  beg 
(Srafen  ift  ein  SOiiifeum  t)on  goffttien.  n.  2)ie  ©tnbenten  ber 
Unit>erfttat  finb  in  bent  Saboratorium  beg  ^rofefforg  ber  (S^entie. 
12.  S)ic  5lnttuort  beg  gelb^errn  in  bent  §erren§aufe  tear  fe^r  gut. 

i.  The  hospitals  of  this  town  are  near  (an,  dat.)  the  city- 
wall.  2.  The  kings  of  Prussia  are  rectors  of  the  universi- 
ties [of]  Bonn  and  Berlin.  3.  Here  are  the  materials  for  (§it, 
dat.)  a  dictionary  of  the  gospels.  4.  The  professors  and  the 
doctors  have  been  in  the  orchard  of  the  pastor.  5.  In  the 
museum  of  the  bishop  are  fossils.  6.  The  dancing-master  is 
in  the  nursery  with  the  sons  of  the  general  and  the  daughters 
of  the  professor.  7.  The  monuments  of  this  town  are  very  old. 
8.  These  bishops  are  doctors  of  (the)  theology.  9.  The  flower- 
garden  of  the  abbot  is  large.  10.  The  study  of  the  gospels  is 
the  joy  of  the  student,  n.  The  professor  of  chemistry  is  in 
the  laboratory  with  the  students  of  the  university.  12.  The 
answers  are  in  the  dictionaries. 

REMARK. — The  comprehensive  Table  of  Noun  Declensions  on  the  next 
page  is  intended  only  for  reference  or  review. 


46 


LESSON    VII. 


[§  124 


124.  In  this  table  w,  /",  ^  =  masculine,  feminine,  neuter; 
*,  modified  vowel ;  — ,  monosyllable ;  — f  — ,  or  —  — ',  poly- 
syllable, with  accent;  -,  ending.  The  numbers  (IV)  (V)  are 
used  for  convenience.  Remember  that  feminine  nouns  are 
unchanged  in  the  singular. 


MIXED 

*          1   I  %-  § 

«•  1  1  1  s  i 

T  Y 

S     S     si     a' 

M 

v 

a 

£ 

~  ^   I  T  S  **  ° 

Y 

o 

T      II 

'GO 

a 

*           "     8 

o> 

^*^     ^^ 

*« 

^ 

0> 

w 

ft 

^  ^  ^  S     g 

a 

S              «    ^  vi     3    «S 

^S 

o 

fe 

fl_l 

TT  i  s  ^ 

R      S       R       R 

0 

OS 

H^ 

S 

o 

>H.      ".        4) 

*       P  a  1 

O 

55 

•N            v,/                            l^        t-H            1          J—  » 

'os 

k» 

o 

e*    • 

H 

~                              «           |        V           4 

"*!*" 

ce 

C/2 

i  •  T  T  i  "«" 

8*    *S    «     S    S 

G>        ^J 
t          «*^-                                         » 

-      1                     £ 

C             ^ 

0^ 

I 

s         cS    ° 

& 

1  1  1  1  1 

Q      hH       « 

00 

bJO 
(3 

1           *       1        «       < 

»                                          |          S         «         «s       N^ 

T 


s 

«(     -V 


s; 


I II 


§  125]  GENDER    OF    NOUNS.  47 


Gender  of  Nouns. 

125.  The  gender  of  nouns  is  important  in  itself,  and  also 
because  it  largely  determines  declension.  But,  as  already  seen, 
gender  is  in  German  to  a  great  extent  independent  of  mean- 
ing ;  and  as  to  the  form  of  words,  no  -sufficient  general  rules 
can  be  given.  The  following  are  some  of  the  most  useful : 

I.  Generally  :  Sex  names  and  appellations  will  follow  the  sex  ;  except,  ba§ 

SBeifc,  the  woman ;  ba§  Sftenfrf),  the  -wench ;  and  neuter  diminutives  in 
-crjen,  -tetn. 

II.  Masculine  are:    i.  Nouns   ending  in  -ig,  -id),  -ling,  -m ;    and  most 

nouns  ending  in  -el,  -en,  -er. 

2.  Most  strong  derivatives  ;  that  is,  derivatives  formed  of  verb  roots 

without  suffix.     (See  §  382-3.) 

3.  Names  of  winds,  seasons,  months,  days,  mountains. 

III.  Feminine  are :  i.  Most  nouns  in -e,  not  of  masculine  meaning,  and 

not  beginning  with  ge-. 

2.  Derivatives  in  -t,  -ei,  -rjeit,  -!ett,  -fdjaft,  -ung,  -in,  -ie,  -ton,  -ur. 

3.  Most  abstract  nouns  ;  and  most  names  of  plants,  trees,  flowers. 

IV.  Neuter  are:  i.  Most  derivatives  with  prefix  ge-,  or  suffix  -nt3,  -turn. 

2.  All  diminutives  ending  in  -cfjen,  -lein. 

3.  Infinitives,  and  other  parts  of  speech,  used  as  nouns  (unless  de- 

noting persons). 

4.  Most  collective  nouns ;  most  names  of  countries,  places,  metals. 

5.  Many  generic  names  of  animals  —  without  regard  to  sex. 

V.  Foreign  nouns  usually  retain  their  original  gender. 

VI.  Compound  nouns  follow  the  gender  of  their  last  component.     (Ex- 

ceptions, see  §  122.) 

VII.  Some  nouns  have  two  genders,  with  a  difference  of  meaning;  as,  bet 
SSanb,  ba§  SBanb,  etc.     These  will  be  referred  to  hereafter.     (§  426.) 

VIII.  Some  nouns  are  of  uncertain  gender,  or  at  least  of  divided  usage. 
These  details  must  be  found  in  the  dictionary. 


48  LESSON    VIII.  [§   126 

126.  Yet,  after  all  rules,  the  gender  of  German  nouns  must 
be  learned  largely  by  experience.  The  subject  should,  there- 
fore, receive  the  constant  attention  of  the  student.  Especially 
it  is  recommended  that  the  habit  should  be  formed  of  associa- 
ting, with  every  noun  that  is  learned,  the  appropriate  form  of 
the  definite  article,  and  of  regularly  using  the  article  when 
naming  a  noun ;  as,  ber  QUQ,  bie  3ucl)tf  ba§ 


LESSON  VIIL 
The  Declension  of  Adjectives. 

127.  Adjectives  used  as  the  predicate  —  that  is,  in  con- 
nection with   the  verb  —  are  not  declined ;  as  has  been 
seen  already. 

128.  Adjectives   used    appositively  —  that   is  after  the 
noun  —  are  also  not  declined  ;  as,  bie  SBaume,  grofj  urtb  griirt, 
the  trees,  large  and  green. 

NOTE.  —  This  may  be  considered  as  a  kind  of  elliptical  predicate  con- 
struction, for  the  trees  (which  are)  large  and  green. 

129.  Adjectives  used    attributively  —  that    is    before  a 
noun,  expressed  or  understood  —  are  declined  ;  also  adjec- 
tives when  used  as  nouns. 

130.  There  are  two  declensions  of  the  attributive  ad- 
jective,  the  strong  and   the   weak.     The  combination  of 
these  forms  the  mixed  declension.     (See  §  166). 

NOTE. — The  term  adjective  here  includes  only  qualifying  adjectives, 
not  the  pronominals. 


§   132]          STRONG    DECLENSION    OF    ADJECTIVES.  49 

The  Strong  Declension  of  Adjectives. 

131.  When  the  attributive  adjective  is  not  preceded  by 
one  of  the  articles,  or  by  any  other  pronominal  adjective 
of  like  inflection,  it  takes  the  endings  of  biefer  (§  86). 

NOTE.  —  It  is  usual  to  speak  of  this  declension  as  like  that  of  the  defi- 
nite article.     But  see  §  87. 

132.  These  endings  are  (see  §  86)  : 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

masc.  fern.  neut.  m*f-  n. 

Nom.  -er  -e  -e§  -e 

Gen.    -e§  -er  -e§  -er 

Dat.    -em  -er  -em  -en 

Ace.    -en  -e  -e£  -e 

Similarly,  all  adjective  pronouns,  except  those  in  §  88. 
With  these  endings  decline  in  full,  both  horizontally  and 
vertically,  the  adjectives  gut,  fd)tecf)t,  alt,  j[ung,  neit,  graft,  rtein, 
etc.     Decline  also  with  nouns,  as  follows  (but  see  §  133): 

EXAMPLES. 

MASCULINE. 
Singular.  Plural. 

N.  guter  SSein,  good  wine.  gute  SSeine,  good  wines. 

G.  gute§*  2Seine§,  of  good  wine,  guter  SBeitte,  of  good  wines. 

D.  gutem  SSeme,  to  good  wine.  guten  SSeinen,  to  good  wines. 

A.  guten  28ein,  good  wine.  gute  SBeine,  good  wines. 

FEMININE. 
Singular.  Plural. 

N.  grofje  greube,  great  joy.  grofje  greuben,  great  joys. 

G.  grower  greube,  grower  greuben, 

D.  grower  Sreube,  gro^en  greuben, 

A.  gro^e  greube.  gro^e  greuben. 

*Or  Qitten,  as  §  133. 


5°  LESSON    VIII.  [§  133 

NEUTER. 
Singular.  Plural. 

N.  fetne§  %\\§,fine  cloth.  '  feine  £iid)er, 

G.  feineS*  £udE)e3,  feiner  £iid)er, 

D.  fetnem  £ucf)e,  feinen  £iid)ern, 

A.  feine§  £udj.  feine  £iid)er. 

133.  Before  masculine  and  neuter  genitives  in  e3  or  3, 
the  adjective  genitive  now  usually  ends  in  en  instead  of  e£. 
Thus  :  gutett  2Beine£,  femen  £ud)e<§,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  This  ig_tojivoid  iggetition  of  the  same  strong  form. 

PRESENT  INDICATIVE  OF  THE  VERB  Ijaklt,  to  have. 

Singular.  Plural. 

id)  f)afo,  /  have.  ttrir  ^aben,  we  have. 

bu  ^aft,  thou  hast.  if)r  ^a6tr  j^«  ^^z/^. 

er  I)atr  he  has.  fie  Ijaben,  they  have. 

fie  Ijat,  J^<?  has.  (gie  §CLbtn,y0u  have.^ 

etc. 


VOCABULARY. 

blau,  blue.  fd)tt)arjf  black.  ber  ^pta^,  the  place,  square 


gelb,  yellow.       rot,  ra/.  Iteb,  ^?^r.     bie  ^piitte,  M*  //«/,  cottage. 
luet^  white.        breit,  broad.  bie  ^flf(i)cf  //^^  bottle. 

EXERCISE  VIII. 

i.  $n  ben  (Garten  be§  giirften  finb  grogef  griine  Dannie  unb 
fd)bne  btaue  iinb  getbe  33lumen.  2.  SSeifseg  S3rot  ift  gut,  aber 
fd)tt>ar§e§  ift  au$  gut.  3.  $)te  ©olbaten  ^aben  btaue  ober  rote 
9tbtfe.  4.  $ari§  unb  Sonbon  finb  gro§e  ©tabtc.  5.  §ier  finb 
tange  ©tra^en  unb  breite  ^latje.  6.  ©ute  ^inber  finb  bie  greube 
unb  ifjrer  Gutter.  7.  gleigtge  @d)iiler  ^aben  nii^= 


*  Or  feinen.     t  See  *,  p. 


§134]  WEAK    DECLENSION    OF    ADJECTIVES  5  1 


licfye  23itd)er.  8.  $aft  bu  btaue3  ober  toetfte^  papier  ?  9.  3d) 
Ijabe  rote§.  10.  £>at  er  roteg  papier  ?  n.  (£r  rjat  toetfteg.  12. 
9Kehte  SBriiber  {jabett  neite  9£ode  uub  neue  $antoffel(it),  aber  alte 
©ttefel(n).  13.  S)te  §aufer  reiser  giirften  finb  grofj,  aber  bie 
§iittett  armer  SBauern  finb  fleut.  14.  fitter  greunb,  too  btft  bit? 
15.  StebeS  ®tnb,  neue  SB.udjer  finb  oft  fd)led)t  ;  gute  23itd)er  finb 
oft  alt.  1  6.  (Sine  gtafdje  roten  2Seine§  ift  auf  (on,  dat.)  bent 


i.  The  streets  of  large  towns  are  long.  2.  This  (bte§)  is  a 
day  of  great  joy.  3.  Young  children  and  old  men  were  in  the 
garden  of  the  prince.  4.  Have  you  new  slippers,  new  hats, 
and  new  coats?  5.  The  houses  of  poor  peasants  are  often 
small  huts.  6.  Dear  brother,  you  *  are  the  joy  of  your  father. 
7.  Dear  sister,  you  are  the  joy  of  your  mother.  8.  Good 
scholars  are  industrious.  9.  Have  these  soldiers  blue  or  red 
coats?  10.  They  have  red  [ones],  n.  Have  you  |  warm  water? 
12.  We  have  cold  [water].  13.  My  father  has  good  old  friends. 
14.  In  the  nursery  are  good  beds.  15.  Dear  children,  you  $  are 
industrious.  16.  I  am  the  teacher  of  industrious  boys.  17. 
She  has  sharp  needles.  18.  They  have  bottles  of  old  wine. 


LESSON  IX. 
Weak  Declension  of  Adjectives. 

134.  When  the  attributive  adjective  is  preceded  by  the 
definite  article  or  an  adjective  pronoun  of  three  termina- 
tions (§  87),  it  loses  its  own  distinctive  endings ;  that  is, 
it  takes  in  the  nominative  singular  of  all  three  genders, 
and  in  the  accusative  singular  feminine  and  neuter,  the 
termination  -e,  and  in  all  other  cases  of  the  singular  and 
plural,  -en.  This  is  called  the  weak  declension. 

*  Use  bit,  bein.     t  Use  @ie.     J  See  §  187. 


52                                                     LESSON    IX.  [§  135 

The  combined  endings,  pronominal  and  adjective,  will 
then  be  (the  former  strong,  the  latter  weak)  : 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

masc.                     fern.                   neut.  m-f>  n. 

Nom.  —  er  -e           -e    -e             -e§  —  e  —  e    -en 

Gen.    -e§  -en        -er  -en            -e§  -en  -er  -en 

Dat.     -em  -en         -er  -en            -em  -en  -en  -en 

Ace.    -en  -en        -e    -e             -e§  -e  -e    -en 


Thus  decline,  masc.  bicfer  alte  ;  fern,  btefe  atte  ;  »<?«/.  btefe§  cite.  Sim- 
ilarly, ber  gute,  bie  gute,  ba§  gute  (bearing  in  mind  the  peculiarities  of  the 
definite  article).  For  the  adjective  endings  alone,  see  Synopsis,  p.  67. 

It  may  be  noted  that  the  weak  endings  of  the  adjective  are  the  same  as 
of  the  weak  masc.  noun  ber  $nafce  (§  96),  except  in  the  accus.  sing.  fern. 
and  neut.,  where  the  nom.  ending  -e  remains  unchanged.  Also,  that  there 
are  onlyy?z/<?  forms  in  -e,  all  others  -en.  Other  endings,  -er,  -e3,  -em  are 
always  strong. 

135.  It  will  be  observed  that  the  declension  of  the  adjec- 
tive itself  is  here  less  explicit,  the  forms  of  gender,  number, 
case  being  for  the  most  part  expressed  by  the  foregoing  pro- 
nominal. It  is  therefore  to  the  latter,  chiefly,  that  in  this 
combination  the  student  will  look  to  determine  the  form  of 
the  adjective  or  of  the  noiin. 


EXAMPLES. 
MASCULINE. 

Xicfcr  (mine  SBattm,  this  green  tree. 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.  biefer  grime  SBaum,  btefe  griinen  33anme, 

G.  btefe§  griinen  33anme§,          biefer  griinen  SBtiume, 
D.  biefem  griinen  23aume,  biefen  griinen  $aumenf 

A.  biefen  griinen  33cmm.  btefe  griinen 


8  135]  WEAK    DECLENSION    OF   ADJECTIVES.  53 

FEMININE. 
£$ene  fdjbnc  £$vatt,  that  beautiful  woman. 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.  jene  fcfyone  grau,  jene  fcfyimen  grauen, 

G.  jener  fcfybnen  gr  an,  jener  fcfybnen  granen, 

D.  jener  fcfybnen  gran,  jenen  fcfybnen  grauen, 

A.  jene  fd)bne  grau.  jene  fc£)bnen  Srauen. 

NEUTER. 

$$el$e3  altc  Srfjlo^,  H-A/C/I  old  castle. 
Singular.  Plural. 

N.  tsetses  alte  <Sd)to6,  n>etd)e  alten  ©d^toffer, 

G.  tt>efdl)e§  alten  ©c^toffe§f       tDetdier  alten  (Sdjlbffer, 
D.  ttjelc^em  atten  <Sd)toffe,        tt>et(^en  atten  ©d^Ioffern, 
A.  toetd)e§  altc  @4log.  meld^e  alten  <Sd)loffer. 


Decline  in  the  same  way:  jeber  treue  S^eunb,  ber  gitte 
Slnabe,  bie  liebe  ^od^ter,  ba§  neue  §au§,  etc.,  etc. 

(a)  The  (^  of  ^oi^  is  changed  into  Ij,  in  all  inflections,  be- 
fore c  (§  156):  ber  l)ol)e  23erg,  the  high  mountain;  fjolje  3^annenf 
tall  firs. 

Let  he  teacher  add  similar  examples  ;  and  also,  such  as  the  following: 
Determine  gender,  number,  case  of  be§  alten  2ftanne3,  ben  alten  3ftann,  ber 
neuen  Sitter,  ben  neuen  Silvern,  etc.  And  point  out  ambiguity  of  form; 
as  in  bie  alien  banner  (nom.  or  ace.  pi.),  ben  guten  $na&en  (ace.  sing,  or  dat. 
pi.),  etc.  Also,  given  the  gender  of  the  noun,  decline,  from  root-forms 
only  •  bief-  fjolj-  S3aum,  jen-  blau-  SSlume  ;  or  with  the  article  :  b-  lang- 
Safjr,  etc.  etc. 

REMARK.  —  This  is  really  a  combined  declension  of  the  adjec- 
tive with  the  preceding  pronominal.  The  adjective  endings 
occur  only  when  so  preceded,  and  the  two  together  determine 
the  form.  For  this  reason  the  paradigms  have  been  given  in 
combination.  The  same  principle  applies  to  the  mixed  de- 
clension. (Less.  X.) 


54  LESSON    IX.  [§   135 


THE   PAST  INDICATIVE  OF 
Singular.  Plural. 

id)  fjatte,  I  had.  ttur  fatten,  we  had. 

bu  fjatteft,  thou  hadst.  ifjr  Ijattet,  you  had. 

er  Ijatte,  he  had.  fie  Ijatten,  they  had. 

Sing,  or  Plur.,  <Sie  fatten,  you  had. 

VOCABULARY. 

§tt)ei,  ta>0.  ber^orben,  the  North.  \t\\,  fat. 

ber  (Sdmee,  the  snow,  ber  (Siiben,  //^  South,  preutjifd),  Prussian. 

bie  (£rbe,  the  earth,      ber  SKaler,  the  painter,  englifdj,  English. 

world.  [land,  bebecft,  covered.  franjofifd),  French. 

bie  Scfytteij,  Switzer-  beruljmt,  famous.  unter,  ««^r. 

EXERCISE  IX. 

i.  3)er  juuge  ®omcj  itnb  ber  alte  fjiirft  finb  in  bent  graven 
©d^toffe  be§  reict)en  (S^rafen.  2.  gene  alte  gran  f)at  jtoei  f(^one 
Socfyter.  3.  S)te  llein^n  ^naben  fatten  neue  9iorfe.  4.  S)ic  tiefett 
toiler  unb  bie  ^o^en  ®ebirge  [ber]  @(i)tt)et§  finb  mit  griinen  Xan- 
nen  unb  mit  toeigent  @(^nee  bebecft.  5.  2)ie  ftarfen  SSoIfer  ber 
(£rbe  finb  in  bem  fatten  9?orben.  6.  S)ie  S^enfc^en  in  bent  h)ar= 
men  (Siiben  finb  fd^ma^.  7.  3)ie  tuarmen  Saber  ber  fteinen  after 
alten  ©tabt  @m§  finb  beriif)mt.  8.  S)ie  rei(i)en  Sauern  fjatten 
fd)bne  §aufer.  9.  fatten  bie  ®tnber  be^  beru^mten  $rofeffor§ 
ba»  gro§e  neue  SSorterbuc^  be§  [§errn]  ®o!tpr  ©^toarj  ?  10.  @ie 
fatten  bie  alte  ®rammatil  unfereS  guten  Se^rer^.  n.  2)te  fetten 
£)d)fen  unb  ^ii^e  finb  unter  ben  fjoljen  S3dumen  in  bem  griinen 
getbe.  12.  fatten  bie  fleifjigen  (Sd^iiter  bie  nene  ©rammati!  be§ 
berii^mten  ^rofefforg?  13.  Unter  ben  §of)en  53dumen  in  bent 
grofjen  SSatbe  tft  noi^  tiefer,  toetjjer  @(^nee. 

i.  The  young  princes  are  with  their  English  teacher  in  the 
king's  new  castle.  2.  This  high  tree  has  green  leaves.  3.  The 
famous  old  count  had  two  young  children.  4.  The  blue  coats 


§   138]  MIXED    DECLENSION    OF    ADJECTIVES.  55 

of  the  Prussian  soldiers.  5.  The  red  coats  of  the  English 
soldiers.  6.  The  French  grammar  of  this  famous  professor.  7. 
In  the  beautiful  houses  of  these  rich  ladies  are  the  paintings  of 
famous  painters.  8.  This  famous  painter  has  been  in  the  South 
of  England.  9.  The  snow  of  the  cold  North  is  deep.  10.  Those 
white  flowers  are  from  (au§>,  dat.)  our  new  garden,  n.  The 
green  fields  are  covered  with  white  snow.  12.  The  warm  beds 
of  the  little  children  are  in  the  nursery.  13.  This  Englishman 
and  this  American  have  been  on  (cmf,  with  the  dative}  the  high 
mountains  of  Switzerland.  14.  The  long  streets  of  this  old 
town  are  broad.  15.  The  new  names  of  the  old  streets  of  Paris. 
1 6.  This  old  teacher  is  the  good  friend  of  the  poor  scholars. 
NOTE. —  Use  the  article  with  feminine  names  of  countries. 


LESSON  X. 
The  Mixed  Declension  of  Adjectives. 

136.  It  has  been  seen  that  when  the  distinctive  endings 
of  gender,  number,  case,  are  expressed  by  the  preceding 
word,  these  are  not  repeated  by  the  adjective,  in  the  weak 
declension.     The    same   principle  determines  the  mixed 
declension. 

137.  When  the  adjective  is  preceded  by  the  indefinite 
article,  or  by  one  of  the  pronominals  declined  like  it  (§  88), 
it  takes  the  distinctive  forms  of  the    strong   declension 
where  these  words  are  without    ending  ;  that  is,  in    the 
singular   nominative,    er   for    the    masculine,    e§  for    the 
neuter  ;  and  e3  also  for  the  accusative  neuter.    In  all  other 
parts  the  endings  follow  the  weak  declension. 

138.  The  combined  endings,  pronominal  and  adjective, 
will  then  be  as  follows : 


SINGULAR. 

masc. 

fern. 

neut. 

Nom.  —    -er 

-e   -e 

—    -e3 

Gen.    -e§  -en 

-er  -en 

-e§  -en 

Dat.    -em  -en 

-er  -en 

-em  -en 

Ace.    -en  -en 

-e   -e 

—    -e$ 

56  LESSON    X.  [§   138 

PLURAL. 
m.  f.  n. 
-e  -en 
-er  -en 
-en  -en 
-e  -en 

—  the  adjective  differing  from  the  weak  declension  only  in 
the  forms  printed  with  heavy  type.     (See  §  134.) 

(£)  It  is  this  form  of  the  adjective,  partly  strong  and  partly 
weak,  that  gives  rise  to  the  term  mixed  declension.  But  it  must 
be  observed  that  there  are  only  two  possible  forms  of  the  ad- 
jective —  one,  strong,  when  not  preceded  by  a  determining 
ending,  one,  weak,  when  so  preceded.  In  the  former  it  is  the 
adjective  itself,  in  the  latter  the  determining  word,  that  must 
be  looked  to,  for  gender,  number,  case.  (See  §  166). 

NOTE.  —  Observe  that  the  endings  -e  of  fern.  nom.  and  accus.  sing., 
and  -en  of  masc.  sing,  and  dat.  plur.  remain  always  the  same.  Also,  that 
in  adjectives  as  well  as  in  nouns,  fern,  and  neut.  accusatives  are  always 
like  the  nominatives  (§  73).  So,  too,  in  pronouns  (as  hereafter). 

MASCULINE. 
(gin  IjoOcr  $8erg,  a  high  mountain. 

Singular.  No  Plural* 

N.  etn  fiofjer 
G.  eine§  Ijoljen 
D.  etnem  Ijofjen 
A.  etnen  Ijofjen 

FEMININE. 

3Rcinc  ItciJe  Srfjtocfrer,  my  dear  sister. 
Singular.  Plural  (weak). 

N.  metne  liebe  ©cfytoefter,  metne  lieben  (5d)tt)eftern, 

G.  metner  lieben  (Scfytoefter,  metner  lieben  ©djtoeftern, 

D.  metner  lieben  (Sdjjtoefter,  metnen  lieben  ©cfymeftern, 

A.  metne  liebe  @ci)tt>efter.  metne  lieben  <3d)tt)eftern. 

*The  indef.  art.  has  no  plural.  But :  $etne  fjoljen  93erge,  no  high  moun- 
tains, etc.  as  below. 


§  143]  DECLENSION    OF    ADJECTIVES.  57 

NEUTER. 


Singular.  Plural  (weak). 

N.  fein  Dotted  <$tta§,  feme  Gotten  ®lcifer, 

G.  feine§  fcotten  ®lafe§,  fetner  botten  ©lafer, 

D.  fetnem  batten  (Slafe,  feinen  batten  ®tafern, 

A.  fein  Dotted  ®ta§.  feine  botten  ®Icifer. 


REMARKS  ON  ADJECTIVE  DECLENSION. 

139.  Adjectives  ending  in  the  unaccented  syllables  e(,  en,  er, 
usually  reject  the  e  either  of  the  termination  or  of  the  declen- 
sional ending  :  ebel,  noble,  is  usually  declined  ebler,  eble,  eble§  ; 
felten,  rare,  feltner,  feltne,  fettncS  ;  Better,  cheerful,  fjettrer,  ^eitre, 
^eitre§  ;  but  sometimes  (before  n  or  m)  ebeln,  Ijetterm  (§85,. 
note.) 

140.  Adjectives  used,  as    nouns  retain  the  declension  of 
adjectives.    Thus :  beiitfd),  German ;  em  S)eutfd^er,  a  German; 
eme§  ©eutfd^en,  of  a  German;  etne  2)eutf(^e,  a  German  woman; 
bie  £eutfd)enf  the  Germans  ;  bie  Sltte,  ^^  old  woman  ;  ber  D^etc^e, 
//^^  nV/;  w^/z;  bie  9leid)en,  the  rich  (persons);  ba§  ©ute,  the  good 
(abstract). 

141.  Participles,  when  used  attributively,  are  declined  as 
adjectives;    as,  tiebenb,  loving;    geliebt,   loved;    ein  liebenber 
^3rnber,  a  loving  brother;  ber  geliebte  S^^unb,  the  loved  friend. 
Also  when  used  as  nouns :  ein  Stebenber,  a  lover;  bie  ®eliebter 
the  beloved  (one) ;  bie  (Mtebten,  the  beloved  (ones). 

142.  Adjectives,  generally,  may  be  used,  without  inflection, 
as  adverbs  :  er  f^reibt  fc()nett,  he  writes  rapidly. 

143.  Adjectives  in  cr,   derived  from  names  of  places,  are 
indeclinable :    ba§   ^peibetberger  ^afj,   the  Heidelberg  tun;   ber 
Joiner  £om,  the  Cathedral  of  Cologne.     (See  §  395,  3). 


58  LESSON    X.  [§   144 

144.  ©cm^,  whole,  and  Ijalb,  half,  are  indeclinable  when  used 
alone  before  the  names  of  countries  and  places,  but  are  else- 
where declined.     Thus  :  ganj  (Snglanb,  all  England;  but  fca§ 
ganae  (Sngtanb  ;  f)alb  Scmbon,  bie  fjalbe  (Sdjmci^,  em  fjalber  £aler. 

145.  The    neuter   termination    e§   of    the   nominative    and 
accusative  sing,  is  frequently  dropped  in  familiar  conversation 
and  in  poetry.     Thus  :  Sieb  ®tnbtein,  dear  child;  alt  (Sifett,  old 
iron;  fait  SSaffer,  cold  water;  ein  firmer  &erbred)cn,  0  heavy 
crime. 

146.  The  declension  of  the  adjective  remains  the  same  if  its 
noun  is  understood.     In  this  case  the  English  one,  ones,  are 
not  expressed  in  German  ;  as,  ein  retfer  5lpfet  uttb  etn  unretfer  ; 
a  ripe  apple  and  an  unripe  one. 

147.  Two  or  more  adjectives  under  the  same  circumstances 
will  take  the  same  declension  ;  as,  mein  lieber,  alter  $reunb, 
my  dear  old  friend  ;  ber  tie  be,  alte  9ftann,  the  dear  old  man. 

NOTE.  —  Sometimes,  especially  in  poetry,  occurs  a  euphonic  form  in 
-e,  as  fyelle  for  rjelt,  etc. 


THE  PERFECT  AND  PLUPERFECT  OF 

148.  The  perfect  and  pluperfect  of  the  verb  fjabert  are 
formed,  as  in  English,  by  adding  the  perfect  participle  ge- 
fjdbt,  had,  to  the  present  and  past  tenses  of  the  same  verb. 

PERFECT. 
Singular.  Plural. 

id)  fjabe  gefjabt,  I  have  had.        rotr  fjaben  gefjabt,  we  have  had. 
tm  fjaft  ge^abt,  thou  hast  had.     ujr  ^abt  gel)abt,  you  have  had. 
er  §at  ge()abtf  he  has  had.  fie  fjaben  ge^abt,  they  have  had.* 

PLUPERFECT. 
Singular.  Plural. 

i(J)  Ijatte  ge^abt,  I  had  had.  totr  fatten  ge^abt,  we  had  had. 
tm  I)atteft  gef)abt,  thou  hadst  had.  i^r  l^attet  ge^abt,  you  had  had. 
er  rjatte  gefjabt,  he  had  had.  fie  fatten  ge^abt,  they  had  had. 

*  The  plural  form  <Bte,  you,  for  one  or  more  persons,  is  hereafter  to  be 
understood  in  all  verb  inflections. 


§   148]  DECLENSION    OF    ADJECTIVES.  59 

VOCABULARY. 

bie  23ibliotf)e!f  the  library.  gliicfltd),  happy. 

ba§  Sanbgut,  the  estate.  an'geneljm,  agreeable,  pleasant. 

ba§  &leib,  the  dress,  garment.      f  eiben,  silken,  silk. 

bie  SSefte,  the  vest,  waistcoat.      fiijj,  sweet. 

bte  3eit,  the  time.  fauer,  J0«r. 

bte  Settling,  the  newspaper.         reif,  r#*. 

ber  gran§o'fe,  /^  Frenchman,    nnreif,  unripe. 

ber  SRIjein,  M*  Rhine.  fbniglicfy,  /vy^/. 

ba§  ®lfi(t,./MiK**,  /«^.  nicfyt,  «0/. 

bie  ©pracfye,  the  speech,  language,  immer,  always. 

EXERCISE  X. 

i.  S)er  atte  ©olbat  ^atte  etrtett  roten  9^od  ge^abt.  2.  (Sin 
fc£)tt>ar5er  §utf  etne  btaue  SSefte  unb  ein  n?et§e§  §emb»  3.  Sftetne 
@d)tDefter  I;at  ein  feibne3  ^letb.  4.  %K  ber  fontgttcfyen 
finb  englifc^e,  fran^bfifdje  unb  betttfdje  SBiic^er.  5.  3< 
beutfd)e§  SSorterbudE).  6.  9^etne  ©c^mefter  §at  ein 
SSorterbitd)  geljabt.  7.  §at  fie  eine  englifcfye  (^rammati!  ge^abt? 
8.  Gnn  reifer  5lpfet  ift  fii§,  aber  ein  unreifer  ift  fatter.  9. 
groge  Sanbgnt  ift  ba§  digentnnt  einer  alten  S)ame.  10.  (S 
SSetter  ift  5llten  unb  ^urtgen  (dat.)  angene^m.  1  1.  S)a§  (Stubium 
ber  ©pradtjen  ift  fefjr  niiyid).  12.  5)te  9Md)en  finb  nidt)t  immer 
gliicflid).  13.  Sfteine  ^Briiber  fatten  gro^e§  ®ltic!  ge()abt.  14.  §aft 
bu  bie  Joiner  3eitnng,  mcin  guter  $nabe?  15.  SSir  t)aOen  feine 
3eit  ge^abt.  16.  (Sin  ®uter  (iebt  (loves)  ba§  ©utef  ein  (Sbler 


i.  We  have  no  German  and  no  French  books.  2.  My  Eng- 
lish dictionary  is  a  good  book.  3.  My  brother  has  had  no 
time.  4.  Has  your  sister  no  black  dress  ?  5.  Masson's  Gram- 
mar of  the  French  language  is  a  very  useful  book.  6.  In  the 
royal  library  are  French  grammars  and  English  dictionaries. 
7.  The  gentleman  with  the  white  hat  is  an  old  general.  8.  In 
this  long  street  is  a  large  old  house  ;  it  is  the  boysSschool.  9. 
Ripe  apples  are  sweet,  but  unripe  [ones]  are  sour.  10.  The 


60  LESSON    XI.  [§  149 

Rhine  is  a  large  river,  n.  The  language  of  the  Germans  is 
the  German  language.  12.  The  language  of  the  French  is  the 
French  language.  13.  The  old  and  the  young  were  happy. 
14.  The  Rhine  was  not  always  a  German  river.  15.  Have 
you  had  the  Cologne  newspaper?  16.  Had  the  scholars  had 
new  books?  17.  Every  good  child  had  had  a  beautiful  flow- 
er. 1 8.  All  Germany  was  under  the  noble  old  German  em- 
peror (dat.). 

LESSON    XL 
Comparison  of  Adjectives. 

149.  The  comparative  and  superlative  of  adjectives  are 
formed  by  adding  er  for  the  comparative  and  (e)ft  for  the 
superlative. 

150.  The    e    of    the    superlative    ending    is    regularly 
dropped,  except  after  b,  tf   and  the  sibilants  £,  5,  fc,  frf). 
Adjectives  ending  in  el,  en,  er,  e,  drop  e  before  the  com- 
parative er  (§  1 39). 

EXAMPLES. 

Positive.  Comparative.  Superlative. 

laut,  loud,  tauter,  lauteft. 

fiifj,  sweet,  fufeer,  fiifceft. 

f(i)dtt,  beautiful,  jcfyoner,  fd^onft. 

ret(i)f  rich,  reiser,  reidjft. 

ebel,  noble,  ebter,  ebelft. 

trage,  lazy,  trager,  trag(e)ft. 

151.  Most  monosyllabic  adjectives  whose  vowel  is  a,  o, 
or  it  (not   au)  modify  the  vowel  in  the  comparative  and 
superlative. 

att,  old,  alter,  citteft. 

rot,  red,  roter,  roteft. 

,  short,  fiirjer.  !iir§eft. 


§   I56]  COMPARISON    OF    ADJECTIVES.  6 1 

152.  Some  of  the  adjectives  which  do  not  modify  the  vowel 
in  the  comparative  and  superlative  are :  — 

brat),  goodv  worthy.  rafdj,  quick. 

bunt,  variegated,  gay.  ftotj,  proud. 

falfd),  false.  tott,  mad. 

frof),  joyful^  happy.  t)off,/«//. 

laf)m,  lame.  oftfynt,  tame, 

(a)  A  few  adjectives  use  both  forms;  as,  fromm,  pious, 
frommer  or  frommer,  frommft  or  frb'mmft. 

153.  A  comparison  of  equality  is  expressed  by  placing  fo 
or  cben  fo  (even  so]  before  the  adjective,  and  after  it  ttrie  or, 
after  a  negative,  also  al§,  as.     §err  ©dfymtbt  ift  eben  fo  reid)  ttrie 
§err  ©cfyulje,  Mr.  Schmidt  is  as  rich  as  Mr.  Schulze.     ^perr 
§etnrtc!)  ift  etn  eben  fo  brafcer  Sftann  ttrie  §err  Gutter,  Mr. 
Henry  is  as  worthy  a  man  as  Mr.  Muller.     (5r  ift  ntc£)t  fo  ebet 
al§  Hug,  he  is  not  as  noble  as  prudent  (§450,  2). 

154.  The  English  than  is  expressed  by  at§.    Thus :  £)te  £age 
finb  longer  tm  <Sommer  al§  tm  SSinter,  the  days  are  longer  in 
summer  than  in  winter. 

155.  Comparatives  and  superlatives  are  subject  to  the 
same    rules   of    declension    as    the   positive.     Thus :    em 
reicfjerer  9#armf  a  richer  man;  ber  reid)fte  SJ^ann,  the  richest 
man;  retd)ere  Scanner,  richer  men;  mem  dttefter  ^Bruber  ift 
reiser  al3  i(^f  my  eldest  brother  is  richer  than  I,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  The  er  of  the  comparative  must  not  be  confounded  with  the 
er  of  the  adjective  inflection ;  as,  retdjer  may  be  either  positive  or  compar- 
ative, in  different  positions.  Note  also  that  all  adjectives  are  compared 
alike,  without  regard  to  their  length. 

156.  The  following  are  irregular  :  — 

gut,  goo^  beffer,  beft,  ber  befte. 

biel,  much)  mefjr,  meift,  ber  meifte. 

toenig,  little)  tntnber,  mtnbeft,  ber  tmnbefte. 

but  also  regular :  toemger,  trjemgft,  ber  toemgfte. 


62  LESSON    XI.  [§  157 

§oc(),  high,  changes  d)  to  ^  (§135?  0)  in  the  comparative, 
fjofyer,-  l)bcf)ft,  ber  t)5d)j"te.  The  §  of  naf),  ^^r,  nafjer,  becomes 
d)  in  the  superlative  :  ncid)ft,  ber  ncid)fte.  ($roJ3,  great,  tall,  gro= 
£er,  is  contracted  in  the  superlative  :  ber  grojste,  instead  of  ber 


157.  From  erft,  Ie£t  (ber  erfte,  the  first,  ber  te^te,  the  last}, 
which  are  really  superlatives,  are  formed  the  new  comparatives: 
ber  erftere,  the  former,  ber  le^tere,  the  latter.     Similarly,  mefjrerc, 
several,  from  mef)r,  more.     (Compare  the  English  lesser.} 

158.  The  following    adjectives,    derived   from    adverbs   or 
prepositions,  are  comparatives  in  form,  but  have  the  meaning 
of  simple  adjectives.     They  form  their  superlative  by  adding 
the  superlative  suffix  of  the  comparative  :  — 

ober,  upper;  (ber  obere)  ber  oberfte,  the  uppermost. 

unter,  under  ;  ber  unterfte,  the  undermost. 

inner,  inner;  ber  innerfte,  the  inmost. 

aufjer,  outer;  ber  cruder  fte,  the  outmost. 

borber,./^/  ber  fcorberfte,  the  foremost. 

f)tnter,  hinder;  ber  fjtnterfte,  the  hindmost. 

nuttier,  middle  ;  ber  mtttelfte,  the  middlemost. 


THE   FUTURE  OF    Jjafieit. 

159.  The  future  of  the  verb  ^aben  is  formed  by  adding 
the  infinitive  fyabert  to  the  present  tense  of  the  auxiliary 
verb  toerbert  —  the  infinitive  at  end  of  the  clause  (as  §  1 14). 

id)  tuerbe  fjaben,  I  shall  have,  fair  fterfcen  fjaben,  we  shall  have, 
bu  ftrirft  ^aben,  thou  wilt  have,  ifjr  tDerbet  ^aben,  you  will  have. 
er  n)trb  ^aben,  he  will  have.  fie  n)erben  ^aben,  they  will  have. 

And  interrogatively :  toerbe  id)  fjaben?  etc.  Also,  as  hereto- 
fore, and  generally  :  @te  toerben  fjaben,  tDerben  @ie  ijaben  ? 


§  159]  COMPARISON    OF    ADJECTIVES.  63 

VOCABULARY. 

ba§  (Sifen,  iron.  ber  ©emitter,  summer. 

bet  gefjler,  thg  mistake,  fault,      bie  £Rot,  the  distress. 
im (contraction of  in  bent),  inthe.  ber  Stocf,  the  story,  floor. 
ber  SBinter,  winter.  ttenig,  //#/<?/  pl./^ze/. 

EXERCISE  XL 

i.  S)te  retc^fteu  Seute  finb  nicfyt  intmer  bie  gliicfttcfyften.  2.  (£r 
ift  ber  retdjfte  9#ann  in  ber  gan^en  (stabt.  3.  S)ie  £age  ftnb  finder 
im  SStnter  a(3  im  (Sommer.  4.  £ie  beften  sl(pfel  ftnb  ntcfyt  intmer 
anf  ben  fyocfjften  SBaumen.  5.  SSir  fatten  bie  fjetterften  ©ebanlen. 
6.  SSir  toerben  morgen  ba§  fd)bnfte  ^Better  Ijaben.  7.  SDte  S2tr= 
men  finb  oft  fro^er  al§  bie  9^eid)eren.  8.  2)a§  @ifen  ift  bu§  nii^ 
detail'.  9.  Sftein  33ruber  ^at  einen  Idngeren  33rtef  al§ 
10.  5)ie  ®ebirge  ber  (St^meij  finb  ^o^er  at§  bie 

n.  £>ie  ^od)ften  ^ebirge  finb  in  5lften.  12. 
meinem  (Sjercitium  finb  bie  toenigften  getter.  13. 
morgen  tnenige  getter  in  meinem  (Syercitium  ^aben.  14.  2)ie 
bnnteften  SSoget  finb  ntd^t  intmer  bie  fd^onften.  15.  2)a§  §ei(igfte 
tt)ar  im  gnnerften  be§  ^empet§.  16.  D^eife  griid£)te  finb  beffer 
al^  bie  nnreifen. 

i.  When  shall  we  have  the  longest  day  and  the  shortest 
night?  2.  Frederick  was  the  greatest  and  most  famous  king 
of  Prussia.  3.  She  has  two  younger  sisters.  '4.  He  is  with 
his  elder  brother  in  Berlin.  5.  He  is  taller  than  his  brother. 
6.  His  younger  brother  has  been  [a]  soldier.  7.  This  little 
book  is  better  than  that  big  [one].  8.  We  shall  soon  have  the 
most  beautiful  weather.  9.  Ney  was  the  bravest  of  the  French. 
10.  The  poorest  peasants  are  in  Russia,  n.  Henry  will  have 
a  longer  letter  than  his  younger  brother.  12.  The  houses  of 
(the)  towns  are  larger  than  the  houses  of  (the)  villages.  13. 
The  house  of  my  father  is  on  the  longest  street  of  the  town.  14. 
We  shall  next  month  (ace.)  have  the  shortest  days  and  the  long- 
est nights.  15,  The  best  cows  are  in  Switzerland.  16.  They 


64  LESSON    XII.  [§  160 

were  in  the  utmost  distress.  17.  My  room  is  in  the  uppermost 
story.  1 8.  Henry  is  the  first  and  Charles  is  the  last  in  the 
whole  school.  19.  We  were  the  foremost.  20.  The  largest 
rooms  are  not  always  in  the  largest  houses. 


LESSON  XII. 
The  Predicate  Superlative. 

1 60.  The  uninflected  form  of  the  superlative  cannot,  like 
the  other  degrees  (§127),  be  used  alone  in  the  predicate. 
Instead  of  this,  there  is  a  special  form  made  up  of  an  bem, 
contracted  into  am,  at  the,  and  the  dative  of  the  super- 
lative,   which   is   used  predicatively.     Thus :   Sm   SStnter 
jtnb  bte  Xage  am  !ur§eftett  imb  im  ©ommer  am  langftert,  in 
winter  the  days  are  shortest  and  in  summer  longest;  i.  e., 
at  the  shortest,  etc. 

161.  This   form,  however,  must    be   used   only  when    the 
adjective  is  the  true  predicate.     If  the  noun  is  understood,  or 
the  superlative  is  definitely  limited,  the  regular  inflected  form 
will  be  used ;  as,  bte  £age  im  SStnter  finb  bte  liir^eften  (£age) 
be§  Qafjreg,  th*  days  in  winter  are  the  shortest  (days)  of  the  year. 
For  further  distinction,  see  §450,3. 

162.  (0)  Many  adjectives  are  derived  from  nouns:  — 
miitterltd),  motherly.  freunbltd),  friendly,  pleasant. 
baterlid),  fatherly.  Ijerrtttt),  splendid,  lordly. 

(b)  Others  are  derived  from  other  adjectives  :  — 
blcmtid),  bluish.  ftJeifjttd),  whitish. 
rotlid),  reddish.                       griinttcfy,  greenish. 

(c]  Many  are  formed  by  composition  (see  Less.  XLIV.)  :  — 
et§!altf  ice-cold.  feuerrot,  red  as  fire. 

s,  snow-white.        fofjlfcfyttmrj,  coal-black,  etc. 


§   164]  ADJECTIVES.  65 

THE  FUTURE  PERFECT  OF  fjabcu. 

163.  The  future  perfect  of  t)aben  is  formed  by  adding  the 
perfect  participle  and  infinitive  of  fjaben,  to  the  present 
tense  of  the  auxiliary  verb  toerben.     The  participle  and 
infinitive  stand  at  the  end  of  the  clause,  as  §  123,  a. 

id)  merbe  gefjabt  fjaben,  I  shall  have  had        ^    or,  I  have 
bit  ttrirft  ge^abt  fjaben,  thou  wilt  have  had       L  probably 
er  ttrirb  gef)abt  fjaben,  he  will  have  had          J    had,  etc. 

ttrir  tt>erbett  gefjabt  fjaben,  we  shall  have  had^\   or,  we  have 
if)r  toerbet  geljabt  f)aben,  you  will  have  had     L  probably 
fie  tt>erben  gefjabt  ^abenf  they  will  have  had         had,  etc. 

PREPOSITIONS  GOVERNING  THE  DATIVE. 

164.  The   following    prepositions    always    govern    the 
dative  :  — 

cm§,  out  of,  from.  nacl),  to,  after,  according  to. 

aufjer,  without,  except,  besides.  jett,  since. 

bet,  by,  near,  with,  at  the  house  fcon,  of,  from,  by. 

nut,  with.  \_of.  ju,  to,  at,  in,  for,  to  the  house  of. 

VOCABULARY. 

S)er  Dntel,  the  uncle.  fjetfj,  hot. 

bie  £ante,  the  aunt.  !iu)t,  cool. 

ber  griifjttncj,  spring.  bebedt,  covered. 

ber  §erbft,  autumn.  gef)en,  to  go. 

bit^&fytZ'btii,  the  season.  lommen,  to  come. 

ba§  SSetter,  the  weather,  toann,  when  ? 

bie  SSotfe,  the  cloud.  ntemanb,  no  one,  nobody. 

ba§  §aar,  the  hair.  t)ou  §aufe,  from  home. 

bie  ®efcri)rf ,  the  danger.  511  §aufe,  ^/  home. 

git  (adverb),  /^?^. 


66  LESSON    XII.  [§   165 

165.  When  a  sentence  is  introduced  by  any  word  or 
words  modifying  the  verb,  an  inversion  takes  place  ;  that 
is,  the  verb,  instead  of  following,  precedes  the  subject. 
<$eftern  toar  id)  511  §aufe,  instead  of  :  ttf)  toar  geftern  511  §aufe  ; 
but  never  :  geftern  id}  toar  git 


EXERCISE  XII. 

i.  3m  grilling  unb  im  §erbft  ift  ba§  SSetter  am  fdjonften. 
2.  (£§  ift  nid)t  511  f)eifj  nnb  nidjt  51:  fait.  3.  3)ie  ®naben  fommen 
au§  bet  <^d)ule.  4.  SQfoin  SBruber  ift  ntd}t  §u  §aufe.  5. 
jiingere  (Sd)toefter  ift  bon  §aufe;  fie  ift  bei  einer  alteu 
6.  5tu^er  meinent  £)n!et  tt)ar  ntemanb  5U  §aufe.  7.  33ei  btefem 
^ei^en  better  tDar  ber'^immel  mtt  rotli^en  unb  tt)ei6ti(J)en  SSotfen 
beberft.  8.  %lafy  bem  ei§!alten  SSetter  fatten  tt)ir  ben  ^errlti^ften 
gristing.  9.  3<^  ^^^  ^e^n  ®e^  ^e^  mir-  T0-  3®ir  lontmen  t»on 
^5art§  unb  ge^en  nad)  Sonbon.  n.  25  te  bier  3af)re§5eiten  finb  : 
ber  grunting,  ber  <Sommer,  ber  ^erbft  unb  ber  SSinter.  12.  2)er 
Setter  ift  tnit  feinen  (Sc^iitern  in  ber  ©djulftube.  13.  5)ein  ^Sruber 
ift  aufter  (Sefa^r.  14.  S)te  neuen  Stra^en  bon  ^)3art§  finb  bie 
f^onften  in  gan^  ©uropa.  15.  ^ad)  bem  (Sommer  finb  bie  £age 
nid)t  f  o  lang  nne  im  ©ommer.  1  6.  90?eine  jiingfte  3lod)ter  ift  bet  iljrer 
3:ante  (at  her  aunt's).  1  7.  2)er  grueling  ift  bie  befte  3afjre$jett  be§ 
gan^en  S^re§-  l8-  -3m  grilling  ift  ba§  SSetter  am  angene^mften. 

i.  She  had  a  snow-white  dress.  2.  No  one  is  here  except 
my  teacher.  3.  The  new  spring  is  loveliest  after  a  very  cold 
winter.  4.  When  will  your  brother  be  at  home?  5.  He 
has  been  from  home  the  whole  day  (ate.).  6.  He  has  been  at 
(bei)  my  aunt's.  7.  The  children  are  in  (the)  school  with  their 
books.  8.  A  cool  night  is  agreeable  after  a  hot  day.  9.  The 
boy  with  the  blue  eyes  and  the  very  dark  (fofjtfdjtDarj)  hair  is  a 
son  of  our  English  teacher.  10.  The  sky  is  red-as-fire.  n. 
Have  you  no  money  about  you  (bei  bir)?  12.  When  is  the 
weather  most  beautiful?  13.  It  is  most  beautiful  in  (the)  sum- 


AUXILIARY    VERBS. 


67 


mer.  14.  In  winter  *'/  is  coldest.  15.  They  have  probably  had 
no  money.  16.  The  children  will  have  had  a  pleasant  evening. 
17.  A  good  son  is  the  greatest  joy  of  his  father  and  of  his 
mother.  18.  The  highest  mountains  in  all  Europe  are  in  Swit- 
zerland. 19.  In  (the)  summer  the  days  are  longest  and  the 
nights  shortest.  20.  In  (the)  winter  the  days  are  the  shortest 
of  the  whole  year. 

1 66.     Synopsis  of  Declension  of  Adjectives. 


STRONG. 

WEAK. 

MIXED. 

m.      f.         n. 

pi. 

m. 

/. 

«.      //. 

01. 

/.        «. 

//. 

-N. 

er         e      e§ 

e 

e 

e 

e         en 

er 

e         e3 

en 

G. 

e§(en)    er     e§(en) 

er 

en 

en 

en        en 

•en 

en       en 

en 

D. 

em        er     em 

en 

en 

en 

en        en 

en 

en       en 

en 

A. 

en         e       e§ 

e 

en 

.  e 

e         en 

en 

e        ed 

en 

REMARK.  —  The  inclusion  —  as  here,  in  accordance  with 
usage — of  the  mixed  declension  of  adjectives  is  of  doubtful  ad- 
vantage. All  inflected  adjective  forms  are  always  either  strong 
or  weak  ;  and  always  the  principle  is  the  same. 


LESSON  XIIL* 
The  Auxiliary  Verbs. 

167.  The  conjugation  of  verbs  in  German,  as  in  English, 
is  made  up  of  simple  and  compound  forms. 

(a)  The  simple  forms  are  those  which  are  expressed  by  a 
single  word ;  as,  (id))  fyube  (/)  have;  (id))  tour  (/)  was,  etc. 

(b)  The  compound  forms  consist  of  two  or  more  words, 
and  are  formed  by  the  help  of  auxiliaries;  as,  (id))  f)dbe 

*  With  brief  explanation,  this  Lesson,  and  the  detailed  verb-paradigms 
following,  might  be  omitted,  with  pupils  of  some  maturity. 


68  LESSON    XIII.  [§   1 68 

gefyabt  (/)  have  had;  (irf))  tterbe  fyabert  (/)  shall  have;  (id)) 
toerbe  gefyabt  fjaben,  (/)  shall  have  had,  etc. 

1 68.  The  verbs  used  as  auxiliaries  in  conjugation  are. 
fjdbert,  to  have;  fetn,  to  be;  toerben,  to  become.     These  are 
employed,  as  in  English,  with  the  perfect  (past)  participle 
or  infinitive  of  a  verb  to  form  its  compound  parts.     Hence 
it  is  necessary  that  the  uses  of  these  verbs  as  auxiliaries, 
and  their  conjugation,  should  be  given  in  advance. 

NOTE.  —  The  simple  parts  of  Ijafcen,  fein,  toerben,  have  been  in  part 
given  already,  with  some  of  their  auxiliary  uses.  But  for  convenient  refer- 
ence, or  for  review,  they  are  repeated  in  the  paradigms  §  175,  §  181,  §  190. 

169.  REMARK.  —  i.   Remember  that  fjaben,  fein,  merben  are 
themselves  verbs,  which  are  often  used  independently,  as  well 
as  in  their  auxiliary  function.     The  two  uses  should  always  be 
distinguished. 

2.  Remember,  also,  that  the  auxiliary  is  itself  the  verb,  or 
asserting  part,  of  every  compound  verb  form.     As  in  English, 
for  example,  I  shall  go :  shall  is  the  (auxiliary)  verb,  go  the 
infinitive  object;  I  am  loved:  am  is  the  (auxiliary)  verb,  loved 
the  participle  complement. 

NOTE.  —  This  remark  is  important,  to  correct  the  false  habit  of  con- 
sidering such  forms  as  made  up  of  an  auxiliary  and  a  verb.  Such  is 
never  the  case. 

3.  Hence,  whatever  rules  are  given  for  the  verb  will  apply, 
in  the  compound  forms,  to  the  auxiliary,  or  finite,  part  thereof. 

170.  As  has   been  seen,  in  compound  (auxiliary)  verb 
forms,  the  participle  or  infinitive  stands  at  the  end  of  the 
clause.      If  a  participle  and  an  infinitive  are  combined,  the 
infinitive  will  stand  last.     (§  163.) 

But  special  circumstances  may  require  the  auxiliary  verb 
itself  to  stand  at  the  end,  as  will  be  seen  hereafter.  (§  177.) 


§  I?2]  AUXILIARY    VERBS.  69 

THE  AUXILIARY  fjobeiu 

171.  «£)abert  is  used,  as  auxiliary,  with  the  perfect  parti- 
ciple of  all  transitive  and  some  intransitive  verbs  to  form 
the  whole  system  of  perfect  tenses.     Its  use  is  the  same 
as  that  of  have  in  English,  except  that  it  is  not  so  generally 
extended  to  intransitives.     Each  form  of   the  perfect  is 
made  by  employing  the  corresponding  part  of  the  auxiliary. 
Thus: 

1.  The  present   perfect  —  or  perfect  tense  —  by  the  present 

tense  of  fjabett;  as,  id)  fjabe  gefyabt,  /  have  had;  id)  Ijabe 
geliebt,  /  have  loved,  etc. 

2.  The  past  perfect  —  or  pluperfect  tense  —  by  the  past  tense 

of  Ijaben,  as,  id)  fjatte  gefyabt,  I  had  had;  id)  fjatte  gettebt,  2 
had  loved,  etc. 

3.  The  infinitive  perfect,  by  the  infinitive  of  fjaben ;  as,  gefjabt 

fjaben,  to  have  had;  getiebt  f)aben,  to  have  loved,  etc. 

4.  As  will  be  seen  §  173,  a,  the  perfect  infinitive  is  used  in 

forming  the  perfect  of  the  future  and  conditional;  as  in 
English:   I  shall — have  loved;  I  should — have  loved,  etc. 
And  similarly  for  the  subjunctive  forms. 

NOTE.  —  It  thus  appears  that  tyaben  as  auxiliary  is  used  in  the  conjuga- 
tion of  Ijaben  as  an  active  verb. 

THE  AUXILIARY  fettu 

172.  <8ein  is  used  as  auxiliary  with  the  perfect  participle 
to  form    the   perfect  tenses  of    some   intransitive  verbs. 
This  use  was  formerly  much  more  extended  in  English 
than  at  present ;  for  example,  /  am  come,  for  /  have  come. 

NOTE.  —  (£cin  is  not  used  with  the  present  participle  as  in  English:  / 
am  reading,  etc.    These  forms  are  expressed  by  simple  tenses  of  the  verb. 

As  in  the  case  of  I)dben,  each  perfect  form  is  made  by 
employing  the  corresponding  part  of  the  auxiliary ;  thus  : 


7O  LESSON    XIII.  [§  173 

i.  The  present  perfect — or  perfect  tense;  id)  bin  gelommen,  7 
have  (am)  come;  id)  bin  gettorben,  I  have  (am)  become,  etc. 

3.  The  past  perfect  —  or  pluperfect;  id)  ftmr  gefommen,  I  had 
(was)  come;  id)  ttmr  getoorben,  I  had  (was)  become,  etc. 

3.  The  infinitive  perfect — gefommen  fein,  to  have  (be)  come;  ge= 
ftorben  fein,  to  have  (be)  become,  etc.  And  this  form  is  used, 
as  above,  in  forming  the  perfect  future  and  conditional. 

NOTE.  —  The  verb  fein  forms  its  perfect  tenses  by  the  use  of  fein  as 
auxiliary;  as,  id)  6tn  getoefen,  /  have  been:  literally,  I  am  been,  etc.  So, 
also,  does  toerben.  For  other  verbs  taking  fein,  see  §§  297,  298. 

THE  AUXILIARY  toerbetu 

173.  38erbert  is  used  as  auxiliary  with  the  infinitive  of 
all  verbs  to  form  the  future  and  conditional  tenses. 

1.  The  future,  by  the  present  tense  of  toerben  and  the  infinitive 

present;  as,  id)  toerbe  f)aben,  I  shall  have;  fie  toerben  fein, 
they  will  be,  etc. 

(a)  The  future  perfect,  by  the  same  form  with  the 
infinitive  perfect;  as,  id)  toerbe  gef)dbt  Ijaben,  I  shall  have 
had;  fie  toerben  getoefen  fein,  they  will  have  been. 

2.  The  conditional,  by  the  past  subjunctive  of  toerben,  with  the 

infinitive  present;  as,  id)  ftmrbe  fjaben,  I  should  have;  fie 
ttmrben  fein,  they  would  be,  etc. 

(a)  The  conditional  perfect  by  the  same  form  with  the 
infinitive  perfect;  as,  id)  ttjiirbe  gefyabt  f)aben,  I  should  have 
had;  fie  toiirben  getoefen  fein,  they  would  have  been,  etc. 

The  conditional  is  thus,  by  its  form,  a  past  (or  imperfect) 
subjunctive  of  the  future. 

NOTE.  —  It  thus  appears  that  toerben  in  its  auxiliary  uses  with  the  in- 
finitive corresponds  to  the  English  auxiliaries  shall,  will ;  should,  would, 
respectively,  according  to  persons.  But  this  is  true  only  when  these 
words  are  used  as  mere  future  or  conditional  auxiliaries,  in  certain  persons. 
When  used  outside  of  these  persons,  in  their  original  proper  meaning  — 


§  175]  AUXILIARY    VERBS.  71 

as,  you  shall  go,  I  will  arise,  he  should  not  act  thus,  etc.  —  these  words  are 
not  represented  by  toerben,  but  by  follen,  shall,  and  tooUen,  will  (Less. 
XXVI). 

174.  2Berben  is  also  combined,  in  all  its  parts,  with  the 
perfect  participle  of  transitive  verbs  to  form  the  complete 
passive  conjugation.  (Lesson  XXVII.) 

REMARK.  —  Hence,  for  the  conjugation  of  any  verb,  it  is  only  necessary 
to  know  the  simple  parts,  and  whether  fjdben  or  fein  is  the  auxiliary  of  the 
perfect  tenses.  All  the  compound  parts  can  then  be  formed  by  general 
rules,  as  above.  But  in  the  following  paradigms,  for  convenience  of  study 
or  reference,  the  full  conjugation  is  exhibited,  as  usual. 


LESSON  XIV. 

THE  (AUXILIARY)  VERB  Ijabcu,  to  have. 

175.  REMARK. —  i.  The  forms  of  translation  given  in  the 
paradigm  are  sometimes  only  representative.  In  English,  for 
example,  there  are  auxiliary  forms  of  tense  which  do  not  exist 
in  German;  as,  I  do  have,  am  having,  etc.  The  infinitive  is 
translated  sometimes  to  have,  sometimes  have,  or  having.  In 
these  cases  the  most  usual  forms  only  are  given. 

2.  In  the  subjunctive  especially  there  is  no  form  ia  English 
that  suffices  to  represent,  or  even  to  suggest,  its  various  uses 
in  German  —  the  subjunctive  itself  being  rarely  used  in 
English,  except  in  the  verb  to  be.  The  forms  here  given  are 
therefore  only  some  of  the  many  forms  of  translation. 

NOTE.  —  The  infinitives  and  participles  are  given  first,  because  they  are 
to  some  extent  used  in  the  following  conjugation.  The  perfect  infinitive 
also  shows  whether  rjdben  or  fein  is  used  as  the  perfect  auxiliary.  The  pres. 
part,  always  adds  -b  ;  the  perf.  part,  and  the  past  tense,  which  are  some- 
times variable,  are  counted,  with  the  infinitive,  as  the  principal  parts  of 
the  verb. 

PRESENT  INFINITIVE.  PRESENT  PARTICIPLE. 

I)aben,  to  have.  fjabenb,  having. 

PERFECT  PARTICIPLE.  PERFECT  INFINITIVE. 

get)abt,  had.  ge^abt  t)aben,  to  have  had. 


LESSON    XIV. 


[§  175 


Indicative  Mood.  Subjunctive  Mood. 

PRESENT  TENSE. 

itf)  f)dber  I  (may)  have. 


id)  Ijabe,  I  have. 
bu  !)dft,  thou  hast. 
er  fjat,  /z^  has. 
ttrir  ^aben,  w<?  ^02^. 
i()r  fjabt,  you  have. 
fie  Ijaben,  they  have.* 


id)  f)dtte,  I  had. 
bu  f)atteft,  thou 
er  fjatte,  he  had. 
ttrir  fjdtteu,  we  had. 
ifyr  fjattet,  you  had. 
fie  flatten,  they  had. 


id)  fjabe  ge^abt; 


(may  st)  have. 
(may)  have. 
'^  (may)  have. 
(may)  have. 
(may)  have. 


bit  f)dbeft, 
er  fjabe,  / 
tmr  ^abeit, 
if)r  5^bet, 
fie  Ijaben, 


PAST  TENSE. 

id)  f)attef  I  had,  or, 
bu  ^atteft,  thou,  etc. 
er  fjatte,  /^^,  etc. 
ttrir  fatten,  «/^,  etc. 
ifjr  ^cittet,  you,  etc. 
fie  fatten,  they,  etc. 

PERFECT  TENSE. 

had.        id)  Ijabe  ge^abt,  /(  may)  have  had. 


bu  §aft  gef)abtf  thou  hast  had.  bu  ^abeft  gefjabt,  thou,  etc. 

er  ^at  ge§abt,  he  has  had.  er  fjabe  ge§abtf  he,  etc. 

tuir  fjaben  ge^abt,  we  have  had.  unr  I)abeu  ge^abt,  we,  etc. 

tt)r  ^abt  ge^abt,  you  have  had.  i()r  Tjabet  ge^abtf  you,  etc. 

fie  fyaben  geljabt,  they  have  'had.  fie  fjaben  ge^abt,  theyy  etc. 

PLUPERFECT  TENSE. 

\§  ^atte  ge^abt,  I  had  had.         \§  ptte  geljabt,  (if)  I  had  had. 
bu^atteftge§abt,M^w^^$-//z^.  bu  Ijtitteft  ge^abt,  thou,  etc. 
er  I)atte  geljabt,  he  had  had.         er  Ijatte  ge^abt,  he,  etc. 
ttrir  fatten  ge^abt,  we  had  had.  fair  fatten  ge§abt,  we,  etc. 
il)r  ^attet  getjabt,  you  had  had.  ttjr  ^attet  ge^abt,  you,  etc. 
fie  fatten  ge^abt,  they  had  had.  fie  fjtitteu  gefjabt,  they,  etc. 

*  As  heretofore,  the  form  <£ie  ^o6en,  j^z^  have,  is  to  be  understood. 


§  175] 


AUXILIARY    VERBS. 


73 


Indicative  Mood.  Subjunctive  Mood. 

FUTURE  TENSE. 


id)  toerbe  Ijaben,  /  s hall  have. 
bit  ftrirft  fjaben,  thou  wilt  have. 
er  ftnrb  f)aben,  he  will  have. 
ftnr  toerben  fiabett,  we  shall  have. 
if)r  iuerbet  Ijaben, you  will 'have. 
fie  fterben  fjaben,  they  will  have. 


id)  toerbe  fjabeit,  I  shall  have. 
bit  tuerbeft  !)aben,  M^^  wilt  have. 
er  toerbe 


toir  tt)erben  ^aben,  we  shall  have. 
if)r  toerbet  t)abenf^^  will  have. 
fie  inerbcn  I)aben,  they  will  have. 


id)  toerbe 
bit  ttrirft 
er  ftrirb 
ttnr  toerben 
if)r  fterbet 
fie  toerben 


FUTURE  PERFECT. 
I  shall  have  had.  id)  faerbe 
g  thou  wilt,  etc.     bu,  ttierbeft 

CO 

^  he  will,  etc. 
£  z£^  shall,  etc. 

ze//7/,  etc. 

w/77,  etc. 


er  toerbe 
tuir  merben 
iljr  tDerbet 


fie  toerben  . 


I  shall  have  had. 
wilt,  etc. 

.  etc. 
£  we  shall,  etc. 

CS 

jtf#  will,  etc. 
etc. 


CONDITIONAL. 

id)  ttJitrbe  IfjaOen,  I  should  have. 

bu  tuiirbeft  ^aben,  thou  wouldst  have. 

er  tDiirbc  Ijaben,  he  would  have. 

tt)ir  tiwrben  ^aben,  we  should  have.    . 

ifjr  toiirbet  ^aben,  you  would  have. 

fie  ftmrben  ^aben,  they  would  have. 

CONDITIONAL  PERFECT. 

id)  toiirbe  gefjabt  Ijaben,  /  should  have  had. 
bit  ftmrbeft  geljabt  ^abenf  thou  wouldst  have  had. 
er  toiirbe  ge^abt  ^abenf  he  would  have  had. 
ttrir  ttmrben  ge^abt  ^aben,  we  should  have  had. 
i^r  tDiirbet  ge^abt  tjaben,  y°u  would  have  had. 
fie  tDiirben  gel)abt  ^aben,  they  would  have  had. 


74  LESSON    XIV.  [§   176 

Imperative  Mood. 

fjaben  ttrir,  let  us  have. 

fjabe  (bu),  have  (thou).        fjabt  (tf)r),  have  (ye). 
Ijabe  er,  /^/  ^zw  A0z^.          fjaben  fie,  let  them  have* 

176.  REMARK. — i.  Of  these  forms,  only  those  of  the  second 
person  are  properly  imperative.     The  others  are  subjunctive, 
but    are,  for    convenience,  added    to    the    paradigm.     In  the 
imperative  proper  the  subject  is  usually  omitted. 

2.  An  infinitive  may  be  directly  preceded  by  the  preposition 
§u,  to:  §u  fjaben ;  gef)abt  511  fjaben.  This  form,  sometimes  called 
the  supine,  answers  very  nearly  to  the  corresponding  English 
form.  So,  after  verbs,  except  modals  and  a  few  others. 

177.  First  Rules  of  Position. 

1.  In  the  normal  order  of  words  the  verb  stands  next  after 

the  subject,  as  in  the  paradigm. 

2.  In  a  question,  in  the  imperative,  and  usually  when  the  sub- 

junctive is  used  as  imperative,  the  verb  stands  before  the 
subject;  as,  fjabe  id),  have  77  fjabe  (bu)  ®ebufb,  have  (thou) 
patience;  f)abe  er  ®ebufb,  let  him  have  patience,  etc. 

3.  The    same    order   occurs   when    an  inversion    takes   place 

(see  §  165);  as,  morgen  trerbe  id)  einen  getertag  fjaben, 
to-morrow  I  shall  have  a  holiday,  etc. 

4.  But  in  a  dependent  clause,  the  verb  is  transposed  to  the  end 

of  the  clause.  Such  are  clauses  beginning  with  baJ3,  that; 
tt)etm,  if,  and  other  subordinate  connectives  generally:  ber 
Setter  fagt,  bag  id)  morgen  einen  getertag  fjaben  fterbe,  the 
teacher  says  that  I  shall  have  a  holiday  to-morrow;  id) 
ttiirbe  morgen  einen  geiertag  fyaben,  tt)enn  id)  fjeute  metne 
$lufgaben  gemad)t  I)titte,  /  should  have  a  holiday  to-morrow 
if  I  had  done  my,  lessons  to-day.  (See  §  338). 

*  See  *  p.  30.  In  the  polite  form  of  the  imperative  @te,  though  used 
for  the  second  person,  is  always  expressed ;  as,  fjdfcen  ©ie  Me  ©Ute,  have 
the  kindness,  etc. 


§  179]  AUXILIARY    VERBS.  75 

REMARK. — The  position  of  the  verb  in  inverted,  as  also  in 
transposed  order,  is  of  so  much  importance,  and  so  unlike  the 
English,  that  the  student  should  be  frequently  required  to 
recite  the  paradigms  in  these  forms ;  as  for  example  : 

then  I  should  have,  etc. 

bann  roiirbe  idj  fjaben.  bann  unirben  fair  fjaben. 

barm  ttnirbeft  bu  tjaben.  bann  ttnirbet  tf)t  fjaben. 

bann  miirbe  er  fjaben.  bann  ttmrben  fie  Ijaben. 

if  I  had  had,  etc. 

toenn  idj  gefjabt  Ijatte.  menn  ttrir  geljabt  fatten, 

trenn  bit  gef)abt  fjatteft.  menn  tf)r  gefjabt  ^a'ttet. 

irenn  er  gefjabt  ^atte.  menn  fie  ge^abt  fatten. 

PREPOSITIONS  GOVERNING  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 

178.  The   following    prepositions    always    govern    the 
accusative  case  :  — 

burd),  through,  by.  ol)ne,  without. 

\vcc,for.  um,  around,  about. 

'  gegen,  towards,  against.  rt)tberf  against. 

PREPOSITIONS  WHICH  GOVERN  SOMETIMES  THE  DATIVE, 
AND  SOMETIMES  THE  ACCUSATIVE  CASE. 

179.  The  following  prepositions  govern  sometimes  the 
dative,  and  sometimes  the  accusative  case.     They  govern 
the  dative  in  expressions  of  position,  or  motion  in  a  place  ; 
the  accusative  whenever  direction,  extent,  action  upon  an 
object,  change  of  position  or  motion  to  a  place  is  expressed 
or  implied.  —  Examples :  Scf)  fi£e  auf  eirtem  toeicfyen  (Sttrfjle, 
/  sit  upon  a  soft  chair.     Scfj  fe£e  mid)  auf  etnen  toeirfjen  (Stut)(, 
/  seat  myself  on  a  soft  chair.     £)a<§  33tlb  fjcingt  an  ber  SScmb, 
the  picture  is  hanging  on  the  wall.     3d)  fjcinge  ba^  33itb  an 


76  LESSON    XIV.  [§   180 

bie  28anb,  /  hang  the  picture  up  on  the  wall.  (£r  geljt  uor 
ba3  £or,  he  goes  (out)  in  front  of  the  gate.  (£r  gefyt  t)0t  bem 
Xore  auf  imb  ab,  he  walks  up  and  down  before  the  gate. 

an,  at,  on.  neben,  beside. 

auf,  0«,  upon,  at.  iiber,  <?zw,  above,  beyond,  about. 

tjtnter,  behind.  unter,  under,  below,  among. 

in,  in,  into.  bor,  before,  ago. 

§tt)tfd)en,  between. 

VOCABULARY. 

PRESENT  TENSE  OF  legcn,  to  lay. 
Singular.  —  id)  lege,  bit  tegft,  er  legt. 
Plural.      -  mir  tegen,  if)r  legt,  fie  legen. 

ttegen,  to  lie.  gelegt,  laid. 

fe^en,  to  set,  seat.  gefe^t,  set,  seated. 

fi£en,  to  sit.  gelauft,  bought. 

ftefjen,  to  stand.  gemad)t,  made,  done. 

ftetten,  to  place.  gefteEt,  placed. 

reiten,  to  ride.  gefunben,  found. 

er  reitet,  he  rides.  gegeben,  given. 

marum,  why.  gefd^rieben,  written. 

fid),  himself,  themselves.  gefefjen,  seen. 

biel,  much.  gegangen,  gone. 

mefjr,  more  (indecl.).  gefommen,  come. 

180.  Some  Uses  of  the  Subjunctive. 

1.  Observe  that  the  past  or  pluperfect  subjunctive  is  used 
in  expressing  a  condition,  when  stated  as  unreal,  in  present  or 
past  time  respectively.     Ex.  9,  10,  below. 

2.  Observe  that  the   subjunctive   is  also  used  in  indirect 
speech  —  that    is,  in   a   statement   made  on   the   authority   of 
another — the  tense  remaining  that  of  the  speaker.   Ex.  n,  12, 
below. 


§  l8o]  AUXILIARY    VERBS.  77 

EXERCISE  XIV. 

i.  $)a§  ®inb  fi£t  auf  einem  Heinen  (Stufyle.  2.  (£r  fe£t  ba§ 
®iub  auf  einen  fyofjen  @tuf)l.  3.  9Keiue  23riiber  ftefjeu  t>or  ber 
£iire.  4.  llnfere  greuube  fteffen  fid)  (themselves)  bor  bic 
£iire.  5.  $>ie  SBiidjer  liegett  auf  bem  £ifd()e.  6.  $dt)  lege  bie 
23iid)er  auf  ben  £ifd).  7.  S)er  ®nabe  ft^t  auf  ber  $Ban!  nebeit 
feiner  (Sdjmefter.  8.  %<fy  fe^e  ba§  ^inb  auf  bie  SBanf  neben 
betue  @(i)tt)efter.  9.  SSir  tDiirben  ^eute  ntefjr  53erguiigen  ^aben, 
toeun  tt)ir  fcfyouereS  SSetter  fatten  (had).  10.  @tc  tDiirben  tne^r 
3eit  ge^abt  ^aben,  tuenn  fie  nid^t  gu  lange  auf  ber  $HbIiotf)e! 
gefd^rieben  fatten,  n.  @r  fagt,  ba§  fein  S3ruber  t)ie(  SSergniigen 
geljabt  fjabe.  12.  SDer  (Sd&iiter  fagte,  bag  er  biefeg  33ud^  in  ber 
@d)ulftube  gefunben  ^abe  (had).  13.  S)er  SSater  ^at  eine  neue 
Itfjr  fit  feineu  jiingften  (Sofjn  gef'auft.  14.  2)ie  (Sngtanber  ^aben 
biele  ^riege  gegen  bie  Sranjofen  ge^abt.  15.  5)ie  ©fitter  fjab en 
fid)  urn  ben  Se^rer  gefe^t.  16.  2)er  ^nabe  fjat  ba§  gro^e  ^Bud^ 
auf  bie  fjofje  33an!  getegt.  17.  28ir  merben  morgen  tiiet  S5er= 
gniigen  ^aben.  18.  2Bir  tDiirben  geftern  Diet  $ergniigen  ge^abt 
^aben,  toenn  tt)ir  me^r  3^it  ge(;abt  fatten.  19.  §eute  merben  mir 
einen  gdertag  ^aben.  20.  SSarunt  ftellt  ber  ^nabe  ba§  ®emalbe 
fjinter  bie  ^iir?  21.  §abe  @ebutb,  ntein  liebe§  £inb.  22.  28ir 
tuerben  Qeii  ^abenf  ioenn  tuir  (^ebulb  ^aben.*  23.  0§ne  meine 
greunbe  tDiirbe  i(^  lein  SSergniigen  ^aben.  24.  ^)ie  ©olbaten 
reiten  burd)  bie  gauge  ©tabt. 

i.  The  boy  sits  upon  a  high  chair.  2.  The  scholars  seat 
themselves  on  the  benches  of  the  school-room.  3.  He  rides 
behind  his  father.  4.  The  soldiers  ride  into  the  town.  5.  We 
lay  the  books  upon  the  table.  6.  The  child  is  sitting  under 
the  table.  7.  A  little  garden  is  before  the  house.  8.  He  sits 
beside  his  sister.  9.  He  has  placed  the  chair  against  (an)  the 
wall.  10.  Potsdam  lies  between  the  towns  [of]  Berlin  and 
Brandenburg,  n.  This  boy  says  that  he  has  (subj.)  a  gold 
watch.  12.  He  would  have  had  more  pleasure  if  he  had  had 
more  patience.  13.' We  should  have  much  pleasure  if  we  had 


78  LESSON    XIV.  [§   l8l 

no  school.  14.  The  boy  climbs  upon  the  high  bench  behind 
his  father.  15.  The  little  child  sits  upon  the  bench  beside  its 
mother.  16.  I  should  be  glad  if  I  had  a  gold  watch.  17.  You 
would  have  a  better  opinion  of  (Don)  this  general  if  you  had 
seen  him  (t^n)  with  his  soldiers  in  the  last  war.  18.  The  last 
war  of  the  Prussians  was  against  the  French.  19.  Shall  we 
have  a  holiday  to-morrow  if  we  have  good  weather?  20.  The 
teacher  says  that  we  shall  have  a  holiday  if  we  have  done  our 
lessons.  •  21.  Have  patience,  my  dear  little  brother;  you  (bu) 
have  time.  22.  Yesterday  we  should  have  had  more  pleasure 
if  we  had  had  more  time.  23.  The  soldiers  ride  with  the 
general  through  the  longest  streets  of  the  town.  24.  The  best 
scholar  has  written  this  exercise  without  a  mistake. 

REMARK.  —  The  teacher  will  use  discretion  as  to  dividing  the  exercises 
or  lessons,  according  to  the  grade  of  pupils  or  the  necessity  for  review,  etc. 

The  special  vocabularies,  which  have  thus  far  given,  for  practice,  a  part 
of  the  words  used  in  the  exercises,  will  hereafter  be  omitted.  It  is  de- 
sirable that  the  student  should  learn,  as  soon  as  possible,  to  use  a  general 
vocabulary. 

LESSON  XV. 

x8i.  THE.  (AUXILIARY)  VERB  feilt,  to  be. 

PRES.  PART.  —  fetenb,  being.       PERF.  PART.  —  getoefen,  been. 
PERFECT  INFINITIVE— getrjef en  fein,  to  have  been. 

Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

PRESENT. 

id)  bin,  I  am.  id)  fet,  I  be.  (§175.) 

bu  bift,  thou  art.  bu  feieft,  thou  be. 

er  ift,  he  is.  er  fet,  he  be. 

ttnr  finb,  we  are.  ttrir  feien,  we  be. 

ifjr  fetb,  you  are.  tfjr  feiet,  you  be. 

fie  finb,  they  are.  fie  feien,  they  be. 

*<§>ein  is  contracted  for  feien  (§  75). 


§   l8l]  AUXILIARY    VERBS.  79 

Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

PAST. 

id)  ttmr,  I  was.  id)  ttmre,  (*/")  I  were. 

bu  ttmr  ft,  //fo#  ze/0.r/.  bit  ttmr  eft,  thou  wert. 

er  ttmr,  he  was.  er  ttmre,  >fo  were. 


ttr  ttmren,  a/^  ze^r<?.  ttr  ttmren,  a/* 

if)r  ttmr(e)t,  jr<w  z*/^.  itjr  lt)aret,  you  were. 

fie  ttmren,  M^y  «w*«  fie  todren, 


PERFECT. 

id)  bin  getrefen,  I  have  been.  id)  fei  gelt)efen,  I  (may]  have  been. 
bit  bift  gett)efen,  M^^  ^^j/  been,  bu  feicft  gelDefett,  M<7«  have  been. 
et  ift  geftefen,  he  has  been.  er  fei  geftefen,  he  have  been. 

ttrir  finb  getoefen,  we  have  been,  ttrir  feien  gett)efenf  we  have  been. 
il)r  feib  gettiefen,  you  have  been,  i^r  feiet  getnefen,  you  have  been. 
fie  finb  gettefen,  they  have  been,  fie  feien  gettiefen,  they  have  been. 

PLUPERFECT. 

id)  ttmr  gett>efen,  /  had  been.        id)  rodre  gett)efenf  /  had  been. 
bit  tt)arfi  gett>efen,  thou  hadstbeen.  bu  tt)dreft  gett)ef  enf  thou  hadstbeen. 
er  tt)ar  gett)efen,  he  had  been.       er  ttmre  gettiefen,  he  had  been. 

ttrir  tt>aren  gettiefen,  we  had  been,  ttrir  ttmren  getuefen,  w^  ^^^/  been. 
it)rttiar(e)tgett)efen,jy0w/^</^v2.  if)r  tt)dret  getDefen,  you  had  been. 
fie  ttmren  getuefen,  they  had  been,  fie  ttmren  gett)efen,  /^  had  been. 

FUTURE. 

id)  tt)erbe  fein,  I  shall  be.  id)  tt)erbe  fein,  I  shall  be. 

bu  ttrirft  fein,  thou  wilt  be.  bu  tDerbeft  fein,  thou  wilt  be. 

er  ttrirb  fein,  -#<?  ze//7/  ^.  er  tt)erbe  fein,  he  will  be. 

ttrir  tuerben  fein,  we  shall  be.       ttrir  tDerben  fein,  we  shall  be. 
ttyr  tnerbet  fein,  you  will  be.        ifjr  tt)erbet  fein,  you  will  be. 
fie  tt)erben  fein,  //^o'  w/^  be>       fte  trerben  fein, 


8o 


LESSON    XV. 


[§ 


Indicative.                                           Subjunctive. 
FUTURE  PERFECT. 

id)  fterbe 

I  shall  have  been,  id)  ttierbe 

I  shall  have  been. 

bu  ttrirft 
er  tt)irb 
ttiir  ttierben 

.£  thou  wilt,  etc.      bu  ttierbeft 

Q> 

*~~  he  will,  etc.         er  tflerbe 
•5-  we  shall,  etc.      fair  ttierben 

.H  thou  wilt,  etc. 
o 
~~  he  will,  etc. 
.  £ 
•5-  ^  shall,  etc. 

if)r  ttierbet 
fie  ttierben 

§^<?«  z£/z//,  etc.      ifjr  ttierbet 
they  will,  etc.     fie  ttierben 

§  w»  a//7/,  etc. 

C3J 

//$^y  will,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL. 

id^  ttmrbe  fein,  I  should  be.  ttiir  ttiiirben  fein,  w^  should  be. 
bu  ttiiirbeft  fein,  thouwouldstbe.  if)r  ttiiirbet  fein,  7^^  would  be. 
er  ttiiirbe  fein,  -^^  would  be.  fie  ttiiirben  fein,  M*j>  would  be. 

CONDITIONAL  PERFECT. 
t$  ttiiirbe  gettiefen  fein,  /  should  have  been. 
bu  ttiiirbeft  gettiefen  fein,  thou  wouldst  have  been. 
er  ttmrbe  gettiefen  feinr  he  would  have  been. 
tt)ir  ttiiirben  gettiefen  fein,  we  should  have  been. 
if)r  tt)iirbet  gettiefen  fein,  you  would  have  been. 
.fie  tniirben  gett)efen  fein,  they  would  have  been. 


Singular. 

fei  (bu),  be  (thou). 
fei  er,  let  him  be. 


IMPERATIVE. 

Plural. 

feien  fair,  let  us  be. 
feib  (i$r)f  be  (ye). 
feien  fie,  let  them  be.  (See  §  176.) 
feien  <Sie,  be. 
Inflect  as  in  the  inverted  and  transposed  order  : 

ba  toerbe  id)  fein,  there  I  shall  be.  ba  bin  id)  gettiefen,  there  I  have 

been. 
ba  ttiirft  bu  fein,  there  thou  wilt    ba  6ift  bu  gettiefen,  there  thou  hast 

be.  been. 

ba  ttiirb  er  fein,  there  he  wtiljie.    ba  ift  er  gettiefen,  there  he  has  been. 
etc.          etc.   '  etc;         etc< 


§   182]    DECLENSION  OF  THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS.  8l 


baft  idj  (ba)  fein  toerbe,  that  I  toenn  id)  (ba)  getoefen  ttmre,  if  I 
shall  be  (there.)  had  been  (there). 

baft  bit  (ba)  fein  ttnrft,  thatthou  tuenn  bu  (ba)  getoefen  tntireft,  if 
wilt  be  (there),  etc.  thou  hadst  been  (there),  etc. 

182.  Oeclension  of  the  Personal  Pronouns. 

Singular. 


FIRST  PERSON. 

N.  id),  /. 
G.  meiner,  of  me. 
D.  mtr,  (to)  me. 
A.  mid),  me. 


SECOND  PERSON. 
bu,  thou. 
beiner,  of  thee. 
bit,  (to)  thee. 
bid),  thee. 


masc. 
N.  er,  he. 
G.  feiuer,  of  him. 
D.  ifjm,  (to)  him. 
A.  ifin,  >#/'w. 


THIRD  PERSON. 

fem. 
fie,  J^. 
Ujrer,  of  her. 

fie,  ^r. 

Plural. 
SECOND    PERSON. 


neut. 

e§,  it. 

[feiner,  of  it.~\ 
[i^m,  (to)  it.~\ 

e^  /'/. 


r,  you,  ye. 
etter,  of  you. 
eud),  (to)  you. 


THIRD  PERSON. 
fie,  they. 
ifjrer,  of  them. 
ifynett,  (/"<? 
fie,  them. 


FIRST  PERSON. 
'N.  ttrir,  we. 
G.  uufer,  tf/"^. 

A.  un§,  z^. 
Also,  for  singular  or  plural  persons: 

N.  <3te,  you.  D.  Sfyni 

G.  Sf^er,  of  you.         A.  @te, 

(«)   In  the  singular  genitive  the  shorter  forms  —  mein,  bein, 
fein  —  are  sometimes  used  in  poetry  and  in  familiar  phrase^X— , 
and  in  the  plural  genitive  sometimes  the  longer  forms  —  unff er 
and  eurer  (contracted  for  unferer  and  euerer).  But  the  pronoun 
genitives  are,  in  general,  only  rarely  used. 


82  LESSON    XV.  [§   183 

NOTE. — i.  Bear  in  mind  that  a  noun  will  be  referred  to  by  er,  fie,  e§, 
according  to  its  gender.  For  exception,  see  §  452,  a. 

2.  For  special  uses  of  e§,  as  impersonal,  introductory,  or  expletive  sub- 
ject, corresponding  to  it,  they,  there,  etc.,  see  §  453. 

183.  The  genitive  and  dative  forms  of  the  third  person 
are  rarely   used   of   things,  their  meaning    being   usually 
supplied  by  a  demonstrative  pronoun  (§  208,  note). 

184.  Instead  of  a  dative  or  accusative  of  the  third  person, 
referring  to  things,  with  a  preposition,  the  adverb  ba,  there 
^before  a  vowel,  and  sometimes  before  n,  bar),  is  usually 
compounded  with  the  preposition  ;  as  :  bamtt' ,  therewith, 
with  it  or  them;  bafur',  therefor,  for  it  or  them;  bage'gen; 
bat)on';  barirt';  barauf;  bemad)'  or  barnad)',  etc.    Also,  before 
r,  colloquially :  bran,  brau3,  briiber,  etc. 

For  be3  (genitive)  in  like  compounds,  see  §  456,  2. 

!8c.  The  Reflexive  Pronoun. 

THIRD  PERSON. 

Singular  and  Plural —  all  genders. 
D.  fid),  (to)  himself,  herself,  itself,  themselves. 
A.  fid),  "  "          "  " 

Elsewhere  the  regular  forms  of  the  personal  pronouns 
are  used  reflexively ;  as,  id)  fe|e  mid),  /  seat  myself;  id) 
fd)meid)(e  mir,  I  flatter  myself,  etc. 

Use  of  the  Pronouns  in  Address. 

186.  The  German  usage  herein  differs  widely  from  our  own. 
In  English  the  usual  form  is  you,  etc.,  for  singular  or  plural 
persons  ;  thou,  etc.,  is  restricted  to  the  language  of  poetry  or 
of  devotion  (except  among  the  Friends),  though  it  was  formerly 
more  widely  used.  In  German,  besides  these  uses,  bit,  etc., 
is  used  also  in  familiar  address ;  as,  to  members  of  the  family, 


§   189]  USE    OF    THE    PRONOUNS    IN    ADDRESS.  83 

to  most  intimate  friends,  to  children,  to  animals,  etc. ;  some- 
times also  to  express  contempt  (as  formerly  in  English).  In 
such  cases  bit  is  not  properly  translated  by  thou. 

187.  In  all  cases  where  bu  is  properly  used  in  the  singular, 
the  second  person  plural  tfjr,  etc.,  is  to  be  used  in  addressing 
more  than  one  person ;  but  only  in  such  cases. 

188.  But  the  usual  mode  of  addressing  one  or  more  persons 
(except  in  the  cases  above  noted)  is  by  the  third  person  plural, 
which  is  then  written,  except  in  the  reflexive  form,  with  a  cap- 
ital initial  letter  (§  182).     Thus:   280  ftnb  fie  getflefett,  where 
have  they  been  ?     SBo  filtb  <Ste  gefaefen,  where  have  you  been  ? 
Observe  that  the  verb  is  always  plural. 

In  the  same  way  are  used  also  the  corresponding  forms  of 
the  possessive  and  reflexive;  as,  S^rf  your,  etc.  SSte  befinben 
@ie  fid),  how  are  you  ?  (See  §  63). 

189.  Other   forms    sometimes    occur.       The    third   person 
singular  —  (£r  and  (Ste  —  and  the  second  person  plural  —  ;gljr 

—  were  likewise  at  one  time  in  use  for  addressing  a  single 
individual.   The  last  occurs  especially  in  the  formal  drama; 
and    often    as    sign     of    respect,    in    addressing    superiors. 
\  See  §  63  note. 

NOTE. —  i.  Remember,  that  the  limits  of  bu  and  i^r,  etc.,  are  very 
closely  drawn  in  German  society.  No  worse  mistake  could  occur  than  to 
use  them  out  of  place.  Hence,  hereafter,  the  form  <5ie,  etc.,  should  be 
carefully  used  in  all  exercises,  unless  other  forms  are  clearly  required. 

2.  It  would,  however,  be  an  error  to  teach  these  third  plural  forms  as 
alternative  forms  of  the  second  person.     The  usage  is  purely  idiomatic  — 
or  conventional  —  as  in  English  you  for  thou. 

3.  Care  must  be  taken  to  avoid  ambiguity  in  the  pronoun  forms.    The 
use  of  a  capital  letter  is  distinctive  only  to  the  eye,  and  not  even  this, 
when  the  pronoun  begins  the  sentence.  —  Note,  too,  that  the  third  person 
plural  forms  belong,  in  part,  also  to  the  feminine  singular. 

4.  Be  careful  always,  in  the  same  context,  to  use  the  same  or  correspond- 
ing forms  of  the  pronoun  for  the  same  persons. 


84  LESSON    XV.  [§  189 

EXERCISE  XV- 

i.  (Seib  fritter,  meine  Clemen.     2.    §abt  ®ebulb,  ifjr  Thibet. 

3.  Sieber   better,    fei  fo   gut  iinb   fe&e   bid)   auf   biefe   23anf. 

4.  (Seien  @ie  fo  gut,  §err  ®raf,  unb  fetjen  <3ie  fief)  auf  biefen 
©tuljl.      5.  £er  gelbfjerr  rettet  in  bie  (Stabt;  em  (Solbat  reitet 
mit  ifjm.     6.  llnfere  Sreunbe  ftefjen  urn  un§.     7.  3d)  Ijabe  nid)t3 
bagegen.      8.    (Seib   f(et§tgf  iinb   tfjr   luerbet   bie  greube   eurer 
©Item  fein.     9.    $DZein  Onfet  ift  ein  tDo()I§abenber  SO^ann.     10. 
Sftein  35ater  ^at  mir  einen  tteuen  §ut  gefauft.     n.  3$  toerbe 
S^nen  ein  fc^arfereg  SReffer  geben.     12.   StRorgen  tnerbe  t<^  mit 
3^nen  nad^  ber  @tabt  reiten,  [meine]  §erren.     13.  2)ie  ®naben 
iDiirben  nid)t  in  ber  Sdjnle  fein,  menn  ba§  better  fd)5n  tudre. 
14.  2)iefe  ^ftpfel  toiirben  fd^on  reif  fein,  tt)enn  ba§  SSetter  nid^t 
fo  fait  getoefen  toare.     15.   2)er  Setter  fagt,  ba§  er  mit  feinem 
©djiiler  gufrieben  fei.     16.     ©r  ttmrbe  mit  biefem  ©c^iiler  nocQ 
§ufriebener  fein,  toenn  er  flei^iger  ftmre.    17.  SSir  tDiirben  geftern 
fjier  getoefen  fein,  toenn  nnfere  SCtfntter  nid^t  Iran!  getuefen  tDare. 
18.  5)ie  %raiL  fagt,  ba§  if)r  alter  Onfct  fe^r  reic^  fei.     19.  9Keine 
Xante  ^at  eine  gotbene  Itfyr  fiir  meine  (Sd^luefter  gelanft.    20.  2)ie 
Solbaten  finb  burd^  bie  (Stabt  gefommen.      21.   £)ie  ^)inber  finb 
urn  bie  ganje  @tabt  gegangen.      22.    SSiirben  bie  ^inber  nm  bie 
gan5e   @tabt  gegangen  fein,    nienn  fie   Iran!   getoefen   toaren? 
23.  28a§  ^at  er  gegen  feinen  Onlel?    24.  (Sr  ^at  nid^t§  gegen  ifjn. 


i.  Be  patient,  my  children.  2.  Be  quiet,  my  little  [ones]. 
3.  My  father  has  given  me  *  a  new  knife.  4.  Have  you 
anything  against  it?  5.  What  have  you  against  it?  6.  Have 
patience  with  him,  dear  brother.  7.  •  Have  patience  with  us, 
most  gracious  count.  8.  Honour  be  to  the  king.  9.  The 
soldiers  ride  with  me  into  the  town.  10.  The  general  says 
that  he  will  be  here  to-morrow,  n.  Here  is  my  old  knife; 

*Note  again  the  indirect  object,  with  'or  without  the  preposition  in 
English  —  in  German  the  simple  dative  —  preceding  the  adjective  in  (13). 


§  190]  AUXILIARY    VERBS.  85 

dear  brother,  be  so  good  and  give  (gib)  me  a  new  [one]  for  it. 
12.  My  aunt  would  have  been  present  if  her  children  had  not 
been  so  impatient.  13.  Be  merciful  to  (dat.)  us,  O  Lord. 
14.  My  brother  would  have  been  in  (the)  school  if  the  weather 
had  been  fine.  15.  The  old  lady  says,  that  her  uncle  is  (subj.) 
much  richer  than  the  young  count.  16.  The  air  would  be 
warmer,  if  the  sky  were  not  covered  with  clouds.  17.  What 
have  you  against  the  count?  18.  I  have  nothing  against  the 
man.  19.  This  gentleman  says,  that  he  has  bought  a  gold 
watch  for  his  little  son.  20.  The  pupils  have  (are)  gone  with 
their  teacher  around  the  town.  21.  The  professors  have  gone 
with  the  students  through  the  wood.  22.  The  fields  would  be 
already  green  if  (the)  spring  were  not  so  late.  23.  I  should 
have  been  at  home  earlier  if  I  had  not  been  so  tired.  24.  The 
apples  would  be  ripe  if  the  weather  had  been  warmer. 


LESSON  XVL 

190.      THE  (AUXILIARY)  VERB  tuerben,  to  become. 

In  the  singular  of  the  past  indicative  toerbett  has  two  forms: 
—  ttmrb  being  the  older  form  —  ttmrbe,  now  in  more  general 
use. 

Observe  also  that  toerben,  in  the  future  and  conditional,  is 
its  own  auxiliary,  and  has  fetn  in  its  perfect  tenses. 

NOTE.  —  For  toerben  as  the  equivalent  of  shall,  will,  etc.,  see  §  173, 
note. 

INFINITIVE.  PRES.  PART.  PERF.  PART. 

tnerben,  to  become.         toerbenb,  becoming.         getoorben,  become. 

PERFECT  INFINITIVE. 
getttorben  fein,  to  have  become. 


86 


LESSON    XVI. 


[§19° 


Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

PRESENT. 

I  become,  etc.  I  (may)  become*  etc. 

id)  toerbe.  toir  toerben.  id)  toerbe.  toir  toerben, 

bu  toirft.  ifjr  toerbet.  bit  toerbeft.         ttjr  toerbet. 

er  totrb.  fie  toerben.  er  toerbe.  fie  toerben. 


I  became,  etc. 

id)  tciirbe,  or  id)  tuarb. 

bit  tuurbeft,  or  bu  ftarbft. 

er  tt)urber  or  er  ttmrb. 

mir  tDitrben. 

if)r  tDiirbet. 

fie  ttJitrben. 


I  have  become,  etc. 
id)  bin  geroorben. 
bu  bift  geroorben. 
er  ift  getoorben. 
tt>ir  finb  gemorben. 
i()r  fetb  getoorben. 
fie  finb  gemorben. 


/  had  become,  etc. 
id)  toar  geworben. 
bu  n^arft  gert)orben. 
er  tDar  gen^orben. 
tt)ir  tt?aren  getoorben. 
if)r  tuaret  getoorben. 
fie  ftmren  getoorben. 


PAST. 

/  (might)  become,  etc. 

id)  tt)iirbe. 

bu  ttmrbeft. 

er  njiirbe. 

n)ir  tourben. 

if)r  n)iirbet. 

fie  toiirben. 

PERFECT. 

I  (may)  have  become,  etc. 

id)  fei  getoorben. 

bu  feieft  getoorben. 

er  fei  getoorben. 

toir  feien  getoorben. 

ifjr  feiet  getoorben. 

fie  feien  getoorben. 

PLUPERFECT. 

/  (might)  have  become,  etc. 

id)  toare  getoorben. 

bu  toareft  getoorben. 

er  toare  getoorben. 

toir  toaren  getoorben. 

i§r  toaret  getoorben. 

fie  toaren  getoorben. 


*  See  remark,  §  175,  2,  on  translation  of  the  subjunctive  forms. 


AUXILIARY    VERBS.  87 

Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

FUTURE. 

/  shall  become,  etc.  /  shall  become,  etc. 

id)  twrbe  trerben.  id)  tuerbe  toerben. 

bit  tmrft  tterben.  bit  tnerbeft  fterben. 

er  ftirb  fterben.  er  toerbe  toerben. 

ttrir  tuerben  fterben.  tmr  toerben  tt>erben. 

tfyr  tuerbet  tt)erben.  t^r  tuerbet  tuerben. 

fte  njerben  tnerben.  fie  toerben  tuerbeu. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 

/  shall  have  become,  etc.  I  shall  have  become,  etc. 

id)  fterbe  geirorben  fein.  ic^  tuerbe  getoorben  fein. 

bit  mirft  getuorben  fein.  bu  n?erbeft  gemorben  fein. 

er  ttrirb  gen)orben  fein.  er  toerbe  gemorben  fein. 

etc.  etc. 

CONDITIONAL.  CONDITIONAL  PERFECT. 

/  should  become,  etc.  I  should  have  become,  etc. 

id)  toiirbe  tterben.  id)  tt)iirbe  gemorben  fein. 

bn  ftiirbeft  luerben,  bu  aiiirbeft  gemorben  fein. 

er  ttwrbe  tDerben.  er  ttnirbe  gemorben  fein. 

etc.  etc. 
IMPERATIVE. 

become  (thou),  etc.  tuerben  tmr. 

tt)erbe.  merbet. 

tDerbe  er.  raerben  fie  (§  176). 

Inflect,  as  before,  for  question: 

bin  id)  getDorben?  merbe  ic^  ttierben? 

have  I  become  ?  shall  I  become  ? 

For  inversion: 

geftern  ttmr  id)  gen?orben,  morgen  tt)erbe  id)  trerben, 

yesterday  I  had  become.  to-morrow  I  s/iall  become. 


88  LESSON    XVI.  [§   191 

For  transposition: 

baft  tcfj  Iran!  geftorben  'mar,        ttettn  id)  fran!  getoorben  roare, 
that  I  had  become  sick.  if  I  had  become  sick. 

etc.  etc. 

Contraction  of  Prepositions  with  the  Article. 

1 91.  The  definite  article  is  often  contracted  with  prepo- 
sitions.    The  most  usual  forms  are  :  — 

DATIVE  SINGULAR. 

Masc.  or  Neut.  am  for  an  bem,     at  the. 

betm  "  bet  bem,    by  the,  near  the. 

int  "  in  bem ,      in  the. 

bom  "  Don  bem,  from  the. 

§um  "  511  bem,     to  the. 

Fern,  ^ur  "  511  ber,       to  the. 

ACCUSATIVE  SINGULAR. 

Neut.  an§      for  an  ba§,     to  the. 

auf§      "  auf  ba§,     upon  the. 

burd)§   "  bitrd)  ba§,  through  the. 

fur§       "  fur  ba§,    for  the. 

tn§        "  in  bag,       into  the. 

um§       "  inn  ba§,     around  the,  about  the. 

NOTE.  —  The  accusative  forms  are  no  longer  written  with  apostrophe. 
The  dative  forms  sometimes  seem  to  imply  the  indefinite  article  —  in 
cases  where  no  article  is  used  in  the  plural.  See  §  443,  d. 

Possessive  Adjectives. 

192.  The  Possessive  Adjectives  are  :  — 

Mas.  Fern.  Neuter. 

SINGULAR,  mein,  metne,  mein,  my  (§  88). 

bein,  betne,  bein,  thy. 

feht,  feine,  fein,  his  {its}. 

tljr,  ifjre,  ifjr,  her  (its}. 


§  193] 


POSSESSIVE    PRONOUNS. 


89 


Masc. 

Fern. 

Neuter. 

nnfer, 

nnf(e)re, 

nnfer,  our. 

etter, 

eu(e)re, 

etter,  your. 

tf)r, 

ifire, 

ifjr,  their. 

PLURAL, 


§  188). 

These  are  declined  in  the  singular  like  the  indefinite 
article,  and  in  the  plural  like  btefer.  As  :  mem  $ater,  metne 
Gutter,  mein  ®tnb,  metne  greunbe;  but  see  §  127. 

Possessive  Pronouns. 

193.  When  the  possessives  are  used  as  pronouns  (as  in 
English,  mine,  ours,  etc.),  they  take  the  full  endings  of 
biefer.  like  the  strong  declension  of  adjectives,  if  used  alone  ; 
or  of  the  weak  declension  nf  aHjprrivp^,  if  preceded  by  the 


Neuter. 

meine§,        mine, 
meine£,        of  mine,  etc. 
ba3  metne, 


definitejirticle.     The  forms  will  then  be  such  as  : 

Masc.  Fern. 

N.  meiner,  metne, 

G.  metne£,  meiner, 

or,          N.  ber  metne,  bte  metne, 
G.  be§  meinen, 

Similarly,  betner, 

unf(e)rer, 
eu(e)rer, 

or,  ber  tfjre, 

ber  S^re, 

Examples  :  3)tefe3  ift  metn  (adj.) 
(pron.)  ift  bort      This  is  my  book  ;  yours  is  there. 
ge!)ort  btefe^  S3uc^  ?   To  whom  does  this  book  belong  ?     (£3 
ift  mem,  or  ba£  metne,  it  is  mine. 

NOTE.  —  $)a§  SBudj  ift  tnetn,  or  ba§  metne  (rarely  nteineS)  —  the  former  is 
simply  predicative;  the  latter,  distinctive  (from  yours,  etc.)  or  emphatic. 


ber  meinen,    beg  metnen,  etc. 

beine, 
unf(e)re, 
eu(e)re,  . 
bie  i^re, 
bte        ^, 


betneg,  thine. 

nnf(e)re§,  ours. 

en(e)re£,  yours,  etc. 

ba§  i^re,  theirs. 

ba$  S^re,  yours,  etc. 

;  Sf)re§,  or  ba^  Stj 


go  LESSON  xvi.  [§  194 

2.  The  possessive  pronouns  have  the  same  form  as  the  genitive  of  the 
personal  pronouns  ;  the  possessive  adjectives,  as  the  shorter  forms  of  the 
same.  (§  182.) 

194.  A  possessive  pronoun,  of  recent  origin,  is  formed 
from  the  possessive  adjective  by  adding  the  suffix  ig. 
These  forms  can  be  used  only  with  the  defimte^ai±icle, 
anH  flrfi  ffpnomlly  ftmjTlny^H  when  the  definite  article  is 
use^l.  The  inflection  is  that  of  the  weak  adjective. 

ber,  bie,  ba§  meinige,  mine.  ber,  bie,  ba§  unfrige,  ours. 

ber,  bie,  ba§  beinige,  thine.  ber,  bie,  ba§  eiirige,  yours. 

ber,  bie,  ba§  fetnige,  his  (its}.  ber,  bie,  bag  iljrtge,  theirs. 

ber,  bte,  ba§  ifjrige,  hers  (its).  (ber,  bie,  \H&<$fyc\$t,  yours.) 


EXERCISE  XVL 

i.  3)er  93aum  ttrirb  grim.  2.  3$)  bin  jung  getrjefen  unb  bin  alt 
geworben.  3.  SSerbet  nic£)t  ungebiilbtg.  4.  SSa§  tft  au§  i^m 
gemorbcn?  5.  28a£  tuirb  au§  mir  merben?  6.  3)te  S^on  f^gt, 
ba§  fie  arm  gettorben  fei.  7.  $)iefe  Spfet  tuiirben  reif  tuerben, 
menn  ba§  SSetter  nid^t  fo  fait  ttmre.  8.  ^d)  njiirbe  fein  greunb 
gemorben  fcin,  tt)enn  id)  mit  i^m  befannt  gemorben  mare.  9. 
3)er  ^nabe  mar  fefjr  gro§  gemorben.  10.  2)a§  SSetter  tpurbe 
f(^on.  ii.  2)ie  ^tnber  merben  fd)ta'frig.  12.  (S§  ttrirb 
13.  5)er  ^nabe  toirb  ein  3}iann  tDerben.  '  14.  2)er  befte 
in  nnferer  <3tabt  tft  am  Xore.  15.  S)te  gro^ten  §anfer  ber 
(Stabt  ftnb  am  9}Jarlte.  16.  2)er  ^ranle  Itegt  tm  SBette.  17. 
®inb,  e§  tft  3e^t  5ur  ©^ule  5u  ge^en.  18.  S)er  ^raf  fte^t  am 
genfter.  19.  3ft  btefer  §unb  bein?  (Sr  tft  ber  meinige.  20. 
SSo  tft  ba§  §au§  S^rcS  Dn?ef§?  21.  @3  tft  neben  bent  mei^ 
nigen.  22.  Unfere  ©tii^Ic  finb  toetdjer  al§  bie  S^rtcjen.  23.  3ft 
bein  beutf^er  Se^rer  in  ber  (Sd)utftube?  24.  @r  tft  in  nnferem 
(Garten. 

i.  The    trees   become   green.     2.  The   man    became  rich. 
3.  The  air  has  become  cold.    4.  We  shall  grow  sleepy.    5.  What 


§   196]  CONJUGATION    OF    VERBS.  pi 

would  have  become  of  (an§>)  me  if  you  /tad  not  been  my  friend  ? 
6.  Your  sons  have  grown  very  tall.  7.  In  (the)  spring  the  days 
grow  longer,  but  in  autumn  they  grow  (invert)  shorter.  8.  What 
has  become  of  my  boots  ?  9.  The  oldest  and  best  hotel  is  on  the 
market-place.  10.  Do  not  grow  impatient,  my  dear  boy.  n. 
The  leaves  of  the  trees  become  yellow  in  (the)  autumn.  1 2.  The 
industrious  poor  [man]  will  become  rich.  13.  He  says,  that  his 
brother  has  fallen  (become)  ill.  14.  The  youngest  child  will 
some  day  become  an  old  man.  15.  The  sick  (§  140)  lie  in  (the) 
bed.  1 6.  Frederick  was  great  in  peace  and  in  war  (§  73,  £,  3). 
17.  The  richest  man  would  become  poor  incur  most  expensive 
hotels.  1 8.  Children  become  quiet  in  (the)  sleep.  19.  This 
little  dog  is  ours.  20.  My  brother  is  taller  than  yours. 
21.  Your  father  is  older  than  mine.  22.  Our  orchard  is  larger 
than  yours.  23.  Your  brothers  are  more  industrious  than 
ours.  24.  It  is-getting  (becoming)  colder  (§  172,  note). 

NOTE.  —  The  materials  of  the  exercises  will  now  suffice  for  conversa- 
tional exercises  of  considerable  extent  and  interest.  Each  teacher  will, 
of  course,  judge  of  the  importance  of  such  exercises  for  his  own  pupils. 
An  easy  German  Reader  might  also,  with  some  help  from  the  teacher,  be 
now  begun. 


LESSON  XVIL 
The  Conjugation  of  Verbs. 

195,  There  are  two  distinct  conjugations  of  verbs,  the 
strong  and  the  weak.    The  former  is  sometimes  called  the 
old  and  the  latter  the  new  conjugation. 

196.  Verbs  of  the  strong  conjugation  form  their  past 
tense,  and  usually  their  perfect  participle,   by  changing 
the  vowel  of  the  root ;  they  undergo  an  internal  change. 
For  example :  f ingen,  to  sing ;   id)  fang,  /  sang- ;  id)  t)abe 
gejungen,  /  have  sung. 


92  LESSON    XVII.  [§   197 

197.  Verbs  of  the  weak  conjugation  are  conjugated  by 
adding  suffixes  to  the  stem  ;    they  undergo   an  external 
change  only.     For  example  :  toben,  to  praise  ;  id)  lob-te,  / 
praised ;  id)  I)dbe  gelob-t,  /  have  praised. 

198.  Weak  verbs  form  their  perfect  participle  in  et  or  t; 
strong  verbs,  in  err.      In  both,  the  perfect  participle  usually 
takes  the  prefix  ge- 

199.  Strong  verbs   are,  almost   all,  original  German  roots. 
Weak  verbs  include  also  derivative   and  foreign   verbs,  and 
represent   the  modern  process  in  conjugation.     Weak  verbs 
are  greatly  the  more  numerous.     Hence,  though  not  properly, 
weak  verbs  are  often  called  regular,  and  strong  verbs  irregular. 

NOTE. —  i.  The  term  strong  here  suggests  the  power  of  internal  change, 
or  of  inflection  without  the  aid  of  suffix  ;  weak,  the  absence  of  that  power. 
The  strong  is  a  primitive  method,  and  belongs  only  to  the  oldest  root- 
verbs  —  except  the  two  Latin  derivatives,  f c£)ret6en,  to  write,  pretfen,  to 
praise. 

2.  It  is  plain  that  these  conjugations  correspond  closely  to  those  in 
English  ;  as,  strong :  give,  gave,  given ;  sing,  sang,  sung,  etc. :  weak : 
praise,  praised,  praised ;  plant,  planted,  planted,  etc.  In  English,  the  per- 
fect participle  is  always  without  the  prefix  ge- ;  and  often,  also,  without 
the  suffix  -en  or  -ed  (or  -d). 

200.  A  small   group   of  verbs  (properly  weak,   §  253) 
which  undergo  vowel  change,  are  sometimes  called  mixed 
verbs.     And   a  few  others   may  be   properly  treated  as 
irregular  verbs. 

201.  The  weak  conjugation,  because  the  simplest  and  of 
most  frequent  occurrence,  will  be  given  first. 

The  following  are  the  regular  endings  of  the  weak  verb : 

INFINITIVE.  PRES.   PART.  PERF.   PART. 

— en.  — enb.  ge — (e)t. 


§201]  CONJUGATION    OF    VERBS.  93 

Ind.  Sub/.  Ind.  Subj. 

PRESENT.  ,  PAST. 

Sing.  —  e.  — e.  — (e)te.  — (c)te. 

— (e)ft.  —eft.  — (e)teft.  —  (c)tcft. 

— (e)t.  — e.  —  (c)te.  —  (e)te. 

PL       -  en.  — en.  — (e)ten.  — (e)ten. 

— (e)t.  — et.  —  (e)tet.  — (e)tet. 

-  en.  — en.  — (e)ten.  — (e)ten. 

IMPERATIVE. 
Sing.  — e,  pi.  — (e)t. 

(a)  The  use  of  (e)  where  so  marked,  depends  mainly  on 
euphony.      (See  next  Lesson.)     Generally,  the  e  is  more  usu- 
ally retained  in  the  subjunctive  —  and  was  also  elsewhere  more 
frequent  formerly  than  now.  * 

(b)  Observe  that  the  third  person  singular  is  like  the  first 
person,  except    in    the    present    indicative ;  and   that   in   the 
plural,  the  first  and  third  persons  are  always  alike. 

EXAMPLE  OF  THE  WEAK  CONJUGATION. 

INFIN  :  £0bett,  to  praise,  f 

PRES.  PART,  lobenb.  PERF.  PART.  getobt. 

PERF.  INFIN.  —  gelobt  tjaben. 

Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

PRESENT. 

id)  lobe,  I  praise,  etc.  id)  lobe.     (See  §  175,  2.) 

bu  lobft.    (See  §  175,  i.)  bu  lobeft. 

er  lobt.  cr  lobe. 

ttnr  loben.  nrir  loben. 

Ujr  lobt.  tfjr  lobet. 

fie  loben.  fie  loben. 

*  Only  the  more  usual  forms  are  given  in  the  paradigm.  The  older 
forms  with  e  still  sometimes  occur,  especially  in  poetry  or  in  solemn  style. 

f  As  heretofore,  the  complete  paradigm  is  given  for  convenient  refer- 
ence, though  many  of  the  forms  have  occurred  already. 


94  LESSON    XVII.  [§  201 

Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

PAST. 

id)  lobte,  I  praised,  etc.  id)  lob(e)te. 

bu  lobteft.  bu  lob(e)teft. 

er  lobte.  er  Iob(e)te. 

ttrir  lobten.  ttrir  lob(e)ten. 

i§r  lobtet.  ifjr  lob(e)tet. 

fie  lobten.  fie  Iob(e)ten. 

PERFECT. 

id)  ^abe  gelobt,  I  have  praised,     id^  Ijabe  getobt. 
bu  I;aft  gelobt.  bu  fyabeft  gelobt. 

er  ^at  gelobt.  er  l)abe  gelobt. 

tt)ir  ^aben  gelobt.  loir  ^aben  gelobt. 

i^r  ^abt  gelobt.  i^r  ^abet  gelobt. 

fie  l)aben  gelobt.  fie  Ijaben  gelobt. 

PLUPERFECT. 

t(^  §atte  gelobt,  I  had  praised.       idj  Ijatte  gelobt. 
bu  fjatteft  gelobt.  bu  ^atteft  gelobt. 

er  Ijatte  gelobt.  er  Ijtitte  gelobt. 

tt)ir  fatten  gelobt.  ttrir  fatten  gelobt. 

if)r  ^attet  gelobt.  iljr  ^attet  gelobt. 

fie  fatten  gelobt.  fie  fatten  gelobt. 

FUTURE. 

id)  tuerbe  loben,  I  shall  praise,     id)  ioerbe  lobeuf  I  shall  praise. 
bu  ttrirft  loben,  thou  wilt  praise.   bn'mw'btftlQbtK 
er  ttrirb  loben.  er  tuerbe  loben. 

tt)ir  tDerben  loben.  tt)ir  toerben  loben. 

i^r  tDerbet  loben.  iljr  iDerbet  loben. 

fie  tDerben  loben.  fie  fterben  loben. 


§  201]  WEAK    CONJUGATION.  95 

Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 
id)  toerbe  gelobt  l)dben,  I  shall     id)  tuerbe  gelobt  Ijaben,  I  shall 

have  praised,  etc.  have  praised,  etc. 

bu  ttrirft  gelobt  fjaben.  bit  toerbeft  gelobt  Ijaben. 

er  tt)irb  gelobt  Ijaben,  er  toerbe  gelobt  fiaben, 

etc.  etc. 

CONDITIONAL. 

id)  toiirbe  loben,  I  should  praise.          ttnr  ftwrben  loben. 
bu  toiirbeft  loben,  thou  wouldst,  etc.    il)r  tDiirbet  loben. 
er  tDiirbe  loben.  fie  ttmrben  loben. 

CONDITIONAL  PERFECT. 

id)  tt)iirbe  gelobt  ^aben,  I  should  have  praised,  etc. 
bn  ttmrbeft  gelobt  l)aben. 
cr  tDiirbe  gelobt  ^abenf  etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

loben  ttrir,  let  us  praise. 

\Q^, praise  (thou).  (§176)  lob(e)t,  praise  (you). 

lobe  er,  let  him  praise.  loben  fie,  let  them  praise. 

loben  <Sie,  praise. 

Inflect  for  inversion  and  transposition : 
yesterday  I  praised.  to-morrow  I  shall  praise. 

geftern  lobte  id),  etc.  morgen  toerbe  id)  loben,  etc. 

that  I  praised  yesterday.  if  I  should  praise  to-morrow. 

ba§  i<^  geftern  lobte,  etc.  toenn  id^  morgen  loben  ftmrbe,  etc. 

Conjugate  like  loben : 

lieben,  to  love.  fpielen,  to  play.         fragen,  to  ask,  question. 

leben,  to  live.  f(^iden,  to  send.        nio^nen,  to  dwell,  live. 

lelrren,  to  teach.          faitfen,  to  buy.          reifen,  to  travel. 
lernen,  to  learn.          fagen,  to  say.  mad)en,  to  make,  to  do. 

lad)en,  to  laugh.          tt)iinfd)en,  to  wish.    braud)enr  to  need,  want. 
foetnen,  to  weep,  cry.  Ijoren,  to  hear.          seigen,  to  show.     ^ 


96  LESSON    XVII.  [§  202 

202.  Rules  of  Position. 

1.  A  pronoun  object  precedes  a  noun  object. 

2.  An  indirect  object  usually  precedes  a  direct  object. 

3.  But  e3  precedes  any  other  object,  except  (often)  jtrf). 

4.  An  object  without  a  preposition  precedes  an  object 

with  a  preposition. 

5.  An  adverb  of  time  precedes  an  object,  except  pro- 

nouns; other  adverbs  usually  stand  near  the  verb. 

6.  An  infinitive  or  participle  stands  after  its  modifiers. 

203.  Remember  that  the  indirect  object  —  in  English 
with  or  without  preposition,  according  to  its  position  —  is 
expressed  in  German  by  the  simple  dative  ;  as,  er  gab  mir 
dlt  SBudj,  he  gave  me  a  book  (a  book  to  me). 


Demonstrative  Adjectives  and  Pronouns. 

204.  These  are  :  — 

berf  bte,  ba§,  that. 

biefer,  biefe,  biefe§,  this  (here),  the  latter. 

jener,  jene,  jene§,  that  (there),  the  former. 

fotdjer,  fotcfye,  fol(f)e£,  such. 

berjemge,  biejentge,  baSjettige,  that. 

berfelbe,  btefetbe,  ba§felbe,  the  same. 

205.  S)er,  biefer   and   jener  are  originally  demonstrative 
adjectives  ;  but  they  are  used  both  as  pronominal  adjectives 
with  a  noun,  and  as  pronouns  standing  instead  of  a  noun  : 
that  or  this  one,  he,  etc. 

206.  2)er,  bter  bct3f  as  adjective,  is  declined  like  the  article, 
but  is  pronounced  with  a  greater  stress  of  voice.     As  a 
pronoun,  it  has  the  following  enlarged  forms  : 

Sing.    Gen.  beffen,  beren,  beffen,  of  him,  of  her,  of  it. 
Plur.  Gen.  beren  or  berer,  of  those,  of  them. 

Dat.    benen,  to  those,  to  them.     (§456,  2.) 


§  210]  DEMONSTRATIVE    ADJECT.    AND    PRON.  97 

207.  <SoId)er  may  be  preceded  by  the  indefinite  article : 
em  foldjer  Sftcmn,  eine  foldje  gran,  etn  foldjeS  ®inb,  j#£/z  <z  /«««, 
etc.      It  is  indeclinable  when  it  precedes  the  article,  as  in 
English :  fold)  etn  9ftenfd),  fold)  eine  grew,  fold)  ein  Slinb ;  or 
an  adjective  :  fold)  fdjoner  §tmmef,  such  a  beautiful  sky. 

208.  S)erjenige  and  berfelbe  decline  each  component : 


SINGULAR. 

PLURAL. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

M.F.N. 

N.  berfelbe. 
G.  begfetben. 
D.  bemfelben. 
A.  benfelben. 

biefelbe. 
berfetben. 
berfelben. 
biefetbe. 

baSfelbe. 
be^felben. 
bemfelben. 
ba§felbe. 

biefelben. 
berfelben. 
benfelben. 
biefelben. 

N.  berjemge. 
G.  be^jenigen. 
D.  bemjenigen. 
A.  benjenigen. 

biejenige. 
berjenigen. 
berjenigen. 
btejenige. 

ba^jentge. 
be^jemgen. 
bemjemgen. 
ba^jenige. 

biejenigen. 
berjenigen. 
benjenigen. 
btejemgen. 

NOTE. —  i.  3)er,  berfelbe,  are  frequently  used  as  substitutes  for  per- 
sonal pronouns.  (See  §  457). 

2.  S)erjenige  is  most  regularly  used  as  antecedent  to  a  relative ;  as  ber= 
jentge,  toeldjer,  he  who,  etc. 

209.  A  compound  of  bd  (bar)  with  prepositions  is  usual 
instead  of  a  dative  or  accusative  of  the  pronoun  berf  bie,  bd3, 
referring  to  things.    (See  §  1 84). 

NOTE.  —  Yet  the  pronoun  may  so  stand  when  emphatic  —  especially 
when  antecedent  to  hm§  (§  236,  b}. 

210.  This,  that,  these,  those,  immediately  preceded  or 
followed  by  the  verb  to  be,  are  rendered  in  German  by  the 
neuter  singular  pronoun  btefe£  (usually  bie£)  and  bd3,  the 
verb  agreeing   with  the  following  predicate  noun.     As : 
£)ie£  ift  eine  Sfiofe  unb  ba3  ift  eine  Sttie.     ©tnb  bte3  $irfd)en,  are 
these  cherries  ?  S)a3  finb  $artoffeln,  those  are  potatoes. 


98  LESSON    XVII.  [§  210 

REMARK.  —  Observe  following  uses  of  the  subjunctive  (as 
§  1 80).  Also,  that  the  subjunctive  is  used  in  contingent  state- 
ments (as  in  sentence  7). 


EXERCISE  XVII. 

i.  Der  Lehrer  lobt  den  fleiszigen  Schiller.  2.  Wir  lernen 
Deutsch.  3.  Mein  Vater  hat  ein  Haus  gekauft.  4.  Kinder 
lieben  ihre  Eltern.  5.  Was  sagen  Sie  dazu?  6.  Er  sagt,  dasz 
er  Franzosisch  und  Deutsch  gelernt  habe.  7.  Ich  wiinsche,  dasz 
mein  Sohn  Deutsch  lerne.  8.  Ich  bin  durch  ganz  Deutschland 
gereist.  9.  Er  lachte.  10.  Ihr  weintet.  n.  Ich  werde  Ihnen 
etwas  Neues  sagen.  12.  Ich  wiirde  es  gesagt  haben,  wenn  Sie 
es  gewiinscht  hatten.  13.  Fragen  Sie  mich  nicht.  14.  Wo  ist 
meine  deutsche  Grammatik?  Ich  brauche  sie.  15.  Ich  werde 
es  meinem  Vater  sagen.  16.  Spiele  nicht  mit  des  Nachbars 
Kindern.  17.  Der  Konig  horte,  dasz  der  beriihmte  Feldherr 
krank  sei.  18.  Diogenes  lebte  zur  Zeit  Alexanders.  19.  Mein 
Freund  hat  mir  gesagt,  dasz  er  ein  Landgut  kaufen  werde. 
20.  Ich  wiirde  auch  eins  (eines,  one)  kaufen,  wenn  ich  Geld 
dazu  hatte.  21.  Ist  dies  Ihr  Buch?  22.  Es  ist  das  meines 
Bruders.  23.  Sind  dies  dieselben  Schiiler,  welche  (who)  mit 
uns  in  der  Schule  waren?  24.  Es  (they]  sind  nicht  dieselben. 

i.  I  have  asked  him.  2.  Where  does  he  live  (dwell)  ?  3.  He 
lives  in  the  new  house  near  the  city-wall.  4.  What  have  you 
bought?  5.  I  shall  buy  a  watch.  6.  The  children  cried;  we 
heard  them.  7.  He  does  not  hear  you.  8.  Would  you  buy  an 
estate  if  you  had  money?  9.  What  do  you  want  (wish)! 
10.  I  want  (need)  a  new  hat.  n.  We  have  bought  two 
beautiful  pictures.  12.  What  did  he  say  to  that?  13.  Do 

*For  practice  a  few  of  the  Exercises  will  be  provided  in  Roman  type, 
which  is  now  frequently  used  in  Germany.  See  §  41,  note. 


§  212]  WEAK    VERBS    (CONTINUED).  s  99 

not  laugh.  14.  If  I  were  a  wealthy  man,  I  should  (invert) 
send  my  children  to  Berlin.  15.  There  they  would  learn 
German.  16.  He  will  send  us  a  fat  goose.  17.  Show  me 
the  house  of  the  doctor.  18.  Diligent  scholars  love  their 
teacher.  19.  My  mother  has  said  it.  20.  What  would  she 
have  said  if  she  had  heard  it  ?  21.  Do  not  ask  me.  22.  This 
dictionary  is  mine.  23.  We  played  with  the  same  children. 
24.  We  use  the  same  grammar  as  (ttrie)  your  teacher. 


LESSON   XVIIL 

Weak  Verbs  (Continued). 

211.  Generally  speaking,  the  retention  or  rejection  of 
the  short  vowel  e  in  the  terminations  (e)ft,  (e)tf  (e)te,  (e)tet, 
(e)ten,  depends  on  euphony  —  the  e  being  usually  omitted 
where  euphony  will  permit.     (§  201,  a.)     But  there  are 
some  instances  in  which  the  e  must  be  retained. 

NOTE. —  Like  cases  occur  in  English  for  like  reasons  of  euphony;  as 
mended,  planted,  mixes,  etc. 

212.  Verbs  whose  stem  ends  in  b  or  t,  or  in  m  or  n  pre- 
ceded by  a  mute  consonant,  always  retain  the  e.     Thus  : 

9^eben,  to  speak,  talk. 
PRESENT.  PAST. 

I  speak.  I  spoke,  talked. 

id)  rebe.          ttnr  reben.  id)  rebete.        ttrir  rebeten. 

bu  rebeft.        ifjr  rebet.  bu  rebeteft.      ifjr  rebetet. 

er  rebet.          fie  reben.  er  rebete.         fie  rebeten. 

PAST  PARTICIPLE  —  gerebet,  talked,  spoken. 
NOTE.  —  Contracted  forms  like  rebrft,  reb't,  etc.  are  frequent. 


100 


LESSON    XVIII. 


to  act. 

id)  fjanble. 
bu  Ijanbelft. 
cr  Ijanbelt. 

ttrir  fjanbeln. 


213.  Verbs  whose  stem  ends  in  a  sibilant  (),  ft,  5,  ftf))  retain 
the  e  always  in  the  second  person  singular  of  the  present : 

id)  tcm§e,  I  dance.  id)  reife,  I  travel. 

bu  tcmjeft,  thou  dancest.  bu  reifeft,  thou  travellest. 

er  tan§t,  he  dances.  er  retft,  he  travels. 

214.  Verbs  whose  stem  ends  in  el,  er,  drop  e  of  the  stem 
before  the  ending  e ;  elsewhere  they  drop  the  e  of  the  in- 
flection, as  also  in  the  infinitive  (§85,  note). 

Rubern,  to  row. 
id)  rubre. 
bit  ruberft. 
er  rubert. 

ttrir  rubern. 
tf)r  rubert. 
fie  rubern. 

rubre  (bu). 
id)  Ijabe  gerubert. 

atmen,  to  breathe. 
tr often,  to  comfort. 
redjnen,  to  reckon. 
getdjnen,  to  draw. 
offnen,  to  open. 

fe|en,  to  put,  place. 
f)affen,  to  hate. 

a'nbern,  to  alter. 
plaubern,  to  chat,  talk. 
Hettern,  to  climb. 


fie  Ijanbeltt. 

u). 


id)  Ijabe  get)anbe(t. 
Conjugate  like  reben  : 
baben,  to  bathe. 
ad)tenf  to  esteem,  respect. 
marten,  to  wait. 
retten,  to  save. 
leiten,  to  lead. 

Like  tangen: 

tt)iinfd)en,  to  wish. 
ftfd)en,  to  fish. 

Like  t)anbeln  and  rubern  : 
tabeln,  to  blame. 
jd)iittetnf  to  shake. 
lacfyetn,  to  smile. 


§  217]       INTERROGATIVE  PRON.  AlsU  ADJECT.  ICI 

THE  PERFECT  PARTICIPLE. 

215.  The  perfect  participle  regularly  takes  the  prefix 
ge—  in  verbs  of  all  conjugations.     This  prefix  is  called  the 
augment. 

(a)  But  verbs  of  foreign  origin  ending  in  ter'ett  (old 
spelling  also  ir' en),  do  not  take  the  augment  ge-.  Thus: 
ftubte'ren,  to  study;  ftubte'rt,  sttidied;  marfcf)te'renr  to  march; 
marfd)iefrt,  marched. 

Conjugate  like  ftubieren : 

regieren,  to  rule,  govern.      bombarbteren,  to  bombard. 
probieren,  to  try.  fattier  en,  to  fail. 

(ft)  $Bu(f)ftabiefren,  to  spelt,  is  formed  from  a  German  word 
by  a  foreign  suffix,  and  forms  its  past  participle  biid)ftabtert' . 
But  in  §teren,  to  adorn,  ter  is  not  a  part  of  the  termination, 
but  of  the  root  of  the  verb ;  therefore  gejiert,  adorned. 

216.  Verfos  formed  wirr^  the  unacce,T)ted  inseparable  pre- 
fixes do  not  take  the  augment  qe— .     These  prefixes  are 
be-,    etrtp-,   ent-f   er-,   ge-,   ber-,   §er-,   and    some   others. 
(Lesson  XXVIII.)     Examples  :  erf  cm' fen,  p.  p.  erfcmft';  tier- 
lo'ben,  p.  p.  berlobt',  begeic^'nen,  p.  p.  be§ettf)fnet.    For  accent 
see  §  54. 

NOTE.  —  In  general,  the  augment  is  not  prefixed  except  immediately 
before  the  syllable  having  the  principal  accent. 

Interrogative  Pronouns  and  Adjectives. 

217.  These  are  :  — 

trer,  who? 
what? 

er,  tpetcfye,  tt)etdje§,  which?  w/iaf  (adj.)? 
fitr  einf  what  kind  of  a? 


IO2  -LESSON    XVIII.  [§  2l8 

218.  The  declension  of  fter  and  too3  is  as  follows  :  — 
N.  tuer,  who?  ttm§,  what? 

G.  foeffen,  whose?  toeffen,  to  what? 

D.  tt)em,  to  whom  ?  (dative  is  wanting.) 

A.  toen,  whom?  tt>a§,  what? 

219.  SSer  is  used  in  speaking  of  persons,  for  both  genders 
and  numbers ;  and  toa3  in  speaking  of  inanimate  objects. 
Examples :  28er  ift  grower,  $arl  ober  §etnrtrf)  ?    SSer  finb  btefe 
grcmen  ?    2Ba3  fyaben  @ie  ba  ?    SBer  and  toa3  are  used  only 
as  pronouns. 

220.  28e(rf)er  is   used   both   as   an   adjective  and  as  a 
pronoun.    As  an  adjective  :  28eld)e3  ,!pau3  fyaben  <Sie  gefauft  ? 
As  a  pronoun  :  SSelc^e^  t)on  biefen  ^dufern  etc.? 

NOTE.  —  SSetdj,  uninflected,  is  often  used  in  exclamations  before  the  in- 
definite article  or  an  adjective,  like  fold;  (§  207) ;  as,  toeld)  etn  Sftann !  toelrf) 
reidjer  ^tmmel,  what  a  rich  sky! 

221.  The  phrase  ft)a3  fiir  ein,  what  for  a,  what  (kind  of  \  is 
used  as  an  interrogative  adjective,  in  which  etn  is  inflected  ; 
as,  toa3  fiir  em  SBaitnt  tft  ba3  ?  what  kind  of  a  tree  is  that  ? 
toa3  fiir  etnen  ©torf  fyaben  @te  ?  w^«/  ^^<3?  of  a  cane  have 
you  f    Or  without  etn :  ft)a<§  fiir  SBetn  —  llnftnn  —  S5tumen  ? 
what  (kind  of)  wine  —  nonsense  — flowers  ? 

NOTE.  —  2$a§  and  fiir  (ein)  are  often  separated,  as,  28a§  tft  ba§  fiir  ein 
©toe!  ?  28a3  ift  i>a§  fiir  ttnfinn  ? 

28a§  fiir  etner,  xe//^/  ^//z^/  of  one,  occurs  as  pronoun. 

222.  (a)  Instead  of  a  dative  or  accusative  of  tDd£  with  a 
preposition,  too,  where,  before  a  vowel  toor,  is  used  in  com- 
position :  as,  faction,  of  ^vhat  ?  toobitrrf),  through  what  ?  too- 
ntit,  with  what?  toortn,  in  what?  toorcmf,  upon  what?  (§  1 84). 

NOTE.  —  With  urn,  tocmnn,  for  what,  -why?  is  used  for  toorum. 

Yet  a  preposition  may  stand  before  tt)d§  fiir  (ein). 

(b)  Likewise  the  genitive  toeffen  is  rarely  used,  except 


§  222]  INTERROGATIVE    PRON.    AND    ADJECT.  IO3 

of  persons.     A  shorter  form,  ftef},  is  sometimes  met  with  ; 
in  compounds,  toe3;  as,  toe^alb,  on  what  account?     (See 

also  Lesson  LV.) 

IDIOMS. 

auf  einen  toarten,  to  wait  for  some  one. 
auf  ettoaS  red)tten,  to  count  upon  something. 
gem,  "with  pleasure,  willingly. 
id)  plaubre  gern,  I  like  to  chat. 

EXERCISE  XVIIL 

i.  Ich  habe  sie*  getrostet.  2.  Er  hat  den  ganzen  Tag 
gewartet.  3.  Dieser  Mann  redet  zu  viel.  4.  Die  Schiiler  achten 
ihren  Lehrer.  5.  Mein  Bruder  wartet  auf  seinen  Freund. 
6.  Er  rechnet  darauf.  7.  Er  rettete  das  Kind.  8.  Ich  schiittle 
den  Baum.  9.  Du  plauderst  zu  viel,  mein  Kind.  10.  Der 
Knabe  kletterte  auf  den  Baum.  n.  Er  tadelte  diesen  Fehler. 
12.  Sie  zeichnet  schlecht.  13.  Mein  Bruder  hat  zu  (at) 
Heidelberg  studiert.  14.  Mein  armer  Nachbar  hat  falliert. 
15.  Er  lachelte  iiber  den  Narren.  16.  Sie  tadelten  uns. 
17.  In  wessen  Garten  sind  Sie  gewesen?  18.  Wir  waren  in 
dem  (or  demjenigen)  unseres  Nachbars.  19.  Was  haben  Sie 
getadelt?  20.  Wen  tadelte  der  Lehrer?  21.  Wessen  Haus 
ist  das?  22.  Wem  hat  unser  Lehrer  dieses  Buch  geschickt? 
23.  Wem  sagen  Sie  das?  24.  Was  fur  eine  Blume  haben 
Sie  da? 

i.  The  boys  have  bathed  in  the  deep  river.  2  She  has 
denied  it.  3.  My  daughter  comforted  the  poor  woman.  4. 
Dost  thou  wait  for  thy  brother  ?  5.  The  boys  shook  the  trees. 
6.  The  brave  soldier  saved  the  old  general.  7.  We  have  waited 
the  whole  day.  8.  I  chat  with  my  children.  9.  I  smile  at  (iiber, 
ace.)  the  fool.  10.  The  general  has  bombarded  the  town.  n. 
We  have  tasted  (tried)  this  wine.  12.  We  opened  the  door. 

*  Her,  or  them.  See  note  3,  §  189.  In  connected  discourse,  however, 
such  ambiguities  will  generally  be  avoided. 


IO4  LESSON    XIX.  [§  223 

13.  The  mother  led  her  child  by  (an,  dat.)  the  hand.  14.  The 
teacher  blamed  the  pupil.  15.  The  prince  chatted  with  the 
old  soldier.  16.  The  boys  were  rowing  against  the  stream. 
17.  The  maid-servant  has  adorned  the  nursery  with  beautiful 
flowers.  1 8.  Spell  the.se  words.  19.  I  have  spelled  them. 
20.  We  like  to  chat  with  our  friends.  21.  Whom  have  you  sent 
into  (the)  town?  22.  Whose  house  have  you  bought?  23.  To 
whom  did  you  show  the  castle  of  the  count?  24.  What  have 
you  there  ?  —  What  kind  of  a  stick  is  that  ? 


LESSON    XIX. 
The  Strong  Conjugation. 

223.  Strong  verbs,  as  already  stated,  are  distinguished 
by  a  change  of  the  root-vowel  —  that  is,  by  internal 
change  —  in  conjugation.  This  change  of  vowel  is  called 


NOTE.  —  SC&laut  must  not  be  confounded  with  Umlaut  (§  10.)  From  the 
force  of  um,  around  and  £aut,  sound,  Umlaut  means  a  shifting  of  sound  on 
the  same  base,  as  of  a,  o,  u,  to  a,  b,  ii.  From  ab,  off,  away,  Stfclaut  means 
a  departure  of  sound,  that  is,  the  substitution  of  a  different  sound.  The 
former  is  called  vowel  modification  ;  the  latter,  vowel  change.  They  are, 
historically,  of  different  origin.  The  term  vowel  alteration  is  used  when 
necessary  to  include  both  of  these  processes. 

General  Rules  of  Conjugation  for  Strong  Verbs. 

224.  The  past  tense  is  formed  by  a  change  of  root-vowel 
(TOcmt)  and  without  any  ending,  as,  fprecfyen,  fyrac!)  ;  jmgert, 
fang;  litgert,  log;  fallen,  fiet,  etc.  The  past  subjunctive 
modifies,  when  possible,  the  root-vowel  of  the  past  indica- 
tive, and  adds  -e,  as,  fprftrfje,  fcmge,  (oge,  ftele,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  An  earlier  e  is  still  sometimes  found  in  the  past  indicative  of 
some  verbs  ;  as  falje  for  faf),  etc. 


§  226]  STRONG    CONJUGATION.  IO5 

225.  The  perfect  participle  ends  in  en.     The  root-vowel 
of  the  participle  is   sometimes  the  same  as  that  of  the 
infinitive ;  sometimes  the  same  as  that  of  the  past ;  some- 
times different  from  both.     As  in  the  sequences  : 

I.     i.  2.   i.     as,  fcfjen,  faf),  gefeljen,  etc. 
II.     i.  2.  2.     as,  frieren,  fror,  gefroren,  etc. 
III.     i.  2.  3.     as,  fingen,  fang,  gefungen,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  i .  This  sequence  of  vowels  will  be  found  to  be  a  convenient 
aid  to  the  jnemory.  The  groups  as  thus  defined  are  sometimes  called 
Conjugations  L,  II.,  III.  See  §  259. 

2.  The  infinitive,  past  tense,  and  perfect  participle,  which  exhibit  the 
vowel  sequences,  are  known  as  the  principal  parts  of  the  verb —  as  also  in 
English ;  and,  likewise,  in  the  weak  verbs. 

Special  Rules  of  Conjugation. 

226.  Certain  strong  verbs  undergo  modification  or  change 
of  the  root-vowel  in  the  second  and  third  persons  singular 
of  the  present  indicative  and  in  the  imperative  singular. 

(a)  Most  verbs  which  have  e  for  their  root-vowel  change  e 
to  i  or  ie  in  the  second  and  third  persons  singular  of  the 
present  indicative  and  second  person  singular  of  the  imper- 
ative: short  e  always  becoming  i;  long  e.  usually,  becoming 
ie  —  and  omit  the  final  e  of  the  imperative.  As:  id)  fcredje, 
I  break ;  bit  bttcfyft,  er  bridjt  j  imperative  fyridj ,  id)  lefe,  I  read, 
bu  liefeft,  er  lieft :  imperative,  Iie£.  But  some  verbs  with  long 
e  are  excepted. 

(ft)  Most  verbs  which  have  a  for  their  root-vowel  modify  a 
into  a  in  the  second  and  third  persons  singular  of  the  present 
indicative,  but  not  in  the  imperative:  idj  falle,  I  fall,  bu  fattft, 
er  fattt;  imperative:  falte. 

(c)  The  following  modify  the  vowel  only  in  the  present 
indicative:  laufett,  to  run,  bit  laufft,  er  lauft;  faitfen,  to  drink, 
bu  fciufft,  er  fauft;  ftofsen,  to  push,  bit  ftojseft,  er  ftofjt.  (£rlbfd)eit, 
to  become  extinguished,  go  out,  becomes  erfifdjeft,  erlifdjt,  and 


J.O6  LESSON    XIX.  [§  227 

changes  its  vowel  also  in  the  second  singular  of  the  imperative : 
erlifd).  Also  berlofdjen  (§  242,  a). 

(</)  Verbs  whose  stem  ends  in  t  contract  -tet  to  -t  in  the 
third  singular  present  if  they  alter  the  vowel,  but  not  other- 
wise;  as,  geltett,  gilt;  ratett,  rat;  but  Btetett,  bietet.  (§  212). 

227.  With  the  above  exceptions  (§§  224,  226)  the  rules  for 
the  personal  endings  are  the  same  as  in  the  weak  con- 
jugation. (§  20 1.) 

Further  details  and  exceptions  will  be  given  under  the 
several  classes,  and  in  the  Alphabetical  List,  p.  307,  etc. 

EXAMPLE  OF  A  STRONG  VERB. 
Styredjen,  to  speak. 

Principal  Parts. 

fpredjett.  fpradj.  gefprodjen. 

PRES.  PART.  —  fpredjenb.       PERF.  INFIN. —  gefprodjett  fjaOen. 
Indicative.  PRESENT.          Subjunctive. 

id)  fpredje.  id)  fpredje. 

bit  fprtd)ft.  bit  fpredjeft. 

er  fprid)t.  er  fpred>e. 

ftrir  fpred)en.  tDtr  fpre^en. 

t^r  fprec^t.  tt)r  fpred^et. 

fie  fpred)eu.  fie  fpredjen. 

PAST. 

td^  fpra($.  i$  fpra'dje. 

bit  fprad;ft.  bit  fprac^eft. 

ei  fprai^.  er  fprad^e. 

iDtr  fpradjen.  lt)tr  fprddjen. 

i^r  fprad^t.  tfjr  fprac^et. 

fie  fpra^en.  fie  fpradjett. 

PERFECT. 

t(^  ^abe  gefpro^en.  id)  Ijabe  gefprod)en. 

bu  !§aft  gefprod)en,  etc.  bii  fjabeft  gefpro^en,  etc. 


§  228]  STRONG    CONJUGATION.  IOJ 

Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

PLUPERFECT. 

id)  fiatte  gefprodjen.  id)  fjdtte  gefprodjen. 

bu  fyatteft  gefprodjen,  etc.  bit  fyatteft  gefprodjen,  etc. 

FUTURE. 

id)  rcerbe  fpredjen.  id)  toerbe  fprecfyen. 

bu  ttrirft  fprecfyen,  etc.  bu  trerbeft  fpred)enf  etc. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 
id)  toerbe  gefprod)en  (jaben,  etc.    id^  merbe  gefprodjen  ^abenr  etc. 

CONDITIONAL. 

id)  iDiirbe  fpred^en,  /  should  speak. 
bu  ttmrbeft  fpredjen,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL  PERFECT. 
id)  miirbe  gefprod^en  f)a6enr  etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

fpred)en  it)ir. 

fprid).  fpred)t. 

fpredtje  er.  fpre^en  fie. 

Classes  of  Strong  Verbs. 

228.  Strong  verbs  may  be  divided,  for  the  convenience 
of  the  learner,  into  three  classes,  according  to  the  root- 
vowels  (see  Remark  §  259)  : 

i.  The  first  class  contains  all  strong  verbs  which  have 
for  their  root-vowel  i  (ie)  or  e,  with  a  few  others. 

This  class  contains  by  far  the  largest  number  of  strong 
verbs,  and  is  subdivided  into  four  groups  according  to  the 
vowels  (9(6(cutt)  of  the  past  tense  and  perfect  participle. 


108  LESSON    XIX.  [§  229 

Examples :  — 

a)  fingcn,  to  sing.  fang,  sang.  gefungen,  sung. 

b)  fprecfyen,  to  speak,  fpradj,  spake,  gefprocfyen,  spoken. 

c)  frteren,  to  freeze,  fror,  froze.  gefroren,  frozen. 

d)  fd)en,  to  see.  faf),  saw.  gefeljen,  seen. 

229.  2.  The  second  class  contains  all  strong  verbs  wbich 
have  for  their  root-vowel  et,  with  one  exception.     (§  247,  n.) 

This  class  is  subdivided  into  two  groups,  the  first  having 
in  the  past  tense  and  perfect  participle  a  short  i,  and  the 
second  group  having  to. 

Examples :  — 

a)  beifeen,  to  bite.          bi§,  bit.  gebiffen,  bitten. 

b)  tretben,  to  drive.       trieb,  drove.      getrieben,  driven. 

230.  3.  The  third  class  contains  all  strong  verbs  which 
have  for  their  root-vowel  a,  with  a  few  others. 

It  is  subdivided  into  two  groups  according  to  the  vowel 
of  the  past  tense. 
Examples :  — 

a)  fallen,  to  fall.  fief,  fell.        gefatten,  fallen. 

b)  fdjlagen,  to  strike,  (slay),   fdjtug,  slew,  gefdjfogen,  slain. 

NOTE.  —  Only  the  usual  forms  will  be  here  given.  Other  special  forms 
will  be  found  in  the  Alphabetical  List,  p.  307,  etc. 

231.  FIRST  CLASS  OF  STRONG  VERBS. 

First  Subdivision. 

VOWELS  —  i;  tt,  it.     SEQUENCE — i.  2.  3  (§  225). 
INFINITIVE.  PAST.  PERF.  PART. 

binben,  to  bind.  banb.  gebunben. 

brtngen,  to  press.  brang.  gebrungen. 

finben,  to  find.  fanb.  gefitnben, 

getmgen,  to  succeed  (impersonal),   gefnng.  getungen. 


STRONG    CONJUGATION 


I09 


INFINITIVE. 

PAST. 

PERF.  PARI 

flingen,  to  sound. 

ftong. 

geftungen. 

ringen,  to  wring,  wrestle. 

rang. 

gerungen. 

fcfyltngen,  to  sling,  twine. 

fd)tang. 

gefdjfungen. 

fd)ttnnben,  to  vanish. 

fd)ttwnb. 

gefd^tt)unben 

fdjttnngen,  to  swing. 

fdjttmng. 

gef(^tt)ungen 

ftngen,  to  sing. 

fang. 

gefungen. 

finfen,  to  sink. 

fan!. 

gefunfen. 

fpringen,  to  spring,  leap. 

f  prang. 

gefprungen. 

ftinfen,  to  stink. 

ftottf. 

geftunfen. 

trinlen,  to  drink. 

tranf. 

getrunfen. 

ttnnben,  to  wind. 

tt»anb. 

gettmnben. 

5ttnngen,  to  force. 

5tt>ang. 

ge§ttmngen. 

(a)  To  these  may  be  added: 

bingen,  to  bargain. 

bung  or  bang. 

gebungen. 

fcfytnben,  to  flay. 

f(i)unb. 

-     gefd^unben. 

which  have  usually  n  instead  of 

a  in  the  past 

tense. 

EXERCISE  XIX. 

i.  Dieser  Mann  hat  das  Geld  gefunden.  2.  Meine  Schwester 
wird  ein  deutsches  Lied  singen.  3.  Trinken  Sie  gern  Milch  ? 
4.  Er  bindet  das  Buch.  5.  Der  Vogel  hat  gesungen.  6.  Es 
klang  sehr  schon.  7.  Der  Efeu  schlingt  sich  um  den  Baum. 
8.  Er  sagt,  dasz  er  das  Buch  gebunden  habe.  9.  Es  ist  mir 
nicht  gelungen  (I  have  not  succeeded  in,  etc.),  das  Wort  in  dem 
Worterbuche  zu  finden.  10.  Zwingen  Sie  mich  nicht.  n.  Die 
Kinder  wiirden  weinen,  wenn  der  Lehrer  sie  zwange,  dieses 
Lied  zu  lernen.  12.  Es  wird  Ihnen  nicht  gelingen,  Deutsch  zu 
lernen,  wenn  Sie  nicht  fleisziger  studieren.  13.  Ich  habe  ein 
Messer  gefunden.  14.  Die  Kinder  dieser  Frau  haben  sehr 
schon  gesungen.  15.  Die  Frauen  wanden  einen  Kranz.  16. 
Worauf  sitzen  die  Schiiler?  17.  Wovon  sprechen  die  Lehrer? 
18.  Woraus  hat  das  Kind  getrunken?  19.  Wir  fanden  die 


110  LESSON    XX.  [§  232 

Biicher  auf  der  Bank  in  der  Schulstube.  20.  Das  Madchen 
schlang  den  Kranz  urn  den  Arm  des  Knaben.  21.  Der 
Matrose  sprang  auf  den  Felsen.  22.  Der  Buchbinder  hat 
unsere  alten  Biicher  sehr  schon  gebunden.  23.  So  sank  das 
Schiff.  24.  In  der  Nacht  schwanden  die  Wolken. 

i.  I  have  found  these  books  on  the  table.  2.  This  good 
young  lady  wound  a  wreath  around  the  boy's  hat.  3.  What 
would  these  children  say  if  the  teacher  forced  them  to  leave 
(the)  school?  4.  The  gentleman  sang  a  German  song.  5.  Do 
you  like  to  drink  milk?  6.  She  liked  to  drink  wine.  7.  I  have 
drunk  a  cup  [of]  tea.  8.  The  boy  leaped  over  the  garden- 
wall.  9.  The  boy  has  found  this  knife  in  the  school-room. 
10.  I  should  drink  a  glass  [of]  water  if  I  were  thirsty,  n. 
Would  you  be  glad  if  we  sang  (subj.)  a  song  ?  12.  He  hoped 
that  you  had  found  me  here.  13.  I  have  succeeded  (it  is  to 
me  succeeded).  14.  She  will  succeed.  15.  You  will  find  me  at 
home  to-morrow.  16.  The  soldiers  forced  the  general  to  speak. 
17.  You  would  succeed  if  you  studied  more.  18.  Do  not  drink 
this  bad  beer.  19.  The  boy  swung  himself  over  the  wall.  20. 
The  birds  were  — singing  in  the  woods.  21.  The  farmer  has 
flayed  the  ox.  22.  What  song  had  you  been  singing  (sung)  ? 
23.  What  kind  of  a  song  has  the  young  lady  sung?  24.  What 
kind  of  tea  do  you  like  to  drink  ? 


LESSON  XX. 

232.  FIRST  CLASS  OF  STRONG  VERBS. 

Second  Subdivison. 

VOWELS  —  c  (t)  ;  a,  O.     SEQUENCE — i.  2.  3. 

INFINITIVE.  PAST.         PERF.  PART. 

befefjlert,  to  command;  befiefjtft,  beftefjtt.    befall.       befofjlen. 
begtmten,  to  begin.  begamt.      begonnen. 


§232] 


FIRST    CLASS    OF    STRONG    VERBS. 


Ill 


erfcfyrat.     erft^rocfen. 


INFINITIVE.  PAST.         PERF.  PART. 

bergen,  to  hide;  btrgft,  birgt.  barg.         geborgen. 

berften,  to  burst;  btrfteft,  birft.1  barft.         geborften. 

brecfyen,  to  break;  brtdjft,  brid)t.  brad),        gebrocfyen. 

empfef)lcn,  to  recommend;  empfieljtft,        empfaf)l.    empfo^Ien. 

empfief)tt. 
erfdjrecJen,  to  be  frightened ;  erfdjricfft, 

erfdjrttft. 

gebaren,  to  bring  forth;  gebierft,  gebtert.   gebar. 
geltert,  to  be  worth;  gtltft,  gilt.1 
getDtnnen,  to  win. 
Ijelfen,  to  help;  ^ilfft,  I;ilft. 
lommen,  to  come.     (See  below.) 
nef)men,  to  take;  ntimnft,  ntmmt. 
rtnnen,  to  flow. 

fd^elten,  to  scold;  fdjiltft,  fdjitt.1 
f<^tr>immenf  to  swim. 
ftttnen,  to  meditate. 
fpinnen,  to  spin. 

fpredjen,  to  speak;  fprtdjft,  fprtc£)t. 
fted^en,  to  stick;  ftic^ft,  ftid^t. 
fte^lett,  to  steal;  fttefp,  ftte^lt. 
fterben,  to  die;  fttrbft,  ftirbt. 
treffen,  to  hit,  to  meet;  trtffft,  trtfft. 
berberben,  to  spoil;  t>erbirbftf  berbirbt. 
tuerben,  to  sue;  fair b ft,  tuirbt. 
iuerfen,  to  throw;  hrirfft,  tDtrft. 

(a)  All  these  verbs  modify  the  vowel  e  to  t,  or  tef  in  the 
second  and  third  person  singular  of  the  present  and  in  the 
second  person  singular  of  the  imperative  (tyrid),  triff,  2C.). 

In  learning  these  and  similar  verbs  it  is  best  perhaps  for  beginners  to 
confine  the  attention  first  to  the  principal  parts  only  —  bearing  in  mind 
the  rules  §  226,  and  noting  exceptions  as  they  occur. 

i.  See  §  226,  d. 


gebar. 

geboren. 

gait. 

gegotten. 

getnann. 

geloonnen. 

pff. 

gefjolfen. 

lam. 

gelommeu. 

nafjm. 

genomttten. 

rann. 

geronnen. 

fdjatt. 

gefd^olten. 

fd)tt>amm. 

gefd)tt)ommen. 

farm. 

gefonnen. 

fpanrt. 

gefponnen. 

fprac^. 

gefprod^en. 

ftarf). 

geftod^en. 

fta^L 

geftofjlen. 

ftarb. 

geftorben. 

traf. 

getroffen. 

tjerbarb. 

berborben. 

ttmrb. 

getuorben. 

luarf. 

gelrjorfen. 

112  LESSON    XX.  [§  233 

(b)  ®eOtiren,  fommen  are  irregular  in  this  group,  having 
a,  0  instead  of  (earlier)  e  in  the  infinitive.     The  modified 
forms  tommft,  fomtnt,  are  rare. 

(c)  The  verb  toerben  belongs  to  this  class  with  its  old  past 
ttmrb.     With  its  modern  past,  itmrbe,  it  is  irregular  (§  256). 

(d)  Note  change  of  quantity  in  fommen,  ndmten,  treffen. 
REMARK.  —  Observe    that   the   verbs   beginning   with  the 

inseparable  prefixes  fce-,  emp-,  er-,  etc.  (§  216),  do  not  take 
the  augment  ge-.  Such  verbs  are  given  in  the  lists  only  where 
the  primitive  verb  is  no  longer  in  use ;  as,  gebcirett,  etc. 

Kelative  Pronouns. 

233.  The  German  language,  like  the  English,  has  no 
special    words   to   express   the    relative    connection,    but 
supplies  the  deficiency  by  using  the  demonstrative  ber,  bie, 
ba3,  and  the  interrogatives  -toetdjer,  e,  e£,  and  tuer,  toa3;  their 
use  as  relatives  being  shown  by  the  construction  (§  238). 

234.  2)er,  when  used  as  a  relative,  is  declined  like  the 
demonstrative   ber  (§   206),   except  that  in  the   genitive 
plural  it  has  only  berert  (never  berer).     2$eld)er,  as  a  relative 
is  declined  like  btefer,  except  that  it  lacks  the  genitive 
case,  both  singular  and  plural. 

235.  In  the  genitive  singular  only  the  forms  beffen,  beren, 
beffen,  and  in  the  genitive  plural  the  form  beren  are  used. 
Examples:  $)er  SDtonn,  beffen  §au^  id)  getauft  fyabe,  ift  ge^ 
ftorben;  the  man   whose  house  I  have  bought  has  died. 
£)te  gran,  beren  ®mber  @te  nettltd)  Bet  im3  trafen,  toirb  un^ 
morgen  bejltdjen;  the  lady  whose  children  you  met  lately  at 
our  house  will  pay  us  a  visit  to-morrow. 

236.  (a)  SSerf  tt)a^f  are  used  as  indefinite  relatives,  in- 
cluding the  antecedent,  like  the  English  (lte\  who,  who- 


§  240]  RELATIVE    PRONOUNS.  113 

ever,  what  (that  which).  As  :  3Ser  cmbern  erne  ©rube  grabt, 
ftittt  felbft  Ijinetrt ;  he  who  digs  for  others  a  pit  falls  into  it 
himself.  2Sa3  er  f)atr  ift  ntrf)t  trie! ;  what  he  has  is  not 
much. 

(b)  28a3  is  also  of  regular  occurrence  after  a  neuter  pro- 
noun, personal,  demonstrative  or  indefinite  (e3,  bd£,  dlle£>, 
etiua$,  nid)t<3)  etc.,  and  after  neuter  adjectives  used  as  nouns. 
As:  OTe3,  toaS  id)  fjabe;  all  (that)  I  have.  S)a3  erfte,  toaS 
fie  gotten,  the  first  (thing)  they  heard.  9?ad)  bem,  toa3  id) 
gel)5rt  fyabe,  after  \thaf\  what  I  have  heard.  Also,  when 
the  antecedent  is  an  entire  sentence  or  clause ;  English 
which  ;  as :  er  lam  md)t,  tuaS  mid)  argerte,  he  did  not  come, 
which  angered  me. 

237.  Instead  of  the  relative  toa3  —  or,  usually,  the  dative 
or  accusative  of  relatives  referring  to  things — with  prepo- 
sitions, the  compounds  of  too,  ftor  (§  222)  are  employed. 

238.  Since  every  relative  clause  is  dependent,  or  subor- 
dinate, the  relative  pronoun  throws  the  verb  to  the  end  of 
the  clause — in  compound  tenses,  the  auxiliary  (§169,2). 

NOTE.  —  A  relative  clause  in  German  is  always  punctua|,tpfl  y^t^  ° 
corn  ma. 

239.  The  relative  pronoun  is  frequently  omitted  in  Eng- 
lish, but  must   always  be  expressed  in  German.     Thus : 
The  news  we  heard  yesterday,  bie  9tatg!ett,  tt)e(cf)e  ttnr  geftern 
(jorten. 

240.  In  English,  in  the  interrogative,  and  in  some  forms 
of  the  relative  construction,  the  preposition  is  often  thrown 
to  the  end  of  the  clause.     This  cannot  be  imitated  in  Ger- 
man.    As,  what  are  you  speaking  of?  SSoDon  fpredjert  @ie 
(of  what)  ?  The  man  we  spoke  of ;  ber  SD^cmn,  lion  toeldjem 
(bem)  tmr  fpradjett  (of  whom)  etc.     (See  also  Less.  LVI.) 


114  LESSON    XX.  [§  240 

EXERCISE  XX. 

i.  Mein  Bruder  empfiehlt  Ihnen  diesen  Wein.  2.  Es  1st 
derselbe  Wein,  den  ich  Ihnen  empfohlen  habe.  3.  Hilf  mir, 
Heinrich  !  4.  Ich  habe  ihn  gestern  auf  der  Strasze  getroffen. 
5.  Wir  trafen  tins  (each  other)  oft.  6.  Er  hat  das  Geld 
genommen.  7.  Er  birgt  auch  alles,  was  er  stiehlt.  8.  Er 
spricht  Deutsch  und  Franzosisch.  9.  Er  nimmt  kein  Geld. 
10.  Schiller  starb  zu  (at)  Weimar,  n.  Woriiber  sannen  Sie? 
12.  Die  Fische  schwimmen  in  dem  Wasser.  13.  Kommen 
Sie  nicht  zu  spat.  14.  Ich  habe  den  ersten  Preis  gewonnen. 
15.  Sie  hat  sich  mit  einer  Nadel  gestochen.  16.  Sie  haben  es 
getroffen.  17.  Das  Eis  bricht.  18.  Dieser  Knabe  hat  Steine 
in  den  Garten  unseres  Nachbars  geworfen.  19.  Sein  Vater 
schilt  ihn.  20.  Es  ist  derselbe  Knabe,  der  die  schonsten 
Blumen  in  unserem  Garten  gebrochen  hat.  21.  Was  fur 
ein  unartiger  Knabe!  22.  Mein  Vater  empfiehlt  sich  Ihnen. 

i.  Who  commands  here?  2.  The  teacher  commands  here. 
3.  He  told  me  that  he  would  help  us.  4.  I  met  him  yesterday 
in  (the)  town.  5.  We  came  too  soon.  6.  She  helps  the  poor 
(dat.).  7.  Does  your  brother  speak  German  ?  8.  The  soldiers 
would  be  frightened  if  the  enemy  (//.)  came  (past  subj.). 

9.  These    soldiers  say,  that  they  would  not  be  frightened. 

10.  He  has  won  this  money,  he  has  not  stolen  it.     n.  The 
women  are  spinning.      12.   I  have  spoken  with  him.      13.  At 
what  time  does  the  concert  begin?   14.   The  music  has  begun. 
15.  Take  my  pen,  dear  brother,  it  is  better  than  yours.     16.   Do 
not  be  frightened,  it  is  only  a  pin  with  which  I  have  pricked  my- 
self.   17.   My  father  sends  his  compliments  to  your  mother.    18. 
Here  is  the  book  which  the  teacher  has  recommended  [to]  you. 
19.  You  have  hit  it.     20.  With  what  can   I  help  you?     21. 
What  are  you  meditating  about  (iiber)  ?  22.  This  is  the  woman 
I  was  speaking  of  (tiott)  to  you.     23.   Here  is  the  man  whose 
sons  swam  over  the  river.     24.   All  the  poor  man  [had]  is 
spoiled  or  taken  from  him.    (Use  comma  before  all  relatives.} 


§241]  FIRST    CLASS    OF    STRONG    VERBS.  11$ 

LESSON    XXL 

FIRST  CLASS  OF  STRONG  VERBS. 

Third  Subdivision.  —  A. 
VOWELS — ie  ;  0,  0.     SEQUENCE — 1.2.2. 

241.  The  third  subdivision  of  the  first  class  contains  a 
larger  number  of  verbs  than  any  other  class.  The  first 
list  contains  only  those  which  have  for  the  radical  vowel 
of  the  infinitive  ie. 

In  all  the  vei  bs  of  this  group  the  root  of  which  ends 
in  (3  or  rf),  the  long  te  of  the  infinitive  is  changed  into  a 
short  o  in  the  past  tense  and  perfect  participle  (§  41). 
©teben  changes  its  b  to  tt;  and  in  ^ietjen  t)  is  changed  to  g. 
Xrtefen  doubles  its  f.  See  also  p.  307,  Rem.  2,  3. 

INFINITIVE.  PAST.  PERF.  PART. 

btegen,  to  bend.  bog.  gebogen. 

bieten,  to  bid,  offer.  bot.  geboten. 

fliegen,  to  fly.  flog.  geffogen. 

fliefjen  to  flee.  f(of).  geftofjen. 

piemen,  to  flow.  flog.  gefloffen. 

frteren,  to  freeze.  fror.  gefroren. 

gemejsen,  to  enjoy.  genofs.  genoffen. 

gtejjen,  to  pour.  go§.  gegoffen. 

!rie^en,  to  creep.  !roc^.  gefrocfyen. 

rted)enf  to  smell.  roc^.  gerocfyen. 

fc^ieben,  to  shove,  push.  fdjob.  gefc^oben. 

f(^tegenf  to  shoot.  fdfjofs.  gefloffen. 

f^tie^en,  to  shut,  lock.  fcftfofj-  gef($toffen. 

fieben,  to  boil.  jott.  gefotten. 

fprie^en,  to  sprout.  ipro§.  gefproffen. 

ftieben,  to  be  scattered.  ftob.  geftoben. 

trtefen,  to  drip.  troff.  getroffen. 

berbrie^en,  to  vex.  tierbrofs.  t>erbroffen. 


n6 


LESSON    XXI. 


[§  242 


INFINITIVE.  PAST.  PERF.  PART. 

fcertieren,  to  lose.  fcerlor.  fcerloren. 

ttnegen,  to  weigh  (intransitive).    toog.  geftogen. 

jiefyen,  to  draw  (intr.)  to  move.  509.  ge^ogen. 

B. 

VOWELS  —  e,  i  ;  0,  0.     SEQUENCE — 1.2.2. 
242.  This  list,  besides  verbs  with  root-vowel  e  or  i,  con- 
tains also,  by  analogy  of  conjugation,  a  few  with  root-vowel 
a,  ail,  c,  ii,  and  one  with  a  (fdjallen).  All  have  o  in  the  past 
tense  and  perfect  participle. 

INFINITIVE.  PAST.         PERF.  PART. 

betoegeit,  to  induce.  beittog.  betoogen. 

brefcfyen,  to  thrash;  brtfcfyeft,1  brifd^t.  brofd^.  gebrofd£)eu. 

fed)ten,  to  fight;  fid)t(e)ftr  ftd^t.  foc^t.  gefod)ten. 

fled)tenr  to  braid;  f(t(^t(e)ftf  f(td)t.  f(oci)t.  geftoi^ten. 

garenf  to  ferment.  got.  gegoren. 

gtimmen,  to  glimmer.  glomm.  geglommen. 

^eben,  to  lift.  I;ob.  gefjoben. 

fltmmen,  to  climb.  flomm.  gellotnmen. 

fiiren,-/^  choose.  for.  geforen. 

lofcfyen,  to  go  out(oi  a  light);  Itfcfyeft,1  Iif(^)t.  lofd).  gelof^en. 

liigen,  to  tell  a  lie.  log.  gelogen. 

melfen,  to  milk ;  tnilfft,  milft.  mol!.  gemolfen. 

pflegen,2  to  practise,  foster.  pffog.  gepflo^en. 

quetten,  to  gush ;  quiHft,  qutEt.  quoit.  gequoEen. 

faufen  (of  animals),  to  drink;  jciufft,  faitft.  foff.  gefoffen. 

faugen,  to  suck.  fog.  gefogen. 

flatten,2  to  sound.  jd)ol(.  gef^otten. 

fdjeren,  to  shear;  f^ierft,  f^iert.  fcE)or.  gef^oren. 

j^metaen,  to  melt;  fdjmiljeft,1  f^miljt.  f^olj.  gefd)mot§en. 

f^nauben,  to  snort.  f^nob.  gef^noben. 

1.  For  contracted  2nd  person  singular,  see  p.  307,  Rem.  2. 

2.  Also  weak.     See  Alphabetical  list. 


§  242]  FIRST  CLASS  OF  STRONG  VERBS. 

INFINITIVE.  •    PAST.       PERF.  PART. 

fcfyrauben,  to  screw.  fdjrob.  gefcfyroben. 

fcfytodreti,  to  suppurate.  fd)tt>or.  gefd)n)oren. 

fd)tt)ellen,  to  swell;  fdjttuEft,  fd)tf)iEt         jcfyraoU.  gejd)tr>otten. 

fd)tt)oren,  to  swear.  fdE)rt)or.  gejcfytooren. 

triigen,  to  deceive.  trog.  getrogen. 

ttmgen,  to  weigh  (transitiveV1  tt>og.  getoogen. 

tfleben,  to  weave.  toob.  getooben. 

242.  (a)  The  verbs  fiiren,  Iflfrfjen,  flatten,  triigen  occur 
chiefly  with  the  inseparable  prefixes :  erfttren,  erlofdjen,  tier- 
lofdjen,  erfi^aGen,  t)erjd)allen,  betriigen. 

(b)  Note  absence  of  vowel  change  (§  226)  in  the  present 
of  ktoegert,  i)ebenf  pflegen,  tDeben,  fdjaflen  —  and  in  other  e 
verbs  hereafter. 

EXERCISE  XXL  — A. 

i.  £)te  £ore  ber  ©tabt  ftnb  gefdjtoffen.  2.  2)er  S5oget  flog 
auf  einen  SBaum.  3.  SStr  ftnb  (have]  au§  ber  ©tabt  cmf  ba§ 
Saub  ge^ogen.  4.  2)te  Seinbe  flo^en.  5.  2)er  SBruber  meine§ 
S5etter§  ^at  feiti  (^elb  tjerloren.  6.  @§  ^at  gefroren.  7.  grtert 
e§?  8.  £)er  ^aiifmantt  bot  mir  Tjiinbert  £aler  fiir  meiit  ^pferb. 
9.  3)ie  tt)ilben  (^cinfe  giefjen  im  §erbft  nad)  ©iiben.  10.  SSie  tuet 
fjat  ba§  S5rot  getoogen?  n.  (Seine  ^leiber  troffen  t)om  S^egen. 
12.  2)te  geinbe  ftoben  nad^  alien  <3etten.  13.  2)er  Sager  fjat 
bret  §afen  gefi^offen.  14.  SBer  jitng  ift,  gcnte^e  feiti  Seben. 
15.  ^art,  gie^e  Staffer  auf  bte  S5lumen!  16.  (S§  toerbrtefjt  mtd^, 
metn  (^elb  derloren  511  Ijaben. 

i.  He  has  poured  water  into  the  glass.  2.  Have  you  lost 
your  money?  3.  The  cat  crept  under  the  table.  4.  He 
pushed  the  table  against  (an)  the  wall.  5.  The  enemy  (pi.) 
has  (are)  fled.  6.  I  have  shot  a  hare.  7.  How  much  has  the 
merchant  offered  you  for  your  horse?  8.  He  has  offered  me 

i.  Also  weak  ;  see  Alphabetical  list. 


Il8  LESSON    XXI.  [§  242 

[a]  hundred  dollars.  9*  My  uncle  has  (is)  moved  into  the 
village.  10.  The  leaves  of  the  trees  sprout  in  (the)  spring, 
ii.  The  boy  says  that  he  has  (subj.)  lost  his  knife.  12.  The 
sportsman  sent  me  three  birds  which  he  had  shot.  13.  The 
gate  is  locked.  14.  The  trees  are  dripping  with  (bom)  rain. 
15.  The  rain  was  dripping  from  her  dress.  16.  (The)  birds  fly 
in  the  air,  fishes  swim  in  the  water,  and  worms  creep  upon  the 
earth/ 

B. 

i.  Diese  drei  Regimenter  haben  tapfer  gefochten.  2.  Ein 
Tier  sauft,  ein  Mensch  trinkt;  ein  Mensch  sauft  (swills), 
wenn  er  wie  ein  Tier  trinkt.  3.  Er  hob  das  Kind  auf 
den  Stuhl.  4.  Der  Regen  troff  aus  den  Wolken.  5.  Was 
hat  Sie  bewogen,  auf  das  Land  zu  ziehen  ?  6.  Das  Feuer 
ist  erloschen.  7.  Die  Schafer  haben  die  Schafe  gescho- 
ren.  8.  Der  Schnee  ist  auf  den  Bergen  geschmolzen. 
9.  Die  Magde  melken  die  Kiihe.  10.  Der  Knabe  hat  gelogen. 
ii.  Wer  gelogen  hat,  luge  nicht  mehr ;  und  wer  gestohlen  hat, 
stehle  nicht  mehr.  12.  Das  Eis  schmilzt.  13.  Dieser  Kauf- 
mann  hat  mich  betrogen.  14.  Das  Wasser  quillt  aus  der  Erde. 
15.  Er  hob  den  Stein  auf.  16.  Er  galoppierte  so  schnell,  dasz 
das  Pferd  schnob  und  die  Funken  stoben. 

i.  The  rivers  are  swollen  by  the  rain.  2.  The  peasant  is 
threshing.  3.  Our  soldiers  have  fought  bravely.  4.  The  snow 
is  melting.  5.  How  many  sheep  have  the  shepherds  shorn 
to-day?  6.  The  fire  had  (roar)  gone  out;  not -a  (tern)  spark 
was  glimmering.  7.  The  merchant  would  have  deceived  me. 
8.  He  who  (toer)  steals  will  lie.  9.  He  lifted  the  stone  out  of 
the  water.  10.  A  good  soldier  fights  for  his  king.  ii.  All  is 
lost.  12.  Tell  shot  the  apple  from  the  head  of  his  little  son. 
13.  The  rain  was  pouring  from  the  clouds.  14.  The  stranger 
offered  me  (dat.*)  his  hand.  15.  The  girl  who  had  milked  the 
cows  weighed  a  pound  [of]  butter.  16.  This  old  thief  has 
stolen  a  young  sheep. 


§  244]  FIRST    CLASS    OF    STRONG    VERBS.  119 

LESSON  XXIL 

243.  FIRST  CLASS  OF  STRONG  VERBS. 

Fourth  Subdivision. 

VOWELS  —  e,  i,  ie  ;  a,  e*  SEQUENCE — i.  2.  2  (3). 

INFINITIVE.  PAST.  PERF.  PART 

bitten,  to  beg,  ask.  bat.  gebeten. 

effen,  to  eat;  iffeft,  ifjt.1  af$.  gegeffen. 

freffen,  to  eat;  friffeft,  frifet1  (of  animals),  frag.  gefreffen. 

geben,  to  give;  gibft,  gtbt.2  gab.  gegeben. 

genefen,  to  recover  (from  illness).8  gena§.  genefen. 

gefcfyefjen,  to  happen;  e3  gefdjiefyt.  gefdjaf).  gefdjefjen. 

lefen,  to  read;  liefeft,  lieft.1  la§.  getefen. 

Itegen,  to  lie,  be  situated.  lag.  gelegen. 

meffen,  to  measure;  tmffeft,  migt.1  ma§.  gemeffen. 

fet;en,  to  see;  fte^ft,  fiefjt.  fafj.  gefe^en. 

fi^en,  to  sit.  jag.  gejeffen. 

treten,  /<?  j/^  /  trittft,  tritt.  trat.  getreten. 

bergeffen,  to  forget;  ^ergiffeft,  tiergigt.1     t)erga§.  bergeffen. 

(a)  In  effen  there  is  a  double  augment — geeffen,  con- 
tracted to  geffeit  —  then  ge-geffen.     In  fi^en,  |  is  changed  to 
^.     Xretett  changes  long  e  to  short  t,  followed  by  tt. 

(b)  In  this  group  the  a  of  the  past  is  long.     Hence  in 
the  subjunctive,  tijse,  frtijse,  etc.  (§  41). 

Indefinite  Pronouns  and  Adjectives. 

244.  The  indefinite  pronouns  are  : 

jemanb,  somebody,  anybody.  etner,  one. 

niemanb,  nobody.  feiner,  no  one;  pi.  none, 

jebermatm,  everybody.  t\\QV&  ($$&%},  something,  anything. 

man,  one,  they,  etc.  nt(i)t£,  nothing. 

1.  For  contracted  2nd  singular,  see  p.  307,  Rem.  2. 

2.  Formerly  gtebft,  gte&t,  as  still  sometimes  written. 

3.  Note  absence  of.  vowel  change  in  present. 


I2O  LESSON    XXII.  [§  245 

(a)  Semcmb,  nientcmb  have  genitive  -(e)3  ;  dative  -em,  or  -en  ; 
accusative  —en;  but  are  often  without  ending  in  dative  and 
accusative.  Sebermann  takes  only  -(e)§  in  the  genitive. 

NOTE.  —  These  words  are  all  compounds  of  2ftann,  man. 

(f)  (£iner,  fetner  are  the  pronoun  forms  of  ein,  rein.  They 
are  declined  like  biefer.  Compare  the  possessives  (§  193). 

(c)  The  indefinite  man  (from  3ftann,  man)   is  the  general 
personal   subject,   variously  translated:  one,  people,  they,  we, 
etc.;  also  often  by  the  passive;  as,  man  fagt,  it  is  said.     It  is 
used  only  as  nominative  singular.      (See  §  460,  i). 

(d)  (£tft)a§,  ntcfjtS  are  indeclinable.     They  often  occur  with 
a  neuter  adjective  as  noun:  ettt)a£  ®ute§  ;  nidjt§  ®ute§. 

NOTE.  —  The  English  not  any  —  one  or  thing  will  be  usually  expressed 
simply  by  fein(er),  niemanb,  nid)t§. 

245.  The  indefinite  adjectives  are  :  — 
fein,  leine,  lein,  no,  not  any.  manner,  e,  e§,  many  (a). 

jeber,  jebe,  jebe§,  }         .  etnige, 

" 


.  , 

each  every,  "      I  some  (pi.),  a  few. 

,  e,  e«.  ^        ^  ettidje,  j 

jebnoeber,  e,  e§r     J  t)tetf  much;  pi.  mele, 


atter,  e,  e3,  «//.  n^enig,  /////<?/  pi. 

iNoTE.  —  To  these  may  be  added  the  indeclinable  etn  toenig,  a  little  : 
and  phrases  like  ein  paar,  a  few,  etn  fii^en,  a  bit  (of}  used  indeclinably  ; 
also  the  forms  in  -let,  aflerlei,  of  all  kinds,  etc.  (§  306);  and  toetcfjer.  (§  458, 
2).  The  indefinite  article  also  properly  belongs  here. 

(a)  Qeber  is  used  also  with  the  indefinite  article,  usually  with- 
out a  noun  :  etn  jeber,  every  one  ;  sometimes  also,  etn  jegltdjer. 

(b)  9ftand)  is  also  used,  in  the  singular,  without  declension, 
followed  by  the  indefinite  article  ;  as,  manner  Sftann,  or  mantf) 
etn  Sftann,  many  a  man.     Also  —  chiefly  in  poetry  —  before  an 
adjective;  as,  mancf)  fcintte  33(umen  (for  manage  bunten  23(umen). 

(c)  S5iel  and  toentg  are  generally  not  declined  in  the  singular, 
but  should  be  declined  in  the  plural.    For  instance  :  $tel  ®etb, 
t)ie(  SSetn  ;  much  money,  much  wine.    But  :  (£r  fjat  t)iele  Sreunbe, 
he  has  many  friends.    $8tete§,  tcentge^,  occur  as  neuter  pronouns. 

NOTE.  —  For  other  special  uses  of  indefinites,  see  §  460. 


§  245]  INDEFINITE    PRON.    AND    ADJECT.  121 

IDIOMS. 

fcitte,  pray  ;  for  id)  fcttte.  tote  bid,  how  much;  pi.  how  many. 

urn  etttmg  bitten,  to  beg  for  anything,        id)  ftntt  bcntttt  fagen,  /  mean  by  that* 


EXERCISE  XXII. 

i.  23itte,  lieber  $ater,  gib  mir  eine  neue  Uljr.  2.  5$  bitte 
@ie  urn  SBerjeifjung.  3.  3)er  5lrme  bittet  urn  S3rot.  4.  <2ie(), 
f)ier  finb  beine  23ud)er.  5.  3)er  $linbe  fiefjt  nicE)t£.  6.  (£§ 
gefd)ief)t  oft,  bag  man  etttmS  in  ber  (£ile  bergigt.  7.  5tt§  ber 
^ranfe  genefen  ttmr,  ajs  er  etnen  5(pfel  tnit  bent  grofeten 
5lppetit'.  8.  3dj  tier  gag  3§nen  §u  fagen,  bag  ic^  S^en  grennb 
gefe^en  fjabe.  9.  2)er  ^nabe  tgt  ®irfcf)en.  10.  2)er  SSoget 
fag  anf  einem  ^o^en  ^Baume.  u.  3ebermann£  (Sad^e  ift 
nicmanbe§  <Sa^e.  12.  $d)  ^abe  bte  <Sad^e  gang  bergeffen. 

13.  Xiere  freffen,  Sftenfdjett  effen;  Xtere  fanfen,  ^DZenfc^en  trtnfen. 

14.  SSenn  man  bon  einem  SKenfdjen  fagt,  bag  er  freffe,  fo  tuill 
man  bamit  fagen,  bag  er  tine  ein  Xter  effe.     15.  5)er  ^onig  fag 
auf  bent  Xronef  nnb  feme  TOnifter  traten  bor  t^n.      16.  Xrttt 
na^err  mein  ©o^n,  fprtcl)  tauter,  unb  Ite§  beutltd^.     17.  (Siefjft  bu 
memanb(en)  auf  ber  23anf?    18.  %<§  fe^e  ntemanb(en).     19.  OTe§ 
ift  t>erloren.  20.  SBtele  n)aren  ertt)artet,  aber  toentge  finb  gefommeK. 
21.  SSel^e  ®egenben  ber  (S(^inet§  ^aben  <Sie  bereift?     22.  $d) 
I;abe  nur  etnige  (3tdbte  ber  <S(^lt)et5  gefe^en.     23.  Sag  triel  @^nee 
auf  ben  Bergen?     24.  2)ie  S3erge  ftmren  gan$  fret  toon  (Sd)nee. 

i.  My  friend  gave  me  a  dollar  for  the  poor.  2.  This  scholar 
reads  more  distinctly  than  that  [one].  3.  My  sister  reads 
Schiller's  Wilhelm  Tell.  4.  I  should  read  more,  if  I  had  more 
time.  5.  The  books  lay  upon  the  table.  6.  I  have  seen  your 
good  old  aunt.  7.  It  happened  yesterday.  8.  Have  you  seen 
that  famous  general  ?  9.  I  have  not  seen  him.  10.  I  beg  (for) 
pardon,  n.  I  should  have  asked  you,  if  .1  had  seen  you. 
12.  The  boys  have  eaten  ripe  cherries.  13.  The  blind  [man] 
sees  no  one.  14.  You  have  forgotten  the  matter.  15.  I  was 


122  LESSON    XXIII.  [§  246 

in  [a]  hurry  and  have  quite  forgotten  it.  16.  We  shall  eat  with 
a  good  appetite.  17.  The  minister  stepped  before  the  throne. 
1 8.  Do  many  [people]  travel  in  winter?  19.  Few  travel  in 
winter,  but  many  travel  in  summer.  20.  I  have  little  money. 
21.  He  has  many  books,  but  I  have  none.  22.  He  lives  at 
(in)  peace  with  all  men.  23.  We  read  the  whole  night  (ace.). 
24.  One  often  forgets  what  one  has  read. 

Rule  of  Position. 

In  the  normal  order,  an  adverb  will  follow  the  verb.  — • 
Hence  translate,  one  forgets  often. 


LESSON  XXIIL 

SECOND  CLASS  OF  STRONG  VERBS. 

First  Subdivision. 

246.  The  second  class  of  strong  verbs  contains  verbs 
which  have  for  their  root-vowel  in  the  infinitive  ei.  The 
first  subdivision  contains  those  verbs  which  have  in  their 
past  tense  and  perfect  participle  a  short  t. 

In  order  to  show  the  shortening  of  the  vowel  the  follow- 
ing consonant  is  doubled,  except  where  it  is  double  already. 
In  (eiben  and  fcfyneiben,  b  becomes  tt.  See  also  p.  307,  Rem.  2. 

VOWELS  —  ei ;  t,  t.  SEQUENCE  —  i.  2.  2. 

INFINITIVE.  PAST.  PERF.  PART. 

(fid))  befleiftcn,  to  apply  one's  self.       beflifj.  befftffen. 

betjsen,  to  bite.  bifj.  gebiffen. 

erbteicfyen,  to  turn  pale.  erbttd).  erbltdjen. 

gtetd)en,  to  resemble,  to  be  like.  gftdj.  gegltdjen. 

gtetten,  to  glide.  gtitt.  geglttten. 

gretfen,  to  seize.  griff.  gegrtffen. 


§  247] 


SECOND    CLASS    OF    STRONG    VERBS. 


123 


INFINITIVE. 
fetfen,  to  chide. 
Ineifen,  to  pinch. 
teiben,  to  suffer. 
pfeifeit,  to  whistle. 
reiften,  to  tear. 
retten,  to  ride. 
fdf)tetd)enf  to  sneak.  , 
fcfyleifen,  to  whet. 
fd()Iet|3en,  to  slit. 
fcfymeijsen,  to  fling. 
fcfyneiben,  to  cut. 
fcfyreiten,  to  stride. 
fpleifjen,  to  split. 
ftreidfyen,  to  stroke. 
ftreiten,  to  contend. 
roeicfyen,  to  yield. 


Second  Subdivision. 

247.  The  second  subdivision  contains  those  verbs  which 
have  in  their  past  tense  and  perfect  participle  long  t  (te). 

VOWELS  —  ci ;  ie,  te.     SEQUENCE —  i.  2.  2. 

INFINITIVE.  PAST.  PERF.  PART. 

bteiben,  to  remain.  blteb.  geblteben. 

gebetfyen,  to  prosper.  gebtdj.  gebte^en. 

let^en,  to  lend.  ltd).  gette^en. 

metben,  to  avoid.  ntteb.  gemieben. 

preijen,  to  praise.  prie§.  geprtefen. 

reiben,  to  rub.  rieb.  gerieben. 

fdE)eiben,  to  part.  fc^ieb.  gefdE)ieben. 

fdjeinen,  to  shine.  fd)ien.  gefd^tenen. 

fdfyreiben,  to  write.  fdj)rieb.  gefd^rteben. 

fcfyreien,  to  scream.  fdjrie.  gefd^rieen. 


PAST. 

PERF.  PART. 

liff. 

geliffen. 

biff. 

gefniffeu. 

litt. 

gelitten. 

tfiff. 

gepfiffen. 

ri|. 

geriffen. 

ritt. 

geritten. 

fduitff  . 

gefd)liffen. 

fdbltft. 

gefcpffen. 

jd)mi£;. 

gefdjmiffett. 

fdjnitt. 

gefdfymtten. 

fdjjritt. 

gefdjritten. 

fplig. 

gefpliffen. 

ftrufc. 

geftricfyen. 

ftritt. 

geftrttten. 

imrf). 

getDtc^en. 

124  LESSON    XXIII.  [§  247 

INFINITIVE.  PAST.  PERF.  PART. 

jcfymeigen,  to  be  silent.  jd)tt>teg.  gefdjttnegen. 

fpeien,  to  spit.  fpte.  gejpteen. 

fteigen,  to  mount,  rise.                   ftieg.  geftiegen. 

tretben,  to  drive.  trieb.  getrtefcen. 

tteifen,  to  show.  ftne£.  gettriefen. 

aeifjen,  to  accuse.  5te^.  gejidjen. 

NOTE.  —  The  verb  fjetfjen,  to  call,  be  called,  belongs  to  the  third  class 
(next  lesson). 

IDIOMS. 

gleirfjen,  to  resemble  (governs  dative). 

ouf  frfjnetten  ^ferben,  on  swift  horses,  i.  e.  at  full  speed. 

on  (dat.)  ettoaS  leiben,  to  suffer  from  anything. 

EXERCISE  XXIIL— A. 

i.  Der  Knabe  schliff  sein  Messer  und  schnitt  Brot  damit. 
2.  Ein  Hund  hat  mich  gebissen.  3.  Kinder  gleichen  ihren 
Eltern.  4.  Unsere  Soldaten  ritten  auf  schnellen  Pferden  gegen 
den  Feind  ;  sie  stritten  wie  tapfre  Helden.  5.  Der  Feind  wich. 
6.  Ich  habe  mich  in  den  Finger  geschnitten.  7.  Ich  habe  mein 
Exercitium  mit  deinem  verglichen  und  fmde,  dasz  ich  zwei 
Fehler  mehr  gemacht  habe  als  du.  8.  Der  Sturm  hatte  das 
Dach  vom  Hause  gerissen.  9.  Der  Wind  pfiff  in  den  Baumen. 
10.  Die  Diebe  schlichen  in  das  Haus  und  stahlen  alles,  was  sie 
fanden.  n.  Der  Jager  schritt  iiber  das  Feld.  12.  Ich  wiirde 
mit  Ihnen  nach  der  Stadt  reiten,  wenn  ich  nicht  an  Zahnweh 
litte. 

i.  My  mother  suffers  from  (an)  toothache.  2.  My  sister 
suffered  from  headache.  3.  She  turned  pale.  4.  This  dog  had 
bitten  that  little  boy.  5.  Charles  compared  his  exercise  with 
mine  and  found  that  he  had  two  mistakes  more  than  I.  6.  The 
tailor  cuts  the  cloth.  7.  Who  has  been  whistling  ?  8.  The 
thief  sneaked  into  our  house  and  stole  all  (that)  he  found. 


§  247]  SECOND    CLASS    OF    STRONG    VERBS.  12$ 

9.  My  uncle  has  (is)  ridden  into  the  town.  10.  The  wind  tore 
the  leaves  from  the  trees,  n.  The  son  resembles  the  father. 
12.  The  sledge  glided  over  the  snow  and  (the)  ice.  13.  These 
knives  are  sharp;  I  have  ground  them.  14.  Nobody  yielded. 
1 5.  The  huntsman  whistled  to  his  dogs.  1 6.  He  tore  a  leaf  out 
of  the  book. 

B. 

i.  Bitte,  leihen  Sie  mir  zwei  Taler.  2.  Verzeihen  Sie,  dasz 
ich  Sie  darum  bitte.  3.  Der  alte  Konig  war  gestorben,  und  sein 
Sohn,  der  junge  Prinz  Heinrich,  stieg  auf  den  Thron.  4.  Die 
Englander  sind  oft  auf  die  hochsten  Berge  der  Schweiz  ge- 
stiegen.  5.  Die  Sonne  scheint  bei  Tage  und  der  Mond  bei  Nacht. 
6.  Der  Hirt  trieb  die  Ochsen  und  die  Kiihe  seines  Herrn  auf 
das  Feld.  7.  Wiirden  Sie  antworten,  wenn  ich  Ihnen  schriebe  ? 

8.  Mein  Vater  wiinscht,  dasz  ich  ihm  ofter  schreibe  [subj~\. 

9.  Ich  wiirde  schreiben,  wenn  ich  Papier  und  Tinte  hatte. 

10.  Er  hat  mir  seine  deutsche  Grammatik  geliehen.     n.   Er 
schickte  mir  das  Buch  zuriick,  welches  ich  ihm  geliehen  hatte. 
12.  Das  Kind  schrie  ;  es  hatte  sich  in  den  Finger  geschnitten. 

i.  Do  you  remain  at  home  ?  2.  My  sister  remained  at  home. 
3.  The  moon  and  the  stars  shone  brightly.  4.  The  boy  was 
silent ;  his  teacher  scolded  him;  he  had  not  written  his  exercise. 
5.  A  lady  got  out  of  (ftteg  au§)  the  carriage.  6.  We  shall  get 
into  this  carriage.  7  Who  has  lent  you  this  book  ?  8.  Pray, 
lend  me  your  German  dictionary.  9.  The  king  has  pardoned 
the  prince  (dat.)  10.  Write  to  me  more  frequently,  n.  I 
should  have  written  to  you  more  frequently,  if  I  had  had  time 
for  it  (ba^u).  12.  I  should  answer  you,  if  you  should  write  to 
me.  13.  The  count  has  shown  us  his  pictures.  14.  The  old 
general  mounted  (on)  his  horse.  15.  Not  everything  that  is 
written  is  true.  16.  They  parted  as  friends. 


126 


LESSON    XXIV. 


[§248 


LESSON  XXIV. 

THIRD  CLASS  OF  STRONG  VERBS. 

248.  The  third  class  of  strong  verbs  contains  verbs 
which  have  for  their  root-vowel  af  and  in  a  few  instances 
ail,  o,  u  or  et.  It  is  subdivided  into  two  groups. 

The  first  subdivision  contains  verbs  which  change  the 
root-vowel  in  the  past  into  ie,  or  i,  but  retain  the  vowel  or 
diphthong  of  the  infinitive  in  the  perfect  participle. 

NOTE. —  ©efjen  (earlier  also  gangcm)  belongs  irregularly  to  this  class, 
has  irregularly  6  in  the  past  tense  (from  earlier  ID). 


First  Subdivision.     VOWELS  — 

INFINITIVE. 

blafen,  to  blow;  bld'feft,  blaft.1 
braten,  to  roast;  bra'tft,  brat.2 
fatten,  to  fall;  fattft,  fattt. 
fangen,  to  catch;  fangft,  fangt. 
geljen,  to  go. 

fjalten,  to  hold;  Jjaltft,  Ijalt.2 
fangen,  to  hang;  fangft,  Ijangt. 
^ alien,  to  hew. 
fjeifjen,  to  bid,  be  called,  bel 
laffen,  to  let;  laffeft,  lafct.1 
laufen,  to  run;  laiifft,  lauft. 
raten,  to  advise;  ratft,  rat.2 
rufen,  to  call. 

fdjlafen,  to  sleep;  f^lfifft,  fdpft. 
fto^en,  to  push;  fto^eft,  ftb^t.1 


Second  Subdivision. 

249.  The  verbs  of  this  subdivision  have  in  the  infinitive 
and  perfect  participle  a,  and  in  the  past  u. 

1.  For  contracted  2nd  singular,  see  p.  307,  Rcm.  2. 

2.  See  §  226,  d. 


C  (i),  a,     SEQUENCE  —  i.  2.  i 

PAST. 

PERF.  PART. 

blie*. 

briet. 
fiel. 
fing. 

geblafen. 
gebraten. 
gefatten. 
gefangen. 

l)ielt. 

gegangen. 
gef)alten. 
gefangen. 
ge^auen. 

lief. 

gelaffen. 
gelanfen. 

riet. 
rief. 

ftiefe.  ' 

geraten. 
gerufen. 
gefd^lafen. 
gefto^en. 

§  251]  THIRD     CLASS    OF    STRONG    VERBS.  127 

NOTE.  —  (Steven  (formerly  also  ftonton)  belongs  irregularly  to  this  class. 
Its  old  past  was  ftunb.  See  alphabetical  list. 

VOWELS  —  a;  tt,  a.     SEQUENCE — 1.2.  i. 

INFINITIVE.  PAST.  PERF.  PART. 

bacfen,  to  bake;  bticfft,  bacft.  buf.  gebacfen. 

fa^ren,  to  drive;  fcffjrft,  ftifyrt.  fu^r.  gefafjren. 

graben,  to  dig;  grabft,  grab!  grub.  gegraben. 

laben,  to  load.  (See  p.  313).  Iiib.  gelaben. 

fd&affen,  to  create.  fdjuf.  gefd)affen. 

fd)lagen,  to  strike;  fd)lagft,  fdjlftgt.  fd)Iug.  gefdjtagen. 

fteljen,  to  stand.  ftanb.  geftanben. 

tragen,  to  carry;  tragftf  trcigt.  trug.  getragen. 

mad)fenf  to  grow;  ttja^feft,  toad)]!1  n)ud^§.  gemad^fen. 

tt)af(^en,  to  wash;  ttmfcfyeft,  tcafdjt.1  toufd^.  gett>a{c^en. 

Note  absence  of  vowel  change  in  the  present  of  geljen,  fteljen,  jrf)affen. 
See  also  p.  307,  Rem.  2. 

Reflexive  Verbs. 

250.  A  reflexive  verb  is  one  whose  object  is  the  pronoun 
corresponding  to  its  subject  —  the  action  is  reflected.     In 
the  third  person  there  is  a  special  reflexive  object,  fid), 
dative  and  accusative.     Elsewhere  the    regular   pronoun 
objects  are  used  reflexively.     (See  §  185.) 

Hence,  generally,  jtcf)  before  the  infinitive  is  used  to 
mark  a  reflexive  verb. 

251.  The  conjugation  offers  no  peculiarities.     The  re- 
flexive object  has  the  usual  place,  before  an  infinitive  or 
participle,  but  elsewhere  immediately  after  the  verb-form, 
(169.  2) — subject,  however,  to  inversion  or  transposition. 

The  perfect  auxiliary  of  a  reflexive  verb  is  always  tjaben. 

NOTE.  —  The  reflexive  object  may  be  accusative  or  dative  —  sometimes 
genitive  —  but  is  usually  accusative,  as  in  the  paradigm.  Those  with  other 
than  accusative  objects  are  sometimes  called  false  or  indirect  reflexives. 


128  LESSON    XXIV.  [§  251 

CONJUGATION  OF  fid)  ttmfdjen,  to  wash  (one's  self). 

INFIN.  PRES.  PART.  PERF.  PART. 

fid)  ttmfdjen.  fid)  ttmfdjenb.  fid)  gettmfdjen.* 

PERFECT  INFINITIVE. 
fid)  gettwfdjen  fjaben. 

PRESENT. 

idj  ttmfdje  mid),  I  wash  myself,     roir  tt)afd)en  utt§. 
bu  ttmfdjeft  bid).  iljr  ttmfdjt  eud). 

er  ttmfd()t  fid).  fie  toafdjen  fid(). 

PAST. 
idt)  tt)iif(^  ntid^,  I  washed  myself  .    bu  tt)ufd)eft  bid),  etc. 

PERFECT. 
id)  ^abe  mi(^  getDaf^en,  I  have  washed  myself  . 

PLUPERFECT. 
idj)  f)atte  nti(^  getoafdjen,  /  had  washed  myself. 

FUTURE. 
id)  merbe  mic^  luaf^en,  I  shall  wash  myself. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 
id)  toerbc  mi(^  getuaf^en  §aben,  /  shall  have  washed  myself. 

IMPERATIVE. 
ttwfdje  bidf),  wash  thyself. 
tt)af<^e  er  fid),  &/  >^/w  7£/^^  himself. 
tt>afd)en  tt)ir  un§,  /^/  us  wash  ourselves. 
tDdf(i)t  eildE),  wash  yourselves. 

n  fie  fid),  let  them  wash  themselves. 

yourself  or  yourselves. 


*  The  perfect  participle  can  here  occur  only  in  auxiliary  forms.  The 
fid}  which  stands  before  the  infinitive  and  participles  will,  of  course,  be 
replaced  by  the  proper  pronoun,  corresponding  to  the  subject. 


§  252]  REFLEXIVE    VERBS.  129 

In  like  manner,  with  dative  object : 
id)  }d)meid)le  mir,  I  flatter  myself,    fair  jc()meic&.eln  un§. 
bu  fd)tneid)elft  bir.  ifjr  fdjmeidjett  eud). 

er  fd)tneid)ett  fid),  fie  fd)meid)eln  fid). 

Or  with  genitive  object : 

id)  fd)one  metner,  I  spare  myself,  ttrir  fdjonen  unf(r)er. 

bu  fdjottft  beiner.  i'fjr  fcfyont  eu(r)er. 

er  fdjont  fetner.  fie  fdjonen  ifyrer. 

252.  A  reflexive  plural  is  often  used  in  a  reciprocal 
sense  ;  as,  fair  fefyen  Iin3  feltert,  we  seldom  see  each  other.  In 
case  of  possible  ambiguity,  the  indeclinable  compound 
eiricmber,  one-another,  is  used  instead  of  the  reflexive ;  as, 
fie  Iteben  eincmber,  they  love  one  another  (each  other). 

REMARK. —  The  reflexive  form  is  used  much  more  largely  in  German 
than  in  English,  and  is  variously  translated.  Some  verbs  are  used  ex- 
clusively, or  with  special  meaning,  as  reflexives.  The  reflexive  meaning 
must  always  be  looked  for  in  the  dictionary. 

2.  Especially  where  in  English  the  same  form  is  transitive  or  intransi- 
tive, the  latter  is  in  German  usually  expressed  by  the  reflexive;  as,  1 '  tnovey 
he  turns ;  id)  betoege  mid) ;  er  toenbet  fid),  etc. 

3.  The  emphatic  fel&ft,  fclber,  self  (§  454)  must  not  be  confounded  with 
the  reflexive  —  the  forms  being  the  same  in  English. 

IDIOMS. 

fpo^teren,  to  -walk,  exercise.  fid)  fteitett,  to  rejoice. 

fpa^teren  gefyen,  to  take  a  walk.  fid)  trren,  to  be  mistaken. 

fpa^terett  reiten,  to  take  a  ride.  fid)  fcefinben,  to  be  (do). 

fpaateren  fafjren,  to  take  a  drive.  bor  etnem  Sa^e,  a  year  ago. 

EXERCISE  XXIV.  — A. 

i  Der  Koch  hat  das  Fleisch  nicht  gut  gebraten.  2.  Die 
Kochin  wiirde  es  besser  gebraten  haben.  3.  Der  Tote  lag  da, 
als  ob  er  schliefe.  4.  Schlafst  du,  mein  Kind  ?  5.  Ich  habe 
die  ganze  Nacht  geschlafen.  6.  Man  liesz  den  Narren  gehen. 


I3O  LESSON    XXIV.  [§  252 

7.  Wofiir  halten  Sie  mich  ?  8.  Ich  habe  Sie  immer  fiir  einen 
reichen  Mann  gehalten.  9.  Der  Lehrer  hielt  ein  Buch  in  der 
Hand.  10.  Ich  stand  auf  einem  Berge  und  sah  in  das  tiefe 
Tal.  ii.  Lassen  Sie  mich  gehen.  12.  Wir  gingen  nach 
Hause.  13.  Die  Freundin  meiner  Schwester  ist  ins  Konzert  ge- 
gangen.  14.  Wo  ist  dieHerrindes  Hauses?  15.  Sieschlaftnoch. 
1 6.  Der  Blinde  fiel  iiber  einen  Stein.  17.  Die  Koniginnen 
Elisabeth  und  Marie  waren  einander  feindlich.  18.  Wie  heiszen 
Sie?  19.  Ich  heisze  Heinrich. 

i.  The  [man]  cook  is  roasting  the  meat.  2.  The  [woman] 
cook  has  roasted  a  goose.  3.  We  ate  a  roast  goose.  4.  The 
queen  and  her  [women]  servants  went  to  (the)  church.  5.  The 
wind  blew  from  the  North.  6.  I  wished  that  a  milder  wind 
would  blow.  7.  A  sleeping  dog  does  not  bite.  8.  What  is  the 
name  of  this  street  (say:  how  is  this  street  called)  ?  9.  This 
street  is  called  (the)  New  Street.  10.  In  the  kitchen  the  [man] 
cooks  are  the  greatest  heroes,  n.  A  coat  hangs  on  (an)  the 
wall.  12.  I  shall  call  my  man-servant.  13.  We  ran  through 
the  garden.  14.  A  prince  keeps  his  word.  15.  She  has  left 
her  books  at  home.  16.  I  advised  her  to  go  home.  17.  Henry 
pushed  Charles  against  (an)  the  wall.  18.  I  have  knocked 
my  foot  against  a  stone. 

B. 

i.  Sie  tragt  noch  dasselbe  Kleid,  welches  sie  vor  zwei  Jahren 
getragen  hat.  2.  Der  Backer  backt  Brot.  3.  Die  Magd  wiirde 
ihre  Kleider  gewaschen  haben,  wenn  sie  Seife  gehabt  hatte. 
4.  Man  grabt  mit  einem  Spaten.  5.  Gott  schuf  die  Welt  aus 
nichts.  6.  Wenn  dieser  Baum  Friichte  triige,  so  wiirden  wir 
Ihnen  gern  einige  davon  schicken.  7.  Ich  stand  am  Fenster 
-und  sah,  wie  der  Knabe  den  Hund  schlug.  8.  Dieser  Baum 
tragt  keine  Frucht.  9.  WTir  fuhren  gestern  spazieren.  10. 
Meine  Schwestern  werden  spazieren  reiten.  n.  Die  Schiiler 
sind  mit  ihrem  Lehrer  spazieren  gegangen.  12.  Ich  freue 


§253]  MIXED    AND    IRREGULAR    VERBS. 

mich,  Sie  zu  sehen,  Herr  Doktor  ;  wie  befinden  Siesich  ?  13. 
Danke,  ich  befinde  mich  sehr  wohl,  seit  ich  auf  dem  Lande 
wohne  und  die  frische  Luft  geniesze.  14.  Wie  befindet  sich  Ihr 
[Herr]  Vater?  15.  Ich  danke  Ihnen,  [mein]  Herr,  er  befindet 
sich  recht  wohl.  16.  Wir  freuen  uns,  Sie  so  wohl  zu  sehen. 
17.  Ich  habe  mich  geirrt.  18.  Er  sagte  mir,  dasz  er  sich 
geirrt  habe. 

i.  The  baker  has  baked  bread.  2.  The  coachman  drives  too 
fast.  3.  Who  stands  there?  4.  We  stood  and  waited.  5. 
This  plant  has  (ift)  grown  very  quickly.  6.  He  carried  the 
letters  to  (auf)  the  post-office.  7.  The  children  are  delighted 
(rejoice);  they  will  take- a— drive.  8.  The  heart  beats.  9. 
How  are  you,  dear  uncle?  10.  I  am  very  well,  my  dear  child, 
ii.  My  aunt  has  taken  a  drive  with  her  sister.  12.  I  should 
wash  (myself),  if  I  had  soap  and  water.  13.  The  rifle  is 
loaded  ;  the  soldier  loaded  it.  14.  We  should  take  a  ride,  if 
the  weather  were  fine.  15.  What  do  you  take  (hold)  me  for, 
sir?  1 6.  You  are  mistaken.  17.  I  beg  [for]  pardon,  sir;  I 
have  been  mistaken.  18.  Our  friends  will  rejoice  that  their 
children  love  one  another  so  warmly. 


LESSON  XXV. 
Mixed  and  Irregular  Verbs. 

253.  A  small  number  of  verbs  change  their  root-vowel 
in  the  past  indicative  and  perfect  participle,  and  also  add 
the  endings  of  the  weak  conjugation.  These  are  some- 
times called  mixed  verbs. 

NOTE.  —  This  change  of  vowel  is  not  historically  the  same  as  the  Ablaut 
of  the  strong  verbs.  These  are  really  weak  verbs,  which  have  undergone 
a  root- vowel  change.  The  term  mixed  is  used  only  for  convenience. 


132  LESSON    XXV.  [§  254 

254.  In  the  past  subjunctive  most  of  these  verbs  follow 
the  weak  conjugation,  without  vowel-change  ;  but  bringen, 
benfen,  ttnffen  follow  the  strong,  bringen  and  benfen  change 
ng,  nt  to  d)  in  the  past  and  perfect  participle.  SStffen  is 
also  irregular  in  the  present  singular. 

INFINITIVE.                      PAST.  PERF.  PART.  PAST  SUBJ. 

brennen,  to  burn.  ferannte.             gebrannt.  brennte. 

fennen,  to  know.  !annte.               gefannt.  fennte. 

nennen,  to  name,  call.  namtte.              genannt.  '  nennte. 

rennen,  to  run.  rannte.               geronnt.  rennte. 

fenben,  to  send.  fanbte.                gefanbt.  fenbete. 

ioenben,  to  turn.  toanbte.              geftmnbt.  toenbete. 

brin3en,  to  bring.  fcrad)te.               gebradjt.  bradjte. 

benfen,  to  think.  barf)te.                 gebadjt.  badjte. 

toiffen,  te  know.  toufjte.                getoufct.  toiifete. 
PRESENT.  —  1(^  toeijj,  bit  iuei^t,  er  luetB,  hnr  toiffen,  etc. 


NOTE.  —  i.  ©enben  and  toenben  are  also  conjugated  regularly  as  weak 
verbs.  (See  §  212.)  Sometimes  also  rennen. 

2.  With  itriffen  compare  the  modal  auxiliaries  (next  Lesson). 

255.  Xlin,  to  do,  is  quite  irregular. 

It  forms  its  past  tense  by  reduplication  and  vowel  change 
(like  di-d)\  its  perfect  participle  and  past  subjunctive  as  in 
strong  verbs  ;  but  it  drops  e  before  consonants  in  the  infini- 
tive. perfect  participle,  and  present  indicative  and  imperative. 
Thus  :  - 

INFIN.  PAST.          PERF.  PART.     PAST  SUBJ. 

tun.  tat.  getan.  tate. 

PRESENT.         Sing.  :  tue,  tuft,  tut  ;  plur.  :  tun,  tut,  tun. 
IMPERATIVE.    Sing.  :  tue  ;  plur.  :  tut. 

256.  The  auxiliaries  i)afcen,  fein,  toerben,  are  also  irregular  • 
(a)  §aben  (weak)  has  in  the  present  indicative  fjaft,  Ijat, 

for  ^abft,  ^abt  ;  in  the  past,  f)dtte  for  tjabte  ;  but  forms  its  past 
subjunctive  strong:  fjtitte. 


§  259]  MIXED    AND    IRREGULAR    VERBS.  133 

(b)  (Sent  is  wholly  irregular,  being  made  up  like  English 
am,  was,  been,  of  different  roots ;  and  has  also,  in  part,  excep- 
tional personal  inflections.    The  infin.  jetrt  is  for  feten(§  75,  b). 

(c)  SSerben  has  in  the  present  ttnrft  for  ttrirbft ;  and  ftnrb  as 
§  226,  d;  but  imperative  tuerbe.     The  past  ttmrb  (§  232,  c)  was 
formerly  more  common  than  now,  in  the  sense  of  an  aorist. 

257.  The  following  may  be  conveniently  grouped  to- 
gether for  special  notice  : 

effen  (§  243),  gefjen,  fjauett,  fjeifeen  (§  248),  leibert,  fdjnetben  (§  246),  nefjmen 
(§  232),  fieben  (§  241),  ftfcen  (§  243),  fteljen  (§  249),  tun  (§  255),  ate^en  (§  241) 

Also,  those  which  double  the  root-consonant  after  a  shortened 
vowel  (as  §  246);  and  those  which  drop  one  consonant  after  a 
lengthened  vowel  (as  §  248-9);  and  the  vowel  changes 
(§  226),  with  exceptions  (§242-3-8-9). 

258.  Some  verbs  have  special  forms,  outside  of  their 
usual  conjugation. 

Such  forms  are  sometimes  archaic  or  poetic  —  sometimes 
alternative  forms,  strong  or  weak.  See  Alphabetical  List  (p. 
308,  etc.). 

259.  The  following  table  will  present  to  the  eye  the  several 
forms  of  the  strong  verbs  as  classed  above;  also  the  conjuga- 
tion (§  225)  to  which  they  may  be  referred  according  to  the 
sequence  of  the  vowels,  and  the  §  where  they  may  be  found. 

REMARK.  —  The  importance  of  these  verbs  —  strong,  mixed,  and  irregu- 
lar—  is  far  beyond  their  numerical  proportion.  They  are  the  most  fruit- 
ful roots  of  the  language,  and  give  rise  to  a  great  number  of  derivatives 
and  compounds  of  various  classes.  Hence  they  should  be  carefully 
learned. 

The  classification  here  given  is  for  convenience  only.  A  more  scienti- 
fic arrangement  —  based  on  historical  development  —  might  be  given,  but 
without  advantage  to  the  learner.  This  belongs  properly  to  later  study. 
The  conjugation  by  vowel  sequences  (§  225)  will  be  found  useful  in  im- 
pressing the  forms  on  the  memory.  But,  after  all,  the  verbs  must  be  learned 
mainly  by  observation  and  by  memory.  Hence  constant  reference  must  be 
made  to  the  Alphabetical  List,  in  case  of  doubt. 


LESSON    XXV. 


[§259 


Synopsis  of  Strong  Verbs, 


CLASS. 

INFIN. 

PAST. 

PERF. 
PART. 

CONJ. 

§ 

I.    I. 

i. 

a. 

U. 

III. 

23I. 

2. 

t,i 

a. 

0. 

III.* 

232. 

3- 

ie. 

0. 

0. 

II. 

241. 

C,  etc. 

0. 

0. 

II. 

242. 

4- 

e,  etc. 

a. 

c. 

I.t 

243- 

II.  I. 

ei. 

i. 

t. 

II. 

246. 

2. 

ci. 

ie. 

ie. 

II. 

247. 

III.     I. 

a,  etc. 

ie. 

a,  etc. 

I. 

248. 

2. 

I. 

u. 

a. 

I. 

249. 

IDIOMS. 

Unrest  tun,  to  do  wrong.  Me  erfte  Piaffe,  the  first  class. 

fetn  SkfteS  tun,  to  do  one's  best.  Me  gtoette  $laffe4  the  second  class. 

on  jemanben  benfen,  to  think  of  one.      etn  (SJefanbter,  an  ambassador 
toon  (dat.)  benfen,  to  have  an  opinion  of.    ber  ®efanbte,  the  ambassador 
jemanben  fennen  lernen,  to  become  acquainted  with  some  one. 

NOTE.  —  fennen,  to  know,  is  used  of  objects  —  persons  or  things  — 
known  or  recognized  by  the  senses ;  toiffen,  to  know,  expresses  knowledge 
by  the  understanding  —  hence,  of  facts,  statements,  etc.  2Btf)'en  also  means 
to  know  how  (to). 

EXERCISE  XXV. 

i.  3d)  tue  mein  23efte§,  Me  beutfdje  @prad)e  511  lernen.  2. .  3d) 
roeif},  <Sie  tun  e§.  3.  S)a§  §01$  brennt  nid)t.  4.  2)ie  ganje 
(Strafe  brannte.  5.  5)er  <3d)tt)efet  brennt  mtt  etner  btaultd^en 
glamme.  6.  C^eben  @tc  mir  etn  (SdjtDejelfyoIj.  7.  3^ntanb  ^at 
mid)  gerufen,  aber  id)  lt)ei^  nid)t,  lt)er  e§  ift.  8.  9ftit  rt)el(^er 
Piaffe  merben  ©ie  fafjren?  9.  SSir  toiffen  nod^  nid)t,  mtt  tt)eld)er 


*  Except  fommen  (§  222,  ^). 


t  Except  bitten,  Hegen,  fi^en. 


§  259]  MIXED    AND    IRREGULAR    VERBS.  135 


ttnr  fafjren  toerben.  10.  SSiffen  @ie  and),  ba§  mem 
SBruber  @te  fennt?  n.  (£r  fjat  @ie  auf  (tf/j  ber  3l!abemie 
tennen  gelernt.  12.  SBaS  Jjat  un§  ber  SBauer  ge6rad)t?  13.  (£r 
fjat  un§  etne  fette  ®an§  gebrad)t.  14.  3ebermann  fteijs,  tt>a§  id) 
fcon  ber  <Sad)e  badjte.  15.  SStffen  <Sie,  too  §err  ©c^mtbt  moljnt? 
1  6.  3d)  tDeig  [e§]  nid^t;  idj  tt)iirbe  e^  fagen,  tuenn  id)  e§  hjiigte. 
17.  (£r  nattnte  mid)  jeinen  greunb.  18.  (Sr  ^at  llnred)t  getan. 

19.  SSoran    ben!en    @ie?     20.   34    bad)te    an    meine    (SItern. 
21.  SSir  toerben  tun,  toa§  @ie  toimfdjen.     22.  2Sa§  ^at  man 
bir,  bit  arme§  ^inb,  getan?     23.  3d)  ft)u^te  nii^t,  lpa§  nnfere 
greunbe  taten. 

i.  He  has  done  his  best.  2.  Who  has  brought  these  books? 
3.  The  coachman  of  the  count  has  brought  them.  4.  The 
whole  town  was-burning.  5.  Do  you  know  Mr.  Miller  ?  6.  I 
do  not  know  him,  but  I  know  where  he  lives.  7.  They  called 
him  by  his  name.  8.  You  have  done  wrong.  9.  She  thinks 
more  than  she  speaks.  10.  You  ar.e  mistaken,  if  you  think  that 
I  know  him.  n.  What  would  she  say,  if  she  knew  it?  12.  Of 
whom  (  an,  ace.  )  did  you  think  ?  13.  We  thought  of  you.  1  4.  The 
boy  ran  and  fell  over  a  stone.  15.  Do  you  not  know  me? 
1  6.  I  know  you  very  well.  17.  The  king  sent  an  ambassador 
to  (nad))  Paris.  18.  I  thought  you  would  keep  your  word,  but 
I  have  been  mistaken.  19.  The  whole  village  stood  inflames. 

20.  The  coaches  of  the  first  class  are  better  than  the  coaches 
of  the  second  class.     21.   I  thought  of  you,  but  I  did  not  know 
where  you  were  then.     22.  You  would  do  wrong  if  you  thought 
so  of  me.      23.  What  were  you  doing  when  (al£)   the  servant 
brought  you  the  ambassador's  letter  ?     24.   I  did  not  know 
what  you  would  think  of  (t)on)  it.     (§  184). 

The  use  of  a  Reader  —  outside  of  the  Grammar  —  should  hardly  be  de- 
ferred beyond  this  point.  Indeed,  in  most  cases,  it  might  be  begun  much 
earlier. 


136 


LESSON    XXVI. 


LESSON  XXVL 


[§260 


The  Auxiliary  Verbs  of  Mood. 

260.  Besides  the  auxiliary  verbs  of  tense  (fjdben,  fein  and 
toerben)  there  are  in  German  six  auxiliary  verbs  of  mood. 
These  are  used  with  the  infinitive,  as  in  English  : 

biirfen,  to  be  allowed  (dare).         nttiffen,  to  be  compelled  (must). 
lonnen,  to  be  able  (can).  f often,  to  have  to,  ought  (shall). 

mogen,  to  like  (may).  tooffen,  to  be  willing  (will). 

While  the  corresponding  English  verbs  are  defective, 
these  verbs  have  in  German  a  complete  conjugation,  ex- 
cept in  the  imperative,  which  occurs  in  tooflen  only. 

261.  Those  which  have  the  umlaut  in  the  infinitive,  drop 
it  in  the  past  indicative  and  perfect  participle,  but  resume 
it  in  the  past  subjunctive.     Sftogen  also  changes  g  to  cf)  in 
the  past  and  perfect  participle.     In  the  present  indicative 
singular,  they  are  inflected  like  the  past  tense  of  the  strong 
verbs.      Other  inflections  are  regular.     Thus  :  — 


INFIN. 

PAST. 

PERF.  PART. 

PAST  SUBJ. 

biirfen. 

burfte. 

geburft. 

biirfte. 

fbnnen. 

fonnte. 

gefonnt. 

fbnnte. 

mbgen. 

mod)te. 

gemod)t'. 

mbd)te. 

miiffen. 

mufcte. 

gemufjt. 

miifete. 

fotten. 

fottte. 

gefottt. 

fottte. 

rootten. 

roottte. 

geroottt. 

roottte. 

PRESENT 

INDICATIVE. 

id) 

barf.  J 

id)  fann. 

id)  mag. 

id)  mufj. 

id) 

fott. 

id)  roitt. 

bit 

barfft. 

bu  fannft. 

bu  magft. 

bu  mufet. 

bu 

fottft. 

bu  roiflft. 

er 

barf. 

er  fann. 

er  mag. 

er  mufe. 

er 

fott. 

er  roitt. 

roir  biirfen. 

roir  fbnnen, 

,     roir  mbgen 

,     roir  miiffen. 

roir  fotten. 

roir  rootten. 

ift 

biirft. 

tfyr  fbnnt. 

ifyr  mogt. 

\fyc  miifjt. 

c  fottt. 

tfjr  roottt. 

fie 

biirfen. 

fie  fbnnen. 

fie  mbgen. 

fie  miiffen. 

fie 

fotten. 

fie  rootten. 

§  264]  USE    OF    THE    AUXILIARIES    OF    MOOD.  137 


PRESENT  SUBJUNCTIVE. 
id)  bitrfe.         id)  fbnne.        id)  ntbge.        id)  mitffe.       id)  fofle.        id)  tootte. 

IMPERATIVE. 
_  wotte. 


The  compound  parts  are  formed  regularly ;  as : 

PERFECT.  id)  fja&e    geburft,  gefonnt,  gemodjt,  etc. 

PLUPERFECT.  id)  Ijatte        „  „  „        etc. 

FUTURE.  id)  toerbe  biirfen,  Ibnneit,  ntbgen,     etc. 

CONDITIONAL.  id)  toiirbe      „  „  „         etc. 

FUTURE  PERFECT.  •  id)  toerbe  geburft  f)aben,  getonnt  fjafcen,  etc. 

CONDITIONAL  PERFECT,  id)  toiirbe      „          „  „         „      etc. 

Use  of  the  Auxiliaries  of  Mood. 

262.  While   these   verbs    correspond,  generally,  to   the 
English  modal    auxiliaries,   can,   may,   etc.,   they  present 
many  differences  of  use  which  will  require  special  atten- 
tion.    These  are  due  in  part  to  their  fuller  conjugation. 

263.  As  these  verbs  are  defective  in  English,  the  German 
verb  will  frequently  have  to  be  expressed  by  a  phrase,  for  in- 
stance :  id)  fjatte  nid)t  gefonnt,  I  had  not  been  able.     28tr  luerben 
muff  en,  we  shall  be  obliged.     (£r  f)dt  geburft,  he  has  been  per* 
mitted.     (£r  miifjte  lacfyen,  he  had  to  laugh. 

NOTE.  —  Special  care  must  be  taken  to  guard  against  ambiguity  from 
the  defect  of  the  English  forms.  For  example:  I  could  not  go  may  mean 
either:  /  was  not  able  (lonnte)  —  or,  /  should  not  be  able  (fbnttte)  to  go;  he 
could  not  have  done  if,  either  he  has  not  been  able,  or,  he  would  not  have  been 
able  —  to  do  it.  Such  forms  will  be  clearly  distinguished  in  German. 

264.  When  a  modal  auxiliary,  in  the  perfect  or  pluperfect, 
is  construed-  with  an  infinitive,  it  changes  its  own  perfect  par- 
ticiple to  the  form  of  an  infinitive.  — '-  As  :  tc()  f)dbe  e§  gefomtt, 
but  id)  f)dbe  e§  tun  lonnen  (not  getonnt),  I  have  been  able  to  do 
it.     (£r  fyat  getooHt,  he  has  been  willing,  he  has  wished;  but  er 
fyat  fd)reibcn  molten,  (not  gett>oKt),  he  has  been  willing  to  write. 


138  LESSON    XXVI.  [§  268 

265.  A  few  other  verbs  have  the  same  construction.    Thes^ 
are :  (jetjsen,  fjelfen,  fybren,  laffen,  fef)en,  sometimes  fiujlen,  lef)? 
rett,  lernen,  macljen.  —  As :  id)  ^abe  fie  tanjen  fefyen,  /  have  seen 
her  dance.     3$)  f)a&e  ty&  fagen   I)5ren,  /  have  heard  him  say. 
(£r  fjat  mid)  nic!)t  gdjert  laffen,  he  did  not  let  me  go. 

266.  As  the  modals  have  no  perfect  tenses  in  English  and 
no  distinct  forms  of  mood,  our  perfect  infinitive  (with  have) 
often  expresses  the  German  past  indicative  of  the  auxiliary. 
As  :  er  tonnte  ba§  nicrjt  fagen,  he  coitld_  not  have  said  that;  but : 
er  fonnte  ba§  nid)t  fagen,  he  could  not  (possibly)  say  that;  er 
mocrjte  ^efjn  3>afyre  aft  feittf  ne  may  have  been  (was  probably) 
ten  years  old. 

NOTE.  —  On  the  other  hand  have  often  expresses  a  genuine  perfect  in- 
finitive; as:  id)  mbd)te  bort  getoefen  fein,  I  should  like  to  have  been  there  ;  fie 
muf}  feljr  Jung  gelrefen  fein,  she  must  have  been  very  young.  Care  should  be 
taken  to  avoid  ambiguity. 

267.  When  such  English  phrases  as  could  have,  should  have, 
etc.,  express   a   past  contingency,  or   unreal    condition,  the 
modal  verb  will  be  in  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  and  the  infini- 
tive in  the  present.     As :  er  (jdtte  gefjcn  fonnen,  he  could  have 
gone  (if  he  had  wished);  er  fja'ttc  e§  tun  f often,  he  should  have 
done  it  (§  263). 

268.  The  modal  verbs  are  used,  much  more  freely  than 
in  English,  as  independent  verbs,  or  with  omission  of  the 
infinitive;  as:  (£r  fann  fein  (£rtgftfd)f  he  knows  no  English; 
man  muf;  ntd)t  miiffen,  one  must  not  be  compelled.     Espec- 
ially where  a  verb  of  motion  is  implied  ;  as :  er  fonnte  nidjt 
Ijinetn,  he  could  not  (go)  in. 

NOTE.  —  As  before  remarked  (§  173),  shall,  will,  should,  would  in  their 
proper  sense  as  verbs  —  or  rqodal  auxiliaries  —  are  represented  by  fotten  and 
tootten  respectively  —  by  toerben  only  in  mere  future  or  conditional  sense. 
In  German,  therefore,  fotten,  tootten,  toerben  are  always  distinctive  ;  and  it  is 
only  in  English  that,  for  want  of  a  specific  auxiliary  of  tense,  any  doubt 
can  arise  as  to  the  use  or  meaning  of  shall,  will;  should,  would. 


§  269]  USE    OF    THE    AUXILIARIES    OF    MOOD.  139 

269.  Stiffen  (§  248)  is  used  with  an  infinitive,  nearly  like 
the  modal  verbs,  as  a  causative  auxiliary,  in  the  sense  of 
to  make  do,  or  to  have  (cause  to  be)  done  —  and  in  many 
idiomatic  phrases.  As,  er  Heft  ba3  ^ferb  fpringen,  he  made 
the  horse  jump;  er  Heft  etnert  SBrief  frfjretben,  he  had  a  letter 
written  (the  agent  being  here  omitted). 

NOTE.  —  These  verbs  have  many  idiomatic  uses,  which  cannot  here  be 
enumerated.  Some  of  their  leading  meanings  are  (see  §  472) :  — 

biirfen  —  dare,  may  (permission,  liberty,  probability). 

fbnnen  —  can,  may  (possibility,  ability). 

tttbgen —  ///£,?  to,  may  (preference,  concession,  contingency). 

mitffen —  must,  have  to  (compulsion,  necessity). 

foHen  —  shall,  is  to,  is  said  to  (duty,  command,  hearsay). 

tooEen  —  will,  is  about  to,  claims  to  (intention,  wish,  assertion). 

IDIOMS. 

tdj  ntag  gern,  I  like  to.  id)  mag  liefcer,  I  prefer  to. 

id)  ntbdjte  gern,  I  should  like  to.  td)*mbd)te  Ueber,  I  had  rather. 

er  fott  fommen,  he  is  to  come.  er  fott  retd)  fein,  he  is  said  to  be  rich. 

jemanben  fomtnen  laffen,  to  send  for  jemanbem  fagen  laffen,  to  send  word 

some  one.  to  some  one. 

er  totU  e§  getcm  fyaben,  he  claims  to  id)  !)a&e  fagen  Ijoreit,  I  have  heard  say 

have  done  it.  (or  said). 

EXERCISE  XXVI.— A. 

(biirfen,  lonnen,  mogen.) 

i.  @r  barf  ben  SBrtef  lefen.  2.  ®arf't(^  ben  33rtef  lefen? 
3.  2)er  ^nabe  barf  in  bet  @d)nle  nid^t  fpieten.  4.  9ftetn  SBater 
^atte  geftern  fein  $ferb  berfaufen  fonnen,  a^er  er  fjat  e^  md)t 
getooEt.  5.  SSarum  ^aben  bie  ^naben  ni(^t  fptelen  biirfen? 
6.  3<^  barf  feinen  SSetn  trinfen.  7.  3c^  mod)te  e§  gern  tun,  aber 
id)  barf  nid^t.  8.  @r  fann  e^  t)ergeffen  ^aben.  9.  3d)  mo(i)te 
t^n  ntd^t  barnm  bitten.  10.  SSir  ^aben  nic^t  fpa^teren  ge^en 
biirfen.  n.  5)er  jnnge  (^raf  mag  ntd)t  fpajteren  retten.  12.  Wtify 
ten  (Sic  gern  fpa§teren  fa^ren?  13.  3d^  ntbdjte  [e§]  gern,  aber 


140  LESSON    XXVI.  [§  269 


idj  farm  e§  ntdjt;  id)  fjabe  ntd)t  ®elb  genug.  14.  (£§  mbd)te  ifym 
fd)toerlid)  getingen.  15.  @te  fbnnen  [e§]  mir  glauben.  16.  3)er 
£rage  mag  nidjt  arbeiten.  17.  3$  5a'tte  mit  tfjm  fpredjen  mbgen. 
1  8.  3$  mbd)te  gern  mit  3§wcn  fprecfyen. 

i.  May  I  water  the  flowers  ?  2.  You  may  (it),  my  son.  3. 
Can  your  daughter  read?  4.  All  my  children  can  read.  5. 
The  sick  man  would  like  to  (mb'd)te  gern)  speak  with  the  phy- 
sician. 6.  The  good  old  physician  cannot  know  everything. 
7.  I  did  not  like  to  ask  him.  8.  We  shall  not  be  able  to  remain. 
9.  He  may  be  mistaken.  10.  May  he  read  these  German  news- 
papers? ii.  He  may  read  them,  if  he  can  read  German.  12. 
You  might  be  right.  13.  The  fish  can  swim.  14.  The  poor 
servant-girl  would  have  written  to  you,  if  she  could  write. 
15.  The  children  have  not  been  allowed  'to  go  into  the  garden. 
1  6.  The  baker  has  not  been  able  to  bake  to-day.  17.  You  can 
believe  me,  I  should  (tour  be)  come  if  I  were  able.  18.  I  have 
not  been  able  to  come. 

B. 

(miiffen,  f  often,  tooften,  taffen.) 

i.  3d)  fjabe  ben  ©djnetber  lommen  laffen,  er  foft  mir  einen 
neuen  Sftocl  mad)en.  2.  Sftetn  93ruber  totrb  morgen  §11  §aufe 
Metben  miiffen.  3.  ®onnen  @ie  fjeute  mit  uns>  gefyen?  4.  3d) 
!ann  fjeute  gefjen,  aber  morgen  toerbe  id)  toeber  fonnen  nod) 
tooften.  5.  (£r  foft  f)ier  fetn;  man  totft  ifm  gefe^en  ^aben. 
6.  SSofte  nur,  toa§  bu  fannft,  unb  bu  totrft  afte§  fonnen,  toa§  bu 
toiftft.  7.  SSir  miiffen  nnfern  Setnben  (dat.)  berjei^en.  8.  £>te 
^inber  miiffen  in  bie  Gdjiite  ge^en.  9.  2)er  $ote  foftte  einen 
^Brief  auf  bie  Spoft  tragen.  10.  (Sr  tooftte  fe§]  nn§>  nifyt  gtauben. 
ii.  §abt  i^r  biefen  5lbcnb  nid)t  fingen  f  often?  12.  SBir  Ijaben 
gefoftt,  aber  toir  ^aben  nid)t  gemod)t.  13.  SO'lan  mu§  mit  Suft 
arbeiten,  toenn  ba§  SSer!  geltngen  foft.  14.  SSoffen  <Ste  fo  gut 
fetn  unb  mir  einen  £aler  lei'ljen?  15.  3<S  mb^te  e§  fe^r  gern 
tun,  aber  idj  T)abe  fetn  05etb  bet  mir.  16.  (Ste  fjaben  9ted)t,  id) 


§  270]  THE    PASSIVE    VOICE.  14! 

Ijtitte  e§  tun  f often.  17.  SSir  fjaben  if)n  fagen  fybren,  bafc 
ber  beriiljmte  9lr§t  morgen  fommen  merbe.  18.  $d)  fyobt  irjm 
arbetten  Ijelfen. 

i.  He  has  not  been  willing  to  do  it.  2.  He  was  wrong,  he 
ought  to  have  done  it.  3.  I  have  been  compelled  to  read  the 
book.  4.  All  men  must  die.  5.  The  boys  are  to  learn  German. 
6.  We  have  seen  the  children  dance.  7.  They  have  been 
obliged  to  work  the  whole  day.  8.  I  am  to  stay  at  home. 
9.  She  did  not  like  to  work.  10.  Do  you  know  why  Henry 
was  not  allowed  to  visit  us?  u.  I  shall  send  for  the  tailor; 
he  is  to  make  me  a  new  coat.  12.  I  have  been  willing,  but  I 
have  not  been  able.  13.  Thou  shalt  not  steal.  14.  I  have 
heard  him  speak.  15.  We  have  been  obliged  'to  pay  two  dol- 
lars. 1 6.  You  should  carry  the  letter  to  (auf)  the  post-office. 
17.  Why  could  you  not  come?  18.  I  was  unwell  and  was 
obliged  to  stay  at  home. 


LESSON  XXVIL 

The  Passive  Voice. 

270.  The  passive  voice  is  formed  by  the  auxiliary  verb 
toerben  in  combination  with  the  perfect  participle  of  a  tran- 
sitive verb.  In  the  compound  tenses,  the  participle  geftJor- 
ben  loses  the  augment  ge-,  as :  id)  bin  gelobt  toorben,  /  have 
been  praised. 

(a)  Each  part  of  the  passive  is  formed  by  the  correspond- 
ing part  of  tDerben  combined  with  the  perfect  participle,  under 
the  usual  rules  of  position ;  viz. :  that  the  participle  will  follow 
the  simple  forms,  but  precede  the  infinitive  or  participle  of  the 
auxiliary,  as  may  be  seen  in  the  paradigm. 

(b)  But  for  the  convenience  of  the  learner,  the  passive  may 


142  LESSON    XXVII.  [§  271 

be  regarded  as  a  compound  intransitive  verb  (to  be  —  loved).  Its 
compound  parts  may  then  be  formed  with  the  usual  auxiliaries 
from  the  following  principal  parts,  as  in  any  other  intransitive 
verb: 

INFINITIVE — .gelobt  toerben; 

—  whence  future  and  conditional  with  auxiliary  tuerbett. 

PERFECT  PARTICIPLE  —  gelobt  ftorben; 

—  whence  perfect  and  pluperfect  with  auxiliary  feht. 

PERFECT  INFINITIVE- — gelobt  tt»orbeu  fein; 

—  whence  perfect  future  and  conditional  with  auxiliary  toerben. 

271.  Conjugation  of  the  Passive  Verb. 

gelobt  toerben,  to  be  praised. 

Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

PRESENT. 

I  am  praised,  etc.  I  (may)  be  praised,  etc. 

id)  tt>erbe  gelobt.  tdj  toerbe  gelobt. 

bu  ttnrft  gelobt.  bu  fterbeft  gelobt. 

er  ftnrb  gelobt.  er  roerbe  gelobt. 

tt)tr  merben  gelobt.  tt)tr  twrben  getobt. 

i^r  toerbet  getobt.  i()r  merbet  getobt. 

fie  njerben  getobt.  fie  tt>erben  getobt. 

PAST. 

id)  ttmrbe  (tuarb)  getobt.  tc^  ttmrbe  getobt. 

bit  tnurbeft  (toarbft)  getobt.  bu  toitrbeft  getobt. 

er  ttmrbe  (tt>arb)  getobt.  er  tt)iirbe  gelobt. 
ttrir  iDiirben  gelobt,  etc.  (§  190).  etc. 

PERFECT. 

id)  bin  gelobt  tt)orben.          td^  fei  gelobt  ttiorben. 
bu  bift  gelobt  tnorbcn.          bu  feteft  gelobt  tDorben. 
er  ift  gelobt  morbcn.  er  fei  getobt  ttiorbeu. 

etc.  etc. 


§  271]  THE    PASSIVE    VOICE,  143 

Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

PLUPERFECT. 

id)  ttmr  getobt  toorbeu.  id)  ttwre  getobt  tnorben. 

bu  toarft  getobt  roorbeu.  bu  roareft  gelobt  morbeu. 

er  ftmr  getobt  toorbeu.  er  ttmre  gelobt  toorbeu. 
etc.  etc. 

FUTURE. 

id)  toerbe  gelobt  toerbeu.  id)  toerbe  getobt  toerben. 

bu  ttrirft  gelobt  toerben.  bu  toerbeft  gelobt  Rierbett. 

er  toirb  gelobt  tuerbeu.  er  toerbe  getobt  trerbeu. 

etc.  etc. 

FUTURE  PBRFECT. 

td^  tuerbe  getobt  tnorben  fein.  ic^  iVrbe  gelobt  tDorbeu  feiu. 

bu  tt)irft  getobt  toorben  |eirt.  bu  tremft  getobt  toorben  ;ein. 
etc.  ^tc. 

CONDITIONAL.  \      CONDITIONAL  PERFECT. 
id^  tniirbe  getobt  toerbeu.  id)  aiiirbe  getobt  roorben  feiu. 

bu  miirbeft  getobt  toerben.  bu  iniirbeft  getobt  roorben  feiu. 

er  inurbe  getobt  tuerbeu.  er  roiirbe  getobt  tuorbeu  feiu. 

etc.  \etc. 

IMPERATIVE. 

trerbe  getobt.  toerbet  getobt. 

merbeu  <Sie  getobt. 

Inflect,  as  heretofore,  for  inversion  and  transposition  : 

tjeute  biu  id^  getobt  voorben.  morgeu  tt)erbe  id^  getobt  tuerben. 

etc.  etc. 

bafj  tc^  getobt  tuerbeu  tuiirbe.         tt)euu  ic^  getobt  toorbeu  tocire. 
etc.  etc. 

And  note  the  infinitive  forms  :  getobt  §u  ft)erbeu  ;  getobt  loorben 
511  feiu.     (§  176,  2.) 


144  LESSON  xxvn.  [§  272 

Use  of  the  Passive. 

272.  German  has  no  special  forms  for  the  English  the 
house  is  building — is  being  built,  etc.     These  are  trans- 
lated by  the  simple,  ba3  |)au3  totrb  gebaut  (or  as  §  274,  i). 

273.  It  must  be  remembered  that  toerben  is  combined 
with  the  perfect  participle  only  to  express  the  true  passive 

—that  is  the  passive  action.  In  English  the  perfect  parti- 
ciple with  be  often  expresses  only  a  state  or  result  of  the 
action.  In  this  case  the  German  uses  fein  not  toerben. 
Thus:  bie  Xiire  ttwrbe  urn  arfjt.Ufy:  gefcfjloffen,  the  door  was 
closed  at  8  o  clock  (the  closing  took  place  at  that  hour) ;  bie 
Xiire  tuar  urn  acf)t  Ufyr  geftfjloffert — it  was  (found}  closed— 
(had  been  closed  earlier).  This  distinction  requires  careful 
attention. 

NOTE  i.  —  Practically  the  test  may  be  made  by  turning  the  verb  into 
the  active  form  :  if  the  tense  remains  the  same,  use  loerben. 

NOTE  2. —  It  will  be  seen  that  here  again,  for  want  of  a  specific  pas- 
sive auxiliary,  there  is  a  possible  ambiguity  in  English  which  cannot  occur 
in  German.  (See  §  268,  note.)  Sometimes,  however,  apparent  ambiguity 
may  occur  by  the  idiomatic  omission  of  toorben,  as  :  al3  er  ^u  ®rabe  getrcu 
gen  (toorben)  ttmr,  had  been  carried,  etc. 

274.  The  passive  is  less  used  in  German  than  in  English. 
Unless  the  agent  (t)on  with  the  dative)  is  definitely  ex- 
pressed, other  idioms  are  frequently  employed : 

1.  Most  frequently  man  (§  244)  with  the  active  verb,  as: 
man  ftettte  ben  ©tufjl  an§  lifer,  the  chair  was  placed,  etc. ;  er  tmt, 
man  mocfyte  ifjn  gef)en  laffen,  he  begged  that  he  might  be  allowed 
to  go. 

2.  The  reflexive  verb,  as :  S)er  ©cfyliiffet  f)at  fid)  gefunben,  has 
been  found.     Especially,  the  reflexive  use  of  laffen  with  active 
infinitive  (§269).     As:  S)a£  lafjt  fid)  erfltiren,  that  can  be  ex- 
plained. 

3.  An  impersonal  idiom,  as :  e§  bebarf  Ictner  §iitfe,  no  help 
is  needed. 


§  276]  USE    OF    THE    PASSIVE.  145 

275.  In  German  only  a  direct  (accusative)  object  can  be- 
come the  subject  of  a  passive  verb.  Other  verbs  are,  how- 
ever, sometimes  made  passive  with  an  impersonal  subject 
(eg  or  toag),  retaining  their  indirect  object  (if  any) ;  as,  eg  ift 
mir  geraten  toorbert,  I  have  been  advise  d{  =mcm  f)at  mtr  ge= 
raten);  eg  itmrbe  bariiber  beratfd)Iagt,  consultation  was  held 
about  it.  Or,  without  eg,  unless  introductory:  bariiber  ftwrbe 
beratftf)lagt;  as  §  453,  note. 

^  276.  Sometimes,  to  preserve  the  emphasis  of  position, 
the  German  active  will  be  rendered  by  the  English  passive  ; 
as,  ben  ®onig  ergogte  btefeg  <3d)aufpie(,  the  king  was  delighted 
with  this  spectacle. 

REMARK.  —  It  thus  appears  that  the  passive  in  English  is  widely  ex- 
tended, beyond  its  use  in  German.  Careful  attention  should  be  given  to 
the  various  equivalents  in  translating. 

EXERCISE  XXVII. 

i.  $)er  S^iiler  ift  toon  bem  Setter  getobt  roorben.  2.  2)a£ 
SHnb  nrirb  toon  feitten  ©Item  geltebt.  3.  2)te  ®nabenf  tuel^e 
flei^ig  finb,  trjerben  getobt  irerben.  4.  Sin  guter  Strbetter  totrb 
tmmer  gut  be§al)lt.  5.  SSiirbe  jener  alte  gelbfjerr  nid^t  bon  bem 
®otug  gelobt  tuorben  fetn?  6.  28a§  miirben  @ie  fagen,  trjenn  (Sic 
gefragt  trjiirben?  7.  SD^an  fagt,  baft  bte  (Stabt  t)on  bem  geinbe 
gepliinbert  tt)orben  fet.  8.  28trb  ba§  2Ser!  biefen  (Sommer 
gebriidt  tuerben?  9.  (£§  ttmrbe  fd^on  gebrurft  tDorben  fein, 
tt)enn  ber  SSerfaffer  nii^t  !ran!  getoefen  lt)dre.  10.  5)ie  t)ertorene 
ift  t)on  einem  ©i^ulfnaben  gefunbett  tnorben.  n.  2)a§ 
ftmrbe  toon  feiner  Gutter  getabelt.  12.  S)a3  arme 
§a§(^)en  toiirbc  toon  bem  Sdger  gef^offen.  13.  (Sin  junge£ 
^Bdumtein  Ia§t  fi^  leidjt  biegen,  ein  alter  S3aum  mirb  nic^t  fo 
Icid^t  gebogen.  14.  SMefe  grage  beantnoortet  ftd^  leidjt.  15.  G§ 
mirb  anf  Sie  gemartet.  16.  9JJan  martet  auf  <Sie.  17.  2Sa§  ift 
g^nen  toerfprod)en  roorben?  18.  28a§  fjat  man  Qfjnen  toerf proven? 
19.  ®a§  §au§  ift  mit  frifd^en  tinmen  ge^iert.  20.  S)ie 


146  LESSON    XXVIII.  [§  277 


mcmer  ft>ar  fcl)on  5erftort.  21.  (£tn  SBrief  ttwrbe  gefcfyrteden. 
22.  2)a§  SBucf)  toirb  gebrudt.  23.  @§  ift  mtr  em  jc!)one3  geber- 
nteffer  gegeften  toorben.  24.  3)en  ®aifer  riiljrte  btefe3  (Sdjaufpiet 
fo,  bafs  er  bor  (/<w)  greube  tteinte. 

i.  The  author  of  this  book  will  be  rewarded  by  (bort)  the 
king.  2.  I  should  not  be  able  to  answer  if  I  were  asked.  3. 
The  town  was  ransacked  by  the  enemy.  4.  The  knives  have 
been  ground.  5.  A  messenger  has  been  sent  to  the  queen* 
6.  The  house  will  be  bought  by  my  uncle.  7.  I  have  not  been 
asked.  8.  The  rooms  of  the  prince  are  not  shown  to  strangers. 
9.  The  sheep  are  being  shorn  by  the  shepherds.  10.  The  girl 
has  been  bitten  by  a  dog.  n.  He  was  feared  and  respected 
by  all.  12.  The  gates  of  the  town  will  be  opened.  13.  The 
apples  fall  when  the  tree  is  shaken.  14.  This  book  has  been 
printed  for  the  author.  1  5.  A  hare  is  roasting  (being  roasted). 
1  6.  He  would  not  have  been  named.  17.  It  cannot  (Itifjt)  be 
believed.  18.  The  books  which  were  lost  have  been  found. 
19.  The  whole  town  was  adorned  with  green  boughs.  20.  A 
physician  must  be  sent  for  (man).  21.  That  is  easily  under- 
stood (reflex.}.  22.  I  have  been  advised  (say:  to  me  [it]  has 
been  advised  —  and:  one  has,  etc.)  to  go  to  Carlsbad.  23. 
The  door  was  opened.  24.  We  allowed  (laffen)  ourselves  to  be 
persuaded. 

LESSON  XXVIIL 
Compound  Verbs.  —  Inseparable. 

277.  In  verbs  compounded  with  the  unaccented  insepar- 
able prefixes  Be-,  emp-,  ent-,  er-f  ge-,  tier-,  ger-r  (§  216), 
the  prefix  is  always  written  in  one  word  with  the  verb. 
The  preposition  git  stands  as  a  separate  word  before  the  in- 
finitive. —  Examples  :  fcetriigen,  ftetrog,  betrogen  ;  erfdjrecl  en, 
erjcfjra!,  erfd)rocfen;  empfefy(ert,  empfcu%  empfol)(ert; 


§  280]  SPURIOUS    PREPOSITIONS.  147 

entfyrang,  entfprungen;  gef  alien,  gefiel,  gef  alien;  infin.  with  511: 
311  betriigen,  511  erfdjrecfen,  etc. 

278.  Except  for  the  omission  of  ge-  in  the  perfect  par- 
ticiple, these  compounds  are  conjugated  like  their  primitive 
verbs.     Sometimes  the  compound  is  used  when  the  primi- 
tive is  obsolete  —  as  in  English  be-gin,  etc.  (§  232.) 

NOTE.  —  Observe  that  unless  there  is  vowel  change,  the  perfect  parti- 
ciple of  these  verbs,  if  strong,  will  be  just  like  the  infinitive  ;  as,  gefdHett, 
erfyalten,  bercje&en,  etc.  Also,  that  verbs  in  ge-,  as  gebieten,  gefatten,  etc., 
will  have  the  same  p.  p.  as  their  primitives,  Meten,  fatten,  viz. :  ge&oten, 
ge'faflen.  Hence  such  forms  may  have  two,  or  even  three,  senses,  which 
must  be  carefully  distinguished. 

279.  The  inseparable  prefixes  form  a  large  number  of 
compound  verbs  —  as  well  as  other  derivatives  —  as  will  be 
more  fully  shown  in  Part  II.      They  never  take  the  accent. 

Spurious  Prepositions. 

280.  Lists  of  the  most  important  prepositions  and  of  the 
cases  they  govern  have  been  given  §§  164,  178,  179.     A  num- 
ber of  other  words,  originally  adverbs,  nouns,  adjectives  or  par- 
ticiples—  sometimes    compounds    or   phrases  —  are   used    as 
prepositions. 

These  are  sometimes  called  spurious  prepositions.  A  list 
of  the  most  important  of  these  is  here  given : — 

.(a)  SPURIOUS  PREPOSITIONS  GOVERNING  THE  GENITIVE. 

anftatt  or  ftatt,  instead  of.  la'ttgS,  along  (sometimes  governs  a 
aufeerfjalb,  without,  outside  of.  dative), 

tnnerfjalb,  within,  inside  of.  laut,  conformably  to  (also  dat.). 

o&erljalb,  above,  06  (rarely),  on  account  of  (see  b}. 

unterfyall),  below;  compounds  of*  tro$,  in  spite  of  (sometimes  governs 
fjolfcen  or  Ijalber,  on  account  of  (always  a  dative). 

follows  case).  urn  —  tottten,/0r  the  sake  of  (the  case 
MeSfeit  or  Me<§fett§,  on  this  side  of.  being  inserted  between), 

jenfett  or  jenfeit3,  on  the  other  side  of.  ungeacfjtet,  notwithstanding  (or  with 
fraft,  by  virtue  of.  a  preceding  dative). 


148  LESSON    XXVIII.  [§  281 

untoeit,  unfern,  not  far  from.  toegen,  on  account  of  (precedes  or  fol' 

bermittelft  (mittelS,  mittelft),  by  means  lows  the  case). 

cf.  pfolge,  according  to  (sometimes  fol- 

bermbge,  by  dint  of.  lows  the  noun  and   takes  a 

nwljrenb,  during  (very  rarely  governs  dative). 

a  dative). 

NOTE.  —  For  the  special  forms  meinetljalben,  meinettoegen,  um  ntetnet^ 
toitten,  etc.,  see  §  452,  b. 

(b)   SPURIOUS  PREPOSITIONS  GOVERNING  THE  DATIVE. 

aufcer,  outside  of,  besides.  Qleid),  like. 

&tnnen,  within  (used  only  with  regard  ncitf)ft,  next  to. 

to  time)  —  rarely  genitive.  nebft,  along  'with. 

entgegen,  against,  towards  (usually  fol-  06,  over  (local)  —  see  a. 

lows  the  case).  famt,  together  with. 

gegenuber,  opposite  to  (stands  usually  fett,  since. 

after  the  case).  Stifolge,  according  to  (after  the  case), 

gema'fo,  according  to  (usually  follows  ^Utotber,  contrary  to  (after  the  case). 

the  case). 

(c)  SPURIOUS  PREPOSITIONS  GOVERNING  THE  ACCUSATIVE. 

6t)§,  ////,  as  far  as.  enticing,  along  (usually  follows  the  case). 

fonber,  without. 

NOTE.  —  93i§  is  frequently  used  in  combination  with  another  preposi- 
tion. Examples:  33t3  an  ba$  £or,  as  far  as  th'e  gate.  S3i3  ^um  (Enbe,  down 
to,  as  far  as  the  end.  93i§  auf  biefen  Xog,  up  to  this  day. 

um  —  511  WITH  INFINITIVE. 

281.  The  use  of  511  with  the  infinitive  has  been  already 
mentioned  (§  176). 

To  express  purpose,  in  order  to,  the  combination  utn  511  — 
um  at  the  head  of  the  clause,  511  in  its  usual  position  with  the 
infinitive  —  is  generally  used ;  as,  id)  tue  mein  53efte§,  um  bte 
beittfcfye  ©pracfye  311  lernen,  /  do  my  best  to  learn  the  German 
language. 

EXERCISE  XXVIIL 

i.  (££  ift  t)erbotenr  in  btefem  gluffe  311  baben.    2.  3$)  ^offe,  Me 
btnnen  fe(^§   SO^onaten   beja^len   311   fonnen.     3.  (Sin 
ber  ncuen   SlHr^e   gegeniiOer   ge(egenf   ift  511   toerfaufen. 


§  28l]  SPURIOUS    PREPOSITIONS.  149 

4.  @§  ift  nebft  bent  fatten  fcfyon  fcerfauft  toorben.  5.  3d)  fjabe 
einige  ^reunbe  in  SBomt  befucfyt.  6.  S)er  D^egen  fyat  bte  $8(umen 
erfrtfdjt.  7.  §aben  @ie  meinen  SBrief  erfjaften?  8.  (Sr  fyat  un§ 
fett  langer  Qtit  ntd)t  benad)rid)ttgt.  9.  3>ie  ©tabt  ttmr  belagert. 
10.  9ftan  tnufj  nid)t  bent  $erbote  §mt)tber  fyanbetn.  n.  SSer  ^at 
ba§  $)3iilt)er  erfunben?  12.  @e^en  (Sic  ben  $IuJ3  entlang,  ttnb 
binnen  enter  ©tunbe  toerbe  id)  nebft  meinent  S3ruber  <Ste  auf  bent 
$pla£e,  ber  ^iHrc^e  gegeniiber,  treffen  ttnb  bi§  an  ba^  Xor  begleiten. 
13.  SSiirbett  <Sie  ttn§  benad)rid)tigt  t;aben?  14.  SSir  rooden  e§ 
ttm  be§  grieben^  roillen  tint.  15.  (Sr  lt)o()nt  in  etnem  netien 
§aufe  jenjeit^  be§  3luffe3f  ober^alb  ber  S5riic!e.  16.  2)ie  (Settle 
fte^t  itntoeit  ber  ®trd)e.  17.  SSir  tuerben  be§  3?egen£  ungead)tet 
fpajieren  ge^en.  18.  £ftng§  ber  (Strafe  ^at  man  S3aunte  geppan5t. 
19.  3Kan  e^rt  if)n  feine§  5llter^  megen.  20.  (£r  ift  be§  franfen 
^inbe§  fjalber  511  §attfe  geblieben.  21.  28ir  erreti^ten  ba§  lifer 
berntittelft  eine§  33oote§.  22.  (£§  ift  nid)t  Ieidf)t  511  fagen,  n?a§ 
ba§  53efte  ift.  23.  5<i)  f)a&e  jene§  §an§  t)er!auft,  urn  ein  beffere§ 
511  !aufen.  24.  Qdt)  tat  e§,  nttr  urn  $f)nen  511  gefatten. 

i.  The  boy  has  watered  the  flowers.  2.  He  has  promised  to 
visit  us  in  Berlin.  3.  We  have  received  his  letter.  4.  A  Ger- 
man monk  (has)  invented  (the)  gun-powder.  5.  The  snow  has 
covered  the  mountains  and  the  valleys.  6.  The  gardener  has 
forgotten  to  water  the  flowers.  7.  He  has  sold  his  house  along 
with  the  garden.  8.  You  will  receive  it  within  an  hour.  9. 
Will  you  accompany  me  as  far  as  the  old  bridge?  10.  He  is 
despised  by  (bon)  everybody.  1 1.  I  have  forgotten  my  watch ; 
what  am  I  to  (foil)  do?  12.  The  shepherd  seated  himself 
beside  (tf^r.)  the  shepherdess.  13.  Between  him  and  my  brother 
[there]  is  no  friendship.  14.  The  child  has  (is)  come  with- 
out its  mother.  15.  He  has  not  understood  what  you  say. 
1 6.  After  we  had  reached  the  shore  by  means  of  a  boat,  we 
went  to  an  inn  in  order  to  dry  our  clothes.  17.  He  has  for- 
gotten to  inform  you.  18.  We  shall  do  nothing  contrary  to 
this  prohibition.  19.  I  shall  come  instead  of  my  brother. 


I5O  LESSON    XXIX.  [§  282 

20.  The  ladies  have  gone  for  a  walk  on  the  other  side  of  the 
river;  you  will  find  them  below  the  bridge.  21.  One  part  of 
the  town  lies  on  this  side,  the  other  on  the  other  side  of  the 
river.  22.  The  garden  lies  outside  the  gate.  23.  In  spite  of 
my  prohibition  you  (bu)  have  gone  upon  the  ice.  24.  For 
your  mother's  sake  you  should  not  have  done  that  (§  267). 


LESSON  XXIX. 
Compound  Verbs.  —  Separable. 

282.  Prepositions  and  adverbs,  when  forming  the  first 
part  of  a  compound  verb,  are  separable. 

283.  The  words  most  usually  occurring  in  this  connec- 
tion are :  a&,  off;  art,  on;  auf,  up;  aii3,  out;  bet,  by;  ba  or 
bar,  there ;  eirt  (instead  of  in)  in  ;  empor,  up ;  fort,  away  ; 
entgegert,  against;  r;er,  hither;  rjin,  thither;  m\\.,with;  rtad), 
after;  nteber,  down;  06,  over;  bor,  before;  rocg,  away;  ftneber, 
again,  back;  511,  to;  gttriicf,  back;  gufammen,  together. 

284.  («)   In  principal  clauses,  in  the  simple  tenses  of  the 
verb,  the  prefix  is  separated  from  the  verb  and  stands  at  the 
end  of  the  clause.     (See  Rem.  p.  195.) 

(b)  But  the  prefix  is  written  in  one  word  before  the  infini- 
tive and  participles  —  hence,  also,  in  all  the  compound  tenses. 

(c)  The  augment  ge-  of  the  perfect  participle,  and  511  when 
used  with  the  infinitive,  are  written  in  one  word  between  the 
prefix  and  the  verb. 

Thus:  aufftefjen,  to  rise;  tdj  ftefje  auf,  I  rise;  id)  ftatib  auf,  / 
rose;  id)  bin  aufgeftanben,  I  have  risen;  id)  tt>iinfd)e  aufauftefjen, 
I  wish  to  rise.  Or,  with  intervening  words :  id)  ftanb  fjeirte 
morgen  fefjr  friif)  auf,  /  rose  very  early  this  morning.  Steven 
<Ste  ntd)t  ju  fpa't  auf,  do  not  rise  too  late. 


§286]  COMPOUND    VERBS. SEPARABLE. 

285.  But  whenever  the  verb  is  removed  to  the  end  of  the 
sentence,  that  is,  in  dependent  clauses  (§  177,  4),  the  prefix  is 
written  in  one  word  before  the  verb.     For  instance:  51I§  id) 
fjeute  morgen  cmfftanb,  when  I  rose  this  morning.     SSenn  er  511 
fpat  aufftanbe,  if  he  were  to  rise  too  late. 

NOTE.  —  A  separable  prefix  always  has  the  principal  accent.  (§  54.) 
This  stress  is  retained  also  when  the  prefix  stands  apart  from  the  verb. 

286.  CONJUGATION  OF  A  SEPARABLE  VERB. 

5lnfangen,  to  begin. 

Principal  Parts. 
anfangen.  fing  an.  angefangen. 

PRES.  PART.  PERF.  INFIN. 

anfangenb.  angefangen  fyaben. 

Indicative  Mood. 

PRESENT.  PAST. 

id)  fange  an,  I  begin.  id)  fing  an,  I  began. 

bu  fangft  an,  thou  beginnest.  bu  ftngft  an,  thou  begannest. 

er  fangt  an,  he  begins.  er  fing  an,  he  began. 

ttrir  fangen  an,  we  begin,  etc.         loir  fingen  an,  we  began,  etc. 

PERFECT.  idj  fja&e  angefangen. 

PLUPERFECT.  id)  hatte  angefangen. 

FUTURE.  id)  tt>erbe  anfangen. 

FUTURE  PERFECT.  id)  tnerbe  angefangen  fjaben. 

CONDITIONAL.  id)  ftmrbe  anfangen. 

CONDITIONAL  PERF.  id)  itwrbe  angefangen  fjaben. 

•  IMPERATIVE.  fange  an. 

INFIN.  with  511.  an^ufangen,  angefangen  §n  f)aben. 

NOTE.  —  Observe  that  the  simple  infinitive  and  the  present  participle 
(with  the  transposed  verb,  §  285)  are  the  only  parts  in  which  the  prefix  is 
not  actually  separated —  either  by  position  or  by  insertion  of  QC  or  311. 

Inflect  for  inversion : 

fjente  fange  id)  an.          •  morgen  toerbe  id)  anfangen.    . 
etc.  etc. 


152  LESSON    XXIX.  [§  286 

For  transposition : 

bafj  id)  fjeitte  anfange.  tpenn  id)  fdjon  angefangen  tjabe. 

etc.  etc. 

EXERCISE  XXIX. 

i.  ®ie  Sonne  geljt  im  Often  aitf  nnb  gefjt  im  SSeften  unter. 
2.  2U§  bte  (Sonne  anfgtng,  reiften  ttnr  ab.  3.  SSir  fyaben  etne 
groge  (Mbjumme  au§gegeben.  4.  (£r  fiefjt  an§,  at§  ob  er  !ran! 
ttmre.  5.  S)te  ^inber  fafjen  nacf)  biefem  langen  ©pa^iergange 
miibe  au§.  6.  Urn  tDel^e  Qtit  fangt  bte  (Seville  an?  7.  @ic  irirb 
urn  5trei  U^r  anfangen.  8.  Qitfyt  'betnen  3^oc!  au§,  ^arli^en. 
9.  §einrid)  l)at  feinen  neuen  9^oc!  ange5ogen,  10.  3^^e^  @ic 
fic^  fc^neE  an.  n.  3ft  3()r  Sreunb  angefommen?  12.  (Sr  tDtrb 
morgen  friif)  anlommen.  13.  Urn  tt)elc^e  Qeit  tommt  ber  3U9 
toon  Lofton  an?  14.  (Sr  fommt  um  fed)§  ll^r  an.  15.  9^tt 
ttelcfyem  3u9e  ift  3^r  55tuber  abgereift?  16.  tint  tt)el(^c  3e^ 
ftifyrt  ber  @(^nell5ug  ab?  17.  (£r  toirb  tint  jmet  U^r  abjafjren. 

18.  3)er  arme  9teifenbe  fcertrrte  ftc^  unb  !am  im  (Scfynee  um. 

19.  3d)  ftanb  fyeute  morgen  fel)r  frii^  auf,  um  mit  bent  (Sdjnettjuge 
abjuja^ren.     20.  ®ommen  @ie  ntd^t  5u  fpa't  an  ;  n)ir  ^aben  biete 
33riefe  abjuf^reiben. 

i.  At  what  time  does  the  sun  rise  ?  2.  The  sun  rises  at  six 
o'clock.  3.  The  sun  was  setting.  4.  It  grows  dark  when  the 
sun  sets.  5.  I  should  have  put  on  my  new  coat,  if  the  weather 
had  been  fine.  6.  The  express  leaves  at  three  o'clock.  7.  The 
scholars  have  copied  their  exercises.  8.  This  flower  looks  (an§- 
fef)en)  very  beautiful.  9.  The  king  has  accepted  the  work 
which  the  celebrated  writer  had  offered  him.  10.  We  dressed 
ourselves  very  quickly;  we  wished  to  start  by  (mit)  the  express. 
ii.  I  copy  all  my  letters.  12.  Put  on  your  shoes.  13.  Take 
off  your  coat.  14.  The  boys  lost  their  way  in  the  wood;  they 
began  to  cry.  15.  When  (ttmnn)  will  you  begin  to  copy  your 
letters?  16.  I  began  yesterday  and  copied  several.  17.  The 


§  288]  VERBS    SEPARABLE    OR    INSEPARABLE.  153 

sun  will  soon  rise;  let  us  rise  and  dress.  18.  She  has  gone  out 
in  order  to  begin  her  work.  19.  You  have  forgotten  what  you 
had  promised  me  (dat).  20.  The  prince  spent  (auggeben)  a 
large  sum  [of]  money. 


LESSON  XXX. 
Variable  Prefixes  —  Separable  or  Inseparable. 

287.  The  prepositions  bnrcf),  fytnter,  iiber,  nnter,  inn  are  sep- 
arable or  inseparable,  but  with  a  difference   of  meaning. 
When  separable  the  compound  has  a  primitive  or  literal 
sense ;    when  inseparable,  a  derived  or  figurative   sense. 
The  usual  rules  of  accent  and  of  conjugation  are  observed 
in  either  case.     As  :  — 

SEPARABLE.  INSEPARABLE. 

tmrdy§tel)en,  to  pull  through.         bitrd)§terf)en,  to  roam  through. 
f)hi'tergef)ett,  to  go  behind.  [jinterge'fyen,  to  deceive. 

ii'berftefjen,  to  project.  iiberfte'tyeit,  to  overcome. 

li'berfetjen,  to  put  over,  ferry  over,  liber  fe^'ett,  to  translate. 
umffd)reiben,  to  write  over  again,  iimfcfyret'bert,  to  express  by  cir- 
cumlocution. 

um'gefjen,  to  go  round.  umge'fjen,  to  evade. 

un'terljattett,  to  hold  under.  unterfjat'ten,  to  entertain. 

NOTE.  —  Frequently  the  separable  sense  will  be  expressed  by  a  simple 
preposition  with  its  object.  As :  bcr  9ftann  fefcte  mid)  lifter  wen  Slufe,  the 
man  set  me  over  the  river ;  ftrir  gingen  f)inter  ba§  £au§,  we  went  behind  the 
house. 

288.  (0)  The  prefix  ttneber  or  ttnber  is  sometimes  added  to 
this  list.     But  properly,  by  the  present  orthography,  ttrieber  is 
separable,  in  sense  of  again,  back ;  ttnber,  inseparable,  in  sense 
of  against.     As:  tt)ierber!el)ren,  to  return,  ttriberfte'fjen,  to  with- 
stand. 


154  LESSON  xxx.  [§  289 

NOTE.  —  Except  hrieberfjo'len,  to  repeat,  and  sometimes  ftneberljaFlen,  to 
resound. 

(b)  The  prefix  miJ3  is  properly  inseparable,  but  sometimes 
takes  the  augment  ge—  in  the  past  participle.  The  practice  as 
to  the  position  of  the  augment  varies.  In  some  verbs  it  is 
placed  before  the  prefix,  in  others  between  the  prefix  and  the 
verb;  as,  gemifs'brcmcfyt,  abused;  gemifi'billigt,  disapproved;  ge- 
mtfj'fjanbelt,  ill-used;  nufs'geacfytet,  despised;  mijs'geartet,  degene- 
rated; mifjlung'en,  miscarried.  Details  must  be  found  in  the  dic- 
tionary. 

(f)  $olC  (full)  forms  a  few  inseparable  verbs ;  as,  r;oH= 
bring' en,  to  accomplish,  p.  p.  rjottbracfyt'  ;  and  some  occasional 
separables;  as,  bott'ftopfen,  to  stuff  full,  p.  p.  rjoll'geftopft. 

Verbs  with  Compound  Prefixes. 

289.  Many  verbs  have  a  compound  prefix.     Such  are  :  — 

1.  Those  whose  prefix  is   a   compound   adverb,  especially 
such  as  are  formed  with  ba   (bar),   there;    fyer,   hither;  f)in, 
hence.     All  these  are  separable;  as:  — 

befcor'ftefjen,  to  impend.  p.  p.  betiorgeftanben. 

rjoran'gdjen,  to  precede.  "     t>orangegangen. 

rjorau§ffe£en,  to  suppose.  "     rjorau§gefe|t. 

babon'faufen,  to  run  off.  "     barjongetaufen. 

f)erOeifrufenf  to  summon.  "     Ijerbetgeritfen. 

fjtnauS'tragcn,  to  carry  out.  "     ^tnauSgetragen. 

um()er'gef)enf  to  go  about.  "     iimfjergegangen. 

NOTE.  —  For  accents  of  prefixes  see  §  53.  Note  also  distinction  between 
forms  like  Ijtnau^fe^en,  to  add,  and  tyin^iufefcen  (f)infe£en,  infin.  with  ^u). 

Such  prefixes  are  often  written  separately;  as,  babon  laitfcn,  etc. 

2.  In  a  few  verbs  the  prefix  consists  of  two  parts,  the  first 
separable,  the   second  inseparable.     These  are  not  uniform. 
Some  separate  the  first  element,  admitting  §u  but  yet  excluding 
ge-.     Others  never  use  the  separated  forms.     As,  aner!ennen, 
to  acknowledge;  idj  erfenne  an  ;  anjuerfennen  ;  p.  p.  anerlannt ; 


§  289]  VERBS    WITH    COMPOUND    PREFIXES.  155 

fcorbefjalten,  to  reserve ;  id)  befyalte  t>or  ;  fco^ubefjalten  ;  but  p.  p. 
borbefjalten.  But  auferftefjen,  to  arise;  p.  p.  auferftanben  ;  au§= 
ertt)af)ten,  to  select,  p.  p  au§ertt)a'f)lt  —  the  separated  forms  never 
being  used.  (See  also  Less.  XXXIX). 

REMARK.  —  Practically  it  is  important  to  remember  only  the  insepar- 
able and  variable  prefixes  (§§  277,  287).  Then  only  those  cases  will  need 
special  attention  in  which  the  latter  are  not  determined  by  form  or  posi- 
tion ;  viz.,  in  the  present  participle,  the  infinitive  without  ^U,  or  the  trans- 
posed verb.  §  286,  note. 

EXERCISE  XXX. 

i.  SSer  fjat  biefe§  23ud)  au§  bent  S)eutfd)en  in§  (£ng(ifd)e 
iiberfeijt?  2.  (£r  iiberfe^te  @d)tller§  2Silf)elm  £eft.  3.  @e£en 
(Ste  un§  fd)nett  iiber,  guter  Eftann.  4.  ilberfetjen  @ie  biefe 
©ette.  5.  (£r  tyte'It  ba§  (Slag  unter.  6.  @ie  unter^iett  bie  ^e- 
feEfd^aft.  7.  @tc  gingen  jum  geinbe  iiber.  8.  28ir  iibergtngen 
bie  @ad)e.  9.  (Sr  umgtng  ba§  ®efe^.  10.  3Kan  ^at  mid) 
fyintergangen.  n.  Xie  getnbe  burd)5ogen  ba§  gan^e  Sanb.  12. 
2)er  33erfaffer  ^at  ba§  5)U(^  rjom  5lnfang  bi§  jum  (Snbe  umgefd)rie= 
ben.  13.  SSa§  fid^  mit  ein em  (one]  SSorte  nid^t  fagen  Itifct,  mti§ 
man  umfc^reiben.  14.  SSir  traten  tt)d^renb  be§  SfhgenS  unter  ein 
iiberfte^enbe^  S)ad).  15.  (Sott  (^/.)  fet  2)an!f  ttrir  ^aben  biefe 
S8erfud)ung  iiberftanbcn.  16.  2)er  ^(an  ift  mifetungen.  17. 
3)er  §err  ift  auferftanben.  18.  %fy  erfenne  meine  @«i)u(b  an. 

i.  A  man  set  us  across  in  a  little  boat.  2.  I  have  translated 
a  whole  page.  3.  The  roof  projects.  4.  He  has  overcome 
this  temptation.  5.  If  you  will  have  [some]  water,  hold  your 
glass  under.  6.  He  was  wrong  to  evade  the  law.  7.  This 
young  man  is  the  degenerate  son  of  a  good  father.  8.  We  shall 
not  abuse  your  kindness.  9.  Consider  the  matter.  10.  The 
physician  entertained  the  patient  with  old  stories,  n.  We 
went  a  mile  around.  12.  The  prince  has  abused  his  power. 
13.  The  plan  has  been  disapproved.  14.  He  has  deceived  you. 
15.  The  servant  has  (is)  run  off.  16.  The  maid-servant  car- 
ried the  dishes  out.  1 7.  The  ambassador  has  accomplished  his 
work.  1 8.  It  is  the  duty  of  everyone  to  acknowledge  the  laws. 


156  LESSON    XXXI.  [§  290 

LESSON  XXXI. 

Impersonal  Verbs. 

290.  (a)  Verbs  which  express  phenomena  of  nature  have 
always  the  impersonal  subject  e3,  it.     As  : 

e§  regnet,  it  rains.  e§  frterr,  it  freezes. 

e§  fdjnett,  it  snows.  e3  &lt&t,  it  lightens. 

e3  fyagelt,  it  hails.  C§  bonnert,  it  thunders,  etc. 

(b)  Some  other  verbs  are  construed  impersonally,  to  ex- 
press action  without  definite  agent.  As  : 

e§  flopft,  there  is  a  knock.  c3  gtBt  (it gives),  there  is. 

e§  Iciutet,  there  is  a  ring.  tote  gef)t  e§,  how  goes  it? 

And  in  the  passive,  §  275  ;  or  reflexive,  §  274,  3. 

291.  (a)  Some  verbs  expressing  states  of  body  or  mind 
are  used  as  impersonal,  with  the  person  as  object.     As  : 

e0  fjungert  mid),  I  am  hungry.         e3  frtert  mid),  I  am  cold. 

e§  bitrftet,  or     >  e3  fdjtotnbett  nttr,  I  am  giddy. 

e3  biirftet  nttd),  3    '  e3  6ongt  nttr,  I  feel  afraid,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  When  the  personal  object  precedes  the  verb,  the  impersonal 
subject — which  would  then  follow  the  verb  (§  177,  3)  —  is  usually 
omitted;  as,  mid)  Ijungert;  nttr  traitmt,  I  dream,  etc. 

(b)  Often  the  impersonal  form  is  used  when  the  logical 
subject  follows.  As  :  e3  freitt  mtcf),  <3ie  511  fefyen,  or  bafj  <ene 
fommen,  /  am  glad,  etc  ;  e3  fcfjeint  —  e^  biinlt  mtdj  (or  mir)  — , 
baj}  er  ntd)t  fommen  tutrb,  it  seems  —  methinks  —  that  etc. 
(or  mirf),  mir  biinft,  etc.). 

292.  The  impersonal  form  is  much  more  usual  in  German 
than  in  English.     Some  impersonal  idioms  are  :  — 

e§  tut  tntr  letb,  I  am  sorry.  e§  tft  nttr  toofjt,  I  feel  well. 

e§  t|t  nttr  letb,  /  am  sorry.  e§  gel)t  ntir  gut,  I  am  doing  we/I. 

e§  berfte^t  fid),  that  is  of  course.  eS  feljlt  nttr  cttoaS,  something  ails  me. 

e§  fragt  fid),  it  is  a  question.  e3  geltngt  nttr,  I  succeed,  etc. 

293.  Weather  and  time  are  expressed  with  the  impersonal 
fetn  :  e§  tft  fait,  it  is  cold;  e^  tft  5ef)tt  Ufjr,  //  is  ten  o'clock. 


§  297]  IMPERSONAL    VERBS.  157 

294.  The  English  phrases  there  is,  there  are,  are  expressed 
by  the  impersonal  e§  with  jein  or  with  geben,  to  give.     With 
fein  the  verb  agrees,  as  in  English,  with  the  following  predi- 
cate noun.     With  geben,  this  noun  is  object,  and  the  verb  re- 
mains always   singular.     As:    e§    tt)ar    etn   9Kann ;  e§   tt>aren 
banner.     But,  e§  gab  einett  S^atm ;  e£  gab  banner  —  there  was 
a  man  ;  there  were  men  —  more  usually  with  plural  nouns  only. 

In  sense  fein  is  more  definite ;  geben  mare  vague  and  indefi- 
nite ;  as,  e£  ttwr  einmal  etn  ®ontg,  there  was  once  a  king,  ^n 
bet  9fti)tf)ol0gie  ber  (^ried^en  gtbt  e§  knele  hotter,  there  are  many 
gods  in  the  mythology  of  the  Greeks. 

NOTE.  —  With  fein,  inverted,  e§  is  omitted,  as  §  291  ;  but  never  with 
geben.  See  §  453. 

295.  Almost    all   impersonal    verbs  form   their    perfect 
tenses  with  the  auxiliary  fjctbert.     But  see  §  297,4. 

USE  OF  THE  AUXILIARIES  fjaben  AND  fetiu 

296.  ,£)aben  is  used  with  all  transitive  verbs  —  with  all 
reflexive  verbs  —  with  the  modal  verbs  —  with  most  im- 
personals  —  and    with    most   intransitives    which    express 
simple  action,  with  or  without  indirect  object. 

NOTE. — By  transitive  verbs  are  meant  strictly  those  which  take  an 
accusative  object  —  not  always  the  same  in  German  as,  apparently,  in 
English. 

297.  ©etn  is  used  with  the  following  intransitives  :  — 

1.  Verbs  which  express  a  change  of  condition;  as,  fterben, 
to  die;  ttmcfyfen,  to  grow;  erfranfen,  to  fall  ill;  genefen,  to  re* 
cover;  fcfyme^en,  to  melt,  etc. 

2.  Verbs  which  denote  motion  to  or  from  a  place,  of  which 
the  most  usual  are  (see  also  §  298)  :  — 

fafjren,  to  go  in  a  carriage.  fttefsen,  to  flow. 

fatten,  to  fall.  geljen,  to  go. 

ftiegen,  to  fly.  fommen,  to  come. 

ftie^en,  to  flee.  lanben,  to  land. 


158    -  LESSON    XXXI.  [§  298 

laujen,  to  run.  finfett,  to  sink. 

reifen,  to  travel.  fpringen,  to  spring. 

retten,  to  ride.  ftetgen,  to  mount. 

fegeln,  to  sail.  Steven,  to  move. 

3.  A  few  other  verbs,  some  of  which  may  have  a  dative  ob- 
ject:— 

bletben,  to  remain.  tt)eici)en,  to  yield  (dat.). 

begegnen,  to  meet  (dat.).  fein,  to  be. 

folgen,  to  follow  (dat.).  ttterben,  to  become. 

4.  The  following  impersonal  verbs  :  — 

gefd)ef)en,  to  happen. 

gelingen,  gliiclen,  geraten,  to  succeed. 

mifjltngen,  mtftgliicfen,  mi  fcraten,  to  succeed  ill. 

NOTE.  —  Compound  verbs  do  not  always  take  the  same  auxiliary  as 
their  primitives.  As,  ftefyen,  to  stand  (f)a6en),  entftefjen,  to  arise  (fein) ;  fom= 
men,  to  come  (fein),  befommen,  to  obtain  (fjaben).  The  sense  must  be  con- 
sidered in  every  case. 

298.  Some  intransitive  verbs  of  motion  are  conjugated  with 
fein  when  the  starting-point,  direction,  or  extent  of  motion  is 
mentioned.     But  when  only  the  action  or  motion  is  stated, 
without  reference  to  place,  these  same  verbs  are  conjugated 
with  fjaben.  —  Examples :  Sftcin  35ruber  ift  nacf)  £eip5tg  geretft, 
my  brother  is  gone  to  Leipzig.     (Sr  Ijat  k)iel  gereift,  he  has  been  a 
great  traveller.     8ie  ftnb  nac^  bem  nacfyften  2)orfe  gerttten,  they 
are  gone  on  horseback  to  the  nearest  village.     @te  f)aben  ben  gan- 
§en  ^?ag  gerttten,  they  have  been  riding  the  whole  day. 

NOTE.  —  Some  of  these  verbs  are,  besides  the  most  of  those  in  §  297, 
2 :  etlen,  flettern,  irtedjen,  quetCen,  rinnen,  jdnffen,  frfjroimmen,  toanbern,  etc. 

299.  A  few  verbs  are  used  with  either  auxiliary,  but  in 
a  different  sense ;  and  a  few  are  doubtful.     The  use  of  fein 
as  auxiliary  is  generally  indicated  in  the  dictionary. 

NOTE.  —  It  has  already  been  remarked  that  the  use  of  be  in  English 
was  formerly  more  common  than  at  present  —  approaching  more  nearly  to 
the  German  use  of  fein.  In  modern  English  the  auxiliary  fein  is  usually 
translated  have. 

For  the  frequent  omission  of  Ijafien  or  fein  at  the  end  of  a  transposed 
clause,  see  §  350,  4. 


§  299]  USE    OF    AUXILIARIES.  159 

EXERCISE  XXXI.  —  A. 

i.  Es  freut  mich,  Sie  wieder  zu  sehen.  2.  Wie  geht  es  Ihnen, 
alter  Freund?  3.  Regnet  es?  Nein,  es  schneit  4.  Hates 
gestern  gedonnert  ?  5.  Nein,  aber  es  hat  gehagelt  und  geregnet. 
6.  Es  versteht  sich,  dasz  wir  nicht  ausgehen,  sondern  zu  Hause 
bleiben,  wenn  es  regnet.  7.  Was  fehlt  Ihnen?  8.  Es  fehlt  mir 
nichts,  ich  befinde  mich  ganz  wohl.  9.  Was  argert  Sie?  10.  Es 
argert  mich,  von  diesem  Menschen  betrogen  worden  zu  sein. 
,11.  Es  gab  bessere  Zeiten.  12.  Es  gibt  kein  Brot  im  Hause. 
13.  Es  gibt  Brot  fiir  alle.  14.  Es  ist  ein  Mann  an  der  Tiire, 
der  mit  Ihnen  zu  sprechen  wiinscht.  15.  Es  jammerte  den 
Feldherrn,  in  die  gepliinderte  Stadt  einzuziehen.  16.  Es  traumte 
mir,  dasz  ich  auf  einem  hohen  Berge  stande ;  es  schwindelte 
mir,  und  mir  bangte  herunterzufallen. 

i.  Is  it  cold  ?  No,  it  is  hot.  2.  Has  it  been  freezing  this 
morning  ?  3.  Yes,  it  has  been  freezing.  4.  It  was  snowing  ; 
the  children  rejoiced  to  see  the  snow.  5.  Will  he  succeed  ? 
Yes,  he  will  succeed.  6.  We  were  thirsty  and  hungry  when  we 
arrived  at  the  end  of  our  journey.  7.  What  is  the  matter  with 
you  ?  I  feel  giddy.  8.  We  were  delighted  to  find  you  at  home. 
9.  It  has  been  raining  the  whole  day.  10.  Is  (gibt)  there  any- 
thing new  to-day?  n.  No,  there  is  no  news  (nothing  new). 
12.  There  were  giants  in  ancient  times.  13.  We  are  sorry 
that  you  have  not  succeeded.  14.  Has  it  been  warm  to-day  ? 
15.  No,  it  has  been  hot.  16.  He  denied  that  he  had  felt  afraid. 

B. 

i.  Der  Soldat  ist  an  seinen  Wunden  gestorben.  2.  Die  Mad- 
chen  sind  in  den  Garten  gegangen.  3.  Der  Schiffer  ist  in  den 
Fluss' gefallen.  4.  Wir  waren  alle  erschrocken.  5.  Der  Feind 
ist  geflohen.  6.  Diese  Apfel  sind  von  dem  Baume  gefallen.  7. 
Das  Schiff  ist  gesunken.  8.  Was  geschehen  ist,  ist  geschehen.  9. 
Der  alte  Feldherr  ist  gestern  angekommen.  10.  Mein  Vetter  ist 


l6o  LESSON    XXXII.  [§  300 

wahrend  des  Sommers  auf  das  Land  gezogen.  1 1.  Die  Fremden 
sind  auf  den  Berg  gestiegen.  12.  Der  Diener  ist  seinem  Herrn 
gefolgt.  13.  Wir  sind  zu  Hause  geblieben.  14.  Meine  Schwestern 
sind  spazieren  gefahren.  1 5.  Die Schiffer  sind  mit  den  Reisenden 
nach  Danzig  gesegelt.  16.  Der  Knabe  ist  von  der  Bank  gef alien. 

i.  The  master  has  ridden  with  his  servant  to  (the)  town.  2. 
They  are  gone  to  (the)  church.  3.  The  boatmen  have  landed 
in  the  harbour.  4.  The  ladies  have  taken  a  drive.  5.  They 
have  fled  to  Dresden.  6.  My  friend  has  moved  to  (in)  the  next 
street.  7.  The  bird  has  flown  upon  a  tree.  8.  I  have  met  your 
friend  yesterday.  9.  The  old  physician  would  have  remained 
at  home,  if  the  patient  had  not  sent  for  (nad))  him.  10.  We 
should  have  come,  if  we  had  been  invited,  u.  The  leaves  have 
fallen  from  the  trees.  12.  The  teacher  has  taken  a  walk  with 
his  pupil.  13.  I  was  frightened.  14.  This  gentleman  has 
been  a  great  traveller  (has  travelled  much}.  15.  The  boy  is 
tired,  he  has  been  running  and  jumping  the  whole  day.  16. 
He  has  recovered  from  a  severe  illness. 


LESSON  XXXIL 
Numerals. 

300.  CARDINAL  NUMERALS. 

1  ein§  (em,  etnc,  t\r\.),.one.         10     5e§n,  ten. 

2  gmei,  two.  ii     elf,  eleven. 

3  brei,  three.  12     5tDoIf,  twelve. 

4  t>ier,  four.  13     bret§ef)n,  thirteen. 

5  fiinf ,  y£z><?.  14     tuer^eljn,  fourteen. 

6  ferf)§,  six.  15.   \\M\^K,  fifteen. 

7  fteben,  seven.  16     fed)5ef)n,  sixteen. 

8  acrjt,  eight.  17     fieb5e!)n,  seventeen. 

9  nevm,  nine.  18     ad)t§ef)n,  eighteen. 


§302] 


CARDINAL    NUMERALS. 


161 


CARDINAL  NUMERALS. 


19  neunjefjn,  nineteen. 

20  jttmnjtg,  twenty.    . 

21  ein  unb  ^ttmnaig,  twenty-one. 

22  5tt>ei  unb  ^trjanjig,   twenty- 


90 
100 
101 

102 

1  2O 


neun^ig,  ninety. 
fyunbert,  #  hundred. 
fyunbert  (unb)  ein§. 
fyunbert  (unb)  jtoei. 


23 

3° 
31 
32 

40 

5° 
60 
7o 
80 

brei    unb    jttmn^tg,   twenty- 
three,  etc. 
breifjig,  thirty. 
ein  unb  breifjig,  thirty-one. 
§mei  unb  breifjig,  thirty-two. 
tiztfa  forty. 

fft»W8»i#(* 

fedfeig,  sixty. 
fieb^ig,  seventy.                      i 
adjtjig,  eighty.                       2 

I25 

200 
300 
1000 
2000 
IOO,OOO 
,000,000 

,000,000 

fyunbert     fiinf 
[jBWi 

jmei  ()unbert. 
brei  (junbert. 
taufenb. 
5U)ei  taufenb. 
fjunbert  taufenb. 
eine  Million'. 

[m- 

unb 

NOTE.  —  The  old  form  etlf  for  elf  is  still  occasionally  met  with.  Often, 
the  forms  funfaefyn,  funfatg  ;  fed)§5ef)n,  jedj^^ig  ;  jiebenaefyn,  fieben^ig.  Rarely 
—  poetic— the  old  forms  gtoeen,  ^lt)0,  two. 

301.  Gin  is  regularly  inflected  —  ein,  eine,  ein  —  when  before 
a  noun ;  when  without  a  noun,  einer,  eine,  eine§  ;  or  with  the 
article,  ber  (Sine,  bie  (Sine,  ba§   (Sine,  etc.     The  neuter  form 
ein§  (for  eine§)  is  used  abstractly  in  counting.     In  compound 
numbers,  like  ein  unb  jttmnjig,  ein  is  not  inflected ;  nor,  fre- 
quently, in  the  phrase  ein  unb  berfefbe.     (In  other  phrases 
(§  245,  note)  ein  is  the  indef.  art.). 

NOTE.  —  Sin,  one,  is  pronounced  with  more  stress  than  ein,  an,  a  ;  and, 
for  distinction,  is  often  printed  with  spaced  letters  ;  as,  ein  SSort,  a  word ; 
e  i  n  SSort,  one  word ;  or  sometimes  with  capital  initial. 

302.  3WC^  brei  have  a  genitive  §tt)eier,  breier,  and  a  dative 
5ft)eien,  breien,  which  may  be  used  when  the  case  is  not  other- 
wise indicated  ;  as,  ba£  llrtetl  §tt)eter  greunbe,  the  judgment  of 
two  friends ;  id)  fyabe  e§  nur  5tt)eten  gefagt,  I  have  told  it  only  to 
two. 

NOTE.  —  By  ellipsis,  the  names  of  the  numerals  are  construed  as  femi- 
nines,  and  of  the  weak  declension ;  as,  biefc  (3at)l)  2td)t,  btefe  Ginjen ;  this 
(figure)  8,  these  i'j. 


l62  LESSON    XXXII.  [§  303 

303.  Other  simple  numerals  sometimes  take  -en  in  the  da- 
tive plural,  when  used  without  a  noun  —  more  rarely  a  plural 
form  -e  ;  as,  ber  ®omg  ftifyrt  mit  fedjfen,  the  king  drives  with  six 
(horses);  alle  $tere,  all  fours.     But  they  usually  remain  un- 
altered. 

304.  ^mnbert,  taufenb,  take  a  plural  -e  when  used  alone  as 
plurals ;    as,   fjunberte,   ja   taufenbe  ttwren  pgegen,  hundreds, 
yes  thousands,  were  present.     (£in  is  used  before  (junbert  and 
tanfenb  only  in  the  numeral  sense ;  as,  fjimbert,  a  hundred;  but 
etn  taufenb  ad)t  fyunbert,  one  thousand  eight  hundred,  etc. 

Expressions  of  Time. 

305.  (#)   For  the  hours  of  the  day  the  cardinal  numeral  is 
used  with  Uf)r  (bte  Uf)t,  the  clock)  as  indeclinable;  and  the 
fractions  are  usually  counted  (with  auf)   on  the  next  hour. 
As :  SSte  Diet  Ufjr  ift  e§  ;  what  o'clock  is  it?    @§  ift  bier  Ufjr,  // 
is  four  o'clock;  e§  ift  f)aI6  fiin.f,  it  is  half  past  four  (half-five)  / 
e§  ift  etn  SSiertel — bret  SStertel  —  auf  fu'nfr  it  is  a  quarter  past 
four — a  quarter  to  five,  etc.     But  also:  em  $terte(  nac^  t)ier  ; 
etn  $terte(  t)or  fiinf ;  as  in  English.     At  is  expressed  by  um ; 
as:  Um  tt)ie  t)te(  tl^r,  at  what  o'clock1}    Um  fiinf  (Ufyr),  etc. 

(b)  The  minutes  before  the  hour  are  expressed  by  Dor  (or 
in);  after  the  hour,  by  nad)  (or  iiber).  As:  (£3  ift  gefjn  9Ktnu= 
ten  t)or  elf  —  or  in  gefyn  Sfttnuten  etf,  it  is  ten  minutes  before  (to) 
eleven;  e3  ift  neun  TOnuten  nad^  (or  iiber)  Dter,  /"/  is  nine 
minutes  after  (past)  four. 

NOTE.  — The  "time-table"  style:  «42o>43o»  b{er  (U^r)  3*000519,  Dier 
(llljr)  breifeig,  etc.  is  also  used,  though  hardly  in  writing. 

306.  Various  compounds  are  formed  with  cardinals  : 

i.  With  the  suffix  let,  appended  to  the  ending  er,  indeclin- 
able numeral  adjectives  are  formed,  sometimes  called  vana- 
tives ;  as,  einerlet,  ^toeierlet,  breterlet,  etc.,  of  one  kind,  two  kinds, 
three  kinds;  e§  ift  mtr  etnerjei,  it  is  all  one  (the  same)  to  me; 
toielerlet,  of  many  kinds,  or  many  kinds  of;  fine  trieterlet,  of  how 
many  kinds,  or  how  many  kinds  of? 


§  3o6j  CARDINAL    NUMERALS.  163 

2.  With  ntal,  time,  times,  adverbs  sometimes  called  iterative*; 
as,  einmal,  once;  jfteitnat,  twice;  Ijnnbertmal,  a  hundred  times; 
fcielmal,  many  times,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  (Sinmal  is  distinguished  in  meaning  by  accent :  eternal,  once 
(definite)  one  time ;  ehttnaF,  once  (indefinite),  once  on  a  time. 

3.  Multiplicative  adjectives  are  formed  with  fad),  or  fa'ttig  ;  as, 
einfad),  einfaltig,  simple;  jtoeifad),  glueifaltig,  double  twofold,  etc. 


EXERCISE  XXXIL 

i.  3>a§  3af)r  §at  gtuolf  donate.  2.  SSie  fciete  £age  ftnb  in  einem 
Saljre  ?  3.  (gin  JJaljr  Ijat  365  Stage.  4.  ©in  £ag  Ijat  24  (Stnnben. 
5.  gtoeimal  neun  ift  adjtjefjn.  6.  17  unb  19  mad)t  36.  7.  28te 
fpat  ift  e£  ?  8.  @§  fjat  foeben  etn§  gefd)Iagen.  9.  $ftuttiplt§teren 
@te  24  mtt  5;  ttnebie(  ift  (ma^t)  ba§?  10.  (£§  mad)t  120.  n. 
S)it)ibiere  363  mit  11  ;  tt)a§  lommt  ^erau§?  12.  3lbbtere 
5iifammen)  5,  8,  7  unb  10;  ttrietriet  mad^t  ba§?  30.  13. 
sJlefultat  ift  30.  14.  (£3  ift  §ef)n  U§r.  15.  (£§  mirb  balb  §aib  elf 
fein.  1 6.  ®er  nad^fte  3«S  na<^  SB  oft  on  ge()t  urn  brei  $iertel  auf 
5tt)olf  ab.  17.  Urn  tt)eld)e  3^it  n)irb  bcr  3ug  t>on  Baltimore  an= 
fommen?  18.  llm  ein  ^8iertel  auf  fieben.  19.  SSte  fciete  9}?inuten 
ftnb  in  etner  ©tunbe?  20.  60  9^inuten.  21.  $)ie  (Sd^tad^t  bet 
Setpjig  tourbe  im  Safjre  1813  gefd^tagen.  22.  SSie  mett  ift  e§  t)on 
Ijier  nad^  ^i^monb?  23.  @§  ift  nod)  67  SReilen.  24.  (£3  ift  un£ 
einerlei. 

i.  The  book  has  253  pages.  2.  How  many  miles  is  it  from 
here  to  Springfield?  3.  It  is  56  miles.  4.  At  what  time  will 
the  express  leave  for  Hartford?  5.  The  express  will  leave  at  a 
quarter  past  five.  6.  At  what  time  will  the  train  from  New 
York  arrive  ?  7.  It  will  arrive  at  a  quarter  to  eleven.  8. 
14  multiplied  by  3  is  42.  9.  How  many  kinds  of  wine  have 
you  in  your  cellar  ?  10.  We  have  three  kinds  of  wine  in  our 
cellar,  n.  How  many  kinds  of  apples  grow  in  your  orchard? 
12.  Five  kinds  of  apples.  13.  That  is  tenfold  profit.  14.  We 


164  LESSON    XXXIII.  [§  307 

have  been  twice  in  London.  15.  Three  times  three  is  nine. 
1 6.  Seven  times  seven  is  forty-nine.  17.  Schiller  was  born  in 
the  year  1759,  and  died  in  the  year  1805.  18.  How  old  was 
he,  at  the  (§ur)  time  of  his  death?  19.  He  was  46  years  old. 
20.  How  old  is  your  youngest  sister?  21.  She  is  seven  years 
old.  22.  Thousands  were  present.  23.  That  is  all  the  same 
to  me.  24.  We  rise  (aufftefjen)  every  morning  at  half  past  six. 
{Continue  oral  practice,  until  the  numerals  are  familiar.) 


LESSON  XXXIIL 

ORDINAL  NUMERALS. 

307.  The  ordinal  numerals  from  2  to  19  are  derived  from 
the  cardinal  numerals  by  adding  the  suffix  t,  and  from  20 
upwards,  ft.  They  are  declined  like  adjectives  and  are 
usually  preceded  by  the  definite  article.  (£rftf  first,  is  the 
superlative  of  efye,  before,  d)er,  sooner  ;  britt,  third,  shortens 
the  radical  vowel ;  adjt,  eighth,  drops  one  t.  In  compound 
numbers  only  the  last  takes  the  ordinal  ending. 

ist    ber,  bic,  ba§  erfte,  the  first. 

2nd    „      „  „  §tt)ette,  the  second. 

3r<*    it      a  n  britte,  the  third. 

4^     „      „  „  trier  te,  the  fourth. 

$th     „      „  „  fiinfte,  the  fifth, 

bth     „      „  „  fed)fte  (fed[)§te),  the  sixth, 

•jth     „      „  „  ftebente,  the  seventh. 

%th     „      „  M  ad)tef  the  eighth. 

iqth     „      „  M  neunje^nte,  the  nineteenth. 

„  „  5tt)an5tgfte,  the  twentieth. 

„  „  ein  unb  jttjangigfte,  the  twenty-first. 

„  „  Jtuei  unb  jwanjigfte,  the  twenty-second. 

30///     M      r/  n  bretgtgfte,  the  thirtieth. 


§3H]  EXPRESSIONS    OF    DATE.  165 

31  st  ber,  bte,  ba§  etn  imb  bretftigfte,  the  thirty -first. 
$oth     „      „       „    fiinfjigfte  (funfjtgfte),  the  fiftieth. 
IOQ//Z     „      „       „    fjunbertfte,  the  hundredth, 
loisf     „      „       „    fjnnbert  itnb  erfte,  the  hundred-and-first. 
2ooth     „      „       „    §tt)etf)unbertfte,  the  two-hundredth. 
ioooM     „      „       „    tanfenbfte,  the  thousandth. 

„      „       „    lefctc,  the  last. 
NOTE.  — $>er,  Me,  ba§  anberc,  the  other,i$  sometimes  used  for  the  second. 

308.  From  ftne  triel,  >^^w  many,  is  formed  an  interrogative 
ordinal,  ber,  bie,  ba§  tote-tjietfte,  or  ttnetnelte ;  as,  ber  luiebielfte  tft 
ba§,  how  many  is  that?  ben  ttnebteltett  (3^ag)  !§aben  ttnr  ^eute, 
z£/^<2/  //^y  of  the  month  is  it  to-day? 

Expressions  of  Date. 

309.  (a)   In  giving  the  day  of  the  month,  the  ordinal  is 
used  elliptically,  without  preposition  [£ag  t)0tt  being  implied]; 
as,  e§  ift  ber  fiinfte  Sluguft',  it  is  the  fifth  (day}  of  August. 

(b)  In  naming  a  date,  the  dative  ordinal  with  am  (an  bem 
contracted)  is  used,  or  —  especially  in  dating  a  letter  —  the 
simple  accusative;  as,  er  ftarb  am  gefmteit  Sftai, — or  ben  5ef)nten 
SDZat  —  he  died  (on)  the  tenth  of  May ;  Lofton,  ben  jefjnten  SWat. 

NOTE.  —  When  figures  are  used,  the  endings  -(0*e/  -(0^en  are  sometimes 
written,  but  often  omitted;  as  ber  lOte  or  ber  10.  9Jtai ;  am  20|ten  or  am 
20.  2ftai  —  the  period  marking  the  abbreviated  ordinal. 

310.  The  date  of  the  year  is  given  by  the  cardinal  number, 
usually  preceded-  by  tm  3>a()r(e),  in  the  year;  as,   9?apo(eon 
ftarb  (tm  S^e)  ad^tje^n  ()iinbert  etn  unb  smanjig ;  Napoleon 
died  in  (the year)  1821  (but  not  in  adjt^eljn  fjunbert,  etc.) 

311.  From  the  ordinal  numerals  are  formed: 

i.  The  fractional  nouns,  by  the  ending  — tel  —  originally  the 
noun  £eil,  part — except  the  half,  bie  §dlfte  ;  as,  ein  3)rtttel,  a 
third;  cm  S5iertetf  a  fourth,  etc.  (For  fjatb,  see  §  144.) 


166  LESSON  xxxni.  [§  312 

2.  The  dimidiative  adjectives,  by  adding  fjatt),  half,  to  the 
oidinal,  denoting    half    a    unit   less  than   the   corresponding 
number;  as,  anbertf)alb,  one  and  a  half;  britt(e)f)alb,  two  and 
a  half  (i.  e.  the  third  a  half}  —  etc.  These  are  indeclinable. 

3.  Ordinal  adverbs,  ending  in  -eti§  (see  §  399);  as,  erftenS, 
firstly;  gtoeitenS,  secondly,  etc. 


Expressions  of  Weight  and  Measure. 

312.  Nouns  of  quantity,  weight,  or  measure,  except  feminines 
in  e,  are  used  in  the  singular  after  a  numeral.     The  English 
'of  is   not  expressed.     Thus  :  bret  ^3fimb  £ee,   three  pounds 
of  tea;  §ef)tt  gu§  long,  ten  feet  long.     But  bret  £affen  £ee,  three 
cups  of  tea;  ^toet  ©Hen  lang,  two  yards  long,  etc. 

313.  The  names  of  the  days  and  months  are  (usually  with 
the  article)  the  masculines  : 

©onn'tag,  Sunday.          ganuar'  ,  January.    ^\\,July. 
Sfton'tag,  Monday.         fyfywKt*  ,  February.  5luguftf,  August. 
3)ten§ftag,  Tuesday.       9fttir§,  March.  September,  Septem- 

9ftitt'tt>od),   Wednesday.  5lprii'f  April.  ber. 

2)on'ner3tag,  Thursday.  9^ai,  May.  Dfto'ber,  October. 

$rei'tag,  Friday.  ^rtni,  June.  9^ot)emfberf  Novem- 

©onn'abetlb,  or  (Sam§'tagr  Saturday.  ber.  {ber. 

er,    Decem- 


EXERCISE  XXXIII. 

i.  S)ic  gro^en  ©otDaten  griebrtdt)§  be§  (Srften,  ^!bntg§  toon 
^reugen,  bienten  in  ben  ^riegen  fetne§  (£n!e(£>$riebrtcrj  beSS^ctten. 
2.  SubtDtg  Utjlanb  ftmrbe  am  26.  5IprtI  1187  in  £iibtngen  geboren 
unb  ftarb  bafelbft  am  13.  9?ot)entber  1862.  '  3.  S)a§  §au§f  in 
melc^em  i$  too^ne,  ift  bret  ©tod  fjod)  ;  i$  loo^ne  im  brttten  ©torfe. 
4-  §etnrt(J)  ber  %3)te,  ^bnig  t)on@ngtanb,  tear  fecpmal  ber^etratet. 
5.  S)rei  3t^tet  ift  etne  §dlfte  Don  bret  SSiertcI.  6.  ^eber  ©olbal 
er^iett  jniei  $aar  ©tiefel.  7.  (£r  ttofjitt  im  Dierten  §aufc  urn  bie 
8.  2)er  neunte  SRonat  be§  8a§re§  ^ei^t  ©eptemOer.  9.  SSie 


§  3M]  ADVERBS.  167 


!)etJ3t  ber  le£te  £ag  ber  28od)e?  10.  SOkn  nennt  ifjn  <3onnabenb 
ober  €>am§tag.  n.  S)er  3U9  totrb  in  anbertfjatb  ©tunben  an- 
fommen.  12.  2)a§  SanbljauS  bes  ®rafen  ift  brittefjatb  9ftetlen  Don 
fyter.  13.  £>a§  3)ampfboot  ftnrb  ant  21  [ten  nacfyften  9J2onat§  ab= 
fasten.  14.  9fc8djften  Sreitag  toerben  ftnr  ben  25ften  btefe§  99Zonat§ 
^aben.  15.  $)en  lt)iet)telfien  ^aben  tuir  5eute?  16.  SSir  I)aben  (jeute 
ben  25.  5luguft  ad^efjn  (or  taufenb  ad)t)  ^unbert  fed)§  nnb  ad^t5tg. 

i.  Sunday  is  the  first  day  of  the  week,  Monday  the  second, 
and  Tuesday  the  third.  2.  The  last  days  of  (the)  January 
were  very  cold.  3.  He  has  bought  a  dozen  bottles  of  wine.  4. 
She  drank  two  cups  of  tea.  5.  Give  me  eight  quires  of  paper. 
6.  Three  is  a  fifth  of  fifteen.  7.  The  king  will  arrive  on  the 
22d  of  May,  at  half  past  three.  8.  He  has  bought  five  pairs  of 
boots.  9.  Send  me  ten  pounds  of  tea.  10.  A  third  and  a  sixth 
are  three  sixths,  n.  The  train  will  arrive  in  three  hours  and  a 
half.  12.  Last  Saturday  we  had  (were)  gone  to  Dresden.  13. 
I  have  read  the  first  twenty  pages.  14.  The  bridge  is  153  feet 
long,  and  30  feet  broad.  15.  What  day  [of  the  month]  is  it 
to-day?  16.  It  is  Thursday,  the  i5th  of  February,  1885. 


LESSON   XXXIV. 
Adverbs. 

314.  Most  adjectives  are  used  in  their  predicate  form  as 
adverbs,  not  only  in  the  positive,  but  also  in  the  compara- 
tive and  superlative  degrees.  $ar(  fcfjretbt  fd^on,  ^etnrtrf) 
fdjretbt  jcfjoner,  aber  Strife  fdjretbt  am  fdjonften.  2Ber  !ann  am 
fdjlteftften  laufen?  (§  160),  who  can  run  the  fastest? 

NOTE.  —  Thus  the  adverb  is  often  distinguished  from  the  adjective 
only  by  the  context.  (See  §  449,  2,  d.) 


1 68  LESSON    XXXIV.  [§  3r5 

315.  In  the  superlative  the  form  with  am  is  used  when 
actual  comparison  is  expressed.      But  in  the  absolute  super- 
lative, which  expresses  simply  a  very  high  degree  without 
comparison,  the  accusative  neuter  with  auf  (aitf  ba3  con- 
tracted to  aufs>)  is  used.     As,  er  griifcte  mid)  auf 3  fyofltdjfte,  he 
greeted  me  most  politely  —  in  this  case  usually  without  the 
article  in  English. 

316.  A  few  superlatives  use  as  adverbs  the  uninflected 
form  in  -ft.     And  of  these,  the  superlatives  f)i)tf)ft,  cwfierft, 
ntogltd)ft,  are  frequently  used  to  form  an  absolute  superla- 
tive of  adjectives  or  other  adverbs.  —  As,  tun  @ie  e3  gefdlftgft, 
do  it,  please;  f)od)ft  angenef)m,  most  agreeable;  du^erft  f rfjirn, 
extremely  beautiful;  mogli(i)ft  fdjneft,  as  quick  (or  quickly)  as 
possible. 

317.  The  following  adverbs  form  their  comparative  and 
superlative  from  other  stems  :  — 

roofjl  or  gut,  well.  beffer,  better;  am  beften,  best. 

batb,  soon.  efjer,  sooner;  am  efjeften,  soonest. 

gertt,  willingly,  gladly.    lieber,  more  willingly,  rather;  am 
See  also  §  156.  liebften,  most  willingly. 

318.  Adverbs  are  often  formed  from  adjectives  by  means  of 
suffixes;  as,  bitterlitt),  bitterly  (from  bitter);  blinbling§,  blindly, 
(frombtmb).   Suchformswill  be  more  fully  given  in  Less.  XLIII. 

NOTE.  —  Enlarged  forms  in  -e  occur;  as,  Icntge,  gerne,  borne,  for  lang, 
gern,  born,  etc.,  formerly  more  common  than  now. 

319.  (a)   Some  adverbs  derived  from  nouns  or  adjectives 
take  the  sign  of  the  genitive   §>  (§  399):  — 

abenb§,  in  the  evening.  tin!§,  to  the  left. 

morgenS,  in  the  morning.  fd)onften§,  in  the  best  manner. 

anfang§,  in  the  beginning.  fpateften§,  at  the  latest. 

teil§,  partly.  after bingS,  certainly. 

rerf)t§,  to  the  right.  attber§,  otherwise. 


§  322]  POSITION    OF    ADVERBS.  169 

(b)  Such  forms  are  sometimes  phrases,  written  as  com- 
pounds; as,  grb'jjtenteil§,/0r  the  most  part;  untertt)eg§,  on  the 
way  ;  fettte3ft)eg»,  by  no  means,  etc. 

320.  (a)   Many  adverbial  phrases  are  formed  by  combina- 
tion with  a  preposition;  as,  toon  often,  /raw  above;  toon  unten, 
from  below;  gerabe  au§,  straight  on.     Many  adverbs  are  pure 
compounds,  as,  toorbet,  /#.$•//  iiueratt,  everywhere;  toiettetdjt,  per- 
haps,  etc.     For  accent,  see  §  53.     For  compounds  of  ba,  too, 
see  §§  209,  237. 

(£)  The  compounds  with  f)er,  hither;  f)tn,  thither,  are  often 
separable;  as,  voofjer  fommen  <Sie?  or,  mo  fommen  <Sie  Ijer? 
where  do  you  come  from  ?  etc.  §er  and  fjtn  are  used  in  many 
idiomatic  phrases.  (§  484). 

321.  There  are  also  many  simple  adverbs,  or  adverbs  proper; 
such  as,  f)ter,  here;  bort,  there;  I)er,  hither;  fu'n,  thither;  bann, 

;  tnann,  when;  fo,  ^/  nur,  ^«/>;,  etc. 


NOTE.  —  Adverbs  are  classed,  according  to  their  meaning,  as  in  English, 
into  adverbs  of  place,  of  time,  of  manner,  of  degree,  of  predication  (or 
mood),  etc.  But  such  classification  does  not  need  to  be  explained  here. 


322.  Position  of  Adverbs. 

1.  The  adverb  stands  immediately  before  the  adjective  or 
adverb   it  modifies.     Except  genug,  enough;  as,  ftarf  genug, 
strong  enough. 

2.  The  adverb  cannot  stand,  as  it  so  often  does  in  English, 
between  the  subject  and  verb.      For  instance :   We  generally 
dine  at  six  o'clock,  ttrir  fpeifen  gelDofjnlid)  urn  fed)§  Ufyr.     He 
always  speaks  the  truth,  cr  fagt  immer  bte  2Baf)rI)eit.    Except  in 
the  transposed  order  (§  177,  4.)     See  also  §  354,  5. 

3.  The  English  "  only  "  may  either  precede  or  follow  the 
noun;  the  German  nur  must  always  precede  it:  My  sister  only, 
or  only  my  sister  was  present,  nur  meine  @djtt>efter  ttmr  §ugegeri. 


I7O  LESSON    XXXIV.  [§  323 

4.  When  several  adverbs  or  adverbial  expressions  occur  in 
the  same  sentence,  the  adverb  of  time  is  usually  first,  the  ad- 
verb of  place  second,  and  the  adverb  of  manner  last.    Examples : 
(£§  fjat  fyeute  f)ter  ftarf  geregnet,  /'/  has  been  raining  hard  here  to- 
day.   (£r  arbeitet  immer  fletjsig,  he  always  works  diligently.   (See 
also  §  202.) 

NOTE.  —  The  same  rule  applies  to  the  corresponding  adverbial  phrases ; 
as,  (£8  I)at  fjeute  morgen  in  biefer  ®egenb  fefjr  ftarf  geregner,  it  has  been  raining 
very  hard  in  this  neighborhood  this  morning. 

5.  The  adverb  nicE)t,  not,  when  it  negatives  the  verb,  stands 
after  all  objects  or  other  adverbs.  But  when  it  negatives  some 
adjunct  of  the  verb,  it  is  placed  before  that  adjunct.    Examples : 
3>crj  fefje  ifnt  ntdjt,  I  do  not  see  him.    %$<§  f)abe  tfjn  fjeute  nidjt 
gefefyen,  I  have  not  seen  him  to-day.     SBir  fjaben  ifjn  ntdjt  Tjeute, 
fonbern  geftern  gefefyen,  we  have  not  seen  him  to-day,  but  yesterday. 

323.  When  an  adverb,  or  adverbial  phrase,  begins  the 
sentence,  an  inversion  occurs  (see  §  177,  3);  as,  fjeute  fjat  e§ 
^ier  ftar!  geregnet ;  or,  ^ter  l)at  e§  ^eute  ftarf  geregnet ;  or  ftarf 
f)at  e§  Ijeute  ^ter  geregnet.  For  fuller  statements,  see  §  344. 

NOTE.  —  Only  one  such  adverb  or  adverbial  phrase  can  precede  the 
verb.  The  others  will  occupy  their  usual  places,  as  in  the  examples. 

EXERCISE  XXXIV- 

i.  SSo  ift  ber  $af)tu)of?  2.  £in!§  urn  bie  @d!e.  3.  SSo  ift  bet 
©aftfjof  §11  (of)  ben  bret  ®onigen?  4.  8  it  ber  britten  (Strafse  rec^t^, 
bag  biertc  §au§  auf  ber  Itnfen  @ette.  5.  SMtte,  jetgen  @ie  mir  ben 
28eg  nai^  bent  2)om.  6.  ©efjen  @ie  gerabe  au§f  bi§  @ie  an  ba§ 
9Jat§au§  fommen ;  bort  biegen  <Sie  linfS  urn  bie  @cfe  unb  ne^men 
baraiif  bie  erfte  ©tra^e  red)t§,  lucldje  (Ste  btre!tf  auf  ben  Sftiinfter* 
pla^  fii()rt  7.  2So  tDotten  8te  f)tn?  8.  %$  laufe  auf  ben 
Ijof ;  t(^)  n?erbe  balb  ttneber  juriicf  fomnten.  9.  2)te  ©djtaf 
ftnb  oben,  ber  ©petfefaat  ttnb  bie  SSo^njimmer  finb  unten.  10. 
©inb  @ie  je  in  ®enf  gert)efen,  unb  fennen  (Ste  bie  bortigen  ©aft* 


§  324]  CONJUNCTIONS.  1^1 

Ijofe?  ii.  Qtvar  bin  idj  &a  getoefen,  aber  e§  tft  fdpn  lange  fjer 
(ogtf).  12.  SSir  finb  borgeftern  fyter  angetommen,  iinb  merben  liber* 
ntorgcn  ftneber  abretfcn.  13.  SStr  Ijaben  berettg  bie  ganae  (Stabt 
gefeljen.  14.  £ann  finb  <Ste  tna^rf^emli^  aud^  fcf)on  trn  2)ont 
gemefen?  15.  gteiltd)  finb  ttrir  ba  gemefen,  nnb  ^aben  i^n  toon 
borne  nnb  bon  Ijinten,  t>on  oben  nnb  bon  nnten  befefjen.  16. 
ift  ja  reci)t  fd)5n  ;  ©ie  f^etnen  iiberaE  gen^efen  gu  fein.  17. 
^er  !ommen  (Sie  fjeute?  SSoIjin  nioHen  (Sie  ntorgen?  18.  %$ 
!omme  §eute  bon  33afet  unb  »itt  morgen  nad)  33ern. 

i.   He  entirely  forgot  the  names.     2.  Which  of  the  sisters 
works  most  diligently  ?     3.   The  air  is  cool  in  -  the  -  morning 
and  in  -  the  -  evening.     4.  We  have  waited  [a]  long  [time]. 
5.  She  cried  bitterly.     6.  Which  of  these  boys    sings   most 
beautifully?    7.   I  expect  him  every  hour  (hourly).    8.   He  fell 
backwards  over  the  stairs.     9.  He  can  hardly  have  heard  it. 
10.   The  book  is  written  partly  in  the  English  and  partly  in 
the  German  language,    n.  It  rained  yesterday  and  [the]  day- 
before—yesterday.    12.  When  did  it  happen?  13.  It  happened 
lately.     14.  It  is  very  probable  that  it  will  rain  to-morrow. 
15.  I  had  almost  forgotten  it.     16.  He  is  by  no  means  so 
industrious  as  you  think.    17.  Is  your  brother  at  present  Qe&t) 
in  Basle  ?     18.   No  sir,  at  present  he  is  in  Strassburg. 


LESSON  XXXV* 
Conjunctions. 

324.  Conjunctions  which  connect  sentences  of  like  kind 
are  called  co-ordinating  conjunctions.  Conjunctions  which 
introduce  dependent  clauses  are  called  subordinating  con- 
junctions. Conjunctions  are  important  chiefly  from  their 
influence  on  the  order  of  words.  (See  Lesson  XXXVI.) 


172  LESSON    XXXV.  [§  327 

325.  Co-ordinating  conjunctions  are  either  pure  conjunc- 
tions (the  simple  connectives)  or  adverbial  conjunctions. 

Pure  Conjunctions. 

326.  The  pure  conjunctions  cause  neither  inversion  nor 
transposition  of  the  verb.     These  are  and,  but,  or,  for: 

unb,  and.  fonbern,  but. 

aber,  but,  however.  ober,  or. 

attettt,  but,  yet.  benn,  for. 

NOTE.  —  More  rarely,  also,  bocfj,  inbeffett,  meaning^. 

(a)  (Sonbern  is  used  only  after  a  negative,  and  introduces 
an  opposite  statement.  9lber  is  used  both  after  affirmative  and 
negative  clauses,  and  merely  qualifies,  but  does  not  contradict, 
the  preceding  statement.  As:  (£r  ift  nid)t  retdj,  jonbern  arm.  G£r 
tjat  ba§  §au§  gefaitft,  aber  nid)t  bqaf)tt.   $3)  lomme  ntcfjt  bon  ber 
©tette,  aber  e§  ift  aurf)  fd)tt)er ;  /  do  not  make  any  progress,  but 
then  it  is  difficult. 

(b)  (Sonbern,  aftein,  stand  at  the  head  of  the  clause;  aber, 
in   the   sense   of  however,    frequently   after  the   introductory 
words     As:  Oh*  ift  ft)of)l  fefjr  retd);  er  ift  aber  fefjr  getjtg ;  he  is 
indeed  very  rich;  he  is  however  very  avaricious. 

(c)  5tttein  (literally  alone,  only)  admits,  but  excepts  from,  a 
preceding  statement,  either  affirmative  or  negative ;  and  is  of 
less  frequent  use  than  aber.     As:  (£r  tt)ar  em  grower  $elbf)err, 
attetn  er  befafs  nt^t  bie  (^abe  umfaffenber  23ered)iwng, — but  (yet) 
he  did  not  possess  the  gift  of  comprehensive  calculation,  etc. 

Adverbial  Conjunctions. 

327.  The  adverbial  conjunctions,  or  co-ordinating  con- 
junctions which  partake  of  the  nature  of  adverbs,  when 
they  stand  at  the  head  of  the  sentence,  influence  the  order 
of  words  like  adverbs  —  that  is,  they  cause  inversion  of  the 
verb  (§  323).     Examples:   3d)  bin  frcm!;   be^alb  farm  idj 


§  33°]  SUBORDINATING    CONJUNCTIONS.  1 73 

ntdjt  au£get)en ;  /  am  ill ;  on  that  account  I  cannot  go  out. 
(£r  lam  geftern  5lbenb  )el)r  fpa't  an,  unb  bennodj  ift  er  fef)r  frill) 
auf  j  he  arrived  very  late  last  night,  and,  nevertheless,  he 
is  up  very  early.  But  these  same  words  stand  as  adverbs 
within  the  sentence  :  Sd)  bin  Irani,  id)  lann  be3l)a(6  md)t  au3- 
gefjen. 

328.  The  principal  adverbial  conjunctions  are  : 

alfo,  accordingly.  bod), 

.     .,  '  I  yet,  still,  neverthe- 

aufjerbem,  besides.  bennodj,    V 

ba,  there,  then.  jebod),        ) 

bann,  then.  folgtid),  consequently. 

bafier,     )  inbeffen,  meanwhile,  however. 

\  therefore.  "     ...  .  .     \ 

barum,   )  nod),  still,  yet  (time). 

beSlmto,         )  fo,  so,  then. 

\  on  that  account.          '     n  _ 

be§toegen,      )  fonft,  else,  otherwise. 

NOTE.  —  <So  is  frequently  used  to  introduce  a  principal  clause,  pre. 
ceded  by  a  dependent  clause,  when  no  connective  is  expressed  in  English, 
—  especially  after  adverbial  clauses  of  cause  or  condition.  See  §  486. 

329.  In  the  correlative  or  double  connectives,  enttneber — 
ober,  either — or;  iDeber  —  nod),  neither — nor,  inversion  occurs 
after  n)eber  and  nod)  —  and  usually,  but  not  always,  after  ent= 
toeber ;  as:  (gnWeber  lommter  (or  er  lommt),  ober  er  tmrb  balb 
fdjreiben,  either  he  will  come  or  he  will  soon  write.     SBeber  toirb 
er  lommen,  nod)  nrirb  er  fd)reioen,  neither  will  he  come  nor  will 
he  write.     But :  er  nnrb  tneber  lommen  nod)  fdrreiben,  he  will 
neither  come  nor  write. 

NOTE.  —  The  phrases  fotoofjl  —  al§  audj,  both  —  and ;  nidjt  nur — fonbern 
aucf),  not  only — but  also,  are  also  used  as  correlative  connectives. 

Subordinating  Conjunctions. 

330.  Subordinating  conjunctions  transpose  the  verb  to 
the  end  of  the  clause  which  they  introduce.     Examples : 
9^ad)bent  id)  meinen  S5rief  gefd)rieben  l)atte,  trng  id)  tf)n  auf  bie 


174  LESSON  xxxv.  [§  331 


after  I  had  written  my  letter,  I  carried  it  to  the  post- 
office.  £)ie  <Sonne  ging  foeben  auf,  ate  fair  aiif  bem  ©ipfel  be3 
2krge§  anlamen;  /^  JZ/TZ  was  just  rising  as  we  reached  the 
summit  of  the  mountain. 

331.  When  a  dependent  clause  —  adverbial  or  objective 
—  precedes  the  principal  clause,  the  latter  is  inverted.   The 

dependent  clause  here  has  the  effect  of  an  adverbial  modi- 
fier preceding  the  principal  verb  (§  323).  As  :  Stodjbem  er 
feme  Stemming  be^a^It  fyatte,  retfte  er  ab  ;  after  he  had  paid 
his  bill,  he  left.  S)aJ3  er  bag  getan  f)at,  lann  id)  ntcfjt  glau^ 
Den,  that  he  has  done  that,  I  cannot  believe. 

332.  The    most    important    subordinating    conjunctions 
are  :  — 


,  when,  as.  06,  whether,  if. 

ob,        )  oba 

\  as  if. 

menn,    )  obtt) 

bet)  or,  before.  fett, 


since  (time). 
,  until.  fcitbem,    ) 

baf  as,  since  (cause).  fo&alb,  as  soon  as. 

ba§,  that.  tua^renb,  while. 

bantit,  in  order  that.  ttmnu,  when. 

e^e,  before.  toenn,  when,  if. 

inbem,       )  tt)e$ftatb,  wherefore. 

.   •'       [•  while,  as. 
mbeffen,   )  toier  how,  as. 

nad)bem,  after.  tt)et(,  'because. 

NOTE.  —  Some  of  these  words  have  other  uses  :  as,  ba,  there,  then  ;  oI8, 
than;  bi§,  up  to,  etc.  But  the  use  as  subordinating  conjunction  will  al- 
ways be  shown  by  the  position  of  the  verb  at  the  end  of  the  clause. 

333.  For  the  distinction  between  al§,  when  (definite  past), 
ftienn,  when  (future  or  contingent),  and  tnann,  when  (inter- 
rogative); also  for  the  separable  compounds  ft)cmt  —  cutd),  oO  — 
gleid),  although,  etc.,  see  Lesson  LXI. 


§  335]  INTERJECTIONS.  1 75 

334.  The  correlative  comparison,  the  (more) — the  (less}  is 
expressed  by  je —  befto  (or  je — je),  the  leading,  or  dependent, 
clause  being  transposed,  the  second  inverted ;  as,  je  retcfyer  ber 
Sttfann  roirb,  befto  ftoljer  ftrirb  er,  the  richer  the  man  becomes,  the 
prouder  he  grows.     Qe.  efjer,  je  liefter,  the  sooner,  the  better. 

Interjections. 

335.  The  simple  or  natural  interjections  do  not  admit  of 
grammatical  treatment.     They  are  more  or  less  the  same 
in  all  languages. 

336.  Sometimes  words  or  phrases  are  used  elliptically, 
in  an  exclamatory  way,  as  interjections  : 

1.  Such  are  :  toef) !  o  tDelj !  woe  is  me!  Ictber  !  alas!  gut  §eil ! 
hail!   ®ottloft  !    God  be  praised!   tt)of)Iauf!  cheer  up!  ftetuabre! 
God  forbid!  tneg!  fort!  away!  fjeretn!  come  in!  toetter !  go  on  / 

2.  Here  may  be  mentioned  the  frequent  use  of  the  infinitive 
and  perfect  participle  in  German,  instead  of  the   English  im- 
perative:  ©infteigcn !  etngeftiegen !  (on  starting  a  train,  etc.)  get 
in!  all  aboard!  au^ftetgen!  au^gefttegen!  get  out 7  all  out 7  And 
the  exclamatory  or  absolute  infinitive:  $cf)  bid)  fcerlaffen!  un- 
ntbglid)!    I  forsake  you!  impossible! 

3.  Occasionally  an  interjection  is  brought  into  a  kind  of 
connection  with  the  structure  of  the  sentence.     For  instance  : 
0  be§  £oren!  oh  the  fool!  $pfui  lifter  ben  Seujen!  fie  on  the 
coward!  2lct),  baft  bit  ba  liegft!  Alas  /  that  thou  liest  there! 

EXERCISE  XXXV. 

i.  8ra11  {Mrs?}  33raun  Ijat  un§  511  enter  (SefeEfc^aft  eingelaben, 
aber  )Dtr  Tjabeu  tfjre  (Stnlabung  nid^t  annefjmen  fonrten.  2.  Xtefe 
©olbaten  fjabcn  in  ber  S^fanterte,  unb  ntd)t  in  ber  ®a&aHerie  ge= 
bient.  3.  3>dj  tntlt  gerne  fommen,  after  mein  S3ruber  lann  ni^t 
fomtnen.  4.  @ef)en  ©ie  je^t  ntcfjt  au§,  bcnn  e§  regnet.  5. 
Ijat  mir  geraten,  mtc^  rul)tg  ^u  bcrljalten ;  be^fjalft  fann 


1^6  LESSON    XXXV.  [§  336 

Ijeute  nid^t  au§gerjen.  6.  ©r  ift  tett§  in  2)eutfct)(anb,  tei(£  in 
granlreid)  ersogen  ttorben;  be§f)afb  fpridjt  er  foment  $>eutfdj  trie 
granjoftf^  mit  grower  gertigfeit  7.  @§  regnet ;  be£f)atb  bteibe  id) 
511  §aufe.  8.  9113  mein  £>iencr  in  ba§  Dimmer  trat,  fdjtief  id)  nod). 
9.  Qe  langer  bte  £age  finb,  befto  fiirjer  finb  bie  SRad^tc.  10.  ®tc 
milben  (Sanfe  finb  fd)iDer  511  fd)tegenf  n?etl  fie  fd)neH  unb  fel)r  1)0$ 
fHegen.  n.  3e  ftetgiger  man  arbeitet,  befto  leister  tt)trb  bie 
Arbeit.  12.  @ort)o^I  tnetne  (Htern  at§  au^  biele  meiner  beften 
greunbe  maren  auf  bent  93d§n§of,  at§  id^  bon  meiner  ^Reife  guriicf^ 
lam.  13.  (Snttteber  tuerben  (Sie  balb  einen  23rtef  bon  mir  er^altcn, 
ober  id)  ft>erbe  jemanben  5u3{)nen  fd)icfen.  14.  SBaljrljaftig,  fd)nett 
gefa^ren!  15.  ®eftern  5lbenb  fn()r  i(^  bon  Sonbon  abf  nnb  ^ente 
ittag  urn  bier  ll^r  bin  id)  fc^on  in  bem  fleinen  ©clter§f  ba§ 
fein  TOneral'maffer  fo  beriifymt  ift.  16.  SSa§  Ijabe  id)  nid£)t 
in  biefer  furjen  3^  gefe^en  !  17.  ©ottlob  !  enbtii^  finb  tt>ir 
ba  unb  n>oEen  nn§  ein  menig  anSru^en.  18.  $e  fritter,  befto 
beffer. 

i.  When  I  arrived  yesterday,  it  was  quite  dark.  2.  Wait  a 
minute,  until  I  have  written  my  exercise.  3.  It  is  raining, 
therefore  I  shall  stay  quietly  at  home.  4.  After  I  had  taken  my 
ticket,  I  went  into  the  waiting-room.  5.  I  sent  the  porter  for 
a  cab,  because  I  have  so  much  baggage  that  I  cannot  carry  it 
myself.  6.  He  speaks  as  he  thinks.  7.  After  it  has  lightened 
it  thunders.  8.  He  slept  whilst  I  was  reading.  9.  It  struck 
twelve,  when  we  arrived  at  Brandenburg.  10.  The  sun  had  set 
before  we  arrived  at  our  journey's  end.  n.  You  will  find  the 
gentleman  either  in  the  dining-room  or  in  the  sitting-room. 
12.  He  can  neither  read  nor  write.  13.  We  could  neither  hear 
nor  see.  14.  All  aboard !  the  train  starts  in  a  moment.  15. 
Not  only  my  books,  but  also  my  clothes,  were  burned.  16. 
Alas!  all  that  (tt)a§)  I  had  is  lost.  17.  As  he  could  not  come, 
(fo)  he  wrote  me  a  long  letter.  18.  The  more  diligently  I 
study  the  German  language,  the  more  clearly  I  see  that  it  is 
very  much  (fefyr)  like  the  English  [language]. 


§  341]  ORDER    OF    WORDS. SUMMARY.  177 

LESSON  XXXVL 

Order  of  Words.  —  Summary. 

Some  of  the  rules  on  the  order  of  words  have  already  been 
incidentally  given  (§  §  177/202).  It  is  now  necessary  to 
give  a  more  complete  summary  of  this  subject. 

337.  The  principal  point  in  the  construction  of  the  German  sentence  is: 

I,    The  Position  of  the  Verb. 

338.  There  are  three  forms  of  verb-position :  — 

I.  NORMAL  order  —  the  verb  follows  the  subject. 
II.  INVERTED  order  —  the  verb  precedes  the  subject. 
III.  TRANSPOSED  order  —  the  verb  stands  at  the  end. 
The  first  two  of  these  belong,  usually,  to  independent  or  principal  sen- 
tences ;  the  last  only  to  dependent  or  subordinate  sentences  (clauses). 

NOTE  i.  —  If  we  denote  the  subject  by  S.  ;  the  verb  by  V.  ;  the  adjuncts  of  the  verb  by 
A.,  the  forms  will  be  as  follows  :  — 

I.  Normal  — N.  =  S.  V.  A. 
II.  Inverted—  I.  =  V.  S.  A. 
III.  Transposed  —  T.  =  S.  A.  V. 

Observe  that  it  is  the  verb  that  changes  its  position.  Thus  the  position  of 
the  verb  indicates  the  character  of  the  construction. 

2.  By  the  verb  is  meant  always  the  affirming,  or  finite  (personal}  verb.  This  in  all 
compound  forms  (§  169)  is  the  auxiliary,  or  inflected  word.  By  the  subject  is  meant  not 
only  the  nominative  noun  or  pronoun,  but  the  entire  subject,  with  all  its  modifiers.  By 
adjunct  is  meant  all  the  rest  of  the  predicate,  except  the  adjunct  which  precedes  the  verb 
in  II.  (§  323). 

1.    The  Normal  Order. 

339.  The  normal  (S.  V.  A.)  is  the  natural  and  usual  order  of  the  inde- 
pendent declarative  sentence. 

340.  None  of  the  adjuncts  of  the  predicate  can  stand  between  the  sub- 
ject and  the  verb  (as  often  in  English).  Thus :  he  always  wears  a  black 
coat,  er  trtigHtttmcr  einen  fcfitoaraen  SRod  (See  also  §  343). 

NOTE.  —  Only  seeming  exceptions  are  such  words  as  after,  however  ;  bocfj,  jebocl),  yet; 
Itantlirfj,  namely  ;  §tt>at,  indeed,  which  are  really  parenthetical. 

341.  The  infinitive  and  participle  of  compound  tenses  stand  at  the  end, 
preceded  by  whatever  qualifies  them.     When  both  occur,  the  infinitive 
stands  last  (§  163)  —  as  in  many  examples  already. 

342.  The  prefix  of  a  separable  verb  stands  at  the  end  in  simple  tenses. 
In  compound,  it  is  written  in  one  word  before  the  participle  or  infinitive 
(§  284)  —  as  in  many  examples  already. 


178  LESSON    XXXVI.  [§  342 

NOTE.  —  But  sometimes,  as  in  poetry,  the  prefix  will  stand  nearer  the  verb  in  a  simple 
tense  ;  as  :  gilyt'  mir  lint  ben  2)egen,  gird  round  me  the  sword. 

343.  (a)  The  subject  itself  may  be  complex — consisting  of  several 
words,  or  including  an  adjective  clause  or  clauses  (§  348).  In  all  cases  the 
rule  stands  that  the  principal  verb  immediately  follows  the  subject.  Thus : 
griebrid)  ber  gtoeite,  $bnig  bon  Spreitfeen  (subject),  tear  ber  grbfete  gelbfjerr 
feuter  Sett.  (£in  &err,  ber  einent  2ftanne,  bent  er  md)t  red)t  traute,  eine  ©utnee 
geltefjen  rjatte  (subject),  ttmr  (verb)  erftaunt  311  ftnben,  etc. 

NOTE.  — Observe  that  in  the  latter  case  the  final  verb  of  the  dependent  adjective  clause 
is  brought  immediately  before  the  principal  verb.  This  position  will  often,  in  a  complex 
sentence,  usefully  show  where  the  dependent  construction  ends,  and  the  principal  sentence 
is  resumed. 

(b)  But  if  the  clause  modify  the  predicate,  it  should  not  (§  340)  stand 
between   the  subject   and   the  verb,  as   often   in    English.     Thus:    The 
Romans,  aftertfoy  had  conquered  the  world, fell  into  luxury ;  $)te  9Jbmer 
berfielen,  nadjbem  fie  bte  SSelt  ero&ert  fiatten,  in  Upptgfeit  (not  Me  3tbmer,  nad> 
bent,  etc.). 

NOTE.  —  This  rule  is  sometimes  violated,  but  not  in  strict  correctness.  Rather,  to 
avoid  crowding,  let  the  dependent  clause  precede  ;  as,  $ftacf)bem  bte  9tomer,  etc.  .  .  .  berfie= 
ten  fie,  etc.  (§  344). 

For  special  case  of  normal  order  in  dependent  clause,  see  §  350,  i. 

2.    The  Inverted  Order. 

344.  The  inverted  order  (V.  S.  A.)  is  assumed  in  independent  declara- 
tive sentences  when  introduced  by  any  adjunct  of  the  verb:  — 

(a)  Only  one  such  adjunct  may  precede  the  verb  ;  but  this  may  consist 
of  several  words,  forming,  however,  logically  only  one  element  of  the  sen- 
tence. As :  S)antQl§  tyalf  un§  ein  ^freitnb  au§  unfrer  9?ot.  tln§  fyalf  bamalS 
ein  guter  §reunb  au§  ber  ^ot.  9Cu§  itnferer  Sftot  fjalf  er  un§  bama(§. 

(&)  A  dependent  clause  —  adverbial  or  objective  —  preceding  the  prin- 
cipal, has  the  value  of  an  introductory  adjunct,  and  causes  inversion  of 
the  principal  verb.  As :  2U§  hnr  anfamen,  hmr  e£  frfjon  Sag.  $>af?  er  folrfje 
SKorte  gefprocrjen  r)at,  gtaufte  tcfj  md)t.  But  sometimes,  colloquially,  or  for 
emphasis,  the  inversion  is  omitted.  As:  SSdre  fie  ntd)t  gefommen,  id) 
ftd'nbe  nod)  ba  —  for  (fo)  ftanbe  id),  etc.  See  §  471,  e. 

(c)  For  the  same  reason,  expressions  like  /  think,  said  he,  etc.,  when 
preceded  by  any  of  the  words  referred  to,  will  be  inverted,  those  phrases 
being  logically  the  principal  sentence,  of  which  the  words  quoted  form  the 
object.     As :  S)a§,  benfe  id),  tft  meine  ^?flid)t  (but  id)  benfe,  ba§  ift,  etc.). 

For  dependent  subject  clauses,  see  §  343. 


§  348]  ORDER    OF    WORDS.  -  SUMMARY.  179 

(d)  Rarely  the  participle  or  infinitive  of  a  compound  tense,  or  even  the 
verb  itself,  may  stand  first,  in  case  of  special  emphasis.  As  :  ©efforjen 
roar  atte§  ;  <2d)roeigen  ttritt  id)  rttdjt  ;  Grmorben  laffen  farm  er  mid),  nid)t  rid)ten  ; 
£ommt  bod)  ba§  StrgerntS  t>on  ooen  ;  fatten  roir  e3  ja  atte  gefybrt. 

345.  (a)  The  "  pure  conjunctions  "  (and,  but,  or,  for,  §  326)  do  not  cause 
inversion.     They  will,  therefore,  usually  restore  the  normal  order  after  a 
preceding  inversion,  unless  the  cause  of  inversion  is  repeated.     Thus  :  £d 
fam  er  311  mir,  unb  id)  fragte  ifjrt  fogletd);  but  unb  fogleidj  fragte  id)  ifjn. 

(l>)  Conjunctive  words  belonging  to  the  subject  alone  will  not  cause  in- 
version ;  as,  3tud)  rrtein  SBruber  roar  sugegen.  And  sometimes  an  adverb  may 
be  allowed  to  stand,  parenthetically,  in  the  same  way  ;  as,  Srei(id)  (indeed)^ 
id)  farm  e3  ntdjt  fagen. 

346.  The  inverted  is  the  regular  order,  without  introductory  adjunct  : 

(a)  In  direct  questions,  unless  the  interrogative  word  is  subject;  as,  Sft 
ber  £>err  3U  £aufe?  28arm  rotrb  er  311  &aufe  fein?  But,  SSer  ift  ber  &err?  28er 
brirtgt  bie  S^adjrtdit  (normal}  ? 

(b)  In  imperative  and  optative  (wish)  sentences  ;  except,  sometimes,  in 
the  third  person  ;  as,  fe^en  toir  un§  ;  fd)trjetge  (bu)  ;  Irjd're  e3  bod)  Sag,  would 
it  were  day  ;  geoe  ©ott  or  65ott  gebe,  God  grant,  etc. 

(c)  Often  also  in  exclamation  (§  344,  d}  ;  as,  ift  bod)  ba§  Seoen  fdjroer  ! 

NOTE.  —  Yet  sometimes,  colloquially,  inversion  occurs  without  introductory  word  ;  as, 
fam  etn  ®tta6e,  for  e§  fam  (there)  came  ;  or,  rarely,  after  unb  ;  as,  e§  roar  ganj  ril^ifl  llltb 
riifjrte 


For  special  case  of  inversion  in  dependent  clause,  see  §  350,  2. 

3.    The  Transposed  Order. 

347.  The  transposed  order  (S.  A.  V.)  is  used  only  in  subordinate  or  de- 
pendent sentences  (clauses). 

NOTE.  —  The  transposed  order  can  therefore  occur  only  in  complex  sentences.  Yet 
sometimes,  a  dependent  clause  may  stand  alone,  the  principal  clause  being  implied  :  as, 
rcertlt  et  ttltr  fcalfo  fame,  if  he  -would  only  come  soon  !  (I  should  be  glad). 

348.  A  dependent  clause  stands  to  its  principal  clause  in  the  relation  of 
a  noun,  or  of  an  adjective,  or  of  an  adverb.     Hence  dependent  clauses  are 
called  noun  clauses,  adjective  clauses,  or  adverbial  clauses. 

(a)  A  dependent  noitn  clause  is  usually  introduced  by  the  conjunction 
bafc,  that;  as:  @r  fdjrteb  un3,  bafe  er  e§  tun  toiirbe;  —  or,  in  a  dependent 
question,  by  06,  whether,  if  ;  or  ft)0§,  what,  or  its  equivalent  (§  222).  As: 
28ir  fragten  ben  SSebtenten,  ob  fetn  £>err  311  £aufe  roa're  ;  id)  ftmfcte  nid)t,  toa§  er 
mir  fagen  tooKte.  (For  exception,  see  §  350,  i). 


I8O  LESSON    XXXVI.  [§  349 

(b)  A  dependent  adjective  (relative)  clause  is  introduced  by  a  relative 
pronoun  or  its  equivalent  (§  237).     Example :  S)o§  £ou§,  toefdjeS  bortge 
!Kad)t  ooge&ronnt  tft,  gefjbrte  einem  <5d)uf)mad)er ;  ofle§,  tooruber  id)  mid)  gefreut 
Ijatte,  tft  berloren. 

(c)  Dependent  adverbial  clauses  are  usually  introduced  by  subordinat- 
ing conjunctions  (§  332),  expressing  a  relation  of  time,  place,  cause,  man- 
ner, purpose,  condition  or  concession.     Example :  (£3  toor  nod)  Slog,  ol§  fair 
in  bent  ©aftfjofe  anfanten.    St&el  ttmr  cut  <Sd)ofer,  rooljrenb  $otn  ein  SlderSmonn 
tear.     (For  exception  see  §  350,  2.). 

NOTE.  — The  same  sentence  may  include  several  dependent  clauses.  For  the  effect  of 
a  dependent  clause  preceding  the  principal,  see  §  344,  b.  But  if  the  introductory  clause  is 
subject,  no  effect  is  produced  on  the  order  of  the  principal  sentence. 

349.  The  pure  conjunctions,  unb,  etc.  (§  345)  produce  no  effect  on  the 
dependent  construction.     Thus  a  series  of  connected  clauses,  dependent  on 
the  same  subordinating  word,  will  continue  the  transposed  order  to  the 
end  of  the  series,  each  dependent  verb  standing  at  the  end  of  its  own 
clause.    As:  (£in  otter  Sftonn,  ber  in  feiner  8"9enb  nod)  Stmertfa  reifte,  fid)  bort 
berfjetratete  unb  etne  grofee  Samilie  erjog,  tft  neulid)  Ijier  geftor&en. 

On  the  other  hand,  see  §  345,  a. 

II.    Special  Cases  in  Verb-Position. 

350.  The  following  special  cases  occur  in  dependent  clauses : 

1.  An  objective  noun  clause,  with  bofj,  Ma/,omitted  (as  often  in  English) 
is  construed  as  a  principal  sentence  ;  that  is  (a),  normal ;  as,  id)  glanbe,  er 
totrb  fialb  lommen  (for  bafe  er  fcalb  fommen  ftrirb) ;  ber  SBebiente  fagte,  fein  &err 
fet  nid)t  311  &aiife  ;  the  servant  said  (that)  his  master  was  not  at  home.     Or, 
(b)  inverted;  (as  §  344) :  er  fagte,  je|t  fet  fein  §err  nidjt  su  £aufe. 

2.  In   a   conditional   (adverb)   clause,  if   the   conjunction   toenn,  if,  is 
omitted,  the  order  will  be  inverted.     As  :  3ft  ber  §err  gn  $aufe,  fo  toerbe  id) 
ifjn  6alb  fefjen  (for  toenn  er  gu  §oufe  tft,  etc.).    SSaren  @ic  geftern  gelommen, 
fo  fatten  @ie  nn§  5n  £aufe  getroffen,  had  you  come  (for,  if  you  had  come),  etc. 
(§  470.) 

This  form  is  especially  usual  after  aI8,  for  aI8  toenn,  as  if.  As :  (£r  tot, 
ol§  toore  er  rjerriidt,  he  acted  as  if  he  were  crazy  (for :  olS  loenn  er  berriirft 
toore). 

NOTE.  —  But  in  the  adjective  clause,  the  connective  (relative")  is  never  omitted  (§  239). 

3.  The  transposed  verb  will  stand  before  other  verb-forms  :  — 

(a)  When  two  infinitives  stand  together,  the  auxiliary  verb  will  stand 
immediately  before  them,  the  governing  infinitive  last  (see  also  §  264). 
As:  33)  toeife,  *>afe  id)  e§  ntdjt  toerbe  tun  lonnen.  SSenn  er  eg  Ijatte  tun  Ibnncn, 


§  352]  HI.   ORDER    OF    WORDS    NOT    VERBS.  l8l 

fo  fjatte  er  e§  gent  getan,  if  he  could  have  done  it,  he  would  have  done  it 
gladly.    SBctttt  bit  ftrirft  betteln  gefjen  mu'jfen,  shall  have  to  go  a-begging. 

(b)  The  concurrence  of  toerben  in  two  different  auxiliary  uses  will  like- 
wise be  avoided.    As:   %<$  berfpredje,  baft  beine  <£d;itlben  toerben  beaafilt 
loerben  (for  fce^afjlt  toerben  toerben). 

(c)  Sometimes  also  a  transposed  auxiliary  will  be  inserted  before  two 
participles  or  a  participle  and  infinitive.     As :  3$  toctfc,  bafc  ntdjt  aHe  finb 
beftraft  toorben  (for  fceftraft  tuorben  finb).     <£obalb  id)  ttjit  toerbe  gefefien  fjaben. 

4.  Often  the  transposed  clause  ends  in  the  participle  of  a  compound 
tense,  the  auxiliary  being  omitted,  when  the  meaning  is  already  clear. 
As :  Sftadjbem  er  bie  Sttte  angeljort  (fjatte),  fagte  ber  ®bntg.  <So6aIb  er  in  ba§ 
Simmer  etngetreten  (tear),  fing  er  an  p  fpred)en.  SCB  ba§  ttrtetl  gefprod^en 
luorben  (tear). 

351.  The  following  cases  may  also  be  noticed :  — 

1.  When  the  sentence  consists  of  only  subject  and  verb,  the  normal 
order  (S.  V.  A.)  and  the  transposed  (S.  A.  V.),  will  be  identical  (S.  V.). 
In  this  case  the  construction  is  distinguished  only  by  the  connective,  or 
by  the  context.     As :  id)  fann  je|t  ntdjt  fptelen,  benn  (for)  id)  ar&ette  (nor- 
mal} ;  or,  toetl  (because)  id)  arfiette  (transposed}. 

2.  Certain  words  are  used  both  in  demonstrative  (independent)  and  rel- 
ative (dependent)  meaning;  such  as,  ber,  he  or   who;  bd,  there ;  then;  or 
when,  as  ;  tnbeffen,  meanwhile,  or  while,  etc.     In  such  cases  the  position 
of  the  verb  will  show  the  meaning.     As :  etn  2ftann  f)dtte  brei  <5of)ne,  bie 
(they)  Itefiten  U)n  gletd)  —  or,  bie  (them)  Itefcte  er  gletd) ;  but,  bie  (who)  t^n  gletd) 
He&ten  —  or,  bte  (whom)  er  gletdj  Itebte. 

3.  The  use  of  e§  as  introductory  subject  causes  inversion  of  the  true 
or  logical  subject;  as,  e3  ift  ntdjtS  befdjloffen;  e§  ^ogen  brei  Surfdjen  iiber  ben 
3£f)etn. 

But  without  e§,  unless  introductory  ;  as,  Befdjloffen  ift  nid)t§.    See  §  453. 
See  Synopsis  at  end  of  this  Lesson. 

III.  Order  of  Words  not  Verbs. 

NOTE.  —  The  arrangement  of  other  words  is  not,  generally,  so  rigidly  fixed  as  the  posi- 
tion of  the  verb,  and  is  more  largely  influenced  by  emphasis,  etc.  The  leading  rules  will 
here  be  given.  These  may  be  reserved  for  later  study,  or  for  reference. 

Adjuncts  of  the  Noun. 

352.  The  adjective  will  usually  precede  the  noun,  but  may  follow  for 
emphasis,  or  in  special  phrases.    Pronominal  precede  qualifying  adjectives ; 
as,  ber  gttte  greitnb ;  ber  greunb,  ber  gitte ;  Srtebrtd)  ber  ©rofje ;  ber  £elb,  ebel 
unb  treit  (see  Lesson  VIII.). 


l82  LESSON    XXXVI.  [§  353 

2.  Adjective  phrases  with  prepositions  follow  the  noun ;    as,  §ran!furt 
am  9Kain  ;  ba§  £>au§  auf  ber  £olje. 

3.  (a)  A  limiting  genitive  usually  follows  the  noun;  as,  ber  Sfrtfaitcj  be§ 
SriegeS ;  ba£  ©liicf  be§  2Renf$cn. 

(£)  But  a  personal  (subjective)  genitive  will  often  precede,  taking  the 
place  of  the  article:  be§  SSatetS  &au§ ;  <Sd)iHer3  SSerfe;  beg  Siingtingg 
©timme. 

(r)  This  usage  is  widely  extended  in  poetry,  or  elevated  prose,  to  geni- 
tives not  personal ;  as,  5ranlreid)§  drbe ;  in  ber  SC&enbtoollen  ©lut ;  be§ 
SReereS  SBatten  ;  ofjne  ber  kronen  2id)t.  (§430). 

Adjuncts  of  the  Adjective  (or  Participle). 

353.  An  adjective,  or  a  participle,  will  be  preceded  by  its  adjuncts :  — 

1.  An  adverb :  ein  fefjr  guter  SDlann  ;  an  object;  fet  mtr  gnabtg.     But  an 
object  with  preposition  may  follow;  as,  jet  nid)t  ftofe  auf  mid),  be  not  angry 
•with  me. 

2.  Other  dependent  words,  which,  in  English,  will  often  require  to  fol- 
low, or  to  be  expressed  by  an  adjective  (relative}  clause ;    as,  §riebrid)  ber 
(Srofce,  bon  feinem  SSotfe  ber  ,,2ttte  Srifc"  genannt ;  in  einem  bon  meinem  $8ater 
neitlid)  er^altenen  SBriefe,  in  a  letter  (which  has  been)  lately  received  by  my 
father ;  auf  eine  ber  (£f)re  etne§  ^urftett  tou'rbige  3Beife  ;   ein  u'&er  20  ^ufe  iiotjer 
SBaum.     This  construction  —  often  extended  to  great  length  —  requires 
particular  attention;  but  is  not  to  be  commended  for  imitation.    (See  §483.) 

Adjuncts  of  the  Verb. 

NOTE.  —  The  infinitives  and  participles  of  compound  tenses,  and  the  separable  prefixes, 
are,  strictly  speaking,  adjuncts  of  the  verb  ;  but  these  have  been  treated  elsewhere.  (§  341-2). 

1.  Objects. 

354.  i.  Pronoun  objects  precede  noun  objects;  as,  er  erga^lte  e§  feinem 
§reunbe ;  er  Ijat  mir  ein  33ud)  gegefcen. 

2.  The  cases  stand :  i.  dative;   2.  accusative;  3.  genitive.     But  if  the 
accusative  is  personal,  or  a  pronoun,  it  will  usually  precede  the  dative ;  as, 
idj  Ija&e  bent  $na6en  ein  33ud)  gelieljen  ;  ber  SSater  Ijat  ben  ©ofjn  einer  fdiroeren 
©u'nbe  6efd)nlbigt.     But:  tcir  miiffen  ben  SSftann  feinem  <5d)tdfale  u'&erlaffen  ;  cr 
Fjat  e§  mtr  gefagt.     Yet,  frequently,  the  contracted  mir'§,  Mr'S,  etc. 

3.  Objects  with  prepositions  follow  simple  objects;  as,  er  fdjirfte  feinen 
greunb  gu  nkr;  er  fdjriefc  mir  einen  SBrtef  u'fcer  feine  Dteife. 

4.  The  reflexive  fid)  usually  precedes  all  other  pronouns,  and  personals 
precede  demonstratives ;   as,  er  empftefylt  fid)  3^)nen  ;   er  Ijot  fid)  e§  flcfattcn 
laffen,  he  has  put  up  -with  it;  fagen  <5ie  mir  ba§  nid)t.     But  also  e§  fid)  (§  202,3). 


§  358]  HI.   ORDER    OF    WORDS    NOT    VERBS.  183 

5.  Especially^  in  inverted  or  transposed  order,  an  unemphatic  pronoun 
object  will  often  precede  the  subject,  unless  the  latter  is  a  personal  pro- 
noun; as,  baretdjte  ir)m  ber  grembe  Me  £>anb;  al3  ttjn  ber  SSater  faf),  toetnte  er 
bor  greube.  Rarely,  also,  a  noun;  as,  ubrtgenS  gerjort  ©ott  metne  <5eele; 
more  often,  an  adverb;  as,  ba  fpradj  enblid)  ber  SSater. 

9.  Adverbs. 

355     I.   Adverbs  will  stand :  i.  time;  2.  place;  3.  manner. 

2.  Adverbs  of  time  usually  precede  objects,  except  pronouns;  as,  er  fjdt 
mir  geftern  einen  Srief  gefcfjrie&en. 

3.  Adverbs  of  place  follow  simple  objects,  but  precede  objects  with 
prepositions;  as,  ftrir  fonnten  bo§  Sucfj  nirgenbS  im  §aufe  finben. 

4.  Adverbs  of  manner  usually  precede,  but  may  follow,  objects  with 
prepositions.  —  The  rules  for  adverbs  apply  generally  to  the  corresponding 
adverb  phrases;  but,  in  all  cases,  the  position  may  be  largely  influenced 
by  emphasis.     Frequently  also  an  adverb  phrase  stands  at  the  end  of  the 
sentence,  outside  of  the  regular  construction ;  that  is,  especially,  after  the 
dependent  verb  —  contrary  to  §  177,4. 

5.  Of  two  adverbs  of  like  kind,  the  more  general  usually  precedes  the 
more  specific;  as,  f)eute  friifj;  merger:  urn  10  Ufjr. 

6.  (For  adverbs  modifying  adjectives,  see  §  353.)     Generally,  an  adverb 
will  stand  just  before  any  word  (not  the  verb)  which  it  modifies;    as,  rtur 
ntein  SBruber  roar  gugegen ;  taunt  etne  (Stunbe  tear  bergangen.     (See  §  345  b). 

Prepositions  usually  precede  objects  (Exceptions  §  280,  and  Appendix). 

3.  Predicates. 

356.  A  noun  or  adjective  standing  as  predicate  (complement)  will  usu- 
ally follow  all  other  adjuncts;  as,  2ftorgen  toirb  toarjrfcfjeinlidj  toegen  ber  £od)= 
gett  eitt  §eiertag  fein ;  btet  3eit  roar  narf)  jjefjn  tUjr  md)t  ntetjr  iifirtg. 

357.  Words,  or  phrases,  which,  by  idiomatic  usage,  have  come  to  be  re- 
garded as  part   of   a  verb-phrase  (§  379)  —  including  also  predicate  or 
factitive  objects  —  will  take  the  same  position  as  a  predicate  complement. 
Such  are :  SRebe  fterjen,  to  answer;  feft  rjalten,  to  holdfast;  fterjen  bletben,  to 
stop*  511  SJttttag  effen,  to  dine,  etc.,  etc.;  as,  roir  ofjen  geftern  Bet  einem greunbe 
gu  SDtittag;  ba  er  ben  SSerbredjer  ntcfjt  feftljalten  tonnte,  fo  fcfjlug  er  ifyn  tot. 

4.  The  Infinitive. 

358.  i.  For  the  infinitive  in  compound  tenses,  see  §  341. 

2.  An  infinitive  without  gu,  dependent  on  the  verb,  stands  last  among 
Ihe  verb-adjuncts,  without  comma;  as,  id)  toitt  mid)  gerne  Fjter  MS  u&ermorgen 
;  id)  fage  SfjHen,  bajj  id)  mid)  fjier  6t3  iibermorgen  bertjalten  h?iH. 


184  LESSON  xxxvi.  [§  359 

3.  The  sanie  position  may  be  held  by  an  infinitive  with  511,  dependent 
on  a  verb  in  a  simple  tense;  as,  id)  roiinfdje  mtdj  f)ier  bi§  itbermorgen  311  ber= 
fjalten  ;   id)  fage  ^fjnen,  baft  id)  mid)  f)ier  b"  i§  iibermorgen  511  berrjatten  roiinfdje ; 
er  ftng  511  fingen  ait. 

4.  But  generally,  to  avoid  too  great  complexity  of  construction,  an 
infinitive  with  511,  especially  if  accompanied  by  adjuncts  of  its  own,  will 
be  treated  as  a  distinct  clause;  that  is,  it  will  stand  outside  of  the  limits 
of  the  principal  construction,  with  the  infinitive  at  the  end: 

(a)  After  the  non-personal  part  of  a  verb,  or  after  a  transposed  verb  : 
tlr  ftng  on,  511  fingen;  fogletd)  fing  er  an,  bon  feinem  UngliicEe  311  reben;  id)  fjabe 
lange  geroiinfd)tr  meinem  alien  g^unbe  etnen  SBefud)  311  macfjen;  id)  fage  !3>r;nen, 
bafj  id)  lange  geroiinfdjt  rjabe,  ^rjnen  etnen  SBefudj  3U  mad)en;  er  berjanptete, 
bafc  er  etne  Sftetfjobe  lefjre,  ®olb  311  madjen. 

(b)  Or  before  the  main  sentence,  which  it  will  then  invert  (§344,  b] ;  as, 
um  feinen  SSater  311  feFjen,  ift  ber  ©otjn  jcljn  2J?et(en  gegangen. 

5.  In  a  series  of  infinitives,  the  governing  one  regularly  stands  last, 
reversing  the  English  order.     As  :  3{jr  I)abt  mid)  ermorben  laffen  rootten,  you 
have  sought  to  have  me  murdered;  er  roirb  e§  ntd)t  tun  fonnen,  etc.     Yet  not 
always  if  more  than  two  infinitives:   2ftan  toirb  mid)  rootten  laitfen  laffen. 

IV.  Position  of  Dependent  Clauses. 

359.  (a)    For  the  same  reason  —  to  avoid  too  great  complexity  of  con- 
struction—  a  dependent  clause  will  often  be  thrown  outside  of  the  usual 
limits ;  as,  id)  gebe  freiroilltg  bie  2tn[priid)e  auf,  roeld)e  id)  auf  ba§  $8udj  rjabe ; 
id)  f)afje  ben  ^?rei§  angenommen,  toeld)en  ber  §err  mir  an&ot. 

(b)  Especially,  in  subordinate  sentences,  to  avoid  collision  of  dependent 
verbs ;   as,  er  roarf  ifjm  einen  Seutel  3U,  inbem  er  fid)  roegen  ber  geringen 
©umme  entfd)ulbigte,  bie  er  entfjielt. 

(c)  Also  in  comparison  —  elliptical :   (£r  ^at  mefjr  gefjler  gemad)t,  al§  id) 
(gemad)t  ^abe). 

360.  Generally,  it  may  be  remarked,  that  dependent  clauses  will  occupy 
their  natural  position,  logically ;  but  that  ambiguity,  or  excessive  involu- 
tion of  structure,  must  always  be  avoided.     This,  however,  is  in  large  de- 
gree prevented  by  the  free  use  of  the  comma  (§  67),  as  well  as  by  the 
distinctive  position  of  the  verb.     Thus  German  can  often  sustain  periods 
which  would  be  intolerable  in  English  —  a  power  which,,  however,  may  be 
abused. 

It  may  also  be  noted  that  modern  German  is  marked  by  an  increasing 


§  36°]  SYNOPSIS    OF    VERB-POSITION.  185 

freedom  of  word-order  and,  in  general,  by  a  tendency  to  simpler  forms  of 
construction. 

REMARK.  —  The  foregoing  rules  of  position  are  naturally  subject  to  ex* 
ceptions,  depending  on  emphasis,  euphony,  or  individual  style,  and  especi 
ally  in  poetry,  with  the  freedom  of  poetic  license.  Still,  the  fundamental 
rules  should  be  thoroughly  mastered  and  strictly  observed  by  the  student 
who  should  be  required,  whenever  possible,  to  account  for  exceptions,, 
real  or  apparent.  Once  mastered,  they  become  the  key  to  almost  ali 
difficulties  of  construction. 

NOTE.  —  No  special  Exercises  are  here  added,  because  every  German  sentence  is  an 
exercise  in  the  order  of  words. 


Synopsis  of  Verb-Position. 

The  following  condensed  view   may  be  helpful   in  remembering   the 
chief  rules  of  verb-position  : 

PRINCIPAL   SENTENCES. 

When          introduced  bv  subject  — Normal. 

"      not  "  "         "  —Inverted. 

DEPENDENT  CLAUSES. 
When  introduced  by  subordinating  word  —  Transposed. 


Special  Cases. 

PRINCIPAL   SENTENCES. 
Interrogative,  Imperative,  Optative  sentences  —  Inverted. 

DEPENDENT  CLAUSES. 

Noun  clause  —  bafc  (that}  omitted  —Normal. 

Conditional       "       —  toetttt  (if)       "  —Inverted* 

The  verb  precedes  two  infinitives. 

NOTE.  — The  "  pure  conjunctions  "  (and,  but,  or,  for}  are  not  included. 
See  also  Note  at  end  of  the  Appendix,  p.  378. 

It  is  presumed  that  at  this  point  —  or  even  earlier  —  the  pupil  has 
begun  the  reading  of  an  easy  German  text,  outside  of  the  grammar. 
In  the  following  Lessons,  therefore,  the  German-English  Exercises  will 
be  omitted. 


PART  IL 


DERIVATION  AND  COMPOSITION. 

INTRODUCTORY  REMARK.  —  The  German  vocabulary  is  much  more 
homogeneous  than  the  English .  The  introduction  of  foreign  elements 
—  mainly  French  and  Latin  —  from  an  early  date,  into  the  English 
language  has  not  only  added  a  large  admixture  of  words  not  native  in 
origin,  but,  by  supplying  foreign  terms  ready  made,  it  arrested  the 
development  of  the  native  speech.  Hence  the  processes  of  derivation 
and  composition,  from  native  roots,  have  been  much  more  largely  ex- 
tended in  German  than  in  English.  These  processes  are,  therefore, 
in  German  of  much  greater  practical  importance  for  the  acquisition 
of  a  vocabulary,  and  for  the  exposition  of  the  relation  and  meaning  of 
words.  A  brief  sketch  of  the  most  important  classes  of  derivatives 
and  compounds  will  be  given  in  the  following  Lessons. 

NOTE.  —  Foreign  words  of  course  exist  largely  in  German  also;  but  there  they 
are  distinctly  marked,  while  in  English  they  are  fully  assimilated.  In  this  respect, 
on  the  other  hand,  the  English  vocabulary  is  more  homogeneous  than  the  German. 


LESSON  XXXVIL 
Derivation  of  Verbs. 

361.  Most  verbs  of  the  strong  conjugation,  and  many 
weak  verbs   of   monosyllabic  roots,   are  primitive  verbs. 
There  are  many  others,  obviously  derivative,  in  which  the 
origin  and  the  process  of  derivation  are  unknown. 

Almost  all  derivative  verbs  are  weak.     (See  §  199.) 

362.  (# )  An  important  class  of  verbs  are  derived  from  other 
verbs  by  modification  or  change  of  root-vowel.    The  primitive 
is  usually  strong  and  intransitive;*  the  derivative  is  weak  and 

*  See  List  of  Irregular  Verbs. 
186 


§  364]  DERIVATION    OF    VERBS.  187 

transitive.     These  are  known  as  causative  verbs ;  as  also  in 
English,  to  fell  from  to  fall;  to  set  from  to  sit,  etc.     As  :  — 

STRONG.  WEAK. 

foljren,  to  go,  drive.  fiifjren,  to  guide,  drive. 

-fatten,  to  fall.  fatten,  to  fell. 

Itegen,  to  lie.  legen,  to  lay. 

ftfcen,  to  sit.  fe&en,  to  seat,  set. 

fpringen,  to  spring.  fprengen,  to  burst,  blow  up. 

trtltfen,  to  drink.  tranfen,  to  drench,  make  drink. 

(£)  In  some  cases  there  is  no  change  of  root-vowel,  but 
only  a  change  from  strong  to  weak  inflection  ;  as  :  — 

STRONG.  WEAK. 

fdltoetten,  to  swell.  fdjtoetten,  to  puff  up. 

erlbfdjen,  to  go  out.  auSlofdjen,  to  put  out  (lights), 

erfdjrecfen,  to  be  frightened.  erfdjrecfen,  to  frighten. 

(c)  Sometimes  other  variations  of  meaning  are  marked  by 
the  change  from  strong  to  weak  inflection  ;  as  :  — 

STRONG.  WEAK. 

Betoegen,  to  move  (figuratively),  induce.  Betoegen,  to  move  (literally), 
fdjaffen,  to  create.  fdjaffen,  to  do. 

363.  Some  verbs  are  derived  from  other  verbs  by  hardening 
or  strengthening  the  final  consonant  of  the  root,  usually  with 
intensive  meaning :  — 

Biegen,  (strong),  to  bend.  (fid))  Bu'rfen,  to  bow,  stoop  down. 

f)bren,  to  hear.  fjorrfjen,  to  listen,  hearken. 

fdjnarren,  to  creak,  snarl.  fdjnardjen,  to  snore. 

fcfjtoingen  (str.),  to  swing.  fcijtoenfen,  to  wave. 

364.  The  verbal  suffixes  -etrt  and  -ern  frequently  convey  the 
sense  of  diminution  or  contempt — sometimes  of  repetition:  — 

Happen,  to  flap.  tlappern,  to  rattle. 

Htngen  (str.),  to  sound,  ring.  Hingeln,  to  ring  the  bell. 

ladjen,  to  laugh.  la'djeln,  to  smile. 

fdjlafen  (str.),  to  sleep.  fdjlafern,  to  feel  drowsy. 

NOTE.  —  In   both   the   preceding  cases,  there  is  also,  usually,  vowel 
modification  or  change. 


i88  LESSON  xxxvu.  [§  365 

365.  Verbs  in  -ieren   (-tren)   are  properly  derivatives  of 
French  verbs  in  -er  and  -/>.    They  retain  their  foreign  accent, 
and  omit  ge-  in  the  perfect  participle.    (See  §  215,  a.)   As:- 

faHierert,  to  fail.  regteren,  to  reign. 

wtarfdfiierett,  to  march.  ftubteren,  to  study. 

and,  by  analogy  with  these,  from  German  stems,  bucf)ftabteren, 
to  spell ;  ftoljteren,  fjantterert,  etc. 

366.  Many  verbs  are  derived  from  nouns,  with  or  without 
root-vowel  modification  :  — 

bd§  SUter,  the  age.  altertt,  to  grow  old,  age. 

Me  garoe,  the  color.  farfcen,  to  dye. 

berSpffag,  the  plough.  Pflugen,  to  plough. 

ber  ©attel,  the  saddle.  fatteltt,  to  saddle. 

ba§  ©tegel,  the  seal.  ftefleltt,  berftegeln,  to  seal. 

ber  SEroft,  the  comfort.  trbftett,  to  comfort. 

367.  Other  verbs  are  derived  from  adjectives,  usually  with 
root-vowel  modification :  — 

tot,  red.  tbten,  to  redden. 

ftarf,  strong.  ftarfen,  to  strengthen. 

tot,  dead.  tb'ten,  to  kill. 

toiirbig,  worthy.  toiirbtgett,  to  hold  worthy. 

rein(tg),  clean.  retnigen,  to  clean. 

frontm,  pious.  frbmmeln,  to  affect  piety  (§  364). 

(a)  Or,  with  loss  of  e,  from  adjectives  in  -en  ;  as :  — 

offen,  open.  b'ffnen,  to  open. 

trocfen,  dry.  trocfnen,  to  dry. 

(b)  And  from  comparatives  ;  as  :  — 

x    tntnber,  less.  imnbern,  to  lessen. 

ncifjet,  nearer.  naljeTn,  to  bring  nearer. 

368.  A  few  verbs  are  derived  from  adverbs  ;  as  :  — 

aufjer,  outside.  aitfjern,  to  utter. 

empor,  up.  empbren,  to  arouse. 

All  these  classes  of  derivative  verbs  are  weak. 


§  3^8]  DERIVATION    OF    VERBS.  189 

REMARK.  —  As  is  seen  from  the  foregoing  examples,  the 
modification  of  the  root-vowel  (Umlaut),  though  by  no  means 
constant,  is  a  common  process  in  derivation.  As  a  rule,  it 
may  be  stated  that  the  modified  vowels  do  not  occur  in  primi- 
tive roots,  but  arise  by  the  processes  of  derivation  or  of  in- 
flection. Hence,  in  dealing  with  derivatives  that  present  a 
modified  vowel,  the  Umlaut  must  be  eliminated  to  find  the 
root.  See  examples  in  foregoing  lists  and  hereafter. 

EXERCISE  XXXVII. 

i.  Who  has  put-out  the  light  ?  2.  No  one  has  put-out  the 
light;  it  has  gone-out.  3.  The  woodman  has  felled  this  tree. 
4.  A  child  has  (is)  fallen  into  the  river.  5.  My  dictionary 
lies  on  the  table.  6.  The  boy  jumped  over  the  ditch.  7.  The 
old  tower  was  blown  up.  8.  She  has  sealed  the  letter.  9.  He 
rang— the— bell  several  times.  10.  We  will  seat  ourselves 
upon  this  bench,  n.  The  old  man  sat  on  this  chair.  12. 
The  sinking  sun  reddened  the  clouds.  13.  The  king  held- 
him- worthy  of  the  highest  honors.  14.  The  peasant  ploughed 
the  field.  15.  The  autumn  dyes  the  leaves  yellow.  16.  He 
has  aged  very  much.  17.  A  strong  man  can  easily  walk  him- 
self tired  in  a  ploughed  field.  18.  He  stooped -down  and 
picked -up  the  key.  19.  The  tailor  has  cleaned  and  dried  the 
clothes.  20.  (The)  Queen  Victoria  had  already  reigned  fifty 
years.  21.  The  smiling  girl  rang  the  bell,  and  opened  the 
door.  22.  His  strong  faith  in  (§11)  God  comforted  and 
strengthened  his  last  hours.  23.  The  children  listened  and 
smiled,  while  the  father  snored  aloud.  24.  The  noble  senti- 
ment which  the  king  then  uttered  has  not  lessened  the  devo- 
tion of  his  faithful  people. 


LESSON   XXXVIII.  [§  369 


LESSON  XXXVIIL 

Composition  of  Verbs.  —  Inseparable. 

Compound  verbs  have  been  already  considered,  so  far  as 
was  necessary  to  explain  peculiarities  of  conjugation.  (Less. 
XXVIII.,  etc.).  Their  number  is  almost  unlimited. 

369.  Very  important  is  the  large  number  of  verbs  com- 
pounded with  the  inseparable  prefixes  be-,  ertt-  (emp-),  er-, 
ge_f  bet-,  get-.     These  prefixes,  though  once  probably  inde- 
pendent words,  now  occur   only  in    composition.     They 
modify  variously  the  meaning  of  the  primitive. 

NOTE.  —  Strictly  speaking,  these  prefixes,  being  always  unaccented 
and  having  now  no  independent  existence,  form  rather  derivatives  than 
compounds.  But,  in  accordance  with  usage,  the  verbs  formed  with  them 
from  verbs  are  given  as  compounds;  those  formed  from  other  than  verb- 
roots  as  derivatives.  As  will  be  seen  hereafter,  they  are  largely  used  also 
in  forming  other  derivatives  besides  verbs. 

370.  (&)  3Be—  (related  to  bei  and  to  the  English  be-t  as  :  to 
take,  to  betake;  to  wail,  to  bewail)  changes  an  intransitive  into 
a  transitive  verb.     Prefixed  to  a  transitive  verb,  it  gives  to  it 
a  direction  towards  another  object.     Sometimes  it  is  only  in* 
tensive.     Examples  :  — 

Bcwen,  to  build.  Sefiauen,  to  build  upon,  to  cultivate. 

grafcen,  to  dig.  fiegraben,  to  bury. 

greifen,  to  seize.  fiegretfen,  to  comprehend. 

Ijalten,  to  hold.  beljalten,  to  keep. 

frfireiben,  to  write.  fcefdjreifcen,  to  describe. 

fi&en,  to  sit.  beftjjen,  to  possess. 

(b)  93e-  is  also  used  for  deriving  verbs  from  nouns  and 
adjectives,  generally  with  active  sense  :  — 


,  the  friend.  fcefreitnbeit,  to  befriend. 

ber  ©etft,  the  spirit.  fiegetftern,  to  inspire. 


§  372]      COMPOSITION  OF  VERBS. INSEPARABLE. 

\\t\,free.  befreien,  to  liberate. 

fanft,  gentle.  befanfttgen,  to  appease. 

taub,  deaf.  betauben,  to  deafen. 

371.  (#)  (£nt-  (related  to  ant-  in  2lnttt)ort)  chiefly  denotes 
privation  or  separation:  — 

laffen,  to  let.  entlajfen,  to  dismiss. 

laufen,  to  run.  entlaufen,  to  escape. 

ijteljen,  to  draw.  ent^teljen,  to  withdraw. 

(£)   And  sometimes  origin  or  beginning,  as:  — 

brennen,  to  burn.  entbrennen,  to  take  fire. 

ftefyen,  to  stand.  entftetyen,  to  originate. 

(c)  (£ttt—  is  also  used  in  forming  derivative  verbs,  as: — 

Me  $raft,  the  strength.  entfraften,  to  weaken. 

Me  ©djulb,  the  guilt.  entfdjulMgen,  to  excuse. 

ba§  SSoIf,  the  people.  entbblfern,  to  depopulate. 

NOTE.  —  The  primitive  sense  of  ent-  (ant-)  is  clearly  seen  in  a  few 
verbs,  as  entgelten,  to  pay  back,  entfprerf)en,  to  correspond.  In  some  adverbs, 
ent  is  from  in ;  as,  entgegen,  against,  entatoet,  in  two. 

(d)  Before  f,  — nt  is  assimilated  to  — mp  in  the  three  verbs: 
empfefjten,  to  recommend;  empfangen,  to  receive;  empfhtben,  to 
feel. 

372.  (0)  @r-   (related  to  the  prefix  ur-  [§  387,  4]  and 
probably  to  the  preposition  au§)  generally  expresses  accomp- 
lishment or  acquisition  by  means  of  the  action  expressed  by 
the  simple  verb  ;  or  growing,  passing  into  a  condition  :  — 

fatten,  to  hold.  erljjalten,  to  obtain,  receive. 

jagen,  to  hunt.  erjcigen,  to  obtain  by  hunting. 

toufeit,  to  buy.  erfaufen,  to  obtain  by  purchase. 

toarfjfen,  to  grow.  ertoadjfen,  to  grow  up. 

(b)   And  in  derivative  verbs,  as:  — 

frtfd),  fresh.  erfrifdjen,  to  refresh. 

flor,  dear.  erfla'ren,  to  explain. 

rot,  red.  errbten,  to  blush. 

toeiter,  wider.  ertoeitern,  to  extend. 


192  LESSON    XXXVIII.  [§  372 

373-  00  %$W~t  originally  the  same  as  fcor-  (English  for- 
in  forgive,  for(e)go,  etc.),  denotes  removal,  turning  away; 
often  with  the  idea  of  perversion  or  loss;  sometimes  only  the 
accomplishment  of  an  action  or  result:  — 

fcieten,  to  bid.  berbteten,  to  forbid. 

blu'fyen,  to  bloom.  berbliifjen,  to  fade. 

brennen,  to  burn.  berbrennen,  to  burn  up. 

fu'fjren,  to  guide.  berfiifjren,  to  lead  astray,  seduce. 

fennen,  to  know.  berfennen,  to  mistake. 

fpielen,  to  play.  berjpielen,  to  lose  by  playing* 

(b)   And  in  derivatives,  as:  — 

bag  ©olb,  the  gold.  bergolben,  to  gild. 

ber  (Stein,  the  stone.  berfteinern,  to  petrify. 

alt,  old.  beraften,  to  become  antiquated, 

\nnQf_young:  berjitngen,  to  make  young. 

grbfjer,  greater.  bergrbfeern,  to  enlarge. 

fd)oner,  more  beautiful.  berfctjbnern,  to  embellish. 

374.   (a)  3er~  expresses  destruction,  dissolution:  — 

bredjen,  to  break.  3erbred)en,  to  break  to  pieces. 

fatten,  to  fall.  3erf  alien,  to  crumble  to  pieces. 

retfeen,  to  tear.  Serreifeen,  to  tear  to  pieces. 

treten,  to  tread.  3ertreten,  to  crush,  to  trample. 

(b)   And  in  a  few  derivatives;  as: —  • 

ba§  fyxtifa,  flesh.  jerfletfdjen,  to  lacerate. 

bie  ©Iteber,  the  limbs.  ^ergliebern,  to  dismember. 

375-  (a)  ^e~~  (probably  the  same  prefix  as  the  augment 
used  with  the  past  participle,  but  of  doubtful  origin),  has  in 
some  cases  no  perceptible  influence  on  the  meaning  of  a  verb; 
as,  brcmcfyen  or  gebrau(J)en,  to  use.  But  in  other  cases  various 
meanings,  mostly  intensive ;  as  :  — 

benfen,  to  think.  gebenfen,  to  remember. 

fatten,  to  fall.  gefatten,  to  please. 

Jjoren,  to  hear.  gepren,  to  belong. 

Jjordjen,  to  listen.  0el)orcl)en,  to  obey. 


§  376J       COMPOSITION    OF    VERBS.  -  INSEPARABLE.         193 


,  to  praise.  gelofcen,  to  promise. 

ftefjen,  to  stand.  geftefjen,  to  confess.  See  §  278,  note. 

(b)  Many  participial  adjectives  are  derived  by  means  of 

the  prefix  ge-  from  nouns  without  corresponding  verb  (as  Eng. 
gifted,  etc.): 

Me  S3  fame,  the  flower.  ge&liimt,  flowery. 

bie  Seber,  the  feather.  geftebert,  feathered. 

ber  Sh'igef,  the  wing.  geflugelt,  winged. 

bet  ©tern,  the  star.  geftirnt,  starry. 


376.  TOfc-  (§  288,  b.}  has  the  same  force  as  the  English 
prefix  mis;  gliicren,  to  succeed;  miBcjtucien,  to  succeed  ill;  braitdjen, 
to  use;  miftbraudjen,  to  abuse,  misuse. 

REMARK.  —  i.  In  some  cases  the  compounds  are  in  use, 
where  the  primitives  do  not  occur  ;  as  :  — 

-Mren.  geMren,  to  bear  (a  child}. 

-fefjlen.  empfefyfen,  to  recommend. 

4fr.  -ginnen.  beginnen,  to  begin. 

-geffen.  bergefjen,  to  forget. 

-fiiren,  rare.  erliiren,  to  choose. 

-lieren.  berlteren,  to  lose. 

-lingen.  gelingen,  to  succeed. 

mifeltngen,  to  fail. 

—  and  some  others.  See  alphabetical  list. 

2.  These  prefixes  are  widely  used  with  all  kinds  of  verbs, 
but  especially  with  the  primitive  roots  of  the  strong  conjuga- 
tion. A  great  variety  of  compounds  are  thus  often  formed 
from  a  single  verb,  with  widely  various  meanings;  as:  — 

©djen,  to  go;  fcegefjen,  to  celebrate;  entgefjen,  to  escape;  ergefjen,  to  hap- 
pen; jtcf)  ergefjen,  to  move  about  for  pleasure  ;  bergefyen,  to  pass  away;  #er= 
gefjen,  to  pass  away  entirely,  to  melt. 

©rfjlagen,  to  strike;  6ejd)Iagen,  to  fasten  on  by  striking,  to  stud,  to  shoe  a 
horse;  fid)  ciner  <£arfje  entfd)(agen,  to  cast  off  a  matter;  erfdjlagen,  to  slay; 
fcerfdjlagen,  to  drive  out  of  one  's  course  ;  ^erfdjtagen,  to  knock  to  pieces. 

©teljen,  to  stand  ;  befteljen,  to  persist,  insist;  entftefyen,  to  arise,  to  come 
into  existence  ;  erftefyen,  to  arise,  to  buy  at  an  auction;  berftetjen,  to  under* 
stand  ;  gefteljcn,'  to  confess. 


194  LESSON  xxxvin.  [§  376 

Other  examples  are :  — 

6ejef)en,  to  inspect.  entfpredjett,  to  answer  (dat.)- 

betrogen,  to  amount  to.  entnetjmert,  to  infer. 

ftrf)  betragen,  to  behave.  fid)  ergeben,  to  surrender. 

fief)  benefimeti,  to  conduct  one's  self,  erlaffen,  to  remit. 

befprerfjen,  to  talk  of.  bergeben,  to  forgive  (dat.). 

etttfrf)eiben,  to  decide.  ftcl)  berlaufen,  to  lose  one's  way. 
fid)  bertragen,  to  agree. 

EXERCISE  XXXVIII. 

i.  I  have  lost  my  way.  2.  We  have  inspected  the  new 
church.  3.  They  have  ascended  the  highest  mountains  of 
Switzerland.  4.  The  town  surrendered  to  the  enemy.  5.  All 
good  children,  who  agree  with  each  -  other,  and  conduct  them- 
selves well,  shall  have  (betomnten)  a  reward.  6.  The  bill 
amounts-to  twenty  francs.  7.  The  thief  has  (is)  escaped.  8. 
They  behaved  themselves  quietly.  9.  We  shall  decide  the 
matter  before  we  part.  10.  He  has  lost  his  money  in  playing. 
1 1.  The  wicked  boy  has  torn  his  book  to  pieces.  1 2.  The  teacher 
has  pardoned  the  naughty  boy,  and  remitted  the  punishment. 
13.  The  drunken  porter  did  not  agree  with  the  other  servants, 
and  he  was  dismissed  from  (au§  bem)  service.  14.  I  shall 
keep  these  flowers  until  they  fade.  15.  The  old  castle  has  (is) 
crumbled  to  pieces.  16.  We  were  as  if  (ttne)  petrified.  17.  A 
glass  of  water  suffices  to  refresh  me.  18.  He  spoke  winged 
words.  19.  This  promising  writer  has  not  answered  our  ex- 
pectations. 20.  He  has  talked -of  things  that  no  one  can 
understand.  21.  I  infer  from  (dll3)  your  letter  that  your  ship 
was  driven  upon  a  deserted  island.  22.  We  can  seize  with  the 
hand  many  things  which  we  cannot  comprehend.  23.  The 
old  soldier  showed  his  torn  clothes  and  his  lacerated  limbs. 
24.  That  (S)a§)  is  the  curse  of  (the)  kings,  that  they,  divided, 
tear  the  world  to  pieces. 


§  378J        COMPOSITION    OF    VERBS.  —  SEPARABLE.  195 


LESSON  XXXIX. 
Composition  of  Verbs.— Continued. 

SEPARABLE   COMPOUNDS. 

377.  The  separable  prefixes  (Lesson  XXIX)  form  loose 
compounds,    which    have    no    exact    analogy    in    English. 
They  are,  also,  practically  unlimited  in  number. 

(a)  In  the  separable  compounds  the  meaning  of  the  prefix 
is  often  clearly  seen  in  the  compound;  as,  aufftefyen,  to  stand  up, 
rise;  ehllaffen,  to  let  in,  admit;  abtoenben,  to  turn  away,  avert; 
mitgefyen,  to  go  with,  or  along,  etc. 

(b)  In  many  cases,  however,  the  meaning  is  not  so  obvious, 
the  compound  having  often  acquired  a  distinct  secondary  or 
figurative  use ;  as,  auff  alien,  to  strike  {the  attention);  etnfatten, 
to  occur  (to  the  mind);  mittetlen,  to  communicate ;  borgefyen,  to 
happen;  jubrtngen,  to  pass  {time);  au§5tef)enf  to  pull  off  {cloth- 
ing);  fid)  CW§5tef)en,  to  undress,  etc. 

(c)  In  many  such  cases,  the  literal  meaning  will  be  expressed 
by  the  prefixes  compounded  with  fi.er,  hither;  fytn,  thither;  as, 
Ijercm^iefyen,  to  draw  out;  In'netnfatten,  to  fall  into;  Jjerborgefjen, 
to  go  forth,  etc.   (§  289.) 

378.  For  the  different  sense  of  certain  prefixes  as  separable 
and  as  inseparable,  see  §§  287 — 8. 

REMARK. — The  so-called  separable  prefixes  are  usually  adverbs  (§447, 
«)  which,  by  habit  of,  use,  have  come  to  be  written  in  one  word  with  those 
verb-forms  that  usually  stand  last  — •  the  infinitive,  thjs  participles,  and  the 
transposed  verb ;  and  which  elsewhere  occupy  the  emphatic  position  of  a 
verb-modifier  at  the  end.  As  the  verb  is  named  from  its  infinitive,  they 
are  habitually  called  prefixes  ;  and  hence  the  terms  separable  prefixes, 
separable  compounds,  etc.  The  intimate  relation  to  the  verb  is  shown  by 
the  accent  —  which  is,  moreover,  always  retained  by  the  prefix,  even  when 
separated. 


196  LESSON    XXXIX.  [§  379 

Special  Forms. 

'  i.  SEPARABLE. 

379-  (a)  After  the  analogy  of  the  separable  compounds  are 
formed  many  verbs  compounded  with  nouns  or  adjectives;  as: 
Ijcmgfjatten,  to  keep  house;  tetlrtefjmen,  to  participate,  to  sympa- 
thize; ftattfinben,  to  take  place;  fretfprecfyen,  to  acquit;  gletcfyfom* 
men,  to  equal. 

(b)  These  follow  in  all  respects  the   accent,  conjugation, 
and  construction  of  the  separable  compounds;  as,  participle: 
ftattgefurtben,  freigefprocfyert ;  infin. :  ftattjuftrtben,  frei^ufprectyen ; 
or  with  prefix  at  end,  as :  ber  S^icfyter  jprad)  tf)ti  bort  aller  ®d)ulb 
fret;  bte  SSerlorjung  finbet  morgert  ftatt,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  These  were  formerly  written  as  separate  words:  ©tatt  firtben, 
£eil  nefjmen  (and  still  sometimes  so,  though  without  capitals).  Other  simi- 
lar verb-phrases  are  still  written  separately,  and  with  capitals;  as,  3xebe 
ftetjen,  to  answer,  gu  2ftittag  effen,  to  dine,  etc.  See  §  357. 

(c)  Many    participial    adjectives,    without    corresponding 
verbs,  are  formed  on    this   principle.     Thus:    frtebebrtrtgeitb, 
bringing  peace;  f)al§fjred)enb,  neckbreaking;  aUttnfjenb,  all-know- 
ing; i)0(i)geel)rtf  highly  honored;  blutbefMt,  stained  with  blood. 

These  are  called  incomplete  compounds. 

* 

2.  INSEPARABLE. 

380.  (0)  With  these  compounds  must  not  be  confounded 
the  small  number  of  verbs  derived  from  compound  nouns,  such 
as:  friif|ftuc!en,  to  breakfast;  ratfdjlagen,  to  deliberate ;  argmofjnen, 
to  suspect;  fyanbfjabert,  to  handle;  roettetfern,  to  emulate;  which 
are  derived  from  ba§  gru^ftiicf,  the  breakfast;  ber  9?atfd)(ag, 
the  advice;  ber  2lrgtt)of)n,  the  suspicion;  bte  §anbf)at)e,  the  handle; 
ber  SBettetfer,  emulation;  etc.  These  are  conjugated  and  con- 
strued like  simple  verbs;  as,  p.  p.  gefriiljftiicft ;  infin.,  511  fvii^ 
ftiirfen. 


§381]  VERB-COMPOUNDS. SPECIAL    FORMS.  197 

(b)  Like  these  are  a  few  verb-compounds,  which  are  also 
treated  as  simple  verbs  ;  as:  it)et£>fagen,  to  prophesy;  luftttmnbeln, 
to  walk  for  pleasure;  recfytfertigen,  to  justify ;  ttriUfaijren,  to  corn- 
fly;  liebfofen,  to  caress;  as,  p.  p.  geltebfoft;  infin.,  511  Itebfofen, 
etc. 

NOTE.  —  These  however,  like  the  preceding  class,  are  more  properly 
derivatives  than  compounds.  They  are  all  weak,  even  when  formed  from 
strong  verbs  ;  fianbhabte,  ratfrfjfagte,  Unttfafyrte,  etc.  And  in  both  classes  the 
principal  accent  is  usually  on  the  first  component. 

3.   MIXED  COMPOUNDS. 

381.  (&)  A  few  inseparable  compounds  take  also  a  separable 
prefix;  as,  cmcrtennen,  to  acknowledge;  id)  er!enne  an  ;  an^uer^ 
fennen ;  but  anerfannt,  without  ge-,  in  participle.  (See  §  289,2.) 

(b)  A  few  verbs  which  seem  to  take  an  inseparable  before 
a  separable  prefix  are  derivatives,  as  in  §  380  above  ;  as,  ber* 
abfdjeuen,  from  the  noun  2lbfdjeit,  etc. 

EXERCISE  XXXIX. 

i.  The  accused  was  acquitted  and  immediately  liberated. 
2.  He  was  accused  of  having  (to  have*}  stolen  a  watch.  3. 
Waiter,  bring  [some]  tea,  bread  and  butter,  and  two  eggs ;  I 
wish  to  breakfast.  4.  We  shall  go  into  the  garden  ;  will  you  go 
with  [us]  ?  5.  Where  is  the  book  which  I  brought  with  [me] 
yesterday  from  the  library  ?  6.  Your  brother  took  it  with 
[him].  7.  Your  trousers  are  torn  ;  the  tailor  must  mend  them. 
8.  I  shall  tell  the  tailor  to  measure  me  for  (mir  an^itmeffen)  a 
new  pair.  9.  What  o'clock  is  it  ?  10.  My  watch  is  not  wound 
up;  I  have  forgotten  to  wind  it  up.  u.  The  thief  has  run 
away.  12.  Had  I  not  foretold  it  ?  13.  We  have  spent  a  large 
sum;  I  acknowledge  our  improvidence.  14.  He  has  invited 
us  to  dinner.  15.  The  messenger  brought  the  letter  back. 
1 6.  At  what  time  does  the  concert  begin?  17.  It  begins  at 
eight  o'clock.  18.  Porter,  carry  my  portmanteau  up.  19.  He 
shall  carry  it  up  immediately.  20.  As  (ba)  it  did  not  occur  to 


198  LESSON    XL.  [§  382 

him  how  near  to  the  edge  of  the  stream  he  was,  (fo)  he  sud^ 
denly  fell  in.-  21.  The  parade  will  take  place  at  10  o'clock; 
we  thought  it  had  (sub/.)  already  taken  place.  22.  Please 
(2Mtte)  shut  the  door  and  open  the  windows.  23.  This  writer 
has  translated  the  greatest  part  of  Schiller's  works.  24.  He 
undressed  himself  hastily,  sprang  into  the  water,  and  drew  the 
sinking  boy  out  (!jerau§). 


LESSON  XL. 

Derivation  of  nouns. 

NOUNS  DERIVED  FROM  VERBS.  —  i.  WITHOUT  SUFFIX. 

382.  Some   nouns   are    simply  .the    stems   of  verbs  — 
usually  of  strong  verbs  —  sometimes  an  earlier  form  of 
such  stems.     Such  nouns  are  nearly  all  masculine  :  — 

ber  gatt  (fatten),  the  fall.  ber  (Srfjetn  (fajeinen),  the  semblance. 

ber  (bang  (ge$en),  the  walk,  gait.  ber  ©djlag  (fdjlagen),  the  blow. 

ba§  ©rab  (graben),  the  grave.  ber  <5i£  (fi&en),  the  seat. 

ber  Sauf  (laufen),  the  course,  run.  ber  ©tanb  (ftefjen),  the  position. 

ber  3tot  (raten),  the  advice.  ber  ©trcit  (ftreiten),  the  contest. 

ber  Shtf  (ritfcn),  the  call,  reputation.  ba§  Opfer  (opfern),  the  sacrifice. 

383.  Many   nouns    are   related   to    strong  verbs    by  a 
change  of  root-vowel  (2(&Iaut)  —  sometimes  also  by  modi- 
fication of  the  final  consonant  of  the  root.      In  some  cases 
more  than  one  such  noun  is  formed  from  the  same  root. 
Such  nouns  are  also  usually  masculine  :  — 

ber  SBanb  (Mnben),  the  volume.  ber  ©taub  (fttefcen),  the  dust. 

ba§  SBanb  (Mnben),  the  ribbon.  ber  Sranf,  ber  £run!  (trinfen),  the  drink. 

ber  SBunb  (fitnben),  the  union.  ber  £rttt  (treten),  the  step. 

ber  $lang  (flingen),  the  sound.  ber  Xropf  (triefen),  the  drop. 

ber  <£>rf)uf5  (fdjtejjen),  the  shot.  ber  SKucf)§  (toaa^fcn),  the  growth. 

(fpred)en),  the  saying.  ber  dug  (jielien),  the  draft,  train,  feature. 


§  384]  DERIVATION    OF    NOUNS.  199 

NOTE.  —  In  the  foregoing  cases  the  nouns  are,  doubtless,  equally  primi- 
tive with  the  verbs,  or  rather,  both  are  derived  from  a  common  root.  It  is 
usual,  however,  to  speak  of  such  roots  as  verbal  roots,  and  hence  to  count 
the  nouns  as  derivative.  Such  nouns  are  known  as  strong  derivatives 
(§  199,  note)- 

2.  DERIVATIVES  WITH  SUFFIX. 

384.  Many   nouns    are    derived    from    verbs- — mostly 
strong  verbs  —  by  change  of  the  root-vowel  (TOtcmt)  — 
sometimes  also  with  modification  of  the  final  consonant  — 
and  the  addition  of  suffixes,  which  variously  modify  the 
meaning  of  the  word. 

1.  The  suffixes  -b,  -be,  — t,  -ft,  and  frequently  -e,  form  nouns, 
mostly  abstract  in  meaning,  and  usually  feminine :  — 

ber  S3rcmb  (fcrennen),  the  burning.  Me  ®unft  (fbnnen),  the  art. 

bie  ®unbe  (tertnert),  the  news.  Me  ©a&e  (ge&ert),  the  gift. 

bie  SSucfjt  (Megert),  the  bay.  bie  ®ru6e  (grafcen),  the  pit. 

bie  <Srf)rift  (fdjiet&en),  the  writing.  Me  ©pracfje  (fpredjen),  the  speech. 

2.  The  suffix  -er  (English  -er)  is  used  to  form  nouns  denot- 
ing an  agent  or  instrument.     They  are  all  masculine  :  — 

ber  S3dcfer  (Baden),  the  baker.  ber  Sdjneiber  (fdjneiben),  the  tailor. 

ber  33of)rer  (bofyren),  the  gimlet.  ber  ©djnitter  (fcf)neiben),  the  reaper. 

ber  better  (reiten),  the  rider.  ber  £art5er  (tanjen),  the  dancer. 

ber  ©anger  (fingert),  the  singer.  ber  Bdger  (getgert),  the  hand  of  a  clock. 

Note  the  irregular  n  in  3tebner  (rebert),  the  speaker. 

3.  The  suffix  -el  ( English  -el,  -le)  is  used  to  form  nouns 
denoting  an  instrument.    Nouns  in  -el  are  masculine  with  rare 
exception.     A  few  are  neuter  diminutives  :  — 

ber  £>e<fel  (berfen),  the  cover.  ber  SBiirfel  (roerfen),  the  die  (pi.  dice). 

ber  §Iugel  (fliegen),  the  wing.  ber  BiJget  (^teljen),  the  bridle. 

ber  <5rf)liiffel  (fcfjliefeen),  the  key.  ba§  JBiinbcI  (binben),  the  bundle. 

4.  —  ni§  (related  to  the  English  —ness)  is  used  to  form  abstract 
nouns  from  verbs.    Nouns  in  -ni§  are,  to  a  great  extent,  neuter, 
but  some  are  feminine  :  — 


200  LESSON-XL.  [§  384 

Me  SebrangniS  (brtngen),  the  tribu-  bte  ®enntni§  (fennen),  the  knowledge. 

lation.  ba§  ©efttinbniS  (gefte^en),  the  confession. 

bie  (£rlau&m§  (erlau&en),  the  per-  baS  35erfjaltni3  (berfyalten),  the  relation. 

mission.  ba§  3eugnt§  (3eltgen),  the  testimonial. 

5.  -ling  (related  to  the  English  verbal-noun  ending  -ing}  is 
used  for  forming  a  large  number  of  nouns  from  verbs,  most  of 
which  are  abstracts.  All  of  these  are  feminine  :  — 

bte  SluSftettung  (auSftetten),  the  ex-    bte  (Srfinbttng  (erfinben),  the  invention. 

hibition.  bte  (Sr^tefiitng  (er^iefjen),  the  education. 

bte  SBemerfung  (fcemerfen),  the  obser-    bte  ©tettitng  (fteflen),  the  position. 

vation.  bte  SSerbinbitng  (Oerbtnben),  the  connec- 

bte  SBetoegung  (fcetoegen),  the  motion.  tion. 

bie  3eirf)nung  (^etrfinen),  the  drawing. 


6.  (a)  The  suffix  -en  forms  a  number  of  masculine  deriva- 
tives, some  of  which  are  also  written  without  -n  (see  §  99):  — 

ber  SBiffcn  (Betfjen),  the  bit.  bet  ®ebanle[n]  (benlen),  the  thought. 

ber  ©roben  (gra&ett),  the  ditch.  ber  ©Iaitbe[n]  (glau&en),  the  faith. 

(^)-en  is  also  the  ending  of  infinitives  (except  §  214,  fein, 
tun).  Infinitives  may  be  used  as  nouns,  and  are  then  neuter; 
as,  bci§  S^etfen,  travelling;  ba§  <Stttgen,  singing,  etc.  Most  nouns 
in  -en,  not  infinitives,  are  masculine;  a  few  are  neuter.  (§75.) 

7.  A  small  number  of  nouns  are  derived  from  verbs  by  the 
suffix  -fat  or  -fet    They  are  neuter,  with  the  exceptions  given 
in  the  following  examples  :  — 

J»a§  Safifal  (lafcen),  the  comfort.  bte  3)rangfal  (brtngen),  the  oppression 
fca§  ©cfjirffal  (fatten),  the  fate.  (But  also,  ba§  Srangfal). 

ba§  gtatfel  (ratcn),  the  riddle.  bte  3Wu^faI  (ntii^en),  the  trouble. 

ba§  Ii6er61et6fel  (5IeiBcn),  the  rem-  bte  SruBfal  (triiBen),  the  tribulation. 
nant. 

8.  The  suffixes  -ling  and  -et'  are  rarely  used  for  forming 
derivatives  from  verbs.     They  are  mostly  used  for  deriving 
nouns  from  adjectives  and  other  nouns.      (Less.  XLI.) 

(a)  -ting  (English  -ling)  forms  a  few  masculines:  — 
ber  Sealing  (teljren),  the  apprentice,    ber  §inbling  (ftnben),  the  foundling. 


§  3#4]  DERIVATION    OF    NOUNS.  2OI 

(b)  -et  (French  -ie;  for  accent,  see  §  51)  forms  a  few  femi- 
nine abstracts  (§  386,  3.):  — 

bte  ^loiiberei'   (plaubern),  the  chit-      bie  ©cfjmeidjelet'  (frf)tneid)eln),  the  flat- 
chat,  tery. 

EXERCISE  XL. 

i.  He  killed  two  flies  with  one  blow.  2.  He  awoke  from 
his  (cm£  bem)  sleep  with  a  scream.  3.  What  can  I  do?  I 
must  bear  this  blow  of  fate.  4.  Horses  and  riders  kept  step 
((Bd)ritt)  with  the  music.  5.  He  fell  into  the  pit  which  he  had 
dug  for  others.  6.  We  saw  a  drawing  of  the  new  invention  at 
the  exhibition.  7.  The  deeds  of  this  general  will  live  in  the 
memory  of  the  people.  8.  A  short  sleep  will  refresh  you  more 
than  food  or  drink.  9.  The  education  of  this  boy  has  been 
neglected.  10.  The  testimonials  of  this  clerk  are  very  good. 
ii.  This  professor  teaches  not  only  the  German  language,  but 
he  teaches  also  (the)  singing  and  (the)  dancing  (in/In.).  12. 
It  is  a  riddle  to  me,  how  he  has  learned  all  these  arts.  13.  The 
course  of  this  river  is  from  north  to  south.  14.  What  you  tell 
me  is  (a)  flattery.  15.  Your  clerk  wrote  [to]  me  that  my 
letters  had  (were}  not  yet  arrived.  16.  The  matter  had  en- 
tirely vanished  from  my  memory.  17.  With  the  permission 
of  the  judge  I  visited  the  prisoner  in  his  prison.  18.  Talking 
and  laughing  (injin.)  are  forbidden  in  (the)  school.  19.  The 
apprentice  has  received  (the)  permission  to  send  his  work  to 
the  exhibition.  20.  The  drawing  of  the  features  in  this  pic- 
ture is  very  good ;  but  the  expression  of  the  face  is  not  so  easy 
to  hit  (treffen).  21.  The  knowledge  of  the  fine  arts  is  an  im- 
portant part  of  (the)  education.  22.  The  art  of  (the)  swim- 
ming is  easy  to  learn  and  of  (don)  highest  value.  23.  Two 
volumes  of  Schiller's  Works  are  in  this  bundle.  24.  Speech  is 
older  than  writing. 


202  LESSON    XLI.  [§  385 

LESSON  XLL 
Derivation  of  Nouns.  —  Continued. 

NOUNS  DERIVED  FROM  ADJECTIVES  OR   NOUNS. 

385.  (a)  It  has  been  seen  (§  140)  that  adjectives  may  be 
used  as  nouns,  retaining  their  declension  as  adjectives. 

(£)  More  rarely  the  root  of  the  adjective  is  used  without 
addition,  as  a  neuter  noun  ;  as,  ba§  ®riin  bet  $etber,  the  ver- 
dure of  the  fields;  ettt>a§  SRot  auf  bett  SBacfen,  some  red  on  the 
cheeks :  but  ettt)d§  0?ote§,  something  red. 

386.  Many  nouns  are  derived  from  adjectives,  or  from 
other  nouns,  by  means  of  suffixes  :  — 

1.  -e  forms  feminine  abstracts  from  adjectives,  modifying 
the  root-vowel :  — 

Me  SBreite  (6reit),  the  breadth.  Me  &bt)e  $odj),  the  height. 

Me  ©rbfce  (grofe),  the  greatness.  bie  Songe  (long),  the  length. 

bie  ©lite  (gut),  the  goodness.  bie  <5ttirle  (ftarf),  the  strength. 

2.  -er   (§  384,  2)   forms,  from  nouns,  masculine  names  of 
agents,  and   other  appellatives,  usually   modifying   the   root- 
vowel  :  — 

ber  ©artner  (©arten),  the  gardener,      ber  Confer  ($art§),  the  Parisian. 
ber  Sftbrber  (Sftorb),  the  murderer.        ber  <5d)toeiaer  (©(ijtoeia),  the  Swiss. 
ber  <Srf)tifer  (<Scf)Qf),  the  shepherd.         ber  SBittoer  (SBittoe),  the  widower.* 
A  few  have  irregular  it,  as  ©Ibrfner  (©locfe),  etc.     (See  §  384,  2.) 

3.  -et',  (§  384,  8)  forms  feminine  abstracts  or  collectives, 
from  nouns  —  chiefly  nouns  in  -cr.     Thus  arises,  also,  a  sec- 
ondary suffix  -erei',  of  like  meaning  :  — 

bie  SlbteK  (2l6t),  the  abbacy,  abbey.  bie  Sieiterei  (9teiter),  the  cavalry. 

bie  $>rucferei  ($>rurfer),  the  printing-  bie  Qucilerei  (dual),  the  torment. 

office.  bie  <SfIat»erei  (@flat>e),  the  slavery. 
bie  gifcfjerei  (5ifc$er),  the  fishery. 


§  386]         DERIVATION    OF    NOUNS. CONTINUED.  203 

4.  (a)  —  f)dt  (related  to  English  -head,  -hood)  forms  femi- 
nine abstracts  from  nouns  —  more  rarely  from  adjectives:  — 

Me  ©ottrjeit  (©ott),  the  Godhead.  Me  gretljett  (fret),  freedom. 

bie  $tnbfyeit  (®tnb),  childhood.  bie  ©djonfjett  (jdjbn),  beauty. 

NOTE.  —  Stems  in  -I)  drop  one  rj ;  as,  £ol)ett,  9?ofjeit,  etc. 

(b)  -teit  (related  to  -fjeit)  forms  like  feminine  abstracts  from 
adjectives  —  often  with  the  ending  -ig  : — 

bie  Sitterfeit  (bitter),  bitterness.  bie  ®letmgfett  (flein),  the  trifle. 

bie  gttelfett  (ettel),  vanity.  bie  ©iifeigfeit  (fiiB),  sweetness. 

NOTE. fett  is  formed  from  old  -tc  (tg  §  395)  and  -fjeit.     It  is  thus  used 

with  adjectives  only  —  mostly  those  ending  in  -el,  -er,  -bar,  -ig,  -Hd),  -fam. 

5.  -in  forms  feminines  from  masculine  nouns,  usually  modi- 
fying the  root-vowel  (see  §  95):  — 

bie  ©raftn  (©raf),  the  countess.  bie  $brf)tn  (®od)),  the  woman-cook. 

bie  £>irtin  (§trt),  the  shepherdess.  bie  Sbtoin  (8i5rt>e),  the  lioness. 

6.  -lein  (akin  to  English  -ling),  and  -cfyen  (akin  to  English 
—kin),  form  neuter  diminutives  from  nouns,  usually  modifying 
the    root-vowel  —  often    with    sense   of   affection   or   of   con- 
tempt :  — 

ba§  SBcmmdjen  (33aum),  the  little  tree.       ba§  9ftabcf)en  (2ftagb),  the  girl. 
ba§  graulein  (Srou),  the  Miss.  ba§  9Kann^en  (9Jionn),  the  mannikin. 

NOTE.  —  Final  -e,  ett  are  omitted;  as,  $trrf)Iein  (^ird)e),  little  church; 
©artlein  (©arten).  Before  -letrt,  I  is  dropped ;  as,  Seuteletn  (Seutel) ;  and 
before  -djen,  el  is  sometimes  inserted,  especially  after  d),  g  ;  as,  33ud)eld)en, 
Sungeldjen,  etc. 

7.  —ling  (akin  to  —  lein,  —ling)  forms  a  few  personal  mascu- 
lines from  adjectives,  or  nouns  —  as  from  verbs  (§  384,  8)  :  — 
ber  gliidjtling  (glurfjt),  the  fugitive.         ber  ^d'^rling  (Saf)r),  the  yearling. 
ber  ©iinftltng  (©unft),  the  favorite.  ber  Bungling  (Jung),  the  youth. 

8.  -nt£>  (384,  4) — used  chiefly  with  verbs  —  forms  a  few 
abstracts  from  adjectives  :  — 

ba§  ©efjeimniS  (gefjetm),  the  secret.          bie  SftnftermS  (finfter),  the  darkness. 
ba§  ©Ietd)ni§  (gletd)),  the  parable.  bie  SBilbniS  (trrilb),  the  wilderness. 

9.  -fd^aft  (English  -scape,  -ship)  forms  feminine  abstracts 
or  collectives:  — 


204  LESSON    XLI.  [§  387 

(a)  From  a  few  adjectives  or  participles  — 

Me  ©efangettfrfiaft  (p.  p.  gefangen),  the      Me  ©emeinfrfmft  (gemein),  the  commu- 
imprisonment.  nity. 

(b)  Usually  from  nouns  :  — 

Me  £)tenerfdjaft,  the  body  of  servants.       Me  gehtbjdjaft  ($etnb),  enmity. 
bte  £)orffd)aft  (S)orf),  the  village-corn-      Me  Sreunbf^oft  (§reunb),  friendship, 
munity.  bte  Sanbfdjaft  (Saitb),  the  landscape. 

10.  -turn  (old  spelling  -tfyum,  English  -dom)  forms  from 
nouns,  and  from  a  few  .adjectives,  collectives  or  abstracts  — 
all  neuters,  except  ber  Srrtunt,  the  error,  ber  9Md)tum,  riches:— 
ba§  Sfjriftentum,  Christianity.  ba§  S«^ftentum,  the  principality. 

ba§  Sigentum  (ctgen),  the  property.  ba3  ^bnigtitm,  the  kingship. 

A  few  other  noun-suffixes  are  of  isolated  occurrence  ;  as,  ber 
£'rcm-id),  the  crane ;  ber  @nte-rid),  the  drake;  bie  §etm-atf  the 
home,  etc.  For  -tel,  see  §  311. 

NOUNS  FORMED  BY  PREFIXES. 

387.  Some  nouns  are  derived  by  means  of  prefixes :  — 
i.  ®e-  (the  same  as   the  unaccented   verb-prefix,  §  375) 

forms    chiefly    collectives  —  sometimes    intensives  —  most    of 

which  are  neuter  :  — 

(a)  Usually  from  nouns  :  — 

ba§  ©ebtrge  (23erg),   the  mountain-  baS  ®efliigef  (glugel),  the  poultry. 

range.  bte  ©ebriibet  (pi.),  the  brothers. 

ba§  ©e&ufd)  OBufd}),  the  bushes.  bte  ©efc^totfter  (pi),  brothers  -and  sis- 
ba§  ©elDOtt  (28olte),  the  clouds,  welkin.  ters. 

(b)  Some  from  verbs  :  — 

ba§  Q5ebet  (beten),  the  prayer.  ber  ©eftityrte  (^a^ren),  the  companion. 

ba§  (Mtiitt  (lauten),  the  ringing  of  bells,     ber  ©ef)iilfe  (t)elfen),  the  assistant. 
ba3  ®efprci(^  (fprectien),  the  conversation,  bte  ©ebitlb  (bitlben),  the  patience. 

NOTE. — These  derivatives — besides  great  variety  of  meaning  —  pre- 
sent also  various  vowel-changes,  besides  umlaut.  Some  have  also  a  suffix, 
usually  -e.  Before  I,  n,  ©e- is  sometimes  contracted,  as:  ©faitbe,  ©Iteb, 
©Iitcf ,  ©nabe. 


§387]          DERIVATION    OF    NOUNS. CONTINUED.  205 

2.  Sftifj-  (here  always  accented)  is  the  same  as  the  verb- 
prefix  mifs-  (§  376):  — 

ber  Sftifsgriff,  the  mistake.  Me  Sfttffetat,  the  misdeed. 

Me  2ftiJ3gunft,  the  disfavor. 

NOTE.  —  Many  other  nouns,  apparently  derived  by  means  of  verb-pre- 
fixes—  separable  or  inseparable  —  are  really  formed  (as  §  382-3)  from  the 
compound  verbs  ;  as,  ber  2Infcf)lag,  from  anfcfjlagen  ;  ber  SBerrat,  from  tierra- 
ten  ;  ba3  ©ebiet,  from  gebteten  ;  ber  2)ttfjbraurf),  from  mipraurfjen,  etc.  (See 
note,  §  383). 

3.  lln-  (see  §  51)  has  the  same  force  as  the  English  prefix 
un-  (Latin  />/—): — 

ber  ttnbanf,  the  unthankfulness.  ber  ttnftnrt,  the  nonsense. 

ba§  Unred)t,  the  -wrong  (unright}.  Me  ttnfierblidjtett,  the  immortality. 

4.  The  prefix  ur—  (see  §  51),  akin  to  the  unaccented  er— 
(§  372),  expresses  origin:  — 

ba§  ttrbilb,  the  prototype.  bie  llrfacfye    the  cause. 

ber  llrquetl,  the  fountain-head.  bie  llrtoelt,  the  primitive  world. 

5.  (Srj-  (see  §  51)  is  the  same  as  the  English  arch—:  — 
ber  (£r<)f)er3og,  the  archduke.  ber  (Srsengef,  the  archangel. 

NOTE. —  Nouns  formed  with  iniB-,  un-,  ur-,  er$-,  have  the  same  gender 
as  the  primitive  nouns. 

6.  3(nt~,  akin  to  the  unaccented  ent— ,  forms  bie  3lnttt>ortr 
the  answer  (see  §  122),  bag  5lntti£,  the  face. 

EXERCISE  XLL 

i.  Will  you  measure  the  height  of  this  tower  ?  2.  We  have 
measured  the  length*  and  breadth  of  this  field.  3.  The  author 
has  sent  his  book  to  the  printing-office.  4.  This  mountain- 
range  is  covered  with  bushes.  5.  He  read  us  the  parable  of 
(Don)  the  good  shepherd.  6.  Who  converted  Germany  from 
(the)  heathenism  to  Christianity?  7.  It  was  the  Englishman 
Boniface.  8.  The  Swiss  died  for  their  liberty.  9.  The  king 
and  the  princes  were  received  with  [a]  ringing  of  bells.  10. 
The  brothers  Grimm  wrote  a  very  learned  German  dictionary. 
ii.  He  lost  his  way  in  the  wilderness  of  the  mountains.  12. 


2O6  LESSON    XLII.  [§  388 

The  enmity  of  the  count  was  the  cause  of  his  misfortune.  13. 
It  is  a  folly  to  plough  the  fields  in  winter.  14.  The  conversa- 
tion of  the  stranger  was  tiresome.  15.  You  should  not  talk 
such  nonsense.  16.  On  the  summit  (§5f)e)  of  the  mountain 
stands  an  image  of  the  archangel  Michael.  17.  The  poorest  vil- 
lage-communities are  found  along  the  Rhine  (find themselves}. 
18.  The  years  of  our  childhood  are  the  happiest  years  of  our 
life.  19.  It  is  nonsense  to  think  of-it.  20.  You  are  wrong, 
sir,  to  give  me  such  an  (a  such)  answer.  21.  The  countess 
considered  it  (held  it  for}  a  folly  to  travel  with  so  large  [a] 
body  of  servants.  22.  The  length  or  [the]  shortness  of  the 
days  and  of  the  nights  depends  (abljangen)  on  (t»on)  the  near- 
ness or  the  distance  of  the  sun.  23.  The  conversation  of  my 
companion  concerned  (betreffen)  the  vanity  of  (the)  human 
wishes  and  the  immortality  of  the  soul.  24.  The  archduke  and 
the  archbishop  entered  (eintreten)  together  into  the  little  church. 


LESSON  XLII. 
Composition  of  Nouns. 

388.  Compound  nouns  always  consist  of  two  components. 
The  last  is  regularly  a  noun  ;  the  first  may  be  noun,  verb, 
adjective,  adverb  or  preposition. 

NOTE.  —  As  will  appear  §  390,  the  compound  may  include  more  than 
two  -words  —  but  not  more  than  two  components. 

(a)  The  first  component  takes  the  principal  accent ;  the 
last  has  a  distinct  secondary  accent.      (See  §  49.) 

(b)  The  gender  and  declension  of  the  compound  follow  the 
last  component.     For  exceptions,  see  §  122.     To  these  add:- — 

ba§  ©egerttetl  (ber  Sett),  the  opposite  (but  also,  bo§  Sett). 

ber  2ftitttrjod)  (bie  SBocfje),  Wednesday  (pi.  2Jhttlood)e  ;)  as,  §  125. 

bie  sOfynmacftt  (pi.  O^nntadjten),  the  swoon. 

bie  SSottmadjt  (pi.  SSottmadjten),  the  authority, 

—  and  perhaps  a  few  others.     The  feminine  compounds  attributed  to  ber 
2Kut  (§  122)  represent  an  earlier  feminine  form  of  the  same  word. 


§  389]  COMPOSITION    OF    NOUNS.  2OJ 

NOTE.  —  The  last  part  of  some  compound  nouns  has  been  gradually 
shortened  into  a  mere  suffix;  as,  bd£  £>rttte(,  the  third  part ;  ba3  SBiertet, 
the  fourth  part;  where -tel  was  originally  -teH.  (See  §  311.)  It  is  also 
probable  that  the  common  suffixes  of  noun  derivation  (Less.  XLI.)  were 
originally  distinct  words.  See  also  Remark,  p.  218. 

389.  The  relation  between  the  components  may  be 
various.  Generally  the  first  in  some  way  limits,  or  de- 
termines, the  second,  and  is  syntactically  dependent  upon 
it.  Hence  this  is  called  the  determining  component.  The 
grammatical  relation  is  sometimes  indicated  by  the  form*; 
but  is  usually  only  implied  by  simple  juxtaposition  :  — 

1.  (a)   Simple  juxtaposition  of  two  nouns:  — 

bie  93cmmtooHe,  the  cotton.  Me  ©djulftuBe,  the  school-room. 

ber  SSrteftrtiger,  the  letter-carrier.  ba3  28etngla3,  the  wine-glass. 

ber  Ol&aum,  the  olive  tree.  ber  SSetterfyafjn,  the  weather-cock. 

(b)   Rarely,  with  a  connecting  vowel:  — 
ba§  Stagetoerf,  the  day's  work.  Me  SBabefur,  the  water-cure. 

2.  (a)   Frequently  the  first  component  takes  the  termina- 
tion of  the  genitive  case:  — 

ba§  ©liirfSrab,  the  wheel  of  fortune.        Me  2*5itten§fretljeit,  the  freedom  of  will. 
ba§  Xage§Iid)t,  the  light  of  day.  ba3  28irt3I)au3,  the  inn. 

(b)  Sometimes  a  false,  or  apparent,  genitive  is  exhibited,  or 
an  earlier  inflection  is  retained,  even  with  feminine  nouns :  — 

ber  ®e6urt§tog  (bie  ©eburt),  the  birth-    ber  ©onnenfdjein  (bie  <Sonne),  the  sun- 
day,  shine. 

3.  The  first  component  is  sometimes  in  the  plural :  — 

boss  23ttberburf),  the  picture-book.  ba3  $tnbermarc()en,  the  fairy-tale  for 

ber  Slumenforb,  the  flower-basket.  children. 

ba§  2Bbrter6udj,  the  dictionary. 

4.  When  a  compound  is  formed  of  a  verb  and  a  noun,  the 
root  of  the  verb  is  simply  prefixed.     Occasionally  the  vowel  e 
is  inserted:  — 

*  These  may  be  distinguished  as  grammatical,  or  improper,  compounds. 


2O8  LESSON    XLII.  [§  390 

ber  §af)rplon,  the  time-table.  ba§  SRettpferb,  the  saddle-horse. 

ber  Sauffcurfcfje,  the  errand-boy.  Me  ©cfjreibfeber,  the  -writing-pen. 

ba3  Sejebud),  the  reading-book.  ber  geigeftnger,  the  forefinger. 

5.  (a)   A  compound  of  an  adjective  and  a  noun  is  formed 
by  prefixing  the  adjective-root:  — 

ber  (Sbetftein,  the  gem.  Me  ^ur^toetle,  the  pastime. 

ber  ©Iei(f)tnut,  the  equanimity.  ber  SSoflmonb,  the  full  moon. 

ber  ©rofjbater,  the  grandfather.  ber  SBeifjborn,  ^  hawthorn. 

(£)   Rarely  with  inflection  of  the  adjective :  — 
ber  §of)epriefter,  the  high-priest.  Me  Cangetoetle,  the  tedium. 

6.  A  few  words  are  compounds  of  nouns  and  adverbs  or 
prepositions,  among  them  some  grammatical  terms :  — 

Me  Stufcenfette,  the  outside.  ber  STnlaitt,  the  first  sound  of  a  word. 

ba§   2tu3lanb,    the   exterior,  foreign  ber  ^ntaut,  the  sound  in  the  middle 

parts.  of  a  word. 

ba§  2>nlanb,  the  interior ',  home-country,  ber  5tu§tout,  the  last  sound  of  a  word. 

ber  Sftitmenfcf),  the  fellow-creattire.  ber  Sl&Iaut,  the  change  of  sound. 

ba§  93orred)t,  the  privilege.  ber  lltttlaut,  the  modification  of  sound. 

1.  A  few  compounds  are  really  complete  phrases  :  — 

ba§  <2>teHMd)ein,  the  rendezvous  ;  ba§  SSergiBmeinnicfit,  the  forget-me-not. 

390.  Frequently  the  components  of  a  compound  noun  — one 
or  both  —  will  themselves  be  compound.  In  such  cases  the 
relation  of  the  component  elements  must  be  borne  in  mind. 
The  principal  accent  falls  on  the  accented. syllable  of  the  first 
component;  the  secondary  accent  on  the  accented  syllable  of 
the  second :  — 

Me  $ett/erberfidjerung§gefevHftf)aft,  the  fire-insurance  company. 

ber  ©eneraKIiei^  tenant,  the  lieutenant-general. 

ber  §anb/f(^uf)mav  d)er,  the  glove-maker. 

Me  9tedj/nung§a&Mage,  the  rendering  of  accounts. 

bie  ®i/fenba^nfax  fjrfarte,  the  railroad  ticket. 

NOTE.  —  In  some  cases,  a  different  relation,  and  hence  a  difference  of 
meaning,  will  be  indicated  by  a  change  of  accent.  As  :  — 


§  391]  COMPOSITION    OF    NOUNS.  2OQ 

ber  £yber=fcf)uv  Ilef)rer,  the  principal  teacher, 

ber  O/6erfd)ul4e^  rerr  the  highschoolteacher,  etc. 

391.  (0)    There  are  also  many  occasional  compounds  — 
chiefly  nouns  —  made  only  for  the  nonce-1— such  as  will  not 
be  found  in  any  dictionary.     In  such  cases,  the  meaning  will 
be  known  from  the   components.     For    use    of    hyphen,   see 
§  69. 

(b)  Compound  nouns  are  sometimes  extended  to  absurd 
length;  as,  Dberpolt^ei'gericfytgprafib'ent ;  (Btaat'3fc!)itIbentiU 
gung§lommifftovn§bureau.  But  such  forms  are  chiefly  official  or 
technical,  and  are  not  to  be  approved  or  imitated.*  (See 
§  69.) 

392.  When  the  same  component  is  common  to  two  or  more 
compounds  in  succession,  it  will  be  written  once  only,  its  rela- 
tion to  the  others  being  indicated  by  the  hyphen.     This  will 
occur  not  only  in  nouns,  but  also  in  verbs  and  adjectives ;  as, 
gefl-   imb  (Botmtage,  holidays  and  Sundays ;  Sftorb^  tmb  (Siib- 
beutfcfylcmb,  North  and  South  Germany;  ^acfymtttagS  ftdjt  man 
bte  99^enfc£)en  auf=  imb  abftrbmen,  streaming  up  and  down;  S5o!al- 
lattge  unb  =liir§e,  etc. 

EXERCISE  XLIL 

i.  Have  you  read  the  fairy-tales-for-children  of  the  brothers 
Grimm  ?  2.  Hang  up  your  coat  in  the  wardrobe.  3.  He  has 
sent  the  errand-boy  to  (um  —  §u)  fetch  a  time-table  of  the 
Rhenish  Railway.  4.  The  full-moon  shone  on  (ace.)  the  castle- 
on-the-mountain.  5.  Put  the  wine-glasses  upon  the  table.  6. 

*But  BRANDT,  from  whom  we  take  these  examples — and  to  whose 
German  Grammar  we  owe  many  obligations  —  adds  in  a  note  (§  521): 
"  The  capacity  of  German  for  forming  such  compounds  is  generally  exag- 
gerated, and  that  of  English  generally  underrated.  We  might  just  as  well 
write  them  so  in  English  =  Firetnsurancecompany'soffice  ;  and  we  should 
have  the  same  compound."  This  remark  is  particularly  suggestive,  as 
showing  how  much,  in  our  view  of  language,  depends  upon  the  eye.  Eng- 
lish, with  its  syntax  of  word-position,  is  full  of  such  actual,  but  unwritten, 
compounds. 


2IO  LESSON    XLIII.  [§  393 

He  has  lived  long  in  foreign-parts.  7.  We  ought  not  to  sell 
the  bear's  skin  before  we  have  killed  the  bear.  8.  The  grand- 
father has  given  the  children  a  beautiful  picture-book.  9. 
Where  shall  I  find  the  dictionary  ?  10.  You  will  find  it  in  the 
school-room,  n.  The  weather-cock  on  the  church-tower 
shows  whence  (ftofjer)  the  wind  blows.  12.  Apple-trees  and 
cherry-trees  grow  in  Germany;  olive-trees  in  southern  countries. 
13.  The  hawthorn  blossoms  in  (the)  spring.  14.  He  brought 
these  gems  with  [him]  from  foreign  parts.  15.  The  little 
girl  carried  a  flower-basket.  16.  When  a  misfortune  befalls  our 
fellowmen,  we  should  assist  them.  17.  The  letter-carrier  will 
bring  the  letters  at  five  o'clock.  18.  I  have  neither  gold  nor 
precious  stones.  19.  The  student  should  distinguish  (the) 
vowel-modification  from  (the)  vowel-change,  in  the  study  of 
(the)  German  grammar.  20.  (The)  Wednesday  has  its  Ger- 
man name  because  this  day  is  in  the  middle  of  the  week.  21. 
The  evening-sun-shine  shone  on  the  gilded  weathercock.  22. 
The  freedom  of  will  is  the  greatest  privilege  of  humanity.  23. 
The  forget-me-not  is  one  of  the  loveliest  flowers.  24.  The 
life  and  fire-insurance  companies  of  London  are  the  richest  in 
the  world. 


LESSON  XLIIL 
Derivation  of  Adjectives. 

393.  Some  adjectives  whose  derivation  cannot  be  traced 
may  be  regarded  as  primitives.     Such  are :  gut,  grim,  lang, 
alt,  jung,  etc. 

394.  Some  adjectives  are  derived,  like  nouns  (§   382), 
from  verb-roots   by  vowel-change  (5lMcmt)  without   suffix. 
Such  are :  Mart!  (from  Mtn!en,  to  glitter],  bright;  treu  (from 
trauert,    to   trust),  faithful;   glatt,    (from   gleiten),   smooth, 
slippery,  etc.     (See  §  383,  note.) 


§  395]  DERIVATION    OF    ADJECTIVES.  211 

395.  But  by  far  the  greater  number  of  adjectives  are 
derived  by  means  of  suffixes : 

1.  -bar  (akin  to  the  old  Oar  en,  to  bear —  as  in  frud)tbar,/rw//<- 
ful)  usually  forms  adjectives  from  verbs,  with  passive  sense  of 
English  -able,  -ible :  — 

benf&ar,  imaginable.  ftrf)t&ar,  visible. 

efefoar,  eatable.  tr in  15 or,  drinkable. 

2.  -en,  -ern  form  adjectives  denoting  material,  the  latter 
with  vowel-modification  :  — 

golben,  golden.  ^ol^ern  (§013),  wooden. 

fil&ern,  silver(ti).  ftd'fjtern  (@taf)I),  of  steel. 

trben  (®rbe),  earthen.  fteinern,  of  stone. 

3.  -er,  added  to  names  of  places  (§  143)  is  properly  a  noun- 
suffix  (probably  genitive  plural),  and  forms  indeclinable  adjec- 
tives ;  as,  (Manger  £Hcr,  ^Berliner  SBurft,  etc. 

4.  -fjaft  (perhaps  akin  to  fjaben,  have)  forms  a  few  adjec- 
tives: — 

BoSJjdft,  malicious.     .  fdjulerf)aft,  like  a  school-boy. 

franlljaft,  sickly.  tugenbfyaft,  virtuous. 

NOTE.  —  To  -Ijaft  is  sometimes  added  -ig ;  as,  letbfjafttg,  bodily. 

5.  -ig,  the  most  usual  adjective  suffix  (English  — j;),  forms 
derivatives  —  usually  with  vowel-modification  :  — 

(a)   From  nouns  :  — 

giinfttg  (®un[t),  favorable.  todtbtg  (SBa(b),  woody. 

modjttg  (2ftacf)t),  mighty.  sorntg  (Born),  angry. 

NOTE. —  Unaccented  e  may  be  dropped  in  -I  or  -r  stems;  as,  bucf(e)lig, 
nmfi(e)rifl  (§  139). 

(£)   From  compound  stems  (§  '400,  9):  — 

fcrettfdjltltrig,  broad-shouldered.    !a^[fbpftg,  bald-headed. 
breierftg,  triangular.  bierfiiBtg,  four-footed. 

(c)   From  adjectives,  and  adjective  pronouns:  — 

giittg  (gut),  kind.  nteinig,  mine. 

bbllig  (tiotl),  complete.  betnig,  thine,  etc.  (§  194). 

einige  (ein),  pi.  some.  jentg  (jen-er),  that  (§  208). 


212  LESSON    XLIII.  [§  395 

(*/)   From  verbs,  rarely  :  — 

ergiebtg,  productive.  gefattig,  obliging. 

(e)   From  adverbs  and  prepositions: — 

biSJje'rig,  previous.  fyeutig,  of  to-day. 

ba'malig,  of  that  time.  fyteftQ  (f)ter),  of or  front  here. 

botttg,  of or  from  there.  Jefet9/  present. 

ety'entalig,  former.  to  ortg,  former. 

iibrig  (it&er),  remaining. 

6.  -id)t  is  an  occasional  form,  instead  of  -ig  :  — 

fteintdjt,  stony.  ibridjt,  foolish. 

8.  The  enlarged  suffix  -feltg  arose  from  the  suffix  -tg  in  con- 
nection with  the  noun-suffix  —fat  (see  §  384,  7):  — 

ntitfjfeltg  (SRii^fal),  toilsome.       fcinbfclig  (Setnb),  hostile. 
triibfelig  (Striibfal),  woeful.         gliitffelig  (©liid),  happy,  blessed. 

8.  (a)   The  suffix  -tfcf)  (English  -ish)  denotes  relating  to, 
similar  to,  belonging  to :  — 

berlinifdj,  of  Berlin.  I)immlifc^,  heavenly. 

englifd),  English.  irbijdj  ((Srbe),  earthly. 

fpanifd),  Spanish.  politifdj,  political. 

(b)   Sometimes,  as  in  English,  with  a  depreciatory  sense  :  — 
finbifdj,  childish.  toeiMfdj,  womanish. 

9.  -let   (§  306),  added  to  numerals,  probably  represents  a 
feminine  noun  in  the  genitive  singular :  — 

einerlet,  of  one  kind.  mandjerlei,  of  many  kinds. 

10.  -licl)  (English  -like,  -ly),  usually  with  umlaut  —  next  to 
-ig  the  most  frequent  suffix  —  denotes  resemblance,  character  — 
sometimes  also  with  diminutive  sense : 

(a)   From  nouns  or  adjectives  :  — 

altltd),  oldish.  rotlid),  reddish. 

fiirftlitf),  princely.  fuftfidj,  sweetish. 

mamtltd),  manly.  toetMicf),  feminine,  womanly. 


§  399]  DERIVATION    OF    ADVERBS.  213 

(£)   Also  sometimes  from  verbs  ;  as,  fdjablid),  harmful;  nii^- 
lid),  useful;  but  more  usually  with  passive  sense  vlpossibility ;  — 
fcegreifttd),  conceivable.  mbgltd),  possible. 

Uli&egreiflid),  inconceivable.  unmbcjltdj,  impossible. 

ii.  -fam  (English  -some}  forms  derivatives  of  both  active 
and  passive  sense  :  — 

arkitfam,  industrious.  lenffam,  manageable. 

fittdjtfcitn,  timid.  fpctrfant,  saving. 

396.  The  prefixes  Be-,  ge-,  mt§-f  un— ,  itr-  and  eq-  are 
used  for  forming  derivative  adjectives,  their  force  being  the 
same  as  in  derivative  verbs  and  nouns.  —  Examples  :  bereit, 
ready;  geft)iJ3,  certain;  tmjjttergnfigt,  displeased;  etc.     And 
frequently  the  usual  separable  prefixes;  as,  abljangig,  ange- 
nefym,  twrnefym,  ^ufallig,  etc.  (from  abfyangen,  anne!)men,  etc.) 

Derivation  of  Adverbs. 

397.  As  already  stated  (§   314)  almost   any  qualifying 
adjective  may  be  used   as  an  adverb  without   change  of 
form ;   as,  er  fdjreibt  gut  unb  fdjnell,  he   writes  well  and 
rapidly.     Hence  there  is  no  general   adverb   suffix  like 
English  -ly.     (For  the  distinction,  see  §  449,  2.) 

398.  A  few  adverbs  are,  however,  formed  by  suffixes  : 

(a)  The  adjective  suffix  -ltd)  forms  a  number  of  derivatives 
which  are  used  only  —  or  chiefly  —  as  adverbs  :  — 

fcttterltd),  bitterly.  neilltd),  recently. 

fretttdj,  indeed.  fd)ft)erlicl),  hardly. 

ganoid),  entirely.  tna^r(ttf),  truly. 

(b)  Some  of  these  insert  an  irregular  t:  — 
etgentlicfj,  properly.  fioffentltdj,  as  is  hoped. 
namentlid),  by  name.                          ttriffentltd),  wilfully. 

399.  Other  adverb-endings  are  originally  oblique  cases 
of  nouns  or  adjectives.     (See  §  319).      Such  are  : 


214  LESSON    XLIII.  [§  399 

i.   (a)  Genitives  :  -tings*  :  — 

bltnbltngS,  blindly.  rucfltng§,  backwards. 

(b)  -tt>tirt§  (-wards)  :  — 

auftoort3,  upwards.  fiibtoart3,  southward. 

(c)  —  tt)eife  (—wise);  with  genitive  adjective  prefix  (properly 
compounds)  :  — 

SiiftiHigertoeife,  accidentally.  mogltrfjertoeife,  possibly. 

—  and  sometimes  with  uninflected  prefix  :  — 
ftiicftoeife,  piecemeal.  rudtoetfe,  by  starts. 

(d)  Often  the  genitive-ending  -§>,  from  nouns:  — 

dbenbS,  in  the  evening.  attfangS,  in  the  beginning. 

morgenS,  in  the  morning.  tetl§,  partly. 

(e)  Also  from  adjectives  or  participles  :  — 

ltnf§,  /^(hand).  eilenb§,  in  haste. 

red)i§,  right  "  bergebenS,  in  vain. 

(/)   Sometimes  -en3,  as  a   kind  of  double    adjective-geni 
tive  :  — 

erfteng,  firstly.  ^i5d^ften§,  at  most. 

6toeiten§,  secondly.  fpatcftenS, 


2.  (^)   Other  adverbs  are  old  datives:  — 
mitten,  in  the  midst.  wttett,  below. 

(b)  Or  a  dative  with  prepositions:  — 

onftatt,  instead  (of).  5Uf&Ige,  in  consequence  (of). 

3.  Others  are  old  accusatives  :  — 

Ijetm,  home.  (ein)mal,  (one)  time,  once. 

4.  Other  adverbs  are  from  pronominal  roots: 

(a)  Demonstrative:  — 

bet,  then,  there.  bann,  then. 

(b)  Interrogative  and  relative  :  — 

too,  where.  *        lt>ann.,  when. 


§  399J  DERIVATION    OF    ADVERBS.  215 


EXERCISE  XLIII. 

i.  (The)  to-day's  political  news  is  not  favorable.  2.  We 
await  his  speedy  return.  3.  The  elderly  gentleman  bought 
several  English  and  Spanish  books.  4.  The  water  of  the  Rhine 
is  of  a  greenish  color.  5.  The  princes  of  that  time  lived  in 
houses  which  were  not  better  than  the  cottages  of  the  laborers 
of  the  present  day.  6.  A  virtuous  man  does  not  fear  the 
mightiest  king.  7.  Horses,  sheep,  cats,  and  dogs  are  four- 
footed  animals.  8.  The  old  general  wore  a  three-cornered  hat. 
9.  Expect  me  at-latest  before  midnight.  10.  We  returned  at 
10  o'clock  in  the  evening,  n.  The  letter  was  accidentally 
burned-up.  12.  Berlin  sausage  is  very  famous.  13.  Turn 
(reflex.)  first  to  the  right,  and  then  southwards  around  the 
corner.  14.  We  could  not  find  anything  eatable  or  drinkable 
in  this  inn.  15.  A  broad-shouldered  hotel-porter  carried  my 
portmanteau  upstairs.  16.  WTe  thanked  the  prince  in  the  most 
humble  manner.  17.  Will  you  change  your  foolish  and  childish 
conduct,  and  become  virtuous,  industrious  and  saving?  18.  He 
is  an  unmanageable,  malicious  boy.  19.  I  am  glad  to  hear 
that  the  news  front-there  is  favorable.  20.  The  timid  girl 
feared  her  angry  mother.  21.  After  I  have  read  the  former 
chapter  once  more,  I  will  read  the  remaining  chapters  also. 
22.  Instead  of  the  old  wooden  bridge,  a  new  stone  [one]  will 
be  built  over  (ace.}  this  river.  23.  He  has  made  the  assertion 
on— oath  and  in-writing.  24.  The  news  has  (is}  recently 
arrived  that  the  city  is  entirely  destroyed. 


2l6  LESSON    XLIV.  [§  400 

LESSON  XLIV. 
Composition  of  Adjectives. 

400.  In  compound  adjectives,  the  last  component  will  be 
an  adjective  (or  participle).*  The  first,  which  will  always 
take  the  chief  accent,  may  be : 

1.  An  adjective  :  — 

bunfelgriin,  dark-green.  tauBftuntm,  deaf  and  dumb. 

Ijell&Iau,  light-blue.  tobrranf,  dangerously  ill. 

2.  An  adverb  or  preposition  :  — 

etngeboren,  native.  erftgeboren,  first-born. 

toofylgeboren,  well-born. 

3.  A  noun  —  sometimes  with  inflection  :  — 

groSgriin,  green  as  grass.  '  bolfretcfj,  populous. 

tytmmelblcw,  sky-blue.  gebanfenretdj,  thoughtful. 

feefranf,  seasick.  HebeSfranf,  lovesick. 

4.  Especially  frequent  are  the  compounds  with  Io§  and  fcoff, 
which  have  become  almost  mere  suffixes   (See  §402,  Rem.  i); 

freubettlo§,/0y/^r.r.  au§brucf§t>oll,  expressive. 

topf(03,  headless.  l)offttung§t>ott,  hopeful. 

5.  Of  the  same  sort  are  derivatives  with  the  suffixes  -orttg 
(from  $rt,  kind);  fad)  (§306,3),  or  fdlttg  (from  %di9fold); 
ret(^  (rich);  mci^ig  (from  SJ^aagr  measure),  and  others:  — 

grojjarttg,  grand.  einfalttg,  simple. 

btetfad^,  threefold.  bolfreid),  populous. 

gefe^mdfeig,  lawful  (see  Remark  p.  218). 

6.  Composition  of  adjectives  with  roots  of  verbs  is  rare:  — 
merttoiirbig,  remarkable.  glcwbtourbig,  credible. 

*  A  special  exception  is  3ufric/ben,  lit.  at  peace —  a  phrase  compound 


§401]  COMPOSITION    OF    ADVERBS.  217 

7.  More  frequent  is  the  composition  of  an  adjective  with 
the  infinitive  of  verbs  used  substantively  in  the  genitive :  — 

lebenSfrof),  enjoying  life,  happy.          fterbenSfronf,  dangerously  ill. 
Ueben^ttwrbig,  amiable.  tabelnStoert,  blamable. 

8.  Many  compound  adjectives  are  made  up  of  a  participle 
and  a  dependent  word,  especially  in  poetry :  — 

Ijeilbringenb,  salutary.  gottergeben,  resigned  to  God's  -will. 

unfjeilfpinnenE),  mischievous.  toeidigettiofynt,  tenderly  reared. 

9.  Some  adjectives,  apparently  compounds,  are  derivatives 
of  compound  nouns;  as,  tnerecfig,  square,  etc.  (see  §  395,  5). 
Others  are  formed  by  analogy  to  these,  where  the  compound 
noun  does  not  exist :  — 

einaitgtg,  one-eyed.  Ijodjljerjjig,  magnanimous. 

10.  Compound  adjectives,  like  compound  nouns,  may  in- 
clude more  than  two  words,  but  not  more  than  two  compo- 
nents (see  §  390);  as: 

fjodjadjtitngSbott,  most  respectfully.       I)orf)toof)lgeboren,  high-well-born. 

Composition  of  Adverbs. 

401.  Compound  adverbs  are  usually  only  adjectives  used 
as  adverbs  (§  314).    Such  retain  the  adjective  accent  (§  53). 

i.   In  other  cases  they  are  grammatical  phrases,  with  more 
or  less  complete  inflection. 

(a)   In  such  cases,  where  the  first  component  is  limiting, 
or  "determining,"  or  an  inflected  word,  it  takes  the  accent:  — 
bem'nadj,  accordingly.  ntetn/erfett§,  y#r  my  part. 

e^'ental^,  formerly.  ntetft/enteil3,  for  the  most  part. 

(b}  The  second  member  takes  the  accent  when  it  is  depen- 
dent on  the  first,  or  when  a  preposition :  — 

iiberljaupt',  especially.  3UtoeiI/en/  at  times. 

,  at  hand.  bergab7,  down  hill. 

',  at  last.  bergan7,  up  hill. 


2l8  LESSON    XLIV.  [§  402 

2.  Many  compound  adverbs  are  made  up  of  prepositions 
and  other  indeclinable  particles,  especially  bd   (bar),   there; 
f)ier,  here;  tt)0  (tt)or),  where;  fyer,  hither;  f)tn,  thither:  — 

babet',  therewith.  fjinp',  besides. 

bafjer',  therefore.  borauS',  before  (place). 

barin',  therein.  boriifc'er,  past,  over. 

f)tenmt/,  herewith.  too&et7,  wherewith. 

fyerbor',  forth;  border7,  before,  ago  (time).  toorilt',  wherein. 

(a)  The  accent  is  usually  on  the  last  component;  but  some- 
times varies  with  meaning  or  emphasis :  — 

bar7 um  or  barum';  toar'mn  or  toarum'. 

(£)  So  in  a  few  other  words;  as,  eht'mal,  once,  one  time; 
etnntal',  once  upon  a  time,  some  time,  etc. 

3.  Some  compound  adverbs  are  also  used  as  adverbial  con- 
junctions (§  328)  ;  and  some, as  separable  verb-prefixes  (§  289). 

402.  (a)  Compound  conjunctions  are  such  as :  alfo  (aKf- 
fo)  ben(n)nod),'  jebod)',  fobcuV,  fotoofyl',  o6g(etrf)f,  obtoof)!',  etc. 

(§53).   ' 

(b)  Compound  prepositions  such  as:  uin'nen,  gegenu'bcr 
autm'ber,  etc.     (See  §  280.) 

REMARK. —  i.  It  is  not  always  easy  to  draw  the  line  between  composition 
and  derivation,  or  between  derivation  and  inflection.  These  terms  are  at 
best  relative,  and  indicate  only  different  stages  of  the  same  process. 
Habitual  juxtaposition  leads  to  composition.  So,  habitual  composition, 
with  loss  of  accent  and,  generally,  abbreviation  of  form,  changes  a  com- 
ponent to  an  affix ;  and,  finally,  when  the  distinct  form  or  meaning  is  lost 
with  habitual  use,  the  most  constant  of  these  are  called  inflections.  Thus: 
Go'd-li'ke,  Go'd-like,  godly;  ho'pe-fu'll,  hofpeful;  pla'nt-di'd,  pla'nted, 
etc. 

It  is  probable  that  all  the  affixes  of  derivation,  as  well  as  of  inflection, 
were  once  independent  words  —  whose  original  form  and  meaning  have, 
however,  in  many  cases  been  lost.  Much  depends  —  as  has  been  seen 
(§391,  foot-note)  —  on  the  habit  of  writing  words  ;  still  more,  however,  on 
the  accent,  which  marks  the  relation  of  parts,  and  thus  the  essential  unity 
of  the  word.  In  German,  compounds  are  freely  written  together  ;  in  Eng- 
lish, many  words  written  apart  are,  in  fact,  true  compounds;  as,  at  all,  in 
vain,  etc.  Compare  also,  already,  with  all  right,  etc. 


§  402]  COMPOSITION    OF    ADVERBS. 

2.  Let  it  be  remembered  that  the  view  here  given  of  Derivation  and 
Composition  does  not  pretend  to  be  a  full  treatment  of  these  subjects,  but 
only  such  as  may  usefully  guide  the  earliest  attention  of  the  student. 
Their  more  complete  study  belongs  to  a  later  stage  of  progress  ;  meantime, 
the  student  may  be  directed  to  such  help  as  may  be  found  in  the  best 
dictionaries,  or  in  the  more  elaborate  grammars,  such  as  Whitney's  or 
Brandt's  —  both  of  which  have  given  useful  help  in  the  revision  of  these 
Lessons.  Also  to  Hempl :  German  Orthography  and  Phonology. 


EXERCISE  XLIV. 

i.  She  wore  a  sky-blue  dress.  2.  Deaf  people  often  become 
deaf-and-dumb.  3.  He  is  just  gone  by.  4.  After  I  have  walked 
five  hours  up— hill,  I  am  tired-to-de.ath.  5.  The  physician  is 
very  hopeful ;  the  patient  can  by  no  means  be  dangerously  ill. 
6.  The  bishop  preached  with  an  expressive  voice.  7.  I  have 
ordered  our  dinner  beforehand.  8.  Yesterday  was  one  of  the 
most  remarkable  days  of  my  life.  9.  I  am  sea-sick  even  during 
the  shortest  passage.  10.  I  am  sorry  to  hear  that  u.  It  is 
an  illness  which  is  soon  over.  12.  Yes,  but  it  is  most  dis- 
agreeable. 13.  The  weather  has  unfortunately  been  very  un- 
favorable. 14.  He  has  missed  the  mark.  15.  Have  you  seen 
him  pass  by?  (§265).  1 6.  He  went  by  an  hour  ago.  17.  The 
war  is  unhappily  not  yet  over ;  but  at  last  we  can  foresee  the 
end  of  it.  18.  Only  once  have  I  received  a  letter  from  him ; 
he  was  then  quite  hopeless.  19.  That  magnanimous  action  of 
the  amiable  young  queen  delighted  her  faithful  people.  20. 
Allow  us  one  prayer,  said  the  geese,  that  (bamif)  we  die  not  in 
our  sins  ;  afterwards  we  will  stand  in  a  row,  that  you  may  pick 
out  the  fattest.  21.  Go  straight  ahead  (cm3) ;  you  will  soon 
see  a  four-cornered  square  (^Ia^);  then  turn  to  the  right. 
22.  It  is  easier  to  go  down-hill  than  up-hill.  23.  For  my 
part,  I  have  nothing  against  it.  24.  There  (e§)  was  once  a 
king,  whose  first-born  son  lay  dangerously  ill. 


22O  LESSON    XLV.  [§  403 

LESSON  XLV. 
Relation  of  German  and  English.  —  Summary. 

In  every  department  of  the  grammar  thus  far — even  without 
suggestion  from  the  text  or  the  teacher  —  the  student  must 
have  observed  the  close  resemblance  between  German  and 
English.  A  brief  summary  of  this  subject  will  now  be  made. 

403.  This  resemblance  is,  of  course,  not  accidental,  but  rests  upon  his- 
torical kinship.     The  Angles  and  the  Saxons,  who  conquered  Britain  be- 
fore A.  D.  500 — whence  the  united  name  Anglo-Saxon,  applied  to  the 
people  and  the  language  —  and,  from  the  Angles,  the  names  England  ( Angle. 
land)  and  English — were  German  peoples.    These  brought  with  them,  of 
course,  their  own  German  tongues,  which,  with  some  other  admixture, 
formed  the  Anglo-Saxon  —  sometimes  called  Old  English — the  basis  of  the 
English  language. 

404.  But,  though  of  the  same  Germanic  stock,  these  peoples  were  of  a 
different  branch  from  those  whose  language  has  given  rise  to  the  modern 
literary  German.     The  Angles  and  Saxons  were  Low-Germans — dwellers 
on  the  low,  or  coast,  lands,  as  distinguished  from  those  who  dwelt  in  the 
high,  or  central,  lands  of  the  continent,  whose  language,  known  as  High- 
German,  is  the  basis  of  the  modern  German.     The  nearest  kinship  of  Eng- 
lish is  thus  with  the  Low-German  tongues,  as  the  modern  Dutch,  and  the 
dialects  of  common  speech  in  North  Germany,  called  $platt=2)eutfd)  —  but 
all  are  included  in  the  general  term  Germanic,  or  Teutonic. 

405.  There  were  thus  already  considerable  diversities  of  speech  between 
the  High-German  and  the  earliest  English,  as  will  be  more  fully  shown 
below  (§  407,  etc.).     These  diversities  have  been  still  further  increased  by 
historical  causes  subsequently  (§  414,  etc.),  so  that  the  kinship  of  English 
to  German  is  not  always  so  obvious  as  its  relation  to  other  languages  (as 
French  or  Latin).     Still,  this  kinship  is  of  fundamental  importance — the 
more  so,  as  it  shows  itself  especially  in  the  most  essential  and  important 
elements  of  our  own  language  —  implying  cognate  origin,  not  VS\Kt&  derivation. 

NOTE. —  This  subject,  which  is  of  capital  importance  for  the  study  of  English,  will  be 
treated  here  only  so  far  as  may  be  helpful  to  the  English  student  in  learning  German. 

406.  Of  Germanic  origin  in  English  are:*  — 

*  Condensed  from  Morris's  Historical  English  Grammar,  p.  27-31 


§  4°8]         RELATION    OF    GERMAN    AND    ENGLISH.  221 

1.  All  grammatical  inflections,  and  all  auxiliary  words  used  as  substi- 
tutes for  inflection. 

2.  The  most  important  grammatical  words :  almost  all  numerals  ;  all 
pronouns  and  pronominals;  most  simple  adverbs,  prepositions,  conjunc- 
tions ;  all  nouns,  adjectives,  verbs,  inflected  or  derived  by  vowel-change, 
and  almost  all  other  irregular  verbs  :  in  a  word,  the  most  important  primi- 
tive elements  of  form,  construction  and  idiom. 

3.  The  most  familiar  affixes  of  derivation,  both  prefixes  and  suffixes, 
as  seen  in  foregoing  Lessons  (XL.,  XLL,  etc.). 

4.  And,  generally,  the  great  majority  of  simple  monosyllables,  express- 
ing the  objects,  ideas  and  feelings  of  common  life  and  universal  experience. 

These  comprehend,  as  was  said  above,  the  most  essential  and  important 
elements  of  our  language  —  its  entire  grammatical  machinery  and  the  most 
indispensable  part  of  its  vocabulary ;  so  that,  in  spite  of  all  changes  and 
additions,  English  is  still  properly  ranked  as  a  Germanic  language. 

A  great  number  of  such  forms  and  words  are  the  same,  or  nearly  the 
same,  in  both  languages,  so  as  to  be  readily  recognized.  Many  others 
present  differences  which  require  attention  and  explanation. 

407.  One  most  important  set  of  changes  follows  a  general  law,  based 
on  the  relation  of  sounds,  which,  from  its  first  great  expounder,  JACOB 
GRIMM,  is  known  as  "  Grimm's  Law."     This  law  comprehends  other  lan- 
guages—  including  Greek  and  Latin  —  of  the  same  family  with  German 
and  English  ;  but  it  will  be  here  stated  only  with  reference  to  these,  and 
in  the  simplest  terms. 

GRIMM'S  LAW. 

408.  The  mute  consonants,  as  is  well  known,  are  classed  :  — 

(a)  By  the  organs  of  their  utterance  into  i.  labials  (lip  sounds),  2.  lin- 
gual s  or  dentals  (tongue  or  tooth  sounds),  and  3.  gutturals  or  palatals 
(throat  or  palate  sounds) ;  and  these  respectively  :  — 

(b)  According  to  the  mode  or  degree  of  utterance  into  i.  hard,  or  surds; 
2.  soft,  or  sonants;  3.  aspirate;  —  as  shown   in    the   following  table  (to 
which  are  added  the  sibilants,  s,  z):  — 

Hard.  Soft.  Aspirate. 

LABIAL.  p  b  f  (£f),  v. 

LINGUAL.  t  (tf))  d  th,  s,  z. 

GUTTURAL.         k  g  dj. 

Now  it  is  found  that  consonant  changes  regularly  occur  :  — 
(a)  Within  the  same  organ  ;  as  labial  to  labial,  etc. 


222  LESSON    XLV.  [§  409 

(b}  In  the  same  direction,  between  any  two  languages ;  that  is,  between 
German  and  English,  thus  :  — 

GERMAN  —  hard  —  aspirate  —  soft         —  correspond  to 
ENGLISH — soft    — hard       — aspirate  respectively, — 

as  if  by  a  circular  permutation. 

NOTE.  —  Letting  H  represent  Hard  ;  S,  Soft ;  A,  Aspirate  ;  and  — as  a  guide  to  the 
first  letters  — letting  H  stand  for  High-German,  and  S  for  Saxon-English;  these  changes 
may  be  easily  remembered  by  the  following  mnemonic  words —  the  corresponding  symbols, 
up  or  down,  marking  the  regular  changes. 

High-German    =  H.  A.  S. 
Saxon-English  =  S.  H.  A. 

409.  There  are  many  exceptions  which  cannot  be  here  discussed.  Es- 
pecially in  the  guttural  series,  and  in  other  letters  when  initial,  the  change 
often  does  not  occur.  Frequently  also  a  guttural  has  degenerated  into  a 
semi-vowel  or  vowel,  or  is  lost  entirely ;  as  Q  becomes  y  (/'),  w  ;  Q  or  ^  be^ 
comes  silent  ^A,  or  is  lost  —  English  showing  aversion  to  all  aspirate  gut 
turals.  Such  examples  are,  of  course,  outside  of  Grimm's  law.  Also  the 
lingual  sibilants  f,  g,  usually  represent  English  f,  the  German  tlj  being 
hard — German  having  no  lingual  aspirate  proper. 

The  following  examples  will  exhibit  the  most  usual  interchanges  —  in, 
eluding  exceptions,  as  above  noted.  Examples  where  change  has  not  taken 
place  need  not  be  specially  given,  though  some  of  them  are  included  —  and 
some  of  the  examples  illustrate  more  than  one  change*  (see  Remark,  p. 
228). 

NOTE.  —  i.  In  some  of  the  examples,  the  change  has  occurred  in  English  itself ;  but 
this  need  not  affect  the  present  discussion,  which  has  reference  only  to  the  relation  of  Ger- 
man to  modern  English. 

2.  The  student  must  bear  in  mind  always  purely  orthographical  differences;  such  as 
f  =  (often)  c  ;  fdj  =  sh  ;  \=y,  etc.  Such  cases  need  not  be  included. 

i.  LABIALS. 

Germ.       Engl. 


p              b 

boppel, 

3ttppe, 

$rtppe, 

^olfter, 

©toppel, 

double. 

rib. 

crib. 

bolster. 

stubble. 

<.                           •£      . 

fjalfi, 

ft*, 

28et6, 

fieben, 

fterfcen, 

&             f,  v    . 

'     half. 

off. 

"wife. 

seven. 

starve. 

fjelfen, 

Qllf, 

reif, 

Slpfel, 

$P  flange, 

f  (pf)       p  .    . 

help. 

up. 

ripe. 

apple. 

plant. 

*  Change  is  often  prevented  by  the  presence  of  another  mute  or  a  liquid  ;  as,  ©teilt,  0ft, 
fed^ten,  ®oH>,  £anu,  treten  (tread),  etc. 


RELATION  OF  GERMAN  AND  ENGLISH. 


223 


2. 

LlNGUALS. 

Germ 

Engl. 

tief,  - 

Sraiim, 

8Bort,- 

tun,  — 

Sot, 

i 

d     .    .     . 

deep. 

dream. 

word. 

<fc. 

deed. 

•i-Vi 

Mrf^ 

brei, 

benfen, 

§ab^ 

(Srbe, 

e=~= 

tn  .    .    . 

thick. 

'three. 

think. 

^aM. 

earth. 

bd§, 

Qll§, 

e3, 

beffer, 

§<$>, 

%,  ffr 

I  *     •    •    • 

that. 

out. 

it. 

better. 

hate. 

t 

$toei, 

Boa, 

3", 

^Q^e, 

ftfcen,    t 

Of    *? 

^•^•^  ' 

two. 

toll. 

to. 

cat. 

sit. 

IB*^" 

-5**>**t' 

£&-, 

3- 

GUTTURALS. 

Germ. 

Engl. 

8We, 

SSriicfe, 

Sonf, 

fauen, 

ftredCen. 

j  cf 

gch 

V/J1 

e(d}ge. 

bri(d}ge. 

bench. 

chew. 

stre(t)ch. 

9 

w(gh)     . 

folgen, 
follow. 

tallow. 

SSogel, 
fowl. 

plow  or  plough. 

®art(en), 

3tit0e, 

Icgen, 

frofttg, 

Sftagb, 

9 

y  (i) 

yard. 

eye. 

lay. 

frosty. 

maid. 

rii 

k    .    .    . 

93  iicij, 

Sod), 

SRitd), 

rnadjen, 

gbttltd), 

**/ 

book. 

yoke. 

milk. 

make. 

godlike 

« 

gh  (y)     • 

bod), 
though. 

high. 

2id)t, 
light. 

3:od)ter, 
daughter. 

godly. 

410.  The  following  examples  will  illustrate  other  frequent  forms,  more 
or  less  irregular.  But  it  will  be  observed  that  the  changes  are  usually 
within  the  same  organ  :  — 

Germ.         Engl. 


gelb, 

fdjrauben, 

(Sdjftmlbe, 

"W7    • 

yellow. 

screw. 

swallow. 

.  to  (old 

f)f    • 

SBater, 
father. 

DOtt, 

full. 

SSoIf,     I 
folk. 

f 

v   . 

Dfen, 

elf, 

Su'd)fin, 

i 

oven. 

eleven. 

vixen. 

It) 

wh 

tott§, 

toenn, 

SBetle, 

what. 

when. 

while. 

224 


LESSON    XLV. 


rm. 

Engl. 

fort, 

SBetter, 

taufcnb, 

t 

th'     •     •    forth. 

weather. 

thousand. 

W 

sk  .    .    . 

school. 

©djtff, 
skiff. 

©^Oitm, 
scum. 

<5tf)Iaf, 

©rflleim, 

fdjtoetten, 

I*) 

s     '     •     '     sieep. 

slime. 

swell. 

~       Qenitg, 

Srog, 

la^en, 

n,  ft) 

Sh<=f)-     enough. 

trough. 

laugh. 

4 

*("•>•  r;: 

pitch. 

toarf)en, 
watch. 

* 

tdj, 

mid), 

bt4 

/<w/     .    .    7(old^ 

#*£  (old  w^r 

).      /^^  (old  //££<:) 

n 

/w,              3ieget, 

liegen, 

tugen, 

8 

'     /*/*. 

lie. 

lie. 

411.  The  liquids  I,  nt,  n,  r,  in  consequence  of  their  semi- vowel  charac- 
ter, readily  undergo  change ;  as :  — 

\  T  33ufen.       £>anf,         Seffel,        ®egcn. 

a)  INTERCHANGE 

bosom.        hemp.        fetter.         dagger. 

.  ,  toar.          §flfe,          rjerlieren,   frteren. 

r  with  s,  z  .    .    . 

was.  hare.          lose.  freeze. 

,\  ~  ol§.  folch,          ©an§,        un3.        50tunb, 

^)  OMISSION    .    .    . 

as.  such.         goose.          us.  mouth. 


,  <£cfiaffoi,  ^adhtiqalt,          SBrauttqam. 

INSERTION  ... 

scaffold.  nightingale.         bridegroom. 

brennen,  burA,         fiunbert,     breifetq. 
TRANSPOSITION  . 

burn.  through,     hundred,  thirty. 


412.  Letters  —  usually  initial  or  final — are  sometimes  also:  — 

(a)  OMITTED    .         ,    9tei^'         genu9'       !neifen'      *Et' 

like.  enough,      nip.  ax. 

(b)  ADDED  OR  RE-        Somm,       Conner,     (£rle,          (Erfe, 

TAIN  ED      .     .     lam\>.         thunder,    after.         e&ge< 

Sometimes  with  double  forms,  as  :  — 
<5cfjatten,  frfimelaen,  fpinnen, 

shade,  shadow.  (s}melt.  spinner,  spi(ii)der. 


§  4^4]          RELATION    OF    GERMAN    AND    ENGLISH.  225 

©neife,        ®nie,        fial&,         tootlte, 
(c)  SILENT    .....  ' 

gneiss.         knee.         halj  .         would. 

NOTE.  —  It  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  use  of  Ij  and  of  the  double  consonant  in  Ger- 
man is  often  purely  orthographical  ;  as,  @of)n,  son,  33ett,  bed. 

413.  For  the  vowels  —  the  most  changeable  elements  of  speech  —  no 
rules  can  be  laid  down.     To  a  great  extent  they  are  the  same  in  German 
and  English  —  or  only  orthographically  different.     The  following  are  some 
of  the  most  frequent  correspondences  (not  identical)  : 
Germ.  Engl. 

reiten,  toett.  fdietnen, 

Ct  i  .......  ,  .  etc. 

ride.  wide.  shine. 

ei  o.  .    ***'  ei"'  ""*        etc. 

bone.  one.  most, 

breit,  Gib,  fjetjer, 

Ct  oa      .     .     .     ,      '  etc. 

broad.  oath.  hoarse. 


0  ea     .    .    .  etc. 

bread.  ear.  death. 

33aum,  Sraum,  laufen, 

ou  ea     .    .    .  etc. 

beam.  dream.  Leap. 


(out. 

att  ou     .     .     .  .'          etc. 

mouse.  house.  loud. 

Unaccented  final  e  is  usually  lost  ;  as,  28e§pe,  wasp  :  or  silent  ;  as,  $a'fe, 
cheese  (this  e  in  English  being  often  purely  orthographical). 

NOTE.  —  The  grammatical  inflections  —  so  largely  lost  in  English  — 
are  purposely  not  here  considered.  These  would  require  a  different  treat- 
ment. 

414.  The  relation  of  German  to  English  is  still  further  obscured  by 
historical  influences  operating  —  especially  in  English  —  since  the  separa- 
tion of  the  two  languages.  Only  the  most  important  of  these  will  be 
indicated  :  — 

i.  The  introduction  of  many  foreign  words  into  English  —  mainly 
Latin  or  French  which  have  either  :  — 

(a)  Wholly  displaced  the  original  Germanic  words;  or, 

(b}  Usurped  their  meaning,  causing  them  to  be  transferred  to  a  different 
sense.  As,  in  the  latter  case  :  — 

Bieten,  to  offer  (bid).  £>eutfdj,  German  (Dutch). 

S3ltnb,  union  (bond).  (Mft,  spirit  (ghost.) 


226  LESSON    XLV.  [§  4*5 

$>ompf,  vapor  (damp).  &tnf)\,  chair  (stool). 

3)etfe,  cover  (dock).  £ier,  animal  (deer). 

—  and  many  others.     Thus  the  English  equivalent  is  not  readily  associated 
in  the  mind  with  its  corresponding  German  form. 

2.  Especially  is  this  true  with  English  derivatives  or  compounds.     Often, 
in  the  simple  word,  we  retain  the  native,  or  Germanic,  primitive ;  while  in 
the  derivatives  or  compounds,  we  use  foreign  words  whose  simple  root- 
forms  do  not  occur  in  English  ;  as  :  — 

PRIMITIVE.  DERIVATIVE. 

eye  (Stuge).  ocular,  etc. 

hand  (§Qttb).  manual,  etc. 

foot  (3u|).  pedal,  etc. 

book  (93ud)).  library,  etc. 

house  (£au3).  domestic,  etc. 

light  (Sirf)t).  illumination,  etc. 

deed  (Slat).  benefit,  etc. 
pro-ceed,    ) 

*»<•*«>•  re-ced,       f  .eto 

*A    C  etc 

pro-duce,   > 

re—mit,        ) 

send  (  enben).  \   etc. 

pre—rmse,    ) 

overset  (iifeerfe|en).  translate,  etc. 

3.  Also,  in  English  synonyms,  the  foreign  word  will  often  take  the  place 
of  the  Germanic  equivalent ;  as  :  — 

GERMANIC.  FOREIGN. 

fright.  terror. 

help.  assist. 

last.  final. 

likeness.  resemblance. 

opening.  aperture. 

small.  minute,  etc.  etc. 

Especially  in  the  language  of  books,  to  which  the  student's  attention 
is  first  directed,  the  foreign  element  in  English  will  occur  most  frequently. 
In  the  language  of  common  life  and  conversation  the  Germanic  element  is 
more  prominent. 

415.  All  the  causes  above  enumerated -—with  others  not  here  mentioned 

—  tend  to  obscure  the  intimate  kinship  between  German  and  English.     On 
the  other  hand,  English  words  from  Latin  or  Greek,  and  to  a  great  extent 


§  415]  RELATION    OF    GERMAN    AND    ENGLISH.  227 

from  French,  are  but  little  changed,  and  are  readily  recognized.  Conse- 
quently, the  relation  of  these  languages  to  English  is  apt  to  be  proportion; 
ately  exaggerated,  while  that  of  German  is  depreciated  or  ignored.  Yet  it 
must  not  be  forgotten  that  the  latter  is  far  closer  and  of  more  fundamental 
importance,  though  less  obvious  to  the  beginner  ;  especially  that  the 
grammatical  elements  of  English,  and  almost  all  of  its  simplest  and  most 
necessary  words,  are  of  Germanic  origin. 

NOTE.  —  In  consequence  of  the  differences  above  indicated,  which, 
added  to  the  strangeness  of  a  new  type,  give  to  German  at  first  the  appear- 
ance of  a  wholly  foreign  language,  it  has  not  been  deemed  expedient  to 
introduce  this  subject,  except  incidentally,  at  an  earlier  stage.  Now,  how- 
ever, it  may  in  many  ways  usefully  serve  for  instruction,  not  only  as  a 
help  in  acquiring  and  remembering  words,  singly  or  in  groups,  but  also 
by  adding  interest  to  the  study  of  German,  as  well  as  of  English,  in  various 
points  of  view.  f 

REMARK.  —  The  difficulty  has  been  fully  recognized  of  presenting  this 
subject  in  a  manner  which  should  be  wholly  elementary  and  helpful  for  the 
pupil,  yet  in  a  measure  satisfactory  for  the  teacher  or  scholar.  The  object 
has  been  to  give  only  what  might  be  useful  to  a  beginner  in  German. 

EXERCISE  XLV. 

The  following  examples  are  intended  partly  as  illustrations,  partly  as 
an  excercise  for  the  student.  ' 

German  :  to  find  English  cognate  form. 

SCffe,  $aufen,  $fanne,  ^ffaume,  ©eife,  gaffen,  ftretfen,  SSoH,  fcerfift,  @ie&, 
©djaufel,  jcijieben,  3inn,  3elje,  3unge,  fleffel,  Sfcufe,  £eufel,  ©paten,  gleiten, 
<2>cf)mieb,  Btoeig,  3etcf)en,  Seber,  SJSfab,  ©djujj,  treten,  fcletdjen,  (Stdje,  £011,  $feife, 
9ftagb,  frfjlau,  ©rfjale,  Slafdje,  ftrecfen,  ©tordj,  <Sarf)e,  28adje,  mil,  nrittel,  jalje, 
5af)tn,  ©am,  gefter(n),  morg(en),  feltett,  Sufen,  SKalb, 


II. 

English  :  to  find  German  cognate  form. 

Apple,  pool,  stamp,  sheep,  full,  even,  over,  haven,  ten,  twenty,  net,  salt, 
heath,  both,  south,  to  bite,  white,  drink,  to  drench,  deaf,  wide,  side,  old, 
blade,  leaf,  to  snuff,  scum,  skiff,  birch,  to  seek,  sickle,  cook,  crouch,  might, 
to  fight,  to  yawn,  year,  penny,  hail,  rain,  to  say,  said,  sorrow,  to  borrow* 
iron,  fodder,  ear,  him,  her,  comb. 


228  LESSON    XLV.  [§415 

in. 

Words  transferred  :  to  find  the  cognate  form. 

93ount,  tree;  SBein,  leg;  £ter,  animal;  93urg,  castle;  SBiirger,  citizen; 
©tirijl,  chair;  Bimmer,  room^  gimmermann,  carpenter;  f)ord)en,  to  listen; 
glangen,  to  shine;  ©djurae,  apron;  93oben,  ground;  £unb,  dog;  Meten,  to  offer; 
fasten,  to  ride;  tb(b)ten,  to  kill;  Fje&en,  to  lift;  grafcen,  to  dig;  forgen,  to  care; 
ried)en,  to  smell;  tragen,  to  bear;  S)egen,  sword;  bitmm,  stupid;  SSogel,  bird; 
2ftut,  courage;  SWer,  field;  geber,  pen;  2ftefjl,  flour;  3"rft,  prince;  ©raf, 
count;  33ltnb,  union;  ©locfe,  ^//;  Waiter,  farmer;  §etlanb,  saviour;  §bf)Ie, 
^z/<?;  S3Iume,  flower;  fonbern,  /<7  separate  (but}\  Xeit,  /ar/;  S3eteucf)tung, 
illumination;  28of)Itat,  benefit;  Uberfe^ung,  translation;  iiber&ringen,  to 
deliver;  SCufetnattberfoIge,  succession;  ^anbfrfiul),  glove  ;  ^ofjrbud;,  annual; 

I,  number;  5af)Ien,  /^  r^«w/;  &it,  time  ;  gte^en,  /^  draw  ;  £ltg,  draught. 


REMARK.  —  The  examples  in  this  Lesson,  as  already  remarked,  do  not  im- 
ply derivation  but  only  common  (cognate)  origin,  or  divergence  from  a  com- 
mon type.  The  German  is  given  first,  simply  because  that  is  the  form  the 
student  has  to  deal  with,  and  needs  to  recognize.  In  fact,  the  English 
form  is,  in  general,  of  a  more  primitive  type  than  the  German.  But  the 
more  scientific  arrangement  would  have  been  less  useful  for  elementary 
purposes. 

Many  of  the  examples  used  in  this  lesson  have  been  taken,  by  permission, 
from  the  excellent  "  Letters  for  Self-Instruction  in  German,"  by  Dr.  Solo- 
mon Deutsch.  They  are  purposely  limited  to  such  as  will  be  most  obvious. 
The  teacher  may  gradually  introduce  more  difficult  ones. 


PART  III. 


SYNTAX. 

In  the  following  lessons  the  uses  of  the  parts  of  speech  will 
be  illustrated,  and,  at  the  same  time,  some  irregular  matter, 
which  properly  belongs  to  the  accidence,  will  be  introduced. 

The  remaining  portion  of  the  grammar  may  either  be  studied 
consecutively,  or  used  by  reference  only,  in  connection  with 
the  general  work  of  the  student ;  and,  as  exercises,  either  the 
sentences  under  the  several  Lessons  or  the  continuous  pas- 
sages at  the  end  of  the  book,  and  others  similar,  may  be  used, 
as  teachers  may  prefer.  For  younger  pupils  the  former,  for 
more  advanced  the  latter,  may  perhaps  be  recommended. 


LESSON   XLVL 
Use  of  the  Articles. 

The  use  of  the  article  is,  in  the  main,  the  same  as  in  Eng- 
lish. Only  the  more  important  differences  will  be  noted. 

THE  DEFINITE  ARTICLE. 

416.  The  definite  article  is  used  more  largely  than  in  Eng- 
lish:- 

i.  The  definite  article  is  used  before  nouns  taken  in  their  most  compre- 
hensive sense,  meaning  the  whole  idea,  material,  or  class  ;  before  abstract 
and  collective  nouns,  and  infinitives  used  as  nouns.  Examples  :  ©a§  Sefcett 
6e§  2ftenfct)en  ift  furs,  the  life  of  man  is  short.  $>ie  Xugenb  ift  ba§  tyodjfte  ©lit, 

229 


230  LESSON    XLVI.  [§  416 

virtue  is  the  highest  good.  ®a§  ©olb  ift  foft&arer  al§  ba§  (Eifen,  gold  is  more 
precious  than  iron.  S>a§  9taud)en  ift  rjter  berfioten,  smoking  is  forbidden  here. 
9lad)  bent  (Effen,  after  dinner  (eating),  etc. 

2.  The  definite  article  is  used  also  before  names  of  seasons,  months  and 
days  ;  before  the  names  of  streets  and  mountains  ;  and  other  than  neuter 
names  of  countries.     Examples :  ^nt  ©omnter  ift  e§  ttmrm.     2)er  S)e<5emi>er 
ift  fait,     $>d)  toerbe  am  §reitag  anfommen.     (£r  toorjnt  in  ber  £$rriekrid;)§ftraf5e. 
<5ie  Fjafcen  ben  SWont&Ianc  fceftiegen.     ^ft  er  in  ber  Sitrtei  getoefen  ? 

3.  Proper  names  preceded  by  an  adjective  take  the  article.     ®er  orme 
&an§,  ber  tapfere  S3liid)er,  ba§  fd)bne  $ari§.     Sometimes  proper  names  take 
the  article  with  the  force  of  a  demonstrative  pronoun  :  £>a  ift  ber  £eft,  there 
is  (that well-known)  Tell;  sometimes  also  in  depreciatory  sense;  as,  <£oge 
bent  28ilf)elm,  er  fott  lontmen  ;  —  but  often  without  either  implication. 

4.  Sometimes  we  are  compelled  to  use  the  article  before  a  proper  name 
in  order  to  indicate  the  case ;  as  :  ^cf)  giefje  ©btfje  bent  ©djiffer  bor.     X^crftteS 
I)ot  ben  StdjitteS  iiberlebt.     And,  generally,  the  article  may  be  used  before 
personal  proper  names  in  lieu  of  declension  ;  as,  $5ie  5Mid)er  ber  Sftcme  ;  Me 
$riege  be§  Stteyanber;  id)  Ijobe  e§  bent  2)Jaj  gefagt  (for :  2JJarien§,  8IIejonber8, 
9Kajen).     (See  §  110-112.) 

NOTE.  —  Before  a  common  noun  also  the  article  is  sometimes  used  merely  to  show  the 
case  ;  as  :  (£r  6tel)t  33ier  ber  SRUcf)  t>or,  he  prefers  beer  to  milk  ;  id)  fantt  ber  SSorftdjt  nic^t 
Jll  totel  gebrOllC^en,  I  cannot  use  too  much  (of}  foresight. 

5.  Frequently  the  English  possessive  is  rendered  in  German  by  the 
article,  with  or  without  an  objective  pronoun  (§  439),  when  the  possessor 
is  sufficiently  pointed  out  by  the  context.     This  is  the  case  especially  when 
speaking  of" the  parts  of  the  body  or  of  the  clothing.     (Er  fdjuttelte  ben  $opf 
unb  ftecfte  bie  £anb  in  bte  Safdje,  he  shook  his  head  and  stuck  his  hand  into  his 
pocket.    (£r  Fjat  fid)  in  ben  finger  gefdjnitten,  he  has  cut  his  finger.    Sranen 
rollten  ifjr  iifcer  bie  SSangen  (over  her  cheeks). 

6.  The  definite  article  is  used  in  German,  where  English  uses  the  in- 
definite article,  with  a  distributive  sense.     For  instance :  ®rei  Xaler  bie 
(Stte,  three  dollars  a  yard.     SSiermal  bie  2&od)e,  four  times  a  week. 

7.  In  some  phrases  the  definite  article  is  used  where  it  is  not  used  in 
English;  as:  ^n  bie  ©d)ule,  in  bie  $trd)e;  to  school,  to  church.     S«  &er 
©d)itle,  in  ber  $trd)e ;  at  school,  at  church,     ^n  &er  ©tabt,  in  town.     SSor 
bent  Sriifjftiici,  before  breakfast.    $>ie  le^te  2Bod)e,   last  week.     3m   le^ten 
^arjre,  last  year,  etc. 

For  the  article  with  the  possessive  pronouns,  see  §  193. 


§  419]  THE    DEFINITE    ARTICLE.  23! 

417.  On  the  other  hand,  the  definite  article  is  in  a  few  cases 
omitted  in  German  where  used  in  English  :  — 

1.  In  a  few  pronominal  or  adjective  phrases  ;  as,  erjterer,  te^terer  ;  the  for- 
mer, the  latter  ;  befagter,  genannter;  the  aforesaid;  folgenber,  the  following, 
etc.  ;  and  in  a  few  technical  phrases  ;  as,  93eflagter,  the  defendant;  $ltiger,  the 
plaintiff;  ©cumber,  the  -writer;  llberbringer,  the  bearer,  etc.  —  yet  not  always. 

2.  In  phrases  expressing  direction  to  or  from  the  points  of  the  compass  ; 
as,  bon  !Korben,  gegen  SSeften,  gegen  2(benb,  towards  the  west,  etc.  ;  and  a  few 
others  ;  as,  bor  Slugen,  before  the  eyes  ;  alte  SSelt,  all  the  world,  etc.  (§  460,  4). 

NOTE.  —  Generally  —  as  also  in  English  —  the  article  is  not  used  in  phrases  where  a 
common  noun  is  joined  with  a  preposition.  93et  £ifcf)e,  at  table  ;  bei  §ofe,  at  court  ;  ju 
SSaffer,  by  sea  ;  511  Saitbe,  on  land  ;  ftil  3-lt{j,  on  foot  ;  §11  s$feri)e,  on  horseback  ;  jil  £>ailje, 
at  home  ;  nacfj  £>aufe,  home  ;  bei  Sage,  by  day  ;  bet  Sftacfit,  by  night  ;  mit  SSergniigen,  -with 
pleasure  ;  and  in  such  idiomatic  phrases  as,  Sltrft  Ijaben,  to  be  thirsty  ;  fill  ©ritnbe  gefjen, 
to  be  ruined,  to  perish  ;  ftit  (Startbe  fommen,  to  succeed  ;  511  ©tantie  bringen,  to  accomplish  ; 
ill  SSett  geften,  to  go  to  bed;  9lbfcf)ieb  nefimen,  to  take  leave.  (See  §  379.) 

418.  The  following  cases,  though  the  same  in  German  as 
in  English,  may  be  remarked  :  — 

i.  A  dependent  genitive  preceding  its  noun  excludes  the  article;  as, 


2.  No  article  is  used  with  nouns  taken  in  a  partitive  or  limited  sense  ; 
&s:  (5r  trinft  lieber  SSein  a(3  5Mer  ;  <£ttber  unb  ©olb  Ijabe  tc^  ntd)t;  nor  with 
nouns  used  merely  as  predicate  ;  as,  ber  neunte  9)fonat  ^etfet  (September. 

3.  The  article  is  omitted  in  proverbial  and  abridged  expressions;  as: 
SBeib  unb  $tnb  ;  Sung  unb  2Ut  ;  fu'r  $bnig  unb  SSatertonb  ;  Strmut  i(t  feine 
©ctjanbe  ;  ©ebulb  iibertoinbet  3(lle§  ;  Gljre  ift  ber  Sugenb  £of)n,  etc. 

THE  INDEFINITE  ARTICLE. 

419.  The  indefinite  article  differs  sometimes  from  English 
use  :  — 

1.  The  indefinite  article  is  omitted  before  a  simple  predicate  noun  ex- 
pressing occupation  or  condition,  or  before  a  descriptive  noun  after  dt3  ; 
as:  2ftein  ©ofjn  toar  $cmfmann,  after  er  ift  je£t  <Solbat  getuorben.     2H3  Sfjren* 
mann  fann  i^  ba§  nid)t  5uge6en,  as  a  man  of  honor,  etc. 

2.  For  omission  of  the  indefinite  article  before  Ijunbert,  tcmfenb,  see 
§  304.     For  the  phrases,  a  few,  many  a,  §  245  ;  what  a,  §  220  ;  twice  a  dayt 
etc.,  §  416,  6. 


232  LESSON    XLVI.  [§  420 

3.  No  article  is  used  in  German  in  adverbial  phrases  like  :  in  G£t(e,  in  a 
hurry;  mit  fd)hmd)er  ©ttmnte,  with  a  feeble  -voice;  in  28ur,  in  a  passion; 
and  in  such  idioms  as  :  id)  fjabe  $opfrt)erj,  Qafyn'mct'),  I  have  a  headache,  a 
toothache  ;  idj  rja&e  Sufi,  I  have  a  mind  ;  and  some  others. 

4.  For  etn  foldjer,  such  a,  see  §  207  ;  for  ein  jeber,  every  one,  §  245  (a). 

POSITION  OF  THE  ARTICLES. 

420.  i.  The  definite  article  precedes  all  other  qualifying  words,  except 
aHe,  all.  Examples:  Me  fceiben  $naoen,  both  the  boys;  ber  boppelte  ^3rei§, 
double  the  price  ;  but  ott(e)  Me  $naben,  or  bte  finafcen  atte. 

2.  The  indefinite  article  precedes  all  other  qualifying  words  except  fold) 
(§  207),  tneld)  (§  220),  toa§  fiir  (§  221),  and  mand)  (§  245),  even  where  in 
English  it  will  sometimes  follow  a  qualifying  word  ;  as  :  SSeld)  etn  2ftann  ! 
28a§  fiir  etn  S3ud)  ift  ba§  ?  2ftand)  etn  Sftann,  fold)  etn  3ftann  (or  etn  foldjer 
Sftann)  ;  also,  etn  fo  fd)bne§  3ftcibd)en,  so  pretty  a  girl;  etn  ju  falte§  93ab,  too 
cold  a  bath  ;  etne  fjoloe  <Stunbe,  ^d!//"  ««  hour,  etc. 


REPETITION  OF  THE  ARTICLES. 

421.  With  two  or  more  nouns  of  the  same  gender  and  number,  if  taken 
together,  the  definite  article  need  not  generally  be  repeated  ;  but  when  the 
article  would  not  have  like  forms  with  both  nouns,  it  must  be  repeated  be- 
fore each  of  them.  The  indefinite  article,  from  its  individual  nature,  must 
be  repeated  before  each  noun.  As  :  ©ie  ©nabe,  28et§fjett  unb  Siebe  ©otte§, 
the  mercy,  wisdom,  and  love  of  God.  $ie  ®raf  t  itnb  ber  9JJut  be§  Sbtoen,  the 
strength  and  (the]  courage  of  the  lion.  (Sr  faufte  etne  £aube,  cine  ©an§  unb 
ehtCtt  ^afen,  he  bought  a  pigeon,  a  goose,  and  a  hare. 

2.  But  the  definite  article  must  be  repeated  if  the  nouns  are  taken  dis- 
tinctively, or  in  contrast.     As  :  $d)  $&bt  ben  §errn  unb  ben  Wiener  gefeljen. 

3.  An  article  is,  however,  not  repeated  when  successive  nouns  designate 
the  same  object  ;  as,  ein  greunb  unb  SBruber,  a  friend  and  brother;  ber  &err 
Itnb  ©ebteter,  the  lord  and  master. 

EXERCISE  XLVL 

i.  At  nine  o'clock  we  shall  go  to  school.  2.  Have  you  been  at  church  ? 
3.  Do  you  prefer  (Ite&er)  to  travel  by  day  or  by  night?  4.  Have  you  ever 
seen  such  a  flower  ?  5.  How  many  German  lessons  did  you  take  last 
month  ?  6.  I  have  taken  eight  lessons,  two  a  week.  7.  The  sick  man  spoke 
with  a  feeble  voice.  8.  Life  is  short  ;  art  is  long.  9.  Nature  is  an  open 
book,  the  leaves  of  which  all  can  read  who  have  eyes.  id.  August  is  the 
hottest  month.  1  1.  The  boy  fell  from  a  tree  and  broke  his  (fid))  arm.  12. 


§  423]  ADDITIONAL    REMARKS    ON    NOUNS.  233 

Why  do  you  shake  your  head?  Have  you  a  headache  ?  13.  No,  I  have  a 
toothache.  14.  I  am  sorry  to  hear  that ;  go  to  a  dentist,  he  will  pull  out 
your  (^fjnen)  tooth.  15.  I  live  in  Frederick  Street;  my  brother  lives  in 
Broad  Street.  16.  The  soldier  held  a  sword  in  his  hand.  17.  Poor  Charles 
is  ill.  1 8.  Come  after  dinner  and  drink  a  glass  of  wine  with  me.  19.  This 
wine  costs  only  half  a  dollar  a  bottle ;  I  would  gladly  pay  double  the  sum 
for  it.  20.  During  the  heat  of  summer  we  shall  make  a  journey  on  foot  in 
Switzerland.  21.  In  the  long  wars  of  Alexander,  the  Greeks  marched  vic- 
toriously towards  the  East.  22.  The  good  [man]  has  ever  the  fear  of  God 
before  [his]  eyes.  23.  My  brother's  eldest  son  is  a  lawyer ;  the  youngest 
will  soon  become  a  preacher.  24.  As  a  Christian,  you  cannot  forget  so 
clear  a  proof  of  the  love  and  goodness  of  God. 


LESSON  XLVIL 

ADDITIONAL  REMARKS  ON  NOUNS. 

Number. 

422.  Some  nouns  are  used  only  in  the  singular :  — 

1.  Names  of  materials;  as:  ba§  %\<\\§,  flesh,  meat;  ber  $ottig,  honey; 
bie  Slfdje,  ashes.     Some  words  of  this  class  can  be  used  in  the  plural,  mean- 
ing '  kinds  of  '  ;  as,  bie  ©rtifer,  kinds  of  grass  ;  bie  ©dl^e,  kinds  of  salt,  salts. 
Sometimes  the  plural  has  a  slightly  different  meaning;   as:  bie   ©elber, 
sums  of  money  ;  bie  ^Sitpterc,  papers,  documents. 

2.  Nouns  of  abstract  meaning  and  infinitives  used  as  nouns ;  as :  bie 
Gljre,  honor;  ba§  Sob,  praise •;  ber  3tat,  counsel;  bcr  £ob,  death;  boo  SBe= 
ftreben,  the  effort,  etc. 

3.  But  for  many  such  nouns,  a  plural  sense  may  be  expressed  by  other 
forms;  as,   bie   (Sfjrenbegetgungen,    marks   of  honor;  3$atfrf)ltige,    counsels; 
XobeSfdUe,  deaths;  bie  SBeftre&ungen,  efforts,  etc.     So:  ber  ®of)l,  cabbage;  pi. 
$ol)lfbpfe,  cabbage-heads,  etc. 

4.  For  the  singular,  in  expressions  of  weight  or  measure,  see  §  312. 

423.  A  few  nouns  are  used  only,  or  usually,  or  with  special 
meaning,  in  the  plural :  — 

bie  £>ofett,  trousers.  ^Sfingflen,  Whitsuntide. 

bie  (Stnfiinfte,  the  revenue.  28eit)narf)ten,  Christmas. 


234  LESSON    XLVII.  [§  424 

Dftern,  Easter.  bie  3ttpen,  the  Alps. 

bie  Soften,  Lent.  bie  ©e&riiber,  the  brothers. 

bie  gerten,  the  vacation.  bie  ©efdjttnfter,  the  brother(s]  and 

bie  Seute,  people.  sister(s). 

bie  Soften,  the  expenses.  bie  (SItern,  the  parents. 

bie  9ftolfen,  whey.  bie  ©liebmafien,  M^  limbs, 

bie  Xriimmer,  ^  ruins.  and  some  others. 

424.  Some  nouns  have  a  double  meaning  in  the  singular, 
and  in  the  plural  a  separate  form  in  each  meaning :  — 

bag  SBatlb,  the  ribbon.  bie  SBa'ttber,  the  ribbons. 

ba§  SBanb,  the  tie,  bond.  bie  SBanbe,  the  ties. 

bie  SBanf,  //&*  bench.  bie  SBd'nfe,  */*<?  benches. 

bie  S3anf,  //&,?  (commercial}  bank.      bie  33anfen,  //&<?  banks. 

ba§  ©cfidjt,  the  face.  bie  ®eftd)ter,  the  faces. 

ba§  ©efid)t,  /^<?  vision.  bie  ©eftdjte,  visions. 

ba§  2id)t,  ^//^  /*£•///.  bie  iiiditer,  //5^  lights. 

ba§  2td)t,  //J^  candle.  bie  Sidjte,  //5^  candles. 

ber  <Strau|,  ///*?  nosegay.  bie  ©traujie,  //z^  nosegays. 

ber  ©traufe,  ///^  ostrich.  bie  ©traufee(n),  //^^  ostriches. 

ber  3°ff,  ^^  inch.  bie  3°tte,  //^^  inches. 

ber  3ott,  ^^  &>//.  bie  3otte,  ///<?  ^//j,  and  others. 

425.  (0)   The  following  have  double  plurals  with  different 
meanings :  — 

ba§  §orn,  the  horn.        bie  Corner,  the  horns.  bie  £orne,  ^'«^j  of  horn. 

ba§  iianb,  //5<?  land.          bie  Sd'ttber,  separate  bie   Sanbe,    countries    col- 
countries,  lectively  (or  poetic). 

ber  €>rt,  the  place.  bie  Drier,  single  places.  b'\t£)iitt  places  collectively. 

ba§  SBort,  the  word,         bie  SGSbrter,  jm^  bie  SBorte,  connected 
and  some  others.                     words.  words. 

(b)  £)er  Saben,  the  shop,  shutter,  uses  both  plurals  :  bie  Sciben,  bie  Saben  : 
but  in  the  compound,  bie  Senfterlaben  usually. 

(c)  The  noun  9Jconn,  man,  presents  several  peculiarities :  — 

i.  Nouns  compounded  with  3ftann  form  their  plural  with  Ceute,  people., 
which  is  only  used  in  the  plural,  as  collective.     As  :  — 

ber  Str6eit§mann,  the  workingman.  bie  SlrbeitSIeute,  work-people. 

ber  ®aufmamt,  the  merchant.  bie  $aitfleute,  merchants. 


§426] 


ADDITIONAL    REMARKS    ON    NOUNS. 


235 


bet  Canbmann,  the  countryman,  rustic.  bie  Sanbleute,  rustics. 
bet  SanbSmaitn,  the  (fellow)  countryman,  bie  SanbSleute,  (fellow)  countrymen. 
But  the  ordinary  form  banner  must  be  used  when  speaking  of  individ- 
uals.  Sfyrenmtinner,  men  of  honor ;  <5taat§manner,  statesmen;  and  also  when 
a  distinction  of  sex  is  to  be  made:  ©Ijelente,  married people ;  Sfjemcinner, 
married  men  ;  (Sfjefrauen,  married  women. 

2.  The  plural  bie  9ftonnen  means  vassals,  warriors;  as:  ©rfiicft  <jn  jetnen 
Sftannen  alien  in  bem  Canbc  <£d)U)t)3,  etc. 

3.  SQiann,  meaning  a  body  of  men  collectively,  after  a  numeral  is  con- 
strued as  a  noun  of  measure  ^.nd  is  indeclinable  (§  312).      Example  :   Sine 
Strmee  toon  breifeig  toufenb  Sftann,  an  army  of  thirty^ thousand  men. 

NOTE. —  Colloquially,  in  imitation  of  §  120,  sometimes  occur  plural  forms  in  -§;  as 
bie  ®erl§,  fie  labels,  etc. 

For  other  special  forms  in  plural,  see  §  105. 


Gender. 


426.  Some  nouns  are  of  the 
der  and  meaning.     As  :  — 

(a)  With  the  same  plurals  :  — 

ber  Gfjor,  the  chorus,  choir. 
ba3  Gijor,  the  choir  (place), 
ber  £etbe,  the  heathen. 
bie  Oe^ef  the  heath. 
ber  (srbe,  the  heir. 
ba§  Sr6e,  the  inheritance  (no 
and  others. 

(b)  With  different  plurals  :  — 

ber  33anb,  the  volume. 
bag  23anb. 

ber  S3tmb,  the  union. 
ba§  23ltnb,  the  bundle. 
ber  SBauer,  the  farmer. 
ba§  33  a  tier,  the  cage. 
ber  ©djilb,  the  shield. 
ba§  ©rf)tlb,  the  sign. 
ber  £or,  the  fool. 
ba§  Sor,  the  gate. 
and  others. 


same  form,  with  different  gen- 


ber  @ee,  the  lake. 
bie  ©ee,  the  sea. 
ber  £etl,  the  part. 
bo§  £ett,  the  share. 
ber  SBerbienft,  the  earning. 
pi.).     ba8  SBerbtenjt,  the  merit, 


pi.  bie  33anbe. 
See  §  424. 
"  bie  S3itnbe. 
"  bie  SBunbe. 
"  bie  33auern. 
"  bie  Saner. 
"  bie  <£d)tlbe. 
"  bie  ©djilber. 
"  bie  Soren. 
"  bie  Store, 


236  LESSON    XLVII.  [§  427 

Such  details  must  be  sought  in  the  dictionaries.     (See  also  §  105.) 
For  special  cases  in  which  the  grammatical  gender  and  the  natural  gen- 
der do  not  correspond,  see  §  452. 

Plural  of  Proper  Names. 

427.  The  plural   of  proper   (personal)  names  is  variously 
formed:  — 

(a)  Christian  Names :  Masculines  ending  in  a  consonant  usually  add  e  : 
bie  Subtoige;  in  a  vowel,  g  :  Me  £>ugog.     Feminines  in  -e   add  n  :  Me  9fta= 
rten,  Me  Gtjarlotten  ;  in  -a,  add  g  :  bie  Saurag,  Me  2lnnag ;  in  a  consonant, 
add  e  :  bie  Glifabetfje. 

(<c)  Surnames :  ending  in  a  sibilant  add  e  :  bie  Setbnt^e  ;  in  other  conso- 
nants, add  usually  g,  sometimes  e  :  bie  (Mmmg,  bie  ©djmibtS,  bie  Stottberge ; 
in -e,  add  sometimes  it:  bie  ©cfyul^en  :  or,  generally,  remain  unchanged: 
bie  <5rf)itter,  bie  Sefftng,  bie  <5d)legel. 

(c)  When  several  personal  names  are  combined,  only  the  last  is   de- 
clined :  Sftarta  (Stuartg  £ob,  griebrid)  JRiidcrtS  ©ebtrfjte ;  or,  ber  Sob  2ftarta 
Stuartg. 

NOTE.  —  But  fcon  excludes  the  declension  of  the  following  name,  unless  immediately 
before  the  governing  noun.  Thus  :  griebritf)  Don  <Srf)IegeIs  SBerfe ;  or  :  bie  SBerfe  3-riet>rid)§ 
»ou  @cf)legel. 

(d)  Some  foreign  plurals  are  adapted  or  retained :  bie  (Etcerone(n),  bie 
$fterone(n)  (Latin);  bie  Gopuletti,  bie  SKebtci  (Italian);  bie  $itt3  (English), 
etc.     And  a  few  biblical  names  (besides  ^efu§  and  G^rtftuS,  §   113)  retain 
the  original  forms  ;  as,  Sftariti,  2>ol)annt§,  SJJatt^at  (genitives),  etc. 

There  remains,  however,  much  irregularity  in  the  forms  of  proper 
names  and  foreign  words  generally.  (See  §  120,  a.)  For  the  article  with 
proper  names,  see  §  416,  3,  4. 

Titles. 

428.  The  syntax  of  titles  presents  some  peculiarities:  — 

i.  (a)  If  the  title  (or  an  appellative  noun),  preceding  the  proper  name, 
has  the  article,  the  proper  name  is  not  declined  (§  416) :  $>ie  Xaten  beg 
$i5ntg§  $arl  be§  ©rften  unb  fetneS  SofyneS  fart  be§  3tt>etten, 

(b)  If  the  title  is  without  the  article,  the  proper  name  alone  is  declined: 
®ie  9tegierung  ®bntg  £einrid)§  beg  2lrf)tett  ;  ftoijer  $ar(g  £aten  ;  or,  bie  Saten 
ftaifer  5?or[g. 

(c)  The  title,  even  with  the  article,  is  often  left  undeclined :  2)ie  SSerfe 
be§  ^5rojeffor(g)  Otto.     Except  £>err,  which  must  always  be  declined :  3)cig 


§  427]  TITLES.  237 


be§  £errn  23raun  (or  §errn  33raun§)  ;  and  on  the  address  of  a  letter  : 
£errn  (or  bent  £errn)  ®arl  93raun. 

2.  (a)  The  title  §err,  with  or  without  article,  is  often  used  where  in  Eng- 
lish no  such  prefix  occurs  :  (£>er)  &err  ^rofejfor  SBraun,  bet  &err  ©rof,  Sljr 
£err  Setter,  etc.,  or  in  address,  without  article  :  (£>err)  Softer,  etc. 

(b~)  Often  the  wife  of  an  official  receives  her  husband's  title,  with  the 
prefix  (bie)  grau;  as  :  (S)te)  grew  ^rofeffor  Otto;  or,  in  absence  of  the  proper 
name:  3)ie  grau  ^rofcffor  —  the  article  being  usual,  except  in  address. 

(c)  Note  the  forms  usual  in  address  :  &err,  Mr.  ;  grew,  Mrs.  •  grciuletrt, 
Miss  —  before  the  name;  or,  omitting  the  name:  Sftein  £>err,  Sir;  9JJa= 
borne,  or  gnabtge  $rau,  Madam;  graulein,  or  metn  (gnabigeS)  griiulein, 
Miss;  —  meine  £>erren,  Gentlemen,  etc. 

EXERCISE  XLVIL 

i.  Are  you  not  an  Englishman?  I  think  we  are  countrymen.  2.  The 
country-people  lost  their  cattle  and  horses  during  the  war.  3.  An  army  of 
forty  thousand  men  attacked  the  town.  4.  Several  merchants  have  failed; 
yet  they  are  men  of  honor.  5.  Have  you  [any]  holidays  at  (511)  Whitsun- 
tide ?  6.  No,  but  we  have  a  week  at  Easter,  and  a  fortnight  at  Christmas. 
7.  These  (S)a3)  were  the  last  words  of  my  dear  old  friend.  8.  She  has  put- 
out  the  lights.  9.  The  banks  are  closed  on  (be§)  Sunday.  10.  Many 
benches  stand  around  the  fountain,  where  one  sees  a  crowd  [of]  work- 
people. ii.  The  Alps  are  the  highest  mountain-range  in  all  Europe.  12. 
The  brothers  Grimm  were  professors  in  the  University  of  (511)  Berlin.  13. 
The  largest  lake  in  Switzerland  is  much  smaller  than  many  lakes  in  Amer- 
ica. 14.  The  heathen  was  so  called  because  in  (the)  old  times  he  dwelt  on 
the  heath.  15.  The  volumes  of  the  great  poet  were  adorned  with  blue  rib- 
bons. 1  6.  What  would  this  world  be  if  the  fools  were  all  dead?  17.  The 
Gladstones  and  the  Brights  are  the  glory  of  the  English  State.  18.  The 
poems  of  the  unhappy  Heinrich  Heine  are  now  the  joy  of  the  young  and 
of  the  old.  19.  You  will  find  these  words  in  Wilhelm  von  Schlegel's 
Works,  on  the  tenth  page  of  the  third  volume.  20.  The  Claras,  the 
Lauras,  and  the  Leonores  of  the  present  are  the  same  as  (ttrie)  the  Adel- 
heids  and  the  Brunhilds  of  the  past.  21.  The  Goethes  and  the  Schillers 
of  German  poetry  belong  to  the  past.  22.  The  works  of  Professor  Stein- 
thai  are  known  in  all  Europe.  23.  The  reigns  of  King  Charles  I.  and  of 
his  son  Charles  II.  were  the  most  unfortunate  of  (the)  English  history.  24. 
Dr.  Brown  and  his  daughter,  Mrs.  Professor  Smith,  were  at  (bet)  the  mar- 
riage of  Mr.  John  Rich  with  Miss  Anna,  youngest  daughter  of  General 
Wilson. 


LESSON    XLVIII.  [§  429 

LESSON  XLVIIL 

Use  of  the  Cases. 

REMARK.  —  With  a  view  to  practical  rather  than  scientific  purposes, 
the  Cases  will  be  treated  chiefly  with  reference  to  their  correspondences — 
or  the  contrary  —  in  English. 

THE  NOMINATIVE. 

429.  The  nominative,  having  nearly  the  same  uses  in  Ger- 
man as  in  English,  calls  for  but  little  remark. 

1.  The  nominative  stands  as  the  subject  of  a  sentence.     But  the  sub- 
ject nominative  is  omitted  :  — 

(a)  Usually  with  the  imperative  proper  (§  176) ;  but  not  when  the  third 
plural  pronoun  is  used  in  address   (§   188)  —  except  sometimes  to  avoid 
repetition ;  as,  teben  <5ie  toof)I  unb  gru'feen  bie  i^fjrigen. 

(b)  With  some  impersonals,  and  some  expletive  forms,  unless  the  sub- 
ject (e§)  precedes;  as,  nridj  fjungert ;  mir  ttrirb  geraten,  etc.     (See  §  453.) 
And  often  colloquially  ;  as,  fam  etn  $na&e,  for  e3  lam  etn  ®nabe.     (§  346, 
note). 

(c)  Also,  more  rarely,  a  personal  pronoun ;  as,  fjab's  ntcljt  geton,  rjdft'3 
md)t  getroffen —  when  the  sense  is  clear. 

2.  With  the  verbs  fetn,  to  be ;  toerben,  to  become ;  Mei&en,  to  continue ; 
fieifcen,  to  be  called ;  fdjeinen,  to  seem,  to  appear,  and  a  few  others  of  the 
same  kind  ;  and  with  the  passive  of  some  verbs  which  take  in  the  active  a 
second  accusative  as  factitive  (or  complementary)  object  —  such  as  nennett, 
to  name  ;  taufen,  to  baptize,  etc.,  the  predicate  noun  will  be  a  nominative. 
As:  28ie  fjetpt  biejer  $lo£?    (£8  ift  ber  £arI8ptofc.     £r  ift  ein   unttriffenber 
Sftenfrf)  geblieben.     (£r  ift  ntein  Sreunb  getoorben.     3)a3  $tnb  hwrbe  ^o^ann 
getauft. 

NOTE.  —  SBerben  often  takes  ju,  as,  §  443,  d\  ber  Xro^fen  iflirb  Jll  ©ift,  becomes  poison. 

3.  The  nominative — independent   or   vocative  —  is  also    the  case  of 
direct  address  or  exclamation :  ®u  £>etlige,  rufe  bein  Sinb  jimicr,  Thou,  holy 
one,  etc. ;  ©djonblidjer,  wretch  ! 

4.  (a)  A  word  in  apposition  with  a  nominative — subject,  predicate,  or 
vocative  —  will  also  of  course  be  nominative.     As  :  3>tf),  etn  junger  ©djiiler, 
farm  tfjtt,  ben  gefel^rten  3ftann,  nict)t  unterric^ten ;  <Sie  guter  toerben  mid)  bo^ 
nic^t  berlaffen,  you,  good  man  (as  you  are)  will  not,  etc. 

(b)  With  013,  toier  as,  a  nominative,  in  seeming  apposition,  will  appear 
as  subject  of  an  implied  verb  :  liefer  ®nabe  fdjreibt  tote  ein  Sftamt. 

NOTE.  —  With  a  reflexive  verb  the  accusative  may  also  stand  :  as,  er  fitt)(t  ftcf)  eineit  (or 
^in)  2Rnmt — the  former,  perhaps,  more  usually. 


§43J]  THE    GENITIVE.  239 

THE  GENITIVE. 

THE  GENITIVE  WITH  NOUNS. 

430.  The  genitive  depends  on  nouns  in  various  relations:  — 

(a)  Regularly  the  genitive  follows  the  governing  noun.    But  it  has  been 
seen  (§  352,  3)  that  a  personal  (subjective  or  possessive)  genitive  often  pre- 
cedes; and  that  in  poetry  and  elevated  style,  this  use  is  widely  extended — 
the  genitive  then  excluding  the  article  (§  418,  i).    This  is  sometimes  called 
the  "  Saxon  Genitive,"  or  Possessive :  $)er  ©ofjn  beg  ©artnejg,  or  $)e§  ©drt= 
nerg  (Soljn ;  bie  flatter  beg  SSaumeg ;  bet  <Sd)opfer  ber  SBelt ;  ber  ©djein  ber 
Sugenb;  bag  ©lucf  ber  Stebe ;   ein  Sftann  Ijofjen  SttterS;  Me  fjolbe  ©abe  ber 
S)td)tung,  etc.    And  in  poetry  :  S)er  $)id)tung  t)olbe  ©abe ;  beg  9ted)teg  $robe ; 
ber  Saitme  bidjt  ©eftraud) ;  meiner  Seiben  brennenbeg  ©efiifif ;  grantreidjg  fer* 
ner  Ocean,  etc. 

NOTE.  — The  effect  of  this  position  is  to  dignify,  as  if  by  personification.  The  same  is 
often  done  in  English  ;  as  :  The  lightning' s  flash  ;  the  cannon's  roar  ;  England's  Queen, 
etc.  ;  but  with  less  freedom  than  in  German. 

(b)  But  ambiguity  in  the  relation  of  the  genitive  must  be  avoided  ;  and, 
when  necessary  for  this  purpose,  the  objective  relation  will  be  expressed 
by  a  preposition.     Thus  distinguish:    S)te  ^iebe  511  ©ott  from  bie  Siebe 
©otte£ ;  ber  £>af5  Qegen  ben  getnb  from  ber  §afe  beg  geinbeS  (or  b'e8  geinbeg 
§afc),  etc.  (as  in  English,  the  choice  of  a  friend ^from  a  friend' 's  choice,  etc.). 

(c)  Especially  when  the  corresponding  verb  is  construed  with  a  preposi- 
tion, the  objective  relation  after  a  noun  will  take  the  same  preposition; 
as  :  S)er-©eban!e  an  ©ott  (benfen  an),  the  thought  of  God;  bie  gurd)t  t>or  bem 
£obe  (fid)  fiirdjten  Dor),  the  fear  of  death,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  But  on  the  other  hand,  in  some  phrases,  especially  of  persons,  the  English  to 
will  represent  the  German  genitive  ;  as  :  (Silt  3"Ctnt>  feine£  93aterlonbe3,  an  enemy  to  his 
country,  etc. 

(d)  The  genitive  of  a  personal  pronoun  is  rarely  used  in  relation  with  a 
noun ;   but,   instead,    the   possessive   adjective ;   or,  objectively,  often  a 
preposition ;  as  :  ©eine  Stebe  311  nur  (not  meiner),  his  love  of  me  ;  er  tear  tfir 
28a'd)ter  etnft  (her  keeper) ;  bein  5lnbltcf,  the  sight  of  you. 

(c)  The  English  idiomatic  this  heart  of  mine  is  simply,  metn  |)er5  ;  a 
friepd-~o/L_j2iine,  ein  3reutt^  bow  wit,  or  etner  meiner  ^reunbe  (one  of  my 
friends). 

THE  PARTITIVE  GENITIVE. 

431.  The   genitive   names   the   whole   of   which   a   part    is 
taken;  as,  er  jcfjenfte  be§  28eine§,  {some)  of  the  wine.     But  this 
relation  is  also  largely  expressed  otherwise: 


240  LESSON    XLVIII.  [§  431 

(a)  With  numerals,  pronouns,  or  a  superlative,  the  same  relation  is 
often  expressed  by  the  preposition  bon,  sometimes  itnter.  Examples: 
28elrf)er  ntetner  §rettnbe,  or  toelc&.er  bon  meinen  grennben,  -which  of  my 
friends ;  bte  fc^bnfte  alter  §rauen,  or  bie  frfjbnfte  bon  aUen  §rouen,  the  fair- 
est of  all  -women;  feiner  feiner  ®afte,  or  f enter  bon  feinen  ©aften,  no  one  of  his 
guests ;  unter  alien  nteinen  $)tenern  feiner,  etc. 

(b}  As  §  430  (d},  the  genitive  of  personal  pronouns  will  not  occur,  but 
the  preposition  instead;  as:  SSelrfjer  bon  un§  (not  itnfer),  -which  of  us ;  fetner 
bon  tfjnen  (not  ifjrer),  etc.  The  phrase  itnfer  enter,  one  of  us  (of  our  sort), 
is  an  exception.  Such  phrases  as  e§  ftnb  itnfer  bier,  there  are  four  of  us, 
etc.,  are  really  not  partitive. 

(c)  After  nouns  of  measure,  weight,  number  or  quantity  a  simple  noun 
is  construed  without  case-declension  (§  312)  ;  as:  ©edjS  glafdjen  SBetn,  six 
bottles  of  wine;  ^toet  2)uj3enb  Ster,  two  dozen  (of}  eggs  ;  etn  ©titcf  33rot,  apiece 
of  bread;  ein  Xropfen  SBaffer,  a  drop  of  water;  etn  Regiment  ©olbaten,  a  regi- 
ment of  soldiers.  But  if  the  noun  is  accompanied  by  an  adjective,  the 
genitive  or  bon,  may  be  used.  For  instance :  Sine  9ftenge  retfer  tpfel,  a  great 
number  of  ripe  apples.  Sin  ®la§  btefe§  3Setn§,  or  etn  ®Ia§  bon  biefem  SSetn, 
a  glass  of  this  wine ;  but  also,  etne  2ftenge  retfe  3tpfef,  etc.  —  now  most 
usually. 

NOTE.  — But  the  older  genitive  still  occurs  in  poetry,  and  in  some  phrases;  as:  Sen 
fceftett  Secfjer  2Beut§  ;  ntdjt  »ie(  geberlefenS  madjen,  to  make  not  much  (of}  ceremony,  etc. 

(d}  By  like  apposition,  the  proper  name  of  a  country  or  town,  or  of  a 
month,  preceded  by  the  common  name,  is  not  declined  ;  as :  ©a§  $b'mg= 
reicf)  <5>arf)fen,  the  kingdom  of  Saxony  ;  bie  ©tabt  bonbon,  the  city  of  London; 
im  9ftonat  2ftat,  in  the  month  of  May.  The  same  use  extends  to  the  name 
of  the  month  in  dates :  £>er  fecfjfte  9ftat  (§  309). 

PREPOSITION  INSTEAD  OF  GENITIVE. 

432.  In  some  cases,  of,  after  a  noun,  is  regularly  translated 
by  t)0tt  instead  of  the  genitive.  Such  are:  — 

(a)  In  terms  of  rank  or  title;  as:  ber  ®bnig  bon  Snglanb.     (See  §  in.) 

(b}  Before  names  of  materials  ;  as :  Sine  S3ritcfe  bon  Stfen  (also  etne 
eiferne  SBritde). 

(c)  Before  cardinal  numerals,  and  other  indeclinables ;  as :  ©in 
bon  fed)&tg  ^ifjren ;  ber  SSater  bon  bret  ®tnbern  (but  also,  btefer  bret 

(d}  And,  generally,  whenever  the  case  is  not  made  clear  by  inflection ; 
as :  £>te  Cage  bon  ^Bart§  (but  also,  ber  <£tabt  ^art§) ;  bie  ©trafjen  bon  Sonbon, 
orSonbon§  (§  no,  c).  See  also  §  430. 


§  433]  THE    GENITIVE.  24! 

(e)  Sometimes  the  preposition  will  be  used  to  avoid  a  succession  of 
genitives;  as,  S)er  ciltefte  Don  ben  ©bljnen  be§  $bntg§,  or  Don  be3  $bnig3 
<£b'I)nen. 

NOTE.  —  Generally,  the  use  of  the  genitive  in  such  relations  is  less  common  than  for- 
merly, and  there  is  a  growing  tendency  to  use  the  analytic  construction  with  preposition. 
This  is  in  conformity  with  the  general  tendency  in  modern  languages. 

It  has  already  been  seen  that  the  genitive  relation  is  often  expressed  by 
a  compound  noun ;  as,  $ie  33udjbrurferfunft,  the  art-of-the-printing-of -books, 
etc.  (§  389.) 

EXERCISE  XLVIII. 

i.  I  want  two  pounds  of  raisins,  three  pounds  of  sugar,  five  pounds  of 
coffee,  and  four  pounds  of  tea.  2.  Which  of  my  friends  will  in  the  hour 
of  need  stand  by  me  ?  3.  The  city  of  Rome  is  built  on  seven  hills.  4.  The 
youngest  of  my  siste.-s  is  still  at  school.  5.  Bring  me  a  glass  of  beer.  6.  A 
marble  (adj.}  statue  of  the  king  stands  in  the  market-place.  7.  The  fear 
of  punishment  is  stronger  than  the  hope  of  reward.  8.  He  died  at  the  age 
of  seventy  years.  9.  The  kingdom  of  Saxony  is  the  smallest  kingdom  in 
Germany.  10.  The  want  of  (an)  water  forced  the  enemy  to  give  up  the 
siege,  ii.  William  the  First,  king  of  Prussia,  was  born  on  the  twenty- 
second  of  March,  1797.  12.  How  many  sacks  of  potatoes  has  the  farmer 
bought?  13.  He  is  the  best  and  oldest  of  all  my  friends.  14.  Want  of 
money  compelled  us  to  give  up  our  vacation-ramble  in  Switzerland.  15. 
Where  have  you  bought  these  multitude  of  books?  You  will  never  be  able 
to  read  them.  16.  Send  me  three  dozen  eggs ;  do  not  forget  it,  three  dozen 
new-laid  (fttfdj)  eggs.  17.  We  shall  have  holidays  in  the  month  of  August. 
1 8.  The  thought  of  his  poor  children  drove  the  unhappy  father  to  dare  the 
utmost.  19.  The  Emperor  of  Germany  is  nephew  to  the  King  of  England. 
20.  This  noble  hero  went  into  the  war  as  [a]  young  captain,  and  returned 
as  a  celebrated  general.  21.  He  is  a  man  of  high  rank  and  of  great  dignity 
of  (the)  behaviour.  22.  The  Colossus  of  Rhodes  was  one  of  the  greatest 
wonders  of  (the)  antiquity.  23.  The  false  appearance  of  virtue  is  called 
hypocrisy.  24.  Unhappy  man!  he  was  a  good  friend  of  mine  —  his  loss 
is  grievous  to  me ! 


LESSON  XLIX. 

The  Genitive.  —  Continued. 

GENITIVE  WITH  ADJECTIVES. 

433.  with  the  following  adjectives  and  their  opposites,  the 
genitive  is  used  as  limiting  or  denning  object,  corresponding 
generally  to  English  of. 


242  LESSON    XLIX.  [§  433 

bebiirftig,  in  want.  mad)tig,  master  (of}. 

begierig,  greedy.  \  mil  be,  tired. 

beftwfct,  conscious.  t  fatt,  full,  tired. 

etngebenf,  mindful.  fcfyulbtg,  guilty. 

ftifyig,  capable.  ftd)er,  sure. 

frol),  glad.  iiberbriiffig,  weary. 

getrnB,  certain.  berbadjttg,  suspected. 

funbig,  acquainted  (with).  t&ott  (boiler),  full. 

leer,  empty.  ftoert,  worth. 

t  Io§,  r*V/  of.  t  toiirbtg,  worthy. 

and  a  few  others,  of  like  meaning.  Examples  (§  353):  be3  £eben§  ntiibe ; 
jeneS  tlnternefimeng  fdfjig  ;  feiner  6ad)e  getotB  ;  be§  SSegeS  unfunbig ;  boE  gol-- 
bener  ©efafee ;  ^roan^ig  finger  boiler  3linge  (see  note). 

NOTE.  —  But  some  of  these  adjectives  (marked  t)  may  take  any  accusative  (§  441,  c); 
and  others  may  be  construed,  preferably,  with  a  preposition  ;  as,  begtertg  ttacf)  ;  frofj  ilber ; 
Doft  Don,  etc.  The  indeclinable  DoHer  stands  only  just  before  a  dependent  noun. 

GENITIVE  WITH  VERBS. 

434.  As  a  like  limiting  or  defining  object,  the  genitive  is 
used: 

(a)  As  single  object,  with  a  few  verbs  :  — 

bebiirfen,  to  need.  Barren,  to  wait  (for). 

benfen,  gebenfen,  to  remember.  lad)en,  to  laugh  (at). 

entraten,  to  dispense  (with).  fdjonen,  to  spare. 

ermangeln;  to  be  without.  fpotten,  to  mock  (at). 

and  a  few  others.  Examples :  ©ebenfe  metner ;  fp'otte  nidjt  ber  Ungliirflt^en  ; 
ber  Slrme  bebarf  ber  nottnenbigften  Seben§mtttel ;  ttrir  ^aben  beiner  lange  ge= 
Ijarrt,  etc.  Sometimes,  as  a  so-called  false  reflexive:  er  jdjont  jeiner  (§251). 

NOTE.  —  But  some  of  these  may  be  construed  with  an  accusative ;  as,  jemanfoen  fdjonen  : 
or  with  a  preposition  ;  as,  iiber  jemanbeit  lacfieit ;  an  etivaS  benfen,  etc.  With  some,  the 
genitive  is  almost  wholly  poetical  ;  and  generally  its  use,  both  with  verbs  and  adjectives,  is 
much  less  common  than  formerly,  the  form  with  preposition  being  usually  preferred. 

2.  Some  other  verbs,  formerly  used  with  the  genitive,  but  now  more  usually  with  the 
accusative  or  a  preposition,  are  :  ncf)ten,  begefjren,  bvaucfjen,  gebraucfjen,  geniefeen,  lotynen, 
Dflegen,  fcerfefjlen,  toergeffen,  tcaljrneljmett,  marten. 

(b)  As  secondary,  or  remote,  object  (of  the  thing)  with  some  verbs  hav- 
ing  direct  object  (of  the  person)  in  the  accusative.     Such  are:  verbs  usu- 
ally followed  in  English  by  of ;  as,  to  accuse,  acquit,  etc.;  to  warn,  convict, 
etc. ;  privative  verbs,  to  rob,  deprive,  etc. ;  and  verbs  derived  from  adjectives 
governing  a  genitive  (§  433)  —  yet  also,  in  many  cases,  with  alternative  use 
of  a  preposition.     As  : 


§  435]  GENITIVE    WITH    VERBS.  243 

anflagen,        )  berauben,  to  rob,  deprive. 

f   -  f    ,,  .  r  /V?  accuse. 

befd)ulbtgen,    >  entljeben,  /*  relieve. 

erinnern,  to  remind.  entlebigen,  to  rid. 

freifpredjen,  to  acquit.  entlaffen,  to  dismiss. 

mafjnen,  to  warn.  berfidjern,  to  assure. 

iiberfitfyren,  to  convict.  luiirbtgen,  to  deem  worthy. 

and  a  few  others  of  like  meaning.  Examples :  Sftcm  befdjulbtgt  iljn  eine§ 
fdjtoeren  23erbred)en§ ;  ber  3lid)ter  fprad)  tt)n  alter  ©djulb  fret ;  man  fjut  mid) 
meine3  SSermogenS  beraubt ;  er  fjat  mid)  feiner  8reunbfd)aft  getoiirbigt,  etc. 

Or,  as  single  object  with  the  passive  of  such  verbs  :  (£r  ift  etne§  fdjtoeren 
SSerbred)en§  befdjitlbtgt  toovben  ;  ber  2J?ann  i[t  be§  S)tenfte3  entlaffen  raorben. 

(c]  As  a  like  secondary  object  with  some  reflexive  verbs,  the  direct  object 
being  the  reflexive  pronoun  : 

jt^ jmnefymen,  to  take  interest  (in}.        fid)  entfjalten,  to  abstain  from. 
fid)  bebtenen,  to  make  use.  fid)  entfdjlagen,  to  get  rid. 

fid)  befletf5(tg)en,  to  apply  one's  self.       fid)  erbarmen,  to  have  mercy. 
fid)  bema'd)ttgen,  to  take  possession.        fid)  ergb^en,  to  delight  in. 
fid)  befinnen,  to  recollect.  fid)  freuen,  to  rejoice  in,  mjoy. 

fid)  entftnnen,  to  recollect.  fid)  riiljmen,  to  boast. 

fid)  erinnern,  to  remember.  fid)  fdjtimen,  to  be  ashamed. 

and  a  few  others.  Examples  :  Gr  rii^mte  fid)  feiner  fyoljen  ©eburt;  er  fd)dmt 
fid)  fetneS  ro^en  Setragen^ ;  §err !  erbarme  bid)  itnfer ;  id)  fann  mid)  beffen 
nid)t  befittttcn,  /  cannot  remember  \me  of\  that,  etc. 

(d}  Likewise  with  a  few  impersonals,  the  personal  pronoun  standing  as 
direct  object.  As:  2ftidj  jammert  be§  SSoIfeS,  lam  sorry  for  the  people ;  mid) 
reuet  meine§  Seid)tftnn§,  I  repent  of  my  folly  ;  e§  berlofjnt  fid)  ntd)t  ber  SDtii^e/ 
it  does  not  pay  for  the  trouble,  etc. 

ADVERBIAL  GENITIVE. 
435.  The  genitive  is  used  adverbially  :  — 

(a]  In  various  adverbial  relations,  qualifying  the  verb ;  as  :  Place :  red)ter 
£anb,  Itnfer  §anb,  on  the  right,  —  left;  Time  (indefinite) :  be§  2ftorgen§,  be§ 
5tbenb§,  be§  ©onntag§,  eineS  Sagc§,  etc. ;  but  time  definite,  by  the  accusative 
or  with  a  preposition  (§309,  £);  Manner:  regularly  with  descriptive  adjec- 
tive: fdjnetten  <5d)ritte§,  jw//"//j/;fte^enben3ufee§,  immediately ;  w.t\\(t%'$&\!\\tn%, 
of  my  knowledge ;  unrjerridjteter  <Sad)e,  unsuccessfully;  frozen  2ftute§,  gladly, 
etc. ;  and  especially  in  poetry :  biiftcren  SlideS,  mdd)tigen  9lufe§,  etc.  (§  399), 

NOTE.  —  By  analogy  are  formed  the  irregular  ttCl(f)t§,  be§  KacljtS,  3y  night  (nights)  — 
like  ttbeitbS,  etc.,  though  5Tfacf|t  is  feminine. 


244  LESSON    L.  [§  436 

(b)  Analogous  to  this  is  the  use  of  the  genitive  in  some  phrases  with 
the  neuter  verbs  fetn,  le&en,  fterben,  etc.  As,  predicatively  :  tmr  finb  afle  beS 
£obe3,  we  are  all  dead  men  ;  tlie  toa§  beine§  2(mte§  ijt,  do -what  belongs  to  your 
office ;  id)6in  ber  Sfteinung,  I  am  of  the  opinion;  or,  adverbially  :  etne§  gliicf= 
lirfjen  SobeS  fterben,  to  die  a  happy  death,  etc. 

(c}  Seemingly  analogous,  but  really  depending  on  the  interjection,  is 
the  use  (§  336,3)  of  the  genitive  in  exclamation ;  as,  olj  be§  Soren,  oh  the 
fool! 

For  the  genitive  with  prepositions,  see  §  280.  For  special  form  of  femi- 
nine genitive  in  -n,  see  §  106,  note. 

REMARK.  —  The  lists  given  in  this  lesson,  and  hereafter,  do  not  aim  to  be  complete,  but 
only  illustrative,  and  must  be  supplemented  by  the  dictionary. 

The  increasing  use  of  prepositions,  in  lieu  of  the  objective  genitive, 
should  be  especially  noted. 

EXERCISE  XLIX. 

i.  la  the  morning  we  go  to  school;  in  the  evening  we  stay  at  home. 
2.  Old  people  like  to  sleep  (gent)  in  the  afternoon.  3.  The  prince  assured 
us  of  his  favor.  4.  Do  you  remember  your  absent  friends  ?  I  always  re- 
member them.  5.  He  is  weary  of  life.  6.  The  man  has  been  accused  of 
theft.  7.  I  am  by  no  means  master  of  the  German  language.  8.  I  am 
not  of  your  opinion.  9.  We  never  considered  him  capable  of  such  a 
deed.  10.  The  messenger  was  not  acquainted  with  the  way.  n.  Have 
mercy  on  the  poor.  12.  I  am  not  ashamed  of  his  friendship.  13.  They 
laughed  at  him  for  (toegen)  his  awkwardness.  14.  Are  you  assured  of  his 
innocence?  15.  I  am  not  conscious  of  any  guilt.  16.  The  countess  will 
interest  herself  for  the  poor  child.  17.  Do  you  make  use  of  (the)  steel- 
pens?  1 8.  The  robbers  deprived  me  of  all  [the]  money  (which)  I  had.  19. 
The  king  has  relieved  him  of  his  office.  20.  It  is  not  worth  while  to  re- 
member every  little  misfortune.  21.  We  read  in  the  fable  that  a  lion  once 
deemed  a  hare  worthy  of  his  friendship.  22.  Of  my  knowledge,  the 
prisoner  has  never  been  accused  of  a  crime.  23.  O  the  happy  [man],  that 
breathes  the  same  (one)  air  with  thee !  24.  I  think  of  thee  (bein)  when  the 
nightingales'  song  resounds  through  the  grove;  when  think'st  thou  of  me? 


LESSON  L. 
Use  of  the  Cases.  —  (Continued). 

THE  DATIVE. 

436.  The  dative  is  the  case  of  the  indirect  object,  which  may 
be  expressed  in  English,  generally,  by  the  preposition  to  or  for. 


§  437]  THE    DATIVE    WITH    VERBS.  245 

NOTE  —  in  English,  by  loss  of  case-inflection  the  indirect  object  is  nowhere  distin- 
guished by  form.  When  next  to  the  verb  it  is  usually  without  preposition  ;  when  separated 
from  the  verb,  it  requires  the  preposition  ;  as  :  /  will  write  you  a  letter  :  or,  a  letter  to  you, 
etc.  In  German,  on  the  other  hand,  with  its  specific  case-form,  the  indirect  object  is  regu- 
larly the  simple  dative  ;  and  the  preposition  expresses  a  distinct  relation,  such  as  motion, 
etc.  Thus  in  both  constructions  the  German  is  more  specific  and  less  liable  to  ambiguity 
than  the  English.  (See  Remark,  §  44°.) 

THE  DATIVE  WITH  VERBS. 

437.  The  dative  is  used  as  indirect  (usually  personal)  object 
with  many  verbs : 

1.  As  second  object  with  many  transitives,  that  is,  verbs  which  take  a 
direct  object  in  the  accusative.     As  : 

bteten,  to  offer.  letften,  to  afford. 

bringen,  to  bring.  liefern,  to  deliver. 

gefien,  to  give.  reidjen,  to  reach. 

gonnen,  to  grant.  fagen,  to  say,  tell. 

faffen,  to  leave.  fotbtnen,  to  devote. 

leiljen,  to  lend.  Setgen,  to  show. 
and  many  others.     For  the  position  of  the  indirect  object,  see  §  354. 

EXAMPLES  :  3>d)  ge&e  Sfynen  metn  SBort ;  ber  greunb  fiietet  bent  greunbe 
Me  §anb  ;  ber  ®omg  retdjte  tljm  Me  SRedjte ;  Mefe  greunbe  gbnne  id)  bir ;  »er  I)at 
nttr  ba§  gefagt ;  ber  93ote  b~rad)te  mir  ba§  (Mb,  etc. 

(b)  Observe  that  when  such  verbs  are  made  passive  the  accusative  object 
becomes  subject  (§  275) ;  the  dative  object  remains;  as:  $>a§  ©elb  ift  nttr 
geboten  toorben ;  ba§  ift  mir  fdjon  gefagt  inorbett,  etc.  The  English  alternative 
forms  —  I  have  been  offered  the  money ;  I  have  been  told  that,  etc.,  are  not 
possible  in  German. 

NOTE. — These  forms  are  also  due  to  confusion  of  objects  from  loss  of  case  inflection. 
Here  again  we  may  see  —  as  so  often  in  English  —  how  the  loss  of  form  leads  to  the  exten- 
sion of  idiom. 

2.  The  dative  is  used  as  single  object  with  many  intransitives,  such  as :  — 

cmttoorten,  to  answer.  fjelfen,  to  help. 

banfen,  to  thank.  raten,  to  advise. 

Menen,  to  serve.  rufen,  to  call  to. 

broken,  to  threaten.  fdjaben,  to  injure. 

entfagen,  to  renounce.  fdjmeidjeln,  to  flatter. 

fefylen,  to  be  wanting,  ail.  traiten,  to  trust. 

folgen,  to  follow.  tro&en,  to  defy, 
and  many  others. 


246  LESSON    L.  [§  437 

(a)  Observe  that  in  many  instances  this  indirect  object  will  appear  in 
English  as  direct  object  (usually,  also,  from  loss  of  the  case-form,  as  §  436, 
note.)     Such  verbs  require  special  attention.    Examples :  Sr  cmtttJortete  mtr, 
he  answered  (replied  to)  me;  id)  banfe  S^nen,  I  thank  (am  thankful  to)  you; 
roa§  fefilt  Mr?  what  ails  you  ?  totr  toolkit  unferm  gelbrjerrn  folgen. 

(b)  A  few  verbs  which  in  English,  for  the  same  reason,  can  take  but  one 
object  —  of  the  person  or  of  the  thing  —  may  in  German  take,  besides  the 
dative  of  the  person,  an  accusative  —  usually  a  neuter  pronoun  —  of  the 
thing.     Thus  :  /  believe  if,  or  /  believe  you  ;  in  German  also  :  id)  glau&e  e£ 
Sfyttett,  etc.  —  as  under  group  i ,  above. 

(c)  As  a  dative  object  cannot  become  a  passive  subject  (§  275),  intransi- 
tives  governing  a  dative  can  be  made  passive  only  in  the  impersonal  form  ; 
not  as  in  English,  7  was  answered,  etc. ;  but :  mtr  ttwrbe  geantnrortet ;  mtr 
totrb  gerjolfen,  etc.  —  the  dative  object  remaining. 

NOTE.  — The  force  of  the  English  passive  is  however,  often  given  by  position  only,  aa 
§  276  :  Sfjm  folgte  ber  ©pton,  he  was  followed  by  the  spy, 

3.  In  both  uses  (i  and  2)  a  great  number  of  compound  verbs  govern 
the  dative,  the  meaning  of  the  simple  verb  being  so  modified  as  to  require 
the  dative.     This  is  especially  the  case  with  verbs  compounded  with  aft,  Oil, 
bet,  entgegen,  nad),  bor,  311,  and  the  inseparable  prefixes,  be-,  ent-,  er-,  ge-,  and 
rotber.     Examples :  <£>te  Itefen  bent  3)iebe  nad),  they  ran  after  the  thief ;  totr 
fjbrten  bent  9tebner  ju,  we  listened  to  the  orator ;  er  ftanb  mtr  mtt  fetnem  State 
bet,  he  assisted  me  with  his  counsel ;  ba§  gefattt  mtr  nid)t,  /  do  not  like  that; 
btefer  gefiter  tft  ber  Stufmerffamfeit  unfere§  CefirerS  entgangen,  this  mistake  has 
escaped  the  attention  of  our  teacher ;  e§  rmberfa'rjrt  mandjem  mefjr  ilngliirf  al§ 
er  berbtent,  more  misfortunes  happen  to  many  a  man  than  he  deserves.    (See 
§  297,  note). 

4.  A  dative  is  also  required  by  many  verbal  phrases  which  have  the 
force  of  simple  verbs,  and  by  a  number  of  verbs,  which  form  incomplete 
compounds  with  adjectives  and  nouns  (§  379).     As  :  — 

letb  tun,  to  cause  sorrow.  Jit  £>itlfe  fontmen,  to  come  to  one's  aid. 

roefje  tun,  to  give  pain.  p  Xetl  roerbett,  to  fall  to  one's  share. 

roorjl  tun,  to  benefit.  ba§  SSort  reben,  to  defend. 

roorjl  rootten,  to  wish  well.  SRebe  ftefjen,  to  answer. 

gletd)  f  ontmen,  to  equal.  ^TOt^  Meten,  to  bid  defiance. 

311  gut  lontmen,  to  benefit.  &of)tt  fpredjen,  to  mock  at,  etc. 

As:  e3  tut  mtr  fefjr  letb,  7  am  very  sorry ;  ber  gute  §reunb  fctm  mtr  $u 
£iHfe  ;  mtr  hrirb  etn  ©tu'cE  au  tett,  rote  id)  e§  ntmmer  gefjofft,  etc. 


§  437]  DATIVE    WITH    VERBS.  247 

5.  (a)  Some  impersonal  verbs  (§  291),  likewise  require  the  dative  of  the 
person;  as:  e§  afjnt  mtr,  I  forbade ;  e§  grout  mtr,  I  am  afraid;  e3  bangt 
mtr,  I  feel  anxious;  e3  efelt  mtr,  I feel  disgusted ;  e§  fd)hrinbelt  mtr,  I  feel 
giddy,  e3  tra'umt  mtr,  I  dream  ;  e3  biinft  mtr  (or  mid)),  methinks,  etc. 

(£)  In  some  phrases  the  verbs  fetn,  toerben,  gerjen  and  ergefjen,  are  used 
impersonally  with  the  dative.  As :  (£3  gefjt  mtr  toorjl,  it  fares  well  with  me, 
I  am  getting  on  well ;  mtr  rotrb  fcfjltmm,  /  begin  to  feel  sick ;  twit  tft  mtr 
rmeber  roorjl,  now  I  feel  well  again;  mtr  tft  fait,  I  am  cold;  roenn  bent  fo  tft, 
if  that  is  so,  etc.  —  the  case  depending  on  the  combined  predicate  idea. 

6.  With  a  few  reflexive  verbs,  the  dative  stands  as  reflexive  (persona!) 
object.     These  are  sometimes  called  false  reflexives.     As:  — 

fid)  onmafjen,  to  assume.  fid)  getraiten,  to  venhtre. 

fid)  etnMtben,  to  imagine.  fid)  bornefjmen,  to  purpose, 

and  some  others.  (See  §  251.)  As  :  id)  mafse  mtr  md)t§  an,  roa§  ntd)t  metn 
tft ;  id)  getraue  mtr  ntd)t, ba8  511  fagen  ;  er  btlbet  fid)  ein,  er  fet  ein  grower  SRann, 
he  imagines  he  is  a  great  man,  etc. 

NOTE  — The  address  of  a  letter  is  often  put  in  the  dative,  as  if  after  an  implied  verb; 
as.  (2)em)  &ervn ;  (3)er)  ^rait ;  (3)em)  grauletn ,  etc.  (but  also  an  with  accusa- 
tive). 

For  the  dative  in  sense  of  from,  see  §  440. 

EXERCISE  L. 

i.  The  young  count  flattered  the  old  king.  2.  He  has  served  faithfully 
his  king  and  country.  3.  This  little  boy  resembles  his  mother.  4.  How  do 
you  like  your  new  house  (how  pleases  you}"}  5.  The  poor  old  man  thanked 
us.  6.  The  king  wishes  him  well.  7.  The  robber  defied  me.  8.  No  one 
will  help  me.  9.  Order  me  a  cup  of  coffee.  10.  It  seems  to  me  that  this 
matter  will  not  redound  to  your  praise,  n.  This  castle  belongs  to  the 
king  of  Saxony.  12.  Tell  me  how  this  hat  becomes  me.  13.  You  ought 
to  answer  your  teacher.  14.  What  has  happened  to  you  ?  15.  The  captain 
threatened  the  soldiers,  because  they  did  not  obey  him.  16.  I  told  him 
the  truth,  but  I  am  sorry  to  say  I  was  not  believed.  17.  I  will  read  to  you 
a  few  pages  from  this  book  ;  will  you  listen  to  me  ?  18.  It  gave  me  pain  to 
refuse  your  request  19.  How  are  you  getting  on?  I  am  getting  on  very 
well.  20.  The  thief  has  run  away  from  the  officer ;  run  after  him.  21.  He 
shall  not  escape  us ;  believe  me  (that).  22.  I  have  been  told  that  that 
young  man  has  been  paid  a  large  sum  of  money.  23.  If  that  (dat.)  is  so, 
why  does  he  not  relieve  his  poor  parents?  24.  Follow  my  advice,  and  yield 
to  his  request. 


248  LESSON    LI.  [§  438 

LESSON   LL 
The  Dative.  —  Continued. 

DATIVE  WITH  ADJECTIVES. 

438.  The  dative  is  used  with  many  adjectives,  or  participles 
used  as  adjectives,  such  as  are  usually  followed  in  English  by 
to  or  for. 

(a)  With  adjectives  that  signify  nearness,  likeness,  fitness,  inclination, 
advantage,  or  their  contraries  ;  as  :  — 

filjnltdj,  similar.  Ijolb,  favorable. 

ongenefytn,  agreeable.  Iftftig,  troublesome. 

etgen,  own,  peculiar.  liefe,  dear. 

fremb,  strange.  tmfye,  near. 

gentein,  common.  frfjulbig,  owing. 

gletcfi,  like.  treit,  faithful. 

gnabig,  gracious.  hnbrig,  adverse. 

Ijeiifam,  salutary.  nnttfontttten,  welcome, 
and  many  others. 

(b)  Many  of  these  are  participles  used  as  adjectives,  or  adjectives  de- 
rived from  verbs  which  govern  the  dative ;  as ;  — 

befannt,  known.  betjulfltrf),  helpful. 

geneigt,  inclined.  banfbar,  thankful. 

getoogen,  favorable.  bienltd),  serviceable. 

getoadjfen,  equal  to.  geljorfam,  obedient. 

berfjafjt,  hateful.  nu$ltrf),  useful. 

iiberlegen,  superior.  frfiablicf),  hurtful, 

and  many  others. 

EXAMPLES  :  S)er  <5oljn  tft  bent  SSater  a^nlt^ ;  btefe  (SJef^tc^le  tft  atten  6e* 
fannt ;  btefe  SebenSart  ifi  il)tn  etgen  ;  i^  bin  btefer  Slrbett  no<^  nii^t  genmdjfcn ; 
fei  mtr  gncibig  ;  ba§  ^eEe  Stdjt  tft  ben  Slugen  fc^abltcl) ;  bte  &eud}elet  tft  mtr  ber= 
tjafet ;  fei  mtr  ftnltfommen,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  As  in  case  of  the  genitive  (§  433-4),  so  instead  of  the  dative  a  preposition  with 
its  case  will  sometimes  occur,  as  an  alternative  construction,  with  an  adjective  or  a  verb; 
as:  fetnfcltdj  or  freunblirf)  gegen  jemanben  ;  auf  eincnsiirnen ;  nimtn  bteieg  2u^,  icf)  Ijab'3 
flit  bt*  [bit]  gefticft,  etc. 


§  44°]  THE    DATIVE    PRIVATIVE.  249 

(<c)  A  few  such  adjectives  may  take  in  German,  besides  the  dative  of 
the  person,  a  second  object  of  the  thing.  Compare  §  437,  2,  b  ;  as  :  id)  bin 
mir  feiner  <5d)ulb  (gen.)  bettwfjt,  I  am  conscious  of  no  fault;  bo§  (ace.)  bin 
id)  tljtn  nidjt  fdjulbig,  /  do  not  owe  him  that,  etc. 

DATIVE  OF  INTEREST. 

439.  A  more  remote  relation,  yet  allied  to  the  foregoing,  is 
expressed  by  the  dative  of  the  person  concerned  in,  or  affected 
by,  an  action  or  its  result.     This  is  known  as  the  dative  of  inte- 
rest^ or,  in  some  cases,  the  ethical  dative. 

(a)  Of  the  person  for  or  against  whom  something  is  done ;  as :  tu'  e§ 
mir  bod),  do  it  for  me,  please  ;  fd)reiben  @ie  ntir  biefe  Slufgabe  ab,  copy  me  this 
exercise ;  fie  tft  mir  ein  ^lagegetft,  she  is  to  me  a  tormenting  spirit ;  too  id) 
mir  eine  greube  gepflan^t,  -wherever  I  have  planted  me  a  joy,  etc. 

(6}  Often  this  dative  will  take  the  place  of  the  English  possessive ;  as: 
fie  fiel  bem  SBritber  itm  ben  &a!3,  she  fell  on  her  brother's  neck;  bag  §eV5 
jitterte  mir  im  Setbe,  my  k&art  trembled  within  me;  fie  fdjnitten  bem  §einbe 
ben  3tilrfpg  ab,  they  cut  off  the  enemy's  retreat;  id)  toafd)e  mir  bie  £a'nbe,  / 
wash  my  hands,  etc. ;  and  in  phrases  like  :  U)itt  JU  @&ren,  in  his  honor ; 
mir  511  fiiebe,  for  my  sake,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  Yet  frequently  the  possessive  will  also  stand  ;  as,  ftreirfje  ntir  meine  ^Bfotett, 
smear  (me)  my  paws  — sometimes  with,  yet  also  without,  special  emphasis. 

(c)  In  many  cases  the  relation  can' hardly  be  expressed  in  English,  but 
only  indicates  the  interest  taken  by  the  person  speaking  or  spoken  to ;  as: 
JDCiS  mod)en  ©ie  mir  bo,  what  are  you  doing  there  (/  should  like  to  know ; 
bleiben  <Ste  mir  gefunb,  keep  well  (I  hope  you  may) ;  3f)r  berfiifjrt  fetnen  meljr, 
you  will  seduce  no  one  else  (against  my  interests),  etc.  —  Sometimes  only  a 
reference  to  one's  opinion  or  feeling :   Sin  93ajtarb  bin  id;  btr,  (you  say). 

It  is  this  use  that  is  often  called,  more  distinctively,  the  ethical  dative. 

(d)  Here  may  be  mentioned  the  dative  in  exclamations,  though  these 
expressions  are  properly  elliptical  and  the  dative  a  true  objective  ;  as :  £>etl 
bem  ©ieger,  hail  to  the  victor;  toefye  bem  Seftegten,  woe  to  the  conquered; 
Slufje  feiner  3ljd)e,  peace  to  his  ashes  (as  if  Slufje  fei),  etc. 

THE  DATIVE  PRIVATIVE. 

440.  The  dative  (usually  to,  for)  sometimes  corresponds  to 
the  English  from  (of),  both  with  verbs  and  adjectives. 

This  is  sometimes  called  the  dative  privative,  but  is  still  really  an  indirect 


250  LESSON    LI.  [§  44° 

object,  usually  of  disadvantage,  etc.  (Compare  English  differ  from,  or  -with  ; 
averse  from  or  to;  to  hide  to  or  from  etc.);  as:  er  nofjm  mir  metrt  gan£e§ 
SSermogen,  took  from  me,  etc. ;  fie  entreifet  mir  ben  (Miefcten,  ben  33rautigam 
raubt  fie  mir ;  bet  ®teb  tft  fetnen  SSerfoIgern  entftoljen  ;  bem  ©laitben  abtru'nntg, 
recreant  from  (to)  the  faith,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  In  some  cases,  by  a  change  in  a  relation  of  objects,  an  alternative  form  may 
be  used  with  the  genitive.  Thus,  either  :  ber  S)teb  rcwbte  tfim  fein  ®elb,  or  beraitbte  tf)tt 
fettteS  ©elbe§  ;  and  in  other  cases,  a  preposition  (Don,  front)  will  be  preterred:  er  natjttt  e3 
toon  mir ;  abtriinnig  toon  ber  Dteltflton,  etc. 

For  the  dative  with  preposition,  see  §§  164,  180,  280;  special  forms, 
§  1 06. 

For  the  dative  with  p,  as  the  factitive  object,  see  §  443,  d. 

For  the  position  of  dative  objects,  see  §  353,  §  354. 

REMARK.  —  Attention  has  already  been  called  to  the  loss  of  the  earlier  case-inflection 
in  English,  whereby  the  dative  is  no  longer  distinguished  in  form  from  the  accusative. 
Many  instances  now  recognized  in  English  grammar  as  direct  object  (accusative)  were  ori- 
ginally dative.  The  student  must  therefore  be  cautioned  against  this  defect  of  form  in 
English,  to  which  it  is  chiefly  due  that  the  dative  seems  to  be  so  much  more  largely  used  in 
German. 

It  is  also  to  be  remarked  that  the  dative  in  German  is  more  freely  used  with  pronouns 
than  with  nouns;  an  alternative  form,  with  preposition,  being  more  frequently  used  with 
the  latter.  This  also  is  due  to  the  more  explicit  and  convenient  distinction  of  the  pronoun 
inflections. 

EXERCISE  LL 

i.  The  prince  is  very  favorable  to  us.  2.  He  owes  his  tailor  five  hundred 
marks.  3.  Be  welcome  to  us.  4.  Are  you  equal  to  the  task?  5.  I  do  not 
trust  him,  for  he  has  not  told  me  the  truth.  6.  Do  not  trust  those  who 
flatter  you.  7.  Go  out  of  my  way.  8.  The  robbers  took  from  me  all  (toa§) 
I  had.  9.  The  enemy  was  superior  to  us,  therefore  we  retired  behind  (ace.} 
the  walls  of  the  city.  10.  This  history  was  known  to  us  all.  n.  Lying 
is  odious  to  me.  12.  Everything  seemed  to  me  strange  after  such  a  long 
absence.  13.  It  will  be  conducive  to  your  health  to  take  a  walk  every  day. 
14.  The  prince  thanked  me  in  the  most  gracious  manner.  1 5.  The  company 
of  the  stranger  was  most  agreeable  to  the  ladies.  16.  The  conquered  fell  at 
(311)  the  victor's  feet  and  begged  for  mercy.  17.  The  entire  army  has  fallen 
into  the  hands  of  (dat.)  the  enemy.  18.  This  unworthy  son  has  broken 
his  poor  father's  heart.  19.  Too  much  eating  (infin.}  and  drinking  is  in- 
jurious to  the  health.  20.  Hail  to  the  saviour  of  his  country,  the  friend  of 
the  oppressed  !  21.  Don't  climb  (for  my  sake,  dat.  pron.)  too  high,  my  son  ; 
you  might  (fbnnen)  fall  and  break  your  arm.  22.  To  the  lazy,  everything 
is  (toerben)  difficult.  23.  Explain  me  this  exercise,  if  you  please  (//  it  pleases 
you).  24.  To  thee  the  highest  jewel  is  my  memory  (to  thee  is,  etc.). 


§  443]  THE    ACCUSATIVE.  251 

LESSON  LIL 

Use  of  the  Cases. —  Continued. 

THE  ACCUSATIVE. 

DIRECT  OBJECT. 

441.  The  accusative  is  the  case  of  the  direct  object,  that  is, 
the  object   reached  or  directly  affected  by  an  action. 

(a)  All  transitive  verbs  have  their  direct  object  in  the  accusative.    Ex- 
amples are  unnecessary. 

NOTE.  —  It  has  already  been  seen  that  some  verbs  transitive  in  English  are  intransitive 
in  German,  that  is,  take  the  object  in  genitive  or  dative,  or  with  preposition  (see  §§  434, 
437).  Such  cases  must  be  carefully  noted. 

(b)  The  accusative  is  also  the  direct  (usually  personal)  object  of  most 
reflexive  and  impersonal  verbs  (see  §§  251,  291).  For  exceptions,  §  437,  5,6. 

(c)  As  has  been  seen  already,  a  few  adjectives,  some  usually  construed 
with  the  genitive,  sometimes  take  an  accusative,  usually  with  fein  or 
toerben,  as  if  object  of  the  combined  idea.     Such  are:  betoufet,  geroafjr,  lo§, 
miibe,  fatt,  toert,  tourbtg,  sufrteben,  and  a  few  others ;  as :  id)  toerbe  tfjtt  nidjl 
ID§,  I cannot get  rid  of  him  ;  id)  bin  e§  jufrieben,  I  am  content  with  it — most 
usually  a  neuter  pronoun.     With  boll  (bofler)  a  simple  noun  may  stand  as 
§  431,  c;  as:  bott  (bolter)  Witt;  but  not  with  an  article  or  adjective.     (See 

§  4330 

DOUBLE  OBJECTS. 

442.  A  few  verbs  take  two  accusatives  —  of  the  person  and 
of  the  thing. 

These  are:  lefyren,  to  teach;  and  sometimes  f often,  to  cost;  and,  with 
neuter  pronoun  only,  frogen,  to  ask;  bitten,  to  beg;  iiberreben,  to  persuade ; 
as:  er  lefyrte  metnen  @of)tt  Me  ©rammatif;  ba§  fi.at  mid)  (or  mtr)  biel  ($elb 
gefoftet;  ba§  fottten  <Sie  mid)  nidjt  fragen;  baS  Ibnnen  <2>te  mid)  nid)t  iiber- 
reben,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  But  more  usually,  fragen  nacfj ;  bitten  um ;  iiberreben  toon:  er  fragte  midj  bar= 
naif) ;  and  always :  er  fragte  nadi  meinent  ©ofjn ;  er  bat  mid)  um  ©ett>,  etc,  (with  noun 
objects). 

PREDICATE  OR  FACTITIVE  OBJECT,. 

443.  A  second  accusative  often  appears  as  the  result,  or 
effect,  of  the  action,  hence  called  factitive  (sometimes  comple- 
mentary, as  completing  the  idea  of  the  verb). 

(a)  Verbs  of  naming  or  calling  take  the  name  as  a  second  accusative. 
Such  are  fyeifcen,  nennen;  taufen,  to  baptise;  fd)elten,  fdjtmpfen,  to  scold  (call 


252  LESSON    LII.  [§  444 

bad  names).  See  §  429,  2  ;  as  :  fair  nennen  btefen  ®na&en  ben  foulen  £an§  ;  er 
frfjalt  mid)  Siigner,  he  called  me  a  liar,  etc. 

(&)  In  many  cases  the  second  accusative  will  be  an  adjective,  expressing 
the  condition  or  quality  resulting  from  the  action.  (£3  macrjt  mir  ba3  §er^ 
fcfjtoer,  it  makes  my  heart  heavy  ;  er  gofc  ba§  ®Ia§  boft,  he  poured  the  glass 
full  ;  ber  3&9er  fdjofj  ben  §afen  tot,  the  hunter  shot  the  hare  dead. 

(c)  With  verbs  which  express  the  manner  of  regarding  an  object,  such 
as-fjoiten,  cwSgeben,  annefjmen,  6etrad)ten,  anferjen,  erflaren,  and  the  like,  fiir, 
sometimes  al3,  is  used  with  the  adjective.  Examples  :  ©r  rjat  Me  ©ad)e  fiir 
rtrfjtig  erfldrt,  he  has  declared  the  matter  correct;  man  tyalt  irjtt  fiir  einen  33e= 
triiger  (holds  him  for);  ©ie  !bnnen  bte  ©acfje  aI8  af>gemacfjt  Betra^ten,  you 
may  consider  the  matter  as  settled.  (See  §  429,  4,  £.) 

(</)  But,  contrary  to  the  English  usage,  verbs  of  electing,  appointing, 
creating,  etc.,  take  the  second  object  in  the  dative  with  ^U  and,  in  the  singu- 
lar, the  contracted  article  (§  191,  note).  As:  toarjlen,  ertoafjlen,  to  elect;  er= 
nennen,  to  name,  appoint;  macfjen,  to  make.;  Bcftimmcn,  beftellen,  to  appoint; 
falben,  to  anoint;  fcfjtagen,  to  dub  (a  knight),  etc.  ;  as  :  2ftan  fjat  &errn  %.  sum 
erumrjlt  ;  er  na^m  fie  ^ur  §rau  ;  but  pi.,  311  ^Srofe  jforen,  311  grauen,  etc. 


NOTE.  —  In  all  these  cases  it  is  only  the  direct  or  primary,  usually  personal,  object  that 
can  be  subject  of  the  passive  (§  275)  ;  as  :  irf)  itmrbe  fcarnocf)  gefragt,  barum  gebeten  ;  ba§ 
5l'inb  njiirbe  So^ann  getaitft;  ba§  ®(a§  tuurbe  boH  gegoffen;  §err  3t.  tft  sum  ©tobtrat  er= 
toii^tt  tnorben.  In  case  of  double  accusative  (§  442)  the  passive  is  better  avoided. 

COGNATE  OBJECT. 

444.  Some  verbs,  properly  intransitives,  may  take  the  accu- 
sative of  the  noun,  usually  with  a  qualifying  adjunct,  of  the 
same  or  kindred  meaning  with  the  verb.  This  is  called  the 
cognate  object;  as:  3d)  trtiumte  etnen  fcrjonen  %rcmm,  I  'dreamed 
a  beautiful  dream;  er  ftart)  etnen  Ijetbenmiitigen  £ob  ;  er  fd)Iafi 
ben  £obe§fc£)laf. 

NOTE.  —  This  accusative  is  not  properly  objective,  but  adverbial  ;  as  :  he  sleeps  a  deep 
sleep  =  he  sleeps  deeply  ;  he  died  a  peaceful  death  =  he  died  peacefully,  etc.  —  the  idea  of 
the  noun  being  really  in  the  verb.  But  the  usage  is  much  extended,  especially  in  poetry. 

ADVERBIAL  ACCUSATIVE. 

445-  Nearly  allied  with  the  accusative  naming  the  (direct) 
object  reached,  is  the  accusative  expressing  measure  or  extent: 
how  far,  how  long,  how  much,  etc. 


§  446]  ACCUSATIVE    ABSOLUTE.  253 

(a)  This  occurs  with  verbs  of  motion  or  duration  or  measure  ;  such  as : 
totegen,  to  weigh  ;  getten,  to  be  worth  ;  foften,  to  cost,  etc.,  and  with  adjectives 
like  alt,  old;  fcrett,  broad;  grofe,  tall;  rjodj,  high;  lang,  long;  tief,  deep;  tneit, 

far,  etc. ;  as :  er  ift  5el)it  Sftetlen  gelaufen  ;  ber  $rteg  fyat  gefjn  ^afjre  gebauert ; 
er  ljord)te  einen  Slugenblirf ;  Me  2ftauer  ift  30  gitfj  rjodj  ;  ber  Oberft  ift  60  Safyre 
alt;  ber  Coffer  toiegt  60  Spfunb ;  id)  6in  irjnt  10  Xaler  fdjulbtg,  I  owe  him  10 
dollars,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  i.  To  an  accusative  expressing  duration  of  time  the  adverb  long  is  often  added  ; 
as  :  20  ^afjre  Jong,  20  years  long ;  einen  £ag  lang,  a.  whole  day,  etc.  ;  and,  in  expressions 
of  distance,  sometimes  the  adverb  toeit ',  as  :  fie  jogett  ben  SBagen  10  2Jieilen  tt)eit,  10  miles 
far,  etc. 

2.  Sometimes  also  a  preposition  is  appended  adverbially  ;  as  :  ben  ganjen  £og  bltrcfj,  the 
•whole  day  through.  Or  an  adverb  of  direction,  as  :  er  fiel  bte  Sreppen  f)iiwnter,  down 
stairs;  er  ftteg  ben  Serg  fjinauf,  etc. 

(b)  The  accusative  is  also  used  to  express  a  definite  time  when;  as: 
$ommen  <Sie  gu  mtr  btefen  St&enb,  ncidiften  9)?ttttt)od),  jeben  Sag,  etc.,  and  in 
such  expressions  as  atoeinwl  ben  £ag,  bie  SBodje,  twice  a  day,  week,  etc.  (See 
for  dates,  §  309). 

NOTE.  —  This  must  be  distinguished  from  the  genitive  (§  435)  of  indefinite  time,  or 
repeated  occurrence.  As  :  be§  @onntag§  bleifoe  tcf)  Jit  .fcailfe,  on  a  Sunday,  or  Sundays  ; 
be§  2lbenb§,  or  abenbS,  in  the  evening,  etc. 

ACCUSATIVE  ABSOLUTE. 

446.  The  accusative  is  used  in  an  absolute  or  independent 
construction  —  yet  really  adverbial :  — 

(a)  Frequently  with  a  perfect  participle ;  as :  bte  ganje  ©tabt  lag  in  2(fdje, 
ehtige  £a'ufer  ait§genommen,  a  few  houses  excepted ;  ben  SBIicf  auf  bte  (Srbe 
gefjeftet,  fd)rttt  er  langfam  fjer,  (with)  his  look  fastened  on  the  ground. 

(b)  Less  frequently  without  participle,  especially    in   poetical   style: 
<StoIa  ftanb  er  ba,  bte  ^anb  auf  bent  <Sd)tt)erte,  with  his  hand  on  his  sword. 
Note  this  use  of  with. 

•For  the  accusative  with  prepositions,  see  §§  178,  179,  280. 

EXERCISE  LIL 

i.  We  were  a  whole  month  in  London.  2.  A  sack  of  potatoes  costs 
three  marks.  3.  My  friend  has  been  elected  president  of  the  society. 
4.  I  take  (hold)  him  for  an  impostor.  5.  This  news  has  made  me  happy. 
6.  The  painter  has  painted  the  door  green.  7.  The  bridge  is  a  hundred 
feet  long  and  thirty-three  feet  broad.  8.  My  grandmother  is  74  years  old. 
9.  I  have  run  myself  tired.  10.  The  judge  declared  him  (for)  innocent, 


254  LESSON    LII.  [§  447 

though  he  was  one  of  the  greatest  thieves,  u.  We  were  so  hungry  that 
we  considered  ourselves  very  lucky  to  get  a  little  bread  and  cheese. 
12.  We  proposed  [to]  ourselves  to  ascend  the  Brocken ;  therefore  we  re- 
mained three  days  at  Ilsenburg  and  waited  for  fine  weather.  13.  We 
fancied  that  the  matter  was  (fei)  settled.  14.  Do  not  imagine  that  you 
will  ever  be  elected  [a]  town-councillor.  15.  He  has  been  ill  [for]  three 
years,  and  has  passed  many  a  sleepless  night  on  his  bed.  16.  Goethe  was 
born  the  28th  August,  1749.  17.  A  train  arrives  every  day  at  six  o'clock 
in  the  morning  and  at  four  o'clock  in  the  afternoon.  18.  My  brother  has 
been  appointed  professor  of  (the)  history  at  (311)  Berlin.  19.  Date  your 
letter  thus:  Boston,  May  23d,  1887.  20.  The  king  has  appointed  (the) 
Count  B.  ambassador  at  the  Spanish  Court.  21.  [For]  six  months  long, 
that  old  professor  taught  me  dancing  (inf.  n.)  three  times  a  week,  two 
hours  each  day.  22.  This  stormy  life  ended,  the  old  hero  sleeps  the  sleep 
of  the  just.  23.  There  she  comes  [with]  the  crucifix  in  for  hand,  and  pride 
in  her  heart.  24.  They  were  followed  by  (them  followed}  the  sheriff,  with 
a  white  staff  in  his  hand. 

Prepositions  with  Cases.  —  Summary. 

447.  In  connection  with  the  cases  belongs  properly  the  treatment  of 
Prepositions.  But  it  is  impossible  to  bring  this  subject  within  the  limits 
of  elementary  statement.  The  very  term  preposition  is  not  easy  to  define ; 
nor  is  it  easier  to  draw  the  line  between  words  which  may  be  called  pre- 
positions proper  and  words  which  are  only  used  as  prepositions  (sometimes 
called  spurious  prepositions)  as  §  280.  There  is  perhaps  no  word  which 
is  always  a  preposition. 

(a)  Prepositions  are,  for  the  most  part,  properly  adverbs,  that  is,  verb 
modifiers,  and  are  still  used  as  such  in  both  English  and  German;  as: 
look  up;  come  in;  go  on;  how  came  she  by  that  light  (verb  come  by)t  etc.; 
and  in  German:  er  ftng  an ;  er  ftanb  aiif ;  er  fdjrteb  ben  Srief  ab,  etc.   When 
combined  with  the  verb  alone  they  are  properly  adverbs,  and  should  be 
so  called;  when  limited  or  defined  by  an  object  also,  they  are  properly 
prepositions.     Thus  prepositions  have  been  expressively  called  transitive 
adverbs.    Some  words,  however,  which  are  habitually  used  with  an  object, 
are  commonly  called  prepositions,  as  a  distinct  part  of  speech,  even  when 
used  only  as  adverbs. 

(b)  In  German,  however,  the  use  of  the  preposition  must  be  considered 
in  connection  with  the  case,  a  distinction  no  longer  obvious  in  English. 
The  meaning  of  the  entire  phrase,  preposition  and  object,  is  made  up  of 
the  case-relation,  with  the  preposition,  combined  with  the  action,  motion, 
condition,  etc.,  expressed  by  the  verb.     Primarily   it  is  the  verb  that 


§  448]  ADJECTIVES.  255 

determines  the  case,  and  gives  to  the  preposition  its  apparent  difference 
of  meaning  —  its  true  relation  being  really  always  the  same.  (This  may 
be  clearly  seen  in  the  use  of  the  dative  or  accusative  with  the  same  pre- 
positions, §  179;  as:  er  jafc  auf  bent  SBaume — fletterte  ouf  ben  93aum;  bte 
SBoIIe  rjing  lifter  bent  93erge  —  309  iifcer  ben  5krg,  etc.)  But  by  habit  of  use, 
the  preposition  is  said  to  govern  the  case,  or  to  be  used  in  such  or  such  a 
sense  with  this  or  that  case,  etc.  The  full  explanation  of  these  uses  is 
made  the  more  difficult  in  German  —  and  still  more  difficult  in  English  — 
because  the  form  and  force  of  the  •  original  cases  have  often  become 
obscured  or  lost. 

(c)  The  primary  meaning  of  the  prepositions  is  usually  a  relation  of 
place,  transferred  often  to  time,  and  thence  extended,  or  transferred,  to  a 
wide  variety  of  figurative  and  often  remote  relations,  in  many  of  which 
the  original  meaning  of  the  preposition  is  difficult  to  trace.  The  so-called 
spurious  prepositions  are  mostly  of  occasional  use,  and  generally  have 
only,  or  nearly,  their  primary  signification.  But  the  more  important  pre- 
positions— themselves  few  in  number  and  monosyllabic :  on,  auf,  au§,  bet, 
burd),  fiir,  in,  mil,  narf),  um,  toon,  bor,  #u —  to  which  may  be  added  iiber  and 
unter  —  have  acquired  the  largest  variety  of  idiomatic  use,  and  of  secon- 
dary or  transferred  meaning. 

The  explanation  of  such  uses,  often  difficult,  sometimes  perhaps  im- 
possible (and  no  less  difficult  in  English  than  in  German),  cannot  be  at- 
tempted within  elementary  limits.  Their  mere  enumeration  would  be 
impossible.  For  illustration  only,  and  for  reference,  the  more  important 
uses  of  some  of  the  prepositions  are  given  in  an  Appendix.  Other  idioms 
must  be  carefully  noted  as  they  occur,  and  compared  with  the  correspond- 
ing English  forms. 

LESSON  LIIL 
Adjectives. 

See  Lessons  VIII. -XII.  Some  special  uses  will  be  here 
added. 

USE. 

448.  Some  adjectives  are  used  only  attributively  —  others 
only  as  predicates.  This  depends  partly  on  the  meaning  — 
partly,  however,  on  usage  only  —  hence  with  possible  excep- 
tions : 

i.  As  attributives  only  are  used: 


256  LESSON    LIII.  [§  448 

(a)  Most  pronominal  adjectives.     (Exception  §  193.) 

(b)  The  ordinal  numerals,  and  superlatives.     (§  160.) 

(c)  Some  adjectives  of  place  and  time ;  adjectives  of  material  in  -en, 
-ern,  and  some  derivatives  in  -ifd),  -lid),  —  such  as :  — 

borttg,  of  there.  golben,  golden. 

fyiefig,  of  here.  glafern,  of  glass. 

tyeitttg,  of  to-day.  trbifd),  earthly. 

geftrig,  of  yesterday.  tagltd),  daily,  etc. 

Where  such  adjectives  occur  in  the  predicate,  they  will  be  construed 
attributively;  as:  Me  $oft  tft  eine  tagltdje;  Me  ft'laffe  tft  Me  erfte:  —  or* a 
preposition  will  be  substituted;  as:  bte  UI)r  tft  bon  (Mb,  etc. 

2.  As  predicates  only  are  used :  — 

fcerett,  ready.  tuttb,  known. 

gar,  done.  quer,  across. 

tjetrmljr,  aware.  quttr,  quit, free. 

ijabfjaft,  z«  possession  of.  teil^oft,  participating  in, 

and  some  others;  a  few  compounds,  as:  — 

abfjolb,  unfavorable.  etngebenf,  mindful. 

anfirfjttg,  in  sight  of.  Ijanbgemetn,  hand  to  hand,  etc., 

with  some  words  properly  nouns ;  as :  — 

fetnb  (fetnbltd)),  not  (nbtig), 

freunb  (freunblid^),  nit£  (nii^Ii^), 

leib,  fdjulb,  (fdjulbtg),  etc. 

INFLECTION. 

449.  Some  irregularities,  and  some  diversities  of  usage, 
occur  in  the  declension  of  adjectives: 

i.  The  principle  which  determines  the  strong  or  weak  form  .of  the 
adjective  admits  occasional  exceptions : 

(a)  After  personal  pronouns,  the  strong  form  is  strictly  regular;  but  the 
mixed  forms  are  used  generally ;  as :  id)  armer ;  <£te  guter  3ftann ;  but  mir 
armen;  ifyr  guten  banner;  toir  S)eutfdjen,  etc. 

(b)  In  the  plural  nominative  or  accusative  the  pronominals  alte,  einige, 
etltd)e,  feine,  mandje,  foldje,  toeldie  (as  interrogative  adjective),  metjrere,  t>er= 
fdjtebene,  tttele,  tuentge,  often  admit  the  strong  instead  of  the  weak  form  as 
if  simple  adjectives.  But  this  usage  is  less  frequent  after  alte,  feine,  toeld)e, 
though  quite  common  after  the  other  words. 


§  449]  ADJECTIVE    INFLECTION.  257 

(c)  Properly,  successive  adjectives  of  like  kind  should  have  the  same 
declension;  as:  ba§  geugnis  btefe§  ntetne§  @of)ne§;  guter,  ftarfer,  alter  SSetn, 
etc.  But  sometimes  a  second  adjective  will  be  weak  if  it  stands  in  a  nearer 
relation  to  the  noun;  as;  eine  Stafdje  Don  gutem  rotcn  SScin  (=3iotft)ein) ; 
nad)  langem  bergefclidjen  ©udjen,  etc. ;  but  the  use  is  not  to  be  imitated. 

(d}  A  few  words  used  idiomatically  without  article  in  certain  phrases 
are  treated  as  pronominals  and  followed  by  the  weak  adjective.  Such  are: 
fcefagt,  aforesaid;  fofgenb,  following;  gebadjt,  mentioned;  oMg,  above.  As: 
fiefagter  olte  3ftann,  the  said  old  man;  folgenbe§  fdjbne  SBerf,  the  following 
beatitiful  work,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  Observe  that  the  strong  form  stands  properly  after  all  indeclinables  ;  also 
after  mattd),  fold),  ttielrf),  when  undeclined  ;  and  after  a  preceding  genitive,  etc. 

2.  In  addition  to  the  usual  cases  mentioned  in  Lesson  X.,  the  ending  of 
the  adjective  is  omitted : 

(a)  In  the  first  of  two  adjectives  which  together  mark  one  definition  — 
especially  in   titles,  as:    ba§  $oniglid)  Spreufjifdje  3JJtntfterium ;    6 (ait  unb 
fd^toar^e  SBanber  (of  blue  and  black  color),  etc. 

NOTE.  —  These  are  practically  compounds,  and  might  be  so  written,  or  with  hyphen. 

(b)  The  usage  is  widely  extended  in  poetic  style,  in  cases  not  admitting 
of  such  explanation.     Within  a  few  pages  occur:  etn  unertoartet  ungefjeureS 
©djicffal;   ben  falfdj  berraterifdjen  9fat;   ein  fed  entfdiloffener  <Sd)rtidrmer;  in 
etner  finfter  ungludobollen  Qtit;    bie[e§  unftet   fd^tnanfe  Ko^r;    etn  gefittet 
frbfilid)  Sol!  (§  145). 

(<:)  This  poetic  usage  must  be  carefully  distinguished  from  the  adverb ; 
bie  fteBerljaft  gtttcrnbe  Grifa ;  bo§  ttwnberlid)  gracibfe  5Dtcibd)en ;  it)ie  Jjtnter= 
liftig  treulo§  erfdietnt  ntein  3fat,  haw  deceitfully  faithless,  etc.  (§  314). 

(d)  Generally,  it  is  important  to  remark  that  the  adverb  in  German  is 
distinguished  from  the  uninflected  adjective  only  by  the  sense.    Usually, 
the  distinction  is  obvious ;  but  sometimes  it  may  be  questionable,  or  im- 
material; as:  ba§  SJMbdjen  ttrid)  fd)eu  ^ur  ©eite;  ber  Stuberer  erreid)t  fiegretd) 
ba§  lifer;    i()re  Stugen  leudjteten  rjerllart;  fie  filtdte  bertotrrt  auf;   er  ber* 
fdjttmnb  laittloS  in  ber  9ftertge ;  ba§  letfe  berfiallenbe  ©eldute  (ba§  letfe,  ber* 
Ijallenbe  ©elciute),   etc.  —  and  many  like  cases  [the  ship  arrived  safe,  or 
safely]. 

(e)  Rarely,  in  poetry,  occur  examples  like  Iteb  $nafie,  for  lie&er  ^na6e. 

NOTE. — This  point  will  require  the  more  attention  because  it  is  contrary  to  the  usual 
analogy — the  grammatical  relations  being,  in  general,  more  largely  distinguished  by  form 
in  German  than  in  English. 

3.  In  some   cases  the  adjective   is  regarded  as  noun,  and  loses  its 
adjective    inflection.     This   occurs   (though   sometimes   without   capital 
initial) : 


258  LESSON    LIII.  [§  449 

(a)  In  certain  set  phrases,  as:  SClt  unb  Sung  (or:  alt  unb  jung,  etc.);  ba§ 
©ut  unb  SBbfe;  ba§  Sftetn  unb  ®ein,  etc. 

(l>)  In  the  names  of  languages:  ba§  Seutfd),  ein  reineS  ®eutfd) ;  and  of 
colors :  ba3  Slot,  ein  bunlle§  33Iau,  etc. 

Such  forms  must  be  distinguished  from  the  adjective  used  as  noun;  as, 
ba§  ©utc,  Me  Sttten.  Compare  ettoaS  Slot,  some  red ;  ettoag  9lote3,  something 
red  (and  English,  sweets  to  the  sweety  etc.). 


COMPARISON. 

450.  In  addition  to  the  general  rules  already  given  (Lessons 
XL,  XII.,  XXXIV.),  the  following  are  important: 

1.  In  German,  generally,  all  adjectives  admitting  comparison  —  includ- 
ing participles  used  as  adjectives  —  are  compared  alike,  without  regard  to 
number  of  syllables.     But   instead  of  the  usual  inflection,  an  auxiliary 
(adverb)  comparison  is  used  in  some  cases: 

(a)  With  adjectives  that  do  not  admit  of  attributive  use;  as:  er  iftmefjr 
baran  fdjulb  aI8  idj  —  am  metften  fdjulb ;  roeniger  —  am  roenigften  —  eingebent, 
etc.  (§  448,  2). 

(b)  When  two  qualities  are  compared  in  the  same  subject;  as:  ber  $nabe 
ift  mefjr  leidjtftnnig  aI3  febfe.  —  But  the  inflected  form  also  occurs,  as :  bie 
Xruppen  hmren  tapferer  aI3  aafjlretd),  more  brave  than  numerous. 

(c)  And,  generally,  in  the  superlative  of  eminence,  or  absolute  superlative; 
as:  ein  d'ufeerft  frf)bne3  finb ;  ein  Ijbdjft  jettener  gait  (see  §  316).    But  such 
forms  as;  ein  aUerlieofteS  Sinb;  mit  ticfftcr  Slii^rung,  etc.,  also  occur. 

2.  After  a  comparison  of   inequality  or  of  equality,  dI3  and  h)ie  both 
occur;  but  the  better  usage  requires  a  13  in  the  former,  toie  only  in  the  lat- 
ter; as:  ba§  2JMbd)en  ift  fcfibner  aB  t^re  Gutter;  eben  fo  fdibn  tote  t^re  Gutter. 

The  use  of  al§  after  a  negative  (§  1 53) — expressing  inequality  is  there- 
fore consistent  with  this  general  distinction. 

Rarely  benn  (then}  is  found  after  a  comparative — usually  when  a  IS  pre- 
cedes; as:  Sr  toar  tud)ttger  al§  gelbfjerr  benn  al3  ©taatSmann. 

3.  The  distinction  between  the  inflected  superlative  and  the  form  with 
am,  in  the  predicate  (§  161)  — though  not  always  strictly  observed,  is  im- 
portant. The  latter  is  really  adverbial,  defining  the  condition,  not  the  subject ; 
the  former  is  the  true  adjective  superlative.     As:  bie  ©onne  fdjeint  am 
Ijettften  —  ift  am  fjettften  —  int  <Sommer;  biefeS  $tnb  ift  am  fdibnften,  tuenn 
eS  fcfjla'ft ;  but  we  could  not  say :  btefeS  £tnb  ift  am  jiiingften.     The  tendency 


§45T]  CONCORD    OF    THE    ADJECTIVE.  *  259 

is  to  use  the  am  form  when  the  adjective  superlative  would  be  more  cor- 
rect. Note  also  the  distinction  between  the  form  with  am  and  that  with 
auf3  (§  3I5)>  the  absolute  superlative. 

4.  The  superlative  is  sometimes  strengthened  by  the  prefix  alter,  of 
all;  ber  aflerbefte  Sftann,  the  very  best  man ;  ba3  SCtterfjeiUgfte,  the  Holy  of 
holies  —  the  most  holy. 

NOTE.  —  The  compound  aHertiebft  is  the  only  supeilative  that  can  stand  in  the  predi- 
cate without  inflection.  As  :  btt§  tft  dUevtiebft,  that  is  most  charming. 

5.  It  was  remarked  (§  316),  that  a  few  words  use  the  superlative  in  -ft 
as  adverbs.     Such  are :  aufcerft,  Ijodjft,  Iting.fr,  meift,  narf)ft ;  gefatttgft,  gu'ttgft, 
gefiorfamft  and  a  few  others.     These  forms  are  used  only  in  the  absolute 
sense. 

For  the  correlative  comparison,  the the,  see  §  334. 

CONCORD  OF  THE  ADJECTIVE. 

451.  Outside  of  the  general  rules  of  agreement,  it  is  im- 
portant only  to  remark: 

(a)  The  agreement  of  the  adjective  is  with  its  own  subject  noun, 
which,  however,  is  often  understood.  As  :  ber  (Slefant  tft  ba§  grbjjte  (£ier) 
itnter  ben  Sieren.  For  exception,  see  §  452,  note. 

(b}  An  adjective  agreeing  with  the  plural  <Sie  in  address  will  be  singu- 
lar, if  the  pronoun  means  one  person ;  as,  <£ie  gnter,  etc. 

For  the  position  of  the  adjuncts  of  the  adjective,  see  §  353. 

REMARK.  —  All  the  rules  with  regard  to  the  inflection  or  concord  of  the  adjective  re- 
quire the  more  attention  because,  in  consequence  of  absence  of  inflection  in  the  English 
adjective, they  are  likely  to  be  neglected  by  students. 

EXERCISE  LIIL 

i.  In  yesterday's  paper  I  read  the  last  news  of  the  war.  2.  Has  to  day's 
newspaper  come  ?  3.  This  young  lady  is  not  so  amiable  as  her  elder  sister. 
4.  The  weather  is  excessively  cold.  5.  We  have  received  very  favorable 
news  from  America.  6.  She  is  a  most  modest  girl.  7.  This  carriage  is 
more  useful  than  handsome.  8.  The  longer  the  day,  the  shorter  the  night. 
9.  The  rose  is  the  most  beautiful  of  all  flowers.  10.  Charles  was  on  the 
highest  (uppermost)  step,  whilst  I  was  on  the  lowest,  n.  He  showed  us 
into  the  interior  apartments  of  the  castle.  1 2.  Everybody  wished  to  be  (the) 
first.  13.  He  wears  a  gold  chain,  but  his  watch  is  silver.  14.  The  boy  ran 
up,  in  greatest  haste,  and  told  me  the  sad  news.  1 5.  We  poor  sinners  need 


26O  LESSON    LIV.  [§  452 

the  mercy  of  the  good  God.  16.  The  wise  [man]  is  content  when  he  has 
only  the  necessary.  17.  A  truly  modest  man  does  not  seek  to  seem  wiser 
than  he  is.  18.  An  old  woman,  unknown  to  me  (a  to-me  unknown, 
etc.),  delivered  this  most  (—  very)  distressing  letter.  19.  Many  incredible 
stories  are  related  of  that  poor  old  blind  man.  20.  The  following  event 
took  place  in  the  year  1818.  21.  Red,  white  and  blue  flags  waved  on  all 
[the]  streets.  22.  A  crowd  of  people  —  old  and  young  together  —  rushed 
in  highest  excitement  over  the  narrow  wooden  bridge.  23.  The  testimony 
of  these  my  friends  will  refute  that  most  unjust  charge.  24.  These  chil- 
dren are  the  worst  that  I  know ;  they  are  most  agreeable  when  they  are 
not  present. 


LESSON  LIV. 
The  Pronouns. 

THE  PERSONALS. 

452.  See  §§  182-184,  for  declension  and  general  state- 
ments. The  following  special  points  are  to  be  noted : 

(a)  In  consequence  of  the  different  system  of  gender  in  English,  the 
agreement^  of  the  personal  pronoun  with  the  grammatical  gender  of  its_an-_ 
tecedent  requires  attention.     As :  (£r  f)dt  feinen  S^Iiiffel  berloren,  er  taint  iljn 
nid)t  ftnben,  he  has  lost  his  key,  he  cannot  find  it.     3)tefe  <£taf)lfeber  tft  t>ci> 
roftet,  id)  luerbe  fie  toegtoerfen  ;  this  steel-pen  is  rusty,  I  shall  throw  it  away. 

But  the  pronouns  referring  to  ba£  SSeifc,  the  woman,  and  the  neuter 
diminutives  of  sex,  grauletn,  9fttibcf)en,  JhtaBIein,  ©bfjndjeu,  etc.,  generally 
prefer  the  natural  gender.  As :  28o  tft  ba3  g-rciitletn  ?  ©ie  gefit  im  ©arten 
fpajtcren.  3Ka3  ntadjt  Sfyr  ©bfjndien?  3>d)  Ijoffe,  er  tft  gefunb.  Not  so,  how- 
ever, when  in  the  same  sentence  with  the  noun,  as :  6tn  Sftiibdjett,  toeldjeS 
bort  ie&te,  a  girl  who,  etc.  —  and,  often,  not  so  in  poetic  or  familiar  style. 

NOTE.  —  This  usage  is  sometimes  extended  to  an  adjective  when  it  does  not  stand  in 
immediate  connection  with  its  noun  :  as,  foie  fcfjdufte  Hitter  alien  SftaDcfjett. 

(6)  The  prepositions  Jjalben,  toegen,  huttcn  (§  280)  form  compounds  with 
the  personal  genitives,  et  or  t  being  inserted.  Thus  :  jnetn£jtlC£gen,  for  my 
sake,  as  far  as  I  am  concerned ;  beinetwcgen,  for  thy  sake;  lint  fcinetltntten, 
for  his  sake ;  unferttoegen,  for  our  sake ;  euretljalfcen,  5>I)retf)aIOcn,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  But,  as  the  earlier  forms  ntetttenrttJeflett,  feinetttttriKen,  etc.,  show,  these  forms 
were  originally  possessives  with  cases  of  nouns — t  inserted  as  §  398,  b. 

(c)  The  anomalous  forms  metneg>gleid)en,  bemcsgletdjcn,  etc.,  (also  mctneS 
®(ctd)cit,  etc.),  the  likes  of  me,  my  equals,  etc.,  arose  probably  out  of  pro- 


§453]  THE    PRONOUNS. PERSONAL.  26l 

noun  genitives,  dependent  on  the  adjective.     They  are  now  practically 
compounds. 

For  further  remark  on  the  personal  genitives,  see  §§  430-1.  For  the  use 
of  the  dative  where  the  English  idiom  requires  possessive,  see  §  439.  For 
demonstratives  used  as  substitutes  for  personals,  see  §  457.  For  the  rela- 
tive after  personals,  see  §  459.  For  the  pronouns  in  address,  see  §§  186-9. 

453.  The  neuter  pronoun  e§  has  special  uses,  corresponding 
largely  to  English  /'/  or  there,  but  in  part  peculiar : 

(a)  Akin  to  its  use  as  impersonal  subject  (Less.  XXXI.)  is  its  use  as 
indefinite  subject  of  verbs  without  known  agent  —  sometimes  with  poetic 
effect.     As :  e§  ladjte  nefcen  bent  Srgafjler  Ijett  auf,  there  "was  a  loud  laugh 
dose  by  the  speaker;  ba  309  e§  tote  ntit  toeifjen  $ftebelfd)leiern  ii&er  Me  £>atbe, 
then  something  passed,  etc. 

(b)  A sjne rely  formal  — e^xpletive^^ .subject^ wJlh_jn_tr^siti^e^m__rjaLS- 
sive  or  reflexive  form.     As :  e3  totrb  gefcetet  (§  275) ;  e£  toirb  mir  geraten  ;  e§ 
fd)Iaft  fid)  fjter  gut,  here  is  good  sleeping.    But :  nttr  toirb  geraten  (§  291,  note). 

(c)  Especially  as  introductory  —  grammatical  —  subject,  throwing  the 
logical  subject  after  the  verb,  which  then  always  agrees  with  the  latter 
(see  §  210) ;  as :  toa§  ftnb  bie?  e§  finb  ®artoffeln  ;  what  are  those?  they  are 
potatoes.     Often  this  e§  is  purely  expletive,  and  is  then  variously  trans- 
lated: i.  By  it;  as :  e8  ftnb  oft  unfere  greunbe,  bie  nn3  qua'Ien,  it  is  often  our 
friends  that  torment  us.     2.  By  there :  e§  toar  einmal  ein  9ftann  ;  e§  toaren 
^aitfenbe  gugcgcn  ;  there  was ;  there  were,  etc.    3.  Without  English  equiva- 
lent—  often  with  poetic  emphasis:  G3  fiirdjte  bie  ©biter  ba3  2ftenfd)enge= 
fd)ted)t ;  e§  reben  nnb  traunten  bie  9CRenfrf)ett  t»iel,  etc.,  men  talk  and  dream 
much  of,  etc. 

NOTE. —  In  general  in  its  purely  expletive  uses,  as  in  the  last  two  and  in  b,  e§  is 
omitted  unless  introductory  ;  but  not  as  true  impersonal  or  pronoun  subject. 

(d)  As   representative  —  often  not  translated  —  of  an  entire  sentence 
preceding  or  following;  or  of  a  predicate  idea  —  noun  or  adjective:  here 
often  translated  by  so.   As  :  2fttr  toirb  ein  ©(iicf  gu  Xetl,  toie  id)  e§  nimmer  ge= 
fjofft ;  <£te  miiffen  e§  mir  erlouben,  ^f^nen  511  fagen,  etc.  S"i)  gluufie  e§,  I  believe 
so;  ber  tft  mein  grennb,  fo  toenig  er  e3  fdjetnt,  however  little  he  seems  so,  etc. 

(e)  In  some  phrases  like  English  to  trip  it,  lord  it  over,  etc.     As,:  Me 
SDleinung  Imlt  eg  ntit  bent  Unaliidlidien  —  holds  (sides)  with,  etc. 

The  phrases  it  is  I  (me  '/},  is  it  you  ?  etc.,  are  in  German  id)  Inn  e3,  ftnb 
@te  e§  ?  etc. 

(£§  is  often  written  %  as :  id)  6tn'3  (§  70). 

For  substitute  for  e§  with  prepositions,  see  §  457.  The  occasional  use 
of  e§  with  a  preposition  is  now  only  colloquial. 


262  LESSON  LIV.  [§  454 

THE  REFLEXIVES  (§  185). 

454.  i.  The  English  compounds,  myself,  himself,  etc.,  are 
sometimes  reflexive,  sometimes  emphatic  ;  as :  he  himself  killed 
himself,  etc.  No  such  ambiguity  of  form  exists  in  German. 

(a)  The  reflexive  object  is  expressed,  specifically,  by  ftdj  only.     Other 
pronoun  objects  may  be  used  reflexively.     (§  185). 

(b)  The  emphatic  self,  selves,  is  expressed  by  the  indeclinable  felbft,  or 
fetter,  which  are  used  only  in  apposition,  referring  to  either  subject  or 
object,  as  the  meaning  may  require.     As :  dr  f)dt  e§  fetbft  getan,  he  did  it 
himself;  er  fdjonte  fetner  f  el&ft  md)t,  he  did  not  spare  himself ;  er  Ijat  ftdj  fel* 
6er  getbtet,  he  himself  killed  himself,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  ©elbft  before  a  noun  has  the  sense  of  even  ;  fet&ft  ber  ®5nig,  even  the  king; 
but  bet  ®dtttg  felbit,  the  king  himself. 

(c)  ©el&ft  is  also  used  sometimes,  without  special  emphasis,  to  exclude 
a  possible  reciprocal  meaning  (§  252).     As:  £>te  Slngeflogten  berrieten  fid) 
fel&ft;  Mefe  ®tnber  lie&en  fid)  felbft,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  It  has  already  been  remarked  (§  252)  that  the  reflexive  idiom  is  used  more 
largely  in  German  than  in  English.  This  is  due  in  part  to  the  want  of  any  specific  or 
simple  English  reflexive. 

THE  POSSESSIVES  (§§   192-4). 

455-  See  §§  192-3.     Only  a  few  points  need  further  remark: 

(a)  Doubt  as  between  the  adjective  forms  and  the  pronoun  forms  can 
occur  only  in  the  predicate.     The  former  are  simply  predicative,  leaving 
the  stress  on  the  subject;  the  latter  are  used  for  emphasis  or  distinction 
of  persons  ;  as :  Mefe§  $8ud)  ift  metn  ;  but  Mefe3  23ud)  ift  meineS,  ntd)t  beine§. 
SSem  geljbrt  biefeS  33udj  ?    63  ift  meine$,  etc.    tlnfer  ift  Me  Slrbett,  after  eiter  ift 
ber  Sofjn. 

(b)  The  forms  with  the  article  are  often  used  as  nouns,  in  the  plural 
meaning  persons,  friends,  etc. ;  in  the  neuter  singular,  abstractly,  property, 
duty,  etc.    ^sT^"d)"  fcntb  Me  SJhintgen  gefunb  toieber,  I  found  my  family 
well;  h)ie  fcefinben  ftdj  Me  S^tigen?  how  are  you  all  at  home?    drTjoTIm^ 
©etntge  getan,  he  has  ~2one~w7iai  he  could,    ^d)  ftefje  auf  bent  2ftetntgen ; 
jebent  ba§  (Seine,  etc. 

(c)  Before  titles,  on  addresses  of  letters,  etc.,  fetne  and  feiner  are  often 
abbreviated  to  @c.  and  @r. ;  and  euer,  cure,  to  6m.     As :  <2>e.  2)?ajeftat  ber 
^bntg ;  @r.  (Sjcettenj  bent  gelbmarfdjatt ;  (Sto.  ©naben,  your  Grace.    Qtjio  and 
S)ero  are  old  genitives,  now  out  of  use :  S^O  50^ ajefta't,  your  majesty,  etc. 


§  456]  THE    POSSESSIVE.  263 

(d)  Colloquially,  but  incorrectly,  occur  such  forms,  as :  meineS  33ater§ 
—  or  meinem  SSater  —  fein  §au§,  etc.  Like  forms  were  current  in  older 
English :  John  Smith  his  book,  etc. 

(<?)  The  phrase,  (p)  fetner  Sett,  in  due  time,  is  idiomatic  and  of  doubtful 
explanation. 

The  rule  for  agreement  in  gender  —  and  the  exception  —  are  the  same 
as  with  the  personals  (§  452,  a).  In  general,  care  must  be  taken  that  the 
possessive  shall  correspond  to  its  proper  personal :  as  bein  to  bu,  £$f)r  to 
<£te,  etc.  This  is  often  overlooked  by  students. 

The  rules  for  repetition  of  a  possessive  are  the  same  as  with  the  defi- 
nite article.  (§  421). 

For  the  article  instead  of  possessive,  see  §  416,  5.  For  the  phrases,  a 
friend  of  mine,  etc.,  see  §  430,  e.  For  the  dative  possessive,  §  439,  b. 

EXERCISE  LIV. 

i.  Our  wine  is  sour ;  we  cannot  drink  it.  2.  For  your  sake  I  have  made 
this  long  journey.  3.  Even  the  name  of  this  man  is  unknown  to  me.  4. 
In  (the)  spring,  the  earth  clothes  itself  with  flowers.  5.  Take  my  key ;  you 
can  open  your  door  with  it.  6.  We  shall  soon  see  each  other  again.  7. 
Think  no  more  of  (an)  it.  8.  Is  it  you,  dear  mother?  Yes,  it  is  I.  9.  Can 
you  not  come  yourself?  10.  The  poor  man  has  done  himself  great  harm. 
II.  There' came  lately  a  strange  man  to  our  town.  12.  There  is  no  other 
road  that  leads  to  the  village.  13.  Will  you  please  (gefatttcjft)  lend  me  your 
grammar;  I  have  lost  mine.  14.  It  is  not  always  the  richest  that  are  the 
happiest.  15.  Will  it  rain  to-morrow?  I  believe  so.  16.  My  heart  beat 
for  joy  at  (liber)  it.  17.  Is  this  pen  mine?  No,  it  is  mine  ;  you  have  your- 
self taken  yours  away.  18.  This  vain  girl  speaks  always  of  herself  only. 
19.  The  girl  forgot  her  fan.  20.  What  is  mine  I  will  maintain.  21.  I  shall 
never  forget  you  and  yours.  22.  Do  you  still  remember  me  ?  23.  There 
are  many  people  in  the  town  that  I  do  not  know.  24.  I  am  advised  by 
my  physician  to  make  a  journey  to  Switzerland. 


LESSON  LV. 
The  Pronouns.  —  Continued. 

THE  DEMONSTRATIVES  (§§  204-10). 

456.  The  demonstratives  may  all  be  used  as  adjectives  or 
as  pronouns.      For  inflection  see  §§  204—207. 

NOTE. —  The  terms  "adjective  pronoun"  and  "  pronominal  adjective"  are  equally 
used  —  as  in  English  grammar  —  to  indicate  this  double  function. 


264  LESSON    LV.  [§  456 

1.  3)iefer,  jener,  distinguish  the  nearer  and  the  more  remote:  this  — 
that,  the  latter — the  former.     Without  such  distinction,  btejer  is  often  used 
for  that  one,  he,  etc.  (just  spoken  of),     ^erter  (=you)  properly  means  that 
yonder,  i.  e.  which  can  be  seen  ;  but  is  not  always  so  restricted. 

NOTE.  — The  English  one  is  not  translated  with  the  demonstratives  (this  one,  etc.). 

2.  £)er  is  the  more  general  demonstrative  of  reference,  without  regard 
to  position,  and  with  widest  range  of  use.     It  has  in  part  different  forms 
as  adjective  and  as  pronoun.    (§  206).     Note  also  : 

(a)  The  old  genitive  singular  pronoun  beji —  now  written  be§ —  is  not 
now  used  except  in  compounds :  beStoegen,  tnbe§,  etc. 

(b}  The  genitive  plural  forms  berer,  beren,  are  not  always  strictly  distin- 
guished :  berer  should  be  used  before  a  relative  or  other  restrictive ;  other- 
wise  beren.  As :  Me  §reunbfd)aft  berer,  Me  un£  fcfymeirfjeln,  tft  gefarjrlid). 
(£§  gt&t  beren  btele,  there  are  many  of  them. 

(c)  £)er —  not  Mefer  or  jener  —  must  be  used  as  supplying  pronoun  before 
a  genitive — that  of — often  in  English  omitted,  as  :  mein  &cm3  unb  ba§ 
metneS  33ruber§,  my  house  and  my  brother's.     In  this  sense  berjenige  is 
sometimes  less  correctly  used. 

(d)  The  indefinite  —  or  substantive  —  that  is  usually  ba3.     S8a§  ift  ba§? 
3>a§  toeifc  tcrj  nicfjt.     (See  §  210). 

For  bie§,  ba3,  as  introductory  subjects,  see  §  210. 

(e)  S)er,  adjective,  is  the  same  word  as  the  definite  article,  but  is  dis- 
tinguished from  it  by  stress  of  voice  —  often  also  by  type  —  the  article 
having  usually  minimum  stress.     Thus,  ber  9tfonn,  the  man;  ber  Sftann, 
that  man. 

The  adjective  phrase  ber  itnb  ber  means  such  and  such  a. 

NOTE.  —  £et  gives  rise  to  many  compounds,  such  as  :  beSinegen,  be§ljalb,  irtbeffen,  itt^ 
be£ ;  bergeftalt,  bergletcfien,  bereinft,  etc. ;  and  of  the  same  root,  bafern,  baljetm,  t>amal§, 
etc.,  as  well  as  the  usual  prepositional  compounds  bciritt,  babet,  etc. — all  of  which  are 
really  demonstrative. 

3.  berjenige  is  properly  used  only  as  antecedent  to  a  relative.     It  is 
here  not  distinguished  from  ber,  but  is  preferred  in  general  statements. 
As :  berjenige  (9ftann),  toeldjer  itn3  frfjmetchelt,  ift  fein  treiter  ^jreunb. 

In  this  use  ber  may  include  both  antecedent  and  relative ;  as,  ber  am 
Ie£ten  toegging,  tear  ber  Stffe,  he  who,  etc. 

4.  2)erjel6e — adjective,  the  same,  efcen  berfelfce,  the  very  same  —  as  pro- 
noun has  its  most  important  uses  as  substitute.     (See  §  457). 

5.  ©Dicker  (fold))  properly  implies  a  correlative:  such  —  as,  which  may 
be  expressed  by  tote,  or  by  a  relative  clause.    As  :  ein  folder  2Jfann  toie  <5ie; 


§  457]  THE    DEMONSTRATIVES.  265 

foldje  S8ud)er,  bte  man  md)t  lefen  lann  —  as  one  cannot  read.  Its  use  as  pure 
demonstrative  is  rare  and  incorrect :  e§  famen  ^u  ifjm  mef)rere  JBiirger  unb 
unter  f  old)en  and)  jener  28irt,  —  among  them,  etc. 

Suck,  used  idiomatically  before  an  adjective,  is  the  adverb  fo  :  etne  fo 
fd)led)te  geber,  such  a  bad  pen  ;  ttttt  fo  fd)led)ten  gebern,  with  such  bad  pens. 

Note  the  colloquial  fo  ein,  for  fold)  ein;  fo  ethmS  (toaS),  such  a  thing,  etc. 

DEMONSTRATIVES  AS  SUBSTITUTES. 

457.  The  demonstrative  pronouns  are  largely  used  in  cases 
where  personals  or  possessives  are  used  in  English : 

1.  To  distinguish  things  without  life : 

(a)  Instead  of  the  genitive  and  dative  (fetner,  if)m)  of  the  third  per- 
sonal, which  are  identical  in  masculine  and  neuter,  the  demonstratives 
beffen,  beSfelben,  bemfelben  are  used  of  things  without  life.     As:  er  f)dt  mir 
®elb  angeboten,  after  id)  bebarf  beffen  (beSfelben)  nidjt,  /  do  not  need  it ;  id) 
fdja'nte  mid)  beffen,  of  it  (fetner,  of  him] ;  er  Ijat  mir  fetn  SSort  gegeben,  attein 
id)  traue  bemfelbcn  ntdjt,  I  do  not  trust  it  (tf)m,  him). 

(b)  With  a  preposition,  for  all  cases,  things  without  life  take  instead  of 
the  personal   a  demonstrative    object  —  usually   of   ber,  or  berfelbe —  or, 
more  frequently,  a  prepositional  compound :  of  ba,  I)ier,  for  dative  or  ac- 
cusative (§  401) ;  of  be3  for  genitive,  where  such  exists.     As :  bd§  SDfcffer 
ift  fdjarf;  bu  fannft  bid)  mtt  bemfelben  (bomit)  leidjt  fd)netben.     ^d)  ^abc  ntd)t§ 
bagegen,  against  it  (ifm,  him}.     GS  regnet ;  beS^alb  bletbe  id)  su  §aufe  —  or, 
tro^  beffen  gefje  id)  an§.     SSJJcin  Sreunb  I)Qt  metnen  9tegenfd)trm  berloren  ;  ofjne 
benfelben  fann  id)  ntd)t  au§get)en  (iljn,  him). 

The  forms  beffentuntten,  berent^alben,  etc.,  are  like  those  in  §  452,  b. 

(c)  Often,  for  the  possessive,  things  without  life  use  a  demonstrative 
genitive:   ber  53anm  nnb  beffen  Btoetge  •  j)je   ©tabt  unb   beren   GiniDofjner. 
Analogous  with  this  is  the  use  of  the  demonstrative  to  distinguish  the 
objective  from  the  subjective  genitive,  even  of  persons.     As:  etn  £$reuitb 
ift  etn  grofjeS  ©ut;  ber  23efi£  be^felben  erp^t  ben  2Sert  beS  SebenS  — fein  S8e= 
ft|j  would  mean  his  property. 

2.  Sometimes  a  demonstrative  is  used  to  mark  more  closely  the  con- 
nection between  successive  sentences.     As:  (£3  ttmr  etn  alter  2ftaan ;  biefcr 
I)atte  brei  ©b'fjne ;  er  berteitte  fetn  ©ut  unter  biefelben. 

3.  As   indefinite   (determinative)  antecedent  to  a  relative,  he  (who)  is 
berjentge  (or  ber) ;  as,  berjenige,  toeldjer  (=  tocr)  gludltd)  ift,  ift  reid).     But  if 
the  antecedent  is  definite,  the  regular  personal  will  be  used ;  as,  er,  ben  id) 
fur  meinen  Sreunb  fjielt,  fjot  mid)  berroten. 


266  LESSON    LV.  [§  458 

4.  Sometimes  for  emphasis,  or  only  for  euphony: 

(a)  Emphasis,  as  ber  mufc  ein  Sftarr  fein,  he  (that fellow). 

(b)  Euphony,  as :  er  f)at  eine  Xodjter ;  fennen  @ie  Mefelbe  ?  S)tefer  SBetn  tft 
gut;  id)  fann  Sfjnen  benfelfcen  empfeljlen. 

5.  Specially  important,  however,  is  the  use  of  the  demonstrative  ber, 
berfelfce,  to  refer  to  a  foregoing  object,  the  personal,  or  possessive,  being 
used  to  refer  to  the  subject  only.     As :  (£r  traf  feinen  SBruber  unb  beffen 
greunbe  (feine  would  mean  his  own).    $)te  2od)ter  fd)rie&  ifirer  Sautter,  bafj 
biefelbe  in  Sonbon  erftmrtet  toerbe  (fie  would  mean  the  daughter).    £er  Center 
lobt  ben  <5d)iiler,  after  berfelfce  bonft  iljm  ntd)t  bafiir;  ber  ®bntg  bonfte  bent 
9fttmfter  unb  la§  beffen  3lebe  burd) ;  fie  tnalte  t^re  ©djtr-efter  unb  beren  Stouter, 
etc.     This    distinction  is  important   in  long  sentences,  or  in  a  sequence 
of  sentences  ;  and  especially  in  cases  of  possible  ambiguity/ 

REMARK.  —  It  thus  appears  that,  mainly  by  help  of  its  demonstratives,  German  is  more 
specific  and  distinctive  than  English  in  the  use  of  pronouns.  Every  student  knows  the 
danger  of  ambiguity  in  the  English  personals.  The  old  story,  "  And  he  said,  saddle  me  the 
ass  ;  and  they  saddled  him"  is  good  enough  to  be  true. 

THE  INTERROGATIVES. 

458.  The  interrogatives  tt>er,  ft>a§,  ttetcfyer,  ttm§  fiir  ein,  are 
quite  fully  treated  §§  217-222.  See  also  §  240.  Observe 
further : 

1.  As  to  their  distinction,  compared  with  English  forms: 

(a)  2Ber  corresponds  fully  to  English  who  ?  and  is  always  substantive 
and  personal. 

(b}  English  which  ?  is  always  toetdjer.  But  what?  is  toeldjer  only  when 
adjective,  or  definite;  ttm§,  when  substantive,  or  indefinite.  As:  In  what 
book  do  you  find  that  ?  in  toeldjem  33ud)e  ;  what  do  you  say?  toa§  fogen  <Sie? 

2.  The  interrogatives  are  often  only  exclamatory,  and  readily  become 
indefinite  or  adverbial : 

(a)  SSeldjer  is  sometimes  used  in  the  singular,  colloquially,  in  the  sense 
of  some:  £>aben  ©te  ©elb?  %a,  id)  Ijabe  toeldjeS,  some. 

(6)  3Sa§  is  sometimes  used  for  ettoaS,  something—  especially  before  an 
adjective;  as,  tua§  ®ute£,  something  good,  etc.  Also,  for  toarum,  why ;  as-. 
2Ba§  fd)QUt  Ujr  mid)  fo  feltfam  an  ?  Why  do  you  look  at  me  so  strangely  ?  And 
for  tote,  how  ?  As :  3Ba§  <Ste  braun  gefirannt  finb  !  How  brown  you  are 
burned  ! 


§  459]  THE    RELATIVES.  267 

3.  Colloquially,  and  irregularly,  ttm§  is  sometimes  found  with  preposi- 
tions ;  as,  mil  Wa§r  etc.,  for  inomtt  —  even  where  the  case  would  not  be 
accusative. 

For  the  use  of  the  prepositional  compounds  instead  of  \vaS>  with  prepo- 
sitions, see  §  222.  The  old  toe3  (toefc)  —  now  used  only  in  such  compounds 
—  was  formerly  used  also  as  an  .indefinite  adjective,  as:  toe§  ©tctttbeS  er 
and)  jet,  of  whatever  rank,  etc. 

In  the  indirect  or  dependent  question,  the  interrogates  are  nearly  connected  in  sense, 
as  in  construction,  with  the  relatives  —  especially  with  the  indefinite  relatives  (§  236). 

EXERCISE  LV. 

i.  How  can  you  write  with  such  a  pen?  2.  The  same  sun  shines  over 
the  just  and  the  unjust.  3.  This  is  my  youngest  brother,  and  those  (sing.) 
are  my  sons.  4.  With  this  (comp!)  you  will  receive  the  books  (which)  I 
had  promised  you.  5.  Take  this  money  ;  I  do  not  need  it.  6. 1  have  heard 
nothing  of  that.  7.  My  friend  arrived  on  the  same  train  as  the  prince  and 
his  suite.  8.  Those  who  help  us  in  (the)  misfortune  are  our  true  friends. 
9.  Do  you  know  who  has  brought  the  letter?  10.  With  what  can  we  best 
pass  our  time?  n.  Advise  me  what  book  I  shall  read.  12.  What  are  you 
thinking  about?  what  letter  are  you  speaking  of?  13.  Trust  not  him  who 
always  flatters  you.  14.  In  whose  house  have  you  heard  that  story?  I  do 
not  believe  it.  15.  Tell  me  what  books  you  want,  and  I  will  send  them 
[to]  you.  1 6.  Do  you  see  that  man,  who  stands  at  that  corner  [yonder]  ? 
17.  I  have  sold  my  horses  and  also  my  son's.  18.  He  is  my  friend  who 
always  tells  me  the  truth.  19.  Such  a  man  as  he  should  not  believe  such 
stories.  20.  The  trees  with  their  green  leaves  are  now  very  beautiful.  21. 
I  have  never  seen  such  a  bad  boy ;  I  am  ashamed  of  him.  22.  Those 
ladies  are  my  daughter  and  my  brother's ;  do  you  not  know  them  ?  23. 
The  king  must  respect  that  man;  for  he  has  just  appointed  his  son  an 
officer.  24.  I  cannot  write  on  such  bad  paper. 


LESSON  LVL 
The  Pronouns.  — Continued. 

THE  RELATIVES. 

459«  See  §§  233-240,  where  the  relatives  are  somewhat  fully 
explained.  Only  a  few  remarks  need  to  be  added. 

i.  £)er,  roelcfjer,  are  the  definite  relatives ;  toer,  ftm§,  the  indefinite.  They 
are  all  properly  pronouns,  not  adjectives,  in  construction  ;  but  ber,  toeldjer, 


268  LESSON    LVI.  '  [§  459 

introduce  adjective  clauses,  qualifying  an   antecedent ,    toer,    hm§,   noun 
clauses,  without  antecedent  noun. 

2.  The  definite  relatives  ber,  toeldjer,  are  for  the  most  part  used  indiffer- 
ently—  roeld)er  being  only  somewhat  more  formal.     Except : 

(a)  In  the  genitive,  only  the  forms  of  ber  are  used  for  both,  because, 
probably,  the  genitive  forms  of  toeldjer  might  be  confounded  with  other 
cases.     For  exception,  see  c,  below. 

NOTE.  —  The  genitive  relative  never  follows  its  governing  noun  :  a  book  on  the  pages 
of  which —  oilf  beffen  ©eiteu,  etc.  See  also  §  240. 

(b)  £)er  is  always  used  if  the  antecedent  is  a  personal  pronoun  of  first 
or  second  person,  or  <£te,  in  address ;  and  then  the  personal  is  usually  re- 
peated after  the  relative.     If  the  personal  is  not  repeated,  the  verb  stands 
usually  in  the  third  person.     As :  %$,  ber  id)  immer  fein  greunb  getoefen  bin. 
S)u,  ber  (fem.  Me)  bu  mid)  me  berlaffen  totrft.     <£te,  Me  ©ie  mir  fceifttmtnten, 
you  who  agreed  with  me.     But:  SSeradjteft  bu  fo  mid),  ber  rjter  geMetet?  £sd) 
bin  eine  orme  grew,  Me  fctnen  2)£enfd)en  rjter  lennt,  etc. 

(c)  tt)eld)er —  not  ber  —  is  sometimes  used  as  an  adjective;  as:  23erttn, 
in  toeldjer  (Stcibt  er  ftarfc,  'in  which  city  he  died.     And  rarely  roeldjer  occurs  as 
genitive,  with  a  preposition ;  as,  einige  Stugenfcltde,  roafjrenb  roeldjer,  during 
which. 

NOTE.  —  Thus,  while  ber  and  toelcfjev  correspond  in  origin  to  that,  which,  respectively, 
they  are  not  distinguished  in  use  or  construction  like  English  that  and  which  (or  who), 
Neither  is  the  distinction  between  the  restrictive  and  the  explanatory  relative  clearly 
marked  by  punctuation,  as  in  English.  £>er  is,  in  general,  the  more  usual,  except  in  formal 
prose  style. 

REMARK.  —  Referring  to  Remark  §  457,  it  may  now  be  added  that  English  has  the  ad- 
vantage in  the  relatives,  as  clearly  as  German  in  the  demonstratives. 

3.  28er,  he  who,  whoever,  and  toa§,  what,  that  which,  whatever,  are  the 
indefinite  or  "  compound  "  relatives  and  cannot  have  definite  antecedent. 
As:  SScr  friif)  aufftefyt,  lefct  lange  ;  roa§  bu  tun  hnttft,  tue  balb,  etc. 

(a)  But,  toer,  toa§,  may  be  followed  by  a  postcedent  demonstrative,  re- 
peating the  idea  that  has  been  defined  by  the  foregoing  predicate.     As : 
2Ber  friifj  ciufftef)t,  ber  (i.  e.  the  early-riser)  lebt  longe;  nm3  bu  tun  ttrittft,  ba§ 
tue  batb,  etc.     This  is  necessary  if  the  case  is  changed.     As :  SSer  einnwl 
liigt,  bent  ttnrb  ntdjt  gegtaubt ;  toa£  man  fyat,  beffen  fiebarf  man  ntd)t,  etc. 

(b)  In  the  sense  of  whoever,  whatever,  toer,  toa§  are  sometimes  followed 
immediately  by  ba  —  or,  with  intervening  word  or  words,  by  oudj  —  also 
immer.     As :  28er  ba  roollte,  mi)d)te  fid)  fe^en  ;  atte3  toa§  ba  lebt  unb  toebt,  all 
that  lives  and  moves ;  tua§  man  and)  gegen  if)n  borbrtnge ;  toer  ba§  immer  ge= 
jagt  ^at,  whoever  had  said  that,  etc. 

(c)  28a§  is  sometimes  used,  most  indefinitely,  for  toer  ;  as  :  Sritfj  ii&t  fid), 
hm§  etn  2Jtetfter  roerben  tottt.     (§  460,  4,  d.) 


§  460]  THE    INDEFINITES.  269 

(d)  For  todS  (that,  which}  after  indefinite  antecedents,  see  §  236,  b. 

4.  For  prepositional  compounds  instead  of  relative  objects,  see  §  237. 
This  use  is  largely  extended  to  all  non-personal  relatives  (as  in  the  demon- 
stratives).    The  old  genitive  toejj —  now  written  toeS — is  used  only  in 
genitive  compounds :  tt>c§I)aI6,  toe§ft>egen,  etc.    SKeffentljalben  is  formed  as 
§  452,  b. 

5.  Like  the  demonstratives  ber,  bo,  the  compounds  barauf,  babon,  etc. 
(§  184)  —  and  some  other  demonstrative  compounds,  as  bafern,  bergleidjen, 
inbeffen,  etc.  —  may  be  used  also  in  relative  (dependent)  sense,  the  use 
being  distinguished  by  the  construction.     (See  §  351,  2.) 

For  fo,  as  relative,  see  §  485,  9.     See  also  §  240. 

THE  INDEFINITES. 

460.  (See  §§  244-5).  The  term  "  indefinites  "  is*itself  very 
indefinite.  It  includes,  like  a  "waste-basket,"  a  group  of  words 
which  lie  along  the  dividing  lines  of  pronoun,  adjective  and 
numeral.  Some  of  these  are  also  called  "  indefinite  numerals." 
Only  some  of  the  most  important  uses  will  be  here  noted.  — 

1.  2J?an  supplies  the  want  —  so  often  felt  in  English  —  of  an  indefinite 
personal  subject.     It  is  much  used,  and  variously  translated — most  fre- 
quently by  our  passive  (§  274).     Its  oblique  cases  are  supplied  by  etner; 
its  possessive  by  feut ;  reflexive  by  fid).     As :  S&enn  man  ©elb  berltert,  fo 
tut  e§  etnem  letb ;  man  ift  fro!),  toenn  man  feine  SCr&eit  getan  f)at ;  roenn  man 
fid)  irrt,  when  one  is  mistaken,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  Sftait  is  often  rendered  by  -we,  you,  they,  etc.  But  it  must  never  be  used  unless 
the  subject  is. entirely  indefinite. 

2.  (a)  (Siner,  someone,  anyone,  is  also  used  as  indefinite  subject ;  but  less 
general  than  man  :  loenn  etner  lyfjnen  fagte,  if  some  one  told  yo^^,  etc.     It  is 
also  used  with  the  article  :  ber  (Sine,  ber  SCnbere,  the  one,  the  other;  Me  Sincn, 
bie  9(nberen,  some,  the  others  —  also  without  capital  initial. 

(b)  S)er  Stnbere,  is  sometimes  used  for  the  second  (of  two  only).  Another, 
meaning  one  more  is  nod)  ein(=er),  as :  nod)  eine  £offe  5£f)ee,  another  cup  of 
tea. 

3.  The  indeclinable  trgenb  is  often  used  with  etn(=er)  and  other  indefinites, 
jemanb,  etroa£,  toeld)er,  and  some  others,  to  strengthen  the  indefinite  sense: 
trgenb  einer,  anyone  at  all ;  ira§  trgenb  geredjt  ift,  whatever  is  right. 

4.  2111,  all,  has  some  peculiar  uses  : 

(a)  Standing  alone  before  a  noun  it  is  fully  declined :  Sitter  9(nfang  ift 
fdjtoer  ;  atte  2ftenfd)en,  all  men. 

(6)  But  preceding  the  article,  or  other  pronominal,  it  stands  often  — 


27O  LESSON    LVI.  [§  460 

but  not  always,  undeclined.     As  :  all  ba3  ®etb  ;  alt  btefe  Sftenfdjen  ;  unter  att 
btefen  ttmftanbett,  etc.     Stlte  stands  for  alt  in  a  few  phrases  j  bet  atle  bent, 


(<:)  In  the  plural,  it  is  rarely  followed  by  the  article  ;  all  the  boys  is,  usu- 
ally, olle  ftnaben,  or  bte  ®naben  atte. 

(d)  In  the  plural,  ott  often  means  every;  atfeXage;  atte  bier  SBodjen,  etc.; 
and  in  the  neuter  singular,  sometimes,  everybody  :  dtte§  fdjtmeg,  everybody 
was  silent.   (See  §  459,  3,  c.)    For  all,  meaning  entire,  whole  (gan^),  see  §  144. 

(e)  Other  neuters,  etneS,  fetne§,  jebe§,  etc.,  are  also  sometimes  used  of 
persons  indefinitely,  or  where  both  sexes  are  included  ;  as  :  $eineS  tttufc  bd§ 
Stnbere  ungliirfltrf)  madjen,  neither  (man  nor  woman},  etc. 

5.  93etbe  differs  from  English  both. 

(a)  It  follows  instead  of  preceding  the  article  or  its  equivalent  :  bie  bei= 
ben  Shtaben  ;  meine  betben  SBritber.     It  thus  often  stands  for  two,  where  there 
are  only  two  :  my  two  brothers. 

(b)  It  is  never  followed  by  a  partitive  genitive,  'of:  toil*  beibe,  both  of 
us;  btcfe  betben  £>ciufer,  both  of  these  houses,  etc. 

(c)  It  is  sometimes  used  in  the  neuter  singular,  betbeS,  meaning  either, 
each  of  the  two  :  bett>e§  fann  toafjr  fein,  either  may  be  true. 

6.  SStet,  toetttg.     SSiel  is  sometimes  declined  in  the  singular,  meaning 
many  kinds  :  bteler  SSetn  ;  but  btel  SBein,  much  wine.    SBenig,  little,  and  etn 
toentg,  a  little,  are  distinguished  as  in  English.     The  plural  toenige,  is  few; 
a  few  is  etntge,  etlid)e. 

7.  ©enitg,  tauter,  are  undeclined  :  ©etb  gcnug,  enough   money,  or,  money 
enough  ;  tauter  ©etb,  nothing  but  money  ;  tauter  Steintgfeiten,  mere  trifles. 

8.  Either,  neither  are  usually  enter,  fetner  —  bon  betben.     For  not  any, 
see  §  244,  note. 

EXERCISE  LVI. 

i.  Who  are  the  ladies  with  whom  you  were  speaking  (the  ladies  you 
were  speaking  with)  ?  2.  Those  on  whose  help  we  most  relied  were  the  first 
to  forsake  us.  3.  The  author  that  wrote  the  work  you  have  just  been  talk- 
ing of,  is  an  old  friend  of  mine.  4,  The  subject  of  which  we  spoke  yester- 
day is  more  important  than  we  thought.  5.  The  gentleman  whose  house 
I  bought  is  gone  away.  6.  I  shall  do  what  I  have  promised  ;  you  may 
rely  on  that.  7.  The  robbers  into  whose  hands  we  had  fallen  took  [from] 
us  all  (ttmS)  we  had.  8.  He  was  the  best  friend  I  ever  had.  9.  We  went 
into  a  house,  from  the  windows  of  which  we  could  see  the  whole  proces- 
sion. 10.  My  clerk,  on  whose  honesty  I  so  much  relied,  has  deceived 


§  46lJ  SUBJECT    AND    PREDICATE.  27! 

me.  ii.  I,  who  am  older  than  you,  will  assist  you  with  my  advice.  12. 
He  who  is  industrious  and  faithful  will  make  progress.  13.  I  have  no 
money;  can  you  lend  me  some?  only  a  little?  14.  Every  one  must  help 
his  neighbor  in  (the)  need.  15.  We  (man)  forget  easily  what  we  have 
read  without  interest.  16.  One  must  never  forsake  one's  friends.  17.  It  is 
said  that  we  shall  never  have  peace.  18.  Everything  earthly  is  transitory. 
19.  All  [the]  travellers  had  to  change  at  that  station.  20.  We  receive 
letters  from  Germany  every  two  weeks,  during  all  the  year.  21.  All  my 
happiness  is  in  your  hands.  22.  Many  were  invited,  but  few  came.  23. 
Both  of  my  sons  were  in  Europe  last  summer.  24.  What  you  tell  me  (that) 
I  have  long  known. 


LESSON  LVIL 

The  Verb. 

SUBJECT  AND  PREDICATE.  — CONCORD. 

461.  Only   the   more    important   departures  from    English 
usage  will  be  noticed. 

i.  THE  SUBJECT. 

(a)  For  the  omission  of  the  subject,  see  §  429.     For  the  position  of  the 
subject  after  the  verb,  §344. 

(b)  The  subject  must  be  repeated  with  connected  verbs,  if  the  order  of 
words  changes.    As:  er  tarn  511  mtr,  ging  after  fogletdj  toeg;  but:  after  fogleid) 
ging  er  toeg  ;  bit  ftetriigft  niemanb,  after  bon  anbern  fttft  bit  ftetrogen. 

(c)  If  the  subjects  are  of  different  persons,  the  including  plural  pronoun 
will  usually  be  expressed  before  the  verb.     As :  tnein  SBrnber  unb  idi  (fair) 
reifen  ftalo  06 ;  bu  unb  er  (t^r)  fetb  im  ^rrtum. 

2.  THE  VERB. 

(a)  Introduced  by  e§,  ba§,  toa§,  etc.,  the  verb  agrees  with  the  logical, 
not  the  grammatical  subject.     As  :  bo8  ftnb  §rembe ;  bie§  ftnb  2ftd'nner,  bie 
Strfjtung  berbtenen  ;  e3  ftnb  unjere  greunbe,  etc.  (See  §  210.) 

(b)  Collective   nouns  take  a   singular  verb    more   uniformly   than  in 
English.    As :  Mefe3  SSol!  Ijot  etne  grofje  5rct^ett ;  bie  2ftenge  tnadjt  ben  $iinftler 
irr'  itnb  fdjeit.     But  when  a  plural  defining  noun  follows,  the  verb  will  be 
plural.    As :  eine  3ftenge  @d)tffe  lagen  im  £>afen ;  etne  9tnaal)I  23iirger  Ija&en 
fid)  beretntgt. 


272  LESSON    XLII.  [§  462 

(<:)  More  freely  than  in  English  a  series  of  singular  subjects,  unless  ex- 
pressly distinct,  may  take  a  singular  verb.  As  :  £au§  unb  £>of  ift  berfauft; 
©roll  unb  SRadje  fet  bergeffen,  etc.  This  is  especially  the  case  when  the  verb 
precedes  both  or  either  of  the  subjects.  As  :  £ier  fprtd)t  erfaljrmtg',  SBiffen* 
fdjaft,  ©efdjntacf ;  2fteijter  ritljrt  fid)  unb  ©efcKe,  etc. 

(d]  With  disjunctive  singular  subjects  the  rule  is  a  singular  verb,  but 
with  exceptions.     As :  toeber  Me  Union  nod)  Me  Stgue  mtfdjten  ftdj  in  biefen 
©trett,  mixed  themselves,  etc. 

(e)  Exceptional  is  the  formal  use  of  plural  verbs  with  certain  exalted 
titles.     As :  Sure  SKajcftcit  geru^en  :  Sure-  ©jceKena  Ijaben  fcefofjlen,  etc.,  and 
in  some  set  phrases  of  formal  courtesy. 

For  the  verb  after  a  relative  with  personal  pronoun,  see  §  459,  2,  b. 


THE  TENSES. 

462.  Here  again  will  be  noticed  only  the  more  important 
departures  from  the  ordinary  sense,  or  from  corresponding 
English  forms. 

SIMPLE  AND  COMPOUND  TENSES. 

1.  The  simple  tenses  (§  167),  are  the  same  in  German  as  in  English: 
the  present  and  the  past  (preterit),  sometimes  —  but  in  either  language 
improperly  —  called  the  imperfect.    The  compound  tenses  are  less  complete 
than  in  English. 

2.  The  English  tenses  formed  with  the  auxiliaries  be  and  do  have  no 
corresponding  forms  in  German.     Thus  :  /  stand,  am  standing,  do  stand; 
I  stood,  was  standing,  did  stand ;  I  have  stood,  have  been  standing;  I  shall 
stand,  shall  be  standing,  etc.,  are  represented  in  German,  respectively,  by 
the  single  forms  only :  idj  ftelje;  id)  jtcntb ;  id)  fja&e  geftanbcn ;  id)  toerbe  ftcfjen, 
etc.     The  English  student  must  carefully  discriminate  these  forms  in  trans- 
lation.    It  may  be  observed,  also,  that  English  has  here  a  great  advantage 
over  not  only  German,  but  all  kindred  languages. 

NOTE.  —  An  auxiliary  use  of  tun  sometimes  occurs  as  a  vulgarism:  id)  tot  e§  nidjt 
fagen  :  rarely,  also,  in  poetry.  In  this  use  tat  often  stands  for  tat. 

3.  The  English  auxiliary  be  must  be  carefully  distinguished  when  verb 
and  when  auxiliary  (§  169).     Thus :  she  is  charming,  fte  ift  retjenb  (part,  adj.); 
she  is  charming  me  -with  her  singing,  (pres.  tense),  etc.     Especially  also 
whether  toerben  or  fein,  in  passive  forms  (§  273). 


§  464]  THE    PAST    AND    THE    PERFECT.  273 

USE  OF  INDICATIVE  TENSES. 

463.  THE  PRESENT. 

(a)  The  present  is  used  for  the  past,  more  frequently  than  in  English, 
to  make  a  narrative  more  lively  {historical present?)     As:  2113  tt)tt  bcij§  ©d)lo§ 
nun  angepnbet,  ba  ftiir^t  bet  S)tetl)elm  rjcrbor  unb  rufr,  rushes  out  and  ex- 
claims, etc.     Also  often  colloquially:  ba  lommt  er  git  tntr  unb  fagr,  etc. 

(b)  The  present,  usually  with  fd)on,  already,  or  feit,  since,  is  regularly 
used,  corresponding  to  English  perfect,  to  express  an  action  or  state  con- 
tinuing in  the  present.    As :  tote  lange  ftnb  Sic  f  cf)on  Ijter  ?  how  long  have  you 
been  here  /*  !yd)  fenne  Ujn  (fdjon)  feit  fetner  $inbf)ett,  /  have  knoivn  him,  etc. 
In  the  same  way  the  past  corresponds  to  the  English  pluperfect :  2>d)  fannte 
ttjn  fdjon  feit  fetner  $tnbl)ett,  I  had  known  him  since  his  childhood. 

(c)  The  present  is  used,  much  more  freely  than  in  English,  in  place  of 
the  future ;  usually  with  a  future  adverb ;  often,  also,  with  like  effect  as 
(a),  to  express  an  immediate  or  certain  future,  as  if  actually  present.     As: 
id)  lomme  fogletd)  guriirf ;  in  gtoei  Xagen  fctn  id)  fertig  ;  btefe  Hftadjt  erfteigen  fair 
ba§  ©djlofe  ;  fie  Ie6t  ntdjt  nteljr,  fo&alb  bu  e3  gebteteft. 

NOTE.  —  This  belongs  to  the  earliest  uses  in  both  German  and  English,  before  the  exis- 
tence of  the  auxiliary  futures.  In  the  same  way  the  (present)  perfect  may  be  used  for  the 
future  perfect,  as  in  English.  As  :  ©obatb  icfj  Sftacftridjt  befommen  fjabe,  ttjotten  loir  nic^t 
Idnger  toericeileit,  as  soon  as  I  (shall)  have  received  news,  etc. 

(d}  With  like  effect,  the  present  is  sometimes  used  for  an  emphatic  im- 
perative: S)u  gefjft  fogletd),  you  (must}  go  at  once;  bu  fdjtefceft  ober  fttr&ft, 
shoot  or  die. 

464.  THE  PAST  (PRETERIT)   AND  THE  PERFECT. 

These  tenses  are  not  so  sharply  distinguished  in  German  as  in  English. 
The  former  is  properly  the  simple  historical  past  ^-sometimes  imperfect; 
the  latter,  the  tense  of  an  action  completed  with  reference  to  the  present 
• —  or,  in  English,  within  a  time  including  the  present.  But  in  German 
the  perfect  is  often  used  where  in  English  the  past  would  be  employed. 
Thus: 

(a)  The  perfect  expresses  an  action  as  simply  completed,  or  absolutely 
past,  at  the  present  time.  As :  ©oft  *jat  Me  9BeIt  crfdjaffen,  God  created  the 
world;  id)  fja&e  S^en  S^eunb  geftern  gefefi.en,  7  saw  your  friend  yesterday ; 
btefe  f  trdje  tft  tm  14.  Safjrljunbert  erbaut  toorben,  this  church  was  built,  etc. 

(d)  The  past  usually  expresses  a  past  action  as  connected  with  other  past 
actions  or  circumstances,  and  is  thus  the  usual  tense  of  historical  narrative: 


274  LESSON    LVII.  [§  465 

also  of  continuous  or  imperfect  action.  As :  ©ott  fdjuf  bte  SSelt  in  fed)§ 
Xagen  unb  rufite  am  ftebenten.  28o  hmren  fie  gu  jener  3eit?  $er  $naoe  fafe 
a u  f  einem  ©tuljle,  aI3  id)  t  n  3  gtroroer  trat.  Sinige  donate  berftrtdjen,  erje  e  i  n  e 
2lntftort  lam,  j-^w^  months  passed  before,  etc. 

But  in  many  cases  the  perfect  is  used,  especially  in  familiar  style,  where 
the  past  would  be  more  strictly  required  —  especially  of  the  recent  past. 

NOTE.  i.  —  A  further  distinction  is  stated,  that  the  past  expresses  what  the  speaker  wit- 
nessed or  participated  in  ;  the  perfect,  the  simple  fact :  but  this  can  hardly  be  sustained. 

NOTE  2.  —  It  will  be  observed  that  in  the  English  perfect,  the  present  relation  predomi- 
nates ;  in  the  German,  that  of  completed  action.  Thus  :  /  have  seen  him  to-day,  but :  / 
sazu  hint  yesterday ,  is  a  distinction  that  does  not  obtain  in  German. 

(c)  The  imperfect  sense  is  often  more  clearly  expressed  by  the  adverb 
eben  (foeben), /«.$•/.•  ^d)  fd)rieb  eben,  alS,  I  was  just  writing  when,  etc. 

465.  THE  FUTURE. 

(a)  The  future  is  frequently  used  instead  of  the  present,  and  the  future 
perfect  instead  of  the  perfect,  in  order  to  express  a  supposition  or  proba- 
bility. As:  Gr  fturb  Ijungrtg  fein,  I  suppose  he  is  hungry ;  er  totrb  Ijungrig 
getoefen  fein,  he  has  probably  been  hungry.  The  adverbs  bod)  or  tooljl  are 
sometimes  added  in  order  to  bring  out  the  sense  more  clearly :  5)er  SSater 
hrirb  toofjl  nod)  fdjlafen,  I  suppose  father  is  still  asleep ;  er  ttrirb  bod)  nidjt  tange 
oort  geolteben  fein,  I  suppose  he  did  not  stay  there  long. 

(b)  The  future  is  sometimes  used  for  an  emphatic  imperative.  As  :  $)U 
tmrft  gleid)  gerjen,  you  will  go  at  once.  In  this  sense  also  it  may  be  substi- 
tuted by  the  present.  (See  §  463,  d). 

(c)  The  English  forms,  I  am  going  to,  am  about  to,  denoting  an  immedi- 
ate future,  may  be  rendered  in  German  by  tootten,  im  S3egrtff  fein  —  often 
with  the  adverb  eben  (foeoen), /«.$•/.  As:  id)  toottre  foefcen  fd)rei6en ;  id)  tuar 
(eben)  im  Segrtff  511  fdjrei&en;  al3  er  eben  ben  ©eift  aufgeben  tcoUte,  when  he 
was  just  about  to  give  up  the  ghost. 

(d}  As  already  remarked  (§  268)  the  future  must  be  carefully  distinguished 
from  the  modal  use  of  follen,  shall;  tootten,  will ;  shall  or  will,  as  future 
auxiliary,  being  in  German  always  toerben.  The  English  shibboleth  shall 
or  -will,  can  be  easily  made  clear  by  the  German  forms  —  the  difficulty  be- 
ing wholly  in  English. 

EXERCISE  LVII. 

I.  In  a  few  minutes  I  shall  be  back  again.  2.  Why  does  your  brother  not 
come?  3.  I  suppose  he  has  no  time.  4.  The  children  are  not  yet  (nod) 
ntdjt)  at  home  ;  they  are  probably  in  (the)  school.  5.  Sit  down,  or  leave  the 


§  466]  THE    SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD.  275 

room.  6.  I  shall  come  as  soon  as  I  have  written  my  letter.  7.  You  will 
carry  this  letter  to  (cmf)  the  post,  and  return  immediately.  8.  I  was  just 
writing  a  letter  when  my  friend  arrived.  9.  He  will  have  left  London  be- 
fore we  arrive  there.  10.  We  were  just  about  to  go  for  a  walk  when  it  began 
to  rain.  n.  How  long  have  you  been  learning  German?  12.  I  have  been 
learning  it  [these]  three  months,  and  now  I  am  beginning  to  make  more 
rapid  progress  (//.).  13.  I  have  worn  this  coat  [for]  eight  years;  it  is 
time  to  buy  a  new  [one].  14.  While  I  was  (am)  considering  the  matter,  I 
received  a  letter  which  relieved  me  of  all  further  doubt.  15.  Last  year  we 
made  a  trip  up  (ace.}  the  Rigi  and  passed  the  night  on  the  mountain.  16. 
The  sun  rose  splendidly,  and  we  had  a  glorious  view  over  (ace.}  mountains 
and  valleys.  17.  I  had  hardly  set  my  foot  out  of  the  door  when  it  began 
to  rain.  18.  We  were  just  about  to  start  when  we  received  news  of  the 
death  of  a  near  relative.  19.  So  we  were  obliged  to  give  up  our  journey. 
20.  Of  all  poets  Schiller  has  most  won  the  love  of  the  people.  21.  Before 
me  stand  the  present  and  the  future  together.  22.  My  people  torment  me 
to  accept  a  husband,  and  I  see  I  must  obey  them  (tfjnt).  23.  My  friends 
and  I  have  read  this  book  together.  24.  It  is  the  facts  we  want ;  do  you 
think  we  do  not  know  what  you  thought  of  the  matter  ? 


LESSON  LVIIL 

THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

REMARK.  —  The  subjunctive  is  the  more  difficult  of  explanation  be- 
cause, except  to  a  very  limited  extent,  it  has  no  corresponding  form  or  use 
in  English.  Its  English  equivalents  —  besides  the  rare  subjunctive  —  are 
various :  the  indicative,  the  imperative,  the  infinitive,  and  the  auxiliaries, 
may,  might;  can,  could ;  shall,  should ;  will,  would,  etc.  —  so  that  its  idio- 
matic translation,  as  well  as  its  wide  use  in  German,  will  require  the  most 
careful  attention. 

466.  The  subjunctive  may  be  denned,  in  a  word,  as  the 
mood  of  the  ideal  (subjective)  — as  distinct  from  the  indica- 
tive, the  mood  of  the  actual  (objective).  Its  conception  varies 
widely,  from  that  which  is  simply  not  affirmed  as  true,  to  that 
which  is  represented  as  merely  desired  or  possible,  and  finally 
to  that  which  is  distinctly  implied  as  unreal,  or  contrary  to 
fact.  These  shades  of  meaning  it  is  difficult  to  analyse  or 


276  LESSON    LVIII.  [§  467 

connect  logically.     They  will  be  here  grouped  under  the  sev- 
eral heads  of  Indirect,  Optative,  Potential  and  Conditional. 

As  its  name  implies,  the  subjunctive  is  used  most  frequently 
in  dependent  {subjoined}  sentences;  but  in  German  this  is 
not  always  true.  Nor  can  it  be  said,  generally,  that  certain 
connectives  govern  —  or  require  —  the  subjunctive.  The  use 
of  the  mood  always  depends  on  the  sense. 

467.     THE  INDIRECT  SUBJUNCTIVE  (Oratio  obliqua}. 

(a)  The  subjunctive  is   used  in  dependent  sentences,  expressing  the 
statement  of  another  as  related  —  not  quoted  —  and  not  affirmed  by  the 
writer  or  speaker.     The  tense  is  usually  the  same  as  would  be  used  in  the 
indicative,  if  the  words  were  directly  quoted.     This  occurs  especially  after 
verbs  meaning  to  tJiink,  believe,  say,  tell,  hope,  fear,  seem,  and  the  like,  ex- 
pressed or  implied.     As :  Gr  fdjrieb  mtr,  ba&  er  fetn  .<pau3  berfanft  Ija&e,  he 
•wrote  me  that  he  had  sold  his  house ,  ber  ©artnct  glau&t,  fcafj  biefer  33aum  im 
ndd)ften  ^O^re  feine  5ru$t  tragen  toerbe,  the  gardener  believes  that  this  tree 
will  bear  no  fruit  next  year ;  ber  Slr^t  gafi  feine  §offnung,  baft  ber  -®ranfe  ge= 
nefen  facrbe,  the  physician  gave  no  hope  that  the  patient  would  recover.     In 
these  sentences  the  direct  statement  would  be :  3>d)  I)Cif>e  ntetn  £>cm3  t>er= 
fauft ;  biefer  SBaum  ttnrb  im  nadjften  ^atjre  feine  2frnd)t  tragen,  etc. 

(b)  But  frequently  the  past  subjunctive  will  be  used  for  the  present, 
with  a  past  tense  of  the  leading  verb.     This  is  especially  the  case  when 
the  present  subjunctive  would  be  of  the  same  form  with  the  present  in- 
dicative.   As :  Gr  befiauptete,  baft  id;  genug  fiesaljlt  Ija'tte ;  id)  fagte  tf)m,  bafc 
meine  ®inber  nie  altein  auSgingen ;  also,  without  such  reason,  less  frequently. 
Sometimes,  for  this  reason,  the  tense  will  change  in  the  same  sentence ; 
as :  ®cr  grembe  metnt,  eS  miiff  e  bort  ftitt  fetn,  itnb  Me  9ftcnfd)en  m  life  ten  (not 
ntiiffen)  fd)toetgen.     (You  said)  id)  fjtitte  etnen  <Stein  in  ber  33rttft,  unb  bu  T)abeft 
mein  £erg.     See  also  Remark  at  end  of  p.  278. 

(c)  When,  however,  the  statement  is  represented  as  a  fact,  confirmed 
or  admitted  by  the  writer,  the  indicative  will  be  used,  and  in  the  usual 
tense.     As  :  (£r  geftanb,  bafj  er  unredjt  Ijatte,  he  confessed  that  he  was  wrong ; 
er  ttwfjte,  bafe  id)  fronf  toar ;  gcfe^t,  id)  tat'S,  suppose  I  did  it. 

NOTE. — The  omission  of  bafj  changes  the  order  of  words  (§  350,  i),  but  does  not  other- 
wise affect  tl»e  mood  or  tense.  This  omission  is  however  less  frequent  with  the  indicative 
—  more  frequent  with  the  subjunctive,  especially  where  the  form  is  distinctive  (as  b). 

(d)  The  same  rules,  as  to  both  mood  and  tense,  apply  also  to  the  de- 
pendent question  (§  348),  when  narrated  indirectly.     As:  3>d)  fragte  if)n,  06 


§  469]  THE    POTENTIAL    SUBJUNCTIVE.  277 

er  mid)  be^o^en  fb'nne  (fbnnte)  ober  nidjt.  But  when  stated  directly  the  in- 
dicative will  be  used:  je£t  froge  id)  bid),  06  bit  mid)  fceaafjlen  fannft  ober  nid)t. 

(e)  Akin  to  the  subjunctive  of  indirect  discourse  is  the  use  of  a  past  or 
pluperfect  subjunctive,  in  exclamatory  (interrogative)  form,  to  imply  em- 
phatic denial  of  a  real  or  presumed  assertion.  As:  ©aftfrcunbltd)  I)titte 
(Snglanb  fie  empfangcn,  England  (you  say)  received  her  hospitably  I  28ann 
Ija'tte  id)  ba3  gerooflt,  when  did  I  (zs>  you  say)  attempt  this  ? 

(/)  Sometimes  the  subjunctive  shows  only  that  the  action  is  viewed 
from  the  stand-point  of  another.  As :  er  tootftc  ttmrten,  ot§  fetn  greunb  lame, 
until  his  friend should come  ;  er  mitfete  filetoen,  Iri§  bte  glut  berltefe;  he  had  to 
wait  iintil  (as  he  knew)  the  tide  should  subside. 

NOTE.  —  But  often  the  indicative  occurs,  to  express  a  fact  or  result :  <Sr  fjieft  barcutf, 
baft  fein§  feiner  $mber  fdjreiben  geternt  Tjat  (and  they  did  not). 

468.  THE  OPTATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

(a)  The  subjunctive  is  used  to  express  a  wish,  request,  permission,  or 
concession,  the  realisation  of  which  is  not  affirmed.     The  tense  will  be 
present,  unless  the  leading  verb  is  past.     As :   ^d)  tt>iinfd)e,  baft  er  nad) 
etnemSlrat  fd)tcfe,  I  wish  him  to  send  for  a  physician;  id)  Mtte,  er  tue  ba§  inir 
5it  ©efaHcn,  I  beg  he  will  do  it  for  my  sake;  id)  erlaitue  (erlaufcte)  nid)t,  bafj 
7netn  ©o^n  nod)  ^3ari§  retfe  (retfte),  /  do  (did}  not  permit  my  son  to  go  to  Paris; 
gefie  ©ott,  or  ©ott  gefce,  God  grant;  fo  fet  e3,  so  be  it;  e§  fei  tote  cS  tootte,  be 
it  as  it  will.     (See  §  346,  6.) 

(b)  A  past  or  pluperfect  subjunctive,  unless  following  a  past  verb,  here 
expresses  a  wish,  etc.,  as  unreal  or  contingent  —  closely  allied  to  the  con- 
ditional subjunctive  (§  470).     As:  SSa're  er  bod)  f)ier,  were  he  only  here  (but 
he  is  not) !  O,  Ijatte  id)  ntmmer  biefeS  SSort  gefprorf)en,  would  I  had  never 
spoken,  etc.  — SSenn  er  bod)  Ijeute  fame,  I  wish  he  would  only  come  to-day. 

(c)  As  a  more  remote  wish,  a  purposjj  is  expressed  by  the  subjunctive 
in  clauses  introduced  by  bamtt  or  baft,  (auf  bafj,  urn  bajj).     As :  @r  fprtd)t 
letfe,  bamtt  if)n  ntemanb  bcrftefjc,  in  order  that  nobody  may,  etc. ;  er  berftedte 
fid),  bamtt  man  ttm  nid)t  fa'nbe,  in  order  that  he  might  not  be  found;  Ibft  mtr  ba§ 
§er3>  baB  id)  ba3  Sure  tittjrc,  that  I  may  move  yours. 

NOTE.  —  Sometimes  this  s.ense  is  involved  in  a  relative  pronoun,  as  :  ©t&  ltn§  betlteit 
©ei)t,  bet  ItnS  regtete,  give  us  thy  spirit  (which  shall}  rule  us. 

Yet  often  here,  also  with  bamtt,  bafe,  etc.,  the  indicative  occurs  —  sometimes  without 
obvious  reason  —  where  we  should  expect  the  subjunctive. 

469.  THE  POTENTIAL  SUBJUNCTIVE! 

Closely  allied  with  the  foregoing  is  the  use  of.  the  subjunctive  to  ex- 
press possibility  —  a  contingent  or  indefinite  statement  —  sometimes  only 


278  LESSON    LVIII.  [§  470 

a  softened  affirmative  —  then  sometimes  called  the  diplomatic  subjunctive. 
As :  Ob  er  !omme  ober  nid)t,  mtr  ift  e§  etnerlei,  whether  he  come  or  not ;  tote 
e§  cud)  fet,  however  it  may  be  ;  ba§  tttb'djte  toof)l  toaljr  fetn,  /Aa/  may  be  true ; 
id)  tou'fjte  md)t,  7  <:#«'/  say  that  I  know;  er  tod're  faft  eingefdjlafen,  he  had 
(probably)  almost  fallen  asleep;  ntmm  inetner  3kbe  jeben  ©tadjel,  ber  bertoun= 
ben  fb'nnte,  that  could  (possibly)  wound. 

470.     THE  CONDITIONAL  SUBJUNCTIVE  (Unreal). 

(a)  Outside  of  the  potential  conditions  included  above,  the  subjunctive 
in  its  past  tenses  is  used  in  both  terms  of  a  sentence  stating  an  unreal  con- 
dition; that  is,  when  the  premise  (protasis}  is  not  fulfilled,  and  the  conclu- 
sion depending  on  it  (apodosis)  is  therefore  not  realized.     The  past  tense 
here  expresses  present  time  —  the  pluperfect,  past  time.    As  :  SBenn  er  fpar- 
famer  toare  (or  getoejen  toare),  fo  toare  er  je£t  ein  reidjer  2ftann,  //  he  were  (or 
had  been)  more  saving,  he  would  now  be  a  rich  man  (but  he  is  not,  etc.) ; 
toentt  id)  ba§  getoufjt  Ijatte,  fo  fja'tte  id)  anberS  geljanbelt,  if  I  had  known  that,l 
should  have,  etc.  (but  I  did  not,  etc.). 

NOTE.  —  For  the  omission  of  tnenn,  and  consequent  change  in  order  of  words,  see  §350,2. 
For  the  conditional  in  the  apodosis,  see  below,  §  471. 

(b)  Often  the  condition  is  only  implied.     As  :  !ytt  feiner  Sage  tya'tte  id)  ba§ 
md)t  getan,  (if  I  had  been)  in  his  place,!  should  not  have  done  that;  ba§  ta'te 
id)  gem,  /  would  gladly  do  that  (if  I  could,  etc.).     So  in  restrictive  clauses 
with  benn,  meaning  unless,  except.     As :  id)  troge  mein  ©djtoert  me  meljr,  c§ 
toare  benn  gegen  Me  Siirfen  (that  is  :  If  I  should,  then  it  would  be,  etc.). 

(c)  Or  the  consequence  is  not  stated,  and  then  the  form  is  like  §  468,  b. 

(d)  A  condition  —  whether  potential  or  unreal  —  is  often  introducedj 
comparatively,  by  aI3  (toenn),  al§  (06),  as  if.     As :  ©r  fteljt  auS,  alS  toenn  er 
front  toare,  as  if  he  were  sick;   er  titt,aI3  toare  cr  berrucft.     (See  §  350,  2.) 

(e)  The  indicative  may  here  also  express  the  certainty  of  the  result :  2)Jtt 
biefem  $feit  burd)fd)o|3  id)  eud)  (/  had,  etc.),  toenn  id)  metn  ^tnb  getroffen  f)c*tte. 

NOTE.  —  In  the  modal  verbs  (Less.  XXVI.)  in  consequence  of  their  defect  in  English, 
care  must  be  taken  to  distinguish  the  sense  of  the  indicative  and  subjunctive  —  the  former 
in  the  past  tense  often  requiring  to  be  expressed  by  have.  As  :  2B(t3  foil  tierlangteft,  fdimte 
id)  bir  nidjt  geben,  oljnc  arm  511  raerben,  /  could  not  give  you  without,  etc. ;  but  fonnte  irfj, 
etc.,  /  could  not  have  given  you. 

REMARK.  —  The*  change  of  tense  in  the  indirect  subjunctive  (§  467,  6), 
to  avoid  ambiguity  of  form,  has  led  to  an  increasing  use  of  the  past  (pre- 
terit) for  the  present  subjunctive  —  and  hence  of  the  pluperfect  subjunctive 
in  lieu  of  the  perfect  —  in  indirect  speech. 


§47!]  THE    CONDITIONAL.  279 

THE  CONDITIONAL. 

471.  As  has  been  seen  (§173)  the  conditional,  present  and 
perfect,  is  really  a  past  subjunctive  of  the  future,  bearing  the 
same  relation  to  the  future,  present  or  perfect,  that  the  past 
subjunctive  bears  to  the  present.  It  is  thus  used  as  a  sub- 
stitute for  the  past  subjunctive  : 

(a)  In  the  principal  member  (apodosis)  of  a  condition,  expressed  or 
implied,  when  the  statement  has  special  reference  to  the  future.     As  :  2>U 
toiirbeft  ntorgen  friif)  cwffteljen,  toenn  bu  bid)  je£t  ^eittg  511  23ette  legteft;  ouf= 
ftefjen  toiirbe  (£nglanb3  gonje  ^ugenb,  fafje  ber  Skttte  feine  £bntgtn,  would 
arise,  if,  etc. 

(b)  Also,  when  the  form  of  the  past  subjunctive  would  be  like  that  of 
the  past  indicative.     As:  Hitter  biefen  ttmftanben  toiirbe  id)  nid)t   abretfen 
(for  reifte  —  ab) ;  baS  toiirbe  id)  ntd)t  glauben,  I  should  not,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  Or,  otherwise,  whenever  the  form  or  meaning  of  the  subjunctive  might  be 
ambiguous  ;  as,  et  nteinte,  bd§  Umrbe  gut  fein,  rather  than  tt>cire,  which  might  mean  -was  or 
would  be,  etc.  —  hence  especially  in  indirect  speech. 

(c)  Outside  of  these  cases,  but  less  frequently,  the  conditionals  may  be 
used  as  equivalents  of  the  past  subjunctives  in  principal  sentences.     As: 
28enn  ba§  ^Setter  fdjbn  toare,  jo  toiirbe  id)  auSgeljen  (or  fo  ginge  id)  au§) ;  timre 
mein  SSater  am  Ceben,  fo  tuiirbe  er  80  ^afjre  alt  fein  (or  fo  ftmre  er,  etc.) 

In  any  of  these  cases,  the  condition  will  often  be  only  implied. 
(§  470,  6.) 

(d)  The  conditional  cannot  stand  for  the  subjunctive  in  the  dependent 
member  (protasis) ;  thus,  the  forms  are,  for  the  unreal  condition ; 

(0  (2) 

SSenn  bo§  SSetter  fd)bn  hmre,    >  C    fo  ginge  id)  au§. 

•'  SScire  ba§  SBetter  fd)bn,  )  (    fo  toiirbe  id)  auSge^en. 

(0  (2) 

3d)  ginge  au§,  \  (    toenn  ba§  SSetter  fd)bn  toa're. 

'  £jd)  tou'rbe  au§get)en,  >  (    toare  ba§  SSetter  fd)bn, 

in  each  of  which  either  of  (i)  may  be  associated  with  either  of  (2). 

(<?)  Irregularly  however — especially  in  conversational  style — fo  is  often 
omitted  (in  A)  and  the  principal  member  construed  normal,  especially  in 
the  conditional  form.  As  :  SBenn  ba§  SSetter  fdibn  toare  (or  toa're  ba§  better 
fd)bn),  id)  toiirbe  auSge^en,  etc. 

EXERCISE  LVIII. 

i.  He  speaks  loud  in  order  that  every  one  may  hear  him.  2.  The 
ancients  were  of  opinion  that  the  earth  stood  in  the  centre  of  the  universe. 


280  LESSON    LVIII.  [§  472 

3.  I  was  asked  in  what  year  I  was  born.  4.  We  are  convinced  that  he  is 
our  friend.  5.  The  boy  would  learn  more,  if  he  were  more  industrious. 
6.  If  I  had  been  unwell,  I  should  have  remained  at  home.  7.  Had  he  not 
himself  said  it,  we  should  not  believe  it.  8.  He  acts  and  talks  as  if  he 
were  a  rich  man ;  were  he  really  rich,  he  would  not  act  and  talk  thus. 
9.  I  doubt  whether  he  will  remain  long  in  this  house.  10.  The  physician 
feared  the  patient  might  die  of  (an  dat.)  his  wounds,  n.  I  should  never 
have  thought  that  you  could  learn  German  in  so  short  a  time.  12.  We 
wished  that  everything  might  remain  as  it  is  at  present.  13.  It  is  feared 
that  he  will  not  come.  14.  The  porter  maintained  that  he  had  carried 
our  luggage  to  the  station.  15.  I  should  have  paid  the  bill,  if  I  had  had 
money  enough.  16.  Although  the  hotel  was  very  bad,  we  should  have 
remained  in  it,  if  the  landlord  had  been  more  polite.  17.  Yesterday  came 
the  news  that  the  king  was  dead ;  but  to-day  we  learn  that  it  is  not  true. 
18.  You  paid  me  that  money  !  you  have  never  paid  it.  19.  It  is  better 
that  one  [should]  make  one's  enemies  dumb  than  one's  friends.  20.  The 
old  man  walks  as  if  he  were  lame;  is  he  so  (e§)?  21.  That  was  an  act 
that  might  have  been  very  dangerous  for  you.  22.  The  proverb  says, 
one  must  strike  (fd)mieben)  the  .iron  while  it  is  hot.  23.  Oh,  that  the 
beautiful  time  of  (the)  young  love  might  ever  remain  ! 

MODAL  IDIOMS -SUMMARY. 

472.  From  the  examples  of  the  foregoing  lesson,  it  appears  that  the 
English  auxiliaries  may,  might,  etc.  are  to  some  extent  represented  in  Ger- 
man by  the  subjunctive  mood.  These  auxiliaries  are  largely  used  in 
English  as  equivalents  for  the  almost  lost  —  and,  it  is  to  be  feared,  still 
vanishing  —  subjunctive.  But  such  uses  must  be  distinguished  from  those 
in  which  the  auxiliaries  are  represented  by  the  corresponding  German 
modal  verbs,  in  their  own  specific  senses.  (Less.  XXVL).  The  subject 
is,  in  its  details,  a  large  and  a  difficult  one;  and  the  difficulty  is  mainly 
in  English  rather  than  in  German  (§  268  note).  No  full  statement  will  be 
attempted  here ;  but  in  illustration,  some  examples  of  the  German  modal 
verbs  will  be  added. 

Observe  the  frequent  use  of  have — the  perfect  infinitive — to  express 
the  lacking  past  tense  in  English  (§  470,  e  note). 

NOTE.  —  These  examples  are  in  part  taken,  by  courteous  permission,  from  that  rich 
treasury  of  German  idioms,  the  "  Letters  for  Self-Instruction,"  by  Dr.  S.  Deutsch. 

l.  "Surfeit. 

S>arf  id)  fragen  —  Mtten  ?  may  I  ask  —  beg?  etc. 

28enn  id)  e8  fagen  barf,  if  I  may  be  allowed  to  say  so. 

Gr  barf  nur  befeljlett,  he  need  but  command. 

Sr  barf  fid)  bariifcer  ntdjt  hwnbern,         he  need  not  -wonder  at  it. 


§472] 


MODAL    IDIOMS. 


28l 


(£3  biirfte  ba§>  511  fattier  fein, 
(£r  biirfte  e§  bergeffen  Ijaben, 
Surfte  e§  md)t  p  fpat  fein  ? 


that  may  be  too  hard, 
he  may  have  forgotten  it. 
might  it  not  be  too  late? 


lann  id;  bafiir? 
3d)  !ann  nidjt  umfjin 
3d)  fann  mid)  irren, 
(5r  !ann  e§  bergeffen  Ijafcen, 
(£r  fann  nidjt  toeiter, 
(£r  fann  grangbfifd), 
3)a3  Ibnnte  gefaljrUd)  fetn, 
2)o§  fonnte  gefd^rtict)  fein, 


ladjen, 


e§  nic^t  tun  ntogen, 
(£r  mag  i^n  ntdjt  fe£)en, 
•(5r  tnag  fi<^  in  tic&t  neJjmen, 
@ie  mbgen  gefdtttgft  toarten, 
6r  mag  tun  ftm§  cr  toitt, 
^d)  mbd)te  tool)!  toiffen, 
^d)  mbd)te  gern  —  liefcer, 
gajt  tnbdjte  id)  glauben, 
^d)  ntod)te  baS  ntdjt  glaufcen, 
(£§  mbgen  je^t  bret  donate  fetn, 
®§  mag  fein  rote  bit  fagft, 


4. 


(£§  mttfe  nun  einmat  fo  fein, 

Sd)  fjafce  ba3  Bmmter  pten  mitfjen, 

3d)  mufj  fort, 

^d)  mitfete  lad)en  —  miifste  ladjen, 

C£r  mitfj  toof)t  franl  fein, 
<£ie  mitffen  totffen, 


geroefen  fein? 
(Sr  muB  nod)  nid)t  ba  fein, 
©ie  roerben  fommen,  fie  miifeten  benn 
tier^inbert  fetn  (§  470  b). 


how  can  I  help  it? 

I  cannot  help  laughing. 

I  may  be  mistaken. 

he  may  have  forgotten  it. 

he  can  go  no  farther. 

he  knows  French. 

that  might  be  dangerous. 

that  might  have  been  dangerous. 


/  did  not  like  to  do  it. 

he  does  not  care  to  see  him. 

let  him  take  care. 

will  you  please  wait? 

he  may  do  as  he  pleases. 

I  should  like  to  know. 

I  should  like  —  had  rather. 

I  am  almost  inclined  to  think. 

I  was  unwilling  to  believe  that. 

it  may  be  nozv  three  months. 

it  may  be  as  you  say. 


it  must  needs  be  so. 

I  have  been  obliged  to  keep  my  room, 

I  am  obliged  to  go. 

I  could  not  help  laughing — should 
have  to  laugh. 

he  must  surely  be  sick. 

You  must  know  (/  want  you  to 
know}. 

who  can  it  have  been  ? 

he  surely  cannot  yet  be  there. 

they  will  come,  unless  they  are  pre- 
vented. 


282 


LESSON    LVIII. 


[§472 


5.  Sottett. 


fottbaS? 

foil  mir  ba§  ? 
2Ba§  f  ott  irf)  ? 
S)u  fottft  eS  empfinben, 
£>a3  fottft  bit  nid)t  nmfonft  getan 

fjaoen, 

SBenn  e£  fein  foil, 
2ftan  fottte  metnen, 
SSie  fottte  ba§  mbglidj  fein? 
<£ottte  ba£  toaljr  fein  ? 
3)ie§  fott  £err  91.  fein, 
Gr  fott  fefjr  reirf)  fein  —  getoefen  fein, 
©r  fottte  ba§  nti^t  tun,* 
(£r  fottte  ein  grbfeereS  llngtiicf  erleben, 


w^^:/  does  that  mean  ? 
what  is  that  to  me  ? 
what  am  I  to  do  ? 
you  shall  smart  for  it. 

you  shall  pay  for  that. 

if  it  must  be. 

one  would  think. 

how  could  that  be  possible  ? 

can  that  be  true  ? 

this  {portrait}  is  said  to  be  Mr.  N. 

he  is  said  to  be,  to  have  been,  very  rick. 

he  ought  not  to  do  that. 

he  was  destined  to  experience,  etc. 


6.  SBottcn. 


SBtflft  buftitte  fein? 

28o  tootten  <Sie  5in? 

Gr  hritt  fort, 

(£r  toeifj  nicfjt  njaS  er  toiU, 

2Ba§  tuotten  Sie  bamit  fagen? 

28ag  toitt  ba§  fagen  ? 

3)a§  toitt  Die!  fagen, 

^d)  tooltte  efien  fagen, 

©em  fei  tote  iljm  tootte, 

5)a§  toil!  nic^t  ge^en, 

©a§  toitt  mir  nidjt  rec^t  gefatten, 

%<$  toil!  nirfjt  ^offen,  bafe  @ie  !ranf 


will  you  be  quiet? 

where  are  you  going? 

he  wants  to  go. 

he  doesn't  know  what  he  wants. 

what  do  you  mean  by  that? 

what  does  that  mean  ? 

that  is  saying  a  great  deal. 

I  was  just  going  to  say. 

be  that  as  it  may. 

that  won't  do. 

that  does  not  quite  please  me. 

I  hope  that  you  are  not  sick. 


toitt  un3  gefannt 

©ott  —  fo  ©ott  toitt, 
©a§  tootte  ©ott  nicf)t, 
SSottte  ©ott,  e§  toare  toa^r, 
SBotten  (toottten)  ©ie  bie  ©iite  ^afien? 


he  pretends  to  have  known  us. 
please  God. 
God  forbid  it. 
would  God  it  were  true. 
will  (would}  you  have  the  kindness  ? 


etc.  etc. 


*  Observe  in  this  and  the  next  example,  that  the  past  subjunctive  of  foHen,  with  present 
•meaning,  —  as  also  of  tuotfen  —  is  of  the  same  form  as  the  past  indicative. 


§  474]  THE    SIMPLE    INFINITIVE.  283 

LESSON  LIX. 

The  Infinitive. 

473.  The  infinitive  is  the  verb-noun.     It  presents  the  idea 
of  the  verb  as  abstract  (in-finite),  without  affirmation  or  predi- 
cate relations  of  concord,  mood,  etc.     By  its  meaning,  it  is 
akin  to  the  verb,  and  can  have  the  usual  modifiers  of  a  verb 
(object,  adverb,  etc.).     By  its  construction  it  is  a  noun,  and 
can  stand  in  the  usual  relations  of  a  noun.     But  in  conse- 
quence of  its  complex  nature  it  presents,  as  in  English,  many 
peculiarities  of  construction  and  idiom. 

NOTE.  —  The  English  infinitive  has  the  forms  love,  to  love,  loving.  The  first  corres- 
ponds to  German  liebeit ;  the  second,  to  511  tiebett  ;  the  third,  which  has  no  specific  corres- 
pondence in  German,  is  of  the  same  form  as  the  present  participle,  and  is  often  confounded 
with  it  —  a  fruitful  source  of  difficulty  in  English  grammar.  The  student  will  note  carefully 
the  use  of  this  form. 

Another  source  of  difficulty  is  the  wrong  habit  of  learning  that  the  English  infinitive  is, 
specifically,  to  love.  Against  both  of  these  errors  the  student  must  be  guarded,  in  studying 
the  infinitive  in  German  —  or  indeed  in  any  other  language. 

As  above  remarked,  the  infinitive  is  not  a  mood,  and  has  properly  no 
tense.  In  its  compound  form,  the  perfect  infinitive,  it  expresses  com- 
pleted action ;  but  the  time  is  derived  from  the  leading  verb. 

The  infinitive  will  here  be  treated  under  its  forms:  i.  the  simple  in- 
finitive (without  ju) ;  2.  the  infinitive  with  31*. 

474.  THE  SIMPLE  INFINITIVE  —  WITHOUT  511. 

(a)  The  infinitive  is  used  as  a  noun  —  usually  with  article  or  other  at- 
tributive (§  416).  As:  $)a§  ©rfjttrimnten  ftdrft  Me  ©Itebcr;  bie  $unft  be§ 
@cf)tt)tmmen3  ;  etn  etoige§  ©eben  ;  cin  £>eben  unb  Xragen  ;  ba§  fi.eifjt  Siigen,  etc. 
—  usually  translated  by  English  — ing. 

NOTE.  —  But  if  preceded  by  an  object  or  adverb  adjunct,  the  infinitive  is  considered  a 
verb,  and  it  is  written  without  capital  initial.  As  :  Qu  Diet  effeit  ift  Iticijt  gut ;  ba§  Ijiefje 
©Ott  fcerf  llrfjen,  that  would  be  tempting  God,  etc. 

(b}  The  infinitive  is  used  with  the  auxiliaries :  toerben,  in  future  and 
conditional  (§  173);  and  the  modal  auxiliaries  (Lesson  XXVI). 

NOTE  i.  —  For  the  frequent  omission  of  the  infinitive  after  a  modal  verb,  see  §  268. 
^NOTE  2.  —  For  the  infinitive  form  of  the  modal,  and  some  other  verbs,  for  the  perfect 
pOTticiple,  see  §  264. 


284  LESSON    LIX.  [§  474 


(c)  The  infinitive  is  used  after  the  verbs:  f)eifjen,  to  bid,  order; 
to  help  ;  laffen,  to  let,  to  cause  (§  269)  ;  leljren,  to  teach  ;  lernen,  to  learn  ;  and 
the  sense-verbs,  fiil)len,  to  feel  ;  fjbren,  to  hear  ;  feljen,  to  see  ;  also  finben,  to 
find.  As:  (£r  fiiefe  un§  fjinauSgeljen,  he  bade  us  go  out;  er  fiilft  mtr  fdjreiben, 
he  helps  me  -write;  bie  ®inber  lernen  lefen  —  learn  to  read  (reading)  \  id) 
Ijbrte  iljn  ftngen;  id)  fanb  ba§  93ud)  auf  bem  £ifd)e  liegen  —  /?/«£-,  etc.;  id) 
fu'fjlte  ben  ^3ul§  fd)lagen  —  beat  or  beating;  laf?  e§.gut  fetn,  /^/  zY  fo-y  lafj  mid) 
geljen,  let  me  go  ;  id)  liefj  iljn  fommen,  I  caused  him  to  come  (sent  for  him); 
or,  as  §  265,  id)  fiabe  ifin  ftngen  fjbren  —  tauten  fefjen  —  fommen  laffen,  etc.; 
or,  indefinitely,  id)  Ijbre  ftngen  ;  id)  fjbrte  flopfen  —  singing,  knocking,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  With  leljren,  lernen,  sometimes  511  is  used,  if  the  infinitive  have  an  object. 
As  :  ®ott  lefyrt  un§  burd)  feiu  933ort,  auf  iljn  511  trauen. 

(d}  With  f  listen,  Jjbren,  fe^en,  and  especially  with  laffen,  a  transitive  in- 
finitive will  often  have  the  passive  sense  —  the  subject  of  the  infinitive 
action  being  indefinite,  or  omitted.  As  :  Qdj  I)brte  if)n  lout  rufen,  I  heard 
(some  one  call  him}  him  called  ;  Idfe  lf)n  rufen,  let  him  be  called;  id)  fat)  i{)n 
fdjtagen,  I  saw  him  struck,  etc.  (Compare  English  :  /  have  heard  say,  or 
said). 

NOTE.  —  Ambiguity  must  be  avoided;  as,  the  above  examples  might  read:  7  heard 
him  call,  etc.  But,  in  fact,  such  ambiguity  will  rarely  occur. 

This  usage  is  especially  frequent  with  laffen  in  reflexive  form,  as  an 
equivalent  for  the  passive  (§  274).  As  :  er  lief}  fid)  bon  feiner  Snm  iiberre= 
ben,  he  allowed  himself  to  be  persuaded  by  his  wife  ;  ba3  la'fjt  fid)  nid)t  tinbern, 
that  cannot  be  changed,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  The  use  of  the  reflexive  fief),  and  of  turn  (§  294),  here  shows  that  the  pronoun  is 
conceived  as  object  of  the  leading  verb,  and  that  the  infinitive  has  actually  become  passive 
in  sense  —  an  illustration  of  the  extension  of  idiomatic  usage  to  the  disregard  —  here  to  the 
actual  conversion  —  of  the  original  grammatical  form. 

(e)  In  certain  phrases  the  infinitive  is  used  with  Meiben,  remain  ;  with 
the  verbs  of  motion,  faljren,  gefjen,  reiten,  tegen  ;  with  madjen,  to  make 
(cause);  nennen,  to  call  ;  with  Jjafcen  ;  and  with  tun  (nid)t3  al3).  Thus:  (£r 
blieb  ftefyen,  he  remained  standing,  stopped  ;  er  ift  fd)Iafen  gegangen,  he  has 
gone  to  bed  ;  er  legte  fid)  fd)Iafen,  he  laid  himself  down  to  sleep  ;  er  fa'Ijrt  — 
gef)t  —  reitet  —  fpa^ieren,  he  is  gone  to  drive  (or  driving),  etc.;  ba§  ntad)tntid) 
ladjen,  that  makes  me  laugh;  ba§  nenne  id)  laufen,  /  call  that  running;  er 
Ifiat  gut  reben,  he  may  well  talk;  er  fiatte  ein  2fteffer  ou§  ber  Safdje  fteden,  he 
had  a  knife  sticking,  etc.  ;  er  tilt  ntdjtS  also  reben,  he  does  nothing  but  talk,  etc. 

(/)  The  infinitive  is  used  (elliptically)  in  an  exclamatory,  imperative, 
or  interrogative  sense.  As:  3d)  bid)  toertoffen  !  I  forsake  you!  SSaritm  cm3 
nteinem  fiifeen  SBaljn  mid)  roecfen  ?  why  ivake  me  out  of,  etc.  (See  §  336,  2). 


§  475]  THE    INFINITIVE    WITH    $U.  285 

For  the  position  of  the  infinitive,  with  or  without  3U,  and  of  successive 
infinitives,  see  §  358. 

475.  THE  INFINITIVE  WITH  gu. 

NOTE.  —  As  already  remarked,  this  form  corresponds  to  English  to  love  —  originally  a 
preposition  with  dative  infinitive  ;  but  now,  in  German  as  in  English,  with  widely  extended 
uses,  in  many  of  which  the  force  of  the  preposition  is  obscured  or  lost.  The  form,  in  both 
German  and  English,  is  sometimes  called  the  supine. 

(a)  The  infinitive  with  311  stands  rarely  as  simple  subject ;  but  regularly 
as  logical  subject.     As :  (®oS)  Sleifen  ift  angenerjm ;  but,  e§  ift  angenefim  311 
reifen  ;  e§  ift  nidjt  gut,  511  bid  311  effen. 

(b)  The  infinitive  with  311  depends  on  nouns,  in  various  relations.     As : 
3>te  $unft,  reid)  311  toerben,  the  art  of  growing  rich  ;  Jjafien  fie  Suft  mitpgdjen? 
ber  28ifle,  ©ute§  511  tun ;  ba§  SBergniigen,  artbere  gliicflid)  3U  tnacfjen ;  ntd)t§  3U 
effen ;  ein  ^>au£  3U  bermteten,  a  house  to  let,  etc. 

(c)  The  infinitive  with  3U  depends  on  adjectives,  in  various  relations. 
As  :  93ereit  3U  fterben,  ready  to  die;  fdjtoer  311  lefen,  hard  to  read ;  id)  bin  frolj, 
©ic  3U  fdjen,  glad  to  see  you;  ba§  ift  ntdjt  leidjt  3U  tun,  easy  to  do  (to  be  done). 

{d}  The  infinitive  with  311  is  used  with  verbs  generally,  except  those 
mentioned  in  §  474,  and  in  various  objective  relations.  As :  Gr  fing  on  3U 
ladjen ;  hnr  f urdjteten  un§,  e§  311  fagen,  we  were  afraid  to  say  so  ;  id)  rate  bir  311 
fdjtoeigen;  id)  toiinfdje  fd)r,  ifi,n  3U  fdjen;  e§  freut  nrid),ba§  3u  prcn,  7  rejoice 
to  hear  that ;  and,  with  subject  unchanged,  equivalent  to  baB,  etc. :  er  gloubt 
ein  ®iinftler  3U  fetn,  he  believes  he  is  an  artist.  (See  §  478,  a.} 

NOTE.  —  Remember  that  511  stands  immediately  before  the  infinitive  —  and  is  repeated 
before  each  one. 

2.  With  this  infinitive,  fydben  and  fetn  acquire  a  sort  of  periphrastic  or 
auxiliary  sense.  As :  %d)  fjabe  einen  Srief  3U  fdjreifien,  /  have  a  letter  to 
•write,  or  to  write  a  letter;  er  fiat  bid  (Mb  OU§3Uge6en,  he  has  to  spend  much 
money  ;  ©te  Ijabcn  nid)t3  3U  fiirdjten — nothing  to  fear,  need  fear  nothing. 

With  fetn  the  infinitive  has  always  a  passive  tense.  As  :  G§  ift  feljr  3U 
tounfdjen,  much  to  be  wished ;  ba§  ift  nid)t  3U  glauben,  not  to  be  believed — not 
credible  ;  ba3  ift  nod)  3U  tun,  yet  to  be  done,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  The  same  use  sometimes  occurs  with  fteJjett.  As  :  2)a3  fteljt  fttcfjt  JU  anbern, 
that  cannot  be  changed. 

(e)  The  infinitive  with  311  is  also  used,  elliptically,  in  an  absolute  sense. 
As :  $)at>on  ntd)t  311  fpredjen,  not  to  speak  of  that ;  also  in  an  exclamatory 
way :  9ld) !  auf  ba§  muttge  9lo^  nttd)  3U  fdjttringen,  Oh  !  to  spring  iipon,  etc. 

(/)  The  infinitive  with  3U  is  used  with  the  preposition  anftatt  (ftatt), 
,  um,  when  the  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  lead- 


286  LESSON    LIX.  [§  476 

ing  verb.  The  preposition  stands  at  the  head  of  the  clause,  311  imme- 
diately before  the  infinitive  at  the  end.  As :  Slnftatt  feme  Slrbeit  3U  tun, 
fpielte  er  ben  garden  Sag,  instead  of  doing  his  work,  etc. ;  er  rebete  mid)  an, 
ofjne  mid)  311  fennen,  without  knowing  me. 

NOTE.  —  Sometimes,  after  a  negative,  a  clause  will  follow  independently,  where  ofjlte 
.  . .  §u  (or  ofine  bojj,  §  477)  would  be  expected.  As :  tttemalS  feljrte  bev  SSater  Ijeim,  er 
6racf)te  CUCfj  etlt)0§,  never  .  .  .  (but)  he  brought  (  —  without  bringing}  etc. 

The  use  of  unt — gu  requires  special  notice.  (For  other  prepositions, 
see  §  477). 

476.  THE  INFINITIVE  WITH  urn  —  511. 

(a)  The  infinitive  with  inn  —  3U  (§  281)  is  the  regular  form  co  express 
purpose  (in  order  to),  when  (as  above),  the  subject  remains   unchanged. 
As :  3>cf)  arbeite  fru'f),  um  be§  SftittagS  mit  gutem  2(ppettt  311  effen  ;  er  ftieg  aitf 
ben  33aum,  um  beffer  31:  fefjen. 

NOTE.  —  The  subjunctive  with  batttit(§468,  c)  may  be  substituted  for  um  —  JU  ;  but 
never  um  —  git  for  bomit  if  the  subject  is  changed.  See  also  below  §  477,  6, 

(b)  This  form  is  usual  after  an  adjective  or  adverb  qualified  by  311,  too, 
or  genug,  enough.    As :  (£r  ift  311  jung,  um  ba3  3U  berftefjen ;  ba3  gtmmer  ^^ 
ntcf)t  grofc  genug,  um  Me  SSerfammtung  311  fialten  —  not  large  enough  to  hold  the 
assembly. 

But  in  both  these  cases  (a,  b)  3U,  without  um,  often  occurs. 

EXERCISE  LIX. 

i.  He  did  it  in  order  to  frighten  me.  2.  I  never  saw  this  place  without 
thinking  of  my  old  friend.  3.  I  have  to  write  several  letters.  4.  We  eat 
in  order  to  live ;  we  do  not  live  in  order  to  eat.  5.  It  was  a  pleasure  to 
see  these  happy  people.  6.  I  am  ready  to  follow  you  everywhere.  7.  We 
are  going  to  walk  ;  will  you  go  with  [us]  ?  8.  To  err  is  human  ;  to  forgive 
is  divine.  9.  He  thinks  he  is  (in/in.)  a  great  man.  10.  Instead  of  work- 
ing, he  went  to  walk.  n.  Without  considering  the  question  further,  we 
followed  the  advice  of  the  physician.  1 2.  Keep  your  seat  (remain  sitting). 
13.  No  time  is  to  be  lost.  14.  The  art  of  flying  is  yet  to  be  invented. 
15.  We  found  him  lying  under  a  tree.  16.  He  was  tired  of  waiting.  17. 
He  has  promised  us  to  bring  the  books  with  [him].  18.  The  servant 
came  to  put  out  the  lights.  19.  The  patient  is  too  weak  to  undertake 
such  a  long  journey.  20.  He  took  it  without  asking  me.  21.  The  count 
has  not  money  enough  to  buy  this  estate.  22.  Fishing  and  bathing  in 
this  stream  are  (zV)  forbidden  under  (bet)  penalty.  23.  I  have  heard  tell 
(fogen  pren)  that  when  (the)  sailors  see  certain  birds  flying,  they  think  they 
are  (infin.)  near  land.  24.  Let  [there]  be  now  an  end  of  working  (of  work- 
ing be  now,  etc.). 


§  477]  INFINITIVE    EQUIVALENTS.  287 


LESSON  LX. 

Infinitive  Equivalents. 

477.  For  some  cases  of  infinitive  construction  in  English 
another  form  must  be  used  in  German.  These  will  be  grouped 
by  their  English  equivalents. 

i.  The  infinitive  in  -ing. 

(a)  Prepositions  other  than  anftatt  (ftatt),  ofjne,  urn,  cannot  be  used  di- 
rectly with  the  infinitive,  as  in  English.     When  the  infinitive  stands  in 
the  relation  of  such  preposition,  the  preposition  is  first  combined,  in  the 
leading  clause,  with  ba  (§  209),  and  the  infinitive  with  311  follows  in  appo- 
sition.   As  :  £5$  beftefie  barauf,  gefjb'rt  §u  toerben,  I  insist  upon  (it,  to  be)  being 
heard;  id)  benfe  ntd)t  baratt,  ba§  311  tun,  I  don '/ think  of  doing  that  (of  it,  to 
do  that};  id)  bin  ftolg  barauf,  eitt  $)eutfd)er  311  f  cut,  I  am  proud  of  being  a  Ger- 
man ;  er  ift  bamtt  flu'frtebett,  ben  3toetten  ^3ret8  erfjaiten  311  rjaben,  he  is  content 
•with  having  taken  (to  have  taken)  the  second  prize. 

NOTE.  —  Observe  that  this  form  applies  to  objective  noun  clauses  only  —  not  to  adver- 
bial clauses  (as  d  below). 

(b)  If  the  subject  of  the  action  dependent  on  the  preposition  is  not  the 
same  as  that  of  the  leading  verb,  instead  of  the  infinitive  a  noun  clause 
will  be  used,  with  bafj.     As :  3#)  beftelje  barauf,  baft  er  geljb'rt  toerbe,  I  insist 
on  his  being  heard  (that  he  be  heard} ;  er  benft  ntdjt  baran,  bafj  <5ie  baS  tun 
toerben,  he  does  not  think  of  your  doing  that;  er  ift  bamtt  3ufrieben,  bafc  fetn 
©ofw  ben  3toeiten  $ret§  erfjalten  f)at,  he  is  content  with  his  son's  having  taken 
(that  his  son  has  taken,  etc.). 

NOTE.  —  This  construction  is  widely  extended  in  noun  clauses  expressing  various  rela- 
tions. Examples  :  ^d)  erfttttttte  ifin  baran,  baft  er  ftammdte,  I  knew  him  by  his  stammer- 
ing; er  entcjing  baburdj,  bafj  er  ben  glu§  bitrrf)frf)tt>amm,  he  escaped  by  swimming;  er  ift 
bation  Iran!  getoorben— feine®ranfljettrut)rtbafjer— bafeerein  511  farte§93at>genommen  fiat, 
from,  taking  too  cold  a  bath  ;  bafj  er  fvanf  fei,  fdjtofj  id)  barait§,  bafj  er  nid)t  fant  —  I  con- 
cluded, from  his  not  coming,  etc.  The  mood  —  indicative  or  subjunctive  —  in  such  clauses 
will  be  determined  as  usual. 

In  the  indirect  question,  ob  will  take  the  place  of  baft  (§  348).  As : 
SBaS  Itegt  Mr  baran,  06  man  e8  glaufct  ober  nidjt,  what  matters  it  to  you 
whether,  etc. 

(<:)  Similarly,  with  change  of  subject,  the  prepositions  anftatt  (ftatt), 
ofjne,  (see  §  475,  f),  cannot  govern  the  infinitive,  but  must  be  followed  by 
a  noun  clause,  with  bafj.  As :  (Sr  ging  fort,  otine  bafj  id)  ein  SBort  fagte,  with- 
out my  saying  a  word ;  anftatt  bafj  mein  <Sof»n  nadi  (Suropa  retfte,  reifte  id)  fel&ft 


288  LESSON    LX.  [§  47§ 

nad)  3lfri!a,  instead  of  my  son's  travelling,  etc. ;  and,  instead  of  um  ...  511, 
(§  476)  an  adverbial  clause,  with  bomtt  (more  rarely  bafe)  expressing  pur- 
pose. See  §  468,  c. 

(d)  Often  the  English  infinitive  in  -ing  with  a  preposition  will  express 
an  adverbial  relation,  which  must  then  be  expanded  into  an  adverb  clause, 
with  the  proper  adverbial  conjunction.     As:  Before  leaving  town,  I  shall 
call  on  you,  el)e  id)  Me  ©tcibt  berlaffe  (before  I  leave) ;  after  "walking  (having 
walked}  a  mile,  he  -was  tired,  nadjbem  er  etne  -iUMIe  gegangen  ttmr  (after  he 
had  walked,  etc.)  ;  by  persuading  others  we  persuade  ourselves,  inbent  totr 
anbere  u'&erreben,  u'berreben  hrir  un§  felbft  (while  we  persuade,  etc.).      See 
above  a,  note. 

(e)  The  infinitive  as  noun  (§  474,  a)  is  used  in  German  only  in  an 
abstract   way.     Generally,   whenever   a   definite   action   is   implied,   the 
English  infinitive  will  in  German  be  expanded  into  a  clause.     As :   Your 
writing  that  letter  was  very  fortunate,  e§  fear  fef)r  gliidltd),  bafe  @ie  jenen 
93rief  fdjrieben  ;  /  did  not  like  your  -writing  the  letter,  e§  geftel  mtr  nid)t,  bafc, 
etc. ;  his  coming  is  doubtful,  e§  ift  glreifelfjaft,  06  er  fomnien  toerbe  (whether 
he  will  come).         • 

NOTE.  —  It  may  again  be  remarked  that  the  English  infinitive  in  -ing  in  such  cases 
must  be  carefully  distinguished  from  the  participle.    (§  480.  2.  b. ) 

2.     478.  The  infinitive  with  to  will  also  often  require  to  be 
translated  in  German  by  other  forms : 

(a)  Generally,  in  German,  the  infinitive  with  p  cannot  be  used  unless 
the  subject  —  expressed  or  implied  —  of  the  infinitive  action  is  the  same 
as  that  of  the  leading  verb.     If  the  subject  is  changed,  instead  of  the  in- 
finitive a  noun  clause  will  be  used — usually  with  baf}.     Thus :  iyd)  toiinfdje 
e§  gu  tun ;  but,  id)  roiinfdje,  bafj  er  e§  ttte,  /  wish  him  to  do  it;  id)  toetjj, 
baft  er  etn  2)ieb  ift,  I  know  him  to  be  a  thief ;  bie  ©efdjtoorenen  glaubten,  bafe  er 
jd)ulbig  fct,  (or  glau6ten,  er  fei  fdjitlbtg),  the  jury  thought  him  to  be  guilty  ; 
©nglanb  ertoartet,  bafe  jebermann  fetne  ^fltdjt  tue,  expects  every  man  to  do  his 
duty.    But  with  exceptions;  as,  id)  fiat  tf)tt  git  romtnen ;  er  ahmitg  un§  3" 
bleiben,  etc. 

(b)  In  objective  indirect  questions.     As:  He  did  not  know  where  to  go, 
er  touBte  ntd)t  too  e"r  fiingefjen  fottte  (should go);  show  him  how  to  do  it,  seigen 
<Ste  ifjiTt,  If  te  er  e§  tnadjen  mu^  (how  he  must  do  it) ;  tell  him  what  to  write  — 
toa§  er  jdjretben  fott,  etc. 

(c)  In  descriptive  or  limiting  phrases.     As :   There  are  many  things  to 
make  us  happy,  bie  un§  gliidlid)  tnadjen  fottten ;  /  am  not  the  man  to  do  that, 
ber  ba§  tun  tottrbe  (that  would  do  that} ;  etn  (joldjer)  2ftann,  ber  e§  tun 
totirbe,  such  a  man  as  to  do  it;  he  ran  so  fast  as  to,  etc.,  f 0  fcfinett,  bdjj,  etc. 

(d)  The  infinitive  as  attributive,  or  complement,  after  passive  verbs 
cannot  be  imitated  in  German.    As:  He  was  seen  to  fall,  man  fat)  if)n  fatten; 


§  480]  THE    PRESENT    PARTICIPLE.  289 

he  was  known  to  be  there,  matt  ftwfete,  bafj  er  bort  toar ;  it  is  believed  to  be 
true,  mem  glattbt,  baft  e§  lt>af)r  fei.  (See  §  275.) 

For  the  infinitive  phrase  about  to,  see  §  465,  c.     For  is  to,  see  f  often,  §  269. 

REMARK.  —  It  thus  appears  that  the  English  infinitive  has  much  more  extended  idio- 
matic uses  than  the  German  —  with  advantage,  it  may  be  added,  in  brevity  and  precision  of 
expression.  Also  that  this  is  in  large  part  due  to  the  special  form  in  -ing —  the  participal 
or  gerund  infinitive— which  has  a  more  distinctly  noun  (abstract)  value  than  the  other 
forms. 

THE  PARTICIPLES. 

479-  (.a)  The  participles  are  verb-adjectives,  having  the 
meaning  and  adjuncts  of  a  verb,  and  the  grammatical  con- 
struction of  an  adjective.  The  present  participle  expresses 
continuing  action,  and  is  always  active ;  the  perfect  participle 
expresses  completed  action  and,  in  transitive  verbs,  is  of  passive 
meaning. 

(b)  Both  present  and  perfect  participles  follow  the  usual 
rules  of  adjective  inflection,  and  may  be  used  as  simple  adjec- 
tives. When  so  used  they  may  be  compared:  (Sin  bebeutenberer 
$im!t,  a  more  important  point ;  bte  fcettwnbertfte  28ei§ljett,  the 
most  admired  wisdom;  or,  they  maybe  used  as  nouns:  Grin 
Stebenber,  a  lover;  eine  (Mtebte,  a  beloved  one;  ber  Sefenbe,  the 
reader;  ba§  (Mefene,  what  is  read;  or,  as  adverbs:  SSiitenb  cmf* 
gebradjt,  madly  excited ;  au£>ge§etd)net  fdjott,  exceedingly  beauti- 
ful, etc.  —  conforming  in  all  these  uses  to  the  adjective,  as 
heretofore  explained.  Their  more  special  uses  will  be  stated 
separately : 

THE  PRESENT  PARTICIPLE. 

480.  The  present  participle  agrees  in  part  with  English  usage,  but  in 
important  points  there  is  difference. 

i.  (a)  The  present  participle  is  used  freely  as  attributive.  As:  Gttt  lie* 
fcenber  SBrubcr  ;  Me  otte§  erftmrmenbe  Semite,  the  all-warming  sun,  etc. 

(b)  It  is  also  used  appositively.     As :  ®r  fafj  toetnenb  ba  ;  beibe  famett 
fdjtoeigenb  Ijeruttter,  etc. 

(c)  More  rarely,  it  has  predicative  force,  as  of  a  clause  expressing 
manner,  or  contemporaneous  action.      As :  ©id)  lie&lid)  att  it)tt  jcfymiegettb, 


290  LESSON    LX.  [§  481 

fcltcfte  fie  f)tnauf,  tenderly  leaning  on  him,  she  looked  up;  un§  freunbftrf)  griijjenb, 
berliefj  er  un3,  greeting  us  kindly,  he  left  us. 

2.  More   usually,  the    English   present  participle,  used   appositively, 
will  be  expanded  into  a  clause : 

(a)  When  descriptive,  into  a  relative  clause.  As  :  We  met  a  man  carry- 
ing a  fish-rod,  loir  trafen  etneit  Sftann,  ber  eine  Stngelrute  trug  ;  a  man  doing 
his  duty  has  nothing  to  fear,  ein  2ftann,  ber  feine  ^fltdjt  erfu'Ut,  etc. 

(V)  When  implying  adverbial  relations  of  cause,  time,  etc.,  the  present 
participle  will  be  expanded  into  adverbial  clauses.  As :  This  being  the  case, 
I  had  nothing  to  say,  bd  bieS  ber  gait  foar  (as  this  -was  the  case)  ;  going  to  the 
horse/air,  I  met  the  farmer,  inbem  id)  auf  ben  ^ferbemarft  gtng  (while  I  was 
going,  etc.);  the  enemy  having  been  beaten  fled,  ber  getnb  flof),  tmdjbem  er  ge= 
frfjlagen  tear  (after,  etc.) ;  walking  uprightly  we  walk  surely,  toenn  loir  auf5 
redjt  toanbeln  (if  we  walk,  etc.).  Compare  §  477,  d. 

3.  As  already  stated,  the  present  participle  is  not  used  in  compound 
forms  like  he  is  laughing,  etc.  (see  §  462).     Nor  as  a  simple  predicate, 
except  where  the  participle  is  used  only  as  an  adjective:  @ie  tft  ret^enb,  she 
is  charming;  ber  ^Sunft  ift  fefjr  bebeutenb  (ein  feljr  bebeutenber),  etc. 

4.  The  following  are  idiomatic  forms : 

(a)  With  the  verb  fommen,  to  come,  the  perfect  participle  of  a  verb  of 
motion  is  used,  instead  of  the  present,  to  express  the  manner  of  coming. 
As:  (£r  fam  gelattfen,  he  came  running;  ein  $£ogel  fam  geflogen,  a  bird  came 
flying,  etc.  —  the  action  being  regarded  as  completed. 

(£)  In  a  few  phrases  the  present  participle  seems  to  have  a  passive 
sense:  (Sine  melfenbe  $uf),  a  milking  cow ;  bie  fcerreffenbe  <£act)e,  the  matter 
concerned. 

(c)  And,  on  the  other  hand,  the  perfect  participle  will  sometimes  have 
the  sense  of  an  active  participle.  As :  Ungegeffen  gn  SBette  geJjen,  without 
eating;  gottbergeffene  SSorte,  God-forgetting  words.  (Cf.  a  drunken  man,  etc.) 

THE  PERFECT  PARTICIPLE. 

481.  i.  Unlike  the  present  participle,  the  perfect  participle  is  used  in 
compound  tenses  —  with  fjaben  or  fetn,  see  §§  171-2  —  and  in  the  passive 
voice,  with  toerben,  see  §  174.  It  is  also  used  freely  as  a  predicate,  see 
§  273.  More  freely,  too,  than  the  present  participle,  it  is  used,  with  its 
adjuncts,  as  the  equivalent  of  qualifying  clauses. 

2.  With  intransitive  verbs  the  perfect  participle,  which  is  passive  in 
transitive  verbs,  expresses  only  the  condition  of  completed  action.  As : 
S)as  gefunfene  ©djiff,  the  sunken  ship  (that  has  stink) ;  bo§  ©efd)et)ene,  what 
has  happened;  but  thus  used  only  where  the  verb  has  the  auxiliary  fein 
(§  297). 


§  483]  ADJUNCTS    OF    THE    PARTICIPLE. 

3.  Many  words  in  the  form  of  perfect  participle  are  now  used  —  often 
with  special  meaning — as  mere  adjectives.     Such  are:  berebt,   eloquent; 
bejafjrt,  aged ;  befartnt,  known ;  erfjaben,  exalted;  getefjrt,  learned;  bergniigt, 
pleased;  berbient,  meritorious;  bottfommen,  perfect,  and  others. 

4.  The  perfect  participle  is  used  elliptically  in  absolute  construction. 
As:  §rifd)  gemagt,  fyalb  gewonnen,  -well  begun,  half  done;  gefefjt,  id)  tat  e3, 
suppose  I  did  it ;  ba§  abgeredjner,  that  not  counted,  etc.     See  §  446  (but  the 
case  will  sometimes  be  nominative). 

5.  After  fjeifjen,  to  be  called,  the  perfect  participle,  implying  a  completed 
action,  is  used  as  with  the  sense  of  an  infinitive.     As:  5)a3  Ijetjjt  fdjnefl 
gelaitfen,  I  call  that  quick  running  (quickly  run). 

For  the  past  participle,  exclamatory,  as  imperative,  see  §  336,  2. 

For  its  use  with  fommen,  arid  other  seemingly  active  senses,  see  §  480,  4. 

THE  FUTURE  PASSIVE  PARTICIPLE. 

482.  The  so-called  future  passive  participle — or  gerundive — is  formed, 
after  the  analogy  of  the  present  participle,  from  the  passive  use  of  the 
infinitive  with  311  (§  47  5,  2),  and  has  the  form  of  the  present  participle, 
preceded  by  311.     Thus:  S)iefe  Stat  ift  311  loben —  is  to  be  praised ,   hence, 
eine  31:  lobenbe  Sat,  an  action  to  be  praised ;  eirte  nid)t  311  ertragenbe  §t£e,  a 
heat  not  to  be  borne.     It  is  formed  only  from  transitive  verbs,  and  is  used 
only  attributively,  and  rarely. 

ADJUNCTS  OF  THE  PARTICIPLE. 

483.  For  the  position  of  the  adjuncts  of  the  participle,  see  §  353.  This 
construction,  often  extended  to  extravagant  length,  is  required  always  if 
the  participle  is  attributive ;  but  the  appositive  participle  will  sometimes 
stand  first.     The  participle  with  adjuncts  will  generally  be  appositive  in 
English,  and  will  often  need  to  be  expressed  by  a  relative  clause.     Exam- 
ples: £>er  93Itc!  bon  btefem  7000  gufc  «&ei  &em  2fteere§fptegel  ftefjenben  £itrme 
in  Me  rings  wrtfjer  liegenbe  ©eMrgStoiifte,  the  -view  from  this  tower,  which 
stands  jooo  feet  above  the  sea  level,  into  the  wilderness  of  mountains  which 
lies  around ;  bte  fjocfjfte  $uppet  gerjbrt  ber  burdj  Me  $atferin  £elene  gefjcwten 
Strdje  on,  the  highest  cupola  belongs  to  the  church  (which  was)  built  fry,  etc.; 
beiunter  ber  Soft  be3  $reit3e§  3itm  Sobe  ©efii^rte,  he  who  was  led  to  death 
beneath  the  burden  of  the  cross;  in  bent  einft  burdj  2lfd)e  unb  glu'rjenbe  Caba 
berfd)Utteten  §erculonum . . .  befinben  fid) ...  au3  farbigen  (Steinen  sufammen* 
gefe^te  unferen  ©ticfereten  a'fjnltd)e  ©emalbe,  in  H.,  which  was  once  buried  by 
ashes,  etc.,  are  found  (mosaic)  paintings,  which  are  composed  of  colored 
stones*  like  our  embroidery,  etc. 


292  LESSON    LX.  [§  483 

Such  examples  are  not  to  be  imitated  by  the  student. 

In  the  following  examples  (appositive)  the  participle  precedes :  33dlb  er= 
bittert  burd)  ba3  gifrfjen  unb  ©efd)ret,  flu'r^t  ber  ©tier,  soon  exasperaded  by  — 
the  bull  rushes,  etc. ;  fjter  ntbdjte  man  toofjnen,  umgeBen  uon  Itefcenben  ^er^en, 
here  one  would  wish  to  live,  surrounded  by  loving  hearts ;  but  it  usually 
follows. 

EXERCISE  LX.  A. 

i.  He  insists  upon  your  obeying  his  orders.  2.  His  father  desired  him 
to  come  home  immediately.  3.  The  servant  knew  it  to  be  his  duty.  4.  She 
declared  him  to  be  a  fool.  5.  The  old  shepherd  came  down  the  hill,  leading 
his  young  child  and  attended  by  his  faithful  dog.  6.  She  was  acquainted 
with  the  world,  having  lived  in  her  youth  about  (at)  the  court.  7.  Having 
missed  the  train,  we  were  obliged  to  return  home.  8.  Having  taken  leave, 
we  went  away.  9.  Wishing  to  see  him,  I  went  to  his  house  early  in  the 
morning.  10.  He  died  at  the  age  of  ninety  (years),  beloved  and  esteemed 
by  all.  ii.  We  saw  a  woman  selling  apples.  12.  Having  forgotten  his 
whip,  the  coachman  went  back  to  the  stable  to  fetch  it.  13.  While  speaking 
with  me,  he  was  called  out.  14.  I  gave  him  the  letter  without  saying  a  word. 

15.  Having  paid  my  bill,  I  ordered  the  porter  to  carry  down  my  luggage. 

16.  A  meritorious  man  does  not  always  receive  the  deserved  reward.     17. 
The  long-expected  news  has  come  at  last.'    18.  We  saw  the  rising  sun  from 
the  top  of  the  mountain.     19.  He  saved  himself  by  jumping  through  the 
window.     20.  The  general  took  the  town  after  having  bombarded  it  [for] 
three  weeks.     21.  It  was  not  a  learned  man  that  taught  me  reading  and 
writing.  22.  Excuse  me  for  speaking  (that,  etc.)  to  you  in  my  mother-tongue. 
23..  A  righteous  man,  fighting  with  misfortune,  is  a  glad  sight  for  the  gods. 
24.  We  have  often  heard  that  song  sung  in  England. 

B.  (LESSONS  LIX-LX.) 

i.  Have  (laffen)  the  coachman  called,  and  the  carriage  driven  up  (uor). 
2.  We  have  allowed  ourselves  to  be  deceived.  3.  These  books  are  to  be 
sold.  4.  He  did  it  without  my  knowing  it.  5.  Many 'a  man  loses  his 
good  name  by  visiting  bad  company.  6.  He  began  by  (mtt)  asking  me 
for  an  alms.  7.  I  do  not  doubt  (an)  your  keeping  your  word.  8.  He  won- 
dered at  (iifcer)  my  still  sleeping  after  9  o'clock.  9.  It  matters  (anfommcn) 
not  what  we  learn,  but  how  we  learn  it.  10.  A  man  came  running  up  in 
greatest  haste.  1 1.  My  brother  does  not  think  of  (an)  leaving  to-day.  12. 
I  have  nothing  against  your  going  a-fishing  to-morrow.  13.  I  knew  noth- 
ing of  his  being  ill.  14.  Looking  down  into  the  water,  we  saw  a  sunken 
boat  lying  on  the  rocks.  15.  Going  to  the  town  I  met  a  farmer.  16.  I 


§  484]  ADVERBS.  293 

met  a  farmer  going  to  town.  17.  Don't  you  see  that  he  is  laughing  at  us? 
1 8.  My  coming  yesterday  was  very  opportune.  19.  He  is  not  a  man  ever 
to  betray  his  friends.  20.  Before  opening  the  letter,  he  sat  weeping  a 
long  time.  21.  He  did  not  know  what  to  do.  22.  We  have  many 
things  to  think  of  (an)  to-day.  23.  The  balloon  was  seen  suddenly  to  fall 
from  a  great  height.  24.  Granted  that  I  said  it ;  I  only  resented  an  in- 
tolerable (not-to-be-borne)  insult. 


LESSON  LXL 
Adverbs. 

484.  For  the  forms  of  the  adverb,  comparison,  etc.,  see 
Less,  xxxiv.;  derivation  and  composition,  §§  397,  401;  posi- 
tion, §  355;  adverbs  as  prefixes,  §  377;  distinction  from  unin- 
flected  adjective,  §  449,  2. 

The  use  of  adverbs  in  German  corresponds,  generally,  to  their 
use  in  English.  A  few  special  cases  will  be  briefly  noted. 

(a)  Adverbs  are  sometimes  used  before  prepositions,  forming  a  kind  of 
compound  preposition.     As  :  2JJitten  lint  ben  Seib,  midway  around  the  body ; 
mitten  in  bem  $riege,  in  the  midst  of  the  war;  oi§  an  Me  ©tabt,  as  far  as  the 
town  ;  oi§  auf§  aufeerfte,  to  the  utmost. 

(b)  Or  after  a  preposition,  forming  a  compound  adverb  phrase.     As: 
SSon  oben,  from  above  ;  t»on  linten,  from  below  ;  fur  je£t,  for  the  present,  etc. 

(c)  The  adverb  fyer  denotes  motion  toward  the  speaker;  f)in,  motion 
from  the  speaker.     As:  SSo  lommen  ©ie  fjer?  where  do  you  come  from?  too 
gefjen  @ie  f)in?  where  are  you  going  (to)?  Or  in  composition:  SSorjer  fommen 
(5ie?  footer  gefyen  ©ic?     They  often  stand  with  a  preposition  phrase,  in 
many  cases  where  they  can  hardly  be  translated  in  English.    As :  (£r  lam 
bom  gelbe  fjer,  he  came  (in)  from  the  field;  er  ging  nad)  ber  Stabt  Ijin,  he 
went  (away)  toward  the  town. 

(d)  Also,  in  composition  with  a  preposition,  t)er  and  Ijin  will  repeat  the 
force  of  the  preposition,  originally  with  emphasis,  but  often  only  as  an 
idiomatic  phrase.     As:  ^n  bie  ©tabt  ^inetn,  into  the  city;  au§  ber  <5tabt  Ijer.* 
CW3,  out  of  the  city;  lint  bie  ©tabt  I)erum,  around  the  city,  etc. 


294  LESSON    LXI.  [§  485 

For  f)er  and  f)in,  forming  verb-prefixes  —  usually  in  literal  sense  —  see 
§  377,  c. 

For  the  adverbs  ba  (bar),  too  (toor),  f)ier  (f)te)  in  composition,  in  place  of 
pronoun  cases,  see  §  401,  2,  and  §  457. 

ADVERB  IDIOMS. 

485.  Some  adverbs  have  particular  idiomatic  uses  which  can 
hardly  be  represented  by  English  equivalents.  In  some  cases 
the  force  is  purely  modal,  expressing  attitude  of  mind  or 
feeling,  such  as  is  indicated  in  English  largely  by  the  tone  of 
voice  only.  In  other  cases,  special  senses  arise  out  of  partic- 
ular combinations.  Such  idioms  can  be  learned  only  by 
practice.  A  few  are  added  for  illustration. 

1.  Slttrfj,   also,  even. 

<5te  finb  aud)  fo  einer,  you  are  one  of  them,  too.  —  3d)  fenne  tfjn  audj  ttid)t, 
I  do  not  know  him  either.  —  ©0  fefjr  er  aud)  ladjte,  however  much  he  laughed. 
—  28er  e§  aud)  jet,  whoever  it  may  be.  -—  SSanfen  aud)  bie  23erge  fel&ft?  do  even 
the  mountains  shake  ?  —  SSenn  (ob)  e§  aud)  toafjr  toare,  even  if  it  were  true. 


2.  $>0d),  though. 

S)od),  when  used  as  an  adversative  particle,  has  a  stronger  accent.  As: 
(£r  ift  gefdjtdt  unb  f)ot  bod)  einen  §ef)ler  gemad)t,  he  is  clever  and,  nevertheless 
(in  spite  of  that},  he  has  made  a  mistake.  —  0£r  tft  reid)  itnb  bod)  tft  er  unglitd^ 
lid),  he  is  rich  and,  nevertheless,  he  is.  unhappy.  —  (Er  fjat  e§  bod)  gefagt,  for 
all  that,  he  has  said  it.  —  3d)  Bat  i^n,  bod)  tooUte  er  nid)t,  I  begged  him,  but  he 
would  not.  £)ennod)  is  often  used,  emphatically,  in  this  sense. 

£)od)  sometimes  stands,  elliptically,  after  a  negative:  Sie  fommen  nid)t? 
S)od),  —  you  are  not  coming?  Yes,  I  am. 

Unaccented  bod)  expresses  a  wish,  a  hope,  a  supposition  :  <5te  finb  bod) 
toof)l?  /  hope  you  are  well?  <£ie  hrijfett  bod),  baB  er  fort  ift,  /  suppose  you 
know  that  he  is  gone.  —  5D^ad)en  @ie  ntir  bod)  btefe  greube,  pray,  give  me  this 
pleasure.  —  SKa're  id)  bod)  gftmnjig  3a^rer  would  that  I  were  twenty  years  old. 

—  ^a'tte  er  bod)  gefprodjen,  would  that  he  had  spoken.  —  £>a&e  id)  eS  bod)  ge« 
f  agt  !  didn't  I  say  so  ! 

3.  @rftf/rj/. 
SRun  erft  geftanb  er  fetnen  Se^Ie^  e^/  ^^^  ^^  then  did  he  confess  his  fault. 

—  3#)  *)a&e  i^n  erft  geftern  gefel)en,  I  saw  him  but  yesterday.  —  3#)  ^tte  erft 


§  485]  ADVERB    IDIOMS. 

breifjig  ©etten  gelefen,  I had  read  only  (just)  thirty  pages.  —  SSMr  finb  crft  am 
gujje  be§  SBergeS,  ze/<?  #n?  0«/y  at  the  foot  of  the  mountain.  —  (£r  ttrirb  erft 
iibermorgen  anfommen,  he  -will  not  arrive  till  the  day  after  to-morrow.  —  ®a§ 
fcraudjt  nid)t  erft  fcetoiefen  311  Juerben,  that  requires  no  proof  . 

4.  ®ertt,  "willingly;  Kefcer,  rather;  am  Ue&ftett. 

^d)  tuc  e§  gent —  tecflt  gern,  /  ^  it  with  pleasure  —  with  great  pleasure. 

—  dr  Jjort  fid)  gern  teben,  he  loves  to  hear  himself  talk.  —  %$  toitf  e3  gern 
glauoen,  /  am  quite  willing  to  believe  it. — %d)  tya&e  e§  ntdjt  gern  getan,  /  <#</ 
^(?/</<7  it  intentionally. — %$  mbi^te  leinen  gern  fieletbigen,  I  should  not  like  to 
offend  any  one.  —  ©tefe  ^Pflanse  tnadjft  gern  in  fanbtgem  S3oben,  gaws  well  in 
sandy  soil.  —  £5$  trinle  Iie6er  roten  SSetn  al§  toetfjen,  I  prefer  red  wine  to 
white.  —  28tr  Bletften  Itefier  git  §aufe,  we  had  rather  stay  at  home.  —  5tm 
Itefcften  trare  e§  tntr,  tnenn  <£te  mid)  gleid)  besafjlten,  2  shoidd  much  prefer 
that  you  paid  me  at  once. 

5.  $flf  yes,  indeed. 

^a,  pren  ©te  rnxmol,  just  listen  to -what  I  say.  —  SBarum  fragft  bn?  bit 
toeifjt  e§  |a,  w/^  ^  you  ask?  surely yott  know  it.  —  ©ie  jefien  ja  ganj  6Ia|j 
au§  !  tf^d:^  me,  you  look  quite  pale! — 33ringen  (£ie  ba§  S3ud)  ja  tnit,  be  sure  to 
bring  the  book  with  you.  —  (Sr  tft  ja  fd)0n  fort,  he  is  already  gone,  you  know. 

—  Gr  ift  ja  berriirft,  why,  he  is  crazy. 

6.  Mod),  still,  yet. 

@tnb  ©ie  nod)  tmmer  Iranf?  are  you  still  ill?  —  3h>blf  ober  nod)  nte^r, 
/totf/^  <?r  even  more.  —  Gr  toar  nod)  bor  eintgen  Slagen  ^ier,  he  was  here  but  a 
few  days  ago.  —  ^d)  tne  e§  nod)  Ijeute,  /'//  ^  it  this  very  day.  —  (Sr  foU  nod) 
lommen,  he  is  still  to  come. —  ®ommt  er  nod)  nid)t?  is  he  not  yet  coming? 
SBitte,  nod)  etne  Saffe  ^ee,  thank  you  for  another  cup  of  tea. 

7.  SRlltt,  now,  well. 

(£r  mag  nun  lommen  ober  nidjt,  whether  he  come  or  not.  —  2Sir  famen  um 
gtnet  ltt)r  an,  nnb  nnn  ruljten  ratr  an3,  ^^  arrived  at  two  o'clock,  and  then  we 
Crested.  —  9iun  lefite  afier  bamaI8  fein  SSater  nod),  but  then  his  father  was  still 
alive.  —  SBtr  Ijafcen  e§  gefe^en,  unb  nnn  finb  rcir  iiber^eugt,  we  have  seen  it, 
now  we  are  convinced.  —  (£3  ift  nun  cinmat  fo,  well,  it  can't  be  helped. — 
•Kun,  fiatte  id)  e§  ntd)t  borljcrgefagt?  well,  had  I  not  foretold,  it? — 3^un,  ba§ 
ift  feljr  natitrlid),  why,  that's  very  natural. 


296  LESSON    LXI.  [§  486 

8.  @djott,  already,  even. 

3Jdj  totttte  nun  fdjon  bret  %ofyct,  I  have  been  waiting  these  three  years. — 
<5c|on  bet  ©ebanfe  tft  ein  SBerfcredien,  the  very  thought  is  a  crime.  —  ©djon  urn 
ber  (Sljre  ttrittett  miiffen  hrir  e§  tun,  -we  must  do  it,  were  it  merely  for  the  sake 
of  honor.  —  ©djon  gut,  all  right.  —  3d)  toerbe  e§  iljm  fdjon  fagen,  I  shall  tell 
him,  dorft  be  afraid.  —  ©djon  bor  Sage^anfirud)  toaren  fie  auf  ben  SBeinen, 
even  before  the  break  cf  day  they  -were  on  their  legs. 

9.  @0,  so. 

SSte  ber  Setter,  fo  tft  ber  <5of)n,  like  father,  like  son.  — '(So  etne  QJefd)td)te  ift 
unglauoltdj,  such  a  story,  etc.  —  2Bte  tft  bte  SSelt  bodj  fo  fdjbn,  how  beautiful 
the  world  is  ! — ©r  tft  fort.  ©0  !  ift  e§  ntbgltd),  indeed!  is  it  possible  ?  —  <So 
ofcer  fo — e§  ntu^  bodj  geton  toerben,  one  way  or  the  other,  it  must  be  done. 

As  general  connective,  §  328:  omitted,  §  471,  e.  Also  in  subordinate 
construction :  —  As  relative  (archaic) :  3>te,  fo  red)tfrf)affett  finb,  they  that  are 
righteous.  As  correlative:  <5o  getefjrt  er  tft,  fo  fcefrfjeiben  tft  er  ctudj,  he  is  as 
modest  as  learned;  fo  grofc  bte  SBorfcerettung  cwdj  fear,  fo,  etc.,  great  as  was 
the  preparation,  yet,  etc.  As  conditional  (archaic) :  ©0  ber  £>err  tottt,  if  the 
Lord  will ;  and  in  phrases  like  fofcalb,  folange,  etc.  —  as  soon  (as),  with  aI3 
omitted. 

NOTE.  —  Such  phrases  are  written  in  one  word  (f obolb,  etc.)  when  conjunctions,  but 
separately  when  adverbs. 

10.  SBoljI,  -well,  surely. 

&eute  nidjt,  a6er  toof)l  ntorgen,  not  to-day,  but  may-be  to-morrow.  —  £>0§ 
tft  too^t  toa^r,  aber,  that  may  be  so,  but.  —  S)a3  tft  tooljl  ntc|t  ntbglicf),  that  is 
scarcely  possible.  —  SBtr  f)a6en  e§  too^l  geljbrt,  aber  nii^t  berftanben,  we  have 
heard  it  indeed,  but  not  understood  it.  —  <5te  glaufiten  toof)I,  i(^  ptte  ntd§t§  gu 
tun,  no  doubt,  you  thought  I  had  nothing  to  do. 

11.  9Kdjt,   not  (redundant). 

The  negative  is  sometimes  used  when  not  in  English,  as: — in  exclama- 
tion; lute  oft  rjdt  er  ntdjt  gefagt,  how  often  has  he  (not)  said  (compare:  charm 
he  never  so  wisely)  —  or  after  verbs  of  hindering,  etc. :  id)  fann  ntd)t  f)tnbern, 
bajj  fie  nid)t  rjbren,  I  cannot  prevent  them  from  hearing  (Latin,  ne  audiant). 

ADVERBIAL  CLAUSES. 

486.  Adverbial  clauses  are  introduced  by  subordinating 
conjunctions  (§  332)  expressing  various  relations. 

The  relations  of  time,  cause,  condition  are  nearly  related,  and 
easily  run  into  each  other.  The  most  important  uses  are: 


§  486]  ADVERB    IDIOMS.  297 

1.  Time. 

(a)  2U3,  as,  when,  expresses  a  definite  past  time.     As :  2U§  id)  fjente 
ntorgen  oufftonb,  when  I  rose  this  morning,  etc. ;  oI3  id}  nod)  bonbon  lorn,  fce- 
fud)te  er  mid)  fogleid),  zy/z^  I  came  —  he  visited  me  at  once.  2)0  is  also  some- 
times used  in  this  sense. 

(b)  SSenn,  when,  whenever,  expresses  time  indefinite,  future,  or  contin- 
gent. As :  SSenn  er  nod)  Bonbon  fam,  Befudjte  er  mid)  immer,  whenever  he  came, 
etc.     SKenn  er  lommt,  ttrirb  er  un§  6efud)en,  when  he  comes,  he  will  visit  us. 

NOTE.  —  @o  is  unusual  after  clauses  of  time.  With  fo  inserted,  the  last  example  would 
be  if  he  comes,  etc.  See  §  328,  note. 

(c)  28onn,  when,  is  properly  interrogative,  and,  when  used  as  a  conjunc- 
tion, introduces  an  indirect  question.     As:  28onn  fommt  er?  when  will  he 
come?  id)  toetfj  nid)t,  toonn  er  lomnten  toirb,  I dontknow  when,  etc. 

(d)  28ie,  as,  is  sometimes  used  for  al§,  in  more  lively  expression :  SSie 
ertntd)  fof),  lonnte  er  mid),  as  (soon  as)  he  saw  me,  he  knew  me.     (See  3,  l>). 

(e)  Stt&em,  while,  as,  expresses  simultaneous  time,  but  more  frequently 
the  occasion  or  ground  of  an  action.     As :  ^nbem  id)  ba  ftonb,  trot  etn  grember 
511  mir,  while  I  stood  there,  etc.    (£r  ging  gleid)  loteber  toeg,  inbem  er  nttd)  nid)t 
5U  £aufe  fanb,  as  he  did  not  find  me  at  home.     (See  (d)  below.) 

(f)  SSa'fjrenb,  while,  expresses  more  definitely  contemporaneous  and  con- 
tinued time.  As :  SBtifjrenb  ber  $rieg  bauerte,  while  the  war  lasted;  er  fd)rie&, 
njafirenb  id)  la^,  while  I  was  reading. 

NOTE.  —  2Btil)renfc>  is  originally  a  present  participle,  like  our  during. 

2.  Cause. 

(a)  SBeil,  because,  expresses  a  real,  definite  cause.    As  :  £>ie  gifd)e  fbtmett 
ntd)t  get)en,  beil  fie  teine  gttfee  ^afien,  because  they  have  no  feet. 

(b)  3)0,  as,  since,  expresses  a  logical  cause,  or  reason.     As :  S5a  ber  SBtrtb 
im  Often  ift,  fo  nstrb  e§  h)of)t  trocfen  bletfien,  since  the  wind  is  from  the  east,  etc. ; 
ba  ber  £bmg  ntd)t  ad)t  ouf  tfjn  go6,  fing  er  felfift  on  jit  reben,  aj  //^^  king  paid 
no  attention  to  him,  etc.     (§  328,  note).     See  also  i,  a,  above. 

NOTE.  — Since,  expressing  time,  is  jettbem,  (fett) ;  as,  expressing  manner,  is  tone.  As: 
3d)  bin  urttooljl  geioefen,  feitbem  ttiir  un§  fa^en,  ««<:^  «/^  ^w  one  another ;  er  f £rtd)t  (f o), 
U)te  er  benft,  he  speaks  as  he  thinks. 

(c)  S^nn,  usually  an  adverb,  is  sometimes  used  in  sense  of  nun  bafj,  now 
that,  since  (now).     As :  Sftitn  er  bo  ift,  fterbe  id)  ruf)ig,  since  (now  that)  he  is 
here,  I  can  die  in  peace. 

(d)  Stt&ent  (e  above),  is  more  slightly  causal,  and  is  often  rendered  by 
English  participle  (§  480,  2,  b). 


298  LESSON    LXI.  [§  486 

NOTE. — These  causal  relations  — subordinate  —  must  not  be  confounded  with  the  co- 
ordinating beitn,  for  (§  326).  For  the  distinction  of  the  conjunctive  from  the  adverbial  use 
of  ba,  etc.,  see  §  351,  2. 

3.  Condition. 

(a)  SSenn,  if,  is  the  regular  conditional  conjunction.  For  its  omission, 
see  §  350,  2.  For  jo,  see  §  485,  9 ;  also  note  to  i  above. 

(b}  28o,  is  sometimes  used  in  a  condition,  especially  in  phrases  like  too= 
fern,  (in  so  far)  in  case  that;  or  elliptically ;  as,  too  md)t,  if  not ;  too  tttbgltd), 
if  possible,  etc. ;  and,  colloquially,  often  in  the  sense  of  toenn,  or  a(3,  when. 

(c)  For  the  conditions  o(3  o&,  al3  toenn,  as  if,  see  §  470,  J. 

4.  Concession.     The  concession  of  a  condition  —  though,  although,  even 
if,  however — is  expressed  by  toenn  .  .  .  gletd),   toenn  .  .  .  fdjon,   toenn  .  .  . 
and),  oft  .  .  .  and),  tote  .  .  .  aud) ;  or  by  oogletd),  ofifdjon,  obtool)! —  which  also 
may  be  written  separately,  with  intervening  words.     As :  28enn  ba3  gleid) 
toafi.r  totire,  even  if  that -were  trite  ;  tote  e§  aud)  fein  mag,  however  it  may  be  ; 
obgleid)  er  fein  SSermbgen  rjeiloren  f)at,  though  he  has  lost  his  property,  etc. 

For  the  corresponding  relative  forms,  toer  .  .  .  and),  etc.,  see  §  459,  3,  b. 

NOTE.  — The  conditional  ttentt,  or  06,  may  sometimes  be  omitted,  as  §  350,  2.  As: 
£at  er  flleicf)  fein  SSermogen  oerloren ;  locire  e§  oud^  luafir,  etc.  And  sometimes  in  poetry, 
autfj,  flteicfj,  etc.,  will  be  omitted.  As  :  Ob  ber  @ee  itn§  fc^eibet,  fo  ftnb  loir  eineS  <Stamme§ 
boc^,  though  the  lake  divide  us,  -we  are  yet  of  one  race. 

For  the  correlative  clauses  of  comparison,  je  —  befto,  see  §  334. 

EXERCISE  LXI. 

i.  I  do  not  remember  where  I  saw  him  last.  2.  Now  that  he  is  dead, 
all  men  begin  to  praise  him.  3.  I  have  never  liked  him  since  I  have  found 
out  what  sort  of  a  man  he  is.  4.  Do  not  judge  him  until  you  know  more 
of  the  matter.  5.  He  cannot  walk,  tecause  he  has  broken  his  leg.  6.  He 
looked  as  if  he  were  thinking  of  past  times.  7.  He  took  leave,  inviting 
me  in  the  (ouf£)  most  friendly  manner  to  dine  with  him  the  next  day.  8. 
He  listened  most  attentively,  whilst  I  translated  the  letter  to  him.  9.  Al- 
though he  is  not  a  rich  man,  he  gives  more  to  the  poor  than  many  a  rich 
[one].  10.  Although  he  is  our  friend,  we  are  nevertheless  dissatisfied  with 
what  he  has  done.  1 1.  As  soon  as  I  arrived  in  Munich,  I  went  out  to  look 
at  the  picture-galleries.  12.  Whenever  he  passed  by,  he  looked  up  at 
(nad))  the  window  where  the  old  gentleman  usually  sat.  13.  Before  going 
home,  I  must  go  into  another  shop  in  order  to  buy  an  umbrella  for  my 
sister.  14.  As  the  gentleman  was  introduced  to  me  as  an  American,  I  ad- 


§4^7]  REPETITION.  SUMMARY.  299 

dressed  him  in  the  English  language.  15.  The  longer  I  know  him,  the  more 
I  love  and  respect  him.  16.  That  one  language  is  more  adapted  to  (§ur) 
music  than  another  is  surely  incontestable.  17.  In  order  that  a  mistake 
might  (fbnnen)  never  occur,  the  landlord  himself  looked  after  even  the 
smallest  accounts.  18.  Had  you  only  told  me  that  you  needed  money, 
how  gladly  I  would  have  lent  you  some  (tt)elcf)e§) !  19.  Only  yesterday  have 
I  learned  what  the  whole  town  has  known  for  (feit)  several  months.  20. 
Well,  I  am  sorry;  but  it  cannot  be  helped  (anbern  laffen).  21.  He  would 
not  tell  where  he  came  from  nor  where  he  was  going.  22.  The  fugitive 
ran  straight  into  the  forest  (fytnetn)  without  once  looking  behind.  23.  I 
should  have  liked  best  (to  me,  etc.)  to  stay  at  home  in  (bet)  this  bad  weather. 
24.  I  know  a  boy  who  has  been  studying  German  six  months  and  yet  makes 
mistakes  in  every  exercise. 

Repetition.  —  Summary. 

487.  A  grammatical  term  standing  in  a  common  relation  to 
several  other  terms  must  either  precede  them  all  or  follow 
them  all.  Otherwise  the  common  term  must  be  repeated. 

1.  This  principle,  which  is  of  general  application,  will  be  illustrated 
here  only  in  the  following  important  cases. 

(a)  Subject  and  verb. 

(/>)   Object  and  verb. 

(c)  Auxiliary,  with  participle  or  infinitive. 

2.  (a)  Exception  will  regularly  occur  in  a  normal  clause  connected  by 
itnb,  etc.  (§  345,  a),  to  an  inverted  clause.     Here,  generally,  the  subject 
will  not  be  repeated. 

(£)  If  the  objects  are  in  different  cases,  each  must  always  be  expressed. 

3.  Other  seeming  exceptions   will  be   determined    by   emphasis,  etc., 
especially  in  poetry. 

NOTE. — The  principle  seems  to  be  that  the  line  of  reference  shall  always  be  in  the 
same  direction.  It  is  the  same  in  English  as  in  German.  In  the  following  examples  — 
which  might  be  extended  indefinitely  —  observe  that  sometimes  repetition  is  required  in 
English  when  not  in  German  ;  or  the  opposite,  the  principle  remaining  the  same. 

EXAMPLES. —  i.  (a)  Subject  and  verb.  (£r  nafym  Me  $>tltatur  an,  309 
gegen  tie  Seinbe  wib  erfodjt  einen  ©teg  (subject  not  repeated,  but :)  ($r  ber= 
lief}  fetn  Sonbgnt  itnb  6etm  SESeggefjen  fagte  crf  etc.  2ftit  furdjt&arer  ©trenge 
unterbriicfte  unb  beftrafte  ber  $atfer  btefe  Slufftanbe,  the  emperor  suppresed 
and  punished,  etc.  S)er  ^farrer,  ber  etn  red)tltrf)eir  9Jtann  tear,  ben  giiicrjtiing 


3OO  LESSON    LXI.  [§  488 

Ciufnafim  unb  berjtedre,  -who  was  .  .  .  and  (who)  received  and  concealed,  etc.; 
and,  as  the  exception  (2,  a) ;  S)arnad)  ging  ©uftab  nad)  @d)tt>eben  unb  fudjte 
ba£  SSoIf  311  geiuinnen.  S)odj  merfte  er  nid)t3  unb  ging  toeiter,  etc. 

(b)  Object  and  verb.  (Sr  b,at  tntrfj  gefefyen,  aber  nid)t  gegruftt ;  but :  (£r  faf) 
mid),  griifete  mid)  aber  nid)t.  %m  le£ten  £riege  fyaben  mir  bie  geinbe  ba§  •gelb 
t>ertt>iiftet,  bie  Gmtte  serftort,  ben  §of  berbrannr,  etc.  £)er  ^farrer,  ber  ben 
/y!iiri)tltiti]  aufnafym  unb  berftedte,  unb  enblid)  rettete,  etc.,  —  who  received, 
concealed  and  finally  saved  the  fugitive,  etc.  But  with  changed  case  (2,  b) : 
^5)er  ©lanbiger  fjotte  ba§  3ied)t,  bent  ©djulbncr  atle§  ju  ne^men,  unb  i^tt  Ql§ 
<£flat>en  511  ber!aufen. 

(<:)  Auxiliary.  Gin  $8ilb,  U)e(d)e§  iiber  intern  S3ette  gefjangen,  unb  an  lt)el= 
dje^  fie  oft  ttjr  ©e6et  gertdjtet  tjattc.  S^l  f)0ffe/  ^aB  ^ie  S^odjnjelt  bo^jenige  un= 
terfud)en  unb  priifen,  aud)  beurteilen  ttitrb,  h)Q§,  etc.  CSinige  meinten,  man 
fofle  ba§  ^orn  bent  armen  SSolfe  enttoeber  fdjenfen  ober  fef)r  bittig  berfaufen,  — 
should  either  give  the  corn  to  the  poor  people,  or  sell  it  to  them,  etc.  (See 
note).  But  with  repetition :  @ic  burftctt  nidjt  in  ben  (Senat  fommen,  aber  an 
ber  Siire  burften  fie  ji^en,  etc. 

The  examples  might  be  extended  to  embrace  also  other  elements  of  the 
sentence — the  principle  being  everywhere  the  same. 

REMARK.  —  Examples  under  (3)  would  belong  to  rhetoric  rather  than  to  grammar.  But 
in  reading,  and  especially  in  poetry,  students  should  be  taught  to  account  for  every  depar- 
ture from  the  ordinary  forms  ;  for  herein  often  lies  much  of  the  force  and  beauty  of  expres- 
sion. 

(d)  Also,  the  common  term  must  have  the  same  form  in  each  of  the  sev- 
eral relations.  This  rule  will  often  require  repetition  in  German  when  not 
necessary  in  English.  As  :  With  his  wife  and  child,  mit  feiner  §rau  unb  fei* 
item  ilinbe  ;  with  or  without  him,  mit  ib,m  ober  ofyne  tfyn  ;  we  had  followed 
and  overtaken  him,  roir  toaren  U)m  gefolgt  unb  fatten  ifjn  ubertjolt,  etc. 

NOTE. —  In  general,  special  emphasis  may  cause  repetition  when  not  otherwise  neces- 
sary ;  but  this  too,  belongs  to  rhetoric  rather  than  to  grammar. 

Idiom.  —  Concluding  Remarks. 

488.  Outside  of  and  beyond  all  that  can  be  taught  by  formal  grammar, 
lies  the  subject  of  idiom  —  that  is  to  say,  that  peculiarity  of  usage,  in 
word  or  phrase,  which  is  characteristic  of  every  language,  and  which,  more 
than  anything  else,  is  the  expression  of  its  genius  and  its  power.  A  word, 
or  a  phrase,  may  be  entirely  grammatical,  yet  wholly  unidiomatic ;  and  a 
form  of  expression,  perfectly  idiomatic  in  one  language,  would  often  be 
ludicrous  in  another.  This  idiom  is  comprehended  in  an  immense  body 
of  usages,  often  lying  beyond  the  range  of  analysis  or  explanation —  often 


§488]  IDIOM.  —  CONCLUDING    REMARKS.  3OI 

seemingly  capricious  —  sometimes  broad  and  rude,  sometimes  delicate  and 
subtle  —  yet  constituting  the  most  characteristic  features  of  every  lan- 
guage and  of  the  difference  between  languages,  as  well  as  the  most  interest- 
ing subject  of  study  in  each.  This  idiom,  with  the  Sprachgefiihl  which,  is 
its  only  sure  touchstone,  cannot  be  taught  by  any  rules,  or  learned  by  any 
systems  of  lessons,  written  or  oral.  It  can  be  acquired  only  as  one,  by 
reading  or  by  association,  learns  to  think  one's  self  into  the  language,  and 
thus  to  think  and  to  feel  in  it.  The  grammar  can  only  guard  against 
formal  error,  and  prepare  the  way  for  this  higher  mastery.  It  is  a  mis- 
take to  suppose  that  any  mode  of  instruction  can  take 'the  place  of  wide 
and  sympathetic  reading,  or  of  an  actual  residence  among  those  who 
speak  the  language. 

Still,  it  may  be  remarked  that  idiom  can  be  properly  studied  only 
through  idiom.  We  shall  learn  the  force  of  the  German  idiom  only  by 
comparison  with  our  own.  Hence  it  is  to  be  insisted  upon,  that  in  all  the 
processes  of  language  study  the  English  idiom  should  be  held  sacred,  as 
our  own  norm  of  thought  and  of  comparison.  No  English  forms  should 
be  allowed  in  the  study  of  German,  for  example,  that  are  not  pure,  idio- 
matic English.  Mere  paraphrase  is  not  translation,  and  it  degrades  the 
idiom  of  both  languages.  Idiomatic  German  should  be  made  to  give  idio- 
matic English,  and  vice  versa.  Only  thus  can  the  full  force  of  idiomatic 
difference  be  perfectly  understood,  and  the  foreign  idiom  be  surely  ac- 
quired. And  it  should  never  be  forgotten  that  —  within  the  limits  of 
school  and  college  at  least  —  one  chief  end  of  the  study  of  a  foreign  lan- 
guage is  a  better  knowledge  and  mastery  of  our  own. 


CONTINUOUS  PASSAGES 

FOR  TRANSLATION  INTO  GERMAN. 


Remark. 

The  following  continuous  passages  are  added,  for  general  review. 

Other  exercises  may  easily  be  made  as  required,  by  paraphrasing  any 
text  in  hand,  and  gradually  varying  more  and  more  the  form  of  construc- 
tion, expression,  etc.,  of  the  original. 

In  order  not  to  swell  the  size  of  the  book,  and  also  because  the  student 
is  now  supposed  to  have  a  dictionary  in  hand,  these  exercises  are  not  in- 
cluded in  the  vocabularies  to  the  grammar. 


FIRST  COURSE. 

I. 

Two  boys  were  taking1  a  walk  and  came  to  a  nut-tree,  under  which  they 
found  a  nut  which  they  wished  to  divide.  The  elder  opened  it,  and  left 
the  other2  his  choice,  whether  he  would3  have  the  inside4  or  the  outside4. 
He  chose  the  outside  and  got  only  the  shell.  "  The  next  time,"5  said  he 
to  himself,  "  I  shall  be  wiser."  Then  they  came  to  a  garden  and  found  a 
ripe  peach.  "Which  will6  you  have  now?  "said  the  elder  again.  "The 
inside,"  said  the  little7  [fellow],  and  so  he  got  the  stone.  This  story  teaches 
that  experience  is  only  then  useful  when  we8  employ  it  with  judgment. 


2  dative.     3  inofire,  subjunctive.     4  inner,  ciujjet,  as  nouns. 
c  ftoUen,  use  second  pers.  sing.     7  adj.  as  noun.    8  man. 


II. 

When  the  celebrated  Franklin  was  yet  a  youth  of  eighteen  years,  he 
once  visited  a  well-known1  preacher  in  Boston.  The  latter2  received  him 
kindly,  and  as  he  was  going  away,- accompanied  him  a  short  distance3 
from  the  house.  The  door,  however,4  was  so  low  that  a  grown5  man  had 

302 


PASSAGES    FOR    TRANSLATION.  303 

to6  bend7  in  order  to  8  pass  through.  While  Franklin  was  speaking,  and 
not  noticing9  the  beam,  he  struck10  his  head  sharply  against  it.  "  Ah," 
said  the  old  [man],  "  you  are  young,  and  have  the  world  yet  before  you ; 
remember  this  accident.  Bend  when  you  should,  and  you  will  save  your- 
self11 many  a  hard  blow  in  life."12 

1  fcefcmnt  2  demons,  pron.  3  Strecfe.  *  aber.  *  ertoacfifen.  °  tniiffen.  7  reflexive. 
8  inn  ...  511.  9  verb-tense  :  9td)t  gebeit  aitf.  10  ftofjeit.  u  dative.  12  article. 

III. 

One  day,1  as  an  ass  laden  with  salt  was  passing2  through  a  stream,  he 
stumbled  and  fell  into  the  water.  After  he  had  risen3  and  gone  a  little 
way,  he  felt  that  his  burden  became  lighter ;  for  a  great  part  of  the  salt  had 
melted.  "  So,"4  thought  he  —  for  he  was  only  an  ass  —  whenever5  I  go 
through  the  water,  I  will  lie  down." 

The  next  day,6  laden  with  sponges  which  his  master  was  carrying  to 
market,7  he  came  to  the  same  stream.  Thinking8  himself  now  very  vise, 
he  let  himself  purposely  down  into  the  water,  as9  he  had  resolved.  When 
he  tried  to  rise,  the  sponges  had  become  so  heavy  that  he  could10  not,  and 
so  the  poor  ass  was  drowned. 

1  Indef.  time.  2  geljen.  3  aufftefien  (omit  auxiliary).  *  2tCfo.  5  indefinite.  6  definite 
time.  7  article.  8  As  he,  etc.,  reason.  9  manner.  10  (it). 

IV. 

Diogenes,  one  of  the  seven  wise  men1  of  Greece,  lived  in  a  tub.  King 
Alexander  the  Great,  who  had  heard-tell2  much  of  him,  thought  it  worth 
the  trouble3  to  visit  the  philosopher.  When  the  latter4  saw  the  king,  with 
his  splendid  retinue,  coming5  up  to  him,  he  was  lying  in  his  tub,  and 
warming6  himself  in  the  sun.  Instead  of  rising7  and  greeting  the  king,  he 
remained  lying7  still.  After  the  king  had  looked  at  him  a  while,  he  said: 
"I  see,  Diogenes,  you  seem  to  be  very  poor;  is  there8  any  petition  you 
would  like9  to  make  to  me  ?  If  it10  is  possible,  it11  shall  be  granted  you." 
"  I  do  not  want  anything,"  replied  the  sage ;  "but  if  you  will12  do  me  a  fa- 
vor, step  a  little  out  of  mylB  sun." 

1  Adj.  noun.  2  fcigeu  I)0rert.  8  genitive.  4  dem.  pron.  6  infinitive.  6  verb-tense;  add 
eben.  7  infinitive.  8  gtbt  e£.  9  mogen.  10  impersonal.  n  demonstrative.  12  ItJoEen. 
13  dative  pron. 

V. 

Baron1  Miinchausen  relates  the  following2  story ;  One  evening,  as  I  was 
riding  in  deepest  winter  towards  a  little  village  in  Russia,  darkness  over- 
took me.  Nowhere  was  a  house  to  be  seen.3  The  whole  road  lay  buried 
under  a  deep  snow.  Tired  of  riding,4  I  at  last  dismounted  and  tied  my 


304  PASSAGES    FOR    TRANSLATION. 

horse  to5  a  post  which  stuck  out  of  the  snow.  Then  I  laid  myself  down, 
and  slept  till  it  was  bright  day. 

When  I  awoke,  I  was  lying  on  the  ground,  but  I  could  nowhere  find  my 
horse.  At  last  I  heard  him  neighing6  above  me,  and  then  I  discovered  that 
he  was  hanging  to5  the  church-steeple.  The  snow  had  melted  during  the 
night,  and  what  I  had  taken  for  a  post  was  the  steeple  one  hundred  feet 
high.7  I  took  a  pistol,  shot  through  the  halter,  and  brought  the  horse  down. 
Then  I  continued  my  journey,  without  stopping8  longer  in  the  village. 

1  Article.  2  no  article.  3  idiom.  4  infin.  noun.  5  an  —  case?  6  infinitive. 
7  attributive.  8  fid)  CWffjdUen,  infin. 

VI. 

A  blind  man,  who  possessed  a  large  sum  of  money,  determined,1  for 
fear  of  being2  robbed,  to  hide  his  money  where  no  one  could3  find  it.  Ac- 
cordingly he  went  by4  night  into  his  garden  and  buried  it  in  the  neighbor- 
hood of  a  large  tree.  But  one  of  his  neighbors  had  watched  him  at5  his 
work,  and  the  next  night  he  dug  up6  the  hidden  treasure  and  carried  it  off.7 
The  blind  man  soon  missed  his  money,  and  at  once  conceived8  suspicion 
against  this  neighbor. 

One  evening,  as  they  were  talking  together,  he  told  him9  confidentiall} 
what  a  sly  plan  he  had  adopted  to10  keep  his  money,  and  asked  him  whether 
he  would  advise  him  to  bury  a  second  sum  in  the  same  place.  The 
neighbor,  greedy  to  get  a  still  larger  sum,  told  him  he  could3  do  nothing 
better  with  it ;  and  the  same  night  he  brought  back  what  he  had  already 
stolen,  that11  the  blind  man  might  not  miss  it.  Thus  the  blind  man  suc- 
ceeded12 in  recovering13  his  money,  and  the  other,  instead  of  getting  all, 
lost  all. 

1  au§.  2  infinitive.  3  indirect  (as  he  thought).  *  in  the.  5  bei.  *.  Ijerau§.  7  ba»011. 
8  faffett.  9  demonst.  10  Uttt . .  JU.  n  bamtt.  12  impersonal  with  dat.  l3  infinitive. 

VII. 

When  the  celebrated  Wallenstein  was  a  student  at1  the  University  of2 
Altorf,  he  was  always  the  first  in  the  wild  tricks  of  the  students.  Just  at 
this3  time  a  new  career  was  built.  The  rector  of  the  university,  desiring4 
that  it  might5  remain  long  unoccupied,  declared  that  the  prison  should6  be 
named  after  him  who  should6  first7  come6  into  it  as  [a]  prisoner.  For  fear 
of  such  a  disgrace,  the  students  were  restrained9  for  a  long  time,  and  the 
career  remained  empty. 

At  last,  however,  Wallenstein  was  condemned  to  this  punishment.  He 
had  a  favorite  dog  that  followed  him10  everywhere ;  and  as  he  was  about11 
to  be  shut  in,  he  begged  (for)  permission  to  take  his  dog  in12  with  [him]. 


PASSAGES    FOR    TRANSLATION.  305 

This  was  granted,  whereupon  Wallenstein  suddenly  seized  the  dog  and 
pushed  him13  in  before  him.14  So  the  career  was  called  the  Dog,  and  thus 
this  future  general  practiced  in  his  youth  the  art  of  outwitting15  his  ene- 
mies. 

1  Ctilf.  2  ju,  or  omit.  3  At  (511)  just  this  time.  4  adv.  clause.  5  subjunctive.  6  note 
different  uses  of  should.  7  juerft.  8  perf.  part,  as  noun.  9  sitriicfljalten.  10  case?  n  tm 
SBegrtff  Jll.  12  Ijtneitt.  13  demonst.  u  reflex.  15  infinitive. 

VIII. 

In  a  certain  town  [there]  lived  three  brothers.  They  heard  [it]  said1  one 
day  that  the  king  of  another  country  had2  a  daughter  who  was  in  the  power 
of  a  magician  with  seven  heads,  and  that  the  king  had  said  he  would  give 
her  for3  a  wife  to  any  one4  who  could  bring  her  back  to  him.  They  all5 
wished  to  try  to  deliver  her,  and  set  out  together;  but  finally  they  had  to6 
separate,  and  then  each  one  tried  alone  to  find  the  magician's  castle.  After 
many  days  two  of  the  brothers  became  tired  and  went  home  again  without 
having7  heard  anything  more;  but  the  third  found  the  castle,  stepped  in,8 
and  there  was  the  king's  daughter  sitting9  all  alone. 

She  told  him  that  the  magician  would  certainly  return  soon,  and  that 
he  would  kill  and  eat  him  if  he  could.10  And  in  [a]  short  time  came  the 
magician  and  tried  at  once  to  kill  the  young  man  with  his  sword;  but  he11 
defended  himself  well  and  cut  off  six  of  the  magician's  heads.  Then  the 
magician  begged  for  a  moment's12  rest,  and  at  once  all  his  heads  came  back 
to  him.  But  the  young  man  did  not  lose  courage,  and  finally  succeeded18 
in  cutting14  off  all  his15  heads.  Then  the  magician  was  really  dead,  and 
the  princess  went  back  to  her  father's  palace  with  the  young  man. 

1  infinitive.  2  following  clauses  all  indirect.  3  Jltr.  *  that  one.  5  they  wished  all. 
6  tntiffett.  7  infinitive.  8  compound.  9  tense.  10  [itj,  subjunctive.  u  this  (one)  however. 
12  accusative.  13  impers.  14  infin.  15  dem.  pronoun. 

IX. 

There  was  once  a  king  who  had  three  sons,  but  he  was  blind,  and 
though  he  consulted  all  the1  physicians  that  came  to  that  country,  no  one 
had  been2  able  to  cure  him.  One  day  there  came  one  who  said:  "There 
is  no  remedy  that  can  cure  the  king  except  the  water  from  the  fountain  in 
the  garden  of  Queen  Angelica."  "  I  will  go  to  seek  it,"  said  the  eldest  son. 
He  started  and  searched  [for]  a  long  time,  but  without  finding  any  one 
who  could3  tell  him  where  this  fountain  was.3  After  a  year  had  passed 
without  news  of  him,  the  second  son  said  he  would  go  and  get  the  water, 
and  also  bring  back  his  brother.  He  too  searched  in  vain;  he  could 
neither  find  his  brother  nor  hear  anything  about  the  queen. 


3O6  PASSAGES    FOR    TRANSLATION. 

At  last  the  king's  youngest  son  said  he  would3  try  to  find  his  brothers, 
and  get  the  water  which  would3  cure  his  father.  The  king  was  unwilling 
to  let4  him  go,  but  finally  consented;  and  the  prince  was  told5  in  a  dream 
where  he  should8  seek  the  queen's  garden  with  the  fountain,  and  also  how, 
with  the  aid  of  the  same  water,  he  could3  find  his  two  brothers.  He  found 
the  garden  and  the  enchanted  fountain,  took  as  much  of  the  water  as  he 
could  carry,  then  easily  found  (he)  his  brothers  and  went  back  with  them 
to  the  palace;  and  the  water6  he  brought  did7  indeed  cure  the  king,  as8 
the  physician  had  said. 

1  omit.  2  idiom.  3  indirect.  4  fleljen  Icxffett.  5  impersonal  passive.  G  relative  pron. 
verb-tense.  8  fine. 

X. 

There  was  once  a  king's  daughter  who  bad  fallen  in  love1  with  a  poor 
young  man,  and  since  her  father  would  not  consent2  to  her  marrying  him, 
they  were  married  secretly.  When  the  king  found  it  out,  he  drove  her 
away  from  the  palace,  and  the  two  fled  into  a  forest  and  lived  there  for 
many  years.  The  husband  used  to  go3  hunting4  daily  to5  get  something 
to5  eat,  and  one  day  he  saw  on  a  tree  a  large  black  bird6  he  did  not  re- 
member having7  ever  seen  before.  He  tried  to  kill  it,  and  immediately  it 
changed8  into  a  magician  with  seven  heads,  who  came  down  and  began 
to  fight  with  him,  soon  killed  him  and  then  disappeared.  Now  this  man 
had  a  son,  who,  having9  heard  from  his  mother  how  his  father  had10  been 
killed,  wished,  if11  possible,  to  avenge  his12  death.  He  lived  there  till  he 
was  twenty  years  old  without  seeing  the  magician,  and  began  to  believe 
he  never  should13  see  him. 

But  one  day,  when  he  was  sitting  under  the  same  tree,  he  saw  the  black 
bird  flying14  through  the  air,  and  soon  the  magician  stood  before  him  and 
said:  "I  killed15  your  father,  and  now  I  will  kill  you  too."  Hardly  had 
the  magician  said  these  words  when  a  lion  appeared  and  attacked  him  and 
quickly  killed  him.  Then  the  lion  changed  into  a  beautiful  lady,  who  told 
the  young  man  that  she  was16  a  fairy,  and  that  the  magician  had16  been 
her  greatest  enemy,  and  that  it  was16  only  possible  for  her17  to  overcome 
him  under  that  tree,  where  he  never  came16  when  he  thought  she  could16 
be  there.  And  because  this  young  man  was  the  cause  of  the  magician's 
coming18  there,  she  was  always  friendly  to  him  afterwards,  and  helped 
him19  to  become  king  of  that  country  when  the  old  king  died.20 


(ace  .).  2  (to  it)  that.  3  verb-tense.  4  cutf  bte  SflG^-  6  note  difference. 
6  relative.  7  infinitive.  8  reflex.  9  clause  :  when  he  had,  etc.  10  omit  auxil.  n  luo. 
12  demonst.  13  conditional.  14  infin.  15  tense  ?  1G  indirect.  17  dative,  or  clause,  that  she. 
etc.  18  clause,  thereof  that  the  m.  had  come,  etc.  19  case.  20  was  dead. 


ALPHABETICAL  VERB   LIST. 


THE  following  list  contains  all  verbs  which  depart  from  the  regular 
(weak)  conjugation: 

For  convenience  of  learning  and  of  reference  the  verbs  are  arranged  in 

synoptical  form,  in  a  table  containing  all  standard  or  usual  forms; 

except  that  single  weak  forms  are  not  given  when  included  in  a  foot-note 
(as  in  bacfen,  etc.).  Forms  antiquated,  or  now  incorrect,  are  included  in 
[  ].  Forms  still  in  use,  but  not  commended,  are  included  in  (  ).  When 
two  forms  are  given  without  further  indication,  the  more  usual  is  in  ge- 
neral placed  first*  Quantity  is  marked  only  in  special  or  doubtful  cases. 
The  §  refers  to  the  section  of  the  grammar  in  which  the  verb,  or  class,  in 
question  is  treated.  Special  remarks  are  added  in  foot-notes. 

The  principal  parts  are  printed  in  full-faced  type.  Along  with  the 
infinitive  is  given  the  most  usual  English  meaning,  which  when  COGNATE 
is  printed  in  small  caps. 

To  show  the  relation  of  vowels,  the  present  and  imperative  are  placed 
next  after  the  infinitive,  and  the  preterit  subjunctive  after  the  preterit  or 
past  indicative.  When  these  forms  are  not  given  they  are  regular;  that 
is,  the  present  and  imperative  as  in  weak  verbs ;  the  pret.  subj.  from  the 
pret.  indie.,  according  to  the  usual  rule. 

Compound  verbs  are  given  only  when  the  primitives  are  not  in  use. 

REMARKS.  —  The  following  remarks  are  prefixed  for  convenient  refer- 
ence: 

1.  In  verbs  with  root  C,  and  some  with  t,  having  past  a,  another  form 
of  the  past  subjunctive  in  of  sometimes  it,  is  often  preferred,  to  distinguish 
more  clearly  in  sound  from  the  present  indicative;   as  before,  fcegbnne, 
fjiilfe  —  often  from  earlier  forms  of  past  indicative. 

2.  Verbs  with  sibilant  stems,  f,  fj,  fd),  %,   often  contract  the  2d  pers. 
sing.  pres.  indie.,  both  in  sound  and  spelling,  so  as  to  be  identical  with 
3d  pers.,  as:  bit  fjeifjejt,  or  fjeifet;  er  I)etJ3t;  bit  toafdjeft,  or  ttmftfjt;  er  toafcfjt, 
etc. 

3.  An  old  2d,  3d  pers.  sing.  pres.  ind.  and  2d  sing,  imper.  in  ett  occurs 
(chiefly  in  poetry)  in  some  verbs  with  ie  roots:    Megen,   Meten,   fliegen, 
fltefjen,  fliefeen,  gemefien,  gtefcen,  Irtedjen,  etc.,  as:  beugfr,  fceugt;  fieug;  2d,  3d 
pres.  fteufjt  (Rem.  2),  impv.  fleu|3,  etc. 

4.  Often  in  impv.  e  is  dropped  when   there  is   no   vowel-change,  as: 
ife,  lauf,  etc. ;  but  no  rule  can  be  given. 

307 


3o8 


ALPHABETICAL    VERB    LIST. 


INFIN. 

2,  3  SING.  PR. 

2  SING. 
IMPV. 

P.    INDIC. 

P.  SUBJ. 

P.  PART. 

§§ 

burfeit,1 

2.  Bficfft 

bit! 

gcborfen 

249 

BAKE 

3.  bdcft 

-baren 

jr<?  gebdren 

bcfcljlcii, 

2.  befiefilft 

bepe^ 

I)cfnl)l 

before 

bcfol)lcu 

232 

command 

3.  befief)lt 

befafile 

bcf(cif?CH, 

2.  befletfeeft 

beflir 

.... 

bcfitffcn 

246 

apply 

<??-  befleifet 

begimten,2 

.... 

.... 

begann 

begonne 

begonnen 

232 

BEGIN 

begdnne 

beifeen, 

2.  betfeeft 

.... 

bti; 

.... 

gcbiffen 

246 

BITE 

<?r  beifet 

beaen,8 

2.  [bittft] 

Lbtaj 

[boKj 

.... 

[geboffcn] 

242 

bark 

3.  Lbtttt] 

bergeit, 

2.  birgft 

btrg 

barg 

biirge 

geborgcn 

232 

hide 

3.  btrgt 

[bergej 

barge 

berften,4 

2.  btrft(eft) 

birft 

barft 

bbrfte 

gcborftcn 

232 

BURST 

3.  birft 

borft 

bdrjte 

betocgen,5 



bcwog 



bettogen 

242^ 

induce 

biegen,6 

.... 

.... 

bog 

.... 

gcbogcn 

241 

bend 

bieten,7 



bot 

.... 

geboten 

241 

offer 

bittben, 

.... 

banb 

gebunben     . 

231 

BIND 

bitten, 

.... 

.... 

bat 

.... 

gebetcn 

243 

ask 

blafen,8 

2.  blof(ef)t 

bltc.5 

.... 

gcblnfeit 

248 

blow 

3.  blajt 

blcibcu, 



blieb 



gcblicbett 

247 

remain 

i.  Also  weak,  except  in  past  participle.        2.  Old  forms  in  past,  begonrt,  begimnte. 
3.  Now  weak.    Old  forms,  as  above,  now  obsolete.        4.  Also  weak  throughout. 

5.  Weak,  except  in  this  sense.  ' 

6.  Old  (poetic)  forms,  pres.  and  impv.  foeugft,  beiigt,  fceug. 

7.  Old  (poetic)  pres.  and  impv.  beutft,  beut.  belli. 

8.  Rarely  also  weak  in  present. 


ALPHABETICAL   VERB    LIST. 


309 


INFIN. 

2,  3  SING.   PR. 

2.  SING. 
IMPV. 

P.   INDIC. 

P.  SUBJ. 

P.   PART. 

§§ 

blctrfjcu,1 

.... 

b(trf) 

.... 

geblirfjett 

246 

BLEACH 

fcrateu,2 

2.  Bratft 

Iirict 

.... 

gebraten 

248 

roast 

3.  brat 

firemen, 

2.  brtdjft 

6rtc^ 

liriid) 

.... 

flelirurfjcit 

232 

BREAK 

3.  brtrfjt 

[bred)e] 

firettnen, 





branittc 

&renrt(e)te 

gebrannt 

254 

BURN 

brtitflcu, 

.... 

&racf)te 

bra'd)te 

;]cbratl)t 

254 

BRING 

-beiljen 

see  gebeifjen 

bettfeit, 





iinrfjtc 

bac^te 

gebac^t 

254 

THINK 

-berben 

s.  t>erberf>en 

butgen,3 

.... 

bung 

.... 

gebungeu 

2310 

hire 

bang 

brefdjett,4 

2.  brifd)(ef)t 

brifc^ 

brofd) 

brofcfje 

gebrofd^en 

242 

THRESH 

3.  brtfc^t 

brafd) 

brafiije 

-brte|cn 

j.  berbriefeen 

bringen, 





brang 



gebrungen 

231 

press 

biirfen, 

Pr.  barf, 

.... 

burftc 

biirftc 

geburft 

261 

may 

barfft,  barf  ; 

biirfen,  etc. 

emjjfetjlett, 

see  &efef)[en 

recommend 

effett, 

2.  iffeft,  tfet 

i& 

9 

.... 

gegeffcn 

243* 

EAT 

3.  ijjt 

teffe] 

fallen, 

2.  fa^rft 

.... 

fu^r 

.... 

gcfa^rcn 

249 

go 

3.  fafirt 

fatten, 

2.  fattft 

fiet 

gefaUen 

248 

FALL 

3.  fattt 

1 

1.  Also  weak,  intrans.     As  trans,  always  weak. 

2.  Also  weak,  except  in  p.  part. 

3.  Also  weak  — usual'y  in  p.  indie,  and  now  always  in  p.  subj. 

4.  Also  weak. 


310 


ALPHABETICAL    VERB    LIST. 


INFIN. 

2,  3  SING.  PR. 

2  SING. 
IMPV. 

P.   INDIC. 

P.  SUBJ. 

P.   PART. 

§§ 

fatten,1 

.... 

.... 

.... 

gefaltcn 

FOLD 

fatten, 

2.  fangft 

.... 

ftUfl 

(fienge) 

gefangctt 

248 

catch 

3,  fangt 

(fteng) 

feif)ten,2 

2.  ftrf)t(e)ft 

« 

f»«t 

.... 

gefod^tctt 

242 

FIGHT 

3.  ftcfit 

-fefilett3 

see  befefjlen 

ftttben, 





fanb 



gcfunbett 

231 

FIND 

Mten,4 

2.  fKrf)t(e)ft 

fltdjt 

fiori)t 

.... 

l]cftotI)tCH 

242 

braid 

3.  flidjt 

-ffeifjett 

see  befletfeen 

fKcgCtt,5 

.... 



f(o0 



gefJogen 

241 

FLY 

fUe^en,6 

M 



gcflo^en 

241 

•    FLEE 

fHefteit,* 

2.  fliefeeft 

W 

.... 

gcftojfctt 

241 

flow 

or  fliefet 

fragcn,8 

2.  [froflft] 

[frufl] 

[fruge] 

.... 

249 

ask 

3.  Ifragt] 

freffen, 

2.  friffcft 

frit 

frafe 



gefreffcn 

243 

eat 

or  frtfet 

[freffel 

3.  frifet 

frierett, 

.... 

fror 

gefrorcn 

241 

FREEZE 

garett,9 





gor 



gegoren 

242 

Jerment 

getwren,10 

2.  ge&terft 

gebier 

gcbar 



gcOorcn 

232^ 

BEAR 

3.  gebiert 

i.  Weak,  except  p.  part,  qefaltett,  as  adj.        2    Also  weak,  except  in  p.  part.     See  4. 

3.  Occurs  only  in  befeftlert,  emt>fef)(eit ;  feljten,  to  fail,  is  weak. 

4.  Also  weak,  except  in  p.  part.     In  2.  pres.  also  fltcfjft ;  and  in  fedjtett,  ftrfjfi. 

5.  Old  (poetic)  forms,  pres.  and  impv.  fleugft,  fleugt,  fleitg. 

6.  Old  (poetic)  forms,  pres.  and  impv.  fleutf)ft,  fleiltf)t,  fleitcf). 

7.  Old  (poetic)  forms,  pres.  and  impv.  fleilfet,  ftetifc. 

8.  Weak,  except  (rarely)  as  above. 

9.  Also  weak.     Spelled  also  gtifirett,  etc. 

10.  Sometimes  weak  in  pres.  and  impv.     Old  fleberett. 


ALPHABETICAL    VERB    LIST. 


INFIN. 

2,  3  SING.  PR. 

2  SING. 

IMPV. 

P.  INDIC. 

P.  SUBJ. 

P.   PART. 

geben, 

2.  flifcft 

gi5 

0a& 

gegeben 

243 

GIVE 

(girfft) 

3.  gi6t(gte6t) 

(giefc) 

gebeifjett, 

.... 

.... 

gcbie^ 

gebtetyen 

247 

thrive 

gef)ett, 

.... 

.... 

fitng 

[gienge] 

gcgangen 

248 

GO 

[flicng] 

(note). 

geltttgen, 

.... 

.... 

gclang 

gelungen 

23I 

succeed 

gelten, 

2.  fliltft 

gitt 

gatt 

gblte,  galte 

gegoitcn 

232 

be  worth 

3.  gilt 

[gelte] 

[gulte] 

genefett, 

gena3 

genefen 

243 

get  -well 

geniefjett,1 

.... 

gen5^ 

gcnoffen 

241 

enjoy 

gefdfcljett, 

3.  gef^ie^t 

gefc^a^ 

gef^c^ett 

243 

happen 

getwmten, 

gemann 

geiobnne 

gciuoitucn 

232 

WIN 

getodnne 

-geffeit 

s.  bergeffen 

giefceit,2 

.... 

m 

gegojfen 

241 

pour 

-gtmten 

s.  fceginnen 

gleidjett,3 

gli^ 

.... 

geglidjett 

246 

be  LIKE 

glei^ett,4 

m 

.... 

gcgltffcn 

246 

glitter 

glettett,5 

gKtt 

.... 

gcgtittctt 

246 

GLIDE 

glimmett,6 



glomnt 

.... 

gegtommen 

242 

GLEAM 

gra&ett, 

2.  grafift 

grub 

gcgraften 

249 

dig 

3.  grafct 

1.  Old  (poetic)  forms,  pres.  and  impv.  getteilfet, 

2.  Old  (poetic)  forms,  pres.  and  impv.  geiljjt,  geilf}. 

3.  When  trans,  to  liken,  usually  weak  ;  but  not  in  compds.,  as  Uergletdjen,  etc. 

4.  Usually  weak.        5.  Often  weak.        6.  Sometimes  weak. 


312 


ALPHABETICAL    VERB    LIST. 


INFIN. 

2,  3  SING.  PR. 

2  SING. 
IMPV. 

P.  INDIC. 

P.  SUBJ. 

P.  PART. 

§§ 

grcifcn, 

gtiff 

gegriffcn 

246 

seize 

tjafcen, 

2.  pft 

.... 

fatte 

Ijcittc 

rtdjnbt 

2$6a 

HAVE 

3.  pt 

fatten,1 

2.  pltft 

Ijiclt 

geljalten 

248 

HOLD 

3.  pit 

fjangen,2 

2.  pngft 

lling 

(flienge) 

gefangen 

248 

HANG 

3.  pngt 

(tiieng) 

f)auen,3 

l)icb 

gclmucii 

248 

HEW 

Ijebcu, 

.... 

.... 

l)ob 

pbe 

gcijolicn 

242^ 

lift 

^ub 

tjbbe 

conceal 

faifeen, 

2.  fietfeeft 

.... 

litcf? 

.... 

ge^ci^en 

248 

be  named 

or  Ijetfet 

^etfen, 

2.  I)iWt 

^ilf 

fatf 

plfe 

getiotfen 

232 

HELP 

3.  Ijilft 

[We] 

plfe 

teifen,5 

.... 

Rf 

gefiffen 

246 

scold 

fciuicn. 

tllHlttC 

Ienn(e)te 

gefannt 

254 

know 

• 

fiefen,0 

choose 

tlemmen,7 

flumm 

geHommen 

242 

press 

Ilieben,8 

flub 

flcflobeit 

241 

CLEAVE 

tlimmen,9 

flomni 

geflommen 

242 

climb 

Hingen,10 

flang 

[fliinge] 

gcflungcn 

231 

sound 

1.  Impv.  Ijalt !  as  interj.  halt. 

2.  Sometimes  written  Jjaitfjett.      Sometimes  also  weak  pres.  to  dist.  fr.  weak  trans, 
fjdttgen.        3.  Rarely  weak.        4.  Weak,  except  in  p.  part.  t>erf)0fjleit,  as  adj.  or  adv. 

5.  Usually  weak.        6.  Now  regularly  weak  ;  see  fiiten.        7.  Usually  weak. 

8.  Also  weak.        9.  Often  weak.        10.  Sometimes  weak  in  sense  of  resound  (l&ud). 


ALPHABETICAL    VERB    LIST. 


313 


INFIN. 

2,  3  SING.  PR. 

2  SING. 
IMPV. 

P.  INDIC. 

P.  SUBJ. 

P.  PART. 

§§ 

fneifen,1 

.... 

Jniff 

.... 

gefniffen 

246 

pinch 

fommen,2 

2.  (fbmtnft) 

fain 

gefommen 

232* 

COME 

3.  (fommt) 

tomtcit, 

Pr.  fann, 

foiintc 

lonnte 

gcfouut 

261 

CAN 

larinft,  fann  ; 

fbnnen,  etc. 

fretfdjen,3 

.... 

[frifd)] 

[gefrtfc^en] 

246 

scream 

frierfjen,4 

.... 

frori) 

gcfrodjcn 

241 

creep 

fiirett,5 



for 



geforen 

2420 

CHOOSE 

laben,6 

2.  labft. 

Int. 

gefaben 

249 

LOAD 

3.  labt 

laffen, 

2.  laffeft,lafet 

lafc 

lief? 

gctaffcn 

248 

LET 

3.  lafet 

laffe 

laufen, 

2.  laufft 

.... 

lief 

gclaufctt 

248 

run 

3.  lauft. 

leiben,7 

.... 

Htt 

.... 

gelitten 

246 

suffer 

lei^ett, 

.... 

.... 

lid) 

.... 

gelic^ew 

247 

lend 

lefen, 

2.  Iief(ef)t 

Iie§ 

lacs 

.... 

gelefeit 

243 

read 

3.  Heft 

[lefe] 

liegen, 

tag 



gclcgen 

243 

LIE 

-Uerett 

see  berlteren 

-Itttgen 

see  gelingen 

lijf^cn,8 

2.  Hfcf)(ef)t 

Hfcf) 

l«W 

ge(ofc(|cn 

2420 

go  Olit 

3.  Iifc|t 

(fire) 

1.  Also  weak.    The  form  fneifen  is  regularly  weak. 

2.  The  o  forms  in  pres.  are  now  rarely  used.        3.  Now  regularly  weak. 

4.  Old  (poetic)  forms,  pres.  and  impv.  freiicfjft,  freucfjt,  freitcf). 

5.  From  old  ftefett ;  also  weak. 

6.  Often  weak  in  pres.,  more  rarely  in  past.  So  also  Icibett,  to  invite,  which  was  origin- 
ally weak.        7.  As  trans,  to  hurt,  and  in  derivs.  betleibeit,  etc.,  weak. 

8.  Also  weak,  especially  when  trans,  to  put  out;  also  in  p.  subj.,  to  dist.  from  pres.  indie. 


ALPHABETICAL    VERB    LIST. 


INFIN. 

2,  3  SING.  PR. 

2  SING. 
IMPV. 

P.  INDIC. 

P.  SUBJ. 

P.  PART. 

§§ 

ttigen,1 

.... 

log 

.... 

gelogcn 

242 

LIE 

mafjiett,2 



[mufjl] 



rtcmnljleu 

grind 

meibenf 

mieb 

gemieben 

247 

shun 

melfen,3 

2.  ntilfft 

mil! 

mulf 

.... 

flcmolteu 

242 

MILK 

3.  milft 

meffett, 

2.  miff  eft 

mife 

ma^ 

gemejfcn 

243 

measure 

or  tnt&t 

[meffe] 

3.  mifet 

mtfjlillflcn 

see  gelingen 

mogen, 

Pr.  mag, 

[mbg] 

moriitc 

mbcfyte 

flcmurt)t 

261 

MAY 

magft,  mag  ; 

mbgen,  etc. 

miiffen, 

Pr.  mitfe, 

mu^tc 

miifete 

flemu^t 

261 

MUST 

mufet,  mufe  ; 

miiffen,  etc. 

itctpncu, 

2.  nimmft 

nimm 

H  nil  m 

.... 

ncnommcn 

232^" 

take 

3.  nimmt 

[netjme] 

ncuitcH, 

.... 

nannte 

ncnn(e)tc 

genannt 

254 

NAME 

-nefen 

see  genefen 

-niefjen 

see  geniefeen 

pfeifen 

Wff 

gepfiffen 

246 

•whistle 

pflegen,4 

^flog 

gcpflogen 

"2.\2b 

cherish 

[pftttfl] 

pretfett,5 

2.  preif(cf)t 

.... 

prtc^ 

geprtcfen 

247 

PRAISE 

3.  preift 

queflett,6 

2.  quittft 

quitt 

quod 

gequotten 

242 

gush  out 

3.  quittt 

1.  Old  Itegen  ;  hence,  poetic  forms,  pres.  and  impv.  leitgft,  leugt,  teug. 

2.  Now  regularly  weak,  except  in  perf.  part. 

3.  Now  usually  weak  throughout. 

4.  Usually  weak  ;  now  always,  except  in  this  sense. 

5.  Originally  weak  ;  now  very  rarely  so.        6.  As  trans,  to  soak,  weak. 


ALPHABETICAL    VERB    LIST. 


315 


INFIN. 

2,  3  SING.  PR. 

2  SING. 
IMPV. 

P.   INDIC. 

P.  SUBJ. 

P.   PART. 

§§ 

radjen,1 

[rodi] 

(gerodjen) 

241 

avenge 

raten,2 

2.  ratft 

rict 

getaten 

248 

advise 

3.  rat 

retben, 



ricb 

ncrtcbcu 

247 

RUB 

retften, 



rife 

gcrijfen 

246 

tear 

reiten, 



rttt 

geritten 

246 

RIDE 

remten,3 

....* 

ratutte 

renn(e)te 

gerannt 

254 

RUN 

rierfjen,4 



rod) 

gcro^en 

241 

smell 

riitgen,5 

.... 

rang 

[riinge] 

gcrungcn 

231 

wrestle 

[rung] 

rimtett, 



rann 

rbnne 

geronnen 

232 

flow 

rcinne 

rufefl,6 

.... 

rief 

gctufen 

24& 

call 

faijen,' 

•    — 

gcfat$ctt 

248 

SALT 

faufen,8 

2.  faufft 

foff 

gefoffeti 

242 

drink 

3.  fauft 

fattgen,9 

fog 

gcfogen 

242 

SUCK 

fdjaffett," 

fW 

gcf^affen 

249^ 

create 

frfjaflen,11 

frijoll 

.... 

gcft^otten 

242^ 

sound 

1.  Now  regularly  weak,  except  (rarely)  ia  p.  part. 

2.  Sometimes  weak  pres.,  rateft,  ratet. 

3.  Sometimes  weak  ;  so  always  in  trans,  to  melt  (iron,  etc.). 

4.  See  rtidjett.     Old  (poetic)  forms,  pres.  and  impv.  reildjft,  reudjt,  teildj. 

5.  The  trans,  riltgett  (Sling)  is  weak  ;  except,  occasionally,  umrcmg,  umrungett. 

6.  Weak  forms  rarely.        7.  Weak,  except  in  perf.  part.        8.  Also  weak  in  pres. 

9.  Also  weak  ;  trans,  fdugett,  to  suckle,  always  weak.         10.  Strong  only  in  this  sense. 
ii.  Now  usually  weak. 


316 


ALPHABETICAL    VERB    LIST. 


INFIN. 

2,  3  SING.  PR. 

2  SING. 
1MPV. 

P.  INDIC. 

P.  SUBJ. 

P.  PART. 

§§ 

-fd)eJ>en 

s.  gefd>ef)en 

fdjeiben, 

.  .'.  . 

friiicii 

gefdjieben 

247 

part 

fdjcttten, 



frtiicu 

gefdftctten 

247 

seem 

fdjeltett, 

2.  fd)iltft 

f*ilt 

fc^alt 

fd)bltc 

gef^ottcn 

232 

SCOLD 

3.  fd)ilt 

[Welte] 

fc^alle 

fdjeren,* 

2.  fdjterft 

fester 

fdjor 

.... 

gefc^orcn 

242 

SHEAR 

3.  fd)iert 

frijicbcii, 



fctioU 

gcfrijobcii 

241 

SHOVE 

f«en,s 

2.  fcf)tefeeft 

Wft 

geft^offctt 

241 

SHOOT 

or  fdjtefet 

fetyittben,8 

.... 

.... 

irljuub 

[fc^dnbe] 

gefdjttnben 

2310 

flay 

[fdjanb] 

frf)lflfenf 

2.  f^Iafft 

.... 

f^Ucf 

gcft^lofcn 

248 

SLEEP 

3.  frfjlaft 

frfltogen, 

2.  ft^ISflft 

ft^Iug 

gcft^tagett 

249 

strike 

3.  falagt 

fdjleirijcH, 

fdjltdj 

gcf^Udjcn 

246 

creep 

ftfleifett,* 

WKff 

gcf^Iiffcn 

246 

whet 

fdjleifjen, 

2.  fc^letfeeft 

.... 

W«6 

.... 

geftpffen 

246 

SLIT 

^r  fc^Ieifet 

ftytefen,5 

f^toff 

gcf^toffcn 

241 

SLIP 

fd)Uef?en,« 

2.  fc^IieBeft 

.... 

f«»6 

.... 

gcfc^Ioffeu 

241 

shut 

i?^  frfjIteBt 

fdjlittgett, 





ft^Iang 

gef^hmgcn 

231 

SLING 

1.  Often  weak,  except  in  p.  part. 

2.  Old  (poetic)  forms,  pres.  and  impv.  fcfjeilfct, 

3.  Weak  rarely,  except  in  perf.  part. 

4.  Often  weak,  in  sense  of  glide  ;  always  as  intrans.  to  drag. 

5.  Old  (poetic)  forms  in  pres.  and  impv.  fcf)leitfft,  fdjleilft,  fdjleilf. 

6.  Old  (poetic)  forms  in  pres.  and  impv.  fdjleitfjt,  fcf)(eujj. 


ALPHABETICAL    VERB    LIST. 


317 


INFIN. 

2,  3  SING.  PR. 

2  SING. 

IMPV. 

P.  INDIC. 

P.  SUBJ. 

P.  PART. 

§§ 

ftfimeifeen, 

fdjmt^ 

gcftfjmiffett 

246 

dash 

fdjmelsen,1 

2.id)tnil5(ef)t 

fctymols 

.... 

9efcf)mol5en 

242 

MELT 

3.  fdjmiljt 

fdjtttuifcett  2 

s.  fdjniefien 

frfjnetben, 

frijtittt 

gefd)uitten 

242 

cut 

frfjneteit,8 



[fd)nte] 

[gefd)nte(e)n] 

246 

SNOW 

frfltttefcett,4 



.... 

frijitob 

gcf^noften 

242 

SNORT 

fefjraufcen,5 

.... 

.... 

f^roft 

gcfrfjrobett 

242 

SCREW 

fcfyrerfen,6 

2.  fdjricfft 

fd)ricf 

jrfjraf 

gefrfjrorfeit 

232 

be  afraid 

3.  fdjricft 

fdjreifeett, 

fdjrieb 

gef^riebcn 

247 

write 

fdjreien, 

f^rie 

gcft^ricen 

247 

cry 

fdjrettett, 

.... 

ftf)ritt 

.... 

gefdjritten 

246 

stride 

fdjrtnben, 

(obsolete) 

friiruub 

fd)tiinbe 

gef^ritttbeu 

231 

crack 

frfjrnuti 

frfjroten,7 

.... 

.... 

gefrfjroten 

248 

clip 

frflttmren,8 

2.  fc^toierft 

frijtuor 

fdjtobre 

gcf(^tt>oren 

242 

fester 

3.  fd)tt)iert 

fd)ttiur 

fd)tuiire 

frfjweigett,9 

.... 

frf)ttiieg 

gcf^wiegen 

247 

be  silent 

1.  Also  weak  ;  as  trans,  properly  (though  not  always)  weak. 

2.  In  this  form  now  usually  weak.  3.  Usually  and  properly  weak. 

4.  Now  usually  fcfjncwben,  with  weak  forms.     Old  (poetic)  forms,  pres.  and  impv. 
fdjneubft,  fcfineufct,  fc^neuti. 

5.  Usually  weak. 

6.  Usually  erfcfjrecfeTt,  with  also  weak  impv.  erfcfjrecfe.     As  trans,  frighten,  regularly 
weak.  7.  Weak,  except,  sometimes,  in  p.  part. 

8.  Has  also  weak  pres.  —  no  impv.  9.  As  trans,  silence,  weak. 


ALPHABETICAL    VERB    LIST. 


INFIN. 

2,  3  SING.  PR. 

2  SING. 
IMPV. 

P.  INDIC. 

P.  SUBJ. 

P.  PART. 

§§ 

fcfymeflett,1 

2.  fd&toiHft 

fdjtotK 

fdjiuuli 

.... 

rtcfrtjwoUeu 

242 

SWELL 

3.  fdjtotttt 

[fdjtuette] 

frfjurimmcn, 

.... 

fri)luamnt 

jd)toomme 

ge= 

232 

SWIM 

[fcfjlDomm] 

fdjincintme 

fdnuommcu 

fd)umti»cn, 

.... 

.... 

frf)iuaut> 

frf)h)anbe 

jjefrffttJunben 

231 

vanish 

[f^loiinb] 

[fci)hjunbe] 

fttyttnngen, 

.... 

.... 

f^mang 

fdjtoange 

gef^tttungen 

231 

SWING 

[fc^tDiing] 

[fcfitoitngc] 

fdjworcn, 

.... 

frljiuor 

fc^tDure 

jicfrijiuorcu 

242 

SWEAR 

fdjiuur 

f^tobre 

feljen,* 

2.  fieiift 

ne^(e) 

fa^ 

gefc^cn 

243 

SEE 

3.  fie$t 

[fefie] 

feinr 

see  para- 

.... 

.... 

.... 

.... 

256^ 

be 

digm  (181) 

fettbeit,3 





fanbte 

fenbete 

gcfanbt 

254 

SEND 

ftebeV 

fott 

gefottcn 

241 

boil 

ftngen, 

.... 

fans 

.... 

gcfuttgett 

231 

SING 

ftttfen, 

.... 

fanf 

jicfuufctt 

231 

SINK 

ftmten,5 

.... 

.... 

fann 

fbnne 

gefonnen 

232 

think 

fonne 

fifcen, 

2.  flfreft 

H 

gefeffett 

2430 

SIT 

or  ftfct 

fotten, 

Pr.  foil, 

.... 

folltc 

fotttc 

gcfottt 

261 

SHALL 

jottft,  fott; 

jotlen,  etc. 

flatten  6 

dcftoattctt 

248 

|t"****'*V 

SPLIT 

"V!T  l**'*v** 

***r" 

1.  As  trans,  weak  ;  also,  rarely,  as  intrans.,  except  in  p.  part 

2.  The  impv.  fietje  usually  stands  alone,  or  as  interjection. 

3.  Also  weak  throughout. 

4.  Usually  weak. 

5.  Rarely  weak  —  chiefly  in  p.  part,  geftnitt,  as  adj. 

6.  Weak,  except  in  p.  part. 


ALPHABETICAL    VERB    LIST. 


INFIN. 

2,  3  SING.  PR. 

2  SING. 
IMPV. 

P.  INDIC. 

P.  SUBJ. 

P.   PART. 

§§ 

foetett,1 

.... 

.... 

f^te 

gefoieen 

247 

SPIT 

fpinitcit, 

forum 

fpbnne 

JJCfpOUKCU 

232 

SPIN 

fpanne 

WetSen,' 

2.  fpleifeeft 

Wif? 



flefoUffen 

246 

SPLIT 

0r  fpletfet 

foremen, 

2.  fpriclft 

fpricf) 

fora^ 

.... 

gcforo^en 

232 

SPEAK 

3.  fprtdjt 

[fpredie] 

ftmefeen,3 

2.  fprie&eft 

.... 

f^5^ 

gcforoffcn 

241 

SPROUT 

0r  jpriefct 

fprittgett, 



forang 

gefonutgen 

231 

SPRING 

fte^en, 

2.  ftidjft 

fttdj 

ftadj 

geftot^en 

232 

prick 

3.  ftici)t 

ftetten,4 

2.  fttcfft 

.... 

fta! 

[geftocfeit] 

232 

STICK 

3.  fticft 

Wen, 

.... 

ftanb 

ftanbe 

geftanbeu 

249 

STAND 

[ftunb] 

ftiinbe 

(note). 

fteljlen, 

2.  ftte^lft 

ftiefil 

fta^J 

ftbijle 

geftoijlcit 

232 

STEAL 

3.  ftiefjlt 

[fte^le] 

[ftofit] 

ftafite 

fteigen, 





ftieg 



gcftiegcn 

247 

mount 

fterfiett, 

2.  fttrbft 

fttrfi 

ftarl) 

ftiirbe 

gcfturbcu 

232 

die 

3.  ftir&t 

[fterbe] 

ftarbe 

ftie&en,5 



ftob 

geftobcn 

241 

scatter 

ftinten, 

ftanf 

ftattfe 

gcftuttlctt 

231 

STINK 

ftiinfc 

Wett, 

2.  ftbfe(ef)t 

fHef 

.... 

gcfto^cn 

248 

push 

3.  ftofet 

ffreirfiett, 

ftrir^ 

geftridjen 

246 

STROKE 

1.  Also  weak  throughout. 

2.  Also  weak  —  and  now  rare. 

3.  Old  (poetic)  forms  in  pres.  and  impv.  fateufet, 

4.  Usually  weak  throughout. 

5.  Also  weak.    Old  (poetic)  forms  in  pres.  and  impv.  fteitljft,  fteitbt, 


320 


ALPHABETICAL    VERB    LIST. 


INFIN. 

2,  3  SING.  PR. 

2  SING. 
IMPV. 

P.   INDIC. 

P.  SUBJ. 

P.  PART. 

§§ 

ftreiten, 

ftritt 

geftritten 

246 

STRIVE 

trogen, 

2.  tfagft 

trug 

getragen 

249 

carry 

3.  tragt 

treffen, 

2.  triffft 

ttiff 

traf 

getroffen 

232^ 

hit 

3.  trtfft 

>effc] 

treifcen, 





ttieb 

getm&ett 

247 

DRIVE 

tretett, 

2.  trittft 

tritt 

trat 

getretcn 

243^ 

step 

3.  tritt 

[trete] 

triefen,1 





trpff 

.... 

gctroffcn 

241 

DRIP 

trinfen, 

.... 

trnnf 



gctruufeu 

231 

DRINK 

triigen,2 



trog 

gctrogen 

242^ 

cheat 

ttttt,3 

Pr.  tlte, 

ta(t) 

tat 

gctan 

255 

DO 

tuft,  tut; 

tun,  etc. 

toerberben, 

2.  berbtrbft 

berbtrb 

uevtmrl) 

berbiirbe 

ticrborien 

232 

spoil 

3.  berbirfet 

[berbdrfee] 

aerbrte^en4 

2.  berbriefeeft 

ticrbrS^ 

.... 

Derbroffcn 

241 

vex 

orberbriefct 

toergeffen, 

2.bergiffeft, 

bergife 

»crga^ 

ticrgeffcn 

243 

FORGET 

or  bergifet 

bergeffe] 

3.  bergifu 

Dcrlierett,5 

.... 

.... 

ucrlor 



ticrlorctt 

241 

lose 

ttwdjfen,6 

2.  toacfif(ef)t 

JUllrf)* 

.... 

gciund)fcn 

249 

grow 

3.  toadtft 

1.  Now  usually  weak.    Old  (poetic)  forms  in  pres.  and  impv.  treitfft,  treitft,  treitf. 

2.  Old  triegen  ;  hence  old  (poetic)  forms  in  pres.  and  impv.  treitgft.  treitflt,  treiig. 

3.  Irregular.    See  paradigm  (255).     In  popular  phrase  tat  is  often  used  for  tot,  as 
auxil.  with  infin.     Impv.  tU  chiefly  colloquial. 

4.  Old  (poetic)  forms  in  pres.  and  impv.  Derbteilfet,  toetbreitfe. 

5.  Old  form,  toerltefett ;  hence  still  occasionally  the  p.  part.  Dertefett. 

6.  Rarely  weak  in  pres. 


ALPHABETICAL    VERB    LIST. 


32I 


INFIN. 

2,  3  SING.  PR. 

2  SING. 
1MPV. 

P.  INDIC. 

P.  SUBJ. 

P.  PART. 

§§ 

ttwgett,1 

see  totegen 

-.... 

.... 

.... 

242 

WEIGH 

nmfrfjen,2 

2.  toaf<$(ej)t 

.... 

ttJUfrf) 

flcuiafrt)cu 

249 

WASH 

3.  toafat 

roefcett,3 

mob 

nciuobcu 

2426 

WEAVE 

-tticgen 

see  kroegen 

ttJetrfjen,4 

.... 

miri) 

gewit^ctt 

246 

yield 

wetfett, 

.... 

lutco 

.... 

getotefen 

247 

show 

ttieitbett,5 

.... 

umitbtc 

toenbete 

gemanbt 

254 

turn 

ttjerfoett, 

2.  toir&ft 

ttrir& 

ttjarb 

tuiirfie 

rtcJuurbcn 

232 

sue 

3.  ftrir&t    - 

[toertc] 

lt)or6e 

werbeit,6 

2.  toirft 

irerbe 

iuurbc 

loiirbe 

gemorben 

256^ 

become 

3.  ttirb 

Junrb 

toorben 

ttierfett, 

2.  totrfft 

mirf 

Umrf 

tottrfe 

gcworfcn 

232 

thro^v 

3.  lotrft 

[toerfe] 

rtarfe 

ttrieoett,7 



WOfl 

.... 

gcwogen 

241 

WEIGH 

ttwtben, 

.... 

manb 

.... 

gcmunbcu 

231 

WIND 

-ttrimtett 

-swgetoinnen 

tmmn,8 

.... 

(getoorren) 

242 

tangle 

ttuffcn, 

Pr.  lueife, 

. 

ttwftte 

tou|5te 

gettmfet 

254 

know 

toetfet,  itietfe  ; 

Wijfen,  etc. 

1.  Usually  hriegen  ;  both  often  weak  ;  ludgen  usually  transitive. 

2.  Rarely  weak  in  pres. 

3.  Usually  weak  —  always,  except  in  sense  of  weave. 

4.  Always  weak  in  sense  of  soften  (from  adj.  toeicf)). 

5.  Also  weak  throughout. 

6.  toarb  is  used  only  in  the  singular  ;  toorbert  only  as  passive  auxiliary,  or  poetically. 

7.  See  icciflen.    The  two  are  equivalent  forms,  loiegen  more  usual. 

8.  Weak,  except,  rarely,  in  p.  part.  ;  usually  as  adj. 


322 


ALPHABETICAL    VERB    LIST. 


INFIN. 

2,  3  SING.  PR. 

2  SING. 
IMPV. 

P.  INDIC. 

P.  SUBJ. 

P.  PART. 

§§ 

ttotten, 

Pr.  nritt, 

tootte 

JUOlltC 

toottte 

flcwolU 

261 

WILL 

totttft,  tottt; 

tootten,  etc. 

setyett, 



5tel) 

gepeljett 

247 

accuse 

Sicken,* 

.... 

.... 

500 

.... 

gesogen 

241 

draw 

$tt»ittgen, 

.... 

$tt>ung 

.... 

gesttwngeu 

231 

force 

i.  Old  (poetic)  forms,  pres.  and  impv.  jeildjft,  ftCitdjt,  jeurfj. 

GENERAL  REMARK.  —  The  classification  of  strong  verbs  (§  228,  etc.  — 
and  especially  the  forms  of  vowel  sequence  (§  225)  —  will  be  found  helpfu) 
for  practice.  Other  classifications  might  also  be  given  (as  in  some  other 
grammars).  But,  after  all,  no  classification  can  relieve  the  necessity  of 
learning  most  of  the  verbs  as  individuals.  How  this  may  best  be  done  is 
a  question  of  method,  for  each  teacher  to  decide.  But  at  any  rate,  the 
habit  should  early  be  formed  of  verifying  the  conjugation  of  each  verb  as 
met  with,  and  of  consulting  the  Alphabetical  List  in  all  cases  of  doubt. 
In  this  way  the  most  important  verbs,  which  are  of  frequent  use,  may  be 
soon  learned  without  painful  effort. 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


The  books  of  this  series  are  printed  according  to  the  offi- 
cial rules  now  generally  followed  in  Germany.  These  rules, 
and  the  words  to  which  they  apply,  are  fully  given  in  a 
pamphlet  entitled,  ,,9?egeltt  fiir  bte  beutfd)e  9?ecf)tfd)ret&iing,  nebft 
SBorterfcerjeicfynig''  (latest  ed.  Berlin,  1902)  which  can  be  had 
at  small  cost.  But  for  the  immediate  guidance  of  students 
who  may  have  to  use  dictionaries,  etc.,  printed  after  the  old 
orthography,  the  following  selection  of  the  most  important 
changes  is  given  for  reference.  — 

I.    VOWELS  AND  DIPHTHONGS. 

The  modified  capitals  —  even  in  Roman  type  —  always  $,  6, 
II  ;  A,  O,  U—  not  2le,  Oe,  etc. 

e,  not  a,  in  edj)t,  ©ren^e,  ®reuel,  Bering,  ftet§,  beud)te,  (eugnen, 
and  some  others. 

t,  not  ie,  in  fhtg,  gtng,  fjing  ;  also  gi6,  gtbft,  gtbt  ;  but  :  — 
tef  not  i,  in  verbs  like  ftubteren,  etc. 
Single  vowel  for  double  vowel  in:  — 

bar  (Sarfd&aft),  @^af, 


(lofcn),  (Star, 


28are,    etc.  —  though    in 
some  other  words  the  double  vowel  is  retained. 

The  following  are  distinguished  by  spelling:  — 
giber,  fibre.  gieber,/<?zw. 

®etfel,  hostage.  ®eifjel,  scourge. 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


£ib,  lid.  Sieb,  song. 

id),  grayish.  greultcf),  terrible. 

,  mare.  9Kare,  story. 


@til,  J^.  ©tiel,  handle. 

and  others. 

II.   CONSONANTS, 
not  tfy,  in  German  words*;  as: 

a)  Initial,  £cm,  tauen,  £eil,  £ter,  teuer,  berteibigen,  £urm, 

tun,  £at,  £or,  etc. 

£)  In  the  suffix  -turn  :  (Stgentum,  9^etd^tum,  etc. 
f)  final  or  medial,  as:  Mint,  Slrmut,  9^ot,  rot,  raten, 

mteten,  SBtrt,  etc. 
not  ^f  in  all  German  words. 
not  ^f  in  the  pronoun  compounds:   be§tt)egenf  be§f)alb, 

tnbe§,  etc.    And  in  the  suffix  -ni^  (but  plural  -niffc): 

f  ©lei^niffe,  etc. 
t,  not  btf  in  33rotr  C£rnte,  <S(^mert,  tot  (adj.),  toten,  etc. 
f  for  c  in  many  foreign  words;  as:  ®cmon,  forreft,  lonfret 

^onjunftton,  furfit),  etc. 

j  for  c  in  many  foreign  words;  as:  Officer,  ^roje^,  ^onjert, 
etc.  ;  while  in  many  others,  not  so  fully  naturalized,  c  i? 
retained;  as:  2)ocent,  focial,  etc. 

III.    CAPITALS. 

The  use  of  capitals  is  limited,  more  closely  than  heretofore, 
to  nouns  and  words  used  strictly  as  nouns  (§  65). 

*  See  §  42.  Till  recently,  tf)  was  retained  before  a  long  single  vowel; 
as,  £f)im,  £f)at,  S^or;  and  was  formerly  used  much  more  largely,  as  in  all 
the  examples  here  cited.  It  is  now  restricted  to  foreign  words  and  proper 


VOCABULARIES. 


EXPLANATORY* 


THESE  Vocabularies,  being  part  of  a  Grammar,  are  intended  not  to 
take  the  place  of,  but  to  assist  —  and,  indeed,  compel  —  grammar  study. 
Hence  only  such  help  is  given  as  the  student  ought  to  need.  Thus, 
inflections  are  indicated  only  where  they  may  not  be  known  under  the 
most  general  rules ;  for  example,  in  nouns :  the  plural  of  Slpfel,  Strut,  but 
not  of  53dcfer,  28eg*,  etc.;  and  such  indications  are  not  unnecessarily 
repeated,  as  in  getertag,  etc.  (but  given  in  SBaljnrjof,  etc.,  because  £of  does 
not  occur).  Special  forms,  as  Slntirort,  $8anb,  etc.,  are,  however,  not  only 
given,  but  referred  to  the  appropriate  §§.  Also,  no  more  indication  is 
given  than  is  necessary;  as,  in  general,  where  the  plural  sufficiently 
indicates  the  genitive,  etc. 

In  verbs  all  peculiarities  are  referred  to  the  Alphabetical  List,  p.  307, 
etc.  S  stands  for  strong  verbs  ;  M  for  mixed  verbs  (§  253);  the  auxiliary 
fein  is  indicated  by  f.  Separable  compounds  are  indicated  by  the  double 
hyphen  (*) ;  inseparable  are  simply  written  as  one  word.  In  special  cases 
reference  is  made  to  the  §. 

Accents  are  indicated  only  when  foreign  or  otherwise  doubtful.  Im- 
portant points  of  syntax  are  indicated  by  references.  The  parts  of  speech 
are  named  only  in  case  of  double  uses  of  the  same  word,  or  when  the 
English  equivalent  might  possibly  be  ambiguous. 

Compounds  (except  verbs),  and  sometimes  obvious  derivatives,  are 
grouped  under  a  common  title-word.  Adverbs,  unless  of  special  form,  are 
included  under  the  adjectives.  Separable  prefixes  are  classed  as  adverbs. 

The  abbreviations  employed  are  such  as  are  generally  understood. 
Outside  of  these,  the  straight  line — indicates  the  title  form  unchanged, 
as  2trf)tel  — ,  for  §W)teI ;  Start,  -e,  for  Slrnte,  etc. ;  while  "•  indicates  vowel 
modification,  as  Slrat,  -"e,  for  Str^te,  etc. ;  and  similarly  in  compounds,  as 
odjt,  —  gerjn,  for  odjtaeljtt,  etc.  The  ending  indicated  after  nouns  is  always 
that  of  the  plural,  unless  otherwise  stated ;  after  adjectives  ^  indicates 
strong  comparison,  as,  alt,  •">  for  alter,  etc.  All  numerical  references  are 
to  §§  of  the  grammar. 

For  special  notes  on  nouns  and  on  prepositions,  see  Appendix  p.  367,  etc. 

*  The  following  plurals  are  assumed  as  regular,  all  departures  from 
which  are  recorded :  Monosyllables :  masculines,  //.  -e.  Polysyllables  \ 
masculines  and  neuters  of  class  I,  pi.  — ;  all  others,  //.  -e  (except  mascu- 
lines in  -e,  //.  -tt);  feminines, //.  -(e)n.  Modification  of  vowel  is  always 
recorded. 


I. 


GERMAN^ENGLISH. 


ub,  off,  from,  away,  down. 

»Hl)Cltb,  m.,  -e,   evening,  the  west ; 
be3  — 3,  or  abenb3,  adv.,  evenings, 
in  the  evening  (indef.). 
but,  however. 

s->  f->   to  drive  off,  de- 
part. 

ab=gefyett,  -5".,  |,  to  go  off,  leave; 
result. 

ab=reifett,  I,  to  start  off,  set  out 

(on  a  journey). 

ab=fd)reiben,  s.,  to  write  off,  copy. 

9lbt,  m.,  "e,  abbot. 

arfjt,  eight ;  —  aef)n,  eighteen;  —519, 

eighty  ;  ber  —  (t)e,  the  eighth. 
£ld)tel,  n.,  — ,  eighth  (part). 
nd)tCU,  212,  to  regard,  esteem. 

abbie'ren,  215,  to  add. 

Sltabemte',  /.,  academy. 

Oil,  460,  all,  every ;  alleS,  everything, 

everybody  ;  alter — ,  gen.pl.  as  sup. 

pref.,  atterfjetltgft,  most  holy,  etc. 
alleitt7,  alone;  conj.,  but,  only. 

Sltyen,  //.,  Alps. 

al^f  adv.,  as,  than ;  conj.,  as,  when 
(def.  past);  —  toenn,  06,  as  if. 

Hit,  *,  old ;  bte  Sllten,  (often)  the  an- 
cients. 

2Uter,  n.,  age,  old  age. 

alter  it,  214,  to  age,  grow  old. 

am,  for  on  .bem. 


,  m.,  (an)  American. 

tttt,  adv.,  on  ;  prep,  (dat.),  near,  by, 
on  (of  dates) ;  (ace.),  to,  towards, 
against;  benfen  an  or  bon,  p.  134. 

aitbcr,  other  ;  second  ;  —  tljalt),  one 
and  a  half,  311. 

att^erfemtett,  M.,  289,  to  acknowl- 
edge. 

9lnf ang,  m.,  ut,  beginning ;  anfang^ 
(adv.),  at  first. 

an=fangcn,  s.,  to  begin. 

angenefjtn,  acceptable,  agreeable. 
flU=f0mmcit,  S.,  f ,  to  arrive ;  —  ailf, 
impers.    w.   ace.,    to    depend    on, 
matter. 

att=ttefymett,  S.,  to  accept,  assume; 
reflex.,  to  take  interest  in  (gen.). 
, /.,  -en,  122,  answer. 
,  212,  to  answer  (dat.). 
S.,  to.  draw  on,  attract; 
intr.  \.,  to  draw   near,  approach ; 
reflex.,  to  dress  (one's  self). 
m.,  *   apple. 
7,  m,,  -e,  appetite. 
m.,  gen.  -3,  April. 
it,  f.,  work,  labor ;  — er,  m.,  la- 
borer ;  — §mann,  //.  — Sleute,  work- 
man, workpeople,  425. 
arbcttcn,  to  work. 
argent,  214,  to   vex,  anger;  reflex., 

to  be  angry. 

9(rm,  m.,  -e,  arm  (limb). 
arm,  *,  poor. 


325 


326 


VOCABULARY. 


Orttg,  kind,  good,  polite. 
Slrjt,  m.,  ~e,  physician. 

5tfien,  «.,  Asia. 

9lft,  m.,  ^c,  bough,  branch. 

attdj,  also,  even,  485 ;  incr,  toaS  — , 

whoever,  whatever;  lueittt,  ob  — , 

even  if,  although,  486. 
dUf,  adv.,  up,  open ;  prep,  (dat),  on, 

upon,  at;  (ace.},  upon,  to,  towards; 

for    (time) ;  after,  according  to ; 

—  baft,  in  order  that. 
auf erftefjen,  s.,  f.,  289,  to.  rise  (from 

the  dead). 
3lllf gnbe,  /-,  exercise,  task. 

twf=gel)ettf  s.,  f.,  to  go  up,  rise. 

HUf=l)ebett,  ^.,  to  lift  up,  raise,  put 

away. 
HUf=ftel)Ctt,  S.,  f.,   to  stand  up,  rise 

(from  bed). 
Slitge,  «.,  £*«.  -3,  //.  -it,  eye ;  — n= 

6  lief,  ;/z.,  moment. 
3tugu|Y,  m.,gen.-Z,  August. 
Utt3,   tf*/z/.,  out,  forth,  throughout; 

prep,  (dat.),  out  of,  from,  by,  on 

account  of. 
att£=gebeit,  S.,  to  give  out,  spend; 

reflex.,  to  give  one's  self  out  (fiir). 
au^^ge^eit,  S.,  to  -go  out,  proceed, 

end. 

an^ntJjeit,  to  rest,  repose. 
fltt^f  efyett,  -S.,  to  look,  seem';  as  noun, 

look,  appearance. 

flitter,  daf.,  outside  of,  without,  ex- 
cept; — bent,  adv.,  besides. 
tw£=5ieljett,  S.,  to  draw  out,  pull  off; 

intr.  \.,  to  move  out,  march  out; 

reflex.,  to  undress  (one's  self). 


Burfett,  S.,  to  bake. 
S3arfcr,  m.,  baker. 


25ttb,  «.,  "er,  bath. 

babeit,  212,  to  bathe. 

S3al)ttl)0f,  tn.,  comp.  "e,  station  (of 
railway). 

bft(b,  soon,  now ;  fo — ,  as  soon  (as). 

S3ttttb,  «.,  ^er,  ribbon  ;  -e,  bond  ;  m., 
"e,  volume,  424,  426. 

ftaitgeit,  impers.  w.  dat. :  mtr  Oangt, 
I  feel  afraid. 

23mtf,/.,  "e,  bench  ;  -en,  bank  (com- 
mercial, 424). 

S$fltterf  m.,  gen.  -3,  //.  -n,  peasant, 
farmer. 

$cwm,  m.,  ^,  tree. 

S3aumrf)eu,  JBaumtciu,  «.,  ^////.,  little 

tree. 
fceaittttJOrteit,  212,  to  answer,  reply 

to  (ace.). 

Beberfctt,  to  cover. 
befmbeit,    S.,  reflex.,  to   find  one's 

self,  do  (in  health). 
foegletteit,  2 1 2,  to  attend,  accompany. 
bet,  adv.,  by,  near ;  prep,  (dat.),  by, 

near,  at,  in,  with,  among,  at  the 

house  of,  on  condition  of. 
&et=ftel)ettf    S.,    to    stand    by,    help 

(dat). 

fieifjen,  s.,  to  bite. 

befrtUUt,  part,  adj.,  known ;  acquaint- 
ed; as  noun,  (an)  acquaintance. 

fcdagern,  214,  to  besiege. 
&ettarf)ridjtigen,  to  inform. 

fcereifeit,  213,  to  travel  through. 
it^,  adv.  gen.,  already. 

-,  mountain.         .       [mous. 
bcritfjmt,  part,  adj.,  celebrated,  fa- 
,  S.,  to  look  at,  inspect. 
iS,  /.,  -ffe,  care,  apprehen- 
sion. 

ffer,  Bcft,  irr.  comp.  and  sup.  gilt, 
better,  best. 


VOCABULARY. 


327 


befndjett,  to  visit. 

betreffen,  S.,  to  befall,  concern. 
bctritgen,  -S.,  to  deceive,  cheat. 
Sett,  n.,gen.  -eo,  //.  -en  or  -e,  105, 

bed. 
beWegett,   S.,  to   induce;  w^^:    to 

move,  excite. 

bCttHtjjt,  conscious  (ot,gen.}. 
to  pay. 
',/.,  library. 

biegen,  S.,  to  bend. 

bieten,  *$".,  to  offer,  bid. 

binben,  S.,  to  bind. 

biltnen,  (dat.},  within  (time). 

bt3,  adv.,  so  far  as ;  prep,  (ace.},  up 

to,  till ;  conj.  (for  &t3  baft),  until. 
S3ifd)of,  »*.,  "e,  bishop. 
bittClt,    .S.,   to   beg,  pray.     Sttte,    I 

beg,  please. 

Slatt,  «.,  "er,  leaf,  sheet  (of  paper). 
btolt,  blue,     biriultlf),  bluish. 
bletbett,  S.,  f.,  to  continue,  remain  ; 

fteljen  — ,  to  stop. 
bltnb,  blind. 

SBIltme,  /.,  flower. 

Soot,  ».,  -e  or  33bte,  105,  boat. 

SSb'rf e,  /.,  purse,  Bourse. 

bb'fe,  bad,  angry. 

S3ote,  w.,  messenger. 

S3otfrf)aft,  /.,  message. 

SratttttWeitt,  m.  comp.,  brandy. 

brateu,  S.,  to  roast. 

SratCtt,  m.y  — ,  roast  (meat). 
braudjcit,  to  use,  need  (rarely  gen.}. 
bratttt,  brown. 
S3raut,  /.,  *e,  bride. 
bverf)Cn,  S.,  to  break. 
brett,  broad. 

brenttett,  M.,  to  burn. 

Srief,  m.,  letter. 
brtltflClt,  M.,  to  bring. 


23rot,  ».,  --e,  bread. 
S3rMe,  /.,  bridge. 

Sntber,  w.,  ^,  brother. 

S3ttrf),  «.,  ^er,  book;  —  Mnber,   m. 

book-binder. 
bltnt,  variegated,  gay. 


,  /.,  chemistry. 

(prtft  (6^riftn^,  113),  w.,  Christ. 
(£ljttft,  m.,  -en,  Christian  ;  —  entum, 
n.,  Christianity. 


bd,  «t/^.  fl^/w.,  there,  then;  r^w/'.  r^/., 
when,  as,  since,  486;  ?'«  comp.  be- 
fore vowels  bar,  401. 
j,  «.,  ^cr,  roof. 

,  184,  thereby;  through,  by 
it  ^^  them. 

bagegett,  184,  against  it  or  them; 
on  the  contrary. 

$ume,  /.,  lady. 

bdtnit,  '  adv.,  therewith  ;  with  it  or 
them,  184;  conj.,  in  order  that, 
468;  —  fagen,  to  mean. 

'Sampfboot,  n.  comp.,  steamboat. 

$aitf,  m.,  thanks;  (no  pi}. 

banlen,  to  thank  (dat.}. 

bamt,  then  (time). 

bat,  for  ba  in  comp.  before  vowels. 

bnrnitf,    184,   thereupon;  upon,   to, 

after  —  it    or    them;    --    bafe,    in 

order  that. 
bflfdn^,  184,  thereout;  out  of  it  or 

them,  thence. 
barf,  pres.  burfen. 
baruilt,  184,  thereabout;  around,  for 

it  or  them,  therefore,  on  that  ac- 

count; —  bafj,  in  order  that,  468. 


328 


VOCABULARY. 


bttfelbft,    comp.    bd,    in    that    same 

place,  there. 

buff,  conj.,  that,  so  that,  in  order  that. 
battOtt,  184,  therefrom,  thereof;  of, 

by  it  or  them ;  away,  off. 
basil,  184,  thereto;   to  it  or  them; 

in  addition;  for  that  purpose. 
bettt,  poss.  adj.,  thy,  your ;  gen.pers. 

(for  beiner),  of  thee,  of  you ;  — er, 

poss.pron.,  thine,  yours; gen. pers., 

of  thee,  of  you,  186. 
beitfett,  M.,  to  think;  —of  (p.  134). 
betttt,  conj.,  then,  for. 
ber,  art.,  the;  dem.,  that,  that  one, 

he;  rel.,  who,  which,  that,  234. 

berjenige,  208,  that  one,  he  (who). 

berfd&e,  208,  the  same;  as  substitute 
for  personal,  etc.,  457. 

be3f)dlfr,  comp.,  on  that  account, 
therefore,  456. 

beftO,  correL,  je  — ,  334,  so  much  the 
(more). 

beutUd),  plain,  clear. 

beittfdf),  German ;  as  noun,  (a)  Ger- 
man; — lonb,  n.,  Germany. 

birfjt,  tight,  close. 

$)ieb,  m.,  thief. 

bicitcn,  to  serve  (dat.). 

Wiener,  m.,  servant;  — in,  /.,  -nen, 
woman-servant. 

bteS,  for  biefeS. 

btefer,  dem.,  this,  this  one;  the  lat- 
ter; he,  etc.,  457. 

$>tttg,  ».,  -e,  thing. 

bireft',  direct. 

bhnbie'ren,  215,  to  divide. 

botfj,  though,  yet,  however,  surely, 

at  any  rate,  please,  485. 
$0ftor,    m.,  gen.    -§,   pi.   -ett,    117, 

doctor. 

m.t  -e,  dome,  cathedral. 


bottltent,  214,  to  thunder. 

$>0rf,   n.,  ^er,    village;  —  fdjaft,  /., 

village  community. 
2>ont,  m.,  gen.  -e^  //.  ^Ct  or  -t  or 

-en,  105,  thorn. 

bort,  there;  —  tg,  adj.,  of  there. 
bret,  three;  —  $ef)tt,  thirteen;  —  feig, 

thirty. 

britt,  third;  —  e^alft,  two  and  a  half. 
brurfcit,  to  print. 
btt,  thou,  you,  186. 
buvd),  adv.  (as  pref.,  287),  through, 

throughout;  prep,  (ace.),  through, 

throughout,  by,  by  means  of. 

burd)5tefjen,     •$.,    sep.,    to    draw 

through;  insep.,  to  pass  through, 
287. 

bitrfett,  261,  modal,  to  be  allowed, 
may,  need,  ,/,.  472.     , 


ven,  level;  adv.,  just,  exactly. 
,  /.,  corner. 
Cbc(f  noble,  139. 
(gfett  (old  6pl)CU),  m.,  gen.  -§,  ivy. 

e^renr  to  honor. 

(gtgentttm,  ».,  property. 

(Site,/".,  haste,  hurry. 

eilt,   indef.  art.,  an,  a;  num.,  one; 

pron.  -er,  one,  some  one;  —  8,  one. 
tin-,  adv.  form  of  in,  as  prefix. 
CUtanbei',  comp.  indecl.,  one  another, 

each  other.  [same. 

Ctlterlct,  indecl.,  of  one  kind,  all  the 
eitttge,  //.,  some,  several,  a  few. 

ein=taben,  s.,  to  invite. 

(Hnfabuttft,  /.,  invitation. 
Cttt§  (in  counting),  see  ettt. 
eitt=5tC^Cttf  S.,  tr.,  to  draw  in  ;  intr. 
f.,  to  move  in,  march  in. 


VOCABULARY. 


329 


(&i§,  n.,  ice ;  — fait,  ice-cold. 

(gifeit,  n.,  iron. 

eiferit,  of  iron,  iron. 

elf  (eilf),  eleven. 

(Sltent,  //.,  parents. 

empfetylett,      -5".,      to      recommend; 

reflex.,  to  send  one's  compliments 

(to,  dat). 

<£ttbe,  n.,  gen.  -3,  //.  -n,  end. 
CUblitf),    final,    last ;    usiially   adv. ; 

finally,  at  last. 
(Smglttttbcr,  m.,  Englishman. 

ettglifrf),  English. 

(Snfel,  m.,  grandson. 

Clttfnitfl,  adv.,  along  ;  as  prep.  (ace.). 

eitttoeber,  either. 

er,  fie,  e3,  he,  she,  it. 

(£rbe, /.,  earth;  auf  Srben,  106. 

erftttben,  S.,  to  find  out,  invent. 

erfrifrfjett,  213,  to  refresh. 

CtfyaltCtt,  S.,  to  obtain,  receive ;  keep, 

sustain. 
eHofrffCtt,  S.,  intr.,  f.,  to  go  out ;  (a 

light).  [at. 

erreirfjett,  to  reach  to,  attain,  arrive 
erfdjredfett,  S.,  to  be  frightened  ;  tr. 

•weak:  to  frighten. 
erft,  ord.  num.,  first ;  ber  — ere,  the 

former    (157);    adv.,    first,    only, 

just. 

t,  212,  to  await,  expect. 
,  S.,  to  bring  up,  train,  edu- 
cate. 

e3,  it,  there,  453. 
effCtt,  S.,  to  eat. 
etttm§,  something,  anything. 
GurO^Ja,  n.  gen.  -§,  Europe. 
et)ange/Uumf  n.  gen.  -8,  //.  -ten, 

1 1 8,  gospel. 
Ccgcrcittttitt,  n.gen.  -8,  //.  -ten,  1 1 8, 


S.,  f.,  to  drive,  ride  (in  a  car- 
riage) ;  fpasteren  — ,  to  take  a  drive. 

fatten,  s.,  f.,  to  fall.  [rupt. 

fattie/rett,  215,  to  fail,  become  bank- 

feefjtett,  s.,  to  fight. 

3feberttteffer,  n.  comp.,  penknife. 
fef)(ett,   to  fail,  lack,  miss;  'usually 

impers.,  to  ail  (dat.  obj.). 
^C^ter,  m.,  fault,  mistake. 

m.  comp.,  holiday. 
,  m.,  enemy;  as adj.pred.for : 
feittblirf),  hostile,  448. 

,  «.,  -er,  field ;  — ^err,  m.,  com- 
mander, general, 

or  $elfen,  m.,  gen.  -en  or  -en§, 
//.  -en,  1 01,  rock. 
3?Cttfterf  n.,  window. 
^ertigfcit,  /.,  readiness,  skill. 
fett,  fat. 
Better,  n.,  fire;  — berfirfjerung, /.,  fire 

insurance. 
ftttbett,  S.,  to  find. 
finger,  m.,  finger. 
§if4  m.,  fish. 

$Iomme, •/.,  flame. 
^Iaf(^ef/.,  flask,  bottle. 

yylctfrf),  n.,  flesh,  meat. 
f(ctf}tgf  industrious,  diligent. 
fttCflCU,  S.,  to  fly  (aux.,  298). 

flte^eu,  s.,  f.,  to  flee. 

gfliiflel,  m.,  wing. 
§lttft,  m.,  ^ffe,  river. 

folgett,  f.,  to  follow  (dat.). 

3f0fftF,    n.,  gen.  -8,   //.  -ten,    119, 

fossil. 

^ratJC,  /.,  question. 
fragett,  to  ask,  inquire. 
$rattfretrfjr  n.,  France. 

m.,  Frenchman. 


330 


VOCABULARY. 


frflttSO'ftfrf),    French;   as   noun,  n., 

French  (language). 
5'tfltt,    f.,   -en,     woman,    wife  ;    in 

address,  Mrs. 
^rfiulettt,  n.  dim.,  young  lady,  miss  , 

in  address,  Miss. 
fret,  free  ;  in  comp.,  379,  —  fprerfjen, 

to  acquit  (oi,gen.). 
freittdj,  adv.,  indeed,  truly. 
.  comp.,  Friday. 
,    foreign,   strange  ;   as  noun, 

foreigner,    stranger  ;  f.,    bie  —  e, 

foreign  parts. 
freffCtt,  S.,  to  eat  (used  of  beasts). 

$reube,/.,  joy,  106. 

freiteit,  to  make  glad  ;  usiially  reflex., 

to  be  glad,  rejoice  (gen.). 
gfmtttb,   m.y  friend  ;  —  in,  /.,  -nen, 

friend  (female).  [peace. 

3frtebe(n),  m.,  gen.  -n§,  //.  -n,  99, 
icf),  m.,  Frederick. 
t,  S.,  to  freeze  ;  impers.,  to  be 

cold  (ace.  obj.,  291). 
frifrf),  fresh. 
frofj,  glad,  joyous. 
$ntrf)t,  /.,  "e,  fruit. 
frill),  early  ;  in  early  morning. 
t$ruij(tltg,  m.,  spring  (season). 
fiUjrett,  to  lead,  conduct,  drive,  car- 

ry (on). 

fitttf,  five.  [spark. 

$ttttfe(tt),   m.,  gen.  -n§,  pi.  -n,  99, 
fttr,  (ace.),  for,  instead  of. 
$tirft,  m.,  -en,  prince. 
gfitrfitetttum,  «.,  -turner,  principality. 
j,  m.,  "c,  foot,  312. 


,  215,  to  gallop. 
•  g°ose- 


all,  whole,  entire,  144;  adv.) 
quite,  very. 

m.,  *,  garden. 

m.,  *t,  guest;  — ^of,  m.,  *e, 
hotel,  inn. 

rtClitil'Clt,  S.,  to  bear,  bring  forth. 
ge&Ctt,   S.,  to  give ;  e§  gtbt,  impers., 

there  is,  there  are,  294. 
(Befoirge,    «.,   — ,    mountain    range, 

mountains. 
gefcoren,/./.  geMren,  tr.,  borne;  intr. 

as  adj.,  born. 

<$ebanfe(n),  m.,gen.  -n§,  //.  -n,  99. 

thought. 

(SJebttlb,  /.,  patience. 
®eful)r,  /.,  -en,  danger,  risk. 
flCfoUctt,  S.,  to  please  (dat.) ;  fid)  — 

Ia[[en,  to  submit  to. 
(SJefattcn,   m.,  pleasure;  mir  511  — , 
for  my  sake. 

tgft,  sup.  adv.,  if  you  please. 

(ace.),  against,  towards,  about 
(number),  in  comparison  with, 
for. 

,  /.,  neighborhood. 

,    adv.,    and  prep,   (dat., 
280),  over  against,  opposite  to. 
jCU,  S.,  \.,  to  go,  walk,  fare ;  fpd* 
ijieren  — ,  to  take  a  walk. 
,  yellow. 

,  n.,  money ;  — fumme,  /.,  sum 
of  money. 
(]C(CflCttf  /.  p.  Itegen,   situated;    as 

adj.,  convenient. 
geftttgett,  S.,  f.,  impers.  (dat.,  292),  to 

turn  out,  succeed. 
©emfilbC,  n.,  — ,  painting. 
gencfen,  S.,  f.,  to  recover,  get  well. 
($Cttf,  n.,  Geneva. 
gente^eit,    S.,   to  enjoy    (sometimes 
gen). 


VOCABULARY. 


331 


flCUUfl,  indecl.,  enough. 

ijcrabe,  straight,  direct;  usually  adv.  , 

exactly,  just. 
flCViltCH,  S">  \-t  to  turn  out  )  also  p.  p. 

raten. 

gertt,  485,   willingly,  with  pleasure. 
gefrf|ef)eu,   S.,  \.,  to  happen,  occur, 

be  done. 

®efeUfrf)aft,  /.,  company. 
@efe£,  ».,  -e,  law. 
gefterit,  yesterday. 

gettumiett,  s.,  to  win. 

getUOgett,  /.  /.  totegen  ;  as  adj.,  in- 

clined to,  favorable  (dat). 
giefjeit,  S.,  to  pour. 
(5)la3,  Tz.^er,  glass. 
glaubctt,  to  believe  (dat.  pers.,  ace. 

thing,  437). 
©laitfce(n),  »*.,  £*«.  -n3,  //.  -n,  99, 

faith,  belief. 
glcidjCll,    -S.,   to  be   like,  resemble 

(dat.}. 

($Hiirf,  «.,  happiness,  fortune. 
fllitrflid),  happy,  fortunate. 
no(bCHf  golden,  (of)  gold. 

tr    m.,  "cr,    god;    God;    —  lob, 

(inter/.},  praise  God  ! 

.,  to  dig. 
,  m.,  -en,  count. 

tt!,  /.,  grammar. 
f  flrbfeer,  grbfet,  great,  large,  tall. 
gtttn,  green. 

gttt,  beffer,  beft,  good  ;  as  adv.,  well. 
t,  ^.,  ^er,  property,  estate  ;  //., 
goods. 
itte,  /.,  goodness,  kindness. 


f  ».,  -e,  (a)  hair;//,  (the)  hair. 
,  256,  to  have  (as  auxil.,  296). 


fyageln,  to  hail. 

fyaU),   half,  144;  —  ad;t,  half  past 

seven,  etc. 

-fyfllb,  in  comp.,  as  beS^alb,  for : 
.  Ijnlbcit,    f)nlberf    (gen.  280),   on    ac- 
count of,  for  the  sake  of ;  meinct= 
— ,  etc.  452,  b. 
(Mte,/.,  half. 

IjilltClt,  S.,  tr.,  to  hold,  keep,  contain ; 
(fiir)  to  hold  for,  consider ;  intr., 
to  hold  on,  halt,  last. 
£ttttb,  /.,  *e,  hand. 

,  214,  to  act,  deal,  trade. 

n.  dim.,  little  hare. 
,  m.,  hare. 

f  n.,  ^er,  house,  home. 
,  S.,  to  heave,  lift,  raise. 
,  n.,  -e,  copy-book,  note-book, 
holy. 
^|,  »/.,  Henry. 

tft,  hot. 

,  /r.,  to  bid,  call ;  usually 
intr.,  to  be  called ;  to  mean. 
r,  cheerful. 
,  m.,  -en,  hero. 
Ijdfeit,  S.,  to  help  (dat.). 

,  «.,  gen.  -e§,  //.  -en,  shirt. 
t,  hither,  along ;  ago;  as pref.  in 
comp.  377,  484. 

eit,  ^S1.,  \.,  to  come  out, 

come  forth,  result. 
er&ftf  w.,  autumn,  fall. 

«.  -n,  //.  -en,  master, 
lord,  gentleman;  sir,  Mr.  (428); 
mem  — ,  sir ;  //.  gentlemen. 

,  /.,  -nen,  lady,  mistress. 
idj,  noble,  glorious. 

crttnter=fatteitf  s.,  f.,  to  fall  down. 
^pcrj,  n.,  gen.  -en£,  //.  -en,    102, 

heart. 
Ijeutc,  to-day ;  —  obenb,  this  even- 


332 


VOCABULARY. 


ing ;  —  £U  Sage,   at  the  present 

day. 
Jjter,  here ;  in  comp., — mil,  herewith. 

with  this,  401. 
4>immel,  #*•,  heaven,  sky. 
Jjitt,  hence,  away,  off  (see  f)er). 
fytnteu,  adv.,  behind. 
Ijitttcr,  adv.  (as  pref.,  287),  behind, 

back  :  prep.  (dat.  or  ace.),  behind. 

Ijtntcrflcljcu,  •$.,  sep.  \.,  to  go  behind ; 

insep.,  to  deceive  (287). 
£trt,  m.,  -en,  shepherd. 
l)0rf),  fjbfjer,  Fjbrf)ft,  before  e,  f)of),  high, 
fyoffcn,  to  hope. 
£ol5,  «.,  wood. 
,  to  hear. 
,  *».,  -e,  dog. 

t,  (a)  hundred. 
t,  m.,  *•*,  hat. 

,  /.,  hut,  cottage. 


iljr,  her,  their;  Sfyr,  your,  188. 
tljrig  (ber  —  e),  hers,  theirs; 

yours,  188. 
im,  for  in  bent. 
itttntcr,  always,  ever;  toer .  .  .  intnter, 

whoever. 
in,  prep.  (dat.  or  ace.),  in  ;  into. 

Snfanterie',  /•>  infantry. 

inner,  1 58,  inner,  interior. 
in3,  for  in  bag. 

^nf eft7,  n.,  gen.  -e§,  //.  -en,  insect. 
I,  to  wander,  err ;  reflex.,  to  be 
mistaken. 

:,  yes,  indeed,  485. 

[Cr,  m.,  hunter,  sportsman. 

ir,  n.y  -e,  year ;  — e§^eit,  _/".,  time 
of  the  year,  season. 


jammcrn,   214,  to  lament,  mourn; 

impers.  (ace).,  it  grieves. 
je,    ever  ;    correl.,  je  .  .  .  bejto,   334, 

the  (more)  .  .  .  the  (more). 
jebetf    each,    every  ;    etn  —  ,    every 

one. 


244,  everybody. 
}emanbf  244,  somebody. 
jencrf  that,  that  one  ;  the  former. 
jenfett(3);   (gen.  280),  on  that  side 

of,  beyond. 

jje^tg,  of  now,  present  (time). 
jeljt,  now. 
Jung,  *,  young. 

Ung,  m.,  youth,  young  man. 


,  m.,  ae,  boat. 

ifer,    m.t    emperor;   —in,    -nen, 
empress. 

faltr  "-,  cold. 

',  m.,  -cine,  chaplain. 
.,  Charles. 
,  n.  dim.,  (little)  Charley. 

l,  /.,  potato. 

faufcit,  to  buy. 

^aufmann,  m.,  -teute  or  -manner 

425,  merchant. 
^atoatterie^  /.,  cavalry. 

fcttt,  no,  not  any  ;  pron.,  —  er,  no 
one,  none.  [with. 

f  cnnctt,  M.,  to  know,  be  acquainted 

$inb,  «.,  -er,  child;  —  erftufce,  /., 
nursery. 

Ai  irrfjc,  /.,  church. 

SHrfdjC,  /.,  cherry. 

!(nr,  clear. 

^Ittffc,  /.,  class. 

ftlcib,  //.,  -er,  garment,  dress  :  //., 
clothes. 


VOCABULARY. 


333 


flew,  little,  small. 
flettent,  214,  climb,  clamber. 
flimjCU,  S.,  to  sound,  resound,  ring. 
&fofter,  n.,  "-,  cloister,  convent. 
$ltabe,  m.,  boy  ;  —  nfdjule,  /.,  boys' 
school. 

m.,  "e,  cook  (man). 

.,  -nen,  cook  (woman). 


,  Cologne  ;  ®blner,  inded.,  143, 

(of)  Cologne. 
fommett,  S.,\.,  to  come;  —  OU§,  (dat)., 

to  come  —  result  —  from. 
&Mg,  m.,  king  ;  —  Sfrrafee,  /.,  King 

Street  ;  —  in,  /.,  -nen,  queen. 
fimiglidj,  kingly,  royal. 
foitttCU,    261,   modal:    to    be   able; 

can,  may,  472  ;  to  know. 
^OttSert',  n.,  -e,  concert. 
fruit!,  *-,  sick,  ill. 

®rattS,  m.,  %  wreath,  garland. 
$tieg,  m.,  war  ;  —  Sfjeer,  n.,  army. 
^U^r  /.,  *e,  cow. 
fitl)l,  cool. 

fttr-5,  *,  short,  curt  ;  adv.,  briefly,  in 
short. 


1  1  8,  laboratory. 

ladjem,  214,  to  smile. 

ladjen,  to  laugh. 

£anbf  ».,  "er  or  -e,  425,  country, 
land  ;  —  gut,  «.,  farm  ;  —  Kjait§,  «., 
country  house  ;  —  leitte,  //.,  coun- 
try people,  425. 

fang(e),  long  ;  adv.,  —  fjer,  long  ago. 

(angS  (gen.  or  dat.,  280),  along. 

faffCtt,  S.,  to  let,  leave;  causative 
269,  to  make  (do),  have,  cause  to 
be  (done)  ;  reflex,  for  pass.  274, 
can  be  (done). 


toltfeit,  S.,  (aux.,  298),  to  run. 

lattt,  loud  ;  adv.,  aloud. 

lebett,  to  live  ;  noun,  fie&Ctt,  ».,  life. 

,  living,  alive. 

,  to  lay,  put. 

,  m.,  teacher. 
,  light,  easy. 
(etbett,  S.,  to  suffer. 
letI)Cnf  S.,  to  lend. 
lemett,  to  learn. 
lefett,  S.,  to  read. 

le^t,  last;  ber  —ere,  the  latter,  157. 
Scute,  //.,  people;  (in  comp.  425). 
Itefi,    dear;   adv.,  —  er,    am   —  ften, 
rather,  liefer,  liefest,  485. 

Ite&en,  to  love. 
fiteb,  n.,  -er,  song. 
Itegcn,  S.,  to  lie,  be  situated. 
(tttf,  left  ;  adv.,  Itn!§,  on  the  left. 
lo&Ctt,  to  praise. 

Sorb,  m.,  pi.  -§,  1  20,  lord  (English). 
Sb'ttie,  m.,  lion. 
Sttft,/.,*e,  air. 
litflCU,  S.,  to  lie,  speak  falsely. 
Sttft,    /.,   ae,    pleasure,   desire:   — 
ijdbeit,  to  have  a  mind  (to). 


nmdjcn,  to  make,  do. 

,  n.  dim.,  girl,  maiden. 
,  **,  maid  (-servant). 
9JlaIer,  m.,  —  ,  painter. 
man,  indef.,  460,  one,  we,  they,  peo- 

ple, etc.  ;  or  by  pass. 
Plaint,  m.,  £er,  man,  425. 
9Jlantel,  m.,  *-,  mantle,  cloak. 
te^  gen.,  SWari'cnS,  Mary. 

m.,^,  market,  market-place. 
SDllatro/fe,  m.,  sailor. 
2Kuuer,  /.,  -n,  wall. 


334 


VOCABULARY. 


J1td)r  (irr.  comp.  btel),  indecL  more  ; 

—  ere,  //.  157,  several. 
Stteile,/.,  mile. 

weineit,  to  think,  mean. 
meiniij  (ber  —  e),  mine. 
melfeit,  sv  to  milk. 

'iWcitfd),  m.,  -en,  man,  human  being. 

9Keffer,  «.,  knife. 

SRetalT,  «.,  -e,  metal. 

3ffildjr/.,  milk. 

SRtneraC,  gen.   -3,  pi.  -ten,   119, 

mineral  ;    —  toaffer,     n.,    mineral 

water. 

SJlilti'fter,  »/.,  minister. 
SMttttt'te,  /.,  minute. 
mt^Hngen,  61.,  f.,  impers.,  to  fail. 
Itttt,   adv.,  along  (with  one)  ;  prep. 

(dat.),  with,  along  with,  in  com- 

pany with. 
tttdgen,   261,  modal:  to  like;  may, 

can,  etc.  472. 
^Roitat,  m.,  -e,  month. 
9Jioitb,  m.,  -e,  moon. 

.,  monument. 
,  m.t  —  ,  morning,  the  east  ; 

be§  —  §  or  morgen3,  of  a  morning. 


,  adv.,  to-morrow. 

miibe,  tired. 

u,  21  5,  to  multiply  ;  — 


mil,  by. 


,  n.  (or  m.},  minster,  cathe- 
dral ;  —  pld|5,  m.,  —  square. 

SJlufe'um,  ».,  gen.  -$,  pi.  -en,  118, 
museum.  [472. 

mtiffcn,  261,  modal  :  must,  have  to, 

2fttttterf  /.,//.",  mother. 


ttfldj,  ao'z'.,  after,  behind  ;  prep,  (dat.), 
after,  according  to,  towards  ;  —  = 


bem,  conj.,  after;  —  ^er,  adv.,  after- 

wards. 
•Kttdjbar,  m.,gen.  -§>,  pl.-n,  neigh- 

bor. 
9^a^|tnittagr    m.    comp.,    afternoon; 

(be§)  —  §,  of  an  afternoon. 
Itiirijft,  irr.  sup.  no^  ;  as  prep.,  next 

(to,  dat}. 

,  /.,  *e,  night. 

.,  needle. 
ttfll)(e),  ncifjer,  nad)ft,  near  (^/a/.). 
9£ame(n),  w.,  ^»».  -n§,  //.  -n,  99, 

name. 

!Warr,  m.,pl.,  -en,  fool. 
Itcbcit,  art'z'.,  near,  beside  ;  /r^/.  (i/a/. 

<?r  ace.)   beside,   by,   near,  along 

with. 
ttc6ftf   prep,  (dat.},  along    with,  be- 

sides. 

•Keffe,  m.,  nephew. 
ttCfymeit,    S.,    to    take    (from,    dat. 
pers.}. 

nein,  no. 

ttCtttten,  M.  to  name,  call. 
UCUf  new  ;  —  lid),  adv.,  recently. 
UCUH,    nine  ;  —  3e^n,    nineteen  ;    ter 
—  te,  the  ninth. 

ni^t,  not. 

tttrfjtS,  nothing. 

nicmanb,  244,  nobody. 

ttOtf),  still,  yet;  —  etit,  one  more;  — 
ntd)t,  not  yet;  (tueber)  .  .  .  nod), 
nor. 

.,  north. 


•Wot,  f.,  need,  distress. 


f  m.,  November. 
nittt,   now,  then,  well,  485  ;  as  conj.^ 

now  that,  since,  486,2. 
mtr,     only,    merely;    tod3  .  .  .  nur, 

whatever,  etc. 

useful. 


VOCABULARY. 


335 


OU,  o>«/.,  whether,  if ;  CilS  — ,  as  if  ; 
— gleid),  although,  486. 
t,  tf</z/.,  above,  up  (stairs). 

(gen.t  280),  above,  over. 
£>d)fe,  *».,  ox. 

ober,  or. 

DfftSier'j.  *».,  -e,  officer. 
oft,  "",  often,  frequently. 
ofjtte  (««).,  without,  but  for ;  —  511, 
without  .  .  .  in/in. ;  —  bcijj,  477,  c. 
£)|jr,  n.,  gen.  -e3,  //.  -en,  ear. 
Dltfel,  m.,  —,  uncle. 
£>ft(Ctt),  m.,  the  east. 


aar,  «.,  -e,  pair  (312);  em  paar,  a 
few  (245). 

,  *».,  £*«.  -3,  //.  -n,  slip- 
per: 

ier',  «.,  -c,  paper. 
t,  «.,  "e,  pope. 
aftor,  »/.,  ^«.  -§,  //.  -en,   117, 
pastor. 

ifett,  S.,  to  whistle,  pipe. 
>,  «.,  -e,  horse. 

,  213,  to  plant. 
,  w.,  ^e  t?r  -e,  plan. 

m.t  ~e,    place,  square  (in    a 
city). 

,  214,  to  chat. 

,  214,  to  plunder. 
,  /.,  -en,  post-office,  mail. 
,  m.,  prize,  price. 
,  »*.,  Prussian. 
inj,  m.t  -en,  prince. 
rofeffor,  m.,gen.-%,  pi.  -en,  117, 
professor. 

,  «.,  — ,  powden 


qitefleit,   -S". 
well. 


.,  298),  to  spring, 


f  /«.,  ^er,  edge,  brink. 
ratCtt,  ^.,  to  advise  (daf.). 
JH(ltI)OUi?,    «.    camp.,    council-house, 

town-hall. 

teJ^ttCtt,  212,  to  reckon,  count. 
9JedjttttUg,  /.,  account. 
rerf)t,    straight,    right,    just;    right 

(hand)  ;  —  §,  adv.,  on,  to,  the  right. 
9{ed)t,  n.,  -e,  right,  justice,  law;  — 

fja&en,  to  be  right. 
rebe«f  212,  to  speak. 

.,  rain. 

7,  «.,  //.  -er,  regiment. 
212,  to  rain. 

reirf),  rich. 

retf,  ripe. 

JHetfe,/.,  travel,  journey. 

rctf  Ctt  (2  1  3,  aux.,  298),  to  travel,  make 

a  journey. 
retffClt,  S.,  to  tear. 
TCitCtt  (246,  aux.t  298),  to  ride  (on 
horseback). 

7,  n.,  -e,  result. 
,  212,  to  rescue,  save. 
Oiljeitt,  m.,  Rhine. 
9f{orff  /».,  "e,  coat. 
rot,  ",  red. 

tdj,  reddish. 
t,  S.,  to  call,  summons. 
riltjtg,  quiet,  peaceful. 
dtljrett,  to  move,  excite. 
9ittfjfatlbr  n.  comp.,  Russia. 


3nd)C,  f.,  thing,  affair,  business. 


336 


VOCABULARY. 


fagett,  to  say. 

SamStag,  m.  comp.,  Saturday. 

fauer,  sour. 

fOttfeit,  S.,  to  drink  (of  animals). 

@rf)af,  «.,  -e,  sheep. 

@d)(ifer,  w.,  shepherd.  [do. 

fdjaffett,  S.,  to  create,  make ;   W.,  to 

frf)ttrf,  *,  sharp. 

6d)(UtfpteI,   n.  comp.,  -e,  spectacle, 

play. 

fdjciltett,  S.,  to  shine,  seem. 
fdjeltett,   S.,  to   scold,  call   (a  bad 

name). 

fdjerett,  S.,  to  shear,  cut. 
fdjirfen,  to  send. 

fd)tefcett,  S.,  to  shoot. 

<5d)tff,  «.,  -e,  ship,  boat. 

©djtffer,  m.,  skipper,  boatman. 

@rf)fad)t,  /.,  -en,  battle. 

fdjfafett,  -S.,  to  sleep. 

frf)lafng,  sleepy. 

@rf)tofstmmer,    «.    comp.,   sleeping- 
room. 

fd)IacjClt,  S.,  to  strike,  beat,  knock, 
reflex.,  to  fight. 

fdjledjt,  bad,  poor. 

f  d)Icid)Clt,  S.,  f.,  to  creep,  slink. 

fdjlcifcn,  S.,  to  whet,  sharpen. 

fd)Iief;cit,  S.,  to  shut,  close,  lock. 

frfjltngeit,  S.,  to  sling,  twine. 
?,  «.,  -"ffer,  castle,  palace. 
/.,  key. 

".,  f.,to  melt. 

.,  1 01,  pain, 
fdjnnubcit,  S.,  to  snort. 
SdjnCC,  m.,gen.-&,  snow. 

fd)uctbcn,  -S.,  to  cut. 
©djneiber,  w.,  tailor. 
fdjnetett,  to  snow. 

f(^ncHf  quick,  fast ;   —jug,  m.,  fast 
train,  express. 


fdjott,  already,  even,  surely,  485. 
fdjtht,  fine,  beautiful,  handsome. 

fr^rciben,  s.,  to  write. 

f djmeit,  S.,  to  cry  (out),  scream. 

fdjrettett,  S.,  \.,  to  stride,  step'. 

Stfjltf),  m.,  -e,  shoe. 

Sdjulb,  /.,  -en,  debt,  guilt;  as  adj, 
pred.,  in  fault,  to  blame,  448. 

(rdjule,  f.,  school ;  — tnobe,  m., 
school-boy;  — ftufie,  /.,  school- 
room. 

@d)ttler,  m.,  scholar,  pupil. 

@rf)iifjel,  /.,  dish. 

flf)ttttdtt,  214,  to  shake. 

ft^ttJa^,  "-,  weak. 

fdjttwrs,  *-,  black. 

(Sd^ttiefcf,    m.,   sulphur;  — Ijola,    «., 

•"er,  (sulphur)  match. 
S^ttlCtJ, /.,  Switzerland,  416. 
f d)U)Cr,  heavy,  difficult ;  — Ii(^,  adv., 

hardly. 

6(^tt)CftCrf  /.,  sister. 
f djnrilttmctt,  S.,  to  swim  (aux.,  298). 
fdjJUtttbcln,  214,  impers.  (dat),  to  be 

giddy. 

fdjftinbett, S.,  f.,  to  vanish,  disappear, 
f etfj3,  six ;  — mat,  six  times ;  — ^etjn, 

sixteen  ;  — 519,  sixty. 
<5eef  ^.,  -(e)n,  lake  ;  /.,  sea  (426). 
fegeltt,  214,  to  sail  (aux.,  298). 

fetjen,  S.,  to  see,  look. 

feljr,  very,  much. 
fctbCJt,  silken,  of  silk. 

@eife,  /.,  soap. 

feitt,  256,  b,  to  be ;  (as  aux.,  297). 
feit,  prep,  (dat.),  since  ;  as  conj.  (for 

fettbem),  since  (time),  486. 
@ette,  /.,  side ;  page. 

,  m.,  September. 
213,  to  set,  put:  reflex.,  to 
take  a  seat ;  /.  p.  gefe£t,  suppose. 


VOCABULARY. 


337 


fie&ett,  seven;  — (en^efyt,  seventeen. 
fingen,  s.,  to  sing. 
finfen,  s.,  \.,  to  sink. 
fitttteit,  S.,  to  think,  meditate. 

fi^en,  s.,  to  sit. 

^Of  so,  thus,  then  ;  often  not  transl. ; 

for  special  uses,  485  ;  — efcen,  just ; 

jo  ...  ttrie,  as  ...  as ;  efien — ,  just 

(as)  ;  — tooljl,  as  well  as,  also. 
@0I)tt,  m.,  *e,  son. 
©ofbot',  -en,  soldier, 
f  often,   261,  modal:  shall,  is  to;  is 

said  to,  472. 
©Otttttter,  m.,  — ,  summer. 

fonbent,  but,  326. 

Sonnabcitb,  m.  comp.,  Saturday. 
<30mte, /.,  sun;  — nfd)etn,   m.,  sun- 
shine. 

©Opfyi'e  (gen.  -tt§),  Sophia. 
SjW'tttett,  «.  (gen.  -§),  Spain. 
tyfit,    late;    — e[ten§,  £?«.  0</z/.,   at 
latest. 

.,  —,  spade. 

215,  to  walk,  exercise; 
-  fasten,  gefjen,  retten,  all  f.,  to 
take  a  drive,  walk,  ride. 

»*.,  ^w/.  *e,  walk. 
,  ^w/.  -[ale,  dining- 
room. 

tyielen,  to  play. 

Sprad)Cf  /.,  speech,  language. 
fpredjen,  S.,  to  speak. 

fprtngett,  S.  (aux.t  298),  to  spring, 

jump. 

(Strwt,  /«.,  ^».  -e§,  //.  -en,  state. 
Stobt,  /.,  ^e,  city,  town ;  — mauer, 

/".,  city-wall. 
ftar!f  ^,  strong. 
ftedjeit,  S.,  to  sting,  prick. 
ftefjClt,  S.,  to  stand;  —  fitetben,  to 

stand  still,  stop. 


fteljlett,  S.,  to  steal. 
ftetgen,  •$.,  f-,  to  mount,  rise. 
@tettt,  m.,  stone. 
ftcttCtt,  to  place,  put. 

fterfcen,  s.,  f.,  to  die. 

ftte&ett,  S.,  to  scatter,  fly  (like  dust). 
Sttefef,    m.,  gen.  -3,  //.  —  or  -n, 

105,  boot. 
ftttt,  still,  quiet. 

f   w.,  ~e,  stick,  cane;  story  (of 

house). 

,  /.,  street. 

«.  ^w/.,  -er,  match. 

,  •$.,  to  contend,  quarrel. 
@tu6e,  /.,  room. 
©tttbeitt7,  ^.,  -en,  student. 
ftubie'ren,  215,  to  study. 
(Stubium,  n.,  g  n.  -3,  //.  -ten,  u8, 

study. 

,  /«.,  "c,  chair. 

,  /.,  hour,  hour's  walk. 
<Stttrmf  w.,  "e,  storm. 

@iib(en)f  m.,  south. 

fu^,  sweet. 


tab  C  tit,  214,  to  blame. 
OT.,  -e,  day. 
».,  ^er,  valley,  vale. 
.,  —  ,  dollar. 

Xoitnc,  /.,  fir,  pine. 

Xante,  /.,  aunt. 

,  213,  to  dance. 

r,      m.     comp.,    dancing- 
master. 

,  brave,  bold. 
tUttfCttb,  (a)  thousand. 
£at,  /.,  -en,  deed,  fact. 

ll,  m.,  part  ;  —  3,  gen.  adv.,  partly. 

.,  temple. 
.,  theology. 


338 


VOCABULARY. 


,  m.,  -e  or  en,  105,  throne. 
ttef,  deep. 

Xiet,  «-,  -c,  animal,  beast. 
Xinte,  /.,  ink. 
£ifrf|,  m.,  table. 
£0rf)ter,  /.,  *,  daughter. 
£0b,  #z.,  death. 
tot,  dead,     totett,  to  kill. 
$or,  m.,  -en,  fool. 
$or,  ».,  -e,  gate. 
trag(e),  lazy. 

trajjen,  -5".,  to  carry,  bear  ;  wear. 
triiltmcn,  to  dream. 
treffeit,  S..  to  hit,  strike,  meet  with. 
treibett,  S.,  to   drive,  pursue;  intr. 

(aux.,  298),  to  drift,  move. 
tretCtt,  S.,  f.,  to  step,  tread. 
trtefCtt,  S.,  to  drip,  drop. 
trintCtt,  S.,  to  drink. 
trb'ftCtt,  212,  to  comfort. 
tun,  255,  to  do,  make;  intr.,  to  act. 

£ur(e),/.,  door. 

It, 


^.  («J  pref.  sep.   or  insep., 
287),   over,    above  ;   prep,    (datl), 
over,  above;   (ace.},  over,  above, 
beyond  ;  about,  concerning. 
liberal!,  everywhere. 

iibergeljen,  S.  sep.,  \.,  to  go  over, 

cross  ;  insep.  tr.,  to  pass  over,  omit. 
itlicnuimjCtt,  day  after  to-morrow. 

iiberfe^en,  sep.,  to   set   over,  put 

across  ;  insep.,  to  translate. 
iiberftdjCtt,  S.,  sep.,  to  project  jut  out  ; 

insep.,  to  overcome,  outlast. 
ttfcr,  n.,  shore,  bank. 
Htyr,  /-,  -en,  watch,  clock  ;  (indecl.) 

o'clock,  305. 
Ultt,  .adv.  (as  pref  .  sep.  or  insep.,  287),, 

around,  about  \prep.  (ace.),  around, 


about,  concerning,  for,  at  (time) ; 
urn  ...  tnillen,  (gen.,  280),  for  the 
sake  of;  um  ...  $u,  (in/in.),  in 
order  to  (281). 

umftdlClt,  S.t  sep.,  f.,  to  go  around; 
insep.  tr.,  to  evade. 

um-fommen,  s.,  f.,  to  perish. 

ttm=fdjreibettf  -5".,  sep.,  to  write  again; 

insep.,  to  paraphrase. 
UlUirttft,  unkind,  naughty. 
Uttb,  and. 

Ut^gflr,  -n,  Hungarian. 
Itngea^tet,  part.  adj.  as  prep,  (gen.), 

disregarding,  in  spite  of,  280. 
Ungebttlbio,,  impatient. 
Uttitoerfttiit',/.,  university. 
ttltredjt,    wrong;    --  Ijoben,    to    be 

wrong. 
tttireif,  unripe. 

un^,  us,  (to)  us. 

ttttfcr,  our. 

ttntClt,  adv.,  under,  below. 

Ulttcr,  adv.  (as  pref.  sep.  or  insep., 
287),  under;  prep.  (dat.  or  ace.), 
under,  beneath,  among. 

ttttter^geljett,  S.,  f.,  to  go  under,  sink, 
set. 

Utttcdjaltett,  S.,  to  maintain,  enter- 
tain ;  reflex.,  to  converse. 

ttttttett,    adv.,  not  far;  prep, 
280),  not  far  (from). 


,  m., JL,  father. 

fcerbieten,  s.,  to  forbid. 

£Bevb0tx,  n.,  -C,  prohibition. 
t)Crbrie|ett,  S.,  to  vex,  annoy. 
SJcrfaffer,  m.,  — ,  author. 

Dergcffeu,  s.,  to  forget. 

,  s.,  to  compare. 


VOCABULARY. 


339 


SSergttiigett,  «.,  satisfaction,  pleas- 
ure. 

DCdjitltCH,  •$.,  to  hold  back;  reflex., 
to  hold  one's  self,  be  related. 

UerJjeiratCtt,  212,  to  give  in  mar- 
riage; reflex.,  to  marry,  get  mar- 
ried. 

Uerimtt,  reflex.,  to  go  astray,  get  lost. 

toerlaufeu,  to  sell. 

toerlieren,  S.,  to  lose. 

Derittittefft  (gen.,  280),  by  means  of. 

,  •$-,  to  promise. 

S.,  to  understand. 
$erfurf)lttt0,  /.,  trial,  temptation. 
fcer-jeUjeit,  •$.,  to  pardon  (dat.). 
$erseU)ltttg,  /.,  pardon.         [cousin. 

better,  m., gen.  -%,  pi.  -n  or— ,  105, 

Did,  much ;  //.,  many,  245,  c. 
tJtcr,  four ;  bcr  — te,  the  fourth. 

l,  n.,  fourth  (part),  quarter. 

.,  *   bird. 

f,  «•,  "er,  people,  nation. 
=  bon  bent. 
Don  dat.,  from,  of,  by,  concerning. 
t)0r,    adv.,   before,    forward;  prep, 
(dat.},  before,   in   front    of ;  for ; 
ago ;  (ace.),  before,  to  the  front  of. 

t,  day  before  yesterday. 
uj,  preceding,  previous,  last. 
$ormttttb,  m.,  ^er,  guardian. 

),  adv.,  forward,  in  front. 


,   prep,   (gen.),   during;    as 
conj.,  while. 

ig,  true,  real. 
U(^r  probable. 
2Balb,  m.,  -"er,  wood,  forest, 
ttwmt,  when  (interrog.),  486. 
,  212,  to  wait. 


inter,  or  rel.,  (mat  for  Jt)0t, 
222),  for  what,  wherefore,  why. 
h)U3,  inter.,  what;  rel.,  what,  that, 
which ;   indef.  for   ettua^,    some- 
thing, some ;  adv.,  why,  how. 
UwfrtjCU,  S.,  to  wash. 

,  ».„  —  or  -,  water. 
,  neither;  .  .  .  nod),  noh 
,  m.,  way,  road. 

.  or  sep.  pref.,  away,  off. 
(gen.,  280),  on   account   of, 
for. 

lucid),  soft. 

U>etrf)CU,  S.,  \.,  to  yield,  submit. 
ttietl,  while ;  ^lsually,  because. 

295ein,  m.,  wine. 

ttietttCtt,  to  weep. 
SSeife,  /.,  way,  manner. 
ttlCtf(e),  wise. 

ijj,  white;  —ltd),  whitish. 

tt,  wide,  broad  ;  far. 
ttieldjcr,    inter.,   which,   what;    rel., 

who,  which,  that ;  indef.,  some. 
223ett,  /.,  -en,  world. 
toeutg,   little;  ein  — ,   a  little;  //., 

few,  245,  c. 
tUCltU,  486,  when,  whenever;  if;  - 

and),  gletd),  although,  386. 
ttJCr,  inter.,  who  ;  rel.,  who,  whoever. 
toerbett,  S.,  \.,  to  become ;  (as  aux.t 

173-4)- 

toerfen,  s.,  to  throw. 

r  n.,  -e,  work. 

.,  vest. 

223eft(Ctt),  m.,  west. 

,  n.,  weather. 

,  inter.,  how ;  rel.,  how,  as,  when. 
,  adv.  and  insep.  pref.,  288, 
again,  against;  prep.  (ace.), 
against.  [again,  back. 

,    adv.   and  sep.  pref.,    288, 


34° 


VOCABULARY. 


UriCflCU,  S.,  to  weigh. 
uricUtd,  comp.,  how  much ;  pi.,  how 
many;    ber  — fte,    as    ord.   num., 
what  number,  what   (day  of  the 

month). 

ttJilb,  wild,  savage. 
233ittb,  m.,  wind. 
ttUUbcit,  <S.,  to  wind,  twine. 
SStttter,  m.,  winter, 
tutffcit,  M.,  to  know,  know  how,  un- 
derstand. 
tt)0,  inter,  and  rel.,  where,  when,  if ; 

in  camp.,  before  vowels,  WOT,  222. 
)e,/.,  week. 

,  222,  wherefor,  for  what, 
whence,  where   from   (also 

sep.,  484).  [484). 

U)0f)itt,  whither,  where  to  (also  sep., 
tt)0f)l,  well,  surely,  indeed,  485. 
U)Ol)U)aUCltb,    part,    adj.,   well    off, 

wealthy. 

tt)0f)tten,  to  dwell,  live. 
2BoI)tt;$immer,     n.,    dwelling-room, 

sitting-room. 
SBolle,/.,  cloud. 
Uiollctt,   261,  modal:  to  will,  wish, 

intend,  pretend  (472). 
UJOrntt,  222,  whereon;  on,  at,  what 

or  which. 
WOrailf,      222,     whereupon;    upon, 

after,  what  or  which. 
tt)0rau§,    222,    whereout;    out    of, 

from,  what  or  which. 
S$0tt,  n.,  ^er,  or  -e,  425,  word. 

),  n.  comp.,  dictionary. 
,   222,  wherever ;  over,  on, 

concerning,  what  or  which. 
Motion,    222,  wherefrom;  from,  by, 

of,  what  or  which. 

293unbe,  /.,  wound. 

Uritnfrf)CH,  213,  to  wish. 


,  /.,  -en,  number, 
to  pay. 

to  number,  count. 
_3a!jtt,    m.,   *e,    tooth;    — h)e^,     »., 

toothache. 

5C^n,  ten;  ber — te,  the  tenth. 
5Ct(f)UCH,  212,  to  draw,  design. 
jcigcn,  to  show. 
3ctt,  /.,  -en,  time;  — alter,  n.,  age 

(of  the  world). 
3cttung,  /.,  newspaper. 

Serftoren,  to  destroy. 

,  S.,  to  draw,  pull;  intr.  f.,  to 
move,  march. 
,  to  adorn. 

n.,  room. 

JU,  adv.  (w.  verb)  to;  (w.  adj.),  too; 
prep,  (dat),  to,  in  addition  to ;  at, 
in,    on ;   —  §ufj,    on    foot ;    with 
infin.,  Uttt  .  .  .  5U,  in  order  to. 
5UfrtC/bcn,  adj.  comp.,  content,  satis- 
fied. 
3llJJ,  m.,  -"e,  draught,  train,  march ; 

trait,  feature. 
gum,  for  p  bent. 
or  gu  ber. 
,  adv.,  back,  behind. 

ommett,  S.,  \.,  to  come  back. 

SUrurf=fd)trfett,  to  send  back. 

sufammcn,  together. 

5lUUtbcr  (dat.,  280),  contrary,  repug- 
nant (to). 

5U)an5tg,  twenty;  ber — fie,  thetwen 
tieth. 

ftttwr,  indeed,  truly. 

jttiei,  two;  — mat,  twice;  ber  — te, 
the  second. 

5tmtt0en,  S.,  to  compel,  force. 

Stub'lf,  twelve. 


II. 


ENGLISH*  GERM  AN* 

See  Explanatory  Notes,  p.  324.     References  are  to  §§. 


A. 

a,  an,  419;  many,  such,  what — , 
420 ;  not  — ,  lent. 

abbot,  ber  Stfct,  *e. 

able,  tiidjtig;  to  be — ,  fbmten,  261, 
472. 

aboard,  on  Sorb;  all — !  ein=fteigen, 
336. 

about,  adv.,  nm,  287,  itmljer,  Ijerum  ; 
prep,  (around)  um  (ace.);  (on  ac- 
count of)  toegen  (gen.);  concern- 
ing) itfcer  (ace.) ;  (near)  gegen  (ace.) ; 
to  be  —  to,  im  SBegriff  fein  ...  p. 

absent,  a6tt>efenb,  part,  adj.;  ab- 
sence, bie  SttJroefenljett. 

abuse,  v.,  ntipraudjen,  288;  (in 
words)  fcfjimpfen ;  n.,  ber  9Jf t 

accept,  an=nef)nten,  S. 

accidental,  gufallig ;  adv.,  — ly, 
toeife,  399. 

accompany,  Begleiten,  212. 

accomplish,  boflfiringen,  288. 

account,  bie  3?ecf)nung ;  on  —  of,  toe* 
gen  (gen.) ;  on  that  — ,  be3f)al6. 

accuse,  cm=flagen,  befdjulbigen,  434,  b. 

acknowledge,  an=ertennen,  289. 

acquainted  (with),  Befannt  mil,  (dat. 
person) ;  fltnbig  (gen.  thing). 

acquit,  frei=fpred)ett  (ace.,  gen.,  379). 

across,  adv.,  ii6er,  ^tniifier;  -prep., 
liber  (ace.). 


act,  v.,  fjcmbelrt,   214,  tun,   255;   n. 

same  as : 

action,  bie  £anbtwtg,  bie  Sat,  -en. 
adapted,  geetgnet;  ( —  to,  511). 
address,  v.,  amreben ;  n.,  bie  Stnrebe ; 

(of  a  letter)  bie  Slbreffe. 
adorn,  5ieren,  fdjmiicfen. 
advice,  ber  S^at,  422  ;  z/.,  advise,  ra* 

ten  (dat.,  248). 
affair,  bie  Stngelegenfjeit. 
afraid,  fccmge ;  to  be  — ,  ftdj  fiirc^ten ; 

to  feel  — ,  fcangen  (impers.,  291). 
after,  prep.,  nac^  (dat);  conj.,  nac^)= 

bent;  — wards,  narfjljer,  barnac^. 
afternoon,  ber  Sftadjmittag ;  in  the  — , 

be£  — 8,  or  nac£)mittag3. 
again,  loieber,   tuieberum;   once  — , 

nodjmaI3,  nocfi  etnmat. 
against,  gegen  (ace.),  toiber  (ace.) ;  — 

it,  bagegen. 
age,  n.,  (old  age),  ba§  5CItcr;  —  of 

the  world,  3eitalter ;  v.,  oltern,  214. 
ago,  bor  (dat),  ^er ;  a  year  — ,  bor 

einem  ^a^re ;  long  — ,  lange  ^er. 
agree,   fic^    bertragen,    249,   iiberein= 

fomnten,  S.,  \. 

agreeable,  angeneljm  (to,  dat.). 
air,  bie  Suft,  ^e. 
alas,  ad) !  leiber  (inverts  verb). 
all,  all,  460;  (entire)  ganj,  144. 
allow,  erlcwktt  (dat.,  ace.,  437) ;  be 

— ed,  biirfen  (modal,  472). 


342 


VOCABULARY. 


almost,  faft,  fceinafje. 

alms,  ba§  Sllmc/fen. 

along,  prep.,   ItingS  (gen.),   entlang 

(ace.)  ;  —  with,  mit,   nefcft   (dat)  ; 

adv.,  (with  one)  mit. 
aloud,  tout. 
Alps,  Me  Sttpen,  //. 
already,  fdjon. 
also,  aud> 
although,  obgleid),  ofifrfjon,  ofilDO^I; 

«/j<?  sep.,  06  ...  gletd),  etc.,  486. 
always,  hnmer,  ftet§. 
ambassador,  bcr  ©efanbte  (part.,  fen* 

ben,  #j  noun). 
American,  ber  Stmertfa'ner  ;  — ,  adj., 

amerifamfd). 

amiable,  Iie&enStoiirbig. 
amount,  n.,  Me  ©umnte;  v.,  — to, 

fietragen,  S. 
ancient,  alt,  *,  eljcmaltg ;  the  — s,  bie 

Sttten. 

and,  unb;  both  — ,  fotool)!  .  .  .  oB. 
angry,  Coring,  fcbfe ;  to  be  — 5  prnen. 
animal,  ba3  Xier,  -e. 
another,   cin   anberer;    (additional) 

nodj  ein. 
answer,  n.,  bie  9Cnttoort,  -en ;  v.,  ctnt= 

toorten  (dat.,  212);  (correspond  to) 

entfpred)en,  S.,  (dat.). 
antiquity,  ba3  Slltcrtum,  ^er. 
any,  irgenb  ein;  pron.,  — body,  — 

one,  jentanb;  — thing,  cttoad;  not 

— ,  fetn ;  not  — thing,  mcf)t3  ;  often 

not  trans. 
apartment,  ba§  ghrnner,  ba§  ©emadj, 

^er. 
appearance,     bie     (Srfdjetnung,    ber 

©c^ein  (seeming'). 
appetite,  ber  StppetiK,  gen.  -§. 
apple,   bcr    Sfyfel,   *; tree,   ber 


§eer, 
.  Ijer  ; 


appoint,  Beftimmen;  (to  office,  443, 

d)  ernennen,  M. 
apprentice,  ber  Celling. 
arch-,  prefix,   Sr3/-;   —  angel,    ber 

Gsrgengel  ;  —  bishop,  ber  Gr^btfdjof, 

*e  ;  —duke,  ber  ©r^eraog,  -e. 
arise  (from),  ^erbor=ge^en,  S.,  f.,  (ait§, 

dat.). 
arm,  (limb)  ber  tot,  -e;  (weapon) 

bie  SSaffc  ;  coat  of  —  s,  ba§ 

pen,  —  . 
army,  bie  9(rmee/,  -(e)n,   ba3 

-e. 
around,  /r^/>.,  urn  (ace.),  um  .  . 

adv.,  limber,  ^eritm. 
arrive,  an=lomnten,  S.,  \, 
art,  bie  $unft,  *e. 
as,  adv.,  aK,  hJte,  450,  2  ;  as  ...  as, 

(e5en)fo  ...  tote;    conj.,  toie,   ba 

(reason,  485)  ;  —  if,  al§  (toenn), 

aB  (ob),  350,  2. 
ascend,  ^r.,  fieftetgen,  erfteigen  ;  intr., 

(^tn)ouf=fteigen,  f.  all  S. 
ashamed,   befd)tintt;   to  be  —  ,  fid) 

fdjcimen  (gen.). 
ask    (question),   fragen  ;    (petition) 

bitten/  S.,  —  (for)  ,  —  um  (ace.). 
assertion,  bie  Se^auptung. 
assist,  Betsfteljen,  S.,  fjelfen,  S.,  (both 

dat.). 

assure,  berftdjern. 

at,  an,  su,  6et,  in,  auf  (dat.),  unt  (ace.)  ; 
-  home,  p  £aufe;  —  noon,  311 

TOtag  ;  —  10  o'clock,  um  10  Ufjr  ; 

—   once,  auf    etnmal  ;    —  one's 

house,  6et  (dat.). 
attack,  n.,  ber  Stngriff  ;  v.,  an=greifen, 

S. 
attend  (company),  fcegteiten  ;  (pres- 

ence) 6ei=toof)nen  (dat). 
attentive,  aufmerffam. 


VOCABULARY. 


343 


August,  ber  Sfaguft',  gen.  -§. 
aunt,  bie  Xante. 
author,  ber  SSerfaffer,  — . 
autumn,  ber  §erbft. 
await,  erttmrten.  [d)en,  f. 

awake,  v.  tr.,  toeden ;  intr.,  auf=nm= 
away,  toeg,  ab,  fort. 
awkwardness,  bie  ttngefd)irflid)fett. 


B. 


back,   «.,   5er  Sviiden  ;  adv., 

nieber  ;  —  wards,  riidltmrtS- 
bad,  fd)led)t;  (active)  bb'fe. 
baggage,  bie  baggage,  ba§  ©efcdrf. 
bake,  baden,  S. 
baker,  ber  33dder. 
balloon,  ber  SBatton'. 
bank,   (shore)  ba3  lifer,   —  ;  (com- 

mercial) bie  23an!,  -en,  424. 
bath,  bci§  33ab,  *er. 
bathe,  baben. 
be,  fein  ;  pass,  auxil.,  merben,  273  ; 

is  to,  fotten,  472  ;  (in  health)  fid) 

befinben,  S. 
bear,  n.,  ber  SBiir,  -en  ;  —  's  skin,  ba3 

^BdrenfeE.  [ertrogen. 

bear,  z/.,  (carry)  tragen,  S.;  (suffer) 
beat,  fd)Iagen,  S. 
beautiful,  fdib'n. 
because,  tneit. 
become,  (grow)  taerben  ;  (suit)  gp.3ie= 

men    (dat.)  ;  -  -    of,    loerben    QU§ 

(dat.}. 

bed,  ba§  Sett,  gen.  -c3,  //.  -en,  105. 
beer,  ba§  S3ter. 
befall,  begegnen,  f.  (dat.). 
before,  prep.,  t>or  (dat.  or  ace.)  ;  adv., 

borfjer;  conj.,  bebor,  e^e;  —  hand, 

border  ;  (also  sep.  pref). 
beg,  bitten,  -5".  ;  —  for,  —  um  (ace). 


begin,  beginnen,  S. ;  an-fangen,  S. 
behave,  fid)  betragen,  S. ;  fid)  benefc 

men,  -5". 
behavior,  bo§  betragen,  ba§  33enef)= 

men  (inf.  nouns). 
behind,  adv.,  Fjinter,    287,    Ijinten ; 

prep.,  ^inter  (dat.  or  ace). 
believe,  glcmben  (dat.,  ace.  437,  2). 
bell,  bie  ©locfe. 
belong,  gef)b'ren  (dat.). 
beloved,  geliebt  (part.  adj.). 
below,  adv.,  unten ;  prep.,  nnter  (dat. 

or  ace). 

bench,  bie  S3anf,  *e,  424. 
beside,  prep,  (dat.,  ace),  nebcn. 
besides,  prep,   (dat),   onf,er;    adv., 

au^erbem. 
best,  beft  (irr.  sup.,  gnt) ;  to  do  one's 

— ,  fein  $8efte3  tun. 
betray,  berroten,  S. 
better,  beffer  (irr.  comp.,  gut). 
between,/^/,  (dat.  or  ace),  3tnifd)en. 
big,  grofe,  *,  156. 

bill  (account),  bie  9ted)nung  ;  (of  ex- 
change) ber  28ed)fel. 
bird,  ber  SSogel,  *. 
bishop,  ber  S3ifd)of,  ^e. 
bite,  beifeen,  S. 
bitter,  bitter;  — ly,  bttterlid). 
black,  fdjhmra,  *-. 
blame,  tabeln. 
blind,  blinb. 
bloom,  blii^en. 
blossom,  bliiljen. 
blow,  n.,  ber  @d)Iag,  ^e. 
blow,  v.,  blafen,  S.;  —  up,  fprengen. 
blue,  blau.     bluish,  blaulirfj. 
boat,  ber  ®arm,  *e,  ba§  S3oot,  105; 

— man,  ber  ©djiffer. 
body,  berSeib,  -er,  ber.ffbrper;  any — , 

etc.,  see  any. 


344 


VOCABULARY. 


bombard,  bombarbte'ren. 

Boniface,  $8onifaciu3. 

book,  ba§  93ud),  *er. 

boot,  ber  ©ttefel,  gen.  -§,  pi.  105. 

born,  geboren,  /.  /.  gebarett  (as  adj.}. 

both,  betbe,  bte  beiben  ;   betbeS,  460  ; 

conj.,  both  .  .  .  and,  fotoof)!  .  .  .  oIS. 
bottle,  bte  §Iafd)e. 
bough,  ber  91ft,  -e,  ber  Stoetg. 
boy,   ber  Snabe  ;    —  s'    school,    bte 

®nabenfd)itle. 
brave,  tapfer. 
bread,  ba§  33rot,  -e. 
breadth,  bte  Sreite. 
break,  bredjen,  S.  ;  —  out,  att£=bre= 

djen  ;  —  in  pieces,  aerbredjen. 
breakfast,  «.,  baS  3ritfjftii(f;  *'•»  to 

—  ,  friifjftitden,  380. 
breathe,  atmen,  212. 
bride,  bie  33raut,  -c. 
bridge,  bte  33riirfe. 
bright,  ^elt. 
bring,  brtngen,  M.  ;  —  with  (one's 

self),  along,  mtt=  —  ;  back,  5itriicf=  —  . 
broad,  fcrett;  --  shouldered,  6rett= 

fd)ultrtg. 
brother,  ber  SSruber,  -  ;  or  pi.  coll., 

bte  ©ebriiber,  387. 
build,  bcmen  ;   —  ing,   «.,    ba§    ©e= 

fiaube,  —  . 
bundle,  ba§  33unb,  -e,  426  ;  ber,  (boi3) 

Sunbet. 
burn,  brennen,  M.  ;  —  up,  t>erbren= 

nen. 
bush,  ber  33ufd),  ^c  ;  coll.,  bushes,  ba£ 


but,  con/.,  aber,  aUetn,  fonbern,  326  ; 

adv.,  (only)  nur  ;  prep.,   (except) 

aufcer  (dat). 
butter,  bte  Gutter. 
buy,  laufen. 


by,  prep.,  (place)  bet,  neben  (dat.) ; 
(agent)  bon  (dat.} ;  (means)  bitrd) 
(ace.} ;  adv.,  (near)  bdbet ;  (past) 
borbet. 


C. 


cab,  bte  ®rofdjfe. 

call,  rufen,  S. ;  (name)  nennen  M.;  — 
out,  au§=rufen  ;  —  on,  (visit)  bejtt= 
^en  ;  —  out  (local)  f)erau§=rufen. 

can,  lonnen,  261,  472. 

capable,  fciljig  (gen.}. 

captain,  ber  §cutptmantt,  -^er ;  ber  $a= 
pitan^  -e. 

carriage,  ber  SSagen,  —  or !L. 

carry,  (bear)  tragen,  S.,  brtngen,  M. ; 
(lead)  fit^ren ;  —  out,  (execute) 
auSfutjrett,  (local)  I)inait§=tragen ; 

—  up,  ^inaitf=tragen,  S. 
castle, 

cat,  bte 

cattle,  bo§  SStet). 

cause,  «.,  bte  ll^fadje;  (reason)  ber 
©ritnb,  -^e;  v.,  beritrfadjen. 

celebrated,  tr.,  berii^mt  (part.  adj.}. 

cellar,  ber  letter. 

center,  ber  Sftittelptmft,  -e ;  — of  grav- 
ity, ber  ©djtoerpunft. 

certain,  getotf?,  befttmntt  (part.  adj}. 

chain,  bie  £erte. 

chair,  ber  ©tu^I,  *e. 

change,  cinbern,   toed)feln ;  intr.,  ftd) 

—  ;  —  cars,  um=ftetgen,  S. 
chapter,  ba§  J?apt/te(,  — . 

charge,    (accusation)    bte   93efd)itlbt* 

gung  ;  (attack)  ber  SCngriff. 
Charles,  tarl. 
chat,  plattbern. 

cheese,  ber  Safe.  gen.  -3,  //.  — . 
chemistry,  bte 


VOCABULARY. 


345 


cherry,  Me  $irfdje  ;  —  tree, 

bourn. 
child,   bag  $tnb,   -cr;  —  hood,   Me 

SHnbfjett;    —  ish,   finbtfd)  ;    —like, 

ftnbltd). 
Christian,  ber  Gljrtft,  -en  ;  adj.,  rfirtft^ 

Ud). 

Christianity,  bag  (Efjrtftentum. 
Christmas,  Me  28etl)nad)ten,  //. 
church,  Me  $trd)e  ;  --  tower,  -steeple, 

ber  $trd)turm. 
city,  bie  <5tabt,  ^e  ;  —wall,  bte  Stabt* 

ntouer. 

class,  bte  Piaffe. 
clean,  adj.,  rein  ;  v.,  reintgen. 
clear,  Her,  beutltd). 
clerk,  ber^omnrig',  120,  ber  ©djreiber. 
climb,  fltmnten,  S.,  f. 
cloak,  ber  Mantel,  *. 
cloister,  bag  Softer,  *. 
close,  fdjliefeen,  S.,  3U=ntad)en. 
cloth,  bag  £ndj,  *er. 
clothes,  //.  bte  SHetber. 
clothe,  fleiben. 

cloud,  bte  2SoI!e  ;  coll.,  clouds,  387. 
coach    (see    carriage)  ;    —  man,    ber 


coat,  ber  ffioef,  *t. 

coffee,  ber  ®affee,  gen.  -§>. 

cold,  fait,  *  ;  it  is  —  ,  e3  friert  ;  I  am 

—  ,  e§  friert  ntid),  mid)  friert. 
Cologne,  ^bln  ;  as  adj.,  Joiner,  143. 
color,  bte  $aifo  ;  v.,  forben. 
Colossus,  ber  ^oIoB7,  gen.  -e§,  //.  -e. 
come,  lontnten,  S.,  f.  ;  —  of,  toerben 


comfort,  n.,  ber  Sroft  ;  z/.,  trbftcn. 
command,  v.,  (order)  fiefe^Ien,   S.  ; 

(control)  geMeten,  S.,  (iifcer,  ace.). 
companion,  ber  ©efci^rte  ;  /., 

tin,  -nen. 


company,  bte  ©efeUfdjaft ;  (inilit.}  bte 

(Eompagnte7  (French}. 
compare,  bergletd)en,  S. 
comparison,  ber  SSergletd). 
compel,  atotngen,  S. 
compliment,  ba§  ftotnpttntent^  -e ; 

to  send  one's  — s-to,  fid)  empfe^Ien, 

S.  (dat.). 

comprehend,  begreifen,  6". 
concern,  ftetreffen,   S. ;  an=gef)en,  S., 

(both  ace}. 

concert,  ba§  ^onaert7,  -e. 
conducive,   Menltd),   fie^iilfltd) ;  (both 

dat.,  438). 
conduct,  v.,  (lead),  fitljren  ;  —  one's 

self,  fid)  beneljmen,  S.;  n.,  ba§  93e= 

ne^men  (infin.}. 
conquer    (a    place),    crobern ;     (an 

enemy)  befiegen. 
conscious,  betoufet  (gen.,  433). 
consider,  tr.,  bebenfen,  M.,  iiberlegen  ; 

intr.,  fid)  bebenfen ;  —  as,  fatten 

fiir  (ace.). 

contented,  aitfrteben. 
contrary ;   -  -  to,  aitttriber  (follows 

dat.) ;  on  the  — ,  bagegen,  tm  ©e* 

gentett. 

convent,  ba§  Sloftcr,  -. 
conversation,  'bag  ©efprad),  -e,   bte 

tlnterljaltimg.  [fe^ren. 

convert/  v.,  bertoanbeln  ;  (moral)  be= 
convince,  iiberaeugen  (ace., gen.,  434). 
cook,  (man)  ber  $od),  -c ;  (woman) 

bie  ®bd)tn,  -nen. 
cool,  !u'^t. 

copy,  v.,  ab=fd)retben,  S. 
corner,  bte  Srfe. 
cost,  v.t  f  often  (ace.,  442). 
cottage,  bte  £ittte. 

count,  n.,  ber  ®rnf,  -en  ;  — ess,  bt€ 
Srciftn,  -nen. 


346 


VOCABULARY. 


count,  v.f  3cif)Ien  ;  (reckon)  redjnen. 
country,  ba§  8anb,  //.  -^er,   or  -e, 

425  ;    —  man,   ber   Sanbmann,   or 

2anb§mann,  425,  c;  —  people,  2anb= 

leute. 
course,  ber  Sauf,  gen.  -e§;  of  —  ,  na= 

tiirlid),  e£  berftef)t  fid). 
court,  ber  £of,  ^e. 
cousin,  ber  Setter,  gen.  -§,  //.  -n,  or 

—  ,  105;  bie  eouft^e. 
cover,   v.,   berfen,    bebeden  ;    «.,    bie 

S)ede,  ber  £)edel. 
cow,  bie  ®ufj,  *e. 

creep,  fried)en,  S.,  (slink)  fdjleidjen,  S. 
crime,  ba§  Serbredjen. 
cross  (over),  iiber=fe|}en,  287. 
crowd,  bie  Sftenge,  431,  c. 
crown,    bie    ®rone;    —  prince,    ber 


crucifix  (cross),  baS  ^reu^,  -e. 
crumble  (to  pieces),  gerfallen,  S.,  f. 
cry  (out),  fdjreien,  S.  ;  (weep)  toeinen. 
cup,  ber  93ed)er,  bie  Saffe. 
curse,  «.,  ber  §Iud),  -^e  ;  z/.,  berflud)en. 
cut,  e/.,  fd)neiben,  6".  ;  —  off,  abfdjnei= 
ben. 

D. 


dance,  «., 

dancing-master, 

dangerous,  gefafjrlirf). 

dare,  umgen,  biirfen,  261,  472. 

dark,  bunfel  ;  to  grow  —  ,  bunteln. 

date,  n.,  ba3  Saturn  ;  z>.,  botiexren. 

daughter,  bie  Sodjter,  •*. 

day,  ber  Xag,  -e  ;  to  —  ,  fjeute  ;  adj., 

of  to  —  ,  Ijeutig  ;  some  —  ,  einft. 
dead,  tot. 

deaf,  taufc  ;  —  and  dumb,  taubftiimm. 
dear,  lieb,  teuer. 
death,  ber  Sob,  422. 


deceive,  fcetriigen,  S.,  Ijintergefiett,  -5". 

decide,  entfd;eiben,  S. 

declare,  erfltiren,  6el)aupten. 

deed,  bie  Sat,  -en. 

deem,  Ijalten,   S.,   fitr;  —  worthy, 

toiirbigen,  (ace.,  gen?). 
deep,  tief. 
defy,  tro^en  (dat.) ;  Sro^  bieten,  S. 

(dat.,  437). 

degenerate,  adj.,  tnifegeartet,  288. 
delight,  n.,  bie  grettbe,  106;  v.,  er= 

freuen ;  intr.,  fid)  freuen  (gen.) ;  to 

be — ed,fid)  freuen  (orimpers.,  291)- 
deliver,  Itefern,  iiberliefern. 
dentist,  ber  3af)nar5t. 
deny,  leugnen,  berneinen. 
depend,  ab4jangen,   S. ;  —  on,  bon 

(dat.}. 

deprive,  rau&en,  berauben,  440. 
desert,  ».,  tierlaffen,  S. 
desert,  n.,  bie  SBtiftc. 
deserve,  berbienen. 
desire,  berlangen;  also  impers.,  mi^fi 

berlangt  (nadj). 
despise,  beradjten. 
destroy,  ^erftbren,  (spoil)  berberben, 

S. 

devotion,  bie  drgebentjeit. 
dictionary,  ba3  SSb'rterbud). 
die,  fterben,  S.,  f. 
difficult,  fdjtoer. 
dig,  graben,  S. 
dignity,  bie  SSiirbe. 
diligent,  fleifjig. 
dine,  3"  SKittag  effen,  S.,  379. 
dining-room,  ber  ©peifefaal,  -fate. 
dinner,  ba§  SD^tttagefjen  (inf.  noun}. 
disagreeable,  unangenefjm  (to,  dat}. 
disapprove,  mipiHigen,  288. 
dish,  bie  ©djiiffel. 
dismiss,  entlaffen,  S.,  434. 


VOCABULARY. 


347 


dissatisfied,  unaufrteben. 
distance,  Me  Cntfcrnung,  Me  SBcite. 
distinct,  (clear)  beutltd);   (different) 

berfdjteben. 
distinguish,    unterfdjeiben,    S.;    - 

one's  self,  fid)  au§=3etd)nen. 
distress,  n.,  Me  9?ot,  ba§  Clcnb  ;  — 

ing,  adj.,  elenb,  petnltd). 
ditch,  ber  ©ra&en,  1L, 
divide,    Mtribte'rett,   215;   (separate) 

enratoeten  ;  (distribute)  berteifen. 
divine,  gottlid). 
do,  tun,  255,  tnadjen  ;  (in  health)  fid; 

fcefinben,  S.;  as  aux.  not  transl. 
doctor,  ber  S)oftor,  117;  (physician) 


dog,  ber  §unb,  —  e. 

dollar,  ber  Safer,  —  . 

door,  bte  £u're. 

double,  boppelt. 

doubt,  «.,  ber  Btoetfel;  v.,  jtocifcln. 

down,  nieber;  Ijer*  or  Ijin*a&,  =unter, 

484;  —  hill,  ftergab. 
dozen,  bo§  $)u£enb. 
draw,  (attract)  gieljen,  6",;  (design) 

aetdjnen  ;  —  ing,  bie  Beidjnitng. 
dress,  «.,  ba§  $leib,  bie  f  leibung  ;  v. 

tr.,  fletben  ;  intr.t  fid)  on^te^en,  -5". 
drink,   v.t  trtnfen,  S.,  (of  animals) 

jcwfen,  S.;  n.,  ba§  ©etranf. 
drinkable,  trtnffior. 
drip,  triefett,  S. 
drive,  tr.,  treifien,  S.  ;  (a  carriage)  tr., 

fiUjren  ;  tntr.,  fasten,  6\,  f.  ;  to  take, 

go  for  a  —  ,  fpaaieren  faljrcn. 
drunken,  fietrunlen. 
dry,  adj.,  trorfen;  v.,  trocfnen. 
dumb,   ftumm;    deaf  and  —  ,  tou6= 

ftumm. 

during,  Jrd^renb  (gen.,  280). 
duty,  bte  Wtdjt,  -en. 


dwell,  tnoljtten. 

dye,  ».,  bte  gorfee;  v.,  farben. 

E. 

each,  jeber;  — one,  jeber,  ein  jeber; 

—  other,  etnanbcr  (indecl.}. 
eagle,  ber  9lbler,  — . 
ear,  ba§  C^r,  gen.  -c§,  //.  -en. 
early,  frii^. 

earth,  bte  Grbe,  106;  — ly,  irbtfd). 
easy,  letdjt. 

East,  ber  Often ;  (fig.)  ber  3ftorgen. 
Easter,  Cftern  (//.). 
eat,  effen,  -5".,  (of  animals)  frejfen,  S. 
eatable,  efebar. 
edge,  ber  3?anb,   "cr;  (of  knife)  bte 

<5djneibe. 
education,  bie  G 
egg,  ba§  Gt,  -er. 
eight,  od;t;  — (t)een,  adjtje^n ;  — (t)y, 
either,   BetbeS,  '460;    correl.    conj., 

enttoeber  .  .  .  ober  (or). 
elderly,  altltd). 

elect,  v.,  tnd^Ien,  errt)df)Ien  (511,  443). 
eleven,  elf;  the  — th,  ber  elfte. 
emperor,  ber  $aifer. 
end,  n.,  ba3  ©nbe,  gen.  -&,  pi.  -n ;  v., 

enbtgen. 

enemy,  ber  §einb ;  coll.,  the  — ,  pi. 
England,  (bag)  Gnglanb. 
English,  engltfd);  — man,  ber  Gngx= 

Icinber. 

enmity,  bte  Sdnbfcljaft. 
enough,  genug7  (usually  follows). 
enter,  (I)er=  or  ^tn=)  etn=ge()en,  S.,  f. ; 

etn=treten,  -5".,  f. 
entertain,  itnierljalten,  S. 
entire,  gcin^,  144;  adv.,  also  gtinolidj. 
equal,  gleidj  (dat),  gen;ad)fen  (dat.); 

v.,  gletd)=fommen,  S.,  f.  (379,  dat). 


VOCABULARY. 


err,  fid)  irren. 

errand-boy,  bet  2auftwrfd)e. 

escape,  entgefjen,  -5".,  f. ;  (run  off)  ent= 

fottfen  S.,  f.  (both  dat.}. 
estate,   baS  ©ut,  ^er;    —  country, 

Sanbgut,  ^er. 

esteem,  ad)ten,  fallen  fiir. 
Europe,  (bag)  Gitropa. 
evade,  umgefjen,  S.y  287. 
even,  adj.,   e&en;    adv.,   and),    485, 

fettft  454- 
evening,  ber  2tbenb,  -e ;  in  the  — , 

be§  — §  or  a&enbg,  435. 
event,  bie  33ege6enf)eit,  ba§  GretgniS, 

-fie- 

ever,  je,  jemalS ;  (always)  tmmer. 
every,    jeber,    alter,    460 ;    — body, 

— one,  etn  jeber,  jebermann ;  — thing, 

atteg ;  — where,  ii&eratt. 
except,  v.,  au&=nefjmen,  S.;  as  prep., 

au§er  (dat.),  o^ne  (a^.) ;  /ar/.,  auS* 

genommen. 
excessive,  iifienndjjtg;  aj-  adv.,   au= 

feerft,  450,  — ,  c. 
excitement,  bie  3lufregung. 
excuse,  v.,  entfd)ulbigen ;  «.,  bie  Snt= 

fd)itlbigung. 
exercise,   bie  Ubung ;    (lesson)   ba$ 

eyerdttum,  118. 
exhibition,  bie  3lu§ftettung. 
expect,   crtoortcn;    n.,  — ation,  bie 

Grtoartung. 

expensive,  teuer,  fopor. 
explain,  erHdren. 
express,  z/.,  au^briiden ;  n., —  (train), 

ber  ©djneflijug. 

expression,  ber  SluSbrucf,  *c. 
expressive,  au§brud^bott. 
eye,  ba§  Sluge,  gen.  -§,  //.  -n. 


F. 


fable,  bie 

face,  bad  ©efid)t,  -er. 

fact,  bie  Satfad)e  ;  in  —  ,  in  ber  £at. 

fade,  ber&Ieidjen,  S.,  \.,  berblii^en,  f. 

fail,  fe^Ien  ;  (bankrupt)  faltiexren. 

fairy-tale  for  children,  ba§  Iinber= 

ntord)eri. 

faith,  ber  ©laube,  gen.  -n§,  99. 
faithful,  treu. 
fall,  fatten,  S.,  f.  ;  —  in  (t)cr=  or  Ijin=) 

etn=fatten,  S.,  ]. 
false,  fatfdj. 

famous,  fceriitjmt  (part.  adj.}. 
fan,  ber  Sa'djer. 

fancy,  v.,  metnen,  fid)  eht=6itben,  437. 
far,  fern,  ioeit  ;  as  —  as,  fo  fern  (al§), 

bt§  (prep}. 

farmer,  ber  Saner,  104. 
fast,  (firm)  feft  ;  (rapid)  fdjnett. 
fat,  fett. 

fate,  bag  <£d)icffat,  -e. 
father,  ber  SSater,  *. 
fault,  ber  Setter;  in  —  ,  fd)utbig,  fd)ulb, 

448. 

favor,  bie  ©iinft,  -en,  106,  note. 
favorable,    giinftig,    geltiogen    (part. 

adj.),  both  dat. 
fear,  n.,  bie  S«td)t  ;  v.,  fn'rd)ten,  212; 

fid)  fiirdjten  (bor,  dat.}. 
feature,  ber  3ug,  5er  ©efid)t§3ug,  -e. 
February,  ber  ^ebrnar7. 
feeble,  fdjmad),  *. 
feel,  fiif)ten,   fid)  fiifjlen  ;  —  afraid, 

fiangen  ;  —  giddy,  fd)tt)inbetn,  both 

impers.  (dat}. 
fell,  fallen. 
fellow,   ber   SBnrfdje;    —  man,  SD^it^ 

menfd),  -en. 
fetch,  ^oten. 


VOCABULARY. 


349 


few,  toenige  (pi.) ;  a  — ,  einige  (//.). 
field,  ba3  gelb,  -er. 
fifteen,' fiat  feefm  (0r  funfeefjit). 
fifth  (the),  ber  fiinfte. 
fifty,  fiinfjig  (<?r  funfeig). 
fight,  fedjten,  S.;  n.,  bag  ®efed)t. 
find,  finben,  ^S.,  —  out,  erfafjren,  6". 
fine,  (size)  fein ;  (look)  frfjon.  ( 

fire,  baS^eucr ;  — insurance,  bie3euer= 

berfidjerung. 
first  (the),  ber  erfte  ;   adv.,  erft,  485  ; 

— ly,  erftenS ;  at  — ,  siterft,  anfottgS  ; 

— born,  erftgeooren  (part.  adj.). 
fish,  n.,  ber  $ifd) ;  v.,  ftfdjen. 
five,  fiinf ;  of  —  kinds,  fiinfertei,  306. 
flag,  bie  Slagge,  bie  gaJjne. 
flame,  bie  glamme. 
flatter,  fd)meid)eln  (214,  dat.). 
flattery,  bie  ©djmeidjelei'. 
flay,  fdjinben,  S. 
flee,  fltetyen,  S.,  f. 

flow,  flietjen,  S.;  rtnnen,  S.  (aujc.,2^S). 
flower,   bie  SBIume ;  —  basket,  ber 

— ttforb,  *e  ; garden,  ber  — n= 

garten. 

fly,  v.,  fliegen,  S.,  (aux.,  298). 
fly,  «.,  bie  Sliegc. 
follow,  folgen,  j.  (dat). 
folly,  bie  Xor^eit. 
food,  bie  ©peife,  bie  S^atjrung  (infin.t 

ba§  (Sffen). 
fool,  ber  ^arr,  ber  Xor,  ^/^  //.  -en  ; 

— ish,  narrtfrf),  tbridjt. 
foot,  ber  gufe,  ^c ;  on  — ,  511  gujj. 
for,/?r/.,  fiir  («<:<:.),  (cause)  bor  (fl'a/.), 

loegen  (^/z.);  ^«/".,  bemt. 
forbid,  berbieten,  S. 
force,  gtningett,  S.;  «.,  ber  3^1119- 
foreign,  fretnb  ;  — er, «.,  ber  grembe ; 

—  parts,    bie   ^rembe,    &a3    2(u§= 

lanb. 


foremost,  ber  erfte. 

foresee,  bor^e^-fefien,  S. 

forest,  ber  SSalb,  ^cr. 

foretell,  uorfjer^fagen. 

forget,   uergeffen,   6".,  (rarely  gen)  \ 

—  me-not,  ba§  SSergt^meinnid)t. 
forgive,  bergeben,  S.,  (dat). 
former,  borig  ;  (the)  —  ,  erfterer,  157, 

417,  jener. 

forsake,  berlaffen,  S. 
fortnight,  bierge^n  Sage  ;  a  —  ago, 

bor  —  n  (dat). 
forty,  bier^ig. 
fossil,  ba§  Soffit7,  gen.  -i3,  //.  -ien, 

118. 

fountain,  bie  GueHe,  ber  93runnen,  —  . 
four,  bier  ;  --  cornered,  —  edig  ;  —  - 

footed,  —  fiifug  ;  —  teen,  —  3el)tt. 
franc,  ber  Sranle. 
Frederick,  griebrid)  ;  —  Street,  bie 

—  Sftrafee. 

freedom,  bie  S^eit  ;  —  of  will,  bie 


freeze,  frieren,  S. 
French,  adf.t 

guage)  ba§  gran^oftfd)  ;  the  —  ,  «., 


frequent,  Fjaufig  ;  adv.,  also  oft,  bfterS. 
friend,  ber  greunb  ;  —  ly,  —  lid)  ;  — 

ship,  bie  —  fdjaft. 
frighten,  tr.,  weak,  erfd>reden  ;  intr., 

be    —  ed,    erfd^reden,    S.,    Bangen 

(impers.  dat.,  291). 
from,  bott  (dat),  au§  (dat)  ;  (cause) 

bor  (dat),  roegen  (gen). 
fruit,  bie  grudjt,  ^c. 
fugitive,  ber  gliidjtting. 
full,  boE,  433. 
further,  toeiter  (comp). 
future,  n.,  bie  gitrmift;  adj.,  aufiinf* 

tig- 


VOCABULARY. 


G. 

garden,  ber  ©arten,  *  ;  --  wall,  Me 

©artenmauer. 
gardener,  ber  ©d'rtner. 
gate,  ba§  Xor,  -e. 
gem,  ber  Gbelftetn. 
general,  ber  $e(bf)err,   ber  ©eneraf' 

(pi.  -ale). 

gentleman,  ber  £>err,  97. 
German,  adj.,  beutfd)  ;  as  noun,  a  —  , 

etn  ®eutfd)er;  —  (language),  ba§ 


Germany,  (ba3)  S5eittfd)Ianb. 

get,    (obtain)    6e!ommen,   S.;   intr., 

(become)  toerben  ;  —  in,  —  out,  cin=, 

aul=ftetgen,  S.,  f  .  ;  —  on,  geljen,  S.,  f. 

(impers.  dat.)-,  —  well,  genefen,  S.,\. 
giant,  ber  9liefe. 
giddy,  fdjnrinbelig  ;  to   be,  feel  —  , 

fdjttrinbeln  (impers.  dat). 
gilded,  bergolbet. 
girl,  ba§  2fta'bdjen,  (servant)  bie  2ftagb, 

«e. 

give,  geBen,  S.;  —  up,  auf^gefcen. 
glad,  frolj;  to  be  —  of,  fid)  freuen 

(gen)  ;  adv.,  —  ly,  gem,  485. 
glass,  ba§  ©Ia§,  -"er  ;  adj.,  glafern. 
glide,  gleiten,  S. 
glimmer,  gltmnten,  S. 
glorious,  fierrlid). 
glory,  (fame)  ber  SRuTjm  (gen.  -e§)  ; 

(splendor)  Me  §errlidjfeit. 
go,  ge^en,  S.,  \.  ;  —  by,  borfcetgefjen  ; 

—  out  (a  light),  erlbfcfjen,  S.,  f.  ; 

—  to  walk,  fpajteren  gefjen  ;  —  with, 
imt=get)en. 

god,  ber  ©ott,  ^er;  God,  ©ott. 
gold,  bo§  ©olb  ;  adj.,  golben. 
good,  gut;  also  adv.  (/0rwell);  noun, 
bo§  ©ut,  ^er. 


goodness,  btc  ©iite. 

goose,  bie  ©an§,  *c. 

gospel,  ba§  eoangelium,  118! 

gracious,  gndbtg. 

gradual,  allmciltg. 

grammar,  bie  ©ramma'ttf. 

grand,   grofcarttg  ;    (rank)   borne^m; 

•    —  father,  ber  ©rojjbater  ;  —  mother. 

bie  ©rofemutter. 
grant,  ait-gefcen,  S.,  bexici^en,  S.;  God 

—  ,  ge&e  ©ott. 
great,  grok,  ^  156. 

Greek,  n.,  ber  ©rieclje  ;  adj.,  grtedjifrf). 
green,  griin  ;   ».,  ba§  ©ritn  ;   —  ish, 

griinlidj. 

grievous,  fdjmeralidj  ;  (heavy)  fd)lner. 
grind,  (corn)  mafjleit  ;  (a  knife)  fd)Iet= 

fen,  S. 

grove,  ber  £»ain. 
grow,    toadjfen,    S.,    f.  ;     (become) 

toerben  ;  —  dark,  bunteln. 
guest,  ber  ©aft,  *e. 
guilt,  bie  ©d)ulb  (pi.  -en,  debts). 
gun-powder,  ba§  @d)tef3pulber. 

H. 

hail,  n.,  ber  §agel;  v.,  ^agetn. 
hair,  ba§  §aar  (//.  -e,  as  coll.). 
half,  f)al&,    144;  a,  the  —  420;  n., 

bie  §d'Ifte. 
hand,  bie  £>onb,  -e  ;  the  right,  left 

—  ,  bie  SRedjte,  Sinfe. 
handsome,  fdjbn. 

hang,  intr.,  fiangen,  S.  ;   tr.,  weak, 

fja'ngen  ;  —  up,  auf=r)d'ngen. 
happen,  gefdjefjen,  S.,  f. 
happiness,    ba§    ©liid;     (joy)    bie 


happy,  gtiicflidj. 
harbor, 


VOCABULARY. 


351 


hardly,  fd)tt>erltd)  ;  (scarcely)  faum. 

hare,  ber  £>afe. 

harm,  ber  <£d)abe(n)  100;  v.,  fdjaben 

(dot). 

haste,  bie  Sile  ;  hasty,  etlig. 
hat,  ber  £>ut,  -e. 
have,  I)a6en  (as  aux.,  296)  ;  —  to, 

ntu'ffcn,  fatten  (modal}. 
hawthorn,  ber  SSeiftborn. 
he,  er  ;  ber,   biefer,  berfelfce,  457  ;  — 

(who)  ber,  berjenige,  208. 
head,  ber  ®opf,  *e  ;  —ache,  ba§ 


health,  btc  ©cfunbljett. 

hear,  Ijbrcn  ;  —  tell,  fagen  fyoren. 

heart,  baS  £er3,  gen,  -enS,  //.  -en, 

102. 

heat,  bie  £t£e  ;  v.,  Ijetoen. 
heath,  bie  £>eibe. 
heathen,  ber  £>eibe  ;  —  ism,  bci§  §ei= 

ben  turn. 

heaven,  ber  §tmmel. 
height,  bie  £bf)e. 
help,  i)elfen,    S.,   beiftetjen,   S.  (both 

dat.)  i  ».,  bie  £>ilfe. 
Henry,  £>einrtd> 
heifers.,  fie,  (dat.,  to)  if)r  ',poss.  adj., 

iljr  ;    —  self,   reflex.,   fid)  ;    emph., 

felbft,  454.  [mit,  401. 

here,  f)ier  ;  adj.,  ^ieftg  ;  —with,  ^ier- 
hero,  ber  §elb,  -en. 
high,  f)orf),  irreg.,  135,  a,  156. 
hill,  ber  £ugel  ;  up,  down  —  ,  6erg= 

auf,  —  =ab. 
him  (ace.),  if)n,  (dat.,  to)  il)m  ;  —  self 

reflex.,  fid)  ;  emph.,  felbft,  454. 
his,  adj.,  fein  ;  pron.,  feiner;  beffen, 

be§feI6en,  457. 
history,  bie  ©efdjidjte. 
hit,  trefjen,  S. 
hold,  gotten,   S.;  —  for  (consider), 


—  fiir  (ace.)  ;  —  worthy,  ftwrbigcn 
(ace.,  gen.). 

holiday,  ber  getertag. 

home,  bie  £eimat,  -en  ;  adv.,  (to),  at, 

from  —  ,  nad),  511,  Don  §aufe. 
honesty,  bie  (Hjrfidjfeit. 
honor,  n.,  bie  (£f)re,  106;  man  of  —  , 

ber  gfyrenmann,  425;  v.,  efjren. 
hope,  v.,  I)offen  ;    «.,  bie  ^offnung  ; 

—  ful,   IjofinitngSbotf  ;   —  less,  Ijoff* 
nitng^IoS  ;  —  of,  or  for,  auf  (ace.). 

horse,  ba§  ^ferb,  -e. 

hospital,  ba§  ^ofpttaF,  -^er. 

hot,  ^eti 

hotel,  ber  ©aft^of,  -e  ;  -  —  porter,  ber 


hour,  (duration)  bie  Stunbe  ;  (o'clock) 

(bie)  Ufjr,  305  ;  —  ly,  ftiinblid). 
house,  ba§  §au3,  £er;  —  of  lords, 


how,  tote. 

human,   menfdjtid)  ;    —    being,   ber 

2ftenfd),  -en. 
humanity,  bie  2ftettfdjl)eit  ;  (feeling) 

bie  2ftenfd)Ud)fett. 
humble,  bemiitig. 
hundred  (a),  ^unbert. 
Hungarian,  ber  ttnxgar,  -n. 
hungry,  fjungrtg  ;  to  be  —  ,  fjnngem  ; 

impers.  (ace.). 
huntsman,  ber  ^QQer. 
hurry,  bie  Gile  ;  in  a  —  ,  in  (Site. 
husband,  ber  2ft  ann,  (Sfjemcunt,  425. 
hut,  bie  £iitte. 
hypocrisy,  bie  ^eudjelei7. 

I. 

I,  id). 

ice,  ba§  ®i3  ;  cold  as  —  ,  eiSfatt. 
if,  toenn  (omitted,  350,  2)  ;  even  —  , 
itjenn  .  .  .  aud),  486;  (whether)  06. 


352 


VOCABULARY, 


ill,  franf,  *  ;  dangerously  —  ,  fterbenS* 

Iran!  ;  —  ness,  bie  $ranfljeit. 
image,  ba3  23ilbni3,  -fje. 
imagine,  fid)  (dat.}  etnbitben. 
immediately,  fogleidj. 
immortality,  bie  Unfterbltrf)feit. 
impatient,  ungebulbig. 
important,  toidjtig,  bebeutenb. 
impostor,  ber  23erriiger. 
improvidence,  bie  ttnborfid)tigfeit. 
in,  prep.,  in  (dat.},  into  (ace.}  ;  adv., 

(place)  barin  ;  (motion)  tjerein,  f)in= 

etn  ;  as  sep.  pref.,  etn*. 
include,  euHdjIiefeen,  -5". 
incontestable,  unffretttg. 
incredible,  unglcmblid). 
industrious,  ffeifetg. 
infer,  fd)liefjen,   S.;  —  from,  au§, 

(dat}  ;  (from  one's  look)  on=fef)en, 

S.  (dat.  pers.}. 
inform,  benad)rtd)tigen. 
injurious,  fdjabltd)  (dat.}. 


innocence,  bie  llnfdjutb. 

innocent,  unfd)itlbig. 

insist,  beftefjen,  S.  ;  —  on,  ouf  (ace., 

477). 

inspect,  befefien,  S. 
instead,  (of),  anftatt,  ftatt  (gen.}  ;  be- 

fore infin.,  475,  2- 
insult,  v.,  fieleibigen  ;  n.,  bie  S3eleibi= 

gung. 
interest,  n.,  ba§   ^ntereffe,  gen.  -§, 

//.,  -n  ;  v.,  an=gel)en,  6".  ;  —  one's 

self  in,  fid)  an=nef)mett,  S.  (gen.}. 
interior,  inner,  1  58  ;  as  n.,  ba§  ^nnere. 
into,  prep.,  in  (ace.}  ;  adv.,  fjerein, 

tynein. 
intolerable,    unertrcigltd)  ;    see    also 

482.  [ftetten. 

introduce,  etti^fii^cen  ;  (a  person)  bor= 


invent,  erfinben,  S. 
invention,  bie  (Srfinbung. 
invite,  ein4oben,  S. 
iron,  bo§  (Sifen  ;  adj.,  etfcrn. 
island,  bie  3nfel,  ba§  Gitanb,  -e. 
it,  e§,  452-3  ;  its,  fein,  or  dem.,  gen. 
457- 

J- 


January, 

jewel,  ba§  ^leinob,  //.  -e,  or  -ten. 

journey,  bie  9Mfe. 

joy,  bie  §mtbe  ;  for  —  ,  bor  —  n. 

judge,  urteilen  ;  (official)  rid)ten  ;  «., 

ber  3Jid)ter. 

jump,  fpringen,  S.  (aux.,  298). 
just,  adj.,  geredjt  ;  adv.,  gerabe  ;  (time) 

foefcen,  erft. 

K. 

keep,  fjalten,    S.;  (retain)  befallen, 

S.;  intr.,  fid)  fatten,  bleiben,  S.,  f. 
key,  ber  ©djlitffel. 
kill,  tbten. 
kind,  bie  3lrt,  -en  ;  —  of,  by  suffix, 

—  erlei,  306  ;  what  —  of,  toa§  fur. 
kind,  giitig  ;  —  ness,  bie  ©iite. 
king,  ber  f  bnig  ;  —  dom,  ba§  ^bntg= 

retd),  -e. 

kitchen,  bie  ®iid)e. 
knife,  bo§  SJfeffer. 
knock,  Hopfcn  ;  (hit)  ftofjen,  S. 
know,  fennen,  toijfcn,  254  (see  note,  p. 

1  34)  ;  fonnen,  268. 

known  (well  —  ),  befannt  (part.  adj.}. 
knowledge,   bie  5?enntni§,  -ffe,   bo? 

SSiffen  (in/in.}  ;  of  my  —  ,  meine6 


L. 

laboratory,  ba§  Saborato/rtum,  118. 
laborer,  ber  Strbeiter. 


VOCABULARY. 


353 


lacerate,  5erfletfd)en. 

lady,  Me  35cnne. 

lake,  ber  <£ee,  104,  426. 

lame,  larjtn. 

land,  n.,  ba§  Canb,  425 ;  v.,  lanben,  f. 

landlord,  ber  28irt,  ber  £>au§f)err. 

language,  Me  ©pradje. 

large,  grojj,  3L,  156. 

last,  le&t,    157;   (preceding)  bortg  ; 

adv.,  at  — ,  enblid),  aulefct. 
late,  fpat;  — ly,  neuttdj;  at  latest, 

fpd'teftenS  (gen). 
laugh,  ladjen ;  —  at,  ladjen'  (gen.), 

au§4ad)en  (ace.). 
law,  ba§  ©efefc,  -e. 
lawyer,  ber  SCbbofat',  -en,  ber  SRedjtc^ 

gelefjrte  (adj.,  noun). 
lay,  legen. 
lazy,  trage. 
lead,  fitfjren,  leiten. 
lead,  ba§  SBIet. 
leaf,  ba§  SBIatt,  *er. 
leap,  fpringen,  61.;  (<*«*.,  298). 
learn,  lernen  (infin.,  474) ;  — ed,  ge= 

lefirt  (part.,  adj.). 
leave,  v.,  laffen,  berlaffen,  S.;  intr., 

(depart)  afi^fa^ren,  S.,  f. 
leave,  n.,  (permission)  bte  (Srfait&niS; 

(departure)  ber  SCbf^teb,  -e. 
leg,  ba§  SBetn,  -e. 
lend,  leiten,  S. 
length,  bie  Conge ;  adv.,  at  — ,  enb- 

iidj. 

lessen,  (ber)mtnbern. 
lesson,   (task)  bte   8tufga6e ;    (hour) 

bte  ©titnbe. 

let,  laffen,  S.;  or  by  imperat. 
letter,  ber  Sricf ;  (of  alphabet)  ber 

SBudjftafce,  usually  gen.  -n§,  //.  -n, 

99 ; carrier,  ber  Srieftragcr. 

liberate,  befreten,  freMaffen,  S.,  379. 


liberty,  bte  Srcii^cit ;  to  set  at  — ,  in 

—  fefcen. 

library,  bte  SibliotrjeF. 
lie,  (posture)  liegen,  S. 
lie,    (falsehood)    liigen,   S.;   «.,  bie 

Siige ;  to  tell  a  — ,  liigen. 
life,   bd§   2eben; insurance,    bie 

2e6en§berftrf)erung. 
lift,  ^ebcn,  S. ;  —  up,  auf4ie&en. 
light,  bag  Stdjt  (//.,  424) ;  —  of  day, 

389,  2. 

lighten,  (flash)  blifcen. 
like,  v.,  (love)  licben  ;  —  to,  mbgen, 

472,  or  adv.,  gern  485. 
like,  adj.,  gleitf),  cifinlid)  (dot.) ;  adv., 

tote ;  to  be  — ,  gletdjen,  S.,  (dat.) ; 

adv.,  — ly,  toaljrfdjetnlid). 
limb,  ba§  ©Itcb,  -er. 
lion,  ber  Sotoe. 

listen,  fjordjen,  3u-T)bren  (to,  dat.). 
little  (size),  fletn;  (quantity)  tuentg; 

a  — ,  etn  toentg  ;  (often  tr.  by  dim). 
live,  leben ;  —  to  see,  ertefien. 
load,  v.,  laben,  S. ;  n.,  bte  Saft,  -en. 
lock,  fdjltefeen,  tierfd)Ite^en,  S. 
long,  adj.,  lang ;    adv.,  tang(e) ;  - 

ago,  lange  ^er,  td'ngft. 
look,  Mtcfen,  fel)cn,  S.;  (seem)  aii8*fe* 

fien ;  —  for  (seek),  fudjen  ;  (expect) 

ertoarten ;  —  at,  an=fc'()en,  befefjen,  S. 
lord,  ber  §err;  gen.  -n,  pi.  -en. 
lose,  berlteren,  S. ;  —  one's  way,  fid) 

bertrren,  fid)  rjcrfanfen,  S.;  —  at 

play,  berfpielen. 
loss,  ber  SSerluft,  ttc. 
loud,  laitt. 
love,  v.,  lieben ;   -  -  to,  adv.  gern, 

485 ;  n.,  bie  Stebe  ; letter,  ber 

£tebe§brtef. 

lovely,  Iteblidj,  ItebenStuitrbtg. 
low,  niebrtg,  (soft)  fanft. 


354 


VOCABULARY. 


lucky,  gliidltd). 
luggage,  baS  ©epacf. 

M. 

magnanimous,  groBmu'ttg. 

maid-servant,  Me  Sftagb,  *e. 

maintain,  (assert)  fcefjaupten ;  (sup- 
port) erljalten,  S. 

make,  madjen  ;  —  haste,  eilen. 

malicious,  fco&jaft. 

man,  (sex)  ber  9ftann,  ^er  (see  425) ; 
(human)  ber  3ftenfd),  -en. 

manner,  (mode)  MeSBeife;  (custom) 
bie  <£itte. 

many,  biele  (//.);  —  a,  manner, 
mand)  ein  ;  how  — ,  fine  btele. 

marble,  ber  farmer ;  adj.,  marmorn. 

March,  ber  SWar*. 

march,  morfd^e'ren,  215;  (aux.,  298) ; 
3ief)en,  S.,  \. ;  tr.,  —  laffen,  269. 

mark  (coin),  bie  Sftarf,  312. 

market,  ber  SWarft,  *e;  —  place, 
— ,  ber  2ftar!tpla£. 

marriage,  (state)  bie  (£I)e  ;  (wedding) 


Mary,  Dearie',  no. 

mast,  ber  SCftaft,  gen.  -e3,  pi.  -en. 

master,  ber  £>err,  gen.  -n,  //.  -en ; 

—  of,  mtidjttg  (gen.}. 
material,  ba§  SftatertaF,  -gen.  -§,  //. 

-ien,  119. 
matter,  n.,  (affair)  bie  Sadje  ;  to  be 

the  — ,  fefjlen  (impers.,  with  dat.}  ; 

it  matters,  e§  fommt  barauf  on. 
May,  ber  Wai. 

may,  mbgen,  Ibnnen,  biirfen,  472. 
maybe,  adv.,  btelteid)t. 
mayor,  ber  SSiirgermeifter. 
me,  mid)  (ace.} ;  mir  (dat}. 
mean,  metnen,  fagen  tooKen,  /.,  121. 


mean(s),  bo§  2RitteI ;  by  —  of,  ber= 

nttttelft  (gen.},  bitrd)  (ace.} ;  by  no 

— ,  fehte3tt)eg3,  399. 
measure,  n.,  ba§  9)laB,  -c ;  z/.,  meffen, 

S. ;  take  one's  — ,  anmcffcn,  S.  (dat. 
pers ;  for  ace.). 
meat,  bag  gleifd). 
meditate,  ftnnen,  6". 
meet,  fcegegnen,   f.   (^/.) ;  —  with, 

treffen,  S. 

melt,  fdjmelaen,  S.,  \. 
memory,  ba§  ©ebadjtmS. 
mend,  beffern,  au§=6e[[ern. 
merchant,  ber  $aufmann  (//.,  425). 
merciful,  fcarmljeratg,  gnabtg(to,^/.). 
mercy,  bie  SBarm^erstgfett ;  to  have 

— ,  fid)  erfcarmen  (on,^«.). 
meritorious,  berbient,  (part.  adj.}. 
messenger,  ber  SBote. 
Michael,  2ftidjel. 
middle,  n.,  bie  SRttte;  adj.,  mittler 

(comp.,  158). 

midnight,  bie  9ftitternad;t. 
mighty,  ntdditig. 
mild,  ntilb(e). 
mile,  bie  Stfetle,  bte  ©tunbe  (hour's 

walk). 

milk,  bie  Sftild) ;  v.,  meffen  (see  List}. 
mine,  meiner,  metntg ;  in  pred.  also 

mein,  193. 

minister,  ber  afttnt'fter. 
minute,  n.,  bte  9Kinn/te  (time), 
misfortune,  ba§  Unglitd. 
miss,  berfe^Ien  ;  (feeling)  bcrmtffcn  ; 

—  the  mark,  borbeUfdjieBen,  S. 
Miss,  ».,  bo§  grcwletn  ;  (title,  428). 
mistake,  n.,  ber  §ef)Ier;  (error)  ber 

Srrtum,  -titmer;  v.,  to  be  — n,  fid) 

irren. 

modest,  Bcfd)etben  (part.  adj.}. 
moment,  ber  9lngen6M 


VOCABULARY. 


355 


Monday,  ber  Sftontag. 

money,   ba$  ®elb ;  sum  of  — ,  Me 

©elbfumme. 
monk,  ber  9ftbnd). 
monkey,  ber  2tjfe. 
month,  ber  SWo'nat,  -e. 
monument,  ba§  Monument7. 
moon,   ber  9ftonb,   -e;  full  — ,  ber 

SBollmonb. 
more,  ntefyr  (indecl) ;  nod),  485 ;  or 

by  comp.  inflection  ;  the  — ,  334. 
morning,  ber  Sftorgen,  — ;  in  the  — , 

5e§  — §,  or  adv.,  ntorgenS. 
morrow  (to-)  morgen ;  day  after  — , 

iibermorgcn. 
most,  meift,  am  metften ;  abs.  superl., 

f)bd)ft,    a'ufeerft ;    or  by  sup.  inflec- 
tion. 
mother,  bie  Gutter,  *;  —  tongue, 

bie  SRittterfpradje. 
mount,  fteigen,  S.,  f. ;  tr.,  beftetgen ; 

—  up,  auHteigen,  f. 
mountain,  ber  33erg ;  —  -range,  bag 

$ebirge,  — . 
mouse,  bie  3Jtou3,  *e. 
move,  tr.,  betuegen ;  (excite)  riifjren  ; 

intr.,  Steven,  S.,  f. 
Mr.,  (ber)   &err;  Mrs.,  (bie)  grau, 

428. 

much,  adj.,  btel,  245,  also  adv. ;  (de- 
gree) fe§r  (adv.). 
multiply,  Tnulttpliaic^cn,  215 ;  —by, 

mit  (dat). 

multitude,  bie  2tfenge,  431. 
museum,  ba§  2Rufe/itm,  gen.  -8,  //. 

-en,  1 1 8. 

music,  bie  ^ufiF. 
must,  miiifen,  261,  472. 
my,  ntein ;  — self,  (subj.),  fclfift ;  (obf. 

reflex)  mid),  mir  (fclbft,  434). 


N. 


name,  «.,  ber  9?ame,  gen.  -n§,  //.  -n, 
99)  ;  his  —  is,  cr  ^cifet  ;  z/.,  ttennen, 
J/.;  be—  ed,  ^etfjen,  6". 

narrow,  cnge,  formal. 

nature,  bie  9^aturx. 

naughty,  unarttg,  fibfe. 

near,  adj.,  nof),  nd^er,  nd'd)ft  (^a/L); 
prep.,  neben,  Oei  (^A)  ;  adv.,  —  ly, 


nearness,  bie 

necessary,  nbttg. 

need,  n.,  bie  Slot;  z/.,  braudjen, 

fen  (gen.  434)  ;  modal,  biirfen,  472. 
needlej  bie  StabeL 
neglect,  berna^la'jfigen. 
neighbor,  ber  91ad)bar,  gen.  -§,  //.  -n. 
neither,  pron.,  feiner  (bon  beiben)  ; 

conj.,  toeber  .  .  .  (nor)  nod). 
never,  nie,  ntemal§. 
nevertheless,   bennod),    beffen    unge^ 

ad)tet,  280. 

new,  neu;  —laid  (egg),  frifd). 
news,  bie  ^unbe,  bie  9tad)rid)t;  -- 

paper,  bie  Settling. 
next,  adj.  (see  na^)  ;  (following)  fol= 

genb  ;  adv.,  3und'd)[t. 
night,  bie  9Zad)t,  *e. 
nightingale,  bie  91ad)tigatt. 
nine,   neun;  —  teen,  —  sef)n;  —  ty, 

—  6tg- 
no,  adj.,  fetn;  —one,  —  body,  feiner, 

ntemanb;    —  thing,    nid)t§;    adv., 

nein. 
noble,   ebet;   —  man,  ber  Gbelmann 

(//•>  425). 
none,  //.,  feine. 
nonsense,  ber  tlnftnn. 
nor,  (neither)  .  .  .  ,  (toeber)  .  .  .  norf). 
north,  ber  SRorb(en). 


356 


VOCABULARY. 


not,   ntdjt ;   -  -   yet,   nodj   nirfjt ;   - 
any,  one,  lein,  feiner ;  —  anything, 
nidjtS. 

nothing,  md)t3. 

now,  (time)  je£t,  nun,  485 ;  adj.,  (of 
now)  jefcig. 

number,  bie  3at)I,--en;  (amount)  Me 


nursery,  Me  $tnberftube. 
nut,  bte  Sfcufj,  "ffe. 

0. 

0,  oh,  Of) !  ad) ! 

oath,  ber  (£tb ;  on  — ,  etbltdj. 

obey,  gel)ord)en  (dat). 

obliged,  berbunben  (part.,  berbtnben); 

to  be  — ed,  (must)  mitffen,  472. 
occur,  borfommen,    S.,  \. ;    (to  the 

mind)  etn=fatten  S.,  \.  (dat). 
o'clock,  Ufo  305  ;  what  —  ?  tote  biel 

Ul)r ;  at  two  — ,  um  gtoei  ttljr. 
odious,  berfjafet  (part.  adj.). 
of,  bon,  (out  of)  au§,  (among)  unter, 

all  dat.;  (on)  an,  ttber  (ace)  ;  or  by 

gen.  case. 
off,  ab,  babon. 
offer,  bteten,  S.,  an^bteten. 
office,  ba§  Stmt,  -^er. 
officer,  ber  Cffigter7,  -e. 
often,  oft,  ofter§. 
old,  alt,  * ;  grow  — ,  altern. 
olive-tree,  ber  Olbaum. 
on  (place),  auf,  (time)  an  (dat) ;  (di- 
rection) auf,  iiber  (ace)  ;  —  foot, 

5U  S«fef  adv.,  fort,  Ijtn. 
once,  etnmat,  401 , 2 ;  —  more,  nod)  — . 
one,  adj.,  etn ;   (in  counting,  neut) 

etn§;  indef.pron.,  enter,  man,  460; 

—  another,   etnanber;    every  — , 

(etn)  jeber ;  no  — ,  tenter. 


only,  adj.,  ein^ig ;  adv.,  affetn^  nur ; 

not  —  ...  but,  ntd)t  nitr  .  .  .  fon= 

bent. 
open,  adj.,  offcn ;  v.,  bffnen,  auf=ma* 

d)en. 
opinion,  bte  SJfetnung ;  to  be  of  — , 

ntetnen,  ber  2ftehmng  fein. 
opportune,  gelegen. 
oppress,  unterbriicfen. 
or,  ober. 

orchard,  ber  SSaumgorten. 
order,    v.,    (person)     fcefeljlen,    S. ; 

(thing)  beftetten ;  «.,  ber  S3efel)t,  bte 

JBcftcItung ;  in  —  to,  um  . .  .  p,  281. 
other,  anber;  each  — ,  one  an — ,  etn= 

anber  (indecl!)  ;   (one   more),   nod) 

etn. 

ought  (to),  fotten,  261,  472. 
our,  unfer ;  pron.,  ours,  unf(e)rer,  un= 

f(c)rig ;  ourselves  (subj),  toir  fclfift ; 

(obj.  reflex),  un§  (fel&ft). 
out,  adv.,  ait^,  IjerauS,  I)tnaug,  (out- 
side) brau^en;  —  of,  prep.,  ait&, 

aufeer  (dat.). 
outside,  adv.,  braufjen ;  —  of,  prep., 

aufjer  (dat.),  aufeer^alfi  (gen);  n., 

ba§  5tufeere,  1 58,  fete  SCufjenfeite. 
over,  adv.,  iiber,  ^er=,  ^in=U6er ;  (past) 

boriiber,  borbet;  prep.,  ii6er  (dat., 

ace). 

overcome,  iibertoinben,  S. 
owe,  fdjulbtg  fein,  438. 
ox,  ber  Od)§(e). 
• 

P. 

page,  bte  ©cite. 

pain,  ber  <Sd)mer3,  101 ;  to  give 

toefje  tun,  437,  4. 
paint,  malen;  — er,  ber  5!JlaIer(  — 

— ing,  ba§  ©ema'Ibe,  — . 
pair,  ba§  ^?aar,  431,  c. 


VOCABULARY. 


357 


pale,  bleid) ;  turn  — ,  erbleidjen,  -S.,  f. 
paper,  ba3  papier7,  -e;  news — ,  bie 

3eititng.  [-ffe. 

parable,  bic  ^ara'bel ;  ba§  ©leidjniS, 
parade,  bie  ^araxbe. 
pardon,  bcr^et^en,  S.;  (dat.);  n.,  bte 

SSer^eifjung  ;  I  beg  — ,  id)  bitte  urn 

35. 

parents,  bte  ©Item. 
part,  (divide)  teilen ;  (separate)  fdjet= 

ben,  S. ;   (also  intr.,  fein) ;    n.,  bet 

Set! ;  on  the  —  (of),  bon  <Seiten, 

1 06;  for  my  — ,  meinerfeitS,  399. 
partly,  teilS  (gen.  adv.}. 
pass  (away),  bcrge^en^.jf. ;  (happen) 

borgeljen;    (by)    borbei=gef)en   (all, 

fetn) ;  (time)  3U=brtngen,  M. 
passage,  bie  itberfafyrt,  -en. 
past,   adj.,   bergangen   (part,  adj.); 

adv.,  borbei;  n.,  the  — ,  bie  $Ber= 

gongenfjeit ;  of  the  —  (adj.), .  bor= 

fjerig  ;  half  — ,  etc.,  305. 
pastor,  ber  ^aftor,  pi.  -en,  117. 
patience,  bie  ©ebulb.  [-en. 

patient,  gebulbtg ;   n.,  ber  patient7, 
pay,  be^aljlen  ;  (for,  penalty)  Mfjen  ; 

—  a  visit,  einen  SBefud)  madden. 
peace,  ber  §riebe,  gen.,  -n§,  //.  -n. 
peasant,  ber  Saucr,  gen.  -§,  pi.  -n. 
pen,  bie  geber. 
penalty,   bie  ©trafe;   under  —   of 

death,  Bei  SebenSftrafe. 
people,  ba§  SSoIf,  ^er ;  bie  Seute  (pi.) ; 

indef.,  man,  460. 
permission,  bte  (SrlaubmS,  -ffe. 
persuade,  u'Berreben. 
petrify,  berfteinern. 
physician,  ber  SCrat,  ^e. 
pick,  lefen,  S. ;  —  out,  au34efen  ;  — 

up,  aufstyeben,  S. 
picture,  ba§  S3ilb,  -er;  — book,  ba§ 


33ilber6uc§  ; gallery,  (painting) 

bie  ©emcilbegatterte7. 
pin,  bie  ©tetfnabel. 
pit,  bie  65rufie. 
place,  n.,  ber  Grt,  //.,  425 ;  z/.,  ftelten ; 

(lay)  legen. 

plan,  ber  ^plan,  ^c  or  -e. 
plant,  n.,  bie  ^Pflon^e ;  v.,  bflan^en. 
play,  n.,  ba§  (Spiel,  -e ;  v.,  fpielen  ;• 

to  lose  by  — ,  berfpielen. 
pleasant,  ongene^m. 
please,    gefaUen,    S.,   (dat.);  (pray), 

bttte ;  if  you — ,  gefdttigft  (sup.  adv.). 
pleasure,  ba8  SSergnugcn ;   (joy)  bie 

greube,  (106,  note). 
plough,  «.,  ber  'JjSflug,  ^e;  v.,  pfliigen. 
poem,  bo§  GJebidit7. 
poet,  ber  ^oet7,  -en,  ber  Sidjter. 
poetry,  bie  IjSoefte7,  bte  2)id)tung. 
polite,  Ijbflt^. 
political,  politifdj. 
poor,  arm,  -;  (quality)  fd)Ied)t. 
porter,  (hotel),  ber  £ait§fned)t. 
portmanteau,  ber  Coffer,  — . 
post-office,  bie  $oft,  -en. 
potato,  bie  Sartoffel. 
pound,  ba§  ^?funb,  312. 
pour,  gtefeen,  S. 
power,  bie  Sftadjt,  -e. 
praise,  v.,  Icfcen,  preifen,  S. ;  n.,  ba§ 

2oB ;  to  my  — ,  mir  p  Sobe. 
pray,  beten ;  (I) — ,  (id))  bitte. 
prayer,  ba§  ©ebet7. 
preach,  prebigen  ;  — er,  ber  ^rebiger. 
precious,  loftbar,   !bfttid; ;  —  stone, 

ber  (Sbelftetn. 

prefer,  bor^ie^en,  S. ;  see  gent,  485. 
present,  «.,  (gift)  ba§  ©efdienf ;  (time) 

bie  ©egentoart ;  adj.,  gegentoarttg  ; 

(place)  antoefenb;  at  — ,  jefct;  of 

the  — ,  je^ig. 


358 


VOCABULARY 


president,  ber  ^Srciftbent',  -en. 

prick,  fted)en,  S. 

pride,  ber  ©tol^. 

prince,  ber  ^rtn^,  ber  Siirft,  both  -en. 

print,  bruden  ;  —  ing-office,  bie  S)ru= 

eferei'. 
prison,  ba§  ®efangnt$,  -ffe  ;  —  er,  ber 

®efangene  {part.  noun}. 
privilege,  bag  25orred)t,  -e. 
probable,  ftmljrfdjeinltd)  ;  idiom.,  465. 
procession,  ber  Sfofeug,  *e. 
professor,  ber  ^Srofeffor,  117. 
profit,  ber  ^u^en  ;  (money)  ber  ®e= 

totnrt  ;  ».,  nii|en  (dfe/.). 
progress,  bie  gortfdjritte  (//.). 
prohibition  ba§  SSerfiot,  -e. 
project,  v.,  (jut  over)  ii6er=ftdjen,  6". 
promise,    berfpredjen    6".;   a/j*    «.; 

—  ing  (/art.  a^'.),  JjoffnungSboK. 
proof,  ber  23etoei3. 
propose,  bor=fd)lagen,  S.;  intr.,  fid) 

bor^ne^men,  S. 
proverb,  ber  <£prud);  ac,  ba3 

toort,  ^er. 
Prussia,  (boS)  ^reufeen  ;  -n, 


pull,  aie^en,  S.  ;  —  out,  f)ercm§=  —  . 

punishment,  bie  ©rrafe. 

pupil,  ber  <Sd)Uter  ;  (fern.)  bie  —  in. 

push,  fdjieoeit,  S.  ;  (strike)  fto^en,  S. 

put,  (set)  fe&ett  ;  (place)  fteffen  ;  (lay) 
legen  ;  —  off,  berfdjiefcen  S.  ;  —  on 
(clothes)  an=3tet)en,  S.  ;  —  out  (a 
light)  au&Iof$en,  S. 


quarter,  ba§  SSiertel,  (place)  ba§  Ouar= 
queen,  bie  $bnigin,  -nen.  [tier7. 

question,  bie  Stage ;  it  is  the  — ,  e§ 
frogt  fid). 


quick,  (rapid)  fdjnett. 

quiet,  ruijtg,  ftitt  ;  ».,  beru^igen. 

quire,  ba§33ud)  (papier,  312);  (choir) 

ber  (£f)or,  ^e,  426. 
quite,  gon5,  burd)au$. 


R. 

railway,  bie  (Sifen6a^n,  -en  ;  —  sta- 

tion, ber  SBaljnIjof,  ^c. 
rain,  ».,  ber  Stegen  ;  z/.,  regnen. 
raisin,  bie  SRoftne. 
rank,  (row)  ber  9tang,  ^c;    (social) 

ber  <Stanb,  ^e. 

ransack  (plunder),  pliinbern. 
rapid,  frfjneH,  gefc^toinb. 
reach,  retd)en  ;  (attain)  erreidjen. 
read,  lefen,  S.  ;  —  (aloud),  borlefen  ; 

—  ing,  n.,  bie  Sectit're,  ba§  Sefen, 

(in/in.). 

ready,  fcerett  ;  (finished)  fertig. 
real,  toirflid). 
receive,  empfongen,  S.;  er^alten,  S., 

usually  things  {gef). 
recent,  neu  ;  adv.,  —  ly,  neuttd). 
recollect,  fid)  feefinnen,  S.  (gen.). 
recover,  intr.,  genefen,  S.,  f. 
rector,  ber  Sleftor,  -en,  117. 
red,  rot  ;  —  as  fire,  feuerrot. 
redden,  tr.,  rb'ten  ;  intr.,  errbten. 
redound,  geretdjen  (dat.). 
refresh,  crfrifdjcn. 
refuse,  (deny)  bertoeigern  ;   (reject) 

a6=fd)tagen,  S. 
refute,  hnberlegen. 
regiment,  ba§  Stegiment',  -er. 
reign,  regtexren,  215;  «.,  bie  3legie/= 

rung. 
rejoice,  intr.,  fid)  freuen  (gen.  434)  ; 

or  impers.,  e8  frcut  (ace.,  292)  ;  tr., 

erfreuen. 


VOCABULARY. 


359 


relate,  (tell)  eraeHjlen ;  be  — ed,  fidj 

ber^alten,  S. ;  (akin)  fcentmnbt  fein. 
relation,  ba§  SerfjaltniS,  -jfc ;  (kins- 
man) eitt  SSertoanbter  (adj.  «.). 
relieve,  311  £ilfe  lommen  (dat.y  437) ; 

(of)  entfje&en,  S.,  entlebigen   (both 

gen.,  434). 

rely,  fid)  toerlaffen,  *S".,  (on,  auf,  ace.). 
remain,  blei&cn,  S.,  f. ;  — ing,  iifirig 

(adj.). 

remarkable,  tnerfrtwrbtg. 
remember,   gebenfen,    M.;  fid)   erin= 

nern  (both  gen.,  434). 
remit,   (send)    iiberfenben,   M.;   (let 

off)  erlaffen,  S.,  434. 
reply,  entgegnen,  (dat).    • 
request,  ».,  Bitten,  6". ;  ».,  bie  SSitte. 
resemble,  gleidjen,  S.  (dat.). 
resent,  radjen. 
resound,  erfd)aflen,  S. 
respect,  adjten. 
result,  I)erau3=fommen,  S.,  f. 
retire,  abtreten,  S.,  f. ;  fid)  priirf^teljen 

S. 
return,  z/.,  5uriid=fef)ren ;  «.,  bie  3tiirf= 

ieijr. 

reward,  Belo^nen;  n.,  bie  SBelo^nung. 
Rhenish,  rf)einifd). 
Rhine,  ber  JRfjein. 
Rhodes,  baS  9Ujobu3. 
ribbon,  baS  Sanb,  ^cr,  424. 
rich,  rctd). 
riddle,  baS  SRatfet. 
ride,  retten,  6".  (^z«x.,  298) ;  take  a  — 

fpaateren  — ;  — r,  ber  better. 
rifle,  «.,  bie  Siidjfe. 
right,  redjt ;  —  hand,  bie  SRed)te  ;  on, 

to  the  — ,  redjtS  ;  ^.,  ba§  9icd)t;  to 

be — ,  rerfjt  fja^en. 
righteous,  geredjt,  icd)tfd)affen. 
ring,  «.,  ber  9Mng. 


ring,  v.,  (resound)  flingen,  S. ;  (bell) 
f  lingeln  ;  — ing  of  bells,  ba§  ©elaut. 

ripe,  reif. 

rise,  (get  up)  auHtefjen,  S.,  f. ;  (go 
up)  auf=gef)en,  S.,  f.  ;  (from  the 
dead)  cwferfteljen,  S.,  f.  (289). 

river,  ber  glufj,  *ffe. 

road,  ber  328eg,  bie  Scmbftrafje. 

roast,  braten,  S. ;  n.,  ber  93raten. 

robber,  ber  SRaufcer. 

rock,  «.,  ber  &l§,  §elfen,  101. 

roof,  ba§  S)ad),  ^er. 

room,  (space)  ber  9toum,  ^e ;  (of  a 
house)  ba3  Qu 

rose,  bie  9lofe. 

row,  n.,  bie 

row,  v.,  rubern. 

royal,  tbmgltd). 

run,  rennen,  M.,  laufen,  S.;  (both 
aux.,  298) ;  —  after,  nadj= —  (dat.) ; 
—  off,  bot>on= — ;  —  up,  f)eran=Iau= 
fen,  S.,  f.  ;  —  away  (from)  entlcm= 
fen,  S.,  f.  (dat). 

rush,  ftiirjcn. 

Russia,  (ba3)  JRu^Ianb. 

S. 

sack,  (bag),  ber  Sad,  ^e. 

sad,  traurtg. 

sailor,  ber  50latro/fe. 

sake,   for  the  — ,   toegen,    um  .  .  . 

hJttten    (gen.,    280) ;    for    my   — , 

nteinet  — ,  etc.  (452,  b). 
same  (the),  berfelbe,  208;  all  the  — , 

gan<5  berfelbe,   einerlei ;  at  the  - 

time,  sugleid). 
Saturday,  ber  <£atn§tag,  ber  <Sonn= 

abenb. 

sausage,  bie  SSurft,  //.  ac. 
save,  retten  ;  (spare)  fparen. 


36° 


VOCABULARY. 


saving,  fparfam. 

savior,  ber  better  ;  the  Saviour,  bet 


Saxony,  (ba§)  ©ad)fen. 

say,  fagen  ;  be  said  to,  fotfen,  472. 

scholar,  (pupil)  ber@d)iUer;  (learned) 

ber  (Mdjrte  (part.  noun). 
school,  bte  (Sdjttle  ;  —  room,  Me  <Sd)ul= 

ftu&e  ;  boy's  —  ,  bie  $nabenfd)ule. 
scold,  fdjelten,  S. 
scream,  fdjreten,  -5".;  n.,  ba§  ®efd)ret; 

or  infin.  noun. 
sea,  ba§  2fteer,  -e,  bte  (See,  -(e)n,  426; 

—  sick,  feefran!. 
seal,  n.,  ba§  <5tege(  ;  v.,  ftegeln,  berfie= 

geln. 

season  (of  the  year),  bte  ^afjre^jeit. 
seat,  «.,  ber  <£t|}  ;  v.,  fe^en  ;  to  take 

a  —  ,  fid)  fe£en. 
second  (the),  ber  stoeite,  ber  anbere 

(of  two).  [fnotjen. 

see,  fel)en,  S.;  call  to  —  (visit),  be= 
seek,  fudjen. 

seem,  fdjetnen,  S.,  bor=fommen,  S.,  f. 
seize,  gretfen,  S. 
self,  (emph}  felbft,  fcI6cr  ;  (object}  the 

refl.  prons.,  434. 
sell,  berfaufett. 
send,   fd)tcfen,    fenben,    M.;    --    for 

(person)    fommen    lofjen  ;    (thing) 

^olen  loffen,  S. 
sentiment,  bte  ©eftnnitng. 
servant,  (man)  ber  Wiener  ;  (woman) 

bte  $)tenertn  ;  --  girl,  bte  3ftagb, 

•^e  ;  body  of  —  s,  bte  SMenerfdjaft. 
serve,  biencn  (dat.)  ;  (wait  upon)  be* 

btenen  (ace.). 
service,  ber  $)tenft. 
set,  tr.,  fe|en  ;  intr.,  (go  down)  unter= 

gefjen,  S.,  f.  :  —  across,  over,  ii6er= 

fe^en,  287. 


settle,  tr.,  (arrange)  orbnert  ;  (quiet) 

fceruljtgen. 
seven,  fteben  ;  —  ty,  fte6(en)3tg  ;  — 

times,  ficfienmol. 
several,    nte^rere,    157;    •-    times, 


severe,    (strict)    ftreng  ;    (grievous) 

shake,  jdjiitteln. 

shall,  modal:   foUen,  261,  472;  as 

fut.  aux.,  173. 
sharp,  fdjarf,  "-. 
she,  fie,  (e§,  452). 
shear,  jdjeren,  S. 
sheep,  bo§  ©djof,  -e. 
sheet  (of  paper),  ber  SBogen,  431,  c. 
shepherd,   ber   ©djafer;    —  ess,   bie 

©djafertn,  -nen. 
sheriff,  ber  ©djertf  (Eng'j. 
shine,  fd)etnen,  S.;  (glitter)  gfdn^en. 
ship,  ba§  @d)tff,  -e. 
shirt,  ba3  §emb,  gen.  -e§,  //.  -en. 
shoe,  ber  ©djitlj,  -e. 
shoot,  fditeBen,  S. 
shop,  ber  Coben,  //.  "en,  or  —  . 
shore,  ba§  lifer. 
short,  fnrs,  *•  ;  —  ly  (time),  6alb,  in 

fitrjem  ;  —  ness,  bte  ^iirge. 
show,  «.,  bte  ©djait  ;  z/.f  setgen,  hietfen, 

S.,  (guide)  fii^rcn. 
shut,  fd)IteBen,  S.,  p=mad)en. 
sick,  fran!,  1L. 
side,  bte  ©ette  ;  on  this,  that  —  of, 

Me3fett(8),  jcnfcit(8)  (gen.,  280). 
siege,  bte  S3elagerung. 
sight,  ber  SlnHirf,  bte  3(nftd)t  (//.  -en)  ; 

in  —  of,  anftdjttg  (gen}. 
silent,  fdjtoetgenb  (part.  adj.}. 
silver,  ba3@tOJer;  adj.,  (of)  —  ,fil6ern. 
sin,  bte  ©iinbe  ;  —  ner,  ber  (Siinber. 
since,  prep.,  feit  (dat}  ;  conj.,  (time) 

fett,  fettbem  ;  (reason)  ba,  486. 


VOCABULARY. 


sing,  fingen,  S. 

sink,  ftnfen,  S.,  f. 

sir,  £>err,  wtein  §err,  97,  428. 

sister,  Me  ©djtnefter. 

sit,  ft|en,  S.;  —  down,  fid)  fe|en  ;  — 

ting-room,  ba§  SBotjngtmmer. 
six,  fedjS  ;  —  th  (the),  ber  fedjfte  ;  — 

part,  ba§  ©edjftel. 
skin,  «.,  bie  £>aut,  *c  ;  (pelt)  ba§  Sett, 

-e  ;  z/.,  fdjinben,  S.  [blew. 

sky,  ber  £>immel  ;  —  blue,  f)immcl= 
sledge,  ber  ©cfjUtten. 
sleep,  v.,  fdjlafen,  S.;  —  ing-room, 

ba§  ©djlafeimmer  ;   «.,  ber  ©djlaf  ; 

—  y,  fdjlafrig  ;  —  less,  fd)laflo§  ;  go 
to  —  ,  etn=fd)Iafen  (fein). 

slipper,  ber  ^antof'fel  (105). 

small,  !Iein. 

smile,  Icidjeln. 

sneak,  fdjleidjen,  S.,  f. 

snore,  fdjnardjen. 

snow,  n.,  ber  ©djnee;  v.t  fdjneien  ;  — 
white,  fdjneetoeife. 

so,  fo,  485  ;  (then)  alfo. 

soap,  bie  ©eife. 

society,  bie  ©efeflfdjaft. 

soldier,  ber  ©olbat7,  -en. 

some,  einige  (//.)  ;  toeld)e§  (sing.)  ; 
as  part.  adj.  often  not  transl.  ;  -- 
body,  one,  jemanb  ;  —  thing,  ettoa§  ; 

—  times,  ptoeilen  ;  —  where,  trgenb= 
too  ;  —  day,  einft. 


son,   ber  ©of)n,  ^e 

@d)tt>iegerfol)n. 
song,  ber  ©efang,  * 


—  in^law,   ber 


ba3  Sieb,  -er. 


soon,  balb  ;  comp.,  e^er  ;  (earlier) 
friifjer;  (rather)  liefter;  as  —  (as), 
fobalb. 

Sophia,  (Sopfji'e,  gen.  -n3. 

sorry,  fietriifit  (part,  adj.)  ;  I  am  —  , 
e§  tut  mir  letb,  437. 


sort,    bie   ©ortc;    what  —  of,   toa§ 

fur. 

soul,  bie  ©eelc. 

sound,  flingen,  S. ;  «.,  ber  5?Iang,  Kc. 
sour,  fauer. 
South,  ber  (Siib(en);  — ern,  fiiblid); 

— wards,  fiibttmrfcS. 
Spain,  (5a8)  ©pa'nicn. 
Spanish,  fpanifdj. 

spark,  ber  Sunfe,  gen.  -n§,  //.  -n,  99. 
speak,  fpredjen,  S.,  reben,  212. 
speech,  bie  (Spradje ;  bie  9tebe ;  infin. 

n.,  ba§  ©pred)en. 
speed,  bie  ©tie ;  — y,  etlig. 
spell,  bud)ftafiie/ren/  215,  b. 
spend,  (money)  au§=geben,  S.;  (time) 

3U=fcringen,  M. 
spin,  fpinnen,  S. 
spite,  ber  SSibertoille,  99;  in  —  of, 

tro$  (gen.  280). 
splendid,  pradjtig. 
spoil,  berberfien,  S.,  intr.,  f. 
sportsman,  ber  Sog^- 
spring,  (jump)  fpringeit,  S.;   (well) 

quetten,  S.,  (both  aux.,  298) ;  «.,  ber 

(Sprung,  -^e;   bie  Guette;   (season) 

ber  Srii^Iing. 
sprout,  z>.,  fpriefeen,  S. 
square,  (figure)  ba§  SSiered1;  (place) 

ber  ^Sla^,  ^e ;  adj.,  bieredig. 
stable,    ber    ©toft,  *e ;    —boy,    ber 

@tattfned)t. 
staff,  ber  ©tab,  *e. 
stair(s),  bie  Sreppe;   up  — ,  oben ; 

down  — ,  unten  ;  (motion)  — ,  f)er=, 

I)in=unter. 
stand,  ftcljcn,  S.;  (endure),  ou^^ol^ 

ten,  S. ;  —  by  (help),  bei=ftet)en,  S., 

(dat) ;  —  still  (stop),  ftefjen  blei* 

ben,  S.,  f. 
star,  ber  Stern. 


362 


VOCABULARY. 


start,  (depart)  aHaljren,  •$-,  f->  <&'' 

reifen,  f. 

state,  bet  ©tact,  gen.  -e3,  pi.  -en. 
station,   bte   (Station7;    (house)   ber 


statue,  bie  Silbfaule. 

stay,  fcleUien,  S.t  \.  ;  (a  time)  bertoet* 

len. 

steal,  ftefjlen,  S. 
steel,  ber  ©taljl;  —  pen,  bte  ©taf)l= 

feber;  adj.,  ftafjlern. 
step,  v.,  treten,  S.,  f;  n.,  ber  Xritt; 

stair  —  ,  bte  ©tufe. 
stick,  ber  ©tod,  *e. 
still,  «#.,  ftttt(e)  ;  adv.,  (time)  nod)  ; 

(however)  bod),  485. 
stone,  ber  ©tctn  ;  of  —  ,  fteinern. 
stoop  (down),  fid)  Surfeit. 
storm,  ber  ©turm,  *e  ;  —  y,  ftiirmifd). 
story,  (tale)  bie  ©efd)td)te,  bte  ©age; 

(of  a  house)  ber  ©tod,  //.  *e.  [auS. 
straight,  redjt,  gerabe  ;  —  on,  gerabe 
strange  (foreign),  frentb  ;  (odd)  fon= 

berbar. 

stranger,  ber  grembe  (adj.  n.). 
stream,  ber  ©trom,  *c  ;  v.,  ftrbmen. 
street,  bie  ©trajje. 
strength,  bte  ©tarfe  ;  v.,  ftarfen. 
strike,  fdjlagen,  S.  ;  (hit)  Ireffen,  S.  ; 

(the  mind)  auf=fatten  S.  f.  (dat.). 
strong,  ftarf,  *-. 
student,  ber  ©tttbent7,  -en. 
study,  v.,  ftubte/ren,    215;   n.,   ba§ 

©tubium,  gen.  -&,  pi.,  118. 
subject,  ber  ©egenftanb,  *c. 
succeed,  geltngen,  ^.,f.  impers.  (dat.)  ; 

(follow)  folgen,  f.  (dat.). 
such,  foldjer;  —  a,  ein  folrfjcr,  fold) 

etn,  207  ;  before  adj.,  fo,  456. 
sudden,  plofclirfj. 
suffer,  leiben,  S.;  (allow)  erlouBen. 


suf&ce,  genugen,  genug  fetn. 

sufficient,  genug,  ^inieidjenb  (part.). 

sugar,  ber  3«rfer. 

suite,  ba§  ©efolge. 

sum,  bie  ©untme. 

summer,  ber  ©ontmer. 

summit,  ber  ©ipfet,  bie  .^b^e. 

sun,  bie   ©onne;  — shine,  ber  ©on* 

nenfd)ein. 

Sunday,  ber  ©onntag. 
sunken  (part,  adj),  gefunfen. 
superior,  iibertegen ;  — to  (dat.). 
suppose,  an=nef)men,  S. ;  idiom,  see 

465 ;  —  (that),  angenommen,    ge= 

fefct  (bafe),  480. 
sure,  ftd)er,  getoijj ;  adv.,  — ly,  geimfj ; 

bod),  ja,  too^I,  485. 
surrender,  tr.,  u'bergeoen,  S. ;  intr., 

fid)  ergeben  (243),  S. 
sweet,  ftifj. 

swell,  fd)toetten,  S.,  intr.,  f. 
swim,  fd)tnimmen,  S.;  (aux.,  298). 
swing,  fd)luingen,  S. 
Swiss,    adj.,    frf)hjciaerifrf) ;    n.,    ber 

©d)hjeijer ;  /.,  bie  — in. 
Switzerland,  bie  ©d)toei3,  416. 
sword,  ba§  <£d)h)ert,  -er,  ber  5)egen. 


T. 


table,  ber  £tfd),  bie  Safe!. 

tailor,  ber  ©d)neiber. 

take,    ne^nten,    S.;    —  from,   dat. 

pers.;  —  off  (clothes),  au§=3tel)en, 

S.;  —  place,  ftatt*ftnben,  S.,  379; 

—  a  drive,  ride,  walk   (see   these 

words). 
talk,  fpred)en,  S.;  —  of,  6efpred)en ; 

n.,  ba§  ©efpra'd). 
tall,  f)od),  133,  a,  156 ;  (person)  grofe, 

156. 


VOCABULARY. 


3^3 


task,  bie  Slufgafie. 

taste,  fdjmerfen;  (try)  pro&ieren,  215  ; 

n.,  ber  ©efdjmad 
tea,  ber  £ee. 

teach,  lefjren,  442  ;  — er,  ber  Sefjrer. 
tear,  ret&eu,  s.;  —  to  pieces,  gerret= 

Ben. 
tell,  fagen ;  (a  story)  eraaljlen ;  —  a 

lie,  lug  en,  S. 

temptation,  bie  2$erfud)ung. 
ten,  3el)n;  the  — th,  ber 

-fold,  geljnfad). 
testimony,  (testimonial)  ba§ 

nfc,  -ffe. 

than,  al§ ;  rarely  benn,  449,  2. 
thank,   banfen   (dat) ;  «.,  — s,   ber 

®anl. 
that,  dem.,  ber,  jener,    btefer,    456 

rel.,  ber,  toeldjer,  459;  conj.,  bafc 

in  order  — ,  bamtt,  468,  c, 
the,  ber,  def.  art.,  416;  adv.  correl., 

the  ...  the,  je  .  .  .  befto,  334. 
thee,  bid;  (ace.),  Mr  (dat.). 
theft,  ber  ®ie&ftaljl  (gen.  -3). 
their,  ttjr ;  — s,  tljrer,  ber  iljrtge. 
them,  fie  (ace),  if)nen  (dat)  ;  or  dem., 

457  ;  — selves,  (emph),  felbft,  fel= 

6er;  (r^*.)  fidj  (felbft). 
then,   (time)   bann,   bamatS;  (infer- 
ence) benn,  alfo. 
theology,  bie  Sfjeologte7. 
there,  bort,  ba  (in  comp.,  184) ;  ex- 
pletive, —  (is,  are),  e§,   294 ;  adj., 

borttg. 

therefore,  be8fjal&,  ba^er,  alfo. 
they,  fie,  or  dem.  457. 
thief,  ber  3>te6. 
thine,  adj.,  betn ;  pron.,  betner,  ber 

beintge. 
thing,  bo§  2)tng,  -e;  any — ,  some- 

— ,  etitmS ;  not  any — ,  ntd)t§. 


think,-  benfen,  M. ;  —  of,  (as  object), 
gen.  or  on  (ace) ;  (opinion)  bon 
(dat)  ;  (believe),  glouben. 

third,  adj.,  (the)  ber  brttte ;  «.,  ba§ 
Srittcl  (part). 

thirst,  ».,  ber  ©itrft;  z/.,  biirften  (<?r 
burften) ;  — y,  burftig ;  I  am  — ,  e£ 
biirftet  mid),  290. 

thirty,  bretfjig. 

this,  btefer,  ber;  in  ccmp.,  ^ter,  401. 

thou,  bu,  1 86. 

though,  adv.,  bod),  jebodj;  conj.  (al- 
though), obgletdj,  loenn  .  .  .  cwd), 

485- 
thought,  ber  ®eban!e,  gen.  -n§,  //. 

-n,  99 ;  —  of,  an  (ace). 
thousand,  (a),  taufenb. 
threaten,  broken  (dat.). 
three,  bret ;  —  cornered,  — edtg,  — 

times,  — mal ;  of  —  kinds,  — erlet. 
thresh,  brefdjen,  S. 
throne,  ber  S^ron,  -e,  or  -en. 
through,    adv.,    burd),    287;   prep., 

bitrdj  (ace)  ;  (motive)  au§  (dat). 
thunder,  ber  Conner;  v.,  bonnern. 
Thursday,  ber  ®onner§tag. 
thus,  fo,  485 ;  alfo  (inference), 
thy,  betn. 

ticket,  ba3  SStttet7 ;  take  — ,  Ibfen. 
till,  prep.,  6t3,   6t§  auf  (ace)  ;  conj., 

6t§,  ot§  bafe. 
time,    bie  &it  pi.  -en;    (counting) 

bag  9JJaI,  in  comp.,  =mal ;  of  that 

— ,  adj.,   bamoltg ; table,    ber 

§al)rplan ;  at  (what)  — ,  urn  (ace). 
timid,  furdjtfam. 

tired,  ntnbe ;  —  to  death,  tobmu'be. 
tiresome,  mitfjfam,  langrteiltg. 
to,  §u;  (place)  nad)  (dat);  an,  auf, 

6t§  (ace)  ;  or  by  dat.  case ;  before 

infin.,  JU  (urn  .  .  .  p). 


VOCABULARY. 


together,  sufommen. 

tOO,  adv.,  gll ;  conj.,  (also)  Olid). 

tooth,    ber  3al)n,    ^e;    — ache, 

c\  ^  •/:-,  *. vi 


top,  Me  £>bl)e,  ber  ®ipfel. 

torment,  qualen. 

towards,  nad)  (dat),  gegen  (ace). 

tower,  ber  Surm,  *e. 

town,  bie   <£tabt,  -"-e; councillor, 

ber  ©tabtrat,  -^e.  [©djnettpg. 

train,  ber  3itg,  ^e ;  express ,  ber 

transitory,  bergfinglidj. 

translate,  iiberfe|3en,  287. 

travel,  reifen  (aux.,  298);  n.,  — er, 

ber  ateifenbe  (part.  n). 
tree,  ber  23aum,  *e. 
trip,  (journey),  bie  Sfteife. 
trouble,  n.,  (pains)  bie  2ftiif)e ;  (afflic- 
tion) bie  Xriibfat,  -e. 
trousers,  bie  SBetnfleiber  (pi). 
true,   toafjr;   (faithful),  treu;  adv., 

— ly,  toafjrlidj,  h?a^rf)af/tig ;  atoar. 
trust,  trauen  (dat). 
truth,  bie  SBa^r^eit. 
try,  berfudien ;  (test),  ^ro6te/ren. 
Tuesday,  ber  $)iett§tag. 
turn,  brel)en,  toenben,  M;  —  in,  ein= 

feljren ;  —  out,  geraten,  S.,  f. ;  — 

pale,  er&letrfjen,  S.,  f. 
twelve,  stoblf. 
twenty,  shmnaig ; second,    ber 

jtoeiurtb — fte. 
twice,  atoetmat. 
two,  sttiet,  6eibe,  460. 

U. 

umbrella,  ber  3tegenfrf)irm. 
uncle,  ber  Oljetm. 

under,  adv.,  unten,  unter,  287  ;  prep., 
unter  (dat.,  ace.). 


understand,  berftefyen,  S. 
undertake,  unternefymen,  S. 
undress  (one's  self),  fid)  c 

S. 

unfavorable,  ungiinftig  (to,  dat). 
unfortunate,  ungliidlid) ;   as  adveri\ 

usually,  — ertoetfe,  399. 
unhappy,  (same  as  preceding). 
universe,  ba§  SSeltatt  (gen.  -§). 
university,  bie  tlniberfttdt7. 
unjust,  ungeredjt. 
unknown,  unbelannt  (part.  adj). 
unmanageable,  unlenffam. 
unripe,  unreif. 
until,  prep.,  fiiS,  bi§  auf  (ace)  ;  conj\ 

bis,  bis  bai 
unwell,  untt)ol)l. 
unworthy,  untDurbig. 
up,  adv.,  auf,  ^erauf,  fitnauf ;  —  hill, 

bergan7 ;  —  stairs,  oben. 
upon,  prep.,  cutf,  iiber  (dat.,  ace). 
upper  (the),  ber  obere ;  — most,  bet 

oberfte,  158. 
us,  un3  (dat.  ace). 
use,  braudjett    (rarely  gen) ;  —  up, 

berbraudjen ;  make  —  of,  fid)  bebie* 

nen  (gen). 

useful,  nii£Itd)  (dat). 
usual,  getobf)nltd). 
utmost  (the),  ber  ciuBerfte,  158. 
utter,  v.,  ciufjem,  214 

V. 

vacation-ramble,  bie  gertenretfe, 
vain,  eitet ;  in  — ,  bergebenS. 
valley,  ba§  Xol,  -^er. 
value,  ber  SSert. 
vanish,  fd)tt)inben,  S.,  f. 
vanity,  bie  (Sttelfeit. 
very,  fe^r;  abs.  sup.,  ^b^ft, 


VOCABULARY. 


365 


victor,  ber  ©teger  ;  —  ious,  fiegreid). 
view,  (sight)  Me  SluSftdjt;  (opinion) 

.bie  Stnfidjt. 
village,  bo§  35orf,  ^er;  —  commu- 

nity, bie  S)orffd)ofr. 
virtue,  bie  £ugenb. 
virtuous,  tugenbrjoft. 
visit,  befudjen  ;  n.,  ber  SBefudj. 
voice,  bie  <£ttmme. 
volume,  ber  $8anb,  *e,  426. 
vowel,  ber  SSofoF,  -e  ;  —  change,  ber 

Stblout;  —  modification,  ber  Um= 

lout 

W. 

wait,  ttmrten  ;  —  for,  rarely  gen., 
434  ;  usually  ouf  (ace.)  ;  —  ing- 
room,  ber  SSortefool  ;  n.,  —  er,  ber 
tfettner. 

wake  (up),  ouf=hmdjen;  tr.,  tuecfen. 

walk,  v.,  gefyen,  -S.,  f.  ;  go  to  —  , 
fpoaie'ren  —  ;  n.,  ber  ©pojier'gong. 

wall,  bie  2ftouer;  (of  a  room)   bie 


want,  z>.,  oroudjen,   fiebu'rfen    (261, 

^«.)  ;  «.,   (need)   bo§  SebiirfnB; 

(lack)  ber  Mangel  (an,  </«/.). 
war,  ber  ^rieg. 
wardrobe,  bie  ©arberoBe. 
warm,  rtarm  ;  I  am  —  ,  mtr  ift  —  . 
wash,  toaj^cn,  S.  ;  also  reflex. 
watch,  ttmdjen  ;  tr.,  fieicadjen  ;  «.,  bte 

28ad)e  ;  (time)  bie  Ufjr,  -en. 
water,  ba§  2Baf)er;  z/.,  toaffern,  begte= 

feen,  S. 
wave,  rc.,  bie  SBette  ;  v.,  toe^en  ;  ^r., 

fd)tuingen,  S. 

way,  berSSeg;  (manner)  bie  SBeife. 
we,  it)tr. 
weak,  fdjhmd),  *. 
wealthy,  reid),  bermBgenb  (part.  adj.). 


wear,  trogcn,  S. 

weary,  tniibe,  ermiibet  (part.  adj.). 

weather,   ba§  SSetter;  — cock,   bet 

S&etterfjafjn,  ^e. 

Wednesday,  ber  <2ftitttocdj,  388. 
week,  bie  28od)e. 
weep,  toetnen. 

weigh,  toiegen,  S. ;  tr.,  rtia'gen  (242). 
welcome,  tmttfommen.  [486. 

well,  adj.,  h)oi)I;  adv.,  gut,    too^I, 
what,  inter,  rel.  pron.,  ft)a§;  inter. 

adj.,  toeldjer;  — ever,  otte§   hJQg, 

toa3  .  .  .  oud),    459;  —  kind   of, 

toa§  fur,  221. 
when,  inter.,  toann;  indef.,   toenn; 

def.,  al§,  bo,  486 ;  — ever,  toenn. 
whence,  tooljer,  or  sep.,  483. 
where,  too ;   (in  comp.,  before  vowels, 

toor,  222). 
whether,  conj.,  ob. 
which,  inter.,  toeld^er;  rel.,  toeld)er, 

ber,  234. 
while,  n.,  bie  SSeile;  conj.,  (whilst) 

toofjrenb,  inbem,  inbeffen,  486. 
whip,  bie  SJJettfdje. 
whistle,  Pfeifen,  S. 
white,  iceife. 

Whitsuntide,  ^fingften  (pi.). 
who,  inter.,  toer;    rel.,  toeldier,   ber, 

234 ;  (he)  — ,  — ever,  toer,  toer  .  . 

oud;,  459. 

whole,  ganj,  144;  n.,  ba§  ©onje. 
whose,   inter.,  toejfen;    rel.,   be[[en, 

berenf  234. 

why,  toorum,  toeSrjatt),  loo§,  458. 
wicked,  6bfe. 
wife,  bie  §rou,  -en. 
wilderness,  bie  SBiifte,  bie  SBilbniS. 
will,  n.,  ber  SSitte,  gen.  -nS,  //.  -n, 

99 ;  (last)  bo§  Xeftoment7 ;  v.t  tool' 

len,  261  ;  modal,  472  ;  as  fut.,  173. 


366 


VOCABULARY. 


willing,   toitttg ;    to  be  — , 

fetn. 

win,  getotnnen,  S. 
wind,  ber  SStnb. 
wind,  totnben,  S.; —  up  (a  clock), 

auf=3tel)en,  S. 
window,  bag  genfter. 
wine,  ber  SSein ;  — glass,  bag  28ein= 

glag,  -er. 

wing,  ber  gliigel ;  — ed,  gefliigelt. 
William,  SBinjelm. 
winter,  ber  SStnter. 
wise,  toetfe. 

wish,  n.,  ber  SBunfd),  ^e ;  v.,  toiinfd)en. 
with,     (together)    tnir,     famt,     bei 

(dat)  ;  (means)  burd)  (ace.). 
within,   adv.,   tnnen,    barin;  prep., 

(time)  btnnen  (dat)  ;  (place)  inner= 

without,  adv.,  braujjen ;  prep.,  o^ne 

(ace.),  aitfjer  (dat.),  auBer()aIb  (gen). 
woman,  bag  SSeib,  -er,  bte  gran,  -en. 
wonder,  n.,  bag  SBnnber,  — ;  v.,  fid) 

tounbern  (iiber,  ace}. 
wood,  (material)  bag  §0(3;  (place) 

ber  SSalb,  *er ;  — en,  t)blaern. 
woodman  (cutter),  ber  ^ol^oner. 
word,  bag  SBort,  //.  -^er,  -e,  425. 
work,  n.,  bag  28er!,  -e,  bte  Strbett ; 

v.,  arbetten ; people,  bit 

leitte  (pi.  426). 
world,  bte  SSelt,  -en. 
worm,  ber  SSitrm,  ^er. 


worth,  adj.,  tocrt  (gen.) }  —  while, 
ber  SWii^e  toert.  [ben. 

wound,  n.,  bte  SSunbe;  z/.,  t»ertoun= 

wreath,  ber  $rana,  *e. 

write,  fc^retfien,  6". 

writer  (author),  ber  ©djrtftftetter. 

writing,  n.,  Me  ©djrift,  -en;  in  — , 
fc^riftlid). 

wrong,  adv.,  nnred)t;  n.,  bag  tin* 
recfjt;  to  be  — ,  nnredjt  ^a6en. 

Y.      ' 

year,  ba3  S^r,  -e. 

yellow,  fldb. 

yeoman,  ber  SSouer,  gen.  -S,  //.  -n. 

yes,  ja. 

yesterday,  geftern;  adj.,  of  — ,  gc= 

ftrtg ;  day  before  — ,  borgeftern. 
yet,  (time)  nod) ;  not  — ,  nod)  nidjt ; 

(however)  bod),  jebod),  485. 
yield,   toetdien,    S.,    nad>geben,    S. : 

both  dat. 

yonder,  adj.,  jener;  adv.,  bort. 
you,  (pi.)  tf)r ;  (sing.)  bit ;  (s.  or  pi.) 

@ic,  189,  note. 
young,  jung,  *;  —  man,  ber  Bungling ; 

—  lady,  bag  grd'ulein. 
your,    yours,    adj.   and  pron.    (see 

you) ;  — self,  selves,  (^w//z.) 

or  refl.  object,  454. 
youth,   bte  ^ugenb;  (young 

ber 


APPENDIX. 


I.  Plural  of  Nouns. 

See  Foot-Note,  p.  46.  The  following  lists  are  added  for 
reference :  — 

1.  STRONG  I.     (a)  The  following  masculines  modify  the  vowel  (§  76). 
$>er  Slpfet,  Slcfer,  93oben,  53ruber,  ©artert,  £afen,  jammer,  jammer,  £anbel, 
SDicuigel,  SKantel,  9?aget,  £5fen,  ©attel,  <£d)na6ei,  <£d)ttmger,  $ater,  SSogel. 

(£)  Variant  are :  S)er  gaben,  ®raf>en,  Saben,  IKa&el,  ©d)abe(n),  SSagen ; 
and  the  neuter,  ba§  Sager  —  with  a  few  others,  rarely,  as  ber  33ogen,  ber 
Sftctgen,  etc. 

2.  STRONG  II.  (a)  The  following  masculine  monosyllables  do  not  modify 
the  vowel  (§  83,  6) :  $>er  Sfof,  2lar,  2Trm,  Sorb,  Sorn,  S)od)t,  S)old),  5)rucf 
(but  in  comp.  StuSbriicfe,  etc.),  Sorft,  GJrob,  ©urt,  ^>aitd),  ^uf,  ^unb,  Sad)3, 
Saut,   !i3ud)§,   2JJoId),   2«onb  (9Konben  =  months},  ^3fab,  «pol,  $itl3,  «punft, 
©d)uft,  ©d)uf),  ©toff,  Sag,  3oII  (inch],  and  a  few  others,  with  some  of  variant 
usage  (§  424-5). 

(£)  But  the  following  foreign  masculines  modify  the  vowel  of  the  last 
syllable :  S)er  SHtar7,  93tfd)of,  Gljoral7,  ©eneral7,  ^anal7,  Kaplan7, 
SJJoraft7,  ^alafK  —  to  which  may  be  added  the  neuters,  baS  ^ofpttat7, 
taK  (pi.  -filer). 

3.  STRONG  III.  For  masc.  plurals  in  -er,  see  pp.  29-30.  There  may  be 
added  —  though  with  variant  forms  —  £)er  £>orn,  <5traufe  (nosegay),  SBidjt, 
Sbfett)id)t  (§  105). 

4.  WEAK.     For  masculine  monosyllables  of  weak  declension  see  p.  34. 
There  may  be  added :  £)er  Sel§  (§  101),  §inf,  ©ed5,  9^erb,  <5pa^ ;  also  (§121), 
©tetnmefc,  SSorfatjr.     ®er  93urfd),  ber  ©efett  (as  also  ber  £>trt,  ber  Dd)§,  and 
others  rarely)  occur  with  or  without  final  e. 

5.  The  strong  feminines  (§  82)  are  the  monosyllables :  ®ie  Stngft,  2tr.t, 
$Banf  (bench),  Sraut,  SBrunjt,  S3ruft,  gaitft,  §rud)t,  ©an§,  ®ruft,  §anb,  §out, 
«Iuft,  firaft,  £uf),  ^unft,  SauS,  Suft,  Suft,  2Radjt,  3Wogb,  3Jtau§,  S^adjt,  9io^t, 
•SRufe,  ©tabt,  SBanb,  Sffiurft,  3«nft ;  and,  with  variant  forms,  Slot,  ©an,  (Sdjnur, 
Sudjt.     Also,  =flud)t,   sfunft  in  comp.,  Strmbruft,    ©efd)ft>ulft ;   and  SKutter, 
Soditer  (§  77). 

367 


368  APPENDIX. 

6.  Neuter  monosyllables  with  plural  -e  (§  82)  are. 

(a)  In  -r  :  3)a§  £aav,  £>eer,  3al)r,  2fteer,  $aar,  9lol)r,  £tcr,  Xor  (^»fc),  and 
the  following : 

(6)  3)a§  93eet,  Self,  33etn,  SBoot,  23rot,  3>tng  (/*/«£•),  Gra,  Sett,  geft,  ©ift, 
£eft,  Sod),  £nie,  ®reu3,  8o3,  2tfafe,  9?efc,  $ferb,  $funb,  $ult,  9lcd)t,  ffief),  SReid), 
Stiff,  3f?ofc,  ©0(3,  ©djaf,  ©cfiiff,  ©djtoetn,  @etl,  ©ieb,  ©ptel,  ©tiitt,  2Berf,  Belt, 
3eug,  giel,  with  a  few  others,  and  some  of  variant  usage  (§  105). 

7.  The  most  important  nouns  of  mixed  declension  are  given  §  99-104. 
There  may  be  added,  though  with  some  variation  of  usage:  £er  Gkbatter, 
2or6eer,  $fau  (?),  ©traitfj  (ostrich},  llntertan,  Sierat,  and  the  neuter,  ba§  8cib, 
with  a  few  foreign  words,  as  ^on/ful,  ^nteref'fe,  SurtJeF,  ©tatut7. 

8.  Other  lists  might  be  added,  but  hardly  with  advantage  to  the  student. 
For  special  irregularities,  variant  or  double  forms,  etc.,  reference  must  be 
made  to  the  dictionaries.     (See  also  §§  105,  424-6). 


II.   Uses  of  Some  Prepositions. 

See  §  447.  The  following  are  selected  for  illustration.  The 
arrangement  is  made  alphabetical,  for  reference: 

5ltt,  with  dative  or  accusative,  at  or  to  a  point. 

i.  With  dative :  (a)  Place  at  or  near:  (i)  cr  ftefjt  an  ber Xtire,  an  ber  (£cfe, 
(nalj)  an  ber  SBanb,  etc.;  (2)  on:  ber  £>ut  fja'ngt  an  berSSanb;  an  bent  lifer 
ftefyen;  Me  S28ad)t  amStfjetn;  and  (3)  of,  of  battles  named  for  rivers:  Me 
@d)tad)t  an  ber  Sttma  (see  6ei). 

(V)  Relative  point  or  degree  (see  pred.  superl.  §  160):  $)ie  Xage  finb  je^t 
ant  langften,  (at  the)  longest. 

(f)  Definite  specification,  (i)  primarily  of  place,  in:  larjm  an  einem  Sufee; 
(2)  manner,  by:  an  ber  £anb  gretfen,  fii^ren,  fallen,  gieljen,  by  the  hand; 
hence,  means,  by  :  an  ber  ©timme  erfennen,  to  know  by  the  voice  ;  (3)  plenty 
or  want,  of,  in:  reid),  arm,  ftarf,  fdjtoad)  an;  liberflufe,  2TtangcI,  an  ©elb ; 
excess,  want,  of  money.  (4)  cause,  from :  letben,  fterben,  an  ;  from,  or  of 
(a  disease ;  see  rjor).  (5)  And  with  verbs,  as  ferjtcn,  fjinbern,  3tt)etfeln,  to 
doubt  of ;  teilne^men,  Suft  finben,  to  take  pleasure  in,  etc. 

(d)  Time,  definite  without  duration,  at,  in:  am  Sftorgen  gel)t  Me  ©onne 
ouf;  am  Stnfange;   am  (Snbe.     On:   am  SDfontag;   am  ncunten  9ftat    (dates 
§  309);  on  meinem  ©e6urt§tage  (see  p;  and  for  time  of  day,  urn). 

(e)  In  many  phrases,  as,  e§  ift  an  mtr  511  reben,  my  turn  to  speak;  e3  ift 


USES    OF    SOME    PREPOSITIONS.  369 

nid)t§  an  ber  ®efd)td)te,  nothing  in  the  story;  am  Seben,  alive;  an  fetner  ©tefle, 
in  his  place;  an  beffen  ©telle,  instead  of  that,  etc. 
2.  With  accusative,  motion  or  direction  to. 

(a)  Place  —  to,  on,  against:  er  gerjt  an  Me  Srfe,  ftettt  ben  Sifdj  an  ba§ 
genfter,  rja'ngt  ben  £ut  an  bie  28anb;  ftopft  an  Me  Sure;  ftofet  ben  §ufj  an 
einen  ©tein;  Icfjnt  fid)  an  bie  SOJauer;  and  in  phrases  like:  Stn  bte  Arbeit 
gefyen,  go  to  work,  etc.     So,  with  motion  implied  (where  sometimes  dat.  of 
ind.  object):  einen  S3rtef  fdjreiben;  etn  SBudj  fenben;  cine  ykbe  fjalten — an,  to; 
and  in  address,  without  verb  —  letters,  poems,  etc.,  as :  an  <Smnta,  an  bie 
greube. 

(b)  Figuratively,  direction  of  mind:  benfen,    ertnnern,   marjnen,  an,  of; 
gfauben,  an,  in;  geroorjnen  an,  to,  etc.,  and  the  corresponding  nouns:  ber 
®ebanfe,  ©laube,  an ;  as,  id)  glaube  an  einen  ©ott,  in  one  God  (see  benlen 
bon  p.  134). 

(c)  Number  or  time;  here  an,  alone,  denotes  indefinite  amount,  up  to,  or 
nearly:  e§  foftet  an  bie  aeljn- Safer;  more  usually  with  bi3,  to,  till:  M3  an 
ba§  (Snbe;  bom  2ftorgen  bis  an  ben  Stbenb,  etc. 

9fllf,  with  dat.  or  accus.,  on,  upon,  a  surface. 

1.  With  dative:  (a)  Place,  on,  upon,  literally,  as :  auf  bern  £ijd)e,  bent 
Serge,  ber  <£cc,  bent  <£d)iffe,  ber  ©trafee,  jein,  etc.     Hence  (b},  with  places 
implying  elevation  or  importance,  at :  auf  nteinem  3inimer  (up  stairs) ;  auf 
bent  ©djloffe  (up  af)\  and  so,  auf  ber  Uniucrfttat,  ber  2ln3fteHung,  bent  Satte, 
bem  3D^arfte,  ber  SJSoft,  fein,  etc.     Also  (c),  local  occupation  or  condition,  at, 
on:  (£r  tft  auf  ber  ©djnfe  (=  still  a  pupil,  while  in  school  =  in  ber  <Sd)ule); 
auf  ber  ^agb;  auf  etner  Sietfe,  etc.  And  hence  in  phrases  like  auf  bent  Sanbe, 
in  the  country;  auf  ber  <2>telie,  on  the  spot;  auf  ber  Slat,  in  the  very  act,  etc. 
(d)  Metaphorically,  resting   or   standing  on :    bauen,   fcerufjen,   Befjarren, 
beftetien  (insist)  auf  (yet  also  accusative). 

2.  Much  more  largely,  sometimes  when  dative  might  be  expected,  auf 
is  used  with  accusative: 

(a)  Place,  with  verbs  of  motion  or  action,  corresponding  to  a,  b,  c  above; 
as,  on:  auf  ben  23crg,  bie  <Bee,  bie  (Strafee,  geljen ;  to:  auf  ben  93att,  ben 
SWarft,  bie  ^oft,  ba§  Sanb,  gefjen;  on  or  for:  auf  bie  ^agb,  eine  SReife, 
geijen,  etc. 

(b}  (Up)  to,  a  point,  or  degree;  as:  6i3  auf  ben  Sob;  er  Ijat  mid)  auf§ 
aufeerfte  gebrad)t;  —  and  here  the  absolute  superlative  (§  315):  auf§  fcfjbnfte 
griifeen,  etc. 

(c)  Direction,  on  or  after:  ©djlag  auf  ©djlag,  blow  upon  (after)  blow; 
ber  ©onnenfdjein  folgt  auf  ben  9tegen.  Hence,  on,  as  occasion:  bo§  tue  id) 


37O  APPENDIX. 

ttitf  5>rjren  S3efefjl,  on  your  order.     And  so,  in  phrases  expressing  manner, 
in:  ouf  btefe  SSetfe,  in  this  way;  auf  3)eutfd),  in  German;  auf£  neite,  anew,  etc. 

(d)  Direction  on  or  toward  an  object  or  purpose:  fie  f)at  imtner  etn  SCuge 
auf  ba§  $tnb;  er  gibt  biet  ©elb  auf  SBiidjer  au3,  on  or  for  books  (thus,  auf 
bafc,  for,  in  order  that).  Hence,  as  prospective  condition,  on :  ailf  Me  ©efafjr 
fjanbeln,  on  the  risk;  auf  Setb  unb  £eben;  auf  btefe  SBebtngung ;  or  in:  auf 
btefengatt;  auf  alle  gatte  (literally, /0r  all  cases);  or  at:  auf  metne  Soften, 
at  my  expense,  and  other  phrases. 

(e)  So,  with  verbs  and  adjectives,  denoting  direction  of  mind  on   or 
towards  as,  for:  fyoffen,  umrten ;  to:  anttoorten,  rjbren,  merfen:  er  antroortet 
nttr;  but:  auf  ntetne  Srage;  er  fjbrt  auf  ntetne  3febe;  on:  red)nen,  fidj  berlaffen, 
e£  toagen,  ja^Ien;  —  adjectives,  of:  etferfud)tig,  ueibtfd),  ftol^;  at:   bbfe, 
erboft,  etc. 

(/)  Time  (i)  on,  towards  :  e§  gel)t  auf  neun  ;  etn  SStertel  auf  bret,  a  quar- 
ter past  two;  (2)  prospectively  for  a  point,  or  period:  eine  3letfe  auf  ben 
erften  3ftai  feftfe&en  —  auf  eine  SSodie  berfdjieben ;  er  reift  auf  etne  SSodje  ab, 
for  a  week ;  and  in  phrases  like:  auf  tmmer,  for  ever ;  auf  SBteberfefjen,  till 
•we  meet  again,  etc.,  in  prospective  sense,  for,  till.  (3)  On  or  at  a  point, 
precisely :  ®ommen  ©ie  auf  bie  Sftinute,  at  the  minute  ;  auf  etnntal,  all  at  once. 

NOTE.  —  2tuf  is  much  used  adverbially  (up,  open,  etc.),  and  in  adverbial  phrases. 

8ht3,  with  dative  only — out  of  (from  within). 

(d)  Place  —  motion  out  of:  (i)  3tu§  bent  £>aufe  fomnten  ;  ©elb  au3  ber 
Xafd)e  nefymen  ;  au3  bent  ^enfter  fe^en,  to  look  out  of  the  window;  sometimes 
from  (yet  strictly  from  within):  au§  ber  <£tabt  fomnten,  etc. 

(2)  More  rarely  removal  away  from:  au§  ben  Slugen ;  au§  ber  9J?obe,  out 
of  sight,  fashion,  etc. 

(6)  Source  —  from,  by:  (i)  3dj  felje  au§  S^rem  S3rtefe — au§  feinem  93etra» 
gen  ;  id)  toetfj  au§  Srfa&rung  —  au§  btelen  ©ritnben ;  au3  SSerfe^en,  by  mistake. 

Hence,  (2)  origin,  from:  (£r  ftammt  au§  etner  atten  gantiltc  —  au§  Berlin; 
etn  SWar^en  au§  alien  geiten  •  9fadjrtd)ten — SBrtefe — au§  ©eutfdjlanb,  etc. 

(c)  Material — out  of,  of:  S(u0  ©olb  gentac^t ;  au§  Se^m  gebrannt ;  ber 
2Jlenfd)  beftefjt  au§  2etb  unb  <Seele ;  au§  'nid)t§  totrb  ntd)t§ ;  toerben  au§,  to. 
become  of,  etc. 

(d)  Motive  —  from,  for :  Slug  Sttelfett,  ©eij,  S^ot  ^anbeln ;  aug  Mangel 
an  ©elb,  for  want  of  money;  au3  SCditung  gegen  @te,  out  of  respect,  etc. 

JBei,  with  dative  only  —  by,  near. 

(a)  Place — properly  (near)  by:  Gr  toofjnt  bei  ber  ®trdje ;  id;  ftanb  bei  bent 
So  in  many  phrases:  bet  £tfd)e,  at  table;  bet  §Dfe,  at  court;  betm 


USES    OF    SOME    PREPOSITIONS.  37  1 

SBein  ftfcen  ;  id)  Ijabe  fein  ®elb  bet  mir,  about  me  ;  bie  ©djladjt  bei  Seipstg,  of 
(with  names  of  towns);  bei  <£innen  fein,  in  one's  senses;  bet  <5eite,  aside,  etc. 

(b)  More  especially  at  one's  house:  (i)  S3et  bent  ©djneiber,  dtf  //&* 
tailor's  (house  or  shop)  ;  er  toofjnt  bei  mir,  with,  me  (at  my  house  —  nut  mir, 
elsewhere).  Hence  (2)  as  characteristic  —  with,  among,  in:  $)a§  ift  bet 
un§  Sftobe  —  bet  ben  £>eutfd)en  iibltd),  zc/z'/^  «j,  among  the  G.;  ba§  SBort  finbet 
fid)  bei  ben  £>td)tern  —  bei  ®oetb,e,  in  the  poets,  etc.  S)a§  fte^t  bet  S^nen, 
j/tf^  with  —  depends  on—  you  ;  fragen  @ie  bei  ifim  nad),  inquire  of  him,  etc. 

(f)  Instrument  —  by  (less  frequently  than  in  English):  (i)  Set  ber  £>anb 
neljnten;  6et  feinem  Sftamen  nennen,  to  call  by  his  name.  So  (2)  in  adjuration: 
fcet  ©ott,  by  (the  help  of)  God;  6et  nteiner  (Sljre,  by,  or  on  my  honor;  and  (3) 
condition  —  on:  bet  SebenSftrafe,  on  penalty  of  death  ;  bet  CiHe  bent,  with  (in 
spite  of}  all  that. 

(d)  Time  —  (\)  on,  as  occasion  :  Set  btefer  ©elegenf)ett,  on  this  occasion  ; 
bet  btefen  SKorten,  at  these  words.  And  (z)  in  phrases,  during,  by  :  bei  !Kad)t  ; 
bet  Xage  ;  bet  Stdjte,  by  candlelight;  bet  ^ettem  Sage,  in  broad  day;  bet  btefent 
SBetter  ;  betm  Sefen,  while  reading.  Rarely  with  numbers,  meaning  nearly. 


with  accusative  only  —  through. 

(a)  Place  —  motion  through  :  S)itrd)  bte  ©tabt  —  ben  SSJalb  —  retten  ;  bnrd) 
etnen  gluB  fdittJimmen,  across  a  river  ;  burd)  atte  ©efofjren  ftegretd),  etc. 

(b)  Means  —  through,  by:  S)er  Srtef  fam  burdi  bte  ?)Soft,  through  (by)  the 
mail  ;  er  toarb  retd)  burd)  ben  £anbet  —  burd)  S^ren  Setftanb,  by  trade,  etc.  ; 
burd)  einen  $fetl  bern)itnbet,  by  an  arrow,  etc. 

(c)  Time  —  extension  through:  here  burd)  usually  follows  the  noun  (more 
frequently,  bjnburd))  :  bo§  gan^e  %at)i  burdi  ;  ben  Xag  b.inburd),  all  day  long. 

NOTE.  —  SHirrf)  is  much  used  adverbially  (throughout)  ;  and,  as  prefix,  is  separable  or 
inseparable,  with  changed  sense  (§  287). 

gfiir,  with  accusative  only  —  for  (originally  same  as  t>or). 

(a)  Primarily,  place  —  in  front  of  ;  hence,  in  behalf  of,  for  :  fair  fctmpfen 
fur  $i>ntg  unb  SSaterlonb  ;  nteine  ^fteunbe  fttmnten  fiir  mid),  vote  for  me  ;  id) 
forge  fiir  bid),  etc. 

(b)  Hence,  in  place  of,  for  :  (i)  (£r  fjonbelt  fiir  mid),  for  me  (as  my  agent)  ; 
bitttge  28(a)aren  fiir  b(a)are3  ©elb,  cheap  goods  for  cash;  id)  ne&me  e§  fiir  33e= 
aafjtung  on,/^r,  or  in,  payment.    (2)  Price  —  for  :  fiir  aeb,n  Xater  faufen  — 
toerfaufen.     (3)  And  for,  as  :  in  phrases  like  adjten,  erfla'ren,  gelten,  batten, 
fid)  attSgeben  —  fiir  (§  443,  c),  etc. 

(c)  Hence,  fitness,  destination  —  for  :  5)a§  ©tiid*  ift  ntd)t  fiir  mid)  ;  <Spiel= 
fiir  ^inber,  toys  for  children,  etc.     Or  (2)  proportion,  correspondence  : 


372  APPENDIX. 

(£r  tft  alt  fitr  feine  Mre,  old  for  his  years;  and  phrases  like  2ftann  fur  3ftann ; 
£ag  fiir  Sag  ;  SBort  fiir  SBort,  etc.  (3)  Restriction :  fiir  fjeute,  fitr  biefeS  2ftat, 
/<?r  //«>  time ;  fiir  midj,  #.$•  for  me ;  an  unb  fiir  fid),  in  and  for  itself,  per 
se,  etc. 

$tt,  with  dative  or  accusative  —  in,  into. 

1.  With  dative  —  position  in  (nearly  as  in  English). 

(a)  Place  or  time— in,  within:  in  biefent  £aufe— biefem  S^re— ber  nad)= 
ften  28od)e ;  in  SBertin  ;  im  SBinter,  etc. ;  at :  in  ber  £irdje  —  ber  ©cfjule,  in 
school  (see  auf);  in  ^hir^em,  in  a  short  time;  in  alter  Sriirje,  as  soon  as 
possible:  im  Stlter  t>on  60  3&f)ren,  at  the  age,  etc. 

(6)  Condition :  in  ©ebanfen ;  in  SSer^toeiftung ;  in  einer  ungludlidjen  Cage 

—  ©rtmmung  —  fein,  etc.    Sm  93egriff  fein  gu  fcfjreifcen  (in  the  idea)  on  the 
point  of  writing  (§  465). 

(f)  Manner:  im  65et|te  fceten,  in  spirit;  in  ber  Site,  in  haste;  in  ehtem 
fceleibtgenben  Xone,  in  (with)  an  insulting  tone;  in  SSafjrljeit;  in  ber  Xat, 
in  fact ;  fiefte^en  in,  to  consist  in. 

2.  With  accusative  —  motion  into. 

(a)  Place  — into:  in  bag  £au§  —  ben  ©arten  —  getjen,  etc.;  to:  in  bie 
5Hrd)e  —  bie  (Scfjule  —  ba§  Sweater  —  ge^en,  to  church,  etc. ;  in :  er  frfjnitt  ftdj 
in3  5Bein  —  ^atte  einen  ©djnitt  in  bie  SSange,  a  cut  in  his  cheek. 

(b)  Condition  —  change  into :  SSaffer  in  SSein  —  Xraurigfeit  in  greube  — 
tjertoanbeln;  in  atoei  ©tiicfe  teilen,  into  two  pieces ;  in  iippigfeit  berfatten ;  in 
bie  §ludjt  jagen,  to  put  to  flight ;  einnritttgen  in,  to  consent;  fid)  mifdjen  in,  to 
meddle  with. 

NOTE.  — ^n,  as  prefix,  is  etn  — see  also  fjerein,  fjineitt. 

Sfttt,  with  dative  only  —  company,  participation  with. 

(a)  Usually  with  :  tooljnen  —  effen  —  mit  (see  6ei);  also  to  :  fpred)en  mit ; 
bertrmnbt  mit,  related  to ;  on  :  2tf  ttteib  ^afien  mit,  to  have  pity  on  ;  by  :  ein 
2ftann  mit  9Jamen  (Sdjmibt,  by  name  (see  ki),  etc. 

(b)  Time  —  coincident  with:  2ftit  bent  griitjttng  fommen  bie  ©d)ir-at6en  ; 
mit  biefen  Shorten  gtng  er  a&  ;  mit  SageSanbrud),  at  (with)  daybreak,  etc.    . 

(c)  Instrument  —  with:   3Rtt  etnem  9Jteffer  fdjneiben;  mit  einem  ®oldje 
ftedjen,  etc. ;  mit  giifeen  treten,  underfoot;  mit  t)(a)arem  ©elbe  faufen,  to  buy 
for  cash  ;  mit  ber  ^Soft  fd)tcfen,  by  mail ;  id)  fage  bamit,  1 mean  ;  multipticieren 

—  bttitbieren  —  mit,  by. 

(d)  Manner — with:  mit  SSergniigen;  mit  grofjen  5(ugen  anfe^en,  with 
surprise ;  mit  SSorfa^  —  Stei^,  on  purpose,  and  various  adverbial  phrases. 

NOTE.  —  SKit,  often  stands  as  adverb,  without  object—  with,  along  (withi 


USES    OF    SOME    PREPOSITIONS.  373 

with  dative  only  (akin  to  nalj,  near) — towards,  to,  after. 

(a)  Place — direction  towards,  to  (not  of  persons) :    !^d)  retfe  nad)  (£ng= 
lonb  —  nad)  33erltn  —  nad)  bent  <Biiben ;   nad)  ber  <£>tabt —  nad)  £>anfe  —  geb,en, 
home. 

(b)  Hence,  of  object  aimed  at — after,  for :  Ictitfen  nod),  to  run  after;  nod) 
ben  ©ternen  gretfen,  to  grasp  at.     So,  fragen,  fefjen,  ftreben,  fdjtrfen  —  nad), 
after,   or  for ;  fdjtejjen,  trad)ten,  roerfen,  atelen —  nac^  aff  etc>.  an(j  wjth  a(j. 
jectives,  begiertg  nad),  etc. 

(c)  Time — after:  (i)  9?odj  9?eujaf)r;  nad)  jefjn  ttfjr;   nad)  etner  Minute; 
(2)  succession  after,  next  to:  nad)  Mr  tft  er  mein  Hebfter  §reunb,  next  to 
you,  etc. 

(d)  Hence,  after,  according  to  (in  this  sense  often  follows) :  !ftadj  etner 
83orfd)rift  jdjretben,  after  a  copy  ;  nad)  SBefefjl  fjanbetn  ;  nad)  metncr  SKeinung  ; 
nad)  meiner  tlfjr,  by  my  watch;  nad)  ben  ®eje|jen  ;  bent  Sitter  nad),  according 
to  age ;  ber  SRetfje  nad),  in  a  row.     And  in  phrases  like  rid)ten,  urteilen  — 
nod),  to  judge  by  ;  riedjen,  fdjmecfen  —  nad),  to  taste  of. 

lifter,  with  dat.  or  accus,  over,  above. 

1.  With  dative,  position  over. 

(a)  Place,  over :  S)er  Iftebef  fteljt  iiber  bem  Serge ;  ntemanb  ftc^t  iiber  bent 
&bntg  (in  rank). 

(b)  over,  beyond :  liber  bem  2fteere  lag  etne  neue  SBelt. 

(c)  over,  during:  liber  bem  S3ud>e,  bem  Siejen,  |d)(tef  er  etn,  while  reading; 
iiber  bem  ©piele  entftanb  ber  ©treit,  during  the  game  (over,  concerning  =  iiber 
ba§  (Spiel),  etc. 

2.  More  freely  with  accusative,  of  motion,  extent,  action,  expressed  or 
implied,  over,  above,  beyond,  about,  etc. 

(a)  Direction  over:  iiber  Me  33riide  geb,en  ;  iiber  ba£  £>au3  Piegen  ;  ben  §ut 
iiber  ben  £tjd)  fya'ngcn ;  eine  S3riide  iiber  ben  glufj  fdjlagew,  over  (across)  the 
river,  etc.     Here  belong  such  verbs  as  fyerrfdjen,  regieren,  ftegen — itber,  etc. 

(b)  Over,  beyond:  (i)  liber  ba§  3iel  fd)tefeen,  beyond  the  mark ;  iiber  ben 
®bmg  je^en  ;  iiber  etne  Sftetle  roeit ;  iiber  meine  $ra'fte ;  iiber  alle  SJla^en  ;  iiber 
60  S&fy*e  ftlt.    Also  (2)  past,  by  :  iib5r$an§  nad)  Conbon,  via  Paris ;  and  (3) 
after,  in  addition  to  :  SSriefe  iiber  Srtefe  fd)retben,  letters  upon  letters;  etnen 
Xog  iiber  ben  anbern,  one  day  after  another,  etc. 

(c)  Time  beyond,  after :   (i)  liber  etn  3ab,r  jefjen  totr  nn§  tuteber,  in 
(after)  a  year ;  fyeitte  iiber  3el)n  £age,«  ten  days  hence  ;  iiber  fur$  ober  lang, 
sooner  or  later ;  (2)  In  some  phrases,  during  (here  usually  follows  the  case): 


374  APPENDIX. 

liber  Sftadjt,  over  night  (in  the  night) :  bte  3?ad)t  u'ber,  all  night ;  ben  <Sommer 
iiber,  <z//  (through)  the  summer. 

(d)  Frequently  of  object  or  cause :  about,  concerning,  of,  etc.     Thus : 

(i)  With  verbs,  as  fpredjen,  fdjreiben,  er^oljlen — U6er,  about  (see  bon);  (2) 
especially  of  emotions  and  their  expression,  as :  fid)  cirgern,  fid)  freuen,  fid) 
itwnbern,  erfdjrecfen ;  Ilagen,  Iad)en,  trauern,  toetnen — u'ber,  and  with  like  ad- 
jectives, frofj,  traurtg,  etc.,  uber,  of,  for,  at,  etc. 

lint,  with  accus.  only,  around,  about. 

(a)  Place :  Urn  ben  Xtfd)  fifjett,  Icwfen  ;  ctioaS.um  ben  £al§  binben,  tragen ; 
bie  ©egenb  urn  SBofton,  etc. 

(l>)  Time,  or  number — (i)  indefinite,  about:  um  Sftitternadjt ;  um  groei= 
rjunberr,  about  200 ;  but  (2)  of  the  time  of  day,  definite,  at:  um  toeldje  $eit  ? 
um  ijniet  Ufyr,  at  two  o'clock,  etc.  Also  (3)  excess,  by  :  um  ein  3>aljr  alter, 
a  year  older.  (4)  Succession,  after  :  einer  um  ben  onbern,  one  after  another \ 

(c)  Rotation  around,  (i)  alternation :  einen  Sag  um  ben  anbern,  every  other 
day ;  (2)  Exchange,  for:  Singe  um  9(uge,  an  eye  for  an  eye ;  um  einen  I)o^en 
5]Sret§  faufen,  for  (at)  a  high  price.  (3)  End,  or  loss  ;  um  ba3  fieben  bringen,  to 
deprive  of  life ;  um  ba§  ©etb  fommen,  to  lose  one's  money  ;  e§  ift  um  mid)  ge= 
fdjeljen,  all  over  -with  me.    Compare  bie  3ett  ift  um,  over  (as  of  a  circuit  com- 
pleted), and  so  in  many  phrases. 

(d)  Very  largely  with  remote  object,  about,  for :  um  ettoaS  ftreiten,  um 
93rot,  SBer^eifjung,  bitten  ;  um  ©elb  fpielen;  um  ^at  fragen  ;  um  £iilfe  rufen  ; 
um  ©otte§  28ilten,/^r  God's  sake.     And  with  still  more  general  reference: 
2Bte  fteljt  e§  um  tfjn,  um  feine  ©efunbfjeit  ?  how  is  it  about,  etc.  ?   (£3  ift  um 
fetn  2e6en  311  tun,  his  life  is  at  stake,  etc. 

NOTE.  —  @te  ftrttten  iiber,  um,  einen  9tpfet :  iiber  expresses  cause  of  quarrel,  um,  the 
object  of  contention.  This  more  remote  sense  of  um  is  seen  in  the  iniin.,  um . ..  JU,  of 
purpose.  Um  has  many  uses  in  adverb  phrases. 

Unter,  with  dat.  or  ace.,  under. 

i.  With  dative,  position  under,  beneath,  (a)  Place:  llnter  einem  S3oume 
fteljen  ;  er  ftef)t  tief  unter  bit  (in  rank);  unter  ber  ,&anb,  underhand,  secretly; 
unter  ©egel,  under  sail;  unter  meinem  £dju£e  ftefjen,  under  my  protection ; 
unter  ben  ©efe^en,  subject  to  the  laws ;  unter  btefer  SBebingung,  under  (on) 
this  condition.  So  (2)  time :  unter  ber  SRegterung  Napoleons ;  unter  ben 
beutfdjen  ^aifern,  under,  etc. 

(b)  Among,  frequently  :  (i)  unter  anbern,  among  other  things ;  bie  fd)bnfte 
unter  alien  (so,  often,  for  part,  gen.,  §  431) :  unter  einanber,  in  confusion; 


USES    OF    SOME    PREPOSITIONS.  375 

sometimes  (2)  between:  unter  un§  gefogt,  entre  nous  ;  itnter  33ru'bern,  con- 
fidentially, etc.,  or  (3)  amid:  unter  Subeln,  amid  shouts. 

(c)  Below,  less  than:  Hitter  bent  SSert  angeben,  unter  $retS  berfaufen, 
below  value;  unter  atoanaig  ^a^eu  alt  ;  unter  after  firttif,  beneath  all  criticism. 


2.  With  accusative,  motion,  under,  beneath  (a}  :  unter  einen  33ount 
treten,  fid)  fliidjten,  to  take  refuge  under  ;  er  Ijat  alte  S)inge  unter  feine  §iifje 
getan,  put  under  ;  id)  nefjme  bid)  unter  meinen  <Sd)u£,  etc. 

(t>)  Among  :  ttu!raut  unter  ben  S&etaen  fa'en,  to  sow  tares  among  the  wheat; 
unter  bie  ©olbaten  gefjen,  to  enlist. 


t,  with  dative  only,  from,  of,  by  : 

(a)  Place  (i)  motion  from  :  ©r  lommt  bon  ber  (Stabt  ;  reift  bon  $ari3  nad) 
iionbon  ;  and  in  phrases,  bon  oben,  bon  fjtnten  ;  bon  etnanber  gcl)en,  to  sep- 
arate, etc.     (2)   Transition  from  :  bon  SBorten  gu  ©tfjla'gen,  from  words  to 
blows  ;  bon  einer  $tanffjett  genefen,  recover  from.  (3)  Separation  from  :  fecf)& 
Sfteilen  bon  93erlin  ;  rein  bon  ;  fret  ben  ©djulben,  free  of  debt;  freigefproc^en 
bon,  acquitted  of. 

(b)  Time,  from  (often  with  added  adverb)  :  bon  Sftorgen  fct3  9t6enb  ;  bon 
^eute  ;  bon  Sinb^eit  on  ;  bon  ^ugcnb  ouf;  bon  SllterS  (3ett)  ^er,  from  olden 
times,  etc. 

(c)  Source,  fiom:  (i)  bon  eT)rIt(^en  Sttern  geboren  ;  ettoa§  bon  etnem  ber« 
langen,  erljalten,  etc.,  to  ask  from,  or  of;  bon  iQtr&tnr  from  the  heart;  bon 
felbft,   v&teintarily,  etc.     (2)  Material,  f  rom,  of  :  Sine  S3riide  bon  (Stfen  (but 
au§  Stjen  ntacfjen),  ein  §er^  bon  (Stein  (for  the  adj.  §  432).    (3)  Means,  from, 
by  :  er  4e6t  bon  fetnem  £anbel  ;  bon  ber  Cuft  leben,  on  air;  nafc  bom  9?egen  ; 
bon  Sroft  erftarrt,  etc. 

(d}  Agency,  by,  especially  of  passive  verb,  usually  personal  (§  274). 
(e)  Specification,  of  (and  here  often  for  genitive,  §  431-2)  : 

(i)  ber  $ontg  bon  (Sngtanb  ;  teiner  bon  un§  ;  trtnfen  ©tj  bon  biefem  SSetn  ; 
and  with  adjectives:  bott  bon,  full  of,  etc.  (§  433).  (2)  Description:  Gin 
StRonn  bon  (Sfyre,  bon  60  S^ten  ;  ein  @d)aufpieler  bon  ^Srofeffton,  by  profession; 
ein  Xeufel  bon  etner  §rau,  a  devil  of  a  woman;  and  in  many  phrases.  So 
with  names,  primarily  from  (local)  :  thence  of,  as  sign  of  nobility  :  3^ 
bon  SBtsoinarcf,  etc. 

(/)  Limiting  object,  of,  concerning;  with  verbs  like  benfen,  fyalten, 
fybren,  fagen,  fdjreiben,  fprectjen,  tntffen,  etc.  :  tr-aS  benfen  <£>ie  bon  t^m  ?  your 
opinion  of  (see  an)  ;  id)  fprad)  babon,  of  it,  mentioned  it  (baru'ber,  about  it,  in 
detail). 


376  APPENDIX. 

25orf  with  dat.  or  accus.,  in  front  of,  before. 

1.  With  dative :  (a)  Place,  (i)  position  before :   bor  bent  Sore  ftefjen ;  Dor 
metnen  Slugen  ;  <£>d)ritt  bor  <Sd)ritt,  step  by  step,    (2)  In  presence  of,  before  : 
bor  bent  ©erid)te,  bent  9?id)ter,  ftefyen. 

(b)  Time,  (i)  priority  before :  bor  28eil)nad)ten  ;  bor  (£fjrifti  ®eburt ;  (z) 
preference  before  :  bor  atfen  SMngen,  before  all,  first.    (3)  Especially  of  time 
past,  ago :  bor  einent  S^re  ;  bor  3dten,  in  times  past. 

(c)  In  presence  of  before,  from  :  (i)  bor  etnent  fHefjen,  toflee  from  ;  bor 
bent  £obe  erfdjreden ;  and  with  like  verbs :  fid)  fiirdjten,  Bittern ;  fid)  fjiiten, 
berbergen,  berfteden  —  bor,  before,  or  from  (to  avoid),  toarnen  bor,  to  -warn 
against,  etc.    Hence  (2)  Cause,  from,  or  for  :  bor  2(ngft  fliefjen  ;  bor  greuoe 
toeinen  ;  bor  £>unger  fterben  (see  aue). 

2.  With  accusative,  motion  before:  fair  fe£en  un3  bor  bag  Xor  (go  out 
and,  etc.) ;  bte  £anb  bor  Me  Stugen  fatten  ;  bor  ba§  ©erid)t  geforbert  tterben 
(with  motion  implied);  fie^e  bor  bid),  look  before  you  (direction) ;  but  id) 
fa^  e§  bor  mir  Itegen  (place),  etc. 

gu,  with  dative  only,  properly  to,  but  with  various  uses,  (a)  Primarily, 
motion  to —  (i)  a  person  (for  place,  see  nod))  :  er  fam  gu  ntir,  Itef  511  feiner 
2Jtutter.  Hence  (2)  to  one's  house  (see  6et)  :  311  bent  ©djnetber  ge^en,  to  the 
tailor's.  Also  (3)  of  actions  directed  to  persons :  er  fprad)  511  mir,  fang  311 
nttr,  spoke,  sang  to  me,  etc. 

(b)  Outside  of  persons,  (i)  motion  to  (yet  with  notion  of  arrival  at,  thus 
distinct  from  nad))  :  @r  gefjt  tag  lid)  §ur  ©tabt,  to  town  (tft  nad)  ber  <£.  ge= 
gangen,  has  gone  (started)  to  the  town  ;  fie  legten  ba§  ©elb  gu  fetnen  Sii^en,  at 
his  feet;  bon  Drt  p  €>rt,  from  place  to  place  ;  and  in  many  phrases  :  p  @nbe 
lommen;  gu  ©runbe  gefjen  ;  gu  ©d)anben  tnerben,  etc.    (2)  In  addition  to: 
er  titmmt  SBaffer   gu   f etnent  SBetn,   with  his  wine;    gubem,    bogu,   besides. 
(3)  Limit,  degree  —  up  to  :  ba3  tft  fd)5n  gum  (Sntgiidcn ;  ba3  tft  gum  Sad)en ; 
gum  Xobe  oetru'bt ;  gum  toemgften,  at  least. 

(c)  Direction  to,  (i)  Object:  bte  Siebe  gu  ©ott,  love  to  God;  2uft  gum  Xangen, 
desire  to  dance.     (2)  Purpose,  Jitness,  for  :   2>a§  -JReffer  btent  gum  ©d)netben, 
metn  ©orm  ift  gum  ^oufmann  befttmmt,  for  a  merchant;  bereit  gum  Xobe ;  and 
in  phrases :  gu  ©afte  bitten,  as  a  guest;  gu  3late  gefjen,  neb.men  ;  gu  S3ette  gel)en 
{for  sleep);  git  £tfd)e  geften  (to  eat — nod)  bent  %.,  to  the  table) ;  mir  gu  ©e= 
fatten  ;  gum  SBeifptel,  for  example,  etc. 

(d)  Effect,  (i)  Transition  to :  S)a§  28affer  tt)trb  gu  ®t§  ;  ber  tnabe  raad)ft 
gum  3Kanne  fjeran ;  and  in  phrases :  gu  ©tanbe  bringen,  to  accomplish ;  gu 
<$eftd)te  befommen,  to  get  sight  of ;  gum  barren  ^aben,  to  make  a  fool  of ,  etc. 
Hence  (2)  as  factitive  object  (§  443,^). 


USES    OF    SOME    PREPOSITIONS.  377 

(<?)  without  motion,  at  (see  b} :  (i)  Place  (towns,  etc.),  gu$art3  ;  bte  ttnt- 
tterfitat  gu  SBerltn  ;  and  in  phrases :  311  £>aufe ;  gur  &aitb,  at  hand;  gur  <5ee, 
at  sea ;  einem  git  giifeen  Itegen  —  especially  with  following  adverb :  Bum 
Store,  genfter  —  f)inau3,  out  of  (at),  etc.  (2)  Time,  at,  in  general  expres- 
sions (see  an,  um) :  3"  S&etrjnadjten  (but  am  25.  December) ;  gu  SDt ittag  (but 
um  12  tlf)r);  gur  Qeit  bcr  Sftebicaer;  gu  gleidjer  Sett;  gu  feincr  Qzit,  in  due 
time. ;  also  for:  ein  ©efdjen!  gum  ©efiurtStage,  a  birthday  gift.  (3)  Proper* 
tion  —  at,  to:  £)a$  ©tiicE  gu  groet  ©rofdjen,  two groschen  apiece ;  ba§  s$funb 
gu  16  tlngen  geredjnet;  gum  Xeil,  in  part;  gu  Saufenben,  by  thousands  (at  a 
time) ;  je  gu  gtoBtf,  twelve  at  a  time.  (4)  Manner,  in  many  phrases,  on,  by, 
etc. :  gu  2anb,  gu  SBaffer,  gu  $ferb,  gu  §ufj,  gu  SSagen,  gu  2)tut,  etc. 

NOTE. /— For  Jit  with  infinitive,  see  §  475.  —  In  some  of  its  uses  511  must  be  carefully 
distinguished  from  the  indirect  (dative)  object ;  as  §§  436,  438,  etc. 

REMARK  : — The  foregoing  examples  may  suffice  to  illustrate  the  idio- 
matic uses  of  prepositions,  and  their  wide  extension  of  meaning.  A  full 
exhibition  of  this  subject  would  require  a  volume.  It  may  be  worth  while 
to  add  here  the  well-known  doggerel  lines  of  the  German  grammars : 

I.   GENITIVE.  II.   DATIVE, 

ttntoeit,  mittel3,  Iraft  unb  toa'fjrenb,  (£d)tet6 : 

laut,  bermoge,  ungeadjtet,  mtt,  nacf),  na'rftft,  nefcft,  famt, 

oberfjalb  itnb  unterijalb,  6ei,  felt,  bon,  gu,  gunriber, 

inner^alb  unb  aufjerfjalfi,  entgegen,  au^er,  au§, 

bte§feit,  jenfett,  ^alfien,  toegen,  ftet§  mtt  bem  S)aiit>  nteber. 
jtatt,  auc^,  Ia'ng3,  gufolge,  tro^ : 

fte^en  mit  bem  ©enitib,  III-  ACCUSATIVE. 

ober  auf  bie  Srage  h)effen  ?  SBet  ben  SBortern  :  burd),  fiir, 

2)odi  ift  fjter  ntd)t  gu  bergeffen,  fonber,  gegen,  um  unb  ttriber, 

bafe  6et  btefen  le^ten  brei  fd^reibe  ftetS  ben  bterten  gatt, 

and)  ber  S)attb  rid)tig  fet.  nie  einen  anbern  nteber. 
lommt  nod)  ,,um  —  loilten." 

IV.   DATIVE  OR  ACCUSATIVE. 

3(n,  auf,  Ijtnter,  neoen,  in, 
iiber,  unter,  bor  unb  gtoifdjen 
fte^en  mit  bem  bterten  gall, 
toenn  man  fragen  !ann  :  Ino^in? 
5KU  bem  brttten  ftef)en  fie  fo, 
bafe  man  nur  fann  fragen  :  too? 


37$  APPENDIX. 


NOTE  ON  THE  ORDER  OF  WORDS  (LESS.  XXXVI). 

The  following  mnemonics  have  been  found  useful  for  beginners.     Of 
course  they  do  not  cover  all  possible  cases. 

Referring  to  the  formulae,  p.  177,  let  also  a  denote  any  single  verb- 
adjunct,  and  c  any  subordinating  connective;  also  let  P  stand  for  Princi- 
pal, and  D  for  Dependent  sentence.     Then: 
(  N  =    S.  V.  A. 


«v.  s.  Awo£orms- 

D  ==     T  =  c  S.  A.  V. — one  form  ; 

the  verb,  V,  being  the  Variable. 

NOTE.  —  i.  a  may  also  be  an  introductory  clause  (§  344,  b~). 
2.  In  a  relative  clause,  c  is  included  in  the  pronoun. 

In  Complex  sentences : 

(1)  The  Principal  preceding: 

P  D  =  N  T,  or  =  I  T  —  two  forms. 

(2)  The  Dependent  preceding  —  here  P  =  I  —  hence  : 

D  P  =.T  I  —  one  form.     (For  Exceptions,  see  §  350). 
The  order  of  possible  verb-adjuncts  may  be  indicated  by  the  following 
formula : 

A=i.  Pron.  Objects:  a.  accusative,  b.  dative;  2.  Adverb  Time; 
3.  Noun  Objects  :  a.  Dat.,  b.  Accus.,  c.  Gen.;  4.  Adverb  :  a.  Place, 
b.  Manner ;  5.  Objects  with  prep. :  a.  person,  b.  thing ;  6.  Pred. 
noun  or  adj. ;  7.  Last,  the  non-personal  part  of  the  verb :  sep. 
pref.,  part.,  infin.,  in  their  order  (see  also  §  357). 

Of  course  all  such  adjuncts  will  not  occur  together;  and  exceptional 
cases  are  not  here  included.     We  may  add,  however,  especially : 
D  —  baf?  =  P  (§  350,  i)  —  (read  D  minus  bafj,  etc.). 
I  (§  350,  2). 


INDEX  OF  SUBJECTS. 

(REFERENCES  TO  §§.) 


Ablaut,  verbs,  223 ;  nouns,  383-4 ;  adjec- 
tives, 394. 

Absolute,  ace.,  446  ;  superl.,3i6,  450,0.  ;  in- 
fin.,475;  part.,  481,  4. 

Accentuation  :  48-55  ;  foreign,  56-60 ;  com- 
pounds, 379,  390,  400-1. 

Accusative :  with  prep.  178, 280  (or  dat.)  179  ; 
direct  obj.,  441  ;  with  adjs.,  441,  c.  ; 
double,  442  ;  factitive,  443  ;  cognate,  444 ; 
adverbial,  445  ;  absolute,  446. 

Address:  pronouns,  186-9;  nouns,  428,  c. ; 
(letter)  p.  247,  note. 

Adjectives  :  declension,  127-30  ;  strong,  131- 
3  ;  weak,  134-5  5  mixed,  136-8  ;  as  nouns, 
140  ;  as  adverbs,  142  ;  neut.  end.  dropped, 
145  ;  successive,  147  ;  compared,  149-58, 
450  ;  word-order,  352-3  ;  derivation,  393-6  ; 
composition,  400  ;  with  gen.,  433  ;  with 
dat.,  438;  with  accus.  441  ;  special  forms, 
448-50 ;  concord,  451  ;  participial,  479, 
481,  3- 

Adjective  pronouns,  86-8  ;  possess.,  192  ;  de- 
monst.,  204-10  ;  interr.,  220-1  ;  indef.,  245  ; 
clauses,  348, b  ;  adjuncts,  352. 

Adjuncts  of  noun,  352  ;  of  adjective,  353  ; 
of  verb,  354-7  ;  of  participle,  353,  483. 

Adverbs,  314-21  ;  compared,  315-7  ;  posi- 
tion, 322,  355  ;  derivation,  397-8  ;  compo- 
sition, 401  ;  dist.  from  adj.,  449;  special 
uses,  484  ;  idioms,  485. 

Adverbial  phrases,  320  ;  conjunctions,  327- 
8  ;  clauses,  348,  c,  350,  2,  480,  2,  b,  486  ; 
gen.,  435;  ace.,  445. 

Alphabetical  list,  verbs,  p.  307. 

Apostrophe,  70. 

Appendix,  nouns,  p.  367  ;  preps,  p.  368. 

Apposition,  429,  4  :  for  gen.,  431,  c. 

Article:  def.,  decl.,  72  ;  contr.  with  preps., 
191  ;  use,  416  ;  omitted,  417  ;  repeated,  421  ; 


indef.,  decl.,  79  ;  use,  419  ;  position,  420? 
repeated,  421. 

Auxiliary  verbs,  167-74  ;  distinguished, 
296-9  ;  omitted,  350,  4  ;  of  mood,  260-8,  472. 

Capital  letters,  61-66  ;  modified,  66. 

Cardinal  numerals,  300-4  ;  compounds,  306. 

Case  (see  nom.,  gen.,  etc.) ;  with  preps., 
summary,  447. 

Causative  verbs,  362  ;  laffett,  269. 

Cause,  clauses  of,  486,  2.        [tion  of,  359-60. 

Clauses,  dependent,  330-4 ;  348  ;  486  ;  posi- 

Comparison,  149-55;  irreg.,  156-8;  of  ad- 
verbs, 315-7  ;  correl.,  334;  special  forms, 
45°- 

Composition  of  verbs,  insep.,  277-9,  369-76; 
sep.,  282-5,  377  >  sep-  or  insep.,  287-8, 
378  ;  special  forms,  289,  379-81  ;  of  nouns, 
388-92  ;  of  adjs.,  400  ;  of  adverbs,  401  ; 
summary,  402,  rent. 

Compound  nouns,  decl.,  12 r  ;  exceptions, 
122,  388  ;  accent,  53,  390  ;  verbs,  etc. (see 
Composition) ;  phrase  compounds,  389, 
7  ;  successive,  392  ;  verbs  with  dat.,  437,  3. 

Concession,  clauses  of,  468,  486,  4. 

Concord,  adj.,  451  ;  pron.,  452  ;  verb,  461,2. 

Condition,  potential,  469  ;  unreal,  470  ;  con- 
tracted, 350,  2,  471  ;  clauses  of,  486,  3. 

Conditional  (the),  form,  173  ;  use,  471. 

Conjugation,  195-200;  weak,  201,  211-4; 
strong,  223-7  ;  mixed,  253-4  ;  modal,  261  ; 
passive,  271;  reflexive,  251;  (see  alph.  list). 

Conjunctions,  324-5 ;  pure,  326,  345,  349 ; 
adverbial,  327-8  ;  subordinating,  330-4. 

Correlative,  comparison,  334 ;  pronouns, 
456,  5  ;  adverbs,  485. 

Countries,  names  of,  m,  416,  2. 


Dates,  309-10. 
379 


380 


6^ 


INDEX. 


Dative,  ind.  obj.  verbs,  203,  437  ;  with  prep., 
164,  280,  (or  ace.)  179  ;  with  adjs.,  438  ;  of 
interest,  ethical,  439 ;  privative  (from), 
440  ;  factitive,  443,  d;  special  forms,  106. 

Days  and  months,  313  ;  in  dates,  309-10. 

Declension  —  of  nouns,  73  ;  strong,  74  :  — 
class  I. ,75-8;  II.,  81-5;  III.,  89;  weak, 
92-6;  mixed,  104;  peculiarities,  99-107; 
proper  names,  109-13;  foreign,  115-20; 
compound,  121-2  ;  synopsis,  124.  Of  ad- 
jectives, 127-30  —  strong,  131-2,  weak, 
134-5,  mixed,  136-8  ;  special  cases,  139- 
147.  Pronouns  (see  their  classes). 

Demonstrative,  adj.  and  pron.,  204-10,  456 ; 
as  substitutes,  457  ;  as  relative,  459,  5. 

Dependent  clauses,  348,  359 ;  verb  (position), 

347-50- 

Derivation  —  of  verbs,  361:  by  root-change, 
362-3  ;  by  suffix,  364-5  ;  from  nouns,  366  ; 
from  adjs.,  367  ;  —  of  nouns  :  from  verbs, 
382-4  ;  from  adjs.  or  nouns,  385-6  (without 
suffix,  382-3  ;  with  suffix,  384-6);  by  prefix, 
387  ;  — ;  of  adjectives,  393-6  (suffix,  395  ; 
prefix,  396)  ;  —  of  adverbs,  397  ;  summary, 
402,  rent. 

Digraphs  (and  trigraphs),  consonant,  33-43- 

Diminutives,  78,  386,  6. 

Diphthongs,  16-20. 

Emphasis,  (type)  70  ;  ber,  206  ;  em,  301. 
English  —  relation  to  German  :  summary, 

Less.  XLV. 
Euphony,  in  nouns,  85  ;  adjs.,    139  ;  verbs, 

211-4. 
Exclamation,  336;  with  dat.,  439,  d\  infin., 

474, /;  part.,  336,  2. 
Expletive  (e§),  291,  453. 

Factitive,  ace.,  443  ;  dat.  (511),  443,  d. 

Feminine,  dat.  in  -n  (106). 

Foreign  words  pronounced,   47  ;  accented 

56-60  ;  declined,  115-120,  427,  d. 
Future  tense,  form,  173  ;  use,  465. 

Gender,  71, 125-6  ;  special  forms,  426,  452,01 
Genitive,  71;  with  prep.,  280  ;  position,  352 

with  nouns,  430  ;  partitive,  431;  with  adjs. 

433;  with  verbs,  434  ;  adverbial,  435  ;  ex 

clam.,  336,  3. 
German  —  relation  to  English  ;  summary 

Less.  XLV. 


rimm's  Law  (outline),  408. 

Hour  (o'clock),  305. 
[yphen,  in  compounds,  69,  392. 

mperative  forms,  176;  vowel  change,  226; 

sentences,  346 ;  infin.  or  part,  for,  336,  2. 
mpersonal  verb,  290-5  ;  for  passive,  274  ; 

with  gen.,  434,  d.;  with  dat.,  436,  5  \  sub- 
ject, 453- 

:ncomplete  compounds,  379,  437,  4- 
ndeflnite,  pron.  and  adj.,   244-5  ;  use  of, 

460  ;  relat.,  236,  459,  3. 
indirect  object,  203,  437  ;  mood  and  tense, 

467  ;  question,  348,  467,  d. 
infinitive,  form  of  past  part.,  modal,  264-5  ; 

exclam.,   336;   position,    358 ;  uses,    473; 

simple*  474  ;  with  ftll,  475  ;  with  UtU  —  JU, 

476;  equivalents,  477-8533  noun,  75,  416,  i. 
Inseparable  verbs,  277-9  ;  369-76  ;  special 

forms,  380, 
Interjections,    335-7?  wi*h  gen->  435,    ^5 

with  dat.,  439,  d. 
Interrogative,  pron.  and  adj.,  217-22  ;  use 

of,  458;  infin.,  474,  f. 
Inverted  order,  165  ;  344~6- 

Measure  (terms  of),  312,  431,  c. 

Mixed   nouns,    99-104;    adjectives,    136-8; 

verbs,  253-4;  prefixes.'sSi. 
Modal  verbs,   260-7 ;  with  omitted    infin., 

268  ;  idioms,  472. 
Modification  of  vowel,  10  ;  in  nouns,  76,  83, 

89,  124,  rem.;  in  adjs.  (comp.),  151-2  ;  in 

verbs,  224,   226;  in  derivation,   rem.,  p. 

189  ;  written,  10,  15,  66. 
Monosyllables  —  nouns;  masc.  81,  p.  30, 

p.    38;  fern.   82,   b,   92,  b\  neut.   81,   89; 

adjs.,  151. 
Months  and  days  (names),   313  ;  in  dates, 

309-10. 
Mood  —  indie.,  (tenses),  462-5  ;  imper.,  176  ; 

subjunct.,   (see    subjunct.) ;  aux.  of    (see 

modal). 

Negative,  322,  5  ;  idioms,  460,  8  ;  redundant, 

485,11. 

Nominative  case,  429. 
Normal  order,  339,  350;  restored  after  pure 

conj.  345  ;  in  dep.  clause,  350. 
Nouns,  declension,  73  ;  strong,  74  —  I.,  75-8  ; 

II.,  81-5;   III.,   89;  weak,   92-6;  mixed, 


INDEX. 


38* 


99-105;  proper,  109-13;  foreign,  115-20; 
compound,  121-2  ;  derivation  of  :  from 
verbs,  382-4  ;  from  adj.  or  nouns,  385-6  ; 
by  prefix,  387 ;  composition  of,  388-92 
(and  accent.). 
Noun  clauses,  348;  normal,  350;  objective, 

477- 
Number,   71;    special  cases,    422-5  ;    verb, 

461,  2. 
Numerals,  cardinal,  300-4  ;  compounds,  306  ; 

ordinal,  307-8  ;  compounds,  311. 

Objects,  position  of,  354  ;  indirect,  203,  437  ; 
direct,  441  ;  double,  434,  437,  442  ;  facti- 
tive, 443;  cognate,  444  ;  repeated,  487. 

Optative,  sentences,  order,  346  :  subjunct., 
468:  adverb  (bod)),  485,  2. 

Order  of  words  ;  see  position, 

Ordinal  nums.,  307-8  ;  compounds,  311. 

Orthography,  official,  p.  323. 

Participles,  decl.,  141;  perfect:  —  augment, 
215-6;  in  modal  perfects,  264-5;  exclam., 
336,  2  ;  in  comp.  tenses,  341;  uses  of,  479- 
81;  absolute,  481,  4:  —  present,  479-80; 
—  fut.  pass.,  482  ;  adjuncts  of  part.,  483. 

Participial  adjectives,  479  ;  481,  3  ;  equiva- 
lents, 480,  2. 

Partitive,  no  art.,  418;  gen.,  431;  apposi- 
tion, 431,  c,  d. 

Passive,  conj.,  270  ;  use  of,  272-3,  437,  c  ; 
substitutes  for,  274-76. 

Past  tense,  464. 

Perfect  tense,  464  ;  part,  (see  participle). 

Personal  pronouns,  decl.,  182  ;  address, 
186-9  ?  special  forms,  452  ;  demonst.  for, 
457  ;  with  relat.,  459,  2,  b. 

Personification,  by  attrib.  gen.,  430,  note. 

Plural,  of  nouns,  124;  foreign,  115-20,  427, 
d ;  special  forms,  424-5  ;  double,  424-5  ;  of 
proper  names,  427  ;  pi.  verb  with  titles, 
461,  2,  c\  pron.  address,  178-8.  (See  App.). 

Position  (order  of  words),  first  rules,  177, 
202  ;  summary  (Less.  XXXVI.) :  —  verb, 
338  ;  normal,  339-43  ;  inverted,  344-6  ; 
transposed,  347-9  ;  special  cases,  350-1;  — 
adjuncts:  of  noun,  352  ;  of  adj.,  353  ;  of 
part.,  483  ;  —  objects,  354  ;  infin.,  358  ; 
dependent  clauses,  359-60 ;  synopsis,  p. 
185,  p.  378. 

Possessive,  adjectives,  192  ;  pronouns,  193- 


4;  for  personal,  430,  d\  art.  for,  416;  tr. 
by  dat.  pers.,  439;  special  cases,  455. 

Potential  subjunctive,  469. 

Predicate,  adj.,  127,  356;  superl.,  160-1 ;  con- 
cord of  verb,  461. 

Prefixes,  insep.,  277-9  5  sep.,  282-5  ;  sep.  or 
insep.,  287-8 ;  compound,  289 ;  special 
forms,  379-81;  —  meaning  of,  insep.,  369- 
76  ;  sep.,  377  ;  in  nouns,  387  ;  in  adjs.,  396. 

Prepositions,  with  dat.,  164  ;  ace.,  178  ;  dat, 
or  ace.,  179;  contr.  with  art.,  191  ^spuri- 
ous) 280  ;  compound,  402  ;  for  gen.,  431-2- 
3-4  ;  for  ace.,  442  ;  summary,  447  ;  with 
infin.,  475  ;  adverbial,  445,  note.  (See  Ap- 
pendix). 

Present  tense,  vowel  change,  226 ;  use  of, 
463- 

Privative  dat.  440. 

Pronouns,  personal,  182-4,  452-3  ;  address, 
186-9;  reflexive,  185,  454;  possess.,  193, 
455  ;  demonst.,  204-10,  456-7 ;  interrog., 
217-22,  458;  relat.,  233-40,  459;  indef., 
244,  460 ;  expletive  (e§),  453  ;  position  of 
objects,  354  ;  concord,  452. 

Pronunciation,  vowels,  3-9;  mod.  vowels, 
10-15;  diphthongs,  16-20;  consonants, 
21-43;  double  letters,  44;  foreign  words, 
47- 

Proper  names,  decl.,  109-113;  article,  416; 
plural,  427  ;  titles,  428. 

Purpose,  subjunct,  468,  c  ;  infin.  (um  —  511), 
476. 

Reflexive  pronouns,  185,  434  ;  verbs,  250-2  ; 

for  pass.,   274 ;  (false)  with  gen.,  434,  c  ; 

with  dat.,  437,  6. 
Relative  pronouns,  233-40,  459  ;  indef.,  236, 

459,  3- 
Repetition,  of  art.,  421;  of  possess.,  455  ;  of 

subject,  object,  auxil.  (summary),  487. 

Schrift  (German  Script),  p.  385,  etc. 
Separable  prefixes,  282-5  »  compound,  289 ; 

position,  342,  357  ;  meaning,  377  ;  special 

forms,  379. 
Strong  decl.  of  nouns,  74-89;  of  adjs.,  131- 

3;  (or  weak)  adj.    forms,   449;    conj.   of 

verbs,  223-7  5  classes  of  (see  synopsis,  259  ; 

and  alphabetic  list);  change  to  weak  deriv., 

362. 
Subject,  omitted,   429;  repeated,   461,  487; 

concord  with,  461,  2  ;  change  of  477-8. 


382 


INDEX. 


Subjunctive  mood,  466  ;  indirect,  467  ;  opta- 
tive, 468  ;  potential,  469  ;  conditional,  470- 
i;  purpose,  468,  c. 

Subordinating  conjs.,  330-4. 

Substitutes,  for  pron.  obj.  with  prep.,  184, 
222,  459,  4  ;  for  passive,  274-6  ;  demons, 
for  pers.  pron.,  457  ;  adv.  for  adj.  inflect., 
45o. 

Suffixes  of  derivation  :  verbs,  364-5  ;  nouns, 
384-6  ;  adjs.,  395-6  ;  adv.,  398. 

Superlative,  149,  155  ;  predicate,  160-1;  ab- 
solute, 316,  450. 

Supine,  infin.,  176,  2. 

Syllables,  68. 

Synopsis,  noundecl.,  124  ;  adjs.,  166  ;  strong 
verbs,  259  ;  verb-position,  p.  185. 

Tenses,  indicative,  462  ;  present,  463  ;  past 

and  perfect,  464 ;  future  and  fut.   perf., 

465  ;  subjunctive,  467,  470. 
Time,  293  ;  of  day,  305  ;  date,  309-10 ;  indef . 

(gen.),  435  ;  def.  (ace.),  445  ;  clauses  of  486. 
Titles,  428,455,  461,  c. 
Transposed    order,    347-9 ;    special    cases, 

350-1- 

Umlaut,  10,  223,  note  ;  p.  189,  rent.;  written, 
10,  15,  66. 


Verbs,  auxiliary,  167-74  ;  conjugation,  195- 
200;  weak,  201,  211-4;  strong,  223-7; 
classes  of  strong,  228-30  (see  synopsis,  p. 
134,  and  alph.  list)  ;  mixed,  253-4  ;  modal, 
260-1 ;  irregular,  255-6  (see  list) ;  reflexive, 
250-2  ;  passive,  270-6  ;  impersonal,  290-5. 
Composition  of:  —  insep.,  277-9  ;  369-76; 
Sep.,  282-5,  377  »  seP-  or  insep.,  287,  378; 
compound  prefixes,  289 ;  special  cases, 
379-81.  Syntax  of:  with  gen.,  434;  with 
dat.,  437;  with  ace..  441;  double  objects, 
434,  b,  437,  443  J  cognate  obj.,  444 ;  infin. 
obj.,  474.  Concord,  461.  Position  of,  338 
—  normal,  339-43  ;  inverted,  344-6  ;  trans- 
posed, 347-9  ;  special  cases,  350-1;  synop- 
sis, p.  185. 

Vowels,  quantity,  3  ;  pronunciation,  4-9 ; 
modified,  10-15  ;  doubled,  44  ;  change  of 
(ablaut),  223,  note ;  sequence  in  strong 
verbs,  225,  note. 

Weak,  decl.  of  nouns,  92-6;  of  adj.,  134-5; 

(or  strong)  adj.,  forms,  449  ;  conj.  of  verbs, 

201,  211-4. 
Weather,  290,  293. 
Weight  (and  measure),  312,  431,  c. 


INDEX   OF  WORD^FORMS. 


NOTE.  —  Forms  not  here  indexed  are  referred  in  the  Vocabulary. 


ober,  326. 

Ott,  420,  i;  460,  4;  atter=,  sup.  pref.,  450,  4. 

attcin,  326. 

tll§,   adv.,  153-4,   450,  2;   (apposition)  429; 

conj.  (condition)  470,  d\  (time)  486. 
ant,  with,  sup.,  160,  450,  3;  dist.  from  OUf§, 

an,  Appendix. 

anber  (second),  460,  b;  — t^atb,  311,  2. 

anfttttt,  infin.,  475,/5  —  bafj,  477,  c- 

-arttg,  adj.,  400,  5. 

aurf),  with  rel.,  459,  3;  with  conj.,  486,  4; 

idioms,  485. 
anf,  Appendix. 
OU3,  Appendix. 


be-  370,  i. 

bet,  Appendix. 

beibe,  betbeS,  460,  5. 

bt£,  prep.,  280;  conj.,  332. 
'tijeit,  dim.,  78,  386,  6. 

-b,  nouns,  384,  i. 

ba  (bar),  in  comp.,  184,  209,  457;  dem.  or  rel. 

351,  2;  indef.,  459,  3;  conj.  (reason)  486,  2. 
bo£,  bte3,  gram,  subj.,  210. 
bafjf,  omitted,  350,  i;  clauses,  477,  b, 
=be,  nouns.  384,  i. 

bcntt,  conj.,  326;  adv.,  450,  2;  470,  b. 
bcr,  art.,  79;  dem.,  206,  456,  2;  457;  rel.  23, 

459;  dem.  or  rel.,  351,  2. 


INDEX. 


berjemge,  berfclbec  208,  456-7. 
Sero,  455,  c. 

fas,  pron.  comp.,  456,  2. 

btefer,  456-7;  bie£,  210 
bocfi,  485,  2. 
breier,  breien,  302. 
burdj,  Appendix. 

e,  dropped  :  nouns,  85,  89,  92,  c,  94;  adjs.  139, 
150  ;  verbs,  201,  214,  367  ;  changed  to  ie,  or 
t,  226;  —  added,  147,  318,  389,  <$. 

«e,  nouns,  384,  386  ;  adj.,  adv.,  147,  318. 


»Ct,  nouns,  384,  8,  386,  3. 

Ctlf  (elf),  300,  note. 

ettt,  art.,  79;  num.,  301;  —  er,  244. 

eitt=,  prefix,  283. 

=cl,  nouns,  75,  384,  3;  adjs.,  139;  verbs,  364. 

eml>=,  371,^. 

«ett,  nouns,  75,  384,  6  ;  adjs.,  139,  395,  2  ;  for 

se§,  gen.  adj.,  133. 
=CttS,adv.,  311  35399i/. 

ent«,  371- 
cnttocbcr,  329. 
er«,  372. 

*er,  nouns,  75,  384,  2.  386,  2  ;  adjs.,  139;  in- 

decl.,  395,  3;  verbs,  364. 
(5-r,  address,  189. 
•erlet,  (see  =Iei). 
»ertt,  adj.,  395,  2. 

erft,  adj.  ,307;  a</z>.  485,  3;  —  er-er,  157,  417. 
ers«,  387,  5- 

t^,  pron.  (position),  202;  pass.,  275;  impers., 

290-4;  idioms,  453. 
•C§,  neut.  adj.,  dropped,  145,  449,  2. 
«Ct,  in  pron.  comp.,  452,  <5. 
@tt).,  titles,  455,  c. 


f  adj.,  306,  3;  4oo,  s. 
fofgenb,  417.  449,  i,^- 
JVrrtit,  $raulcin,  titles,  428. 
fiinf=  jeftn,  -^,  300,  «^^. 
fiir,  Appendix. 

ge»  (augment),  215-6;  double,  243,  a\  (prefix), 
verb,  375;  noun,  387. 

gegeffen,  243,  a. 

geljCtt,  impers.,  437,  4,  <5. 

genug,  322,  460,  7. 
gent,  317,  485,  4- 
gtfct  (cS)f  294. 


gfeitf  (i»cnn,  06),  486,  4. 
*g(ei$en,  pron.  comp.,  452,^. 

Ija6cn,  aux.,  171,  296;  with  infin.,  475,  2. 


ab,  144;  comp.,  311,  2. 
=  l)all),  280;  comp.,  459,  4. 
Hct^cn,  with  infin.,  474,  c;  p.  part.,  481,  5. 
=Dctt,  noun,  386,  4. 
fjer,  484,^;  prefix,  377,  c.- 
f|ter,  in  comp.,  401,  457,  i,  b. 
fan,  484;  prefix,  377,  c. 

«t(fjt,  adj.,  395,  6. 

=ten,  pi.,  118-9 

=icren,  verbs,  215,  365. 

=tg,  adj.,  395,  5. 

3fjr,  address,  189;  Sfjro,  455.  c- 

in,  Appendix. 

=ltt,  nouns,  386,  5;  pi.,  95. 

tnbettt,  486. 
irgenb,  460,  3- 

-tfd),  adj.,  395,  8. 

i<t,  485,  s- 

jeber  (etn),  245. 
jener,  456. 

=Iett,  nouns,  386,  4. 

iDtnmett,  with  perf.  part.,  480,  4, 

fflttter,  indecl.,  460,  7. 
•let  (=er(et),  306. 
=Ietn,  dim.,  78,  386,  6. 
fe<jter*er,  157,  4'7- 
=ItC^,  adj.,  395,  10;  adv.,  398. 

ttefcer,  comp.,  485,  4. 

4tltg,  noun,  384,  8;  386,  7. 
=Hng§,  adv.,  399,  i. 
~lO§,  adj.,  400,  4. 

=ttta(,  in  comp.,  306,  2. 

man,  244,  274,  460. 
maurfi(cr),  245. 
=mafng,  adj.,  400,  5. 
mefir,  156,  450;  —ere,  157. 
mtt,  Appendix. 

=tt,  dropped,  103,  384,  6;  inserted,  384,  2,  386,  2. 
narfj,  Appendix. 

=ttt§,  noun,  384,  4;  386,  8;//.,  83. 
nod),  adv.,  328;  conj.,  329;  —  etn,  460.  2: 
idioms,  485,  6. 


384 


INDEX. 


UUtt,  adv.,  485,  7;  conj.,  486,  2. 

0b,  prep.,  280;  prefix,  283;  conj.,  332,  477, 

3;   omitted,  350,  2,  470,  <f;  —  CUld),  etc., 

486,  4. 
ofinc,  (511)  infin.,  475, /.;  —  bafs,  477,  ^> 

$aar  (ein),  312,  431,  <r;  ein  fcaar,  245,  note. 

=reirf|,  adj.,  400,  5. 

i§,  plur.,  120;  adv.,  399,  </. 

'3,  for  e§(it),  453;  f°r  bd§,  72  note. 

'\d\t  sfel,  noun,  384,  7. 

sfam,  adj.,  395,  n. 

=ftf)0ftr  noun,  386,  9. 

fdjun,  with  present,  463,  3;  idioms,  485,  8. 

@e.,  @r.,  (titles),  455,  *• 

fein,  z'.,  aux.,  172,  297;  dist.  from  iuerben, 
273;  impers.,  293-4;  with  gen.,  435.,  b\  with 
dat.  437,  5,  3;  with  infin.,  475,  2. 

ftit,  A*A,  280 ;  with  pres.,  463,  3 ;  conj., 
486,  2. 

felbft,  felber ,  454- 

=felt8,  adj.,  395>  7- 

fitft,  for  einanber,  252;  position,  354,  4. 

<3iC,  address,  188-9;  concord,  451,  b. 

fO,  with  comp.,  153;  connective,  328;  (such) 

456,  5;  omitted,  471,  e\  idioms,  485,  9. 
folfl(cr)f  207,  456,  5- 
f unbent,  326. 

fc,  ff,  41"' 

-,\\,  adj.,  149,  307;  adv.,  316;  noun,  384,  i. 

fttttt,  anfttttt,  (3U)  infin.,  475,/;  — bafe,  477,^ 

ft,  noun,  384,  i;  for  =tet,  verb,  226,  b. 

=t=  inserted,  398,  b. 

=tet,  3",  388,  note. 

=tet,  contr.  to=t,  226,3. 

t^|f  restricted  use,  42. 

=tttmf  noun,  386,  10;  //.,  89, 

fiber,  Appendix. 
U(jr,  idioms,  305. 


ttt,  Appendix.  .  .  .  Jit,  476;  —  bafe,  468. 

n=,  387,  3- 

tt«g,  noun,  384,  5. 
cr,  Appendix. 

r  387,  4- 

=f  373- 
t)tclr  156,  245,  <r,  460,  6. 

=,  288,  <•;  =»ott,  400,  4;  «^'-,  433- 

oottcr,  433,  «^. 

Ottr  Appendix. 
0rr  Appendix. 

ttiafjrcttb,  /r^/.,  280;  conj.,  486,/. 
toaun,  486,  i. 
toarb,  190,  256,  t. 


a§,  z«^.,  219,458;  r^/.,  236-7,  459;  — 

221;  indef.  and  adv.,  458,  2,  459,  3. 

toeber  (nodj),  329- 
eit,  486,  2. 

,  adv.,  399,  c. 

^.,  220,  458;  reL,  234,  459; 
458. 
ttJCtttt,  (time)  486,  i;  (cond.)  486,  3;  (concess.) 

486,  4;  omitted,  350,  2. 
ttier,  int.,  219,  458;  reL,  236,  459. 
ttJCfc  (tt>e3)f  222,3;  458,  3;  459,  4. 

ttenig,  245,  460,  6. 

ttJCrbCtt,  aux.,  173-4?  273;  position,  350,  3; 

impers.,  387,  4,  b. 
Uribcr,  UHCbcr,  prefixes,  288. 
ttUC,   Ww.,    153,   450,   2  ;    (apposition)  429,- 

(time)  486,  d;  —  pielft,  3°8. 
tt»0  (tt)0r,  222,  237);  cond.,  486,  3. 
tt>of)lf  485,  10;  Ob  .  .  .,  486,  4. 

toorben,  270. 
Ser*  374- 

JU,  prep.  i  Appendix;  infin.,  1761475-6;  fact- 
itive dat.,  443,  d\  adv.,  476. 

Sttjeett,  snjo,  300,  «^<?. 
jttictcr,  jtwcicn,  302. 


GERMAN  HANDWRITING  [Shrift]. 


The  Large  Alphabet. 


A 


C  D  E  F  G 


O  P  Q 


W 


R 


T  U 


X  Y  Z 


The  Small  Alphabet. 


b        c         d         e         f  ft 


sssttuv  w         xy 


Modified  Vowels. 


// 


O          6 


U 


Au  au 


Diphthongs. 
// 


Au  au  Eu  eu 


Ai  ai 


Ei  ei 


Double  Consonants* 


NOTE.  —  As  has  been  stated,  p.  i,  it  is  not  necessary  —  at  least  not  at  first  —  to  write 
the  German  Schrift.  But  it  may  become  necessary  to  learn  to  read  it.  This  can  be  done 
only  by  practice  in  reading  actual  handwriting.  As  an  introduction,  a  few  pages  of  the 
Schrift  will  be  added. 


/      P  </ 


388 


/X     xO  /»  ^^ 


e^s^- 


/2^  ,  y^  ^     ^ 

•^  y^^-^<^^^^fr^^^^^^^^^«-^^- 

/^/       /^^ 

^>^^s- 


y- 


<      ^is& 


s  yr  /-    y  'v  -x 

^S^*-^^<^l5^^^4lB^^iw^r«*lB^^»^5^^. 

£V<y  ,  /  ^          ^S  x^X^^T  X 


X 


/ 


/9    &>  /         y  /.     // 

^tit^O    ^-t^-^f^^^^€^t^'  '~'%f1f^/Jf^'*'7^ / 

/       ^  /?^    '   ^      {/  &> 


/-       ^^         J^ 

^-^^/^-/^     ^2>"  c^-tt  ^t^y^^t^f^^' 

/?-S;      fa    <?  "  /         s 

^*f£^^t£^     ?      ^y-e^e^Tf^- 

's    *         *  S    S.- 


390 


^*>v 


s  S  y       S  "    S 

^^^f^^^^f^fit^  ^f^t*s&^ 
a//?/  j>    P  /        ^ 


391 


^ 


Sf       /?  y  / 

'"^*^ep^9     ^ix^fa*' 
^^-^f^t^^f    ^f^»^^#^&^  ^re- 

'  s  /S 


r   ,  x^^-^iw^/ 

ss/    •  /> 

^^&*>^if^*^£' 

^  /  ^-A 


tS 

'-^-^r^ 


392 


s^&v^**^  ty**^#^ 


^^ 


i     CS  /)  j  s     . 


393 


394 


/x  X  >/ 


•^^*^*< 

K>s      ^ 


^**++^Jk 


J  /    AS       £ 


VOCABULARY  TO  THE  SCRIPT. 

(ABRIDGED) 
Including  the  Script  Words  not  found  in  the  general  Vocabulary. 


ftUcrbiltft£,  by  all  means,  surely. 
au-l)(lltcn,  to  hold  on,  stop. 
att=rebett,  to  address,  say  to. 
$ntte(,  #*.,  sleeve. 
atlttittifd),  Atlantic. 

beibe,  both. 

S3el0i)ttttttg,  /.,  reward. 
bemerfett,  to  remark. 
frequent,  convenient, 
bcftiittbtg,  continual. 
SSeittel,  m.,  purse. 

ballad),  after  it,  about  it. 
bcmtodl,  nevertheless. 
Softer,  w.,  doctor. 
^Orffdjettfe,  /.,  village  tavern. 
$ummfjett,/.,  stupidity. 

likewise. 

reverent. 
(£i,  «.,  egg,  pi.  -er. 
CtflClt,  (one's)  own,  peculiar. 
ettt'gebtlbet,  vain,  conceited. 
eillft,  once,  one  day. 

to  receive. 
»».,  Englishman. 
t,  to  reply,  retort. 
,  «.,  event,  occurrence. 
crmaf)«euf  to  exhort,  warn. 

erttubern,  to  reply. 

Cr$ftfy(en,  to  tell,  relate. 


.,  fly. 

,  /.,  demand. 
fort=!ommett,  to  get  on,  get  through. 

funft,  fifth. 
fiinfsig,  fifty. 

gefa^t,  collected,  cool. 

to  redound,  result. 
,  /.,  history,  story. 
f  certain. 

®olbr  ».,  gold. 

flltffcn,  to  peep. 
(Shtlbeit,  m.,  florin. 

IjtUCtU,  into,  in. 

^ittterlaffen,   to    leave    behind,   be- 

queath. 
l)0d)mitttnf  haughty,  proud. 

^offmmg,  /.,  hope. 

l)uku,  to  fetch,  bring;  —  laffen,  to 
send  for. 

^nfel,/.,  island. 

^talte/nerr  »/.,  Italian. 

.,  James. 


foti)CUf  to  cook,  boil. 

trt),  «.,  kingdom. 
food. 
cool. 
t,  /.,  art. 

Jeer,  empty. 


395 


396 


VOCABULARY. 


*',  /.,  literature. 
Sod),  «.,  hole. 

fiorb,  w.,  lord. 

,  lean,  meagre. 
.,  sea,  ocean. 
',  »*.,  monarch. 


U,  #2.,  disadvantage. 

•Wufe,  /.,  nose. 


pope. 
Oil',  /.,  person. 
jler,  m.,  boaster. 
,  /.,  province. 
.,  examination. 

.,  coat. 

m.,  fame,  glory. 


.,  Saxony. 

6rf|rtftftetterf  w.,  author. 

<Srf)Uler,  m.,  scholar,  pupil. 
fdt^n,  rare,  scarce. 
StttC,  /.,  custom. 
foitfttfl,  other,  else. 

,  n.,  Spain. 
t,  to  eat,  dine. 


ftolj,  proud;  noun,  w.,  pride. 

teuer,  dear. 

tlttt,  to  do,  make,  put. 
l,  «.,  Tyrol. 


ttttt=ttJerfett,  to  overturn. 
UttetttXirtct,  unexpected. 
ttuterftUljUHfl,  /.,  support,  aid. 
UntJCVfd)dmt,  shameless. 

DCVfolrjett,  to  pursue,  persecute. 
,  to  desire,  demand. 

,  «.,  oversight,  mistake. 

,  m.y  understanding,  sense 
S$0rfflf)r,  m.,  ancestor. 
t»0r=fteflett,  to  present,  introduce. 

cit,  to  pass  (by). 

,  m.,  carriage. 

2Bet31jeit,  /•,  wisdom. 
tt)enigften§f  at  last. 

UlibntCtt,  to  dedicate. 
29Sirtr  m.,  landlord. 
m.,  wit. 
,  cheap. 

^rettr  to  return. 

$tt=ntfen,  to  call  (out)  to. 


EXERCISES 

ALTERNATIVE  OR  SUPPLEMENTARY  TO  THOSE  IN  PART  L 

BY  C.  F.  KAYSER,  PH.D., 
Instructor  in  German  and  Latin,  Boys'  High  School,  New  York  City. 

WlTH    THE    COOPERATION    OF   PROFESSOR    E.    S.    JOYNES. 


EXERCISE  L 

(a)  i.  $)er  Setjrer  be§  grduletnS  tft1  ber  SBruber  be§.99?ater§. 
2.  S)ie  flitter  ber  Sftdbcfyen  ftnb1  bie  Xbdjter  be§  (£ngldnber£  - 
be3  (htgtdnber§  £odjter  —  £5d)ter  be§  (£ngldnber§.  3.  2)er 
Mantel  gefjort2  ber  Gutter  be§  <Sd)iUer§.  4.  S)a§  ®emdlbe  ge* 
f)brt  ben  -SBrubern  be§  SlofterS.  5.  3ft  ber  53ruber  in3  bent 
Softer  garten4  (=  Garten  be§  Softer  S)  ber  $Mer  be§  (^emdtbe§? 
6.  3)te  SSbget  auf  3  bent  33duntd)en  bort5  ftnb  3lbler  ;  fie  ftnb  bie 
$8oget  be§  §intmel§.  7.  §at6  ber  ,'ptmmel  aui^7  genfter?  8.  §at 
ber  <Sd)iiIer  ben  $oget  tm  (=  in  bent)  Mantel?  9.  (Sinb  bie 
SBriiber  ber  Gutter  (=  ber  Gutter  33riiber)  in  ^loftern?  10.  §at 
ba§  35dumc^en  im  (Garten  be§  5tnteri!aner§  fd^on8  Spfel?  n.  SMe 
gtitget  ber  5lbterf  ber  SSogel  be§  §immel§,  ftnb  grog.9  12.  3)er 
(Spaten  geljbrt  bent  $Interifaner,  bent  9J^ater  be§  ^tofterfenfterS. 

Mft,  /j;  ftnb,  ar^;  fie  ftnb,  ^<y/  ^r^.  2Qe^l)rt,  belongs.  3ht,  m;  auf,  <?«, 
upon;  with  dative  when  expressing  rest.  4  Compound  nouns  have  the  de- 
clension of  the  last  component.  5  bort,  there.  6  fjat,  has. 
8  fd)on,  already.  9  QtO^,  large,  tall,  great. 


(b)  i.  Is  the  teacher  of  the  pupils  also  [a]  painter  ?  2.  The 
cloister  has  two1  wings.  3.  The  painting  belongs  to-the  brother 
of  the  teacher.  4.  Are  the  friars  (=  brothers)  of  the  cloisters 
Americans  or2  Englishmen  ?  5.  In  the  fields  and3  the  gardens 
[there]  are  birds.  6.  Has  the  eagle  also  wings?  7.  The  sky 
belongs  to  the  birds.  8.  The  mother  of  the  girl  there  is  also  in 
(auf)  the  painting.  9.  The  apples  of  the  little-trees  in  the 
cloister-garden  belong4  to  the  brother  of  the  young-lady.  10. 

397 


398  EXERCISES. 

The  painter  of  the  window  is  the  teacher  of  the  girl's  brother  ; 
he6  is  [a]  window-painter.6 

Jtwo,  srrjet  2or,  ober.  3  and,  unb.  4  belong,  3d  pi.,  gepren.  5he,  er. 
6  window-painter,  genftermaler. 

EXERCISE  II. 

(a)  i.  §at  ber  SBruber  ber  33raut  aud)  em  $ferb?     2.  Sftiiffe 
finb  griicfyte.     3.  28ir  roohnen1  einen  sD£onat'2  im  ^afyr,  oft8  aud) 
5tt>ei,  im  ®ebirge.     4.  £)ie  Dffi^tere  finb  fd)on  auf  ben  (Stiffen. 
5.  3n  ben  (Garten  ber  ©tabt  finb  <Stitf)le  unb  93an!e  unter*  ben 
53aumen.     6.  3)ie  $oge(  finb  bie  <3d)iffe  ber  Suft.     7.  S)er  SSater 
ber  Sungltnge  tft  ein  gmmb  be^  ^an(^e§.     8.  SSir  mac^en5  au§6 
ben  ^aaren  ber  ^ferbe  oft  3eug  fiir7  9?ocfe.     9.  (Sine  Gutter  tft 
oft  £age  unb  ^dc^te  in  23eforgm£  urn8  einen  @o()n.     ro.  S)er 
^lofterfd)ii(er  ^at  jmet  §efte  iinter  bent  5Irm  unb  einen  <Stocf  in 
ber  §anb.    n.  3)er  ©ngldnber  gab9  einem10  <Sof)ne  be£  Offi5ier§ 
ein  $ferb  unb  einem  SBruber  ber  33raut  einen  §unb.     12.  3)te 
33raut  be^  Dfft5ter3  ift  in  ^riibfal  unb  in  SBeforgntS  um  bie11 
Gutter. 

1  tuir  toofinen,  ist  p\.,zve  live.  2  duration  of  time  is  expressed  by  ace. 
8  oft,  often.  4itnter,  under-,  with  dat.,  expressing  rest.  6ftnr  madjen,  ist  pi. 
pres. ;  we  make.  6  ait3,  out  of,  of,  from ;  with  dat.  7  fiir,  with  ace.,  for. 
8um,  around,  about,  for;  with  ace.  9gab,  3d  p.  past,^a^.  10dat.  expresses 
indirect  object.  ^Transl.  art.  by  possessive,  her. 

(b)  i.   The  officers  of  the  ships  are  sons  of  the  city.   2.  Only 
one  (=  a,  with  emphasis)  ship  is  on  the  sea,  but1  two  are  on 
the  river.     3.  The  eagle  has  no2  teeth  in  his  (  =  the)  head. 
4.   Have  cities  always  gates  ?     5.  Are  the  sons  of  the  Ameri- 
cans the  friends  of  the  guests?     6.  Are  the  days  also  cool8  in 
the  mountains?     7.  The  eagles  are  the  kings  of  the  birds  of 
the  air  (//.).     8.  The  mice  are  an  obstacle4  to-the  trees  and 
fruits  of  the  fields.     9.  The  maid-servants  have  also  cares 
and   troubles.      10.     I    have   a   friend   there;    he   is   a   friar 
(brother)  in  a  cloister,     u.  In  two  years  [there]  are  twenty- 
four6  months.     12.   Has  the  brother  of  the  young-man  (  = 
youth)  a  horse  and  a  cow,  or  only  a  dog  ? 


EXERCISES.  399 

1but,  afcer  2no, plur.  fetne.  3cool,  fiiljl.  4 put  pred.  noun  last;  repeat 
the  article.  5  twenty  four,  bterunb^trattjtg  =  four-and-twenty. 

EXERCISE  III. 

(a)   i.  3$  bin  ein  ®inb   biefe3   2anbe§   fo1  gut2  trie1  bu. 

2.  (Seine  3£eid)tumer  finb  grofj ;  er  fyat  ©elb,  gelber  unb  SBalber 
nnb  aud)  §aufer  in  ben  2)orfern  unb  ein  ©cljlofs  in  ber  ©tabt. 

3.  SDfein  greunb  (jat  jroei  itmter  in  biefem  3a^re.    4.  S)ie  Sanber 
jene§  S0?anne£  finb  fo  groJ3  ttJte1  bie  jraei  gitrftentiimer.     5.  3n 
ben  ^(cittern  ber  S3aume  roofjnen  bie  SBogel.  •  6.  JJfjre  Seiber  finb 
alt,  aber  i^r  ®eift  ift  nod)8  jnng.     7.  2)ie  Offijiere  unferer  sJ?egi= 
menter  finb  banner  iron4  ®etft  unb  ^raft.5    8.  (Sinb  tt)irflid)6 
©eifter  nnb  G^efpenfter  in  ben  ®emtid)ern  jene§  (Sd)Ioffe^  ?   9.  $)ie 
33dber  in  itnferen  .'pofpitdlern  finb  fc^on  fef)t7  alt.    10.  2)te  ©otter 
ifjrer  SSater  finb  and^  i^re  ©otter,     n.  2)ie  ^Rcinber  ber  §iite 
biefe§  3fl6^§  finb  flein,  aber  bie  £mte  felbft8  finb  §od^.     12.  $n 
ben  ©efid)tern  biefer  ®tnber  liegt9  ©emiit.     13.  3ene  Orter  be§ 
5;ale^  finb  rei(^  an10  ©olb  unb  (Silber.      14.  3)ie  SSormiinber 
biefer  ^inber  ^aben  felbft  feine  ®inber.     15.  (Sinb  bie  Sanber 
'ener  ©lafer  auf  bent  £ifcf)e  nic^t11  griin? 

1  fo  .  .  .  tote,  fo  .  .  .  aB,  as  ...  as,  so  ...  as.  z gut,  adv.,  well.  8 ttodj,  still, 
yet.  4rjOtt,  with  dat.,  of.  5  bie  $raft,  power,  strength.  6  totrllid),  really. 
7fef)V,  z/^rj/.  8fe(6ft,  themselves.  9  Itegr,  //<?j.  10an,  with  dat.  if  expressing 
rest,  a /,  /«.  n  ntd)t,  «^A 

(^)  i.  God  is  our  father  in  (the)  heaven  and  we  are  his 
children.  2.  On  every  page  (=  leaf)  of  that  book  are  errors. 
3.  Are  the  children  in  the  houses  of  their  guardians?  4.  There1 
is  feeling  in  the  songs  of  these  peoples.  5.  Are  the  roofs  of 
these  houses  really  [made]  of  glass  ?  6.  In  these  nuts  and 
apples  [there]  are  worms.  7.  There  are  no  spooks  (  = 
©efpenft)  in  the  apartments  of  the  king's  castles.2  8.  Is  she 
the  mother  of  those  children  there  ?  9.  The  trees  have  gar- 
ments of  leaves.  10.  Children's  hands  (  =  the  hands  of  chil- 
dren) are  not  so  large  as  men's  hands,  n.  Is  our  country 


4OO  EXERCISES. 

(Sanb)  rich  in  forests?  12.  Books  are  always3  our  friends. 
13.  The  villages  and  cities  of  a  country  are  mostly4  in  its 
valleys.  14.  He  has  two  glasses  in  each  of  his  hands. 

1  There,  as  introductory,  e§.  2  king's  castle,  $bnig3fd)IoJ3.  3 always,  tmmer. 
4  mostly,  meiftens. 

EXERCISE  IV. 

(a)  i.  3n  biefer  ©dtjute  roaren  bie  ©ofjne  ber  giirften  unb 
®rafen  be3  2anbe§ ;  aber  fie  tnaren  nid)t  fel)r  ffeifjig.  2.  9J?eine 
£ocf)ter  unb  betne  Gutter  roaren  greunbinncn  in  [ber]  Scfyule. 
3.  SSir  finben1  £ugenben  nicfyt  nitr  bet2  grauen,  fonbern3  aud^  bei 
Sftannern.  4.  ®inb  bie  Sftofyren  in  5lfrifa  audt)  Sfjrtften?  5.  3)ie 
©b^ne  jener  3lbt)ofaten  raaren  t)or4  5toei  Soften  nod^  (Stubenten. 
6.  3tt)ei  ber  ^rinjen  t>or  ben  Saltern  ber  (Stabt  finb  ^5reu§en 
unb  jraei  finb  (Sngtdnber.  7.  S)ie  5lffen  in  bem  ©arten  bort  finb 
bie  greube  ber  ^inber  unb  ber  !0^tigbe.  8.  ®ie  3^1  ber  93(umen  in 
meiner  ©tube  ift  je^t5  nic^t  fo  gro§  al^  Dor  einem  SRunat.  9.  2)ie 
giirften  finb  bie  §erren  ber  Stinber.  10.  2)ie  Xaten  [be^]  §errn 
@d)mibt  lt)aren  3:atcn  eine§  £>elbcn.  n.  §err  %l.  ift  ein  9?effe 
meiner  grau.  12.  $f)Uofop()en  mad)en6  aud^  i^re  getter  ober 
^rrtiimer;  benn7  fie  finb  audf)  nur  30?enfcE)en.  13.  3)te  Uljren  ber 
5)amen  finb  nid^t  fo  grofj  al^  bie  UI;ren  ber  §erren. 

1  finben,  ist  p.  p\.,Jind.  26et,  with  dat.,  by,  with,  in.  3fonbern,  but,  after 
a  negative.  4t>or,  with  dat.,  before,  ago.  6je{3t,  now,  at  present.  6mad)en, 
3d  p.  pi.,  make.  7  benn,  for,  conj. 

(b}  i.  Are  [there]  only  trees  in  the  garden  before  your 
(=  thy)  house,  or  also  flowers  ?  2.  In  which  room  have  the 
girls  their  pins  and  pens?  3.  Birds1  have  garments  of  (Don) 
feathers.  4.  Not  only  oxen1  and  cows1,  but  also  horses1  are 
useful2  to  man1  (9ftenf$).  5-  The  fools  of  the  kings  were 
very  often  philosophers.  6.  The  sons  of  (the3)  Mr.  and  (  ) 
Mrs.  Miiller  were  students  in  Berlin,  and  their  daughter 
was  the  wife  of  a  lawyer  there.  7.  Miss  Emma,  where  are  the 
dishes,  with  the  fruit  (//.)  and  the  nuts?  8.  Those  gentlemen 
were  guests  in  the  house  of  the  count.  9.  He  was  a  philoso- 
pher, but  also  a  man  of  (the)  deed.  10.  The  air  belongs  to 


EXERCISES.  4OI 

the  birds,  the  earth  to  man.1  n.  The  number  of  heroes  in 
these  regiments  was  not  very  large.  12.  There  were  students 
of  both  (betber)  sexes  in  these  schools.  13.  The  gates  of  the 
city  walls4  were  not  so  large  as  the  doors  of  our  houses. 

1  Abstract  nouns,  or  nouns  used  in  their  generic  or  class  sense,  take  the 
def.  art.  2pred.  adj.  usually  stand  last.  3The  def.  art.  is  also  used  before 
titles,  except  in  address.  4  The  city  wall,  bie  ©tdbtmauer. 

EXERCISE  V. 

(a)  i.  ®ie  §emben  attf  ben  QSetten  imb  bie  ^antoffeln  unter 
ben  SBanfen  gefjdren  ben  $ettern  mcine§  $ftad)bar§.    2.  £)er  SSille 
be§  $8ol!e§  ift  immcr  ba§  ®efe£  biefer  (Staaten  getoefen.     3.  3)er 
®taube  bet  SBauern  an1  bie  S3an!en  biefer  ©tabt  ift  nie  fefjr  ftar! 
getoefen.     4.  <Seib  iljr  auf  ben  SWaften  jener  ^oote   gelrjefen? 

5.  2)te  S'Zabetn  biefer  SBaume  finb  fo  jdjarf  it)ie  bie  ©tai^etn  biefer 
Snfeften.    6.  SSaren  feine  SBorte  nic^t  tDirfli^  gunfen  be§  (^eifte§ 
(genius)?     7.  §aben    bie  Qnfelten   aui^  Ofjren   nnb   5(ugen? 

8.  llnter  ben  S)ad)ern   biefer  9Wenfd)en  ift  nie  griebe  gemefen. 

9.  ®e§  S^enf^en  SStHe  ift  oft  fe^r  fc£)tt)a^.     10.  9)?eine  Sreube 
ift  bem  ^acfybarn  immer  ein  X)orn  im  5luge  getoefen.     n.  3n  ben 
©traf)Ien   feine§  3(nge§   liegt  greube.      12.  S)ie  ^raft  (force) 
feine§  SSitteng  ift  nie2  fo  ftar!  getoefen  at§  ber  (^laube  feine§ 
§er§en§.     13.  9Bir  ftnben  bie  (Samcn  511 3  biefen  3^aten  in  ben 
SBorten  biefe§  ^ilofop^en.     14.  3)ie  gelfen  im  SD^eere  finb  bie 
23eforgniffe   jebe§   ©Differs.      15.  ®ie  30^u§!e(n   feine§   5lrme§ 
maren  fo  §art  trie  biefer  gel§.     16.  33u(^ftaben  ma^en  SSorter, 
nic^t  SBorte. 

Jan,  with  ace.,  to,  in.     2me,  never.     B^uf  with  dat.,  to,  for,  at. 

(b)  i.  The  names  of  these  men  have  always  been  bonds  of 
(the)    peace.     2.    How  large    has    been    the   number  of  the 
students  in  this  university  during1  the  year?     3.   His  words 
had  been  rich  in  (an)  thought  (//.).     4.  We  were  heroes  in 
her  eyes.     5.    Had  the  pains  in  your  ears  been  very  sharp  ? 

6.  The   stings  of  these   insects  are  as  large  as  thorns.     7. 
Each  of  these  words  has  only  six2  letters.     8.    No  rose  with- 


4O2  EXERCISES. 

out3  thorns.  9.  My  cousins  are  farmers  of  (=  in)  this  state. 
10.  Our  country  has  now  forty-six  *  states,  n.  The  ends  of 
my  spurs  have  never  been  very  sharp.  12.  The  ribbons  and 
slippers5  on  the  benches  there  belong  to  the  daughter  of  my 
neighbor.  13.  His  strength6  lies  not  in  (with  dat)  the  mus- 
cles of  his  arm,  but  in  the  faith  of  his  heart.  14.  He  has  a 
summerhouse  ((3ommerf)au§,  n.)  on  a  rock  of  this  lake. 

1  during,  tofif)renb,  with  gen.  2  six,  fedj§.  3  without,  otjne,  with  ace. 
4 forty-six,  ferf)§unbt>ier5ig.  5  Articles  must  be  repeated.  6  strength,  bie 
Storte. 

EXERCISE  VI. 

(a)  i.  SBiftoria,  etne  £od)ter  ber  ®bntgtn  Don  (Snglanb,  roar 
bie  Gutter  be§  ®aifer§  SBitydm  Don  S)eutfd)(anb.     2.  SSirft  bit 
jefct  nnrfttd)  flet&ig  fein?    3.  S)er  SBitte  be§  $ol!e§  mirb  in  5tme= 
ri!a  immcr  ®efe£  fein.     4.  3)eutfd)(anb§  Soften  ftnb  aitd)  nid)t 
tmmer  §elben  getuefen.     5.  3d)  tnerbe  nun1  au<^  balb  ber  2ef)rer 
beiner  @dE)tt)efter  3)?arta  fein.     6.  SBir  merben  im  (=  in  bem2) 
SBinter  roa^rfd)etnlt(^8  etnen  SJ^onat  mtt  30^arie  in  ber  ©tabt  fein. 
7.  2)te  §aufer  Don  ^art§  ftnb  nic^t  fo  f)od)  al§  bie  §dufer  9?ett) 
g)or!§.     8.  SSerben  bie  SBiirgermetfter  Don  9^en)  |)or!  je^t  brei 
ober  Dter  Sa^re  im  Sfntte  fein?     9.  ^oet^e§  28er!e  n)erben  in 
^(merifa  nie  fo  popular4  fein  nne  (al§)  bie  28er!e  @^a!efpeare§. 
10.  X>a§  ,,2eben  Qefu"  Don  2)aDtb  Straug  tft  in  ber  23ibliotf)e!5 
unfcrer  UniDerfitdt.     n.  9^etne  ©d^mefter  ^at  ein  23Ub  [ber] 
(Sophie  (@op^ien§)r   ber   (Sdjmefter  9Kayen§    unb  grieberifeng. 
12.  Hnfere  Sra6  begtnnt7  mtt  ber  ®etwrt8  Qefu  S^riftt. 

1nun,  now.  2  German  uses  def.  art.  with  seasons,  months  and  days. 
3  toafjrfd)einlidj,  probably.  4popular/,  popular.  5  bie  SBt&ltotfjeF,  library.  6  bie 
3(ra,  era.  7  Beginnt,  3d  p.  sing.  pr.  tense,  begins.  8  bie  ©efcurt,  birth.  —  Note 
that  adverbs  of  time  precede  other  adverbs. 

(b)  i.  Shall  you  be  in  (the)  town  to-morrow?     2.  These 
books  will  be  very  useful1  not  only  to-Mary  (dat)  but  also  to- 
William.     3.    Shakespeare  was  a  poet  in  the  time  of  Queen 
Elizabeth.      4.   In  the  palace  ( =  castle)  of  Emperor  William 


EXERCISES. 


403 


[there]  is  an  apartment  with  the  paintings  of  the  Kings  of 
Prussia.  5.  Will  the  gentleman  really  be  Bertha's  teacher? 
6.  The  sister  of  that  young-lady  will  soon  be  the  wife  of 
Charles.  7.  Her  belief  in2  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ  was  very 
strong.  8.  We  find  these  words  in  Schiller's  works.  9.  Has 
Sophie's  sister  been  here  to-day,  or  will  she  be  here  to-mor- 
row? 10.  The  forests,  rivers,3  and  lakes3  of  America  are  very 
large,  n.  The  mayor  of  New  York  will  be  in  the  country 
during  (the)  summer.  12.  Will  Fred's  (grt£)  painting  of 
(fcon)  Emma  soon  be  ready?  13.  His  book  begins  with  the 
words :  In  the  name  of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ. 

1pred.  adjectives  immediately  precede  the  infinitive  (see  Ex.  IV3, 
Note  2).  2  Cf.  Ex.  V a,  Note  i.  3Cf.  Ex.  V  6,  Note  5. 

EXERCISE  VIL 

REMARK. — The  future  perfect  in  independent  sentences  ex- 
presses usually  a  supposition,  or  probability,  in  the  past,  e.g.  (£r 
ttnrb  §ier  gewefen  fern  =  I  suppose  (presume)  he  has  been  here. 

(a)  i.  S)ie  ®tnber  tterben  gut  gemefen  fein;  ntd)t  tuatjr?1 
2.  3)er  23ruber  biefe§  5tbt)o!aten  ift  ein  2)oftor  ber  9ftebt5itt2  imb 
(em)  ^rofeffor  an  ber  Unirjerfhat.  3.  S)ie  $rofefforen  an  ben 
ilrtiberfita'ten  £)eutfc()lanb§  finb  meiften§  S)oftoren  ber  Spfjilofopfjte. 
4.  ^epublifen  §aben  feme  §erren^au|er.  5.  ®te  ^(ntmorten  be§ 
$aftor§  St)aren  SSorte  eine§  ($ente§  (genius).  6.  Qene§  §au§ 
tt)irb  tDO^Z"  frii^er4  etne  99?(ib(^en)(^ule  getoefen  fein.  7.  (Stnb 
bte  Saboratorien  ber  ^3I)t)Uf  unb  ber  (£()emie  in  ber  §od)fd)u(e  gan55 
neu?  8.  %K  ben  ^loftern  finb  feme  SBifdjofe,  fonbern  Sbte. 

9.  2)u  noirft  tt)ol)t  tmmer  ber  $lngapfel  beiner  Gutter  getoefen  fein. 

10.  3)te  <3tubien  be§  ^rofeffor§  iiber6  bie^offitien  nnfere§  SO^nfe- 
um§  finb  ba§  28erf  eine§  99?enfrf)enM)en§  (life-time),     n.  3ft 
Sorb   23acon    mirllt^    ber  5(utor   (author)    t)on   ©^a!efpeare§ 
2)ramen?     12.  ^)a§  SanbfjauS  meine§  $au§^errn  Itegt  an  einem 
©etnrg§fee.     13.  2)te  <Stabt  tiefert7  SBorterbiic^er  unb  @(^retb= 
ntaterialten8  fur  bte  ©cljulen. 

!ni^t  toa^r,  (is  it]  not  so?  2bte  Sftebt^ut,  medicine.  3  tuo^l,  probably. 
*  fritter,  formerly.  5  flttn^,  entirely,  quite.  6  iifier,  with  dat.  or  ace.,  over, 
about.  7Iiefert,  3d  p.  sing.,furm'sfies.  8  writing-materials. 


4O4  EXERCISES. 

(£)  I.  [I  suppose],  the  children  of  the  count  have  already 
been  in  a  dancing-school.  2.  In  the  city-park1  [there]  are 
monuments  of  the  poets  Goethe,  Schiller  and  Lessing.  3. 
Has  every  pupil  two  dictionaries?  4.  [I  suppose],  your 
father  has  also  been  a  doctor  of  (the)  philosophy.  5.  The 
bishops  of  England  are  members2  of  the  House  of  Lords.  6. 
The  book  :  "Studies  of  a  husbandman  about  the  instincts  of 
(the)  insects "  is  a  monument  to  (fiir)  the  author,  Prof. 
Maier  of  our  University.  7.  The  abbot  of  this  monastery 
(cloister)  is  a  friend  of  (t)on)  flowers;  he  has  more  than3 
forty  kinds  [of]  roses  in  his  flower-garden.  8.  The  son  of 
the  rector  of  the  city-schools  is  the  pastor  of  our  church.  9. 
[I  presume],  the  chaplains  of  these  regiments  have  already 
been  in  Rome.  10.  The  city  furnishes  the  materials  for  the 
laboratories  of  the  boys'-high-school.4  n.  In  our  museum 
[there]  are  fossils  of  (bon)  birds,  insects  and  plants. 

1  city-park  =  city-garden,  ber  ©tabtporf.  2  member,  ba3  2ftttglteb,  //.-er. 
8  more  than,  mefjr  al£.  4  boys'-high-schc>9l,  bte  £nafcenf)od)fd)ule. 

EXERCISE  VIII. 

(a)  i.  9^iiyicE)e  23iid)er  ftnb  gute  greunbe.  2.  grautetn  ©life, 
bie  £od)ter  [ber]  grau.  SBolf,  f)at  fd)5ne,  rote  §aare  unb  groge, 
blaue  $lugen.  3.  £)te  SSintermonate  finb  donate  mtt  furjen 
£agen.  4.  9tetd)er  Seiite1  SCtnber  ftnb  ofi  nidt)t  fo  fletgig  al3  bie 
S^inber  armer  Seute.  5.  9?eue  @tabte  fjaben  getDb'()nlt(^  brette 
<Stra^en  unb  I)o()e  §dufer.  6.  3) a  {jaft  ^ter  einen  9iocf  t>on 
fetnem  Xud)  unb  fefyr  f^oner  gar  be.2  7.  5)ie  Sanbljaufer  an  jenem 
®ebirg§fee  gel)5ren  retdjen  §erren  au§  ber  ©tabt.  8.  £Hetne 
^inber  mit  frozen3  ®eftd)tern  ftnb  metne  S^eube.  9.  ®alte  33aber 
ftnb  fiir  fd)tt)a(^e  9Kenfd)en  ntcEjt  fo  gut  al§  ttwrme.  10.  Qunge 
Seute  ftnb  metften§  tmmer  gute§  (guten)  9^ut§*  unb  freubtgen5 
§er§en§.  u.  Siebe  Gutter,  btft  bu  tmmer  bet6  guter  ®efunbt)eit?7 
12.  $0letn  §au§^err  Ijat  tmmer  mei^en  unb  roten  28etn  im  better.8 

1  Seute,  pi.,  people.  2bte  garte,  color.  *\t*\  glad,  happy.  4ber2Jhtt, 
courage,  cheer.  6  fteubtg,  joyful,  glad,  happy.  6  bet,  with  dat.,  by,  in,  at. 
7  bie  ©efunbfjeit,  health.  8  ber  better,  cellar. 


EXERCISES.  405 

(b)  i.  Grimm's  German  dictionary  is  very  large.  2. 
English  words  are  usually  not  as  long  as  German  [words]. 
3.  Poor  child,  you  have  great  pains  in  your  (=  the)  head, 
[is  it]  not  so?  4.  On  the  table  of  poor  people  [there]  is 
usually  no  wine,  but  only  cold  water.  5.  He  is  a  man  of 
(fcon)  great  mind  (®eift);  he  has  always  good  thoughts.  6. 
Great  men  have  often  been  the  sons  of  poor  peasants.  7. 
Every  man  (human  being)  has  his  days  of  serious1  trouble 
and  care.  8.  Small  insects  caused2  (in)  this  year  great 
damage  (harm)  to-the  trees  of  our  orchards  (dat.  precedes 
ace.),  9.  The  Moors  are  people  of  (t)on)  black  color.  10.  I 
have  small  scholars  and  large  [ones],  u.  I  am  a  friend  of 
(Don)  boys  and  girls  with  joyful  hearts  and  happy  faces. 

1  serious,  ernft.     2  caused,  3d  p.  pi.  past,  berurfacf)ten. 

EXERCISE  IX. 

(a}  i.  3)ie  alten  (^ermanen1  fjatten  blonbe  §aareunbblaue9tu^ 
gen.  2.  3)er  gute  9?ame  ift  ber  9^etd)tum  beg  armen  !£Ranne3.  3.  9Hte 
Seute  fpredjen2  fefjr  oft  bon  ben  guten  alten  3eiten.  4.  §etbelberg 
ift  foegen8  }etne§  fdjonen  (3d)loffe§  wtb  fetner  alten  Unifcerftttit  auf 
ber  gan5en  (£rbe  beriiljmt.  5.  SSel<^er  preu^ifdje  ®omg  §atte  feme 
grcube  an  ben  gro^en  ©olbaten  ?  roar  e3  nid)t  griebri^  SStl^elm 
ber  (Srfte,  ber  SSater  grtebrtc^§  be§  ®rofjen  ?  6.  ^)er  beril^mte 
^rofeffor  §eine  mar  in  ^otttngen  metn  Se^rer  ber  beutfd^en 
©praise.  7.  S)a§  (^eburt§f)au§4  jene§  berii^mten  9JJaier§  liegt  an 
ber  fct)5nen  blanen  2)onavt.5  8.  SDie  35aiime  be§  fatten  ^orbeng 
finb  metftenS  9^abcl6dume ;  bie  S3a'nme  be§  tDarmen  @iiben§  ba- 
gegen6  ^aben  gett)o()nlt(^  grofte,  brette  flatter.  9.  2)er  franjofifcfye 
Se^rer  be§  jungen  ^rinjen  ift  ber  SBerfaffer  (Slutor)  t)on  jmet 
fran5ofifci)en  ^rammattlen  nnb  btefer  engltfdjen.  10.  Qm  graven 
©aate7  be§  neuen  9Kufeum§  finb  nur  ®ema'lbe  moberner8  Skater, 
aber  tm  !letnen  finb  bie  (^emalbe)  ber  alien. 

1  ber  ©ermane,  German.  2  fprecE»en,  3d  p.  pi.  pres.,  speak.  3  toegen,  prep, 
with  gen.,  on  account  of.  4ba§  ©e6ttrt§Ijau3,  house  of  birth.  5bie  Sottau, 
Danube.  6  bagegen,  on  the  other  hand.  7  ber  <£aal,  hall.  8mobem/,  modern. 


406  EXERCISES. 

(3)  i.  The  beautiful  pictures  on  (an)  the  walls  of  this  hall 
are  paintings  by  the  famous  German  painter,  Kaulbach.  2. 
In  the  great  libraries  of  the  old  universities  of  Germany 
[there]  are  books  of  every  kind  and  of  every  language.  3. 
The  grammar  of  the  modern  languages  is  not  so  difficult  as 
the  [grammar]  of  the  ancient  [ones].  4.  The  great  deeds 
of  great  men  are  the  property1  of  all  men.  5.  The  free 
sons  of  (the)  free  Switzerland  are  friends  of  (the)  free  speech 
(  =  word).  6.  The  schools  of  those  good  old  times  were  very 
poor.  7.  The  earth  was  covered  with  deep  snow  during  the 
whole  winter.2  8.  The  feathers  of  the  birds  of  the  cold  North 
are  not  so  rich  in3  gay  colors  as  the  [feathers]  of  the  birds 
of  the  warm  South.  9.  We  had  very  bad  times  during  the 
last  three  years2.  10.  In  which  German  country  lies  the  city 
[of]  Magdeburg? 

1  property,  bo§  (Sigentum.  2  adverbial  expressions  of  time  precede  objects 
and  other  adverbial  expressions.  3  rich  in,  reid)  an,  with  dat. 

EXERCISE  X. 

(a)  i.  3d)  fjabe  me  etne  engltfdje  (^rammatil  in  ber  (my)  §anb 
gefjabt.  2.  2)te  fontgltcfyen  ^rinjen  roaren  roafjrenb  be§  Ie$ten 
@ommer§  mit  intern  englifdjen  Setter  auf  einem  ftetnen  Sanbgut 
am  Sftfjein.  3.  ®oetl)e§  Gutter  fjatte  em  fefjr  IjettreS  unb  gliirflU 
d)e§'®emiit,  fetn  $ater  bagegen  roar  ernft.  4.  §atte  beine  grbge 
©d^ttjefter  t)or  5tt)ei  Sa^ren  nidjt  em  blaue§,  fetbne§  ^leib  ge()abt? 
S^etn,  fie  ^atte  ein  rote§.  5.  (Sin  guter  9^ame  ift  ein  ^o^e§  ^(etnob.1 
6.  (Sin  unnii^2(-e§)  Seben  ift  ein  fritter  Xob.  7.  2>a§  ^ute  ift 
tmmer  ber  getnb  be§  23ofen  getnefen.  8.  9^etn  lieber  grt|},  bu 
tuo^nft  (live)  ^ier  tnirfltd)  fe^r  fc^on.  9.  2)a§  Berliner  2:ageb(att8 
unb  bie  SSiener4  9?eue  ^rete  ^reffe5  finb  5tt)et  feljr  befannte 
beutfdje  3e^ungen.  10.  ®an§  9^em  |)orf  roar  an  28affjington§ 
^eburt^tag  auf  ben  ^Be'tnen6  geroefen.  n.  ^rimm§  ,,$ft arisen" 7 
ift  etn  S3u(^  fiir  ®ro§(-e)  unb  ®Ietn(-e).  12.  ^!ein  guter  £)eut= 
fc^er  t)ergi^t8  fetn  alte§  SBatertanb. 

S'leinob,  pi.  ^tetnobten,  treasure.     2unnii|},  useless.     8  bo§  Sage&Iatt, 


EXERCISES.  407 

Journal.     428ten,  Vienna.     5bte  $ref)e,  press.     6ba3  33ein,  bone,  leg.      7ba§ 
tale.     8fcergiJ3t,  3d  p.  sing.,  forgets. 


(b)   i.  We  have  had  to-day  a  very  pleasant  day,  dear  sister. 

2.  Your  good  old  friend  has  rarely  had  bad  luck,  is  it  not  so? 

3.  The  study  of  a  modern  language  is  not  so  difficult  as  the 
[study]  of  an  ancient  (old)  [one].     4.   Bayard  Taylor's  first 
wife  was  a  German  [lady],  but  he  himself  (jclbft)  was  no  Ger- 
man.    5.   The  large   Heidelberg  tun  lies  in  the  cellar  of  the 
famous  old  castle.     6.   My  brother  has  had  two  noble  horses, 
a  white  one  and  a  black  one.     7.  Our  French  teacher  is  an 
old  gentleman  and  a  brother  of  our  Spanish  professor.     8. 
The  whole  of  (all)  Germany  is  not  so  large  as  the  state  [of] 
Texas.     9.  The  old  [woman]  with  the  poor  clothes  and  the 
cheerful  face  had  great  wealth  (riches)  years  ago.1     10.    The 
seeds  of  the  Good,  the  True,  and  the  Beautiful  lie  in  the  heart 
of  every  man.     n.  These  fairy  tale-books  belong  to  my  little 
[ones].     12.  There2  are  more  people  in  one  English  city  than 
in  all  Switzerland. 

!cf.  Ex.  IV  a,  Note  4.     2cf.  Ex.  III£,  Note  i. 


EXERCISE  XL 

(a)  i.  28tr  toerben  morgen  ft>al)r|d)ein(icf)  cmgenef)trtere§  SSetter 
fjaben.  2.  ^awrt1  ift  in  ber  ftetnften  §iitte  fiir  em  gliicflidj  liebenb 
(-€$)  $aar.  3.  3$  fj&tte  nteine  froljften  imb  gliicfltdjften  £agef 
gerabe  ttne  bie  metften  attberen  !3#enfd)enf  ftmfjrenb  meiner  (sdjul* 
jeit.  4.  2)a§  SBefte  ift  fiir  unfere  Clemen  gerabe2  gut  genug.  5. 
3)te  Tjinteren  Siwtwsr  be§  oberften  @toc!e§  btefe§  (^eOdube§  finb 
ebenfo  (jell8  tt)ie  bie  borberen,  iinb  fogar4no(^  Better  al§  bte  a'u^e- 
ten  Simmer  be§  unterftert  @toc!e».  6.  ^arl  ©djurj  roar  tier  mef)= 
teren  3a()ren,  imter  bem  ^ra'fibenten  §at)e§,  ©efretar  be§  ^nnern 
gemefen.  7.  2)a§  ®o(b  ift  ein  eblere§  SKetaE  al£  ba§  (Sifen,  aber 
ba§  leijtere  ift  ba§  nii^lt^cre.  8.  3)te  deften  (S^iiler  finb  oft  bie 
®tnber  armerer5  Seute.  9.  SSerben  roir  ntd^t  balb  fii^tere6  9?tid)te 
unb  !iir5ere  3lage  Ijaben  ?  10.  £)ie  gro^ten  grii^te  finb  nid)t  \m- 
mer  btc  fiigeften.  n.  (£r  tt^ar  Icin  beff(e)rer,  abcr  cm  ta|)frerer 


408  EXERCISES. 


,  at§  fern  SBruber.     12.  (Sin  ffeifciger  ©djiiler  ift  im  SHeinen 
ebenfo  piinttltd)7  ttne  im  ®rofjen. 

1ber3Joum,  room.     2gerabe,  exactly,  just.     3fjett,  adj.,  light,  clear.    4fogor, 
even.      5  absolute    comparative  =   rather  poor.      6  !itf)I,   <r<?0/.      7  pihiftlid), 


(£)  i.  Paul,  the  youngest  child  of  my  elder  sister,  is  a 
bright  (Hug)  boy.  2.  The  Republic  of  the  United1  States  is 
the  freest  country  of  the  world.  3.  Other  cities  will  soon 
have  still  higher  buildings  than  the  highest  in  New  York.  4. 
An  honest2  man  is  the  noblest  work  of  God.  5.  The  exterior 
of  the  museum  is  more  beautiful  than  the  interior. 
6.  Wealth3  is  agreeable,  mind  more  agreeable,  but  health  the 
most  agreeable  [thing]  in  the  life  of  man.  7.  There  was  no 
prouder  couple  (pair)  at  (bet)  the  dance  than  that  elderly 
(older)  gentleman  with  his  youngest  daughter.  8.  The  front 
(foremost)  man  of  a  regiment  is  usually  the  tallest,  and  the 
hindmost  usually  the  smallest.  9.  Her  youngest  daughter 
(ba§  £odjterlein)  writes  a  better  exercise,  with  fewer  mistakes, 
than  her  oldest  [one].  10.  (The)  most  people  wear4  in 
summer  lighter  (Ijell)  clothes  than  in  winter. 

1  united,  beretnigt.  2  honest,  eljrltdj,  redjtfrfjaffen.  3cf.  Ex.  I  V  b,  Note  i. 
*wear,  3d  p.  pi.,  tragen. 

EXERCISE  XII. 

REMARK.  —  Read  introductory  Remark,  Exercise  VII. 

(a)  i.  3)te  Qungen  merben  cmf  bem  Scmbgut  tf)re§  On!et§  eU 
nen  cmgeneljmen  (Bomtner  geljabt  f)aben.  2.  S)te  fiirjeften  9£ad)te 
finb  intmer  am  rotirmften,  unb  bie  langften  finb  meiften§  am  falte* 
ften.  3.  ^otte§  ^ilfe1  ift  gemb^nlid)  am  nadjften,  menu2  bie  (^e- 
fa^r  am  gro^tcn  ift.  4.  <Seit  etnem  3a^^  too'^ne  i(i)  (=  English 
perfect)  in  ^Berlin  bei  einer  freimbltdjen  alten  ®ame  au§  ber  fran= 
5oftfc£)en  ©^tueij.  5.  SStr  fommen  eben  t)on  §aiifc  unb  ge^en  je^t 
tia(^  ber  ©tabt  5u  unferer  ^ante  (to  our  aunt's).  6.  %m  ©ommer 
ift  et§!alte§  SBaffcr  fe^r  angcne^m,  after  e§  ift  nid^t  immer  am  §t- 


EXERCISES.  409 


funbcftcn.  7.  £>a§  9ftabd)en  mtt  ben  M)lfd)ft>ar§en  §aaren  (tr. 
sing.'),  ben  fdjneetoeifsen  3^§nen  unb  ^em  fyeitren  (Sefidjtdjen8  ift 
etn  £od)terd)en  metnc§  §au§ljerrn.  8.  Slither  ben  bier  §aufern 
ttrirb  §etnrid)  njoljl  fein  (Sigentum  gefjaftt  fjaben.  9.  2Sir  toerben 
tpol)t  unfere  fd)tmften  £age  gefjabt  fjaden,  benn  morgen  getjen  ftrir 
nneber4  in  bie  @d)u(e.  10.  J$n  9^n§  .(Snglanb  ift  lein  f)errli(^ere§ 
Sanbgut  al§  ba»  be§  ^rafen  §einrid). 

1  bie  ^>tlfe,  /^^,  assistance.  2  tuenn,  //";  in  subordinate,  or  dependent, 
clauses  the  inflected  verb  stands  last.  8the  endings  =ct)en,  4ein  form  dimin- 
utive neuter  nouns.  4  loteber,  again. 

(b)  i.  How  often  have  you  been  at  home  during  spring1 
and  summer?1  2.  I  suppose  no  one  has  had  so  many  mistakes 
in  his  German  exercise  as  you,  Charles.  3.  Since  when  have 
you  been  (  =are  you)  at  home  ?  4.  The  straightest  way  is 
always  the  shortest,  but  not  always  the  most  pleasant.  5.  At 
[the  house  of]  my  aunt  [there]  lives  a  German  gentleman 
from  Dresden  with  his  wife  and  children.  6.  Most  people 
are  happiest  when  (  =if  )  they  are  well.  7.  I  presume  we  have 
had  our  hottest  days,  for  tomorrow2  we  shall  have  (have  we) 
already  the  first  [of]  August.3  8.  The  Albinoes4  of  the 
North  are  people  with  snow-white  hair  and  reddish  eyes.  9. 
In  summer1  we  go  usually  to  (in)  the  mountains  or  to  (an) 
the  seashore.5  10.  [I  suppose]  nobody  from  home  has  been 
here  since  yesterday,  n.  Out  of  (the)  distress  is  not  out  of 
(the)  danger. 

1  With  seasons,  months  and  days  we  use  def.  art.  in  German,  to- 
morrow, morgen.  8  August,  ber  StugufK.  ^Albino,  ber  Stlbtno,  pi.,  bie  3U6i= 
no3.  5  seashore,  bie  ©eefiifte  (ace). 

EXERCISE  XIIL 

(a)  i.  ;gm  SBalb  unb  anf  ber  ^eibe1  ba  fjab'  id)  meine  greube. 
2.  SSor  bent  ®efe£e  finb  aEe  Sftenfdjen  gleid).  3.  SStber  ifjren 
SSiUen  nnb  ofyne  ifjre  (£r(anbni32  ftmrbe  ber  jnnge  §err  fid)  gettrifs 
nid)t  neben  bie  S)ame  gefe^t  Ijaben.  4,  ^§  ift  ein  gefjter,  mcnn  bu 
mc^r  ®ettrid)t3  auf  bie  SSorte  at§  ouf  bie  ©ebanfen  beiner 


4IO  EXERCISES. 


5-  §aben  bie  fceften  3eitungen  be§  2anbe§  fiir  ober  gegeti 
ben  ®rieg  gefcfyrieben  ?  6.  gri£  fcfyreibt  au§  bem  SSeften,  baft  bag 
£ei)en  unter  fremben  9#enfd)en  itnb  of)tte  greunbe  fiir  if)n  (him) 
toentg  grenbe  fyabe.  7.  gutter  jenem  $)orfe  am  SRanbc  be§  SSal* 
be§  gerabe  iiber  ber  Sanbftrafse  liegen  5toei  SRegimenter  ©olbaten. 
8.  (Sr  trmrbe  meljr  grenbe  gefjabt  Ijaben,  tuenn  er  ni(^t  fetn  gan5e§ 
$er  j  an  ben  9ietd)tum  unb  ba§  (^elb  gc()angt  fja'tte.  9.  S3or  einem 
3a^re  I;at  ntetn  SSater  eine  9ietfe  urn  bie  SSelt  gemad)t.  10.  §aft 
bu  nid^t  gefagtr  ba^  bit  burd)  beinen  greunb  in  Berlin  feltne  bent)d)e 
S3iid)er  fef)r  bittig5  gefauft  ^abeft?  n.  SSir  ttmrben  ba§  9^onu= 
ment  neben  ber  ®ird)e  t>on  jenem  Orte  fe^r  gnt  gefefjen  ^aben, 
menn  bie  ^ungen  fii^  ni^t  immer  tier  unfere  5tngen  gefteEt  fatten. 
12.  28tr  fommen  gerabe  in  bie  mittlere  (Stabt,  nienn  irir  ii.ber  biefe 
iSrucfe  ge^en. 

1  bie  §eibe,  heath,  meadow  land.  2  bie  ©rlau6nt§,  permission.  3  ba§  0>C' 
lui^t,  -weight.  4bte  9tebe,  speech.  66iUig,  cheap. 

(b)  i.  My  friend  says  that  he  has  written  (subj.)  always 
for,  never  against  (the)  peace.  2.  We  should  never  have 
found  the  way  through  the  forest,  if  we  had  not  seen  a  light 
in  the  house  upon  the  mountain.  3.  The  Berlin  papers  write 
that  the  Emperor  has  bought  (subj.)  a  number  of  new  pic- 
tures for  his  castle  Under  the  Linden1  (//.).  4.  He  has 
without  my  permission  placed  the  post2  in-front-of  my  house. 
5.  Karl's  teacher  says  that  he  has  written  the  exercise  with- 
out a  mistake.  6.  There  is  a  great  difference8  between  the 
cities  of  Europe  and  of  America.  7.  Philosophers  have 
always  placed  virtue  over  wealth  (ace)  ;  yes,  even  over  life. 

8.  A  year  ago  I  had  a  seat  in  the  theatre  next  to  (beside) 
your  sister,  just  behind  a  post;  but  this  year  (ace.)  I   am- 
sitting  in-front-of  the  post,  between  my  brother  and  his  wife. 

9.  I  should  hang  your  picture  on  (an)   the  wall  between  the 
two  windows,  if  [there]  were  enough  light  there,  but  it  is  too 
dark.     10.  There  comes  and  goes  no  day  against  (ttriber)  the 
will  of  God.      ii.  The  enemy  (//.)  would  certainly  come  into 
the  city,  if  we  had  not  placed  soldiers  on  and  behind   the 


EXERCISES.  411 

walls.      12.  I  place  (redme)   Count  von   Moltke  among4  the 
greatest  generals  of  all  times. 

1  linden  (tree),  Me  Sinbe.     2post,  ber  $f often.     8  difference,  ber  ttnterfdjieb. 

4  Case? 

EXERCISE  XIV. 

(a)  r.  §a6e  bte  ®iite  mtb  ftelle  bid)  gerabe  fcor  midj.    §aftt 
bie  ®iite  unb  ftettt  eud)  gerabe  bor  mid).    £mben  Sie  bie  (Mte  unb 
fteften  <Sie  fid)  gerabe  tier  midj.    2.  3)u  ttmrft  ganj  aufter  bir  fcor 
(for)  greubc.    3fjr  toaret  gang  aujjer  eud)  fcor  Sreube.    ©ie1  toa= 
ten  gan^  ait^er  fid)  bor  ^reube.    3.  (Set  ttw3  bu  tuiUft, 2  nur  fet  e§ 
red)t.    4.  (£r  fagt,  ba§  bie  Siebe  5tt)ifd)en  i^m  unb  i^r  nie  fe^r 
gro§  gett)efen  (fei)  utib  auc^  jei^t  nid)t  fc^r  gtofs  fet.    5.  fallen  <Sie 
etttms>  bagegen,  §err  33urgermeifter,  trjenn  id)  etnen  5lrti!et8  ba= 
riiber  in  bie  3eitung  fei^e  ?  ®eftnf$  nid^t,  i(^  bin  fogar  bafilr.     6. 
2)u  irirft  un§  unb  if)nen  rDittfommen  feinf  liebe  ©mma,  au<^  tt)enn 
bu  o^ne  ifyn  fommft.    7.  2)er  §immet  fei  eud)  gncibig,  tt>enn  i^r  in 
fofdjer  9^ot  feib,  benn  mir  tft  e§  unmoglic^,4  end)  5u  Ijelfen.     8. 
SSitrbeft  bu  ifjr  etnen  neuen  §ut  gefauft  I)aben,  menu  bu  fie  bet  bir 
gefjabt  ^atteft?    9.  @ie  mitt  bamit  nur  fagen,6  ba§  id)  nieber  bei= 
net  nod^  ifjrer  inert6  fei.    10.  ®u  fennft  ba§  (Sprid)mort  :7  SSie  bu 
mir,  fo  ify  bir;  fei  be§fjal&  unfer  eingeben!,8  roenn  bu  (^(iic!  ^aft. 
ii.  Unter  un§  mar  bie  ©prad^e  (talk)  babon  lel^ten  ®ommerf  aber 
^eute  benft9  lein  SO^enfi^  me^r  baran. 

1Note  that  ©te,  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  may  be  you  or  they. 
2 id)  ttritt,  bu  ftrittft,  will,  want.     3ber  Sfrtt'fel,  article.     4itnmbgltd),  impossible. 

5  fie  tml£  bamit  fagen,  j^<?  means  by  that.     6  toert,  -worthy.     7  ba§  <Sprtd)toort, 
proverb.     8  eingebenf,   mindful\   like   loert,  used   with.   gen.      9  benfen   an, 
think  of. 

(b)  REMARK.  —  Translate   the  first  five    sentences  in    the 
three  ways  possible :    i.   Have  no  fear,  but  be  brave  and  you 
will  be  free.     2.  You  say  that  you   have   (subj.)   no  money 
with  (bei)  you.     3.  Would  you  take  (=make)  a  trip  around 
the  world,  if  you  were  rich  ?     4.  Have  you  ever  been  at  my 
house  (at  the  house  of  (bei)  me)?     5.  Be  seated  (seat  your- 


412  EXERCISES. 

self-selves)  next  to  me.  6.  He  says  that  he  has  nothing 
against  it,  but  that  he  is  not  in  favor  of  (for)  it  either.1  7. 
Peace  be  with  you  all  (in  two  ways}.  8.  Two  of  my  sons 
have  (are)  gone  to  (into  the)  war,  and  day  and  night  I  am- 
thinking  of  them.  9.  I  have  given  them  my  opinion  about  it, 
and  they  say  that  they  have  been  satisfied  with  it.  10.  If 
you  have  not  yet  written  with  the  pens,  I  shall2  give  you  new 
[ones]  for  them.  n.  I  should  certainly  have  bought  her 
these  books,  if  I  had  not  found  those  great  errors  in  them. 
12.  In  luck  and  misfortune  I  shall  remain  mindful  of  you,8 
dear  mother. 

1not .  .  .  either,  oudj  md)t.      2The  principal  clause  has  inverted  word- 
order,  if  it  follows  the  dependent  clause.     3  Say,  of  thee. 

EXERCISE  XV. 

(a)  i.  gn  ^eutfcfytcmb  ttrirb  jeber  junge  9ftcmn  im  21Jten  (em* 
unbjttmnjtgften)  £eben§ja^r  ©olbat,  toenn  er  nidjt  tt>egen  eine§ 
gef)ter§  (defect)  fret  ttrirb.  2.  2Sa§  ttrirb  sute^t1  au§  bem  Sanbe 
raerben,  tt)enn  ntemanb  meljr  Sanbmann  ober  Waiter  fterben  ttrill  9 
3.  ®omg  SSiftjetm  t)on  ^reuften  ttJiirbe  im  Sa^rc  1811  (ac^tjel^n^ 
I)iinbert  em  unb  fieb^tg)  ®aifcr  Don  2)eutfd)lanb.  4.  SSa§  ttmrbe  au§ 
bir  unb  ben  2)einen  getrjorbcn  fein,  trjenn  bu  bamalS2  letne  greunbe 
ge^abt  ^atteft  ?  5.  9Kaj  Ijat  t»or  eintgen  SSo^en  ben  ©etnen  au§ 
Setpjig  gefd^rteben,  bafs  er  am  erften  ^ebruar  Softer  ber  ^^tlofo- 
pf)te  gettoorben  fet.  6.  50Jein  ift  bte  5lrOett  unb  bein  ttrirb  bie  (£f)re8 
fein.  7.  9?acf)  meiner  SD^einung  tt)iirbe  §err  gtfcfyer  ber  red)te 
SD^ann  am  red)ten  ^pla^e  fetn,  tt)enn  er  SBiirgermeifter  ber  ©tabt 
tt)urbe.  8.  %$r  [§err]  95ruber  tt)trb  tuo^t  fd)on  ^enerat  gett)orben 
fein  ;  ber  meine  ift  erft  SD^ajor.  9.  3$  tue  ba§  9J?eine  (aRetnige) 
(my  part),  ttienn  @te  ba§  3^re  (3^rige)  tun.  10.  (Sr  ttiurbe  erft 
nad^bem4  er  em  alter  9J?ann  getoorben  ttiar.  n. 
fpraii)  (spoke):  (£§  tt)erbe5  Std^t,  unb  e§  ttmrb  Stc^t.  12. 
,  luerbet  nte  bofe  gegen  eure  ©(tern  ;  fie  ftnb  eure  bcftcn 
greunbe. 

iple^t,  at  last.     2  bamatS,  then,  nt  that  time.    3  bte  St)re,  honor.    *nadjbem, 
conj.,  after.     5  subjunctive  expresses  a  wish,  or  command. 


EXERCISES.  413 

(£)  i.  An  old  proverb  says,  out  of  nothing  [there]  comes 
(==  becomes)  nothing.  2.  The  people  will  become  still 
poorer,  if  the  times  get  still  worse.  3.  Lincoln  was  the  child 
of  poor  parents,  but  before  his  death  he  had  become  the  most 
famous  American.  4.  My  folks  (=mine)  have  become  ac- 
quainted with  yours,  years  ago,  and  ever  since1  they  have 
been  friends.  5.  Boys,  become  good  men,  and  you  will  be- 
come good  citizens2  of  the  state  and  the  republic.  6.  The 
papers  say,  that  nothing  as  yet3  has  come  (become)  of 
(  =  out  of)  the  affair,  and  that  nothing  ever  (  =  never  any- 
thing) will  come  of  it.  7.  In  my  years  and  yours,  people 
grow  a  little  quieter ;  we  have  had  our  gayest  days,  John. 
8.  He  would  never  have  become  so  rich,  if  he  had  not  become 
acquainted  in  his  youth  with  this  and  that  rich  man.  9.  His 
cares  and  joys  are  mine,  and  mine  are  his  also.  10.  I 
became  a  teacher  when4  I  was  twenty-one  years  old.  u. 
Many  people  would  be  satisfied  with  little,  if  they  only 
became  well5  again.  12.  [I  suppose]  he  has  become  a  still 
better  teacher  in  the  many  years  since  my  school-time6,  but 
he  was  already  at  that  time  a  very  good  one. 

1  ever  since,  feitfjer.  2  citizen,  ber  Siirger.  3  as  yet,  nod) ;  nothing  as  yet, 
nod)  ntd)t§.  4\vhen,  expressing  past  time,  conj.,  dI3.  5well,  adj.,  gefunb, 
6  school-time,  bie  ©djitl^eit. 

EXERCISE  XVI 

(a)  i.  3)a§  SSer!  lobt  ben  Sftetfter.1  2.-  ®eteitte2  greube  ift 
boppelte3  greube,  getetlter  <3cfjmer§  ift  Ijalber  <3d)mer5.  3.  28a§ 
ttnrb  betn  SSater  baju  fagen,  toeim  er  fyort,  bafj  bii  in  ber  (Scrjule 
ntcrjt§  lernft?  4.  ®inber  lacfyen  unb  metnen  oft  in  berfelOen 
Minute.  5.  Sebe  fo,  tote  bu  am  (£nbe  betne§  2eben§  ttjiinfdjen 
ttiirft,  gelebt  §u  fjaben.  6.  3<d)  fterbe  im  nai^ften  ©ommer  mit 
metnen  (Sltern  unb  benen  meiner  gran  erne  SRetfe  nai^  ber  (Sd^tretj 
ma^en.  7.  %n  ber  ®efeEfc()aft  tiebenber  unb  lai^enber  ^linber 
nnrb  mein  atte§  §er§  immer  ttneber  jung.  8.  3^  ^abe  mtr  ba§  in 
meiner  Qugenb  immer  gettmnfcfyt,  aber  je^t,  ba4  id)  e£  ^abe,  braui^e 


EXERCISES. 


icfy  e§  ntcfyt  mef)r.  9.  2)a§  finb  tfjre  trier  Heinen  SBriiber  ;  beren 
a'Uefter  (=  ber  fiftefte  berfetben)  ift  nod)  ntrf)t  fedj§  Sa^re  alt.  10. 
S)er  beriif)ntte  $elbf)err  ^i)rrf)u§  fagte  nacfj  einer  ©djladjt :  9?od)5 
ein6  folder  ©teg7  unb  ttrir  finb  berloren.8  n.  Gr  f)at  e3  bir  ge= 
fagt ;  aber  bamit  ift  nidjt  gefagt,  bag  e§  audj  roaljr  fei.  12.  $dj 
rtwrbe  bir  nid)t§  bariiber  gefc^rieben  I)aben,  ttenn  er  e§  nur  bent 
(biefem)  ober  jenem  greunbe  gejeigt  fja'tte,  aber  er  ^at  e§  ber 
gan5en  SBelt  gejeigt. 

1  ber  2Retfter,  master.  2  teilcn,  divide,  part.  3  boppelt,  double.  4  ba,  ««^, 
•when.  5nod),  j#//;  nocf)  etn,  i7«^  w^r^.  6The  numeral  ow^  is  of  same  form 
as  the  indef.  art.,  but  is  pronounced  with  emphasis,  and  is  often  printed 
with  separated  letters  ein.  7 ber  ©leg,  -victory.  8 berloren,  lost. 

(b)  i.  Are  those  William's  books  or  yours?  No,  these 
here  are  mine;  his  are  not  here  yet.  2.  Here  is  the  desired 
(=  wished)  money;  buy  a  hat  or  a  pair  [of]  shoes  with  it. 
3.  Of  that  I  shall  never  hear  the  end  as-long-as1 1  live.  4.  Do 
not  ask  me  about  that  and  I  shall  tell  (  =  say)  you  no  lie.  5. 
These  are  the  last  words  of  a  loving  father;  remain  mindful 
of  them  and  you  will  make  no  great  mistakes  in  life.  6 
There  is  very  little  difference  between  your  home-made2  and 
this  purchased  (=  bought)  gown  (coat).  7.  Last  week  a 
travelling  company  played  Shakespeare's  Hamlet  in  our  town. 

8.  [I  suppose,]  these  children  have  learned  their  German  in 
Germany,   for  they  lived   (J>erf.)   there  [for]    a    whole  year. 

9.  I  should  certainly  have  showed  you  the  desired  cups,  if  you 
had  asked  for  (ncid))  them.    10.   Neither  the  laughing  nor  the 
weeping  philosopher  sees8  the  world  as  it  really  is;   for  this 
one  sees  it  worse  and  that  one  better  than  it  is.      n.   Soldiers, 
be  brave  and  show  yourselves  as  the  true  and  loving  sons'  of 
your  fatherland.      12.    Everybody   likes   him,    for   he    laughs 
with  those  that  laugh  (=the  laughing)  and  weeps  with  those 
that  weep  (the  weeping).      13.   Since  he  sent  my  books  with 
those  of  my  brother,  I  did  not  need  to  pay-for  them. 

1folangc.     2  home- made,  fel6ftgemarf)t.     3  3d  pers.  sing. 


EXERCISES.  415 

EXERCISE  XVII. 

(a)  i.  guritcf,  £u  retteft  ben  greunb  nicfyt  mefrr,  brum1  rette 
bein  eigne§  Seben.    2.  SBtftoria,  bie  gead)tete  ®onigin  Don  Ghtgfanb, 
()atte  fd)on  iiber  fedj^ig  3al)re  regiert  unb  ttmr  bte  attefte  regierenbe 
giirftin  ber  SBelt.     3.   Stable  mid)  nidjt  immer,  befter  greunb  ; 
fdjiittlc  mir  bie  (my)  <panb  unb  plaubre  frieblid)  mit  mir.2     4. 
S)er  3)ieb  fjafet  ba§  Stdjt  be§  Xage§  tDte  ba§  ^tnb  bte  ^unfel^ett3 
ber  %la$)t.     5.  3<S  ^offe,  baft  bein  gefunber  35erftanb4  bi$  leiten 
tDtrb  unb  bafs  bu  nad)  Q)efe^  nnb  Ste^t  bartn  Ijanbeln  toirft.     6. 
SSie  lannft  bu  erftwrten,  bajs  bie  99^en|(^en  bid)  tieben,  menu  bu  fie 
fyaffeft.     7.  SKit  toa§  fiir  SSorten  unb  in  tt)eld)en  3u9en  fj°*  ber 
@d)rift)MIer  ben  S()ar after5  dafar§  gejei^net?  8.  9Kit  tt>em  unb 
l^oriiber  rebeten  (Sic  fo  lange  t)or  meinem  geliffneten  genfter  ?  9. 
2Ba§  fiir  Unfinn  rebet  er  mieber  ?  fagt  er  nid)tf  ba§  er  fidj  nie 
cinbre  unb  bafs  fid)  nur  bie  3eiten  anbern?  10.  2)ie  Gutter  ^at 
un§  fefyr  getabelt,  tDeit6  tt)ir  aHein  im  offnen  gluffe  gebabet  ^aben. 
ii.  SD?ein  33ruber  ()at  e§  oft  genug  mit  einem  ®efd)tifte7  probiert, 
aber  fjat  babet  jebe§  9ftat  falliert.     12.  SSenn  id)  einige  (Stunben 
ftubiert  Ijabe,  rubre  id)  ein  toenig  auf  bent  <3ee,  atme  frif^e  Suft, 

•  unb  bann  arbeite  id)  mieber  ebenfo  gut  ttrie  ^uDor.8 

1  brum  (barum),  therefore.  2  friebltcT),  adv.,  peaceably.  3  bie  5)unleir)ett, 
darkness.  4  ber  SSerftanb,  reason,  sense.  5  ber  Sl)ara/fter,  character.  6  roeil, 
because.  7ba§  ®efd)aft,  business.  83itV>or,  adv.,  before. 

(b)  i.  I  like  to  chat  with  a  friend  [for]  an  hour,  after  I 
have  studied   my  lessons.      2.    What  were  you   talking  about 

••  with  my  esteemed  and  learned  (  =  taught)  friend,  when  I 
opened  the  door?  3.  From  Heidelberg  we  marched  (perf. 
finb)  to  Strassburg,  wrhere  we  then  took  a  bath  (  =  bathed) 
(fierf.)  in  the  Rhine.  4.  Tell  me  (dat.)  with  whom  you  go, 
and  I  tell  you  who  you  are.  5.  The  boys  have  been-rowing 
and  fishing  the  whole  afternoon  (ace.),  but  they  have  (had  no 
luck.  6.  What  is  he  waiting  for  ?  Why  does  he  not  lead  the 
guests  into  the  large  hall?  7.  With  a  smile  on  her  face 
(=  smiling  mouth)  she  told  me  that  she  hated  (pres.)  me. 


416  EXERCISES. 

8.  My  sister  Emma  is  the  leading  spirit  (mind)  of  the  busi- 
ness, and  therefore  he  hates  her.  9.  Is  it  a  fact  that  a  boy 
usually  draws  and  figures  (==  reckon)  better  than  a  girl? 
10.  Did  you  ever  breathe  (perf.)  a  purer1  air  than  here  in 
these  mountains?  n.  In  what-kind-of  a  boat  did  you  row 
across  the  river?  12.  What  sort  of  animals  are  these?  They 
change  their  color  several  times  a  day  (the  day,  gen.}.  13.  Do 
you  know  in  whose  company  and  upon  which  ship  he  travels 
to  England? 
1  pure,  rein. 

EXERCISE  XVIIL 

(a)  i.  Qd)  fjabe  in  metnem  Seben  fefjr  tnel  gearbettet  nnb  ge= 
ritngen  (fight),  aber  e§  ift  mir  tro^bem1  nid)t  gelungen,  etn  retdjer 
Sftann  §u  toerben.  2.  S)a§  ftnfenbe  @d)tff  fd)ttmnb  langfam2  au§ 
unferen  5lngen.  3.  £>ie  langen  Qofjre  fyaben  etn  fyerrltdjeg  23cmb 
ber  greunbjcfjaft  um  nn§  gefcrjdmgen.  4.  ©etn  altefter  So^n  ift 
fo  tief  gejunfen,  ba§  er  fid)  tt)o()t  md)t  me^r  in  bte  §of)e3  fd^mingen 
njtrb.  5.  2)te  gebnngenen  (Solbaten  brangen  in  ba§  @d)(o§  nnb 
tDiirben  ben  giirften  gebunben  fjab-en,  menn  e§  i^m  ntd)t  gelun^ 
gen  ware,  au§  einem  ^enfter  §u  fprtngen  unb  fid)  511  retten.  6. 
$)te  ©tubenten  toerben  too^l  fciete  Steber  gefungen  unb 
®la§  auj  i§re  $rofefforen  nnb  if)re  Unttjerfttat  getrnnfen 
7.  3fd()  tt)iirbe  fti^erli^  bte  28a()r^ett  fagen,  ttienn  (Ste  mid) 
bariiber  ju  fprec^en.  8.  ©prtd^  nnr  ba3  SSa^re  unb  trtnf  nur  ba§ 
^(are,4  iff  ein  alte§  bentfd)e§  ©pri^mort.  9.  D^ne  Saut5  fan!  er 
ju  ^Boben6;  aber  nod)  etne  tjolte  (Stunbe  rang  er  mtt  bem  3:obe 
nnb  ttmnb  fti^  tior  ©corner  $en.  10.  (Seine  ^reube  am  Seben  mar 
nod£)  ni(^t  gefd^munben  ;  er  fanb  jeben  Xag  neue  ( 
barin. 


,  nevertheless,  in  spite  of  it.     2  long  jam,  adv.,  slowly.     8bte  §0^e, 
height;  in  bte  £>bf)e,  upward,  up.     4  ffar,  r/^ar.     5  ber  fiaut,  sound.      G  ber 
,  bottom,  ground.     7  bie  @(|Dn^ett,  beauty. 


(b)  i.  He  would  be  in  (bet)  better  health  to-day,  if  he  did 
not  drink  so  much.  2.  All  cares  and  troubles  vanished  from 
(au§)  his  heart,  when  you  sang  that  beautiful  German  song. 
3.  I  should  certainly  no  longer  (  =  more)  respect  him,  if  he 


EXERCISES.  417 

sank  (subj.)  upon  his  (=the)  knees  before  you,  or  if  he 
threw  (slung)  his  arms  around  your  neck.1  4.  In  my  absence 
a  thief  swung  (perf.)  himself  over  the  garden  wall  and  entered- 
forcibly  (pressed)  into  my  house.  5.  I  have  hired  a  new 
porter;  the  old  one  was  too  lazy  and  drank  too  much.  6.  In 
our  museum  [there]  is  a  famous  statue  of  a  wrestling  gladia- 
tor.2 7.  The  sun  had  (was)  already  sunk  behind  the  hori- 
zon3 and  the  last  rays  of  light  were  vanishing,  when  from  the 
mountains  sounded  the  evening  songs4  of  the  shepherds.  8. 
Do  not  force  me  to  it,  for  you  will  find  that  I  shall  not  suc- 
ceed. 9.  He  rarely5  succeeded,  but  his  courage6  never 
lagged  (sank).  10.  Almost  mad  for  (t)or)  joy,  the  boys  sang 
merry  (joyful)  songs  and  swung  their  hats,  around  which 
(tt)e(dje)  they  had  wound  wreaths  of  gay  flowers,  n.  I 
should  easily  console (  =  comfort)  myself,  if  I  found  that  he 
did  not  succeed  (perf.),  for  I  know  that  he  fought  {perf.) 
(rtngen)  hard  (fd)toer). 

1  neck,  ber  §oB.      2  gladiator,  ber  ©lobtd'tor.      3  horizon,  ber  ^ort^ont', 
str.  decl.      4  evening  song,  baS  2l6enblieb.      5  rarely,  felten,  follows  the  verb. 
courage,  ber  Sftiit. 

EXERCISE  XIX. 

(a)  i.  Sorb  (£ott)Iet)  fagte  etnft  liber  Napoleon  :  (Sr  fpri(f)t 
ttx'ntg,  aber  er  liigt  immer.  2.  Sebe,  ttne  bit,  toenn  bu  ftirbft, 
ruimfcfyen  ttrirft,  gelcbt  511  fyaben.  3.  £)er  ilftiijjtggang1  fjat  diet 
S3i.ife§  jdjon  gefonnen  unb  au<^  t>iet  Unredjt  fc^oit  begonnen.  4.  ®er 
§errf  ber  bei  metner  ^ante  ft>of)nt  unb  ben  tutr  mit  tf)r  geftern  auf 
ber  Strafe  getroffen  I)aben,  tt)trbt  um  (for)  bie  §anb  i^rer  Xod^ter. 
5.  3<i)  fj&fe  ^on  ber  ^Ingelegen^ett,  iiber  meldje  (btef  moriiber) 
ber  §err  ^rofeffor  fprad),  ein  jeljr  !Iare§  SMtb  getuonnen.  6.  ©r 
trifft  immer  ba§  3f{id)ttge2  unb  feme  SSorte  fommen  tmmer  t)on 
^er^en.  7.  SBer  nur  ®elb  I)at,  ift  arm.  8.  (Sprtcl)  nur,  tt)a§  tt?a^r 
ift,  unb  trinl  nur,  tt)a3  !Iar  ift.  9.  9Hntm  nt^t§,  tt?a§  btr  ntdjt 
ge^ort.  10.  9?ur  tt)er  bie  ©eljnfucfyt8  fennt,  tt)et^  tt)a§  id^  leibe. 
ii.  3^be  ^uget4  traf,  ba§  ^Btut5  rann  in  (Stromen,6  unb  in  tt>em= 
gen  SJJinuten  toar  ba§  ^elb  mit  fterbenben  ©olbaten  bebecft.  12. 


418  EXERCISES. 

$or  ®ott  gilt  em  reined  £>er§  unb  etn  guter  Sfjarafter  meljr  at3 
®eift  imb  talent.7  13.  ^tcfytg  ift  fo  fetn  gefponnen,  e£  fommt 
bod)  enbltd)  an  bie  ©onne(n)  (to  light).  14.  S)er  ®onig  fagt, 
baft  er  fetn  gegebenes?  SSort  nte  gebrocfyen  Ijabe,  unb  bajj  er  e£  aud) 
je£t  nicj)t  brecfyen  tnerbe.  15.  G£  ift  ber  glud)8  ber  bb'fen  £at, 
bajs  fie  immer  n-ur  23ofe§  gebtert.  16.  3)er  alte  §err,  mit  U)eld)em 
tt)ir  t)on  Berlin  nac^  Seip^ig  retften,  tuar  etn  geOorener  5lrifto!ratn 
unb  fid)erli(^  ein  Officer.  17.  2)a§  Sllte,  aioran  niir  at§ 
unfere  greube  fatten,  ift  e§  no^f  ma§  aud)  unferen  ^tnbern 
mad)t.  1 8.  §i(f  bir  fetbft,  bann  fjilft  bit  ®ott.  19.  28er 
tt)agt/°  geminnt  nid^t§.  20.  S)a§  Snnere  ber  (Srbe  birgt 
mand^e  9fJeid)tumer.  21.  @ute  5trbett  empfteljtt  fid^  fedift.  22.  28er 
ein  bofe§  ©emiffen11  §at,  erfdjricft  fe^r  leid^t.  23.  9Ki(ct)  berbirbt, 
tuenn  fie  lange  fte^t. 

1ber  9Kufeiggang,  idleness.  2rid)ttg,  adj.,  right,  correct.  3bie  ©e^nfudjt, 
longing.  4bte$itgel,  bullet.  6ba§53lllt,  blood.  6  ber  ©trom,  stream,  river. 
7  bad  £alent/,  talent.  8  ber  3^u^  curse.  9  ber  3trtftofrat/',  aristocrat.  10  ioageu, 
/f>  i/ar^,  rw/^.  n  ba§  ©etoiffen,  conscience. 

(^)  i.  Whatever  you  command  me  (dat.)  to  do,  I  shall 
gladly  do;  but  do  not  scold  me  before  these  young  ladies, 
whom  I  know  and  who  know  me.  2.  The  oath  of  a  man  that 
breaks  his  word  is  not  worth  much.  3.  I  often  meditated 
about  the  matter  you  were  just  speaking  of  (Don),  but  I  never 
saw  the  same  in  the  light  in  which  you  see  it.  4.  Who  steals 
my  purse1  steals  trash.2  5.  What  you  say  is  true,  but  it  does 
not  help  me  in  the  future  (==  coming)  years  of  my  life.  6. 
Many  of  the  boys  with  whom  I  went8  to  (in)  (the)  school 
and  whose  parents  were  poor,  have  won  great  wealth  (//•); 
others  who  were  rich  are  poor  to-day,  or  have  gone  to  ruin4 
(berberben).  7.  I  should  gladly  have  recommended  your  son 
to  the  gentleman  whom  you  met  in  my  house,  but  he  did  not 
come.  8.  The  book  which  you  began  (perf.),  portrays 
(draws)  in  striking  (treffen)  words  the  wrongs  (sing.)  of  the 
present  time.  9.  I  believe,  they  would  throw  rotten  (spoiled) 
eggs  at  (nad))  him,  if  he  came  back.  10.  That  was  certainly 
the  best  [thing]  (what)  he  said,  but  it  was  the  last  [thing]  I 


EXERCISES.  419 

counted  on.      n.    Do  not  throw  your   money   away,  for   the 
time  will  come  when  (ftenn)  you  will  need  it. 

1  purse,  bie  33br[e.  2  trash,  ber  ©cfiunb.  3  went,  ging.  4  verbs  of  motion 
and  change  of  condition  take  the  auxiliary  fein  in  compound  past  tenses. 

EXERCISE  XX. 

(a)  i.  SScr  feme  Gjlljre1  fcerliert,  §at  atte§  fcerloren.  2.  ®otf)e 
fjatte  in  feinem  (£ttern$aufe  etne  beffere  (Jrjieljung  genoffen  al§ 
(Skitter.  3.  33t§  je£t  fjat  e§  in  biefem  SStnter  nod)  nid)t  gefroren, 
fonft  nmrben  biefe  £i.ere  fdjon  inifyre  Socfyer2  gelrodjen  fein.  4.  3)a§ 
Seben  bot  bent  Airmen  feme  greube,  be§f)alb  fc^o§  er  fid)  in  ber 
SSer^meiftung3  eine  ^?uget  in  ben  £opf.  5.  5<^  §a^e  einen  ganjen 
(Sinter4  Doll  fiebenbe^  SBaffer  iiber  mi$  gegoffen  nnb  Ijabe  mid) 
au(^  an  §a'nben  nnb  giifien  gefdjunben.  6.  (Scfyiebe  ni(^t§  auf 
morgen,  rt)a§  fjeut  bu  fannft  beforgen5  (roa§  bit  ^eute  beforgen 
fannft).  7.  SSir  fagen  oft  t?on  etnem  9J£enfcE)en,  ber  fe^r  etgenfin- 
nig6  ift,  bag  cr  einen  fjartgefottenen  ®opf  ^abe.  8.  g(ieBenbe§ 
SBaffer  friert  nid)t  fo  fd)nett  al§  (ttrie)  fte^enbe§  nnb  iDirb  an(^  im 
(Sommer  nie  fo  marm  a(§  Ie^tere§.  9.  @r  wirb  njofjl  fd^on  in  fein 
nene§  §au§  ge5ogen  fein,  menn  ba§  alte  gefd)Ioffen  ift  ;  t»ieHeici)t  ift 
er  and)  fd)on  tior  ber  §i£e7  in§  Q^ebirge  gef(o^en.  10.  @§  t>er* 
bro§  ben  (General  nid^t  n?enig,  ba§  feine  (Solbaten  fc^on  beim  erften 
@c^u§8  au3einanber9  ftoben. 

1Mc  G^re,  honor.     2ba3  Sod^,  ^/^.     3  bie  SBer^tDetflung,  despair.     4ber 
Gtmer,  bucket.    5  bejorgen,  ^,  a^<?«^  /<?.    6  etgenfinntg,  self-willed.    7  bie 
&  ber  (S^ufe,  ^^  shot.    9  auSeinanber,  asunder. 


(b)  i.  The  flowers  that  were  growing  (sprout)  in  your  gar- 
den last  year  (ace.)  were  very  beautiful,  but  they  had  no  smell 
(smelled  not).  2.  I  like  to  eat  hard-boiled  eggs,  .but  my 
physician  says  that  they  are  not  good  for  me.  3.  [For]  a  few 
minutes  it  poured  in  streams,  and  my  clothes  were  dripping 
with  (bom)  rain.  4.  Many  tears1  flowed  from  the  eyes  of 
(the)  those  whose  sons  or  brothers  marched  (=moved)  into 
the  field  yesterday.  5.  He  weighed  less  before  his  illness  than 


420  EXERCISES. 

he  weighs  now.  6.  If  it  freezes  to-night,2  all  the  sprouting  young 
plants  that  shot  from  (au§)  the  ground  (earth)  during  the 
last  [few]  days,  will  perish  (  =  spoil).  7.  Enjoy  your  life,  as 
long  as  it  offers  [to]  you  joy  and  pleasures.  8.  He  bent  the 
bow8  until  it  broke.  9.  If  he  enjoyed  a  better  reputation,4  I 
should  offer  him  a  good  position.5  10.  We  found  the  lost 
sheep  under  a  rock,  under  which  it  had  crept  during  the  storm. 
n.  The  hunter  shot  the  eagle  just  as  he  was-flying  over  that 
high  tree.  12.  It  vexed  him  very  [much]  that  you  offered 
him  no  opportunity  to  speak  with  the  lady. 

1  tear,  Me  Xrcine.  2  to-night,  Ijeitle  rmdjt.  8  bow,  ber  SSogen.  4  reputation, 
ber  3Ju[.  5  position,  bie  <£tette. 

(V)  i.  What  would  you  and  all  your  friends  say,  if  I  induced 
him  to  help  me  (dat.)  in  this  matter?  2.  He  never  drank  fer- 
mented wine  and  I  shall  not  urge  (induce)  him  to-it  now. 
3.  Every  cat  likes  to  drink  freshly  milked  milk.  4.  If  his  appear- 
ance does  not  deceive,  I  think  (=  believe),  he  drinks  [like 
an  animal].  5.  On  the  highest  mountains  of  Switzerland  the 
snow  never  melts..  6.  This  carpet1  is  not  woven,  it  is  braided. 
7.  During  the  long  winter-evenings  the  whole  family  used 
(pflegen)  to  sit  around  the  glimmering  fire  of  the  chimney  (ba§ 
®aminffeuer);  the  children  climbed  upon  my  chair,  threw  their 
arms  around  my  neck2  and  at  last  induced  me  to  tell  them  a 
nice  fairy-tale.  8.  If  the  rain  had  not  poured  [down]  in  streams, 
the  fire  would  not  have  gone-out  so  soon.  9.  I  have  heard  that 
in  olden  times  the  enemies  often  poured  molten  lead  into  the 
mouth  of  a  captured3  soldier.  10.  She  chose  for-herself  a  hus- 
band after  her  own  heart  and  not  after  the  wishes  of  her  friends. 
1 1.  My  friend  has  grown  old,  the  fire  of  her  eyes  is  extinguished 
(ertofdjen).  12.  He  is  the  last  of  his  name,  and,  when  he  dies, 
passes  away  (erlofdjen)  the  once4  so  famous  family. 

1  carpet,  ber  Sepptcf).      2  neck,  ber  £al§.      3  captured,  gefcmgen.      4  once, 


EXERCISES.  421 

EXERCISE  XXI. 

(a)  i.  Sftan  fagt  oft  im  ©djerje,1  bafs  man  ift,  ttm§  man  ifjt.  2. 
(£§  gefd)ie!)t  nid)ts>  9?eue§  in  ber  SBelt,  unb  atte§  ift  fd)on  bagett)e= 
fen.    3.  (£r  bat  mid),  nid)t§  bafcon  §u  fagen,  aber  id)  fjabe  nod)  nie= 
manben  getroffen,  ber  bie  <Sad)e  nid)t  fd)on  roeifs.     4.  igd)  fjabe 
nid)t§  bagegen,  metn  <3ofyn,  toenn  bu  rcifen  ttriffft,  [nm]  bie  SBelt  511 
fefjen,  aber  bergifc  nidjt,  ba§  bte  SBelt  and)  bid)  fie§t.     5.  3^  Jei* 
nem  Sanb  ber  SBelt  lieft  man  fo  t)iele  3^itungen  al§  in  Slmerifa. 

6.  $0Jan  fagt,  baft  er  nid)t£  t)ergeffe,  tt)a§  er  einmal  gelefen  fjat 

7.  (Sin  £ier  fri§t  nnb  fciuft  felten  me^r,  al§  e§  §um  Seben  braiid)t ; 
ber  sIRen|(^  bagegen  ifst  unb  trinft  fe^r  oft  mefjr,  al§  fiir  il)n  gut 
ift.    8.  SBenn  ber  33urfd)e2  mir  roieber  Dor  bie  5lugen  tritt,  roerbe 
i<^  i^m  ettt>a§  fagen,  ioa§  er  nidjt  gern  fyort.    9.  (S§  gej(^a(;  fefyr 
oftf  ba§  ber  §err  ^rofeffor  itber  ber  Arbeit  ba§  (Sffen3  t)erga§. 
10.  SBenn  ba§  bor  ^unbert  Sfl^ten  gef(^e§en  n?are,  tt>iirbe  ein  je- 
ber  fagen,  ba$  ein  SBnnber4  gefi^e^en  fei.    n.  ©r  ^at  §u  t)iel  ge- 
geffen  unb  je^t  l)at  er  etnen  tjerborbenen  S^agen.     12.  ^adjbem  i(^ 
roieber  genefen  bin,  tuerbe  t(^  mein  Seben  beffer  genieften  al§  frii= 
§er.    13.  SBer  nie  fein  33rot  in  £rtinen5  a§,  irer  nie  in  fummer- 
Pollen6  9^dd^ten  auf  feinem  33ette  toeinenb  fa§,  ber  fennt  eud)  nid)t, 
i^r  ^imm(if(^en  9^ad)te.7    14.  TOft  bie  SBelt  nid^t  nad)  betnem 
SKa^ftab,8  fonft  mifet  fie  bid)  nad)  bem  if)rigen.    15.  SBo  id)  lag, 
too  id)  fajj  unb  tuo  id^  ftanb,  immer  trat  i^r  33ilb  mir  bor  bie  5lu^ 
gen. 

Her  &&)tib,  fun,  joke.  2ber  S3urfd)e,  fellow.  3ba3  Sffen,  eating,  meal. 
4  ba§  28unber,  miracle.  5  bie  Xrane,  ^-^r.  6  fummerboH,  anxioits.  7  bie  9Jf ad)t, 
power,  force.  8  ber  9Kafjfta&,  measure,  rule. 

(b)  i.  She  forgives,  but  she  never  forgets.     2.   Money  he 
has  none,  but  he  has  a  little  property,  I  believe,  a  few  small 
houses.     3.  If  she  asked  him  for  it,  he  would  give  it  to  her. 
4.  The  philosophy1  of  his  life  lay  in  the  words:    Eat,  drink 
and  be  merry  (glad).     5.   He  helps  nobody  (dat.)  and  never 
gives  the  poor  {dat.)  anything,  because,  as  he  says,  nobody 
gave   (perf.)   him  anything,   when  he  had   nothing.      6.   You 


422  EXERCISES. 

measure  more  around  your  chest2  than  you  measured  a  year 
ago,  when  I  made  you  (dat.)  the  last  coat.  7.  An  hour  (ace.) 
after  we  had  eaten  of-it,  we  grew  sick;  but  we  all  recovered 
very  soon,  except  my  little  sister,  who  is-recovering  only  very 
slowly.  8.  When  did  this  [thing]  happen  you  are  reading 
about  ?  9.  Many  have  more  than  they  need,  but  few,  perhaps 
none,  have  more  than  they  wish.  10.  Have  you  ever  read 
anything' more  beautiful  than  this  short  poem?  n.  People 
(=  one)  like  to  believe  what  gives  them  (to-one)  pleasure. 
12.  It  is  said  that  he  speaks  and  reads  most  European3  and  a 
few  oriental4  languages.  13.  If  he  has  already  forgotten  what 
I  told  him,  or  if  he  ever  forgets  it,  please  read  to  him  the 
letter  which  I  have  given  you  (dat.).  14.  I  asked  them  for 
bread,  and  they  gave  me  a  stone. 

1  philosophy,  Me  ^fjilofopfjte'.     2  chest,  bte  SBruft.     3  European,  europdifdj. 
*  oriental,  ortenta'Hfrf). 

EXERCISE  XXII. 

(a)  i.  (£tn  9fteffer,  roeldjeg  511  fdjarf  gefd)Itffen  ift,  ttnrb  fefjr 
Ieid)t  fcfyartig.1  2.  9?iemanb  !ann  bir  fagen,  ttm§  id)  in  ben  le^ten 
£agen  gelhten  Ijabe.  3.  SDZein  §er§  gleidjt  gan§  bent  Sfteere,2  fjat 
©turm  unb  (Sbb'3  unb  glut,  unb  mancfye  fd)bne  $)3crle4  in  feiner 
£tefe5  rufyt6  (ru^t  in  feiner  3Tiefe).  4.  SSenn  t^r  eud^  ma^renb  be§ 
le^ten  3al)re§  in  ber  (Scfyule  mefjr  befliffen  ^attet,  tt)iirbet  tf)r  je^t 
tt)d()renb  be§  gan^en  @ommer§  fret  fetn.  5.  5ll§  er  nttr  ba§ 
9}^effer  au§  ber  §anb  rife,  fc^nttt  er  mid)  babet  in  bte  ginger. 
6.  (Stnnenb  ft^rttt  er  tm  3^™^  auf  unb  ab  ;  ba  auf  einmal  pftff 
eine  ®ugel  buri^  ba§  genfter  ;  erfdjrocfen  tt)tc^  er  einige  (S 
guriicf  unb  brad^  bann,  gum  £obe  erblti^en,  jufammen.  7. 
&inber  gretfen  nac^  allem,  tt)a§  fie  fefyen.  8.  (Sonne  unb  SSinb 
jtritten  barum,  mer  t)on  tfjnen  ber  ftarfere  fet.  9.  3ll§  feine  -Mtui- 
ter  neben  tf)m  am  33ette  fa^  unb  ifym  mtt  t§ren  lieben  §d'nben  burd) 
bie  §aare  ftrtt^,  midden  nid)t  nur  atte  @d)mer3en,  an  benen  er  litt, 
fonbern  aud)  9Wje8  unb  grteben  f^lid^en  mieber  iiber  fetn  5lntlt^.9 
10.  2)ic  betjsenben  SSorte  metnp§  greunbe§  j^nitten  ttef  in  metne 


EXERCISES.  423 

@eelc.10  IT.  $H§  ber  frembe  ®aft  burd)  bte  <Stra§en  unfercr 
(Stabt  ritt,  fdjmtffen  einige  unartige  ®inber  ©teine  nacf)  ifjm. 
12.  S)ie  beiben  (Scfytoeftern  gteicfyett  fid)  (etnanber),  tt)ie  etn  (Si11 
bem  anbern. 

ifcrjartig,  notchy.     2ba§  SSfteer,  ^«.     3bte  G66e,  ebb;  bte  3lut,  tide,  flood. 
4  bic  $erle,  /^r/.     5  bte  Stefe,  dk///&.     6ru^en,  r«/.    T  ber  ©djrttt,  step.     8bie 
.     labte  ©eele,  soul.    u  baS  <£i,  <g£-. 


(<^)  i.  She  is  a  quarreling  (chiding)  old  woman  (SBetb,  «.) 
who  scolds  the  whole  day  (ace.).  2.  A  mad  dog  bit  him  and 
tore  (him)  a  piece  [of]  flesh  out  of  his  leg.  3.  Because  he 
always  acted  in  accordance  with  (=  after)  the  wishes  of  his 
wife,  the  people  said  :  He  always  danced  as  she  whistled.  4. 
A  man  who  turns  pale  when  (if)  he  sees  blood,  or  gets  fright- 
ened when  he  smells  powder  and  hears  a  shot,'2  will  never  be- 
come a  brave  soldier.  5.  His  son  has  always  applied  himself 
very  [much]  in  (the)  school,  and  he  will  certainly  also  apply 
himself  in  (the)  business.  6.  Although  they  had  been-riding 
the  whole  day  and  were  tired-to-death  when  the  fight  began, 
they  nevertheless  fought  (contended)  like  heroes.  7.  Dia- 
monds3 become  valuable4  only  after  they  are  cut  and  ground 
(jd)lctfen).  8.  She  had  no  illness  that  yielded  to  the  art  of 
the  physician;  she  suffered  from  [a]  broken  heart.  9.  it 
was  a  pleasure  to  see  how  the  ship  was-gliding  over  the  waves 
of  the  tearing  waters  (sing.).  10.  Whom  did  you  resemble 
when  you  were  little,  your  father  or  your  mother  ? 

1  murderer,  ber  9ftbrber.  2shot,  ber  Scfjitf?.  3  diamond,  ber  Sianwnt7. 
4  valuable,  toertrjoll. 

(c)  i.  Don't  scream  so  loud  when  you  speak  to  (nut)  me, 
I  am  not  deaf.  2.  If  you  had  kept  (been)  silent,  everybody 
would  have  excused  your  action,  but  since  you  have  spoken 
about  it,  nobody  will  pardon  you  (dat.).  3.  Let  us  praise 
God  for  all  (what)  he  has  given  us.  4.  I  should  have  (fetn) 
remained  a  little  longer,  if  I  had  not  suffered  so  much  from 
headache.  5.  His  business  was  prospering  and  his  profits 


424  EXERCISES. 

rose  from  year  to  year ;  then  he  lent  money  to  his  brother 
and  lost  in  one  year  all  he  had  made  in  ten  years.  6.  Avoid 
all  bad  company  (society),  my  child,  for  bad  company  spoils 
good  manners.  7.  Cromwell  killed  (the)  King  Charles  I 
(the  first)  and  drove  his  son  out  of  the  country.  8.  They 
often  quarrelled  (contended)  with  each  other,  but  they  always 
parted  as  good  friends.  9.  I  hope  that  the  sun  will  soon 
shine  again  ;  it  has  not  been-shining  for  (feit)  a  whole  week. 

10.  She  seemed  to  resemble  her  father  more  than  her  mother. 

11.  What  have  you  been  doing  (tretben),  since  you  wrote  me 
the  last  time  (acc.)l     12.   It  seems  that  my  neighbor's  child  is 
ill;  at  least  it  has  been  screaming  the  whole  night. 

EXERCISE  XXIII. 

(a)  i.  §ei§t  bte  Same,  beren  23tlb  bort  an  ber  SSanb  l)angt, 
ntcfyt  $raulein  SBraun?  3>a,  fo  fjat  fie  fritter  geljeijsen,  je£t  tjeifst 
fie  $rau  28eber.  2.  Petite  ®inber  effen  nid)t§  lieber1  a(£>  gebra^ 
tene  Spfel.  3.  S)er  $(r§t  fjatt2  bte  ®ranff)eit  metner  <Sd)tt)efter 
ntd)t  fiir2  gefafjrlicl);  er  riet  i()r  nur,  jeben  £ag  in  ber  frtfcfyen 
Suft  fpa^ieren  ju  ge^en.  4.  ^Bie  fyiefj  ber  §errr  ber  tjont 
fiet,  al§  er  geftern  mit  3f)nen  fpajieren  ritt?  5.  (Sett  tcfymetne 
(Srbe  fallen  lieg,  la'uft  fie  ntd^t  me^r.  6.  33itte,  ^angen  @te  ba.§ 
$H(b  ein  mentg  ntebrtger,3  e§  f)a'ngt  §u  ^oi^.  7.  ^5)te  33auern  ftngen 
ben  ^ferbebteb  tm  2BaIbe,  aber  ba  er  mte  ein  SStlber  nth  etnem 
S^effer  urn  fid)  f)teb  (strike),  Ite^en  fie  tfjn  mieber  laitfen.  8.  @r 
ftbfet  alte§  §ur  (gette,  toa§  il)m  ntd)t  gefallt.  9.  §ier  unter  btcfem 
9^onumentef  tDeld^e^  ber  ®'ihtft(er4  fii^  felbft  ge^auen  ^atf  fc^Iaft 
er  je^t  ben  lel^ten  @d)laf.  10.  9^etn  S3ater  rat  un§,  ntd)t  auf  ba§ 
SSaffer  511  ge^en,  folange  (al§)  ber  SStnb  fo  ftarf  blaft.  n.  9Kem 
^Brttber  ^telt  ba§  Q3oot,  bt§  tutr  aHe  bartn  ttmren,  itnb  bann  ftte§ 
er  un§  bom  Ufer.  12.  ©obalb  (al§)  ber  erfte  9luf5  erfci)olt  unb 
ba§  S3ol!  §n  ben  SSaffen6  rtef,  lief  ba§felbe  in  §aufen  ton  atten 
(Sden  gnfammen  unb  toartete  nitr  ungebulbtg,  bi§  e§  jum  3ln^ 
griff7  blie§. 


EXERCISES.  425 

.  *  KdJet,  comp.  of  gent,   rather,  liefer.      2  fallen  fitr,   take  for,  consider. 
2niebrig,  low.     4ber  Siinftler,  artist.     5ber  3luf,  call.     6bie  SBaffen, 
7  ber  Stngriff,  attack. 


(b)  i.  I  should  y^tfz^  fallen,  if  you  had  not  caught  me.  2. 
Why  do  you  run  so,  Charles,  when  he  calls  you  ?  3.  I  beg 
[your]  (for)  pardon,  Sir,  is  not  your  name  (are  you  called) 
Mr.  Wagner?  4.  Do  you  (bit)  not  blow  your  light  out, 
when  you  go  to  bed  (=  to  sleep),  Henry?  5.  He  held  me 
by  (the)  hand  and  did  not  let  me  go,  until  I  pushed  him 
aside  (to  (511)  the  side).  6.  He  sleeps  the  sleep  of  the  just. 
7.  Do  you  know,  what  the  name  was  of  (how  was  called)  the 
queen  who  had  the  hanging  gardens  around  her  castle?  8. 
My  brothers  have  (fetn)  gone  out  riding  (have  taken  a  ride) 
this  morning1  and  we  shall  take  a  drive  this  afternoon,  if  the 
horses  are  not  too  tired.  9.  The  monument  for  the  fallen 
heroes  of  the  last  war  is  hewn  out  of  American  marble.  10. 
I  should  go  through  the  fire  for  him,  if  he  bade  me  [do]  it. 
ii.  A  traveller  told  me  that  some  of  the  savage  tribes2  of 
(the)  Inner  Africa3  formerly  roasted  the  captured  (caught) 
enemies  over  a  fire,  until  the  flesh  fell  from  the  bones.4  12.  I 
advised  him  to  hang  the  pictures  a  little  higher,  because  they 
hung  too  low. 

1  this  morning,  Ijeute  ntorgen.  2  tribe,  ber  ©tantm.  3  Africa,  &frifa,  n. 
4  bone,  ber  ®nod)en. 

EXERCISE  XXIV. 

(a)  i.  9#eine  @d)tt>eftern  ftanben  fyeute  beu  ganjett  £ag  in  ber 
^iicfye1  tmb  bufen  itnb  brieten,  benn  fie  erroarten  morgen  (erne)  grofje 
®efeftfd)aft  2.  SDlan  toeijs  me,  too  biefer  ^olttifer2  ftef)t,  ba  er 
tmmer  auf  beibett  @d)uUern3  3Baf{er  tragt.  3.  SSer  gut  fcfymtert,4 
ber  fafjrt  and)  gut.  4.  (£§  fd)Iug  gerabe  §tt)5If,  a(3  ttrir  biird)  ba§ 
£or  ber  ©tabt  fafyren.  5.  ©otange  er  reid)  tt)ar,  tritg  er  ben 
®opf  fefyr  f)ocl);  aber  je^t  la^t  er.  i^n  fe^r  tief  ^angen.  6.  (So 
triel  (al§)  i(^  tuei^,  tDu<^§  friitjer  fetn  2Bein  ^ter,  aber  je£t 
toac^fl  er  ^ter  ebenfo  gut  ttrie  am  9?^eiu.  7.  SSer  aubern  (for 


EXERCISES. 

others)  eine  ®rube5  grabt,  fattt  oft  felbft  Ijtnetn  (in  biefelbe).  -8. 
^olittrer  fjanbeln  getoofjnltd)  nadj  bent  ®runbja£6:  (Sine  §anb 
ttmfd)t  bie  anbere.  9.  3d)  freue  mid)  fefjr,  baft  %fyr  [§err]  $ater 
fid)  ttrieber  beffer  beftnbet,  unb  id)  Ijoffe,  baf$  er  ficfy  batb  gan§  er- 
f)olt7  fjaben  ttnrb.  10.  (Galilei  trrte  fid)  nid)t,  al§  er  fagte,  bag 
bie  (£rbe  fid)  um  bie  @onne  betoege.  n.  -Die  ^inber,  tueld^e  fi(^ 
tm  SSalbe  Derirrt  fatten,  befanben  fid)  in  ber  gro^ten  9Zot.  12. 
SSenn  er  feiner  me^r  fd)onte,  tt)iirbe  er  fic^  balb  nrieber  ebenfo  tt?o§l 
befinben,  njie  er  fid^  fritter  befunben  ^at. 

1  bie  ®iirf)e,  kitchen.  2  ber  ^olittfer,  politician.  8  bie  <Sd)uIter,  shoulder. 
4  fcftmieren,  t?z7,  lubricate.  6  bie  ©rube,  /?V,  <ftftvi.  6  ber  ®runbfa^,  principle. 
7  ftci)  er^oten,  recuperate. 

(b)  i.  The  lightning1  struck  (into)  the  tree  under  which 
we  were  standing,  but,  fortunately,2  it  hit  no  one.  2.  This 
man  created  a  name  for  himself,  because  he  baked  the  best 
bread  in  (the)  town.  3.  The  ships  which  sailed  (fafjren) 
into  (the)  port8  yesterday,  were  loaded  with  wood.  4.  It  is 
always  the  gun4  that  is  not  loaded  which  causes  (the)  most 
misfortune.  5.  If  you  washed  (yourself)  every  morning  with 
cold  water,  you  would  not  take  cold6  so  easily  and  you  would 
soon  be  (refl.)  entirely  well.  6.  Do  you  like  to  eat  fresh (ly) 
baked  bread  ?  7.  No  man  has  built  (fd)affen)  for  himself  a 
more  lasting  (bteiben)  monument  than  he,  for  none  had  done 
(create)  more  good  for  his  country.  8.  There,  where  you 
now  stand,  stood  the  tree  that  bore  (tragen)  the  apples  which 
we  liked  to  eat  so  [much]  as  children.  9.  If  you  wore  lighter 
clothes  you  would  feel  (refl.)  much  cooler.  10.  Not  all  people 
rejoice,  when  others  are  (refl.)  well  and  happy,  n.  Look 
out  for6  the  man  who  says  that  he  is  never  mistaken.  12.  If 
I  am  not  mistaken,  we  met  (refl.)  last  summer  (ace.)  in  Ber- 
lin. 13.  We  took  a  drive  this  afternoon,  and  we  should  have 
gone  astray  in  the  forest,  if  we  had  not  met  a  hunter,  who 
showed  us  the  road. 

1  lightning,  ber  93Ii&.      2  fortunately,  gliitflidjertoeife.     3port,  ber  §afen. 


EXERCISES.  427 

4  gun,  ba3  ®etoef)r.      5  to  take  a  cold,  jid)  erfalten.      6  to  look  out  for,  fid) 
tyiiten  bor. 

EXERCISE  XXV. 

(a)  i.  §aben  bie  3eitungen  fjeute  etttm§  9?eue§  itber  ben  ®ricg 
gebracfyt?  2.  SSer  !ann  itm§  (ettt>a§)  SmmmeS,1  njer  tt)a§ 
benfen,  ba§  nid^t  bie  $ortt>ett2  fdfjon  gebad&t  (fjat)?  3.  Gin 

ber  ttmfjrenb  be§  £age§  fd^Iaft,  gleid)t  etnent  Sid^te,  tt)elrf)e§  am 
Xage  brennt.  4.  (Sebrannte  ^tnber  fiird^ten  ba§  geuer.  5.  Xu7, 
ttm§  jeber  loben  mit^te,3  tuenn  bie  gan5e  SBelt  e§  luiigte  ;  tu'  e§, 
ba§  e§  niemanb  toeifs,  unb  geboppeU4  ift  fein  $rei§.5  6.  Dbttjo^l 
bie  (Sonne  fein  Slntlt^  fe^r  ftarf  fcerbrannt6  ()atte,  ^at  i^n  feine 
Gutter  bod^  fofort  (at  once)  urieber  erfannt,7  ot§  er  jein  ©eftdfyt 
gegcti  fie  tranbte.  7.  SBenn  manner  ^DZann  tuu^te,  lucr  manner 
SKann  tt)ar;,  tat'8  manner  Sftann  man^em  SQJann  mandimal  me^r 
@fjr.  8.  SSenn  id^  baran  gebadf)t  ^dtte,  tDiirbe  ic^  Qfjnen  bag 
genannte  S3ud^  entroeber  felbft  gebradtjt  ober  mit  ber  ^oft  gefanbt 
§aben.  9.  $3a§  batten  ©te  bon  mir  unb  mofiir  ()ielten  @ie  mict), 
at§  tt)ir  un§  5uerft  fennen  lernten?  10.  SBenn  e§  in  frul)eren 
3eiten  irgenbtoo9  in  ber  (Stabt  brannte,  rannte  ba§  ganje 
nad^  bent  geiter,  [urn]  e§  §u  Ibfdjen ;  [jeutjutage10  benft  fein 
baran  au^er  ben  geuertDe^rleuten.11  n.  Qeber  benfenbe 
JDei§f  ba§  man  nid£)t  alle§  genan12  nriffen  fann,  lt)a§  man  lennt. 
12.  SSenn  bu  me^r  an  beine  (SItern  bad^teft,  toiirbeft  bn  nid^t  fo 
oft  in  ®efa^r  fein,  Unred()t  ju  tun. 

1bumm,  adj.,  foolish.  2bie  SSortoelt,  the  world,  or  people,  before  2ts. 
3miifete,  subj.  impf.  instead  of  condit.,  would  have  to.  4boppeln,  to  double. 
6  ber  SpretS,  praise,  price.  6  bcrBrcnncn  =  firenncn,  tan.  7  eilennen,  to  recog- 
nize. 8  tat'  =  tate,  inst.  of  cond.  9  irgenbtoo,  somewhere,  anywhere. 
10  f)eut5tttage,  nowadays.  n  ber  ^euertoeljrmann,  pi  -leute,  fireman.  12genau, 
adv.  exactly,  accurately. 

(b)  i.    The   firemen   ran    into  the    burning   building   and 
saved  two  children  who  were  left  alone  in  a  room  of  the  top 
(upper-most)  floor  (=  story).     2.   Nowadays  we  know  more 
about  the  interior  of  Africa  than  we  knew  a  few  years  ago. 


428  EXERCISES. 

3.  I  know,  the  gentleman  whom  you  called  your  greatest  enemy 
lives  here,  but  I  do  not  know  him.  4.  If  your  father  brought 
me  the  money,  or  if  he  sent  it  to  me  soon,  he  would  do  me  a 
great  favor.  5.  What  were  you  thinking,  my  child,  when 
you  ran  against  the  lady  and  forgot  to  ask  her  (her  for) 
pardon?  6.  It  is  said  that  he  is  acquainted  (lenneu)  [with] 
many  languages,  but  that  he  speaks  none  well,  not  even  his 
own.  7.  As  soon  as  I  recognized  him  I  turned  my  face 
away.  8.  There  is  a  fire  (is  burning)  somewhere  in  (the) 
town;  I  smell  smoke  and  I  hear  the  horses  run[ning]  through 
the  streets.  9.  I  like  to  converse1  with  a  thinking  person 
about  (ace.)  the  burning  questions  of  the  day.  10.  If  you 
did  this,  you  would  do  him  (dat.)  wrong  and  I  should  not 
think  much  of  you.  n.  He  named  a  day  on  which  he  would 
send  me  the  money,  but  he  never  thought  of  it,  although  I 
have  relied  upon  his  promise.  12.  It  is  said  that  Bayard 
Taylor,  whom  his  country  sent  as  ambassador  to  Germany, 
knew  and  spoke  German  as  well  as  a  German. 
1  to  converse,  fief)  unterljalten. 

EXERCISE  XXVI.  A. 

(a)  i.  §ier  in  btefem  gimmer  barf  (fann)  man  raudjen,1  ttne 
id)  fefje ;  barf  id)  ©te  t>ielleid)t  urn  geuer  bitten?  2.  $tete§,  ttm§  bte 
$tnber  rjeut^utage  tun  biirfen  (fonnen),  f)aben  fair  al§  ®tnber 
nid)t  geburft.  3.  $)u  barfft  fjeute  nid)t2 fjtnauS;  bte  Suft  ift  §u 
fait  unb  bn  fonnteft  (miicfjteft)  bid)  erfalten.  4.  (£r  fjatte  fur  ben 
§unb  ftcfyerltd)  ntd)t  fo  triel  be§af)len  biirfen,  toenn  er  fetnen  $ater 
^uerft  gefragt  fya'tte.  5.  fart  ^at  feme  SlufgaOe  nict)t  ma^en  !on^ 
nenr  obmo^t  er  tmmer  alle§  fann,  ft>enn  man  i^n  reben  fjtirt.  6. 
90^an  fann  i)iet,  roenn  man  n?tllf  unb  nod)  merjr,  tDenn  man  mug. 
7.  SSenn  betn  33ruber  ba§  ift,  ttiofiir  ic^  i^n  ^alte,  fann  er  ba§  nid^t 
gefagt  ^aben.  8.  SSenn  id)  nur  biirfte,  roie  \§  mod^te  unb  fonnte, 
bann  roiirbe  id)  i^m  geben,  tt)a§  er  Derbient.  9.  3^eine  ©d)n)efter 
tt)itt  nid^t  mtt  (along) ;  fie  fagt,  ber  §tmmel  fet  bebecft  unb  e§ 


EXERCISES.  429 

ntodjte  irietteid)t  fefjr  Mb  regnen.  10.  %<$  tjatte  it)m  bie  grenbe 
fef)r  teidjt  fcerberben  fonnen,  toenn  id)  getoollt  (gemocfyt)  fjatte.  n. 
SSer  mod)te  nid)t  lieber  ber  erfte  in  einem  3)orfe  al§  ber  §tt)eite  in 
$£om  fein?  12.  (£r  mod)te  (lonnte)  fagen,  toa§  er  toottte,  [e§]  glaubte 
if)m  niemanb.  13.  griiljer  mod)te  mem  Onlel  bte  jnnge  SDame  fef)r 
gern,  abet  je^t  barf  fie  nid)t  mefjr  in  fein  §an§  fommen.  14.  (£§ 
mag  (lann)  fein,  bafc  au(^  fein  better  i^n  gefjen  ^ie^,  benn  [e§] 
mag  i§n  fein  SOZenfc^.  15.  3c^  fyabe  meinen  S3ater  fagen  ^orenf 
bafj  er  ba§  befannte  33uc^  toerbe3  lommen  taffen  (fommen  laffen 
tuerbe). 

irau^en,  smoke,  2ntdjt  bitrfen,  in  pres.  tense  usually  to  be  transl.  by: 
must  not.  3  the  inflected  aux.  verb  usually  precedes  two  infinitives. 

(b)  i.  She  may  be  older  than  he,  but  she  does  not  know 
as  much  as  he.  2.  Why  don't  you  like  him?  he  always  liked 
(perf.)  you.  3.  Could  you  [speak]  English,  before  you 
came  to  America?  4.  You  must  not1  do  this;  it  is  against 
the  law.  5.  Last  year  my  brother  could  have  gone  to  Europe 
with  a  party  (society),  but  he  did  not  want-to  (perf.),  and 
this  year,  when2  he  would  like  to  go,  nobody  wants  [to  go] 
with  him  and  alone  he  is  not  allowed  [to  go].  6.  You  must 
stay  home  to-day,  for  if  the  weather  remains  fine,  your  friend 
Carl  might  visit  you.  7.  A  child  cannot  have  done  this,  for 
no  child  could  have  done  it  and  no  child  will  be  able  to  do 
it.  8.  Might  I  give  you  a  cup  [of]  tea,  or  would  you  not 
rather  (lieber)  [have]  coffee?  9.  Have  you  ever  heard  my 
sister  sing  the  German  song  which  I  taught  her?  10. 
Although  he  had  seen  me  come  into  the  house,  he  made 
(perf.)  me  wait  for  (auf.  dec.)  him  more  than  an  hour,  and 
his  servant  did  (per/.)  not  even  ask  (fjeiften)  me  to  sit 
[down],  ii.  May  I  ask  him  whether  I  may  have  his  pen? 
12.  We  have  never  been  allowed  to  speak  English  in  our  Ger- 
man lessons. 

1  "must  not,"  in  the  sense  of,  "it  is  not  allowed"  =  nid)t  biirfen;  cf.  Ex. 
XXVI,  A.  a.,  Note  2.  2  iuhen,  referring  to  fut.  or  pres.,  or  in  the  sense  of 
•whenever  =  ttteitn ;  ref.  to  past  =  dl§  j  interrogative  =  Itmnn. 


430 


EXERCISES. 


EXERCISE  XXVL  B. 

(a)  i.  99£an  mufs  nidjt  reiser  fdjeinen  tootten,  at§  man  ift.     2. 
$)er  greunb  §eigt  mir,  ft)a§  id)  tann,  her  geinb,  ttm3  id)  fott. 

3.  9ftein  9?adE)bar  tyat  fd)on  e in  §au3  fcerfanfen  miiffen,  unb  ttenn 
bie  3eiten  ni$t  beffer  toerben,  mug  er  ba§  anbere  and)  berfaufen. 

4.  Sftetn  Scorer  fjat  mir  fagen  laffen,  ba£  er  tntr  fjeute  !eine  (Stunbe1 
geben  fbnne,  ba  er  fid)  erfaltet  Ijabe  nnb  einige  3^age  §u  §aufe 
bleiben  miiffe.     5.  3^  ntiiSte  litgen,  tuenn  id)  bef)auptete,2  ba§  id^ 
i§n  ba§  }e  fjatte8  fagen  ^oren.     6.  S)er  [§err]  ^aftor  3ager  ptte 
petite  abenb  im  SCRufeum  t)or  einer  grofsen  ^efeUfdjaft  fprei^en 
fatten,  aber  fein  ^trgt  Ijat  i^n  ni(i)t  getaffen.     7.  ©ottteft  bu  bie 
Dftedjmmg  nii^t  fijon  am  erften  be£  le^ten  9Konat§  be5a^lt  ^aben? 
8.  ®ar4  t)iele§  !ann,  nnb  mandijeS  mu§  gefdje^en,  tua§  man  mit 
Shorten  gar  nti^t  fagen  mag  (ttriH),  nod^  barf.     9.  g()r  fottt  nid^t 
fo  t)iel  Sarm5  madden,  ^inber,  bcnn  bie  $)ame  im  untern  ©toe!  foil 
fjeute  fe^r  !ran!  fein.     10.  SDein  greunb  fott  atte§  beffer  miffen 
tnotten,  al§  anbere;  ift  ba§  mirflii^  fo?  u.  S^ein  9Kenfd^  fottte 
ba§  Unmogtidt)e6  erjtningen7  tnotten.    12.  SBenn  bu  ben  ^rief  Ijeute 
nod)  fcfyreiben  iDtttft,  unb  luenn  er  fyeitte  nod^  §ur  ^)3oft  fott,  toirft 
bu  batb  beginnen  miiffen.     13.  28o  la'gt  (laffeft)  bn  beine  ®ieiber 
madden,  ^5aut?  ©ett  einigen  3af)ren  ^abe  i(^  fie  in.9?ett>  gor!  madden 
laffen,  aber  in  ber  3u?unft  roitt  id^  fie  ()ier  ma^en  laffen.     14.  C£r 
n)itt  e§  mir  fd)on  bor  einem  9[Ronat  gefagt  Ijaben,  aber  id)  fann  mti^ 
ni(^t  erinnern.8     15.  SJieine  @d)tt)efter  ^at  etn  beutfd)e§  2ieb  fingen 
tuotten,  aber  [e§]  I)at  fie  niemanb  begletten  Ibnnen.     16.  Qd^  t)abe 
oft  meinem  greunbe  §enri,  ber  ein  granjofe  ift,  feine  beutfdt)e 
Arbeit  ma^en  fjetfen,  mofiir  er  midf)  Jranjoftf^  fpred^en  te^rte. 

1bte  ©tunbe,  hour,  lesson.  2  6et)aupten,  contend,  assert.  3see  Ex.  XXVI, 
A.  a.,  Note  3.  4gar,  very,  quite.  5  ber  Stirm,  noise.  6unmbgltd),  adj.,  im- 
possible. 7  er^otngen,  force.  8  fid)  erinnern,  remember. 

(b)  i.  These   boys  will  have  to  work  more  diligently,  if 
they  want  to  get  (come)  into  the  class  which  is-to  read  Schil- 
ler next  fall.     2.   My  father  was  just  about-to  take  a  drive ; 
but  when  he  saw  me  coming  (inf.),  he  quickly  had  the  car- 


EXERCISES.  431 

riage  stopped  and  I  had  [to  go]  with  him.  3.  Do  you  mean 
to  tell  me  that  you  would  have  been1  compelled  to  pay  the 
bill  for  your  son,  if  you  had  not  wanted-to  ?  Yes,  that  is  just 
what  I  meant  to  say.  4.  My  mother  sent  me  word  to  come 
(that  I  should  come)  home,  because  she  wanted2  [to  go]  to 
the  doctor.  5.  King  August  of  Saxony  is  said  to  have  been 
so  strong  that  he  could  break  a  horse-shoe8  with  his  (the) 
hand.  6.  I  know,  I  ought  to  have  written  you  this  long  ago,4 
and  I  have  always  intended  (wanted)  [to  do]  it,  but  I  have 
never  been  able  to  find  (the)  time.  7.  Your  uncle  must  be 
very  sick.  I  hear  they  have  sent  for  his  son,  and  my  wife 
has  seen  the  physician  go  to  (into)  the  house  three  times 
to-day.  8.  Have  you  never  heard  me  say  that  you  must  not 
write  your  German  exercises  with  pencil?  I  do  not  like  it. 

9.  No  boy  ought  to   do   anything  that  (ftm§)   he  would   not 
be  willing  (subj.  imp/.),  or  would  not  dare,  to  tell  his  mother. 

10.  Every  man    ought   to   be  willing    to   do  his  duty,  but  I 
have  very  often  heard  men  say,  who  claim  to  know  (it),  that 
(the)  most  people  do  only  (that)  what  they  have-to. 

1  See  Ex.  XXVI,  A. «.,  Note  3.  2  subj.  pres.  in  indirect  speech.  3  horse- 
shoe, ba3  £wfcifen.  4  long  ago,  fdion  lunge. 

EXERCISE  XXVIL 

(a)  i.  2H3  ®nabe  bin  id)  fefjr  oft  roegen  enter  <Sad)e  getabeft 
roorben,  bte  fcon  etnent  cmbern  getan  toorben  ft>ar.  2.  28enn  e§ 
gettmnfcfjt  mirb,  ttnrb  Sfnten  bte  SSare1  in§  §au§  gefdjtcft  roerben, 
fonft  bleibt  fie  rjier,  bi£  fte  gefjolt2  tturb.  3.  SSenn  bte  9^ed)nung 
nod)  mcrjt  be§a{)tt  ift,  futt  fte  fofort  be^a^lt  toerben.  4.  SSar  bte 
£iir  fcfyon  gefdjtoffen,'  al§  (Ste  ttad)  §aufe  famen,  ober  tt)urbe  fte 
erft  f pater  gefcrjloffert?  5.  SSon  anbern  9Kenfdjen  gead^tet  unb  gettebt 
511  toerben,  ift  fiir  bie  tnetften  9ftenfd)en  ba§  gro^te  (SliicE  auf  (Srbert. 
6.  ©§  njtrb  be^auptet,  ba§  ©(abftone,  obtno()t  man  i^n  (5ngfanb§ 
gro^en  3l(ten  nannte,  t)on  tueten  ebenfo  gef)a§t  noorben  fet,  tt)ie 
er  bon  anbern  getiebt  tourbe.  7.  SSenn  ber  getnb  fofort  in  ber 
erften  (Sc^la^t  gefd)(agen  luitrbe,  miirbe  ber  ^rteg  fefjr  batb  be* 


432  EXERCISES. 

enbigt3  fein.  8.  @§  ttmrbe  in  ber  SSelt  nid)t  fo  biet  ®roJ3e§  getan 
toorben  fein,  toenn  ber  SOtefd)  nicfjt  oft  burd)  bte  9?ot  ba£u  ge-^ttmngen 
toorben  ttmre,  9.  Sftan  I)at  mid)  oft  getabelt,  roeil  id)  fritter  fo 
fd)led()t  fcfyrieb,  aber  man  fjat  [e§]  mid)  in  ber  3ugenb  ntd()t  beffer 
gelefjrt.  10.  $)ie  $Renfd)en  laffen  fid)  an  itjren  SSerfen  beffer  er= 
lennen  al§  an  tfyren  SSorten.  n.  @§  Ici^t  fid)  nid)t£  fd^roerer 
ertragen,4  al§  eine  D^ei^e5  oon  guten  S^agen.  1 2.  SSenn  i^m  gegtaubt 
nnirbe,  [foj  triirbe  i^m  auc^  gel)olfen  merben,  aber  e§  rotrb  ifjm  nid^t 
geglaubt.  13.  @§  liefj  fid^  natiirltd^6  ni^t  benjetfen,7  ba^  i^m 
ettoa§  bariiber  gefagt  nmrbe,  aber  man  traute  i^m  nid)t  mel)r. 

1bteSSare,  ware,  goods.  2^olen,  to  fetch,  send  for.  3  fieenbtgen,  to  finish- 
4  ertrogen,  to  bear.  5  bte  ^etfje,  series,  row.  6  natiirlid),  adv.,  naturally,  of 
course.  7  betoeijen,  to  pro-ve. 

(b)  i.  The  Cathedral  of  Cologne  is  now  finished  ;  it  was 
finished  by  Emperor  William  I.  (the  first)  of  Germany.  2. 
Rome  was  not  built  (perf.)  in  one  day.  3.  Modern  lan- 
guages are  taught  more  nowadays  than  they  were  taught 
twenty  years  ago.  4.  The  banks  of  this  town  were  closed 
yesterday;  they  close  (pass.)  on  every  legal1  holiday.  5. 
If  the  Moors2  had  not  been  defeated  (fd)Iagen)  by  Charles 
Martel,  [the]  whole  [of]  Europe  would  perhaps  have  been 
conquered  by  them.  6.  Much  has  been  said  by  my  honored 
and  esteemed  friend  that  must  be  denied  by  me,  because  it 
cannot  (fid)  laffen)  be  proved.  7.  After  the  war  is  finished, 
the  soldiers  will  be  dismissed.  8.  If  to  the  study  of  modern 
languages  as  much  time  were  given  as  formerly  was  given  to 
the  ancient  [languages],  better  results  would  be  reached.  9. 
I  have  been  told3  that  he  was  taken  (per/,  of  fjatten)  for  a 
great  scholar,  until  he  was  heard3  to  speak  before  the  literary 
society.  10.  In  that  book  [there]  are  found4  very  many 
errors  which  cannot4  be  explained,  n.  The  German  lan- 
guage is  more  easily  written4  than  the  English,  for  it  is  writ- 
ten as  it  is  spoken.  12.  He  was  given5  a  large  sum  [of] 
money  which  he  returned  (sent  back)  with  the  words,  that 
he  could  not  be  bought.4 

1  legal,  flefefcltdj.  2Moor,  ber  Sftaure.  8see  Less.  XXVII,  274,  i.  4see 
Less.  XXVII,  274,  2.  5see  Less.  XXVII,  275. 


EXERCISES.  433 

EXERCISE  XXVIII. 

i.  My  father  informed  (perf.}  me  that  he  inspected  (perf. 
subj.)  a  new  house  outside  of  the  city  in  order  to  buy  it,  but 
whether  [it  is]  above  or  below  the  same,  he  did  not  say 
(perf.).  2.  I  have  heard  that  formerly  all  [the]  houses  both 
on  this  and  the  other  side  of  the  street  (have)  belonged  to 
your  family.  3.  He  has  insulted  me  often;  but  on  account  of 
our  old  friendship  and  for  his  parents'  sake,  I  have  always 
pardoned  him.  4.  By  dint  of  energy1  and  zeal  (diligence) 
.more  is  attained2  in  this  world  than  by  dint  of  genius8  alone. 
5.  On  account  of  (fyalber)  the  bad  weather,  I  had  to  stay  in- 
doors (within  the  house)  during  the  last  two  weeks.  6.  Ac- 
cording to  the  (§ufolge)  latest  reports4  my  brother  has  been 
elected,  in  spite  of  the  attacks  of  the  newspapers,  and  not- 
withstanding the  fact  that  he  was  nominated5  against  the 
wishes  of  his  party.6  7.  Conformably  to  the  law,  by  virtue 
of  which  you  were  dismissed,  he  cannot  hold7  his  office 
longer.  8.  Besides  him  and  his  wife,  only  my  brother  accom- 
panied (perf.)  me  as  far  as  the  steamer.  9.  During  the  last 
night  the  large  stable,  opposite  the  market  and  not  far  from 
the  church,  burned  down8  (together)  with  all  its  horses  and 
wagons.  10.  In  order  to  please  me  (dat.),  the  child  often 
told  me  that  next-to  his  mother  he  loved  (pres.  subj.)  me  best 
(am  beften). 

1  energy,  bte  Gnergte'.  2  attain,  erretdjen.  3  genius,  ba§  ©erne'.  4  report, 
ber  93erid)t.  5  nominate,  nomtnteren.  6  party,  bte  Cartel'.  7  hold  an  office, 
ein  Slmt  befleiben.  8  burn  down,  betbrennen. 

EXERCISE  XXIX. 

i.  I  asked  him  to  copy  this  letter  once  more,  because  it 
did  not  look  (au£fel)en)  well.  2.  His  family  spent  (passed) 
the  whole  winter  in  the  city,  and  spent  more  money  in  (an) 
one  day  than  he  took-in  in  (in)  a  whole  week.  3.  My 
brother  telegraphed  me:  "  Come-for1  me  (dat.).  I  departed 
(perf.)  yesterday  by  (with)  the  twelve  o'clock  train,  and 
shall  arrive  to-morrow,  toward  evening."  4.  If  you  wish  to 


434  EXERCISES. 

come-along,  we  shall  call  for2  you,  for  it  is  pleasanter  to 
travel  together.  5.  It  seems3  to  me  that  (al§  ob)  you  look 
(subj.)  worse  now  than  before  you  began  to  go  out  again.  6. 
At  what  time  does  the  train  leave,  and  when  will  it  arrive 
(pres.)  in  Chicago?  7.  We  dressed  more  quickly  than  they 
undressed.  8.  When[ever]  you  meet4  a  lady  whom  you 
know  on  the  street,  take-off  your  hat,  Karl;  it  does  rjot  look 
well  for  a  young  gentleman  to  keep  (if  he  keep)  it  on.5  9. 
A  good  position  was  offered  (to)  your  son  in  New  York,  but 
he  did  not  accept  it,  because  he  prefers  [it]  to  stay  with  (bet) 
us.  10.  Was  it  an  out6-going  or  an  in7-coming  train  that 
fell8  [down]  into  the  river? 

1  come-for,  entgegenfommen.  2  call  for,  abljolen.  3  seem,  borfommen. 
4  meet,  antreffen.  5  keep  on,  aufbefjalten.  6  offer,  an&ieten.  "  out  —  in 
fjtnauS  —  fjcrein.  8  fall  down,  f)inein=  or  fywunterfaUen. 

EXERCISE  XXX. 

i.  The  teacher  asked  the  pupils  to  rewrite  the  poem  and 
then  to  paraphrase  it,  but  they  (have)  misunderstood1  him;  for 
some  only  paraphrased  it  and  others  only  rewrote  it.  2.  The 
man  who  (has)  ferried  us  across  is  a  scholar;  he  (has)  trans- 
lated a  German  book  into  (the)  English.  3.  I  don't  think 
(gicmOc)  that  William  has  repeated  his  lessons  for  to-day,  for 
he  has  not  yet  brought  back  the  book  which  he  left  at  my 
house  last  week.  4.  Is  not  the  rain  running  through  here  ? 
Please,  hold  this  bucket2  under,  until  I  have  mended3  the 
roof.  5.  When  [ever]  I  am  in  my  country-house,  I  rise  very 
early;  after  (the)  breakfast  I  hastily  run  through4  the  papers, 
and  then  I  go  out  into  the  open  (fresh)  air,  roam-about 
through  field  and  forest  the  whole  day,  and  in  the  evening  I 
entertain  my  friends  and  neighbors.  6.  In  many  European 
cities  the  second  stories  (sing.}  of  old  houses  project  (sing.). 
7.  Every  few5  years  this  sickness  makes  its  round  (goes 
round),  but  almost  in  all  cases  it  is  easily  overcome.  8. 
After  the  hunters  had  caught  the  bear,  they  bound  him,  laid 
him  over  on  his  back,  pierced6  his  nose  and  pulled  a  ring 
through.  9.  He  is  a  degenerate  boy;  he  frequently  runs  off, 
deceives  his  parents  where  he  can,  and  evades  all  (every) 


EXERCISES.  435 

serious7  work.  10.  The  general  has  disapproved  [of]  the 
action  of  the  officer,  not  only  because  he  (had)  abused  his 
power,  but  also  because  he  (has)  disregarded  (despised)  his 
command,  n.  He  considers  everything  too  long  and  accom- 
plishes, therefore,  very  little.  12.  He  reserved  for  himself 
the  right  to  oppose  (himself  to)  my  views;  I  acknowledged 
his  right,  but  supposed  that  I  had  (subj.)  the  same. 

>  misunderstand,  mtfeberftefjen.  2  bucket,  bef  (Sinter.  3mend,  au§6effern. 
4  run  hastily  through,  burrfjflie'gen.  5  every  few,  atfe  poor.  6  pierce,  burd)= 
fte'djen.  7  serious,  ernft. 

EXERCISE  XXXL 

i.  Last  week  we  had  the  most  peculiar1  weather:  on  Mon- 
day it  was  ( perf. )  snowing  and  freezing ;  on  Wednesday  it 
lightened,  thundered  and  hailed,  and  [ever]  since  Thursday 
it  has  been  (is)  raining  without  interruption.2  2.  Never  eat 
unless3  you  are  hungry,  and  never  drink  unless  you  are 
thirsty.  3.  What  is  the  matter  with  her  (what  ails  her)?  she 
does  not  look  well.  She  says4  she  does  not  feel  (subj.)  well. 
4.  Was  there  (perf.)  not  a  knock  at  the  door?  No,  but 
there  is  a  ring.  5.  My  father  always  felt  afraid  to  go  across 
a  narrow  bridge,  because  he  always  felt  (was)  dizzy.  6.  It 
is  [a  matter]  of  course  that  we  shall  undertake  it,  but  it  is  a 
great  (fefyr)  question  whether  we  shall  succeed.  7.  I  often 
tell  (to)  my  pupil  [that]  there  are  (subj.)*  no  mistakes  which 
he  does  not  make  (subj.),  but  this  time  there  is  not  a  single 
[one]  in  his  exercise.  8.  I  am  very  sorry  to  hear  that  your 
father  has  taken  (fallen)  sick  again,  especially5  since  he  has 
only  just6  recovered  from  a  serious  illness.  9.  I  never 
spent  (perf.)  a  pleasanter  summer  than  (in)  this  year;  I 
walked  (perf.  laufen)  more,  rode  and  drove  more,  and  rowed 
and  sailed  more  than  for  (feit)  years,  and  I  should  have  re- 
mained longer,  if  the  misfortune  had  not  occurred 7-to  my 
friend  who  was  with  me.  10.  Three  weeks  ago  we  left8  (perf., 
from)  Berlin;  as  far  as  (MS  nad))  Cologne  we  rode  on  (with) 


436  EXERCISES. 

the  railroad ;  from  Cologne  we  drove  over  Bonn  to  Coblenz, 
and  then  we  walked  together  to  Bingen. 

1  peculiar,  fonberbar,  etgentiimltclj.  2  interruption,  bte  Hnterbredjurtg. 
3  unless,  aitfcer,  takes  normal  order.  4  If  the  conjunction  bdfe  is  omitted 
the  subordinate  clause  takes  normal  order.  5especially>  befonber.3.  6only 
just,  gerabe  eben.  7  occur,  begegnen.  8  leave,  abreifen. 


EXERCISE  XXXIL 

NUMBER,  TIME,  DATE,  WEIGHT  AND  MEASURE. 

i.  One  [thing]  I  tell  you;  I  value  (citizen)  more  the  judg- 
ment of  one  man  whom  I  know  than  that  of  hundreds  or 
thousands  whom  I  don't  know.  2.  How  many  days  has  the 
month  of  December,  and  on  what-day-of-the-month  is  Christ- 
mas ?  3.  At  what  time  did  you  rise  this  morning  ?  We  rose 
at  four,  breakfasted  at  half  past  four,  left  the  hotel  at  ten 
minutes  to  five  and  reached  the  top  of  the  mountain  at  a 
quarter  to  ten,  where  we  rested1  [for]  about  an  hour  and  a 
half.  4.  I  have  told  you  that  many  times  already ;  must  I 
tell  you  the  same  [thing]  a  dozen  times  a  (the)  day?  5. 
Do  you  know  what-day-of-the-month  it  is  to-day?  6.  Yes,  it 
is  (we  have)  to-day  the  2Qth  of  February  —  a  date  which 
comes  only  once  every  (atte,  //.)  four  years.  7.  I  meet  here 
all-kinds-of  people,  but  all  are  of  (gen.)  one  (kind-of)  opinion, 
namely,2  that  they  pay  in  this  hotel  the  double  or  triple  of 
(that)  what  they  ought  to  pay.  8.  My  youngest  brother  is 
only  fifteen  years  and  seven  months  old,  but  he  is  already 
five  feet  and  six  inches3  tall.  9.  I  must  walk  every  day  an 
hour  and  three  quarters  to  and  from  (the)  school,  because 
the  schoolhouse  lies  two-and-a-half  miles  from  my  house.  10. 
This  box,4  which  has  cost  me  forty-two  marks5  and  sixty-six 
pfennigs,6  contains  one  dozen  bottles  of  wine,  two  dozen  new 
glasses,  ten  pounds  of  sugar,  two  pairs  of  shoes,  ten  yards  of 
cloth  and  five  quires  of  paper,  n.  This  is  the  end  of  the 
thirty-second  and  last  exercise.  I  finish  it  on  the  —  day  of 
— ,  19 — ,  at — o'clock.7 

1rest,  rufjen.  2  namely,  namltd).  8inch,  ber  3ott.  4box,  bte  ®tfte. 
B  mark  (coin),  bie  3ftarf.  6  pfennig,  ber  pfennig.  7  Write  date  in  yvords. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 
BERKELEY 


Return  to  desk  from  which  borrowed. 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


NOV  26  194 
22!an'53H* 


LD  21-100m-9,'47(A5702sl6)476 


YB  01488 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


